Gate Question Bank PDF

SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK
for
Electrical Engineering
By
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK Contents
Contents
Subject Name Topic Name Page No.
#1. Mathematics 1-148
1 Linear Algebra 1 – 28
2 Probability & Distribution 29 – 57
3 Numerical Methods 58 – 73
4 Calculus 74 – 112
5 Differential Equations 113 – 131
6 Complex Variables 132 – 143
7 Laplace Transform 144 – 148
#2. Network Theory 149 – 216

8 Network Solution Methodology 149 – 167
Transient/Steady State Analysis of RLC Circuits to
9 168 – 185
DC Input
10 Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis 186 – 203
12 Two Port Networks 207 – 214
13 Network Topology 215 – 216
#3. Signals & systems 217 – 275

14 Introduction to Signals & Systems 217 – 223
15 Linear Time Invariant (LTI) systems 224 – 238
16 Fourier Representation of Signals 239 – 250
17 Z-Transform 251 – 256
Frequency response of LTI systems and
19 262 – 275
Diversified Topics
#4. Control Systems 276 – 340

20 Basics of Control System 276 – 282
21 Time Domain Analysis 283 – 294
22 Stability & Routh Hurwitz Criterion 295 – 300
23 Root Locus Technique 301 – 308
24 Frequency Response Analysis using Nyquist plot 309 – 316
25 Frequency Response Analysis using Bode Plot 317 – 322
26 Compensators & Controllers 323 – 329
27 State Variable Analysis 330 – 340
#5. Analog Circuits 341 – 421

28 Diode Circuits - Analysis and Application 341 – 353
29 AC & DC Biasing-BJT and FET 354 – 363
30 Small Signal Modeling Of BJT and FET 364 – 372
31 BJT and JFET Frequency Response 373 – 375
32 Feedback and Oscillator Circuits 376 – 381
33 Operational Amplifiers and Its Applications 382 – 420
34 Power Amplifiers 421
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page I
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK Contents
#6. Digital Circuits 422 – 472

35 Number Systems & Code Conversions 422 – 424
36 Boolean Algebra & Karnaugh Maps 425 – 430
37 Logic Gates 431 – 435
38 Logic Gate Families 436 – 438
39 Combinational and Sequential Digital Circuits 439 – 456
40 AD/DA Convertor 457 – 462
41 Semiconductor Memory 463 – 464
42 Introduction to Microprocessors 465 – 472
#7. EMT 473 – 483

43 Electromagnetic Field 473 – 483
#8. Measurement 484 – 516

44 Basics of Measurements and Error Analysis 484 – 487
45 Measurements of Basic Electrical Quantities 1 488 – 498
46 Measurements of Basic Electrical Quantities 2 499 – 503
47 Electronic Measuring Instruments 1 504 – 509
48 Electronic Measuring Instruments 2 510 – 516
#9. Power Systems 517 – 553

49 Transmission and Distribution 517 – 526
50 Economics of Power Generation 527 – 532
51 Symmetrical Components & Faults Calculations 533 – 544
52 Power System Stability 545 – 548
53 Protection & Circuit Breakers 549 – 552
54 Generating Stations 553
#10. Power Electronics 554 – 585

55 Basics of Power Semiconductor Devices 554 – 559
56 Phase Controlled Rectifier 560 – 570
57 Choppers 571 – 575
58 Inverters 576 – 581
59 AC Voltage Regulators and Cycloconverters 582
60 Applications of Power Electronics 583 – 585
#11. Electrical Machines 586 - 621

61 Transformer 586 – 596
62 Induction Motor 597 – 605
63 D.C. Machine 606 – 611
64 Synchronous Machine 612 – 618
Principles of Electro Mechanical Energy
65 619 – 620
Conversion
66 Special Machines 621
th th th
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page II
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics
Linear Algebra
ME – 2005 5. Match the items in columns I and II.
1. Which one of the following is an Column I Column II
P. Singular 1. Determinant is not
Eigenvector of the matrix[ ]? matrix defined
Q. Non-square 2. Determinant is
matrix always one
R. Real 3. Determinant is
(A) [ ] (C) [ ] symmetric zero
matrix
S. Orthogonal 4. Eigen values are
matrix always real
(B) [ ] (D) [ ] 5. Eigen values are
not defined
(A) P - 3 Q - 1 R - 4 S - 2
(B) P - 2 Q - 3 R - 4 S - 1
2. A is a 3 4 real matrix and Ax=B is an (C) P - 3 Q - 2 R - 5 S - 4
inconsistent system of equations. The (D) P - 3 Q - 4 R - 2 S - 1
highest possible rank of A is
(A) 1 (C) 3 ME – 2007
(B) 2 (D) 4 6. The number of linearly independent
Eigenvectors of 0 1 is
ME – 2006
3. Multiplication of matrices E and F is G. (A) 0 (C) 2
Matrices E and G are (B) 1 (D) Infinite
os sin 7. If a square matrix A is real and symmetric,
E [ sin os ] and
then the Eigenvalues
(A) are always real
G [ ]. What is the matrix F? (B) are always real and positive
(C) are always real and non-negative
os sin (D) occur in complex conjugate pairs
(A) [ sin os ]
ME – 2008
sin os
(B) [ os sin ] 8. The Eigenvectors of the matrix 0 1 are
os sin written in the form 0 1 and 0 1. What is

(C) [ sin os ]
a + b?
sin os (A) 0 (C) 1
(D) [ os sin ] (B) 1/2 (D) 2
4. Eigen values of a matrix 9. The matrix [ ] has one Eigenvalue

p
S 0 1are 5 and 1. What are the
equal to 3. The sum of the other two
Eigenvalues of the matrix = SS? Eigenvalues is
(A) 1 and 25 (C) 5 and 1 (A) p (C) p – 2
(B) 6 and 4 (D) 2 and 10 (B) p – 1 (D) p – 3
th th th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750,  info@thegateacademy.com © Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com Page 1
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. For what value of a, if any, will the ME – 2012

following system of equations in x, y and z 15. For the matrix A=0 1 , one of the
have a solution
x y normalized Eigenvectors is given as
x y z
x y z
(A) (√ ) (C) (√ )
√
(A) Any real number
(B) 0
(C) 1
(B) (√ ) (D) ( )
√ √
(D) There is no such value
16. x + 2y + z =4
ME – 2009
2x + y + 2z =5
x–y+z=1
11. For a matrix,M- * +, the transpose
x The system of algebraic equations given
above has
of the matrix is equal to the inverse of the
(A) a unique algebraic equation of x = 1,
matrix ,M- ,M- . The value of x is
y = 1 and z = 1
given by
(B) only the two solutions of ( x = 1,
(A) ( ) (C) ⁄
y = 1, z = 1) and ( x = 2, y = 1, z = 0)
(B) ( ⁄ ) (D) ⁄
(C) infinite number of solutions.
ME – 2010 (D) No feasible solution.
12. One of the Eigenvectors of the matrix
ME – 2013
0 1 is 17. The Eigenvalues of a symmetric matrix
are all
(A) 2 3 (C) 2 3
(A) Complex with non –zero positive
(B) 2 3 (D) 2 3 imaginary part.
(B) Complex with non – zero negative
ME – 2011 imaginary part.
13. Consider the following system of (C) Real
equations: (D) Pure imaginary.
x x x
x x 18. Choose correct set of functions, which are
x x linearly dependent.
The system has (A) sin x sin x n os x
(A) A unique solution (B) os x sin x n t n x
(B) No solution (C) os x sin x n os x
(C) Infinite number of solutions (D) os x sin x n os x
(D) Five solutions ME – 2014
14. Eigen values of a real symmetric matrix 19. Given that the determinant of the matrix
are always
[ ] is 12 , the determinant of
(A) Positive (C) Negative
(B) Real (D) Complex
the matrix [ ] is
(A) (B) (C) (D)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
20. One of the Eigenvectors of the matrix 2. Consider a non-homogeneous system of

0 1 is linear equations representing
mathematically an over-determined
(A) {– } (C) 2 3 system. Such a system will be
(A) consistent having a unique solution
(B) {– } (D) 2 3
(B) consistent having many solutions
(C) inconsistent having a unique solution
21. Consider a 3×3 real symmetric matrix S (D) inconsistent having no solution
such that two of its Eigenvalues are
with respective Eigenvectors 3. Consider the matrices , - , - and
x y
, - . The order of , ( ) - will be
[x ] [y ] If then x y + x y +x y
x y (A) (2 × 2) (C) (4 × 3)
(B) (3 × 3 (D) (3 × 4
equals
(A) a (C) ab
CE – 2006
(B) b (D) 0
4. Solution for the system defined by the set
22. Which one of the following equations is a of equations 4y + 3z = 8; 2x – z = 2 and
correct identity for arbitrary 3×3 real 3x + 2y = 5 is
matrices P, Q and R? (A) x = 0; y =1; z = ⁄
(A) ( ) (B) x = 0; y = ⁄ ; z = 2
(B) ( ) (C) x = 1; y = ⁄ ; z = 2
(C) et ( ) et et (D) non – existent
(D) ( )
5. For the given matrix A = [ ],
CE – 2005
1. Consider the system of equations ( ) one of the Eigen values is 3. The other two
( ) ( ) where is s l r Let Eigen values are
( ) e n Eigen -pair of an Eigenvalue (A) (C)
and its corresponding Eigenvector for (B) (D)
real matrix A. Let I be a (n × n) unit
matrix. Which one of the following CE – 2007
statement is NOT correct? 6. The minimum and the maximum
(A) For a homogeneous n × n system of
Eigenvalue of the matrix [ ]are 2
linear equations,(A ) X = 0 having
a nontrivial solution the rank of and 6, respectively. What is the other
(A ) is less than n. Eigenvalue?
(B) For matrix , m being a positive (A) (C)
integer, ( ) will be the Eigen - (B) (D)
pair for all i.
7. For what values of and the following
(C) If = then | | = 1 for all i.
simultaneous equations have an infinite
(D) If = A then is real for all i.
of solutions?
X + Y + Z = 5; X + 3Y + 3Z = 9;
X+2Y+ Z
(A) 2, 7 (C) 8, 3
(B) 3, 8 (D) 7, 2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
i i
8. The inverse of the m trix 0 1 is 14. The inverse of the matrix 0 1
i i
(A) 0 1 (C) 0 1 is
( ) i i
(B) 0 1 (D) 0 1 0 1
i i
i i
( ) 0 1
CE – 2008 i i
9. The product of matrices ( ) is ( ) i i
0 1
i i
(A) (C)
i i
(B) (D) PQ ( ) 0 1
i i
10. The Eigenvalue of the matrix
CE – 2012
[P] = 0 1 are
15. The Eigenvalues of matrix 0 1 are
(A) and 8 (C) n
(A) 2.42 and 6.86
(B) and 5 (D) n
(B) 3.48 and 13.53
11. The following simultaneous equation (C) 4.70 and 6.86
x+y+z=3 (D) 6.86 and 9.50
x + 2y + 3z = 4
x + 4y + kz = 6 CE – 2013
will NOT have a unique solution for k 16. There is no value of x that can
equal to simultaneously satisfy both the given
(A) 0 (C) 6 equations. Therefore, find the ‘le st
(B) 5 (D) 7 squares error’ solution to the two
equations, i.e., find the value of x that
CE – 2009 minimizes the sum of squares of the
12. A square matrix B is skew-symmetric if errors in the two equations.
(A) (C) 2x = 3 and 4x = 1
(B) (D)
17. What is the minimum number of
CE – 2011 multiplications involved in computing the
13. [A] is square matrix which is neither matrix product PQR? Matrix P has 4 rows
symmetric nor skew-symmetric and , - and 2 columns, matrix Q has 2 rows and
is its transpose. The sum and difference of 4 columns, and matrix R has 4 rows and 1
these matrices are defined as column. __________
[S] = [A] + , - and [D] = [A] , - ,
CE – 2014
respectively. Which of the following
statements is TRUE? 18. Given the matrices J = [ ] n
(A) Both [S] and [D] are symmetric
(B) Both [S] and [D] are skew-symmetric
(C) [S] is skew-symmetric and [D] is K [ ], the product K JK is
symmetric
(D) [S] is symmetric and [D] is skew
19. The sum of Eigenvalues of the matrix, [M]
symmetric
is, where [M] = [ ]
(A) 915 (C) 1640

(B) 1355 (D) 2180
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. Let A be a 4x4 matrix with Eigenvalues

20. The determinant of matrix [ ] –5, –2, 1, 4. Which of the following is an
I
Eigenvalue of 0 1, where I is the 4x4
I
is ____________ identity matrix?
(A) (C)
21. The rank of the matrix (B) (D)
[ ] is ________________ CS – 2007
5. Consider the set of (column) vectors
defined by X={xR3 x1+x2+x3=0, where
CS – 2005
XT =[x1, x2, x3]T }. Which of the following is
1. Consider the following system of
TRUE?
equations in three real
(A) {[1, 1, 0]T, [1, 0, 1]T} is a basis for
variables x x n x
the subspace X.
x x x
(B) {[1, 1, 0]T, [1, 0, 1]T} is a linearly
x x x
independent set, but it does not span
x x x
X and therefore, is not a basis of X.
This system of equation has
(C) X is not the subspace for R3
(A) no solution
(D) None of the above
(B) a unique solution
(C) more than one but a finite number of
CS – 2008
solutions
6. The following system of
(D) an infinite number of solutions
x x x
x x x
2. What are the Eigenvalues of the following
x x x
2 2 matrix?
Has unique solution. The only possible
0 1 value (s) for is/ are
(A) n (C) n (A) 0
(B) n (D) n (B) either 0 or 1
(C) one of 0,1, 1
CS – 2006 (D) any real number except 5
3. F is an n x n real matrix. b is an n real
vector. Suppose there are two nx1
7. How many of the following matrices have
vectors, u and v such that u  v , and
an Eigenvalue 1?
Fu=b, Fv=b. Which one of the following
statement is false? 0 1 0 1 0 1 n 0 1
(A) Determinant of F is zero (A) One (C) three
(B) There are infinite number of (B) two (D) four
solutions to Fx=b
CS – 2010
(C) There is an x  0 such that Fx=0
8. Consider the following matrix
(D) F must have two identical rows
A=[ ]
x y
If the Eigen values of A are 4 and 8, then
(A) x = 4, y = 10 (C) x = 3, y = 9
(B) x = 5, y = 8 (D) x = 4, y = 10
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CS – 2011 13. The value of the dot product of the

9. Consider the matrix as given below Eigenvectors corresponding to any pair of
different Eigenvalues of a 4-by-4
[ ] symmetric positive definite matrix is
__________.
Which one of the following options
provides the CORRECT values of the
14. If the matrix A is such that
Eigenvalues of the matrix?
(A) 1, 4, 3 (C) 7, 3, 2 [ ], -
(B) 3, 7, 3 (D) 1, 2, 3
Then the determinant of A is equal to
CS – 2012 __________.
10. Let A be the 2 2 matrix with elements
and . 15. The product of the non – zero Eigenvalues
Then the Eigenvalues of the matrix of the matrix
are
(A) 1024 and
(B) 1024√ and √ is __________.
(C) √ n √ [ ]
(D) √ n √
16. Which one of the following statements is
CS – 2013
TRUE about every n n matrix with only
11. Which one of the following does NOT
real eigenvalues?
x x
equal [ ] (A) If the trace of the matrix is positive
y y
and the determinant of the matrix is
z z
x(x ) x negative, at least one of its
(A) | y(y ) y | eigenvalues is negative.
z(z ) z (B) If the trace of the matrix is positive,
x x all its eigenvalues are positive.
(B) | y y | (C) If the determinant of the matrix is
z z positive, all its eigenvalues are
x y x y positive.
(C) | y z y z | (D) If the product of the trace and
z z determinant of the matrix is positive,
x y x y all its eigenvalues are positive.
(D) | y z y z |
z z ECE – 2005
1. Given an orthogonal matrix
CS – 2014
12. Consider the following system of A= [ ]. , - is
equations:
x y
⁄
x z
⁄
x y z (A) [ ]
⁄
x y z ⁄
The number of solutions for this system is
__________.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
⁄
⁄ 6. The rank of the matrix [ ]
(B) [ ]
⁄
⁄ (A) 0 (C) 2
(B) 1 (D) 3
(C) [ ]
ECE – 2007
7. It is given that X1 , X2 …… M are M non-
⁄
zero, orthogonal vectors. The dimension
⁄
(D) [ ] of the vector space spanned by the 2M
⁄
⁄ vector X1 , X2 … XM , X1 , X2 … XM is
(A) 2M
⁄ (B) M+1
2. Let, A=0 1 and = 0 1.
(C) M
Then (a + b)=
(D) dependent on the choice of X1 , X2 …
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄ XM.
3. Given the matrix 0 1 the ECE – 2008

8. The system of linear equations
Eigenvector is
4x + 2y = 7, 2x + y = 6 has
(A) 0 1 (C) 0 1 (A) a unique solution
(B) 0 1 (D) 0 1 (B) no solution
(C) an infinite number of solutions
(D) exactly two distinct solutions
ECE – 2006
4. For the matrix 0 1 , the Eigenvalue 9. All the four entries of the 2 x 2 matrix
corresponding to the Eigenvector p p
P = 0p p 1 are non-zero, and one of
0 1 is its Eigenvalues is zero. Which of the
(A) 2 (C) 6 following statements is true?
(B) 4 (D) 8 (A) p p p p
(B) p p p p
5. The Eigenvalues and the corresponding (C) p p p p
Eigenvectors of a 2 2 matrix are given (D) p p p p
by
Eigenvalue Eigenvector ECE – 2009
=8 v =0 1 10. The Eigen values of the following matrix
are
=4 v =0 1
The matrix is [ ]
(A) 0 1 (C) 0 1 (A) 3, 3 + 5j, 6 j

(B) 6 + 5j, 3 + j, 3 j
(B) 0 1 (D) 0 1
(C) 3 + j, 3 j, 5 + j
(D) 3, 1 + 3j, 1 3j
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE – 2010 ECE – 2014

11. The Eigenvalues of a skew-symmetric 16. For matrices of same dimension M, N and
matrix are scalar c, which one of these properties
(A) Always zero DOES NOT ALWAYS hold?
(B) Always pure imaginary (A) (M ) M
(C) Either zero or pure imaginary (B) ( M ) (M)
(D) Always real (C) (M N) M N
(D) MN NM
ECE – 2011
12. The system of equations 17. A real (4 × 4) matrix A satisfies the
x y z equation I where 𝐼 is the (4 × 4)
x y z identity matrix. The positive Eigenvalue
x y z of A is _____.
has NO solution for values of n
given by 18. Consider the matrix
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
J
ECE\EE\IN – 2012
13. Given that A = 0 1 and I = 0 1, [ ]
Which is obtained by reversing the order
the value of A3 is
of the columns of the identity matrix I .
(A) 15 A + 12 I (C) 17 A + 15 I
(B) 19A + 30 (D) 17A +21 Let I J where is a non-
negative real number. The value of for
ECE – 2013 which det(P) = 0 is _____.
14. The minimum Eigenvalue of the following
matrix is 19. The determinant of matrix A is 5 and the
determinant of matrix B is 40. The
[ ] determinant of matrix AB is ________.
(A) 0 (C) 2 20. The system of linear equations

(B) 1 (D) 3
( )4 5 ( )h s
15. Let A be a m n matrix and B be a n m
matrix. It is given that (A) a unique solution
Determinant(I ) determinant (B) infinitely many solutions
(I ) where I is the k k identity (C) no solution
matrix. Using the above property, the (D) exactly two solutions
determinant of the matrix given below is
21. Which one of the following statements is
[ ] NOT true for a square matrix A?
(A) If A is upper triangular, the
(A) 2 (C) 8 Eigenvalues of A are the diagonal
(B) 5 (D) 16 elements of it
(B) If A is real symmetric, the Eigenvalues
of A are always real and positive
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) If A is real, the Eigenvalues of A and

are always the same (A) [ ] [ ]
(D) If all the principal minors of A are
positive, all the Eigenvalues of A are (B) [ ] [ ] [ ]
also positive
22. The maximum value of the determinant (C) [ ] [ ] [ ]

among all 2×2 real symmetric matrices
with trace 14 is ___. (D) [ ] [ ] [ ]
EE – 2005
5. The following vector is linearly
1. If R = [ ] , then top row of is dependent upon the solution to the
previous problem
(A) , - (C) , -
(B) , - (D) , - (A) [ ] (C) [ ]
2. For the matrix p = [ ] , one of (B) [ ] (D) [ ]
the Eigenvalues is equal to 2 . Which of

EE – 2007
the following is an Eigenvector?
6. X = [x , x . . . . x - is an n-tuple non-zero
(A) [ ] (C) [ ] vector. The n n matrix V = X
(A) Has rank zero (C) Is orthogonal
(B) Has rank 1 (D) Has rank n
(B) [ ] (D) [ ]
7. The linear operation L(x) is defined by
the cross product L(x) = b x, where
3. In the matrix equation Px = q, which of b =[0 1 0- and x =[x x x - are three
the following is necessary condition for
dimensional vectors. The matrix M
the existence of at least one solution for
of this operation satisfies
the unknown vector x x
(A) Augmented matrix [P/Q] must have L(x) = M [ x ]
the same rank as matrix P x
(B) Vector q must have only non-zero Then the Eigenvalues of M are
elements (A) 0, +1, 1 (C) i, i, 1
(C) Matrix P must be singular (B) 1, 1, 1 (D) i, i, 0
(D) Matrix P must be square 8. Let x and y be two vectors in a 3
dimensional space and <x, y> denote
EE – 2006 their dot product. Then the determinant
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 4 xx xy
det 0 y x yy 1
and 5.
(A) is zero when x and y are linearly
P=[ ] ,Q=[ ] ,R=[ ] are independent
(B) is positive when x and y are linearly
three vectors independent
4. An orthogonal set of vectors having a (C) is non-zero for all non-zero x and y
span that contains P,Q, R is (D) is zero only when either x or y is zero
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Statement for Linked Questions 9 and 10. (A) A A+ A = A (C) A+ A = 

Cayley-Hamilton Theorem states that a (B) (AA+ ) = A A+ (D) A A+ A = A+
square matrix satisfies its own
characteristic equation. Consider a 14. Let P be a real orthogonal matrix. x⃗
matrix. is a real vector [x x - with length
A=0 1 ⃗x (x x ) . Then, which one of the

following statements is correct?
9. A satisfies the relation
(A) x⃗ x⃗ where at least one
(A) A + 3 + 2 =0
vector satisfies x⃗ x⃗
(B) A + 2A + 2 = 0
2
(B) x⃗ x⃗ for all vectors x⃗
(C) (A+ ) (A 2) = 0
(C) x⃗ x⃗ where at least one
(D) exp (A) = 0
vector satisfies x⃗ x⃗
(D) No relationship can be established
10. equals between x⃗ and x⃗
(A) 511 A + 510 
(B) 309 A + 104  EE – 2009
(C) 154 A + 155  15. The trace and determinant of a
(D) exp (9A) matrix are known to be –2 and –35
respe tively It’s Eigenv lues re
EE – 2008 (A) –30 and –5 (C) –7 and 5
11. If the rank of a ( ) matrix Q is 4, then (B) –37 and –1 (D) 17.5 and –2
which one of the following statements is
correct? EE – 2010
(A) Q will have four linearly independent 16. For the set of equations
rows and four linearly independent x x x x =2
columns x x x x =6
(B) Q will have four linearly independent The following statement is true
rows and five linearly independent (A) Only the trivial solution
columns x x x x = 0 exists
(C) Q will be invertible (B) There are no solutions
(D) Q will be invertible (C) A unique non-trivial solution exists
(D) Multiple non-trivial solutions exist
12. The characteristic equation of a ( )
matrix P is defined as
17. An Eigenvector of [ ] is
() = | P| =    =0
If I denotes identity matrix, then the (A) , - (C) , -
inverse of matrix P will be (B) , - (D) , -
(A) ( I)
(B) ( I) EE – 2011
(C) ( I) 18. The matrix[A] = 0 1 is decomposed
(D) ( I)
into a product of a lower triangular
matrix [L] and an upper triangular matrix
13. A is m n full rank matrix with m > n and
[U]. The properly decomposed [L] and [U]
 is an identity matrix. Let matrix matrices respectively are
A+ = ( ) , then, which one of the
(A) 0 1 and 0 1
following statements is FALSE?
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) 0 1 and 0 1 23. Two matrices A and B are given below:

p q p q pr qs
0 1 [ ]
(C) 0 1 and 0 1 r s pr qs r s
If the rank of matrix A is N, then the rank
(D) 0 1 and 0 1
of matrix B is
(A) N (C) N
EE – 2013 (B) N (D) N
x
19. The equation 0 1 0x 1 0 1 has
IN – 2005
(A) No solution
x 1. Identify which one of the following is an
(B) Only one solution 0x 1 0 1.
Eigenvector of the matrix A = 0 1?
(C) Non – zero unique solution
(A) [ 1 1]T (C) [1 1]T
(D) Multiple solution (B) [3 1]T (D) [ 2 1]T
20. A matrix has Eigenvalues – 1 and – 2. The
2. Let A be a 3 3 matrix with rank 2. Then
corresponding Eigenvectors are 0 1 and AX = 0 has
(A) only the trivial solution X = 0
0 1 respectively. The matrix is
(B) one independent solution
(A) 0 1 (C) 0 1 (C) two independent solutions
(D) three independent solutions
(B) 0 1 (D) 0 1
EE – 2014 IN – 2006
21. Given a system of equations: Statement for Linked Answer Questions 3
x y z and 4
x y z A system of linear simultaneous
Which of the following is true regarding equations is given as Ax=B where
its solutions?
(A) The system has a unique solution for [ ] n [ ]
any given and
(B) The system will have infinitely many 3. The rank of matrix A is
solutions for any given and (A) 1 (C) 3
(C) Whether or not a solution exists (B) 2 (D) 4
depends on the given and
(D) The system would have no solution 4. Which of the following statements is true?
for any values of and (A) x is a null vector
(B) x is unique
22. Which one of the following statements is (C) x does not exist
true for all real symmetric matrices? (D) x has infinitely many values
(A) All the eigenvalues are real.
(B) All the eigenvalues are positive. 5. For a given matrix A, it is observed
(C) All the eigenvalues are distinct. that
(D) Sum of all the eigenvalues is zero.
0 1 0 1 n 0 1 0 1
Then matrix A is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
 2 1  1 0   1 1  10. Let P 0 be a 3 3 real matrix. There exist

(A) A      linearly independent vectors x and y such
1 1  0 2 1 2
that Px = 0 and Py = 0. The dimension of
1 1  1 0  2 1
(B) A     
the range space of P is
1 2 0 2 1 1 (A) 0 (C) 2
1 1  1 02 1 (B) 1 (D) 3
(C) A   
1 2  0 2 1 1 IN – 2010
0 2 11. X and Y are non-zero square matrices of
(D) A    size n n. If then
1 3
(A) |X| = 0 and |Y| 0
(B) |X| 0 and |Y| = 0
IN – 2007 (C) |X| = 0 and |Y| = 0
6. Let A = [ ] i j n with n n (D) |X| 0 and |Y| 0
= i. j. Then the rank of A is
(A) (C) n 12. A real n × n matrix A = [ ] is defined as
(B) (D) n i i j
follows: {
otherwise
7. Let A be an n×n real matrix such that The summation of all n Eigenvalues of A is
= I and y be an n- dimensional vector. (A) n(n )
Then the linear system of equations Ax=Y (B) n(n )
has ( )( )
(C)
(A) no solution
(D) n
(B) a unique solution
(C) more than one but finitely many IN – 2011
independent solutions
(D) Infinitely many independent 13. The matrix M = [ ] has
solutions
Eigenvalues . An Eigenvector
corresponding to the Eigenvalue 5 is
IN – 2009
, - . One of the Eigenvectors of
8. The matrix P =[ ] rotates a vector the matrix M is
(A) , - (C) , √ -
(B) , - (D) , -
about the axis[ ] by an angle of
IN – 2013
(A) (C) 14. The dimension of the null space of the
(B) (D)
matrix [ ] is
9. The Eigenvalues of a (2 2) matrix X are
2 and 3. The Eigenvalues of matrix (A) 0 (C) 2
( I) ( I) are (B) 1 (D) 3
(A) (C)
(B) (D) 15. One of Eigenvectors corresponding to the
two Eigenvalues of the matrix 0 1 is
j
(A) [ ] 0 1 (C) [ ] 0 1
j j
(B) 0 1 0 1 j
(D) [ ] 0 1
j
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN – 2014
16. For the matrix A satisfying the equation
given below, the eigenvalues are
, -[ ] [ ]
(A) ( 𝑗,𝑗) (C) ( )

(B) (1,1,0) (D) (1,0,0)
Answer Keys and Explanations
ME
1. [Ans. A] and G = [ ]
Now E × F = G
[ ] os sin
∴ ,E- [ sin os ]
h r teristi equ tions is | I|
( )( )( )
4. [Ans. A]
∴ Real eigenvalues are 5, 5 other two are
For S matrix, if Eigenvalues are
complex
… … … … … then for matrix,
Eigenvector corresponding to
the Eigenvalues will be , , ………
is ( I)
For S matrix, if Eigenvalues are 1 and 5
(or) →( )
then for matrix, the Eigenvalues are 1
Verify the options which satisfies relation
and 25.
(1)
Option (A) satisfies.
5. [Ans. A]
2. [Ans. B]
6. [Ans. B]
Given n in onsistent
0 1 Eigenv lues re 2, 2
No ( I) ( I) . /
( ⁄ ) No. of L.I Eigenvectors
( ) n ( ⁄ ) (no of v ri les) ( I)
( ( ) minimum of m n)
For inconsistence
( ) ( ⁄ ) 7. [Ans. A]
∴ he highest possi le r nk of is ( I) .
olving for , Let the symmetric and real
3. [Ans. C] matrix be A = 0 1
os sin
Given , E = [ sin os ] Now | |
Which gives ( )
⟹
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
⟹
x
Hence real Eigen value. [ ][ ] 0 1
x
8. [Ans. B]
Equating the elements x ⁄
Let 0 1 eigenv lues re n
Eigen vector corresponding to 12. [Ans. A]
is ( I) 0 1 → Eigenv lues re
x
. / .y/ . / Eigenve tor is x x verify the options
By simplifying
K 13. [Ans. C]
. / . / y t king K
Eigen vector corresponding to =2 [ ] [ ]
is ( I)
x
. / .y/ . / → [ ]
K
By simplifying ( ) 4 5 by
K ⁄ → [ ]
taking K
( ) infinite m ny solutions
⁄
14. [Ans. B]
⁄
Eigenvalues of a real symmetric matrix
9. [Ans. C] are always real
Sum of the diagonal elements = Sum of 15. [Ans. B]
the Eigenvalues
⟹ 1 + 0 + p = 3+S 0 1 eigenv lues v lue
⟹ S= p 2 Eigen vector will be . /
10. [Ans. B] Norm lize ve tor
( ⁄ ) [ ] √( ) ( )
[ ] [√( ) ( ) ]
⁄
→ * √ +
[ ] ⁄
→
√
→ [ ] 16. [Ans. C]
The given system is
If system will h ve solution x y z
x y z
11. [Ans. A] x y z
iven M M → MM I Use Gauss elimination method as follows
Augmented matrix is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
, | - [ | ] So, | |
→ [ | ] | |
(Taking 2 common from each row)

→ [ | ] ( )
nk ( )
nk ( | )
20. [Ans. D]
So, Rank (A) = Rank (A|B) = 2 < n (no. of
variables) 0 1 eigen v lues
So, we have infinite number of solutions Eigenve tor is verify for oth
n
17. [Ans. C]
Suppose the Eigenvalue of matrix A is
21. [Ans. D]
( i )(s y) and the Eigenvector is
We know that the Eigenvectors
‘x’ where s the onjug te p ir of
corresponding to distinct Eigenvalues of
Eigenvalue and Eigenvector is ̅ n x̅.
real symmetric matrix are orthogonal.
So Ax = x … ① x y
and x̅ ̅x̅……② x y
[ ][ ] x y x y x y
king tr nspose of equ tion ② x y
x̅ x̅ ̅ … ③
[( ) n ̅ is s l r ] 22. [Ans. D]
x̅ x x̅ x ̅ ( )
x̅ x x̅ ̅x … , - In case of matrix PQ QP (generally)
x̅ x x̅ ̅ x CE
(x̅ x) ̅ (x̅ x) ( ̅ re s l r )
1. [Ans. C]
̅
If = i.e. A is orthogonal, we can
( x x̅ re Eigenve tors they nnot e zero ) only s y th t if is n Eigenv lue of
i i
then also will be an Eigenvalue of A,
i 0
which does not necessarily imply that
| | = 1 for all i.
Hence Eigenvalue of a symmetric matrix
are real 2. [Ans. A]
18. [Ans. C] In an over determined system having
We know that more equations than variables, it is
os x os x sin x necessary to have consistent unique
( ) os x sin x ( ) os x solution, by definition
Hence 1, 1 and 1 are coefficients. They
3. [Ans. A]
are linearly dependent.
With the given order we can say that
19. [Ans. A] order of matrices are as follows:
 3×4
| | Y  4×3
 3×3
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( )  3×3 Using Gauss elimination we reduce this to

P 2×3 an upper triangular matrix to find its
 3×2 rank
P( )  (2×3) (3×3) (3×2)
[ | ]→ [ | ]
2×2
( ( ) )  2×2
→ [ | ]
4. [Ans. D]
The augmented matrix for given system is Now for infinite solution last row must be
completely zero
[ | ]→ [ | ] ie –2=0 n –7=0
 n
Then by Gauss elimination procedure
[ | ]→ [ | ] 8. [Ans. A]
Inverse of 0 1 is
→ [ | ] 0 1 0 1
( )
( ⁄ ) ∴0 1 0 1
( ) ( )
( ) ( ⁄ ) 0 1
∴ olution is non – existent for above
system.
9. [Ans. B]
( ) P=( )P
5. [Ans. B]
( )( )
∑ = Trace (A)
=( ) (I) =
+ + = Trace (A)
= 2 + ( 1) + 0 = 1
10. [Ans. B]
Now = 3
∴3+ + =1 A=0 1
 Characteristic equation of A is
Only choice (B) satisfies this condition.
| |=0
6. [Ans. B]  (4 )( 5 ) 2 × 5 =0
∑ = Trace (A)  + 30 = 0
+ + =1+5+1=7 6, 5
Now = 2, = 6
∴ 2+6+ =7 11. [Ans. D]
=3 The augmented matrix for given system is
x
7. [Ans. A] [ | ] 6y7 [ ]
k z
The augmented matrix for given system is
Using Gauss elimination we reduce this to
an upper triangular matrix to find its rank
[ | ]
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. 16]

[ | ]→ M trix , - , - , -
k The product of matrix PQR is
→ , - , - , -
[ | ]
The minimum number of multiplications
involves in computing the matrix product
[ | ] PQR is 16
Now if k
18. [Ans. 23]
Rank (A) = rank (A|B) = 3
∴ Unique solution [ ][ ] [ ] [ ]
If k = 7, rank (A) = rank (A|B) = 2
which is less than number of variables
K JK , -[ ] , -
∴ When K = 7, unique solution is not
possible and only infinite solution is , -
possible 19. [Ans. A]
Sum of Eigenvalues
12. [Ans. A] = Sum of trace/main diagonal elements
A square matrix B is defined as skew- = 215 + 150 + 550
symmetric if and only if = B = 915
13. [Ans. D] 20. [Ans. 88]

By definition A + is always symmetric The determinant of matrix is
is symmetri
is lw ys skew symmetri [ ]
is skew symmetri
→
14. [Ans. B]
[ ]
0 1 =( )
0 1
i i →
∴ 0 1
i i
i i
0 1 [ ]
,( i)( i) i - i i
i i
= 0 1
i i →
15. [Ans. B] [ ]
0 1
Sum of the Eigenvalues = 17 Interchanging Column 1& Column 2 and
Product of the Eigenvalues = taking transpose
From options, 3.48 + 13.53 = 17
(3.48)(13.53) = 47 [ ]
16. [Ans. 0.5]

| |
0.5
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
* ( ) ( )+ ( )( )
= ( )
= 1, 6
21. [Ans. 2] ∴ The Eigenvalues of A are 1 and 6
[ ]
3. [Ans. D]
→ Given that Fu =b and Fv =b
If F is non singular, then it has a unique
[ inverse.
( ) ( ) ( )
Now, u = b and v= b
] Since is unique, u = v but it is given
( ) ( ) th t u v his is contradiction. So F
must be singular. This means that
[ ] (A) Determinant of F is zero is true. Also
(B) There are infinite number of
( ) no. of non zero rows = 2
solution to Fx= b is true since |F| = 0
CS (C) here is n su h the is
1. [Ans. B] also true, since X has infinite number
The augmented matrix for the given of solutions., including the X = 0
solution
system is [ | ] (D) F must have 2 identical rows is false,
since a determinant may become
Using elementary transformation on above zero, even if two identical columns
matrix we get, are present. It is not necessary that 2
identical rows must be present for
[ | ]
|F| to become zero.
4. [Ans. C]
→ [ ⁄ | ] It is given that Eigenvalues of A is
⁄ ⁄ 5, 2, 1, 4
I
→ Let P = 0 1
[ | ] I
Eigenvalues of P : | I|
Rank ([A B]) = 3 I
| |
I
Rank ([A]) = 3
( ) I
Since
I
Rank ([A B]) = Rank ([A]) = number of I
variables, the system has unique solution. Eigenvalue of P is
( 5 +1 ), ( 2+ 1), (1+ 1), (4+1 ),
2. [Ans. B] ( 5 1 ), ( 2 1 ),(1 1), (4 1)
0 1 = 4, 1, 2, 5, 6, 3,0,3
The characteristic equation of this matrix
5. [Ans. B]
is given by |x
X= {x x x +
| I|
= ,x x x - then,
| |
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
{ [1, 1, 0]T , [1,0, 1 ]T } is a linearly Only one matrix has an Eigenvalue of 1

independent set because one cannot be which is 0 1
obtained from another by scalar
Correct choice is (A)
multiplication. However (1, 1, 0) and
(1,0, 1) do not span X, since all such 8. [Ans. D]
combinations (x1, x2, x3) such that
x1+ x2+ x3 =0 cannot be expressed as | |
x y
linear combination of (1, 1,0) and ( )( y) x
(1,0, 1) When
( y) x
6. [Ans. D]
y x ( )
The augmented matrix for above system
When
is ( y) x
[ | ] → [ | ] y x ( )
x y
Solving (1) & (2)
→ [ | ] x y
Now as long as – 5 0, 9. [Ans. A]

rank (A) =rank (A|B) =3 The Eigenvalues of a upper triangular
∴ can be any real value except 5. Closest matrix are given by its diagonal entries.
correct answer is (D). ∴ Eigenvalues are 1, 4, 3 only
7. [Ans. A] 10. [Ans. D]

Eigenvalues of 0 1 0 1
| | =0 =0,1 Eigenvalues of the matrix (A) are the

roots of the characteristic polynomial
Eigenvalues of 0 1 given below.
| | =0 | |
=0 = 0, 0 ( )( )
( )( )
Eigenvalues of 0 1
| |= 0 √
( ) =0 Eigenvalues of A are √ n √
( ) respectively
= i or 1 So Eigenvalues of
= 1 –i or 1 + i (√ ) n ( √ )
Eigenvalues of 0 1 n
n
| | =0
√ n √
( )( ) =0
( ) =0
= –1, 1
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. [Ans. A] 15. [Ans. 6]

→ p q
Since 2 nd & 3rd columns have been
Let A =
swapped which introduces a –ve sign
Hence (A) is not equal to the problem [ ]
x
x
12. [Ans. 1]
Let X = x e eigen ve tor
x y x
x z [x ]
x y z By the definition of eigenvector, AX =
x y z x x
x x
x x
ugmente m trix is [ ] x x
[ ] [x ] [x ]
x x x
[ ] x x x x
x x x x
x x x x
→ →
x x x x x x x
→
n x x x x x x
(I) If s yx x
[ ] x x x
x x
→ → x x x
(2) If Eigenv lue
[ ] ∴ Three distinct eigenvalues are 0, 2, 3
Product of non zero eigenvalues = 2 × 3 = 6
→
16. [Ans. A]
If the trace or determinant of matrix is
[ ] positive then it is not necessary that all
eigenvalues are positive. So, option (B), (C),
( ) ( ) no of v ri les (D) are not correct
∴ nique solution exists
ECE
13. [Ans. 0] 1. [Ans. C]
The Eigenvectors corresponding to distinct Since, , -
Eigenvalues of real symmetric matrix are
2. [Ans. A]
orthogonal
We know, =I
14. [Ans. 0] 0 16 7=0 1
[ ]
0 1 0 1
| | ( ) b 1
,  a
Or 2a 0.1b=0,  2a 
10 60
1 1 21 7
 a+b =   
3 60 60 20
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. C] 8. [Ans. B]
0 1 Approach 1:
Given 4x + 2y =7
 (A I)=0 and 2x + y =6
 ( 4 ) (3 ) 2 4=0
4 2 x  7
 2 + 20=0  = 5, 4 2 1y   6
    
 x1 
Putting = 5, 0 1   =0 0 0 x  5
 x2  2 1y   6 
    
 x + 2x = 0 x = 2x
On comparing LHS and RHS
x x
 1= 2 0= 5, which is irrelevant and so no
2 1 solution.
Hence, 0 1 is Eigenvector. Approach 2:
4x + 2y =7
4. [Ans. C] 7
or 2x  y=
0 1 We know th t it is Eigenvalue 2
Then Eigenvector is x x 2x+y=6
Verify the options (C) Since both the linear equation represent
parallel set of straight lines, therefore no
5. [Ans. A] solution exists.
Approach 3:
or m trix 0 1 Rank (A)=1; rank (C)=2,
We know |I A|=0 As Rank (A) rank (C) therefore no
| | solution exists.
 2 –I2 +32 =0 9. [Ans. C]

 = 4, 8 (Eigenvalues) Matrix will be singular if any of the
For = 4, ( I )=0 Eigenvalues are zero.
1
|  |= 0
v =0 1 For = 0, P = 0
p p
For = 8, ( I )=0 1  |p p | =0
 p p p p
v =0 1
10. [Ans. D]
6. [Ans. C] Approach1: Eigenvalues exists as complex
conjugate or real
[ ] Approach 2: Eigenvalues are given by
| | =0
[ ]
( )(( ) )=0
( )
 , j j
7. [Ans. C] 11. [Ans. C]

There are M non-zero, orthogonal vectors, Eigenvalue of skew – symmetric matrix is
so there is required M dimension to either zero or pure imaginary.
represent them ’
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
12. [Ans. B]
Given equations are x y z et of , - et of [ ]
x y z and x y z
If and ,
then x y z have Infinite solution
16. [Ans. D]
If and , then
Matrix multiplication is not commutative
x y z ( ) no solution
in general.
x y z
If n
17. [Ans. *] Range 0.99 to 1.01
x y z will have solution
Let ‘ ’ e Eigenv lue of ‘ ’ hen ‘ ’ will
x y z
e Eigenv lue of ‘ ’
and will also give solution
A. =I=
13. [Ans. B] Using Cauchey Hamilton Theorem,
0 1
Characteristic Equations is
18. [Ans. *] Range 0.99 to 1.01
By Cayley Hamilton theorem I J I J
I I
∴
( I) | |
I
[ ]
14. [Ans. A]
[ ] 19. [Ans. *] Range 199 to 201

From matrix properties we know that the
→ ( ) determinant of the product is equal to the
product of the determinants.
[ ] | | That is if A and B are two matrix with
determinant | | n | | respectively,
| | Product of Eigenvalues = 0
then | | | | | |
∴ Minimum Eigenv lue h s to e ‘ ’
∴| | | | | |
15. [Ans. B]
Let , - [ ] 20. [Ans. B]

→
[ ] [ ]
→
I I [ ] → [ ]
( ) ( | ) no of v r les
Infinitely many solutions
Then AB = [4]; BA [ ]
21. [Ans. B]
Here m = 1, n = 4
And et(I ) et(I ) onsi er 0 1
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
whi h is re l symmetri m trix

h r teristi equ tion is | I| =[ ]
( )
∴ Top row of =, -
∴ (not positive)
2. [Ans. D]
( ) is not true
Since matrix is triangular, the Eigenvalues
(A), (C), (D) are true using properties of
are the diagonal elements themselves
Eigenvalues
namely  = 3, 2 & 1.
Corresponding to Eigenvalue  = 2, let
22. [Ans. *] Range 48.9 to 49.1
us find the Eigenvector
Real symmetric matrices are diagnosable
Let the matrix be [A - ] x̂ = 0
x x
0 1 s tr e is [ ][x ] [ ]
x
So determinant is product of diagonal x
entries Putting in above equation we get,
x
So | | x x
[ ][x ] [ ]
∴ M ximum v lue of etermin nt x
x x Which gives the equations,
∴| | 5x x x =0 . . . . . (i)
x =0 . . . . . (ii)
EE 3x = 0 . . . . . (iii)
1. [Ans. B] Since eqa (ii) and (iii) are same we have
5x x x =0 . . . . . (i)
R= [ ]
x =0 . . . . . (ii)
j( ) , of tor( )- Putting x = k, we get
x = 0, x = k and 5x k =0
| | | |
x = k
| |=| | ∴ Eigenvectorss are of the form
x k
= 1(2 + 3) – 0(4 + 2) – 1 (6 – 2) = 1
x
[ ] * k +
Since we need only the top row of , we x
need to find only first column of (R)
which after transpose will become first i.e. x x x = k : k : 0
row adj(A). = :1:0
cof. (1, 1) = + | |=2+3=5 =2:5:0
x
cof. (2, 1) = | |= 3 x
∴ [ ]=[ ] is an Eigenvector of matrix p.
x
cof. (2, 1) = + | |= +1
3. [Ans. A]
∴ cof. (A) = [ ] Rank [P|Q] = Rank [P] is necessary for
existence of at least one solution to
Adj (A) =, of ( )-
x q.
=[ ]
Dividing by |R| = 1 gives

th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. A] 
We need to find orthogonal vectors, verify  ( )
the options. i i
Option (A) is orthogonal vectors
8. [Ans. B]
( )( ) xy xy xx x n xy yx
xx xy x xy
Option (B), (C), (D) are not orthogonal | yx y y | |y x y |
x y (x y)
5. [Ans. B]
The vector ( ) is linearly = Positive when x and y are linearly
dependent upon the solution obtained in independent.
Q. No. 4 namely , - and , - 9. [Ans. A]
We can easily verify the linearly
A=0 1
dependence as
|A – | = 0
| | 
| | =0

A will satisfy this equation according to
6. [Ans. B] Cayley Hamilton theorem
hen n n m trix xx i.e. I=0
x x x x x x Multiplying by on oth si es we get
x x x x x x
* + I=0
x x x x x x I =0
Take x common from 1st row,
x common from 2nd row …… 10. [Ans. A]
x common from nth row. To calculate
It h s r nk ‘ ’ Start from I = 0 which has
derived above
7. [Ans. D] I
⃗
k
L(x) = | | ( I)( I)
x x x I
= (x ) ( ) ⃗(
k x ) ( I) I
x I
= x ⃗ =[
x k ]
x ( I)( I)
x
I
L(x) = M [x ]
x ( I) I
Comparing both , we get, I
M=[ ] ( I)
Hence Eigenvalue of M : | M | ( I)
I
| |
 ( ) ( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. [Ans. A] x
If rank of (5 6 ) matrix is 4,then surely x
* + *x + * +
it must have exactly 4 linearly x
independent rows as well as 4 linearly
independent columns.
Argument matrix C =* +
12. [Ans. D]
If characteristic equation is
→ , * +
   =0
Then by Cayley – Hamilton theorem,
I=0 nk ( ) nk( )
= Number of variables = 4
Multiplying by on both sides, Since, Rank (A) = Rank(C) < Number of
variables
= I = ( I)
Hence, system of equations are consistent
and there is multiple non-trivial solution
13. [Ans. D]
exists.
Choice (A) = A is correct
Since =A[( ) -A
17. [Ans. B]
= A[( ) -
Characteristic equation | I|
Put =P
Then A [ ] = A. = A | |
Choice (C) =  is also correct since
=( )  (1 ) ( )( )
= I 
Eigenve tors orrespon ing to is
14. [Ans. B] ( I)
Let orthogonal matrix be x
os in [ ] [x ] [ ]
P=0 1 x
in os
By Property of orthogonal matrix A 2x x  x x
I At x x
x os x in x x  x x
So, x⃗ = [ ]
x in x os At x ,x
|| x⃗ || =
Eigenvectors = c[ ]{Here c is a constant}
√(x os x in ) (x in x os )
|| x⃗ || = √x x 18. [Ans. D]
, - ,L-, - ⟹ Options D is correct
|| x⃗ || = || x̅|| for any vector x̅
19. [Ans. D]
15. [Ans. C] x x … (i)
Trace = Sum of Principle diagonal } (i) n (ii) re s me
x x … (ii)
elements. ∴x x
So it has multiple solutions.
16. [Ans. D]
On writing the equation in the form of
AX =B
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
20. [Ans. D] |A I|= | |

Eigen value
i.e., (1 ) (2 )
2
Eigenvectors 0 1 n 0 1 Thus the Eigenvalue are 1, 2.
Let matrix 0 1 If x, y, be the component of Eigenvectors
corresponding to the Eigenv lues we
x x
have
0 10 1 0 1 x
[A- I- 0 1 0y1=0
0 10 1 0 1
For =1, we get the Eigenvector as 0 1
Hence, the answer will be , -
2. [Ans. B]
AX=0 and (A) = 2
Solving
n=3
0 1 0 1 No. of linearly independent solutions
= n r
21. [Ans. B] = 3
Since there are 2 equations and 3 variables =1
(unknowns), there will be infinitely many
solutions. If if then 3. [Ans. C]
x y z x y z x z y There are 3 non-zero rows and hence
For any x and z, there will be a value of y. rank (A) = 3
∴ Infinitely many solutions
4. [Ans. C]
22. [Ans. A] Rank (A) = 3 (This is Co-efficient matrix)
For all real symmetric matrices, the Rank (A:b) =4(This is Augmented matrix)
Eigenvalues are real (property), they may s r nk( ) r nk ( ) olution oes
be either ve or ve and also may be same. not exist.
The sum of Eigenvalues necessarily not be
zero.
5. [Ans. C]
We know Hen e from the given
23. [Ans. C]
p q problem, Eigenvalue & Eigenvector is
0 1 known.
r s
( pplying → p q 1 1
→r s element ry tr nsform tions) X1    , X2  2 , 1  1, 2  2
p q pr qs 1  
[ ] We also know that , where
pr qs r s
∴ hey h ve s me r nk N 1 1
P  X1 X2    
1 2
IN
1 0  1 0 
1. [Ans. B] & D=   
 0 2   0 2
Given: 0 1
Hence
Characteristic equation is,
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
 1 1  1 0   2 1  12. [Ans. A]

A       A=[ ]
1 2  0 2 1 1
i if i j
6. [Ans. B] = 0 otherwise.
For n n matrix
A= [ ]=[ ]
A=[ ]
Using elementary transformation
n
[ ] For diagonal matrix Eigenvalues are
diagonal elements itself.
Hence, rank (A) =1 n(n )
∴ n
7. [Ans. B]
Given I 13. [Ans. B]
Hence rank (A) = n If AX = →
Hence AX= Y will have unique solution From this result [1, 2, - is also vector
for M
8. [Ans. C]
14. [Ans. B]
9. [Ans. C] Dim of null space [A]= nullity of A.
Approach 1:
For given A = [ ]
Assume, 0 1 I 0 1
∴A ( I) ( I) Apply row operations
0 1 0 1 [ ]
0 10 1 0 1
→ [ ]
Now | I |
| |
→ [ ]
( )( )=0
∴ ( )
Approach 2: By rank – nullity theorem
Eigenvalues of ( I) is = 1, 1/2 Rank [A]+ nullity [A]= no. of columns[A]
Eigenvalues of (X+5I) is = 3, 2 Nullity [A]= 3
Eigenvalues of ( I) (X+5I) is = , ∴ Nullity , -
10. [Ans. D] 15. [Ans. A]

A=| |
11. [Ans. C]
A null matrix can be obtained by Characteristics equation | I|
multiplying either with one null matrix or | |
two singular matrices.
j
j
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
j x
[ ] 0x 1 0 1
j
x
x j
j
j x
[ ] 0x 1 0 1
j
x j
x
16. [Ans. C]
A[ ]=[ ]
→| | | | | |
→| |
( | |
| | two rows ounter lose thus | |
| |)
=Product of eigenvalues
Verify options
Options (C) correct answer
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Probability and Distribution
ME - 2005 ME - 2008
1. A single die is thrown twice. What is the 6. A coin is tossed 4 times. What is the
probability that the sum is neither 8 nor probability of getting heads exactly 3
9? times?
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄ (B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
2. A lot has 10% defective items. Ten items ME - 2009

are chosen randomly from this lot. The 7. The standard deviation of a uniformly
probability that exactly 2 of the chosen distributed random variable between 0
items are defective is and 1 is
(A) 0.0036 (C) 0.2234 (A) √ (C) ⁄√
(B) 0.1937 (D) 0.3874 (B) √ (D) √
ME - 2006 8. If three coins are tossed simultaneously,
3. Consider a continuous random variable the probability of getting at least one head
with probability density function is
f(t) = 1 + t for 1  t  0 (A) 1/8 (C) 1/2
= 1 t for 0  t  1 (B) 3/8 (D) 7/8
The standard deviation of the random
ME - 2010
variable is:
9. A box contains 2 washers, 3 nuts and 4
(A) ⁄√ (C) ⁄
bolts. Items are drawn from the box at
(B) ⁄√ (D) ⁄
random one at a time without
4. A box contains 20 defective items and 80 replacement. The probability of drawing
non-defective items. If two items are 2 washers first followed by 3 nuts and
selected at random without replacement, subsequently the 4 bolts is
what will be the probability that both (A) 2/315 (C) 1/1260
items are defective? (B) 1/630 (D) 1/2520
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ ME - 2011
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄ 10. An unbiased coin is tossed five times. The
ME - 2007 outcome of each toss is either a head or a
5. Let X and Y be two independent random tail. The probability of getting at least one
variables. Which one of the relations head is________
between expectation (E), variance (Var) (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
and covariance (Cov) given below is
FALSE? ME - 2012
(A) E (XY) = E (X) E (Y) 11. A box contains 4 red balls and 6 black
(B) Cov (X, Y) = 0 balls. Three balls are selected randomly
(C) Var (X + Y) = Var (X) + Var (Y) from the box one after another, without
(D) (X Y ) ( (X)) ( (Y)) replacement. The probability that the
selected set has one red ball and two
black balls is
(A) 1/20 (C) 3/10
(B) 1/12 (D) 1/2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME - 2013 the probability of obtaining red colour on

12. Let X be a normal random variable with top face of the dice at least twice is _______
mean 1 and variance 4. The probability
(X ) is 17. A group consists of equal number of men
(A) 0.5 and women. Of this group 20% of the men
(B) Greater than zero and less than 0.5 and 50% of the women are unemployed.
(C) Greater than 0.5 and less than 1.0 If a person is selected at random from this
(D) 1.0 group, the probability of the selected
person being employed is _______
13. The probability that a student knows the
correct answer to a multiple choice 18. A machine produces 0, 1 or 2 defective
question is . If the student dose not know pieces in a day with associated
probability of 1/6, 2/3 and 1/6,
the answer, then the student guesses the
respectively. The mean value and the
answer. The probability of the guessed
variance of the number of defective pieces
answer being correct is . Given that the
produced by the machine in a day,
student has answered the questions respectively, are
correctly, the conditional probability that (A) 1 and 1/3 (C) 1 and 4/3
the student knows the correct answer is (B) 1/3 and 1 (D) 1/3 and 4/3
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄ 19. A nationalized bank has found that the
daily balance available in its savings
ME - 2014 accounts follows a normal distribution
14. In the following table x is a discrete with a mean of Rs. 500 and a standard
random variable and P(x) is the deviation of Rs. 50. The percentage of
probability density. The standard savings account holders, who maintain an
deviation of x is average daily balance more than Rs. 500
x 1 2 3 is _______
P(x) 0.3 0.6 0.1
(A) 0.18 (C) 0.54 20. The number of accidents occurring in a
(B) 0.3 (D) 0.6 plant in a month follows Poisson
distribution with mean as 5.2. The
15. Box contains 25 parts of which 10 are probability of occurrence of less than 2
defective. Two parts are being drawn accidents in the plant during a randomly
simultaneously in a random manner from selected month is
the box. The probability of both the parts
(A) 0.029 (C) 0.039
being good is (B) 0.034 (D) 0.044
( ) ( )
CE - 2005
( ) ( ) 1. Which one of the following statements is
NOT true?
16. Consider an unbiased cubic dice with (A) The measure of skewness is
opposite faces coloured identically and dependent upon the amount of
each face coloured red, blue or green such dispersion
that each colour appears only two times
on the dice. If the dice is thrown thrice,
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) In a symmetric distribution the value CE - 2008

of mean, mode and median are the 5. If probability density function of a random
same variable x is
(C) In a positively skewed distribution x for x nd
f(x) {
mean > median > mode for ny other v lue of x
(D) In a negatively skewed distribution Then, the percentage probability
mode > mean > median P. x / is
(A) 0.247 (C) 24.7
CE - 2006 (B) 2.47 (D) 247
2. A class of first years B. Tech students is
composed of four batches A, B, C and D 6. A person on a trip has a choice between
each consisting of 30 students. It is found private car and public transport. The
that the sessional marks of students in probability of using a private car is 0.45.
Engineering Drawing in batch C have a While using the public transport, further
mean of 6.6 and standard deviation of 2.3. choices available are bus and metro out of
The mean and standard deviation of the which the probability of commuting by a
marks for the entire class are 5.5 and 4.2 bus is 0.55. In such a situation, the
respectively. It is decided by the course probability, (rounded upto two decimals)
instruction to normalize the marks of the of using a car, bus and metro, respectively
students of all batches to have the same would be
mean and standard deviation as that of (A) 0.45, 0.30 and 0.25
the entire class. Due to this, the marks of a (B) 0.45, 0.25 and 0.30
student in batch C are changed from 8.5 (C) 0.45, 0.55 and 0.00
to (D) 0.45, 0.35 and 0.20
(A) 6.0 (C) 8.0
(B) 7.0 (D) 9.0 CE - 2009
7. The standard normal probability function
3. There are 25 calculators in a box. Two of can be approximated as
them are defective. Suppose 5 calculators
are randomly picked for inspection (i.e. (x )
exp( |x | )
each has the same chance of being Where x = standard normal deviate. If
selected). What is the probability that mean and standard deviation of annual
only one of the defective calculators will precipitation are 102 cm and 27 cm
be included in the inspection? respectively, the probability that the
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ annual precipitation will be between
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
90 cm and 102 cm is
(A) 66.7% (C) 33.3%
CE - 2007
(B) 50.0% (D) 16.7%
4. If the standard deviation of the spot speed
of vehicles in a highway is 8.8 kmph and CE - 2010
the mean speed of the vehicles is 8. Two coins are simultaneously tossed. The
33 kmph, the coefficient of variation in probability of two heads simultaneously
speed is appearing is
(A) 0.1517 (C) 0.2666 (A) 1/8 (C) 1/4
(B) 0.1867 (D) 0.3646 (B) 1/6 (D) 1/2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CE - 2011 14. A traffic office imposes on an average 5

9. There are two containers with one number of penalties daily on traffic
containing 4 red and 3 green balls and the violators. Assume that the number of
other containing 3 blue and 4 green balls. penalties on different days is independent
One ball is drawn at random from each and follows a poisson distribution. The
container. The probability that one of the probability that there will be less than 4
balls is red and the other is blue will be penalties in a day is ____.
(A) 1/7 (C) 12/49
(B) 9/49 (D) 3/7 15. A fair (unbiased) coin was tossed four
times in succession and resulted in the
CE - 2012 following outcomes:
10. The annual precipitation data of a city is (i) Head (iii) Head
normally distributed with mean and (ii) Head (iv) Head
standard deviation as 1000mm and The prob bility of obt ining ‘T il’ when
200 mm, respectively. The probability the coin is tossed again is
that the annual precipitation will be more (A) 0 (C) ⁄
than 1200 mm is (B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
(A) < 50 % (C) 75 %
(B) 50 % (D) 100 % 16. An observer counts 240 veh/h at a
specific highway location. Assume that
11. In an experiment, positive and negative the vehicle arrival at the location is
values are equally likely to occur. The Poisson distributed, the probability of
probability of obtaining at most one having one vehicle arriving over a
negative value in five trials is 30-second time interval is ____________
(A) (C)
CS - 2005
(B) (D)
1. Box P has 2 red balls and 3 blue balls and
box Q has 3 red balls and 1 blue ball. A
CE - 2013
ball is selected as follows: (i) select a box
12. Find the value of such that the function
(ii) choose a ball from the selected box
f(x) is a valid probability density function
such that each ball in the box is equally
____________________
likely to be chosen. The probabilities of
f(x) (x )( x) for x
otherwise selecting boxes P and Q are 1/3 and 2/3
respectively. Given that a ball selected in
CE - 2014 the above process is red, the probability
13. The probability density function of that it comes from box P is
evaporation E on any day during a year in (A) 4/19 (C) 2/9
a watershed is given by (B) 5/19 (D) 19/30
f( ) { mm d y 2. Let f(x) be the continuous probability

otherwise density function of a random variable X.
The probability that E lies in between 2 The probability that a  X  b , is
and 4 mm/day in a day in the watershed (A) f(b a) (C) ∫ f(x)dx
is (in decimal) ______
(B) f(b) f( ) (D) ∫ x f(x)dx
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CS - 2006 CS - 2008
3. For each element in a set of size 2n, an 7. Let X be a random variable following
unbiased coin is tossed. The 2n coin normal distribution with mean +1 and
tosses are independent. An element is variance 4. Let Y be another normal
chosen if the corresponding coin toss variable with mean of 1 and variance
were head. The probability that exactly n unknown If (X ) (Y≥ ) the
elements are chosen is standard deviation of Y is
(A) ( n ⁄ ) (C) ( ⁄ n ) (A) 3 (C) √
(B) ( n ⁄ ) (D) ⁄ (B) 2 (D) 1
8. Aishwarya studies either computer

CS - 2007
science or mathematics every day. If she
Linked Data for Q4 & Q5 are given below.
studies computer science on a day, then
Solve the problems and choose the correct
the probability that she studies
answers.
mathematics the next day is 0.6. If she
Suppose that robot is placed on the
studies mathematics on a day, then the
Cartesian plane. At each step it is easy to
probability that she studies computer
move either one unit up or one unit right,
science the next day is 0.4. Given that
i.e if it is at (i,j) then it can move to either
Aishwarya studies computer science on
(i+1,j) or (i,j+1)
Monday, what is the probability that she
4. How many distinct paths are there for the
studies computer science on Wednesday?
robot to reach the point (10,10) starting
(A) 0.24 (C) 0.4
from the initial position (0,0)? (B) 0.36 (D) 0.6
(A) (C) 210
(B) 2 20 (D) None of these CS - 2009
9. An unbalanced dice (with 6 faces,
5. Suppose that the robot is not allowed to
numbered from 1 to 6) is thrown. The
traverse the line segment from (4,4) to
probability that the face value is odd is
(5,4). With this constraint, how many
90% of the probability that the face value
distinct paths are there for the robot to
is even. The probability of getting any
reach (10,10) starting from (0,0)?
even numbered face is the same. If the
(A) 29
probability that the face is even given that
(B) 219
it is greater than 3 is 0.75, which one of
(C) . / . / the following options is closest to the
probability that the face value exceeds 3?
(D) . / . / . /
(A) 0.453 (C) 0.485
6. Suppose we uniformly and randomly (B) 0.468 (D) 0.492
select a permutation from the 20! CS - 2010
ermut tions of ………… Wh t is 10. Consider a company that assembles
the probability that 2 appears at an computers. The probability of a faulty
earlier position than any other even assembly of any computer is p. The
number in the selected permutation? company therefore subjects each
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ computer to a testing process. This
(B) ⁄ (D) none of these testing process gives the correct result for
any computer with a probability of q.
What is the probability of a computer
being declared faulty?
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) pq+(1 – p)(1 – q) 15. If two fair coins flipped and at least one of
(B) (1 – q)p the outcomes is known to be a head, what
(C) (1 – p)q is the probability that both outcomes are
(D) pq heads?
(A) 1/3 (C) 1/4
11. What is the probability that a divisor of (B) 1/2 (D) 2/3
is a multiple of ?
(A) 1/625 (C) 12/625 CS - 2012
(B) 4/625 (D) 16/625 16. Suppose a fair six – sided die is rolled
once. If the value on the die is 1,2, or 3 the
12. If the difference between the expectation
die is rolled a second time. What is the
of the square if a random variable ( ,x -)
probability that the some total of value
and the square if the exopectation of the
that turn up is at least 6?
random variable ( ,x-) is denoted by R,
(A) 10/21 (C) 2/3
then (B) 5/12 (D) 1/6
(A) R = 0 (C) R≥
(B) R< 0 (D) R > 0 17. Consider a random variable X that takes
CS - 2011 values +1 and 1 with probability 0.5
13. A deck of 5 cards (each carrying a distinct each. The values of the cumulative
number from 1 to 5) is shuffled distribution function F(x) at x = and
thoroughly. Two cards are then removed +1 are
one at a time from the deck. What is the (A) 0 and 0.5 (C) 0.5 and 1
probability that the two cards are (B) 0 and 1 (D) 0.25 and 0.75
selected with the number on the first card
CS - 2013
being one higher than the number on the
18. Suppose p is the number of cars per
second card?
minute passing through a certain road
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
junction between 5 PM and 6 PM, and p
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
has a Poisson distribution with mean 3.
14. Consider a finite sequence of random What is the probability of observing
values X = [x1, x2 … xn].Let be the fewer than 3 cars during any given
me n nd σx be the standard deviation of minute in this interval?
X. Let another finite sequence Y of equal (A) ⁄ e (C) ⁄ e
length be derived from this as yi, a*xi+b, (B) ⁄ e (D) ⁄ e
where a and b are positive constants. Let
μy be the me n nd σy be the standard CS - 2014
deviation of this sequence. Which one of 19. Suppose you break a stick of unit length
the following statements is INCORRECT? at a point chosen uniformly at random.
(A) Index position of mode of X in X is Then the expected length of the shorter
the same as the index position of stick is ________ .
mode of Y in Y.
(B) Index position of median of X in X is 20. Four fair six – sided dice are rolled. The
the same as the index position of probability that the sum of the results
median of Y in Y. being 22 is x/1296. The value of x is
(C) μy μx + b ____________
(D) σy σx + b
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
21. The security system at an IT office is ECE - 2006

composed of 10 computers of which 3. A probability density function is of the
exactly four are working. To check form (x) e || x ( ).
whether the system is functional, the The value of K is
officials inspect four of the computers (A) 0.5 (C) 0.5a
picked at random (without replacement). (B) 1 (D) A
The system is deemed functional if at
least three of the four computers 4. Three Companies X, Y and Z supply
inspected are working. Let the computers to a university. The percentage
probability that the system is deemed of computers supplied by them and the
functional be denoted by p. Then 100p = probability of those being defective are
_____________. tabulated below
Company % of Probability
22. Each of the nine words in the sentence computers of being
“The quick brown fox jumps over the l zy supplied defective
dog” is written on sep r te piece of X 60% 0.01
paper. These nine pieces of paper are kept Y 30% 0.02
in a box. One of the pieces is drawn at Z 10% 0.03
random from the box. The expected Given that a computer is defective, the
length of the word drawn is _____________. probability that it was supplied by Y is
(The answer should be rounded to one (A) 0.1 (C) 0.3
decimal place.) (B) 0.2 (D) 0.4
23. The probability that a given positive

ECE - 2007
integer lying between 1 and 100 (both
5. If E denotes expectation, the variance of a
inclusive) is NOT divisible by 2, 3 or 5 is
random variable X is given by
__________.
(A) E[X2] E2[X] (C) E[X2]
(B) E[X2] + E2[X] (D) E2[X]
24. Let S be a sample space and two mutually
exclusive events A and B be such that
6. An examination consists of two papers,
∪ S If ( ) denotes the prob bility
Paper1 and Paper2. The probability of
of the event, the maximum value of
failing in Paper1 is 0.3 and that in Paper2
P(A) P(B) is _______
is 0.2.Given that a student has failed in
ECE - 2005 Paper2, the probability of failing in
1. A fair dice is rolled twice. The probability paper1 is 0.6. The probability of a student
that an odd number will follow an even failing in both the papers is
number is (A) 0.5 (C) 0.12
(B) 0.18 (D) 0.06
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
2. The value of the integral

1   x2 
2 0
I exp  dx is
 8
(A) 1 (C) 2
(B) (D)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2008 8. (x) exp( |x|) exp( |x|) is

7. The probability density function (PDF) of the probability density function for the
a random variable X is as shown below. real random variable X, over the entire x
PDF axis. M and N are both positive real
1 PDF
numbers. The equation relating M and N
is
(A) 1
1 0 x (B) 2M N=1
11
The -1
corresponding
0
cumulative (C) M + N = 1
distribution function (CDF) has the form (D) M + N = 3
CDF ECE - 2009

(A)
1 9. Consider two independent random
variables X and Y with identical
x distributions. The variables X and Y take
value 0, 1 and 2 with probabilities
and respectively. What is the
1 0 1 x conditional probability
(x y |x y| )
(B) 1 CD
C
F (A) 0 (C) ⁄
D
F (B) ⁄ (D) 1
1
10. A fair coin is tossed 10 times. What is the

probability that ONLY the first two tosses
will yield heads?
1 0
1 x 2 10
1 1
(A)   (C)  
-1 0 CDF 1  2  2
(C) 1 0 2 10
10 1 10 1
(B) C2   (D) C2  
 2  2
11. A discrete random variable X takes values

x from 1 to 5 with probabilities as shown in
0 1 the table. A student calculates the mean of
1
X as 3.5 and her teacher calculates the
variance of X as 1.5. Which of the
(D) CDF following statements is true?
1
k P(X=k)
1
1 0.1
0 1 x 2 0.2
1
0 1 3 0.4
1 4 0.2
5 0.1
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) Both the student and the teacher are (C) ( (x) (x)) x
right (D) ( (x) (x)) x ≥
(B) Both the student and the teacher are
wrong ECE - 2014
(C) The student is wrong but the teacher 17. In a housing society, half of the families
is right have a single child per family, while the
(D) The student is right but the teacher is remaining half have two children per
wrong family. The probability that a child picked
at random, has a sibling is _____
ECE - 2010
12. A fair coin is tossed independently four 18. Let X X nd X , be independent and
times. The prob bility of the event “the identically distributed random variables
number of times heads show up is more with the uniform distribution on [0, 1].
th n the number of times t ils show up” is The probability P{X is the largest} is _____
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
19. Let X be a random variable which is
uniformly chosen from the set of positive
ECE - 2011
odd numbers less than 100. The
13. A fair dice is tossed two times. The
expectation, E[X], is __________.
probability that the second toss results in
a value that is higher than the first toss is
20. An unbiased coin is tossed an infinite
(A) 2/36 (C) 5/12
number of times. The probability that the
(B) 2/6 (D) 1/2
fourth head appears at the tenth toss is
(A) 0.067 (C) 0.082
ECE\EE\IN - 2012
(B) 0.073 (D) 0.091
14. A fair coin is tossed till a head appears for
the first time probability that the number 21. A fair coin is tossed repeatedly till both
of required tosses is odd , is head and tail appear at least once. The
(A) 1/3 (C) 2/3 average number of tosses required is
(B) 1/2 (D) 3/4 _______.
ECE - 2013 22. Let X X and X be independent and

15. Let U and V be two independent zero identically distributed random variables
mean Gaussian random variables of with the uniform distribution on [0, 1].
variances ⁄ and ⁄ respectively. The The probability P{X X X } is ______.
probability ( V ≥ U) is
23. Let X be a zero mean unit variance
(A) 4/9 (C) 2/3
Gaussian random variable. ,|x|- is equal
(B) 1/2 (D) 5/9
to __________
16. Consider two identically distributed zero-
24. Parcels from sender S to receiver R pass
mean random variables U and V . Let the
sequentially through two post-offices.
cumulative distribution functions of U
Each post-office has a probability of
and 2V be F(x) and G(x) respectively.
Then, for all values of x losing an incoming parcel, independently
(A) ( (x) (x)) of all other parcels. Given that a parcel is
lost, the probability that it was lost by the
(B) ( (x) (x)) ≥
second post-office is ____________.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2005 EE - 2008
1. If P and Q are two random events, then 5. X is a uniformly distributed random
the following is TRUE variable that takes values between 0 and
(A) Independence of P and Q implies that 1. The value of E{X } will be
probability (P Q) = 0 (A) 0 (C) 1/4
(B) Probability (P ∪ Q)≥ Probability (P) (B) 1/8 (D) 1/2
+Probability (Q)
EE - 2009
(C) If P and Q are mutually exclusive,
6. Assume for simplicity that N people, all
then they must be independent
born in April (a month of 30 days), are
(D) Probability (P Q) Probability (P)
collected in a room. Consider the event of
2. A fair coin is tossed three times in atleast two people in the room being born
succession. If the first toss produces a on the same date of the month, even if in
head, then the probability of getting different years, e.g. 1980 and 1985. What
exactly two heads in three tosses is is the smallest N so that the probability of
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ this event exceeds 0.5?
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄ (A) 20 (C) 15
(B) 7 (D) 16
EE - 2006
3. Two f ir dice re rolled nd the sum “ r ” EE - 2010
of the numbers turned up is considered 7. A box contains 4 white balls and 3 red
(A) Pr (r > 6) = balls. In succession, two balls are
randomly selected and removed from the
(B) Pr (r/3 is an integer) = box. Given that the first removed ball is
(C) Pr (r = 8|r/4 is an integer) = white, the probability that the second
removed ball is red is
(D) Pr (r = 6|r/5 is an integer) =
(A) 1/3 (C) 1/2
(B) 3/7 (D) 4/7
EE - 2007
4. A loaded dice has following probability ECE\EE\IN - 2012
distribution of occurrences 8. Two independent random variables X and
Dice Value Probability Y are uniformly distributed in the interval
1 ⁄ , -. The probability that max , - is
2 ⁄ less than 1/2 is
3 ⁄ (A) 3/4 (C) 1/4
(B) 9/16 (D) 2/3
4 ⁄
5 ⁄ EE - 2013
6 ⁄ 9. A continuous random variable x has a
If three identical dice as the above are probability density function
thrown, the probability of occurrence of f(x) e x . Then *x + is
values, 1, 5 and 6 on the three dice is (A) 0.368 (C) 0.632
(A) same as that of occurrence of 3, 4, 5 (B) 0.5 (D) 1.0
(B) same as that of occurrence of 1, 2, 5
(C) 1/128
(D) 5/8
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2014 IN - 2005
10. A fair coin is tossed n times. The 1. The probability that there are 53 Sundays
probability that the difference between in a randomly chosen leap year is
the number of heads and tails is (n – 3) is (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(A) (C) (B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
(B) (D)
2. A mass of 10 kg is measured with an
11. Consider a dice with the property that the instrument and the readings are normally
probability of a face with n dots showing distributed with respect to the mean of
up is proportional to n. The probability of 10 kg. Given that
the face with three dots showing up is ∫ exp . / d =0.6
√
_______________ and that 60per cent of the readings are
found to be within 0.05 kg from the mean,
12. Let x be a random variable with
the standard deviation of the data is
probability density function
(A) 0.02 (C) 0.06
for |x| (B) 0.04 (D) 0.08
f(x) { for |x|
otherwise 3. The measurements of a source voltage are
The probability P(0.5 < x < 5) is_________ 5.9V, 5.7V and 6.1V. The sample standard
deviation of the readings is
13. Lifetime of an electric bulb is a random (A) 0.013 (C) 0.115
variable with density f(x) kx , where x (B) 0.04 (D) 0.2
is measured in years. If the minimum and
maximum lifetimes of bulb are 1 and 2 IN - 2006
years respectively, then the value of k 4. You have gone to a cyber-cafe with a
is__________ friend. You found that the cyber-café has
only three terminals. All terminals are
14. The mean thickness and variance of unoccupied. You and your friend have to
silicon steel laminations are 0.2 mm and make a random choice of selecting a
0.02 respectively. The varnish insulation terminal. What is the probability that
is applied on both the sides of the both of you will NOT select the same
laminations. The mean thickness of one terminal?
side insulation and its variance are (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
0.1 mm and 0.01 respectively. If the (B) ⁄ (D) 1
transformer core is made using 100 such
5. Probability density function p(x) of a
varnish coated laminations, the mean
random variable x is as shown below. The
thickness and variance of the core
value of  is
respectively are
p(x)
(A) 30 mm and 0.22
(B) 30 mm and 2.44
(C) 40 mm and 2.44 α
(D) 40 mm and 0.24
0 α α b α c
(A) c (C)
( )
(B) c (D)
( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. Two dices are rolled simultaneously. The measurements, it can be expected that the
probability that the sum of digits on the number of measurement more than 10.15
top surface of the two dices is even is mm will be
(A) 0.5 (C) 0.167 (A) 230 (C) 15
(B) 0.25 (D) 0.125 (B) 115 (D) 2
IN - 2007 IN - 2011
7. Assume that the duration in minutes of a 12. The box 1 contains chips numbered 3, 6,
telephone conversation follows the 9, 12 and 15. The box 2 contains chips
exponential distribution f(x) = e ,x≥ numbered 6, 11, 16, 21 and 26. Two chips,
one from each box, are drawn at random.
The probability that the conversation will
The numbers written on these chips are
exceed five minutes is
multiplied. The probability for the
(A) e (C) product to be an even number is
(B) e
(D) e (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
IN - 2008
8. Consider a Gaussian distributed random IN - 2013
variable with zero mean and standard 13. A continuous random variable X has
deviation . The value of its cummulative probability density f(x) = .
distribution function at the origin will be Then P(X > 1) is
(A) 0 (C) 1 (A) 0.368 (C) 0.632
(B) 0.5 (D) σ (B) 0.5 (D) 1.0
9. A random variable is uniformly IN - 2014

distributed over the interval 2 to 10. Its 14. Given that x is a random variable in the
variance will be r nge , - with prob bility density
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) 6 (D) 36 function the value of the constant k is
___________________
IN - 2009
10. A screening test is carried out to detect a 15. The figure shows the schematic of
certain disease. It is found that 12% of the production process with machines A,B
positive reports and 15% of the negative and C. An input job needs to be pre-
reports are incorrect. Assuming that the processed either by A or by B before it is
probability of a person getting a positive fed to C, from which the final finished
report is 0.01, the probability that a product comes out. The probabilities of
person tested gets an incorrect report is failure of the machines are given as:
(A) 0.0027 (C) 0.1497
(B) 0.0173 (D) 0.2100
IN - 2010
11. The diameters of 10000 ball bearings
were measured. The mean diameter and Assuming independence of failures of the
standard deviation were found to be machines, the probability that a given job
10 mm and 0.05mm respectively. is successfully processed (up to third
Assuming Gaussian distribution of decimal place)is ______________
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME 4. [Ans. D]
1. [Ans. D] ( oth defective)
( oth defective)
The number of ways coming 8 and 9 are S mple sp ce
(2,6),(3,5),(4,4),(5,3),(6,2),(3,6),(4,5),
(5,4),(6,3)
Total ways =9
So Probability of coming 8 and 9 are 5. [Ans. D]
X and Y are independent
∴ ( ) ( ) ( ) re true
So probability of not coming these Only (D) is odd one
6. [Ans. A]
Number of favourable cases are given by
2. [Ans. B]
HHHT
Probability of defective item = HHTH
Probability of not defective item = 1 0.1 HTHH
= 0.9 THHH
So, Probability that exactly 2 of the Total number of cases
chosen items are defective = 2C1 2C1 2C1 2C1 =16
= ( ) ( ) ∴ Probability =
3. [Ans. B] 7. [Ans. A]
Mean (t)̅ = ∫ t f(t) dt A uniform distribution and density
function
∫ t( t)dt ∫ t( t)dt
0,x  a
x x  a

6
t t
7 6
t t
7 f(x)   f  x dx   , axb
0 b  a

0, xb
[ ] [ ]
Density function
 1 a,x  b

f(x)   b  a
Variance = ∫ t f(t)dt  0 a  x,x  b
=∫ t ( t)dt ∫ t ( t)dt b
ab
=∫ (t t )dt ∫ t ( t)dt
 Mean E(x)= x(F(x)) 
x a 2
 Variance = F(x)2  f(x)
2
=0 1 0 1
2
b
b 
 x F(x)  xF(x)
= 2
Standard deviation = √v ri nce x a  x a 

= Put the value of F(x), we get
√ 2
1
b
b 1 
Variance  x dx  x.
2
dx 
x a ba  x a b  a 
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
b 2 3
 x3   xL  1 7
     (3  3  1)  
3(b  a) a  2 b  a    2 8
b3  a3 (b2  a2 )2
 
3(b  a) 4 b  a 2 9. [Ans. C]
Probability of drawing 2 washers, first
(b  a)(b2  ab  a2 ) (b  a)2(b  a)2 followed by 3 nuts, and subsequently the
 
3(b  a) 4 b  a
2
4 bolts
4b2  4ab  4a2  3a2  3b2  6ab

12
b2  a2  2ab
 10. [Ans. D]
12
Required probability = . / . /
(b  a)2

12
Standard deviation = √v ri nce
(b  a)2 11. [Ans. D]

12 Given 4R and 6B
(b  a) , -

12
Given: b=1, a=0
10 1
 Standard deviation = 
12 12
8. [Ans. D]
Let probability of getting atleast one head 12. [Ans. C]
= P(H) then
P (at least one head) = 1 P(no head)
 P(H)=1 P(all tails)
But in all cases, 23=8
1 7 X=0
X=1
 P (H) = 1  
8 8 Below X (X ) is
Alternately (X ) has to be less than 0.5 but
Probability of getting at least one head greater than zero
( ) ( )
13. [Ans. D]
1 7 A event that he knows the correct
1  
8 8 answer
Alternately B event that student answered
From Binomial theorem correctly the question P(B) = ?
Probability of getting at least one head ( ) ( )
pq
( ) ( ) ( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) No. of employed men = 80% of men = 80

No. of employed women
⏟ ⏟
= 50% of women = 50
he knows e does not know Probability if the selected one person
correct nswer correct nswer being employed
so he guesses = probability of one employed women
+probability of one employed man
( ) ( ) ( ⁄ )
( ) ⁄
( ⁄ )
( ) ⁄ 18. [Ans. A]
14. [Ans. D]
x 1 2 3
P(x) 0.3 0.6 0.1
(x) x (x)
So from figure
(x)
Mean value = 1
x (x) V ri nce : μ me n x defective pieces
(x μ)
σ V(x) (x ) , (x)- σ
n(n )
x (x) ( x (x)) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
σ √
( )
15. [Ans. A]
19. [Ans. *](Range 49 to 51)
16. [Ans. *] Range 0.25 to 0.27

p
orm l distribution
q Given that μ σ
Using Binomial distribution x μ x
z
σ
(x ≥ ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ere x μ , s x gre ter th n -
z
ence prob bility (z )
∫ e dz
17. [Ans. *] Range 0.64 to 0.66 σ√
Let number of men = 100 ∴ of s ving ccount holder
Number of women = 100
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
20. [Ans. B] 25 Calculators

Mean m = np = 5.2
me m 2 Defective 23 Non-defective
(x ) e
e
e 5 Calculators
(x )
1 Defective 4 Non-defective
CE p( defective in c lcul tors)
1. [Ans D]
A, B, C are true
(D) is not true. Since in a negatively
skewed distribution
4. [Ans. C]
mode > median > mean
σ
μ
2. [Ans. D]
Let the mean and standard deviation of
5. [Ans. B]
the students of batch C be μ and σ
Given f(x) = x for x
respectively and the mean and standard
= 0 else where
deviation of entire class of first year
students be μ and σ respectively
Now given, μ ( x ) ∫ f(x)dx ∫ x dx
σ
and μ
σ =0 1
In order to normalise batch C to entire
The probability expressed in percentage
class, the normalize score must be
equated P=
since Z = = 2.469% = 2.47%
Z = =
6. [Ans. A]
Now Z = = Given
Equation these two and solving, we get P(private car) = 0.45
= P(bus 1 public transport) = 0.55
Since a person has a choice between
 x = 8.969 ≃ 9.0
private car and public transport
P(public transport) = 1 – P(private car)
3. [Ans. B]
= 1 – 0.45 =0.55
Since population is finite, hypergeometric
P(bus) = P(bus public transport)
distribution is applicable
(bus public tr nsport)
(public tr nsport)
= 0.55 × 0.55
= 0.3025 ≃ 0.30
Now P(metro)
= 1 [P(private car) + P(bus)]
= 1 (0.45 + 0.30) = 0.25
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
∴ P(private car) = 0.45 12. [Ans. 6]

P(bus) = 0.30 ∫ f(x)dx
and P(metro) = 0.25 ( x x ) x
f(x) {
otherwise
7. [Ans. D] ∴∫ ( x x )dx
ere μ cm; σ cm
x x
( x 102) 6 x7
=P. x /
=P( x ) [ ( ) ( ) ( )]
This area is shown below:
[ ]
[ ]
-0.44
The shades area in above figure is given
by F(0) –F ( 0.44)
= ( )( )
( ) ( )
= 0.5 – 0.3345 13. [Ans. 0.4]
= 1.1655 ≃ 16.55%
Closest answer is 16.7% ( ) ∫ f( )d ∫ d
8. [Ans. C]
( )| ( )
P(2 heads) =
9. [Ans. C]
P(one ball is Red & another is blue) 14. [Ans. *] Range 0.26 to 0.27
= P(first is Red and second is Blue) Avg= 5
= Let x denote penalty
(x ) (x ) (x )
(x ) (x )
10. [Ans. A]
Given μ = 1000, σ = 200 e
ew (x n)
x
We know that Z
e e e e
p(x )
When X= 1200, Z
Req. Prob = P (X ) e [ ]
(Z )
( Z )
Less than 50%
15. [Ans. B]
S * T+
11. [Ans. D]
n( )
(X ) (X ) (X ) ( )
n(S)
( ) ( )
16. [Ans. *] Range 0.25 to 0.28
e ( t)
(n t)
n
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
no of vehicles veh km m ke ex ctly ‘ ’ moves nd ‘U’ moves

in any order.
e . /
( ) Similarly to reach (10, 10) from (0,0) the
robot h s to m ke ‘ ’ moves nd ‘U’
= 2.e
moves in any order. The number of ways
= 0.2707
this can be done is same as number of
CS permutations of a word consisting of 10
1. [Ans. A] ‘ ’ s nd ’U’s
P: Event of selecting Box P, Applying formula of permutation with
Q: Event of selecting Box P limited repetitions we get the answer
P(P)=1/3, P(Q)=2/3 as
P(R/P)=2/5, P(R/Q)=3/4
P(R/P).P(P)
P(P/R)= 5. [Ans. D]
P(R/P).P(P)  P(R/Q)P(Q)
2/51/3 The robot can reach (4,4) from (0,0) in
  4/19 8C ways as argued in previous problem.
2/51/3  3/ 4  2/3 4
Now after reaching (4,4) robot is not
allowed to go to (5,4)
2. [Ans. C]
Let us count how many paths are there
If f (x) is the continuous probability
from (0,0) to (10,10) if robot goes from
density function of a random variable X
(4,4) to (5,4) and then we can subtract
then,
this from total number of ways to get the
( x b) P( x b)
b
answer.
= f  x  dx
 Now there are 8C4 ways for robot to reach
a (4,4) from (0,0) and then robot takes the
3. [Ans. A] ‘U’ move from ( ) to ( ) ow from
The probability that exactly n elements (5,4) to (10,10) the robot has to make 5
are chosen ‘U’ moves nd ‘ ’ moves in ny order
=The probability of getting n heads out of which can be done in 11! ways
2n tosses = 11C5 ways
= ( ) . / (Binomial formula) Therefore, the number of ways robot can
move from (0,0) (10,10) via (4,4) – (5,4)
= ( ) ( )
move is
=
 8   11
8C
4
11C
5 =    
4. [Ans. A]  4 5 
Consider the following diagram No. of ways robot can move from (0,0) to
(3,3) (10,10) without using (4,4) to (5,4) move
is
 20  8   11
       ways
 10   4   5 
(0,0)
which is choice (D)
The robot can move only right or up as
defined in problem. Let us denote right
move by ‘ ’ nd up move by ‘U’ ow to
reach (3, 3), from (0,0) , the robot has to
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. D] 8. [Ans. C]
umber of permut tions with ‘ ’ in the Let C denote computes science study and
first position =19! M denotes maths study.
Number of permutations with ‘ ’ in the P(C on Monday and C on Wednesday)
second position = 10 18! = P(C on Monday, M on Tuesday and C on
(Fill the first space with any of the 10 odd Wednesday)
numbers and the 18 spaces after the 2 + P(C on Monday, C on Tuesday and C on
with 18 of the remaining numbers in 18! Wednesday)
ways) =1 0.6 0.4+ 1 0.4 0.4
umber of permut tions with ‘ ’ in rd = 0.24 + 0.16 = 0.40
position =10 9 17!
9. [Ans. B]
(Fill the first 2 place with 2 of the 10 odd
It is given that
numbers and then the remaining 17
P (odd) = 0.9 P (even)
places with remaining 17 numbers)
Now since 𝜮P(x) = 1
nd so on until ‘ ’ is in th place. After
∴ P (odd) + P (even) = 1
that it is not possible to satisfy the given
0.9 P (even) + P (even) = 1
condition, since there are only 10 odd
numbers v il ble to fill before the ‘ ’ P(even) = = 0.5263
So the desired number of permutations Now, it is given that P(any even face) is same
which satisfies the given condition is i.e. P(2) = P(4) = P(6)
Now since,
… P(even) = P(2) or P(4) or P(6)
Now the probability of this happening is = P(2) + P(4) + P(6)
given by = ∴ P(2) = P(4) = P(6) = P(even)
( … )
= (0.5263)
Which are clearly not choices (A), (B) or (C) = 0.1754
It is given that
7. [Ans. A]
P(even | face > 3) = 0.75
Given μ = 1, σ = 4 σ =2 ( )
and μ = 1, σ is unknown = 0.75
( )
Given, P(X ) = P (Y ≥ 2 ) ( )
= 0.75
( )
Converting into standard normal variates, ( ) ( )
P(f ce ) = =0.468
.z / = P (z ≥ )
( ) 10. [Ans. A]
.z / = P (z ≥ )
The tree diagram of probabilities is
shown below
(z ) = P (z ≥ ) _____(i)
q decl red f ulty
Now since we know that in standard f ulty
p
normal distribution
q decl red not f ulty
P (z ) = P (z ≥ 1) _____(ii) decl red f ulty
not q
Comparing (i) and (ii) we can say that p
f ulty
=1 σ =3
q decl red not f ulty
From above tree

(decl red f ulty) pq ( q)( p)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. [Ans. A]
( )
If b c …
Then, no. of divisors of ( ∪ ) ( t le st one he d)
(x )(y )(z )… ( TT )
iven
∴ o of ivisors of
So required prob bility
( )( )
( )( )
16. [Ans. B]
No. of divisors of which are multiples Required Probability
of = P (getting 6 in the first time)
o of divisors of + P (getting 1 in the first time and getting
( )( ) 5 or 6 in the second time)
+ P (getting 2 in the first time and getting
4 or 5 or 6 in the second time)
+ P (getting 3 in the first time and getting
∴ equired rob bility
3 or 4 or 5 or 6 in the second time)
( ) ( ) ( )
12. [Ans. C]
V(x) (x ) , (x)-
17. [Ans. C]
Where V(x) is the variance of x,
The p.d.f of the random variable is
Since variance is σ and hence never
x +1
negative, ≥
P(x) 0.5 0.5
The cumulative distribution function F(x)
13. [Ans. A]
is the probability upto x as given below
The five cards are * +
x +1
Sample space ordered pairs F(x) 0.5 1.0
P (1 card = 2 card + 1)
st nd
So correct option is (C)
*( )( )( )( )+
18. [Ans. C]
e
(k)
k
14. [Ans. D] P is no. of cars per minute travelling.
𝛔y = a 𝛔x is the correct expression
Since variance of constant is zero. For no cars. (i.e. k = 0)
For no cars. P(0) e
15. [Ans. A] So P can be either 0,1,2. (i.e. k = 0,1,2)
Let A be the event of head in one coin. B For k = 1, p(1)=e
be the event of head in second coin.
For k = 2 , P(2)=
The required probability is
* ) ( ∪ )+ Hence
( )| ∪ ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ∪ )
( ) e e e
( ∪ )
( ) (both coin he ds) 4 5
e
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ⁄ )
e ( ) ( )
( )
e e ∴ equired prob bility is
( ) ( ∪ ∪ )
19. [Ans. *] Range 0.24 to 0.27
The smaller sticks, therefore, will range in
24. [Ans. 0.25]
length from almost 0 meters upto a
( ∪ ) P(S) = 1
maximum of 0.5 meters, with each length
( ) ( ) ( )
equally possible.
utu lly exclusive ( )
Thus, the average length will be about
( ) ( )
0.25 meters, or about a quarter of the
et ( ) x; ( ) x
stick.
P(A) P(B) = x( x)
Maximum value of y = x ( x)
20. [Ans. 10]
dy
22 occurs in following ways ( x) x
dx
6 6 6 4 w ys
= 2x = 1
6 6 5 5 w ys
x
equired prob bility (max)
x ximum v lue of y ( )
21. [Ans. *] Range 11.85 to 11.95

For functioning 3 need to be working ECE
1. [Ans. D]
(function)
3 1
P(Odd number)  
6 2
3 1
P(even number )  
6 2
Since events are independent, therefore
1 1 1
p  P(odd/even)   
2 2 4
22. [Ans. *] Range 3.8 to 3.9
Expected length = Average length of all 2. [Ans. A]
words ( )
I ∫ e dx
√
omp ring with
( )
∫ e dx
σ√
23. [Ans. *] Range 0.259 to 0.261 ut μ
Let A = divisible by 2, B = divisible by 3
and C = divisible by 5, then ∫ e dx …
√ σ
n(A) = 50, n(B) = 33, n(C) = 20 rom nd
n( ) n( ) n( ) x x
n( ) σ
P( ∪ ∪ ) σ
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Put σ in equ tion Probability of failing in paper 2,

P (B) = 0.2
∫ e
√ Probability of failing in paper 1, when
A
student has failed in paper 2, P  0.6
3. [Ans. C] B
 A  P A  B

 P x.dx  1

We know that, P  
 B PB

∴ ( ) ( ) ( )
 Ke .dx  1
ax

 = 0.6 0.2
or ∫ e dx ∫ e dx = 0.12
 x x,for x  0 
  7. [Ans. A]
  x for x  0 x
K K CDF: F x    PDF dx
  1 
a a x
 For x<0, F x     x  1 dx
1
4. [Ans. D] 0 1 conc ve upw rds

. / ( )
P (Y/D) = 1
. / ( ) . / ( ) . / ( ) F0 
2
= =0.4 x
For x>0, F x   F0   x  1 dx
0
5. [Ans. A]
var[x]=σ =E[(x x)2] 1  x2 
   x  concave downwards
Where, x=E[x] 2  2 
x= expected or mean value of X defining Hence the CDF is, shown in the figure (A).

E[X] =  xf  xdx

x 8. [Ans. A]
 Given: Px  x   Me2|x|  Ne3|x|
 
  x P xi   x  xi dx 
  i 
 P  xdx  1
x
 xiP xi  
 
   
i
Variance σ is a measure of the spread of Me2|x|  Ne3|x| dx  2 Me2|x|  Ne3|x| dx  1

 0
the values of X from its mean x.
Using relation , E[X+Y]= E[X]+E[Y] By simplifying
2
And E[CX]=CE[X]  M N 1
On var[x]= σ =E[(x x)2] 3
σ = ,X- x2
9. [Ans. B]
= E[X2] [ ,X-]
x+y=2
x y=0
6. [Ans. C] => x =1, y = 1
Probability of failing in paper 1, P(x=1,y=1) = ¼ ¼ = 1/16
P (A) = 0.3
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. C] 14. [Ans. C]

Probability of getting head in first toss = P(no. of tosses is odd)
(no of tosses is …)
Probability of getting head in second toss
P(no. of toss is 1) = P(Head in 1st toss)
= and in all other 8 tosses there should
P(no. of toss is 3) = P(tail in first toss, tail
be tail always.
in second toss and head in third toss)
So probability of getting head in first two
tosses
( )( )( )…………… ( )
P(no. of toss is 5) = P(T,T,T,TH)
= (1/2)10
. / … etc
11. [Ans. B]
So,
Both the teacher and student are wrong
P(no. of tosses in odd)
Mean = ∑ k
= 0.1 + 0.4 + 1.2 + 0.8 + 0.5
= 3.0 ⁄
E(x2) = ∑ k
⁄
⁄
⁄
Variance(x)= E(x2) – * (x)+ =10.2 9=1.2
12. [Ans. D] 15. [Ans. B]

P(H, H, H, T) +P (H, H, H, H ) ( V ≥ V)
= . / . / . / = ( V V≥ )
*z v v+ Linear combination of
Gaussian random variable is Gaussian
∴ (z ≥ ) and not mean till zero
13. [Ans. C]
because both random variables has mean
Total number of cases = 36
zero hence ( )
Favorable cases:
Hence Option B is correct
(1, 1) (2, 1) (3, 1) (4, 1) (5, 1)
(6, 1)
16. [Ans. D]
(1, 2) (2, 2) (3, 2) (4, 2) (5, 2)
F(x) = P{X x}
(6, 2)
(x) * X x+
(1, 3) (2, 3) (3, 3) (4, 3) (5, 3) x
(6, 3) 2X 3
(1, 4) (2, 4) (3, 4) (4, 4) (5, 4) For positive value of x,
(6, 4) (x) (x) is always greater than zero
(1, 5) (2, 5) (3, 5) (4, 5) (5, 5) For negative value of x
(6, 5) (x) (x)is ve
(1, 6) (2, 6) (3, 6) (4, 6) (5, 6) ut , (x) (x)- x ≥
(6, 6)
Total number of favorable cases
Then probability
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. *] Range 0.65 to 0.68

et ‘ ’ be different types of f milies nd ‘S’ (x) ∑ x (x)
be there siblings.
S …
S S (siblings)
Probability that child chosen at random et S …… (I)
having sibling is 2/3
S …… (II)
18. [Ans. *] Range 0.32 to 0.34 (I II)gives
This is a tricky question, here, X X X
( )S ……
independent and identically distributed
random variables with the uniform
distribution , -. So, they are S
equiprobable. So X X or X have chances
being largest are equiprobable. S
(x)
So, [P {X is largest}] or [P {X is largest}]
or [P {X is largest}] =1 i.e. The expected number of tosses (after
and P {X is largest} = P {X is largest} = first head) to get first tail is 2 and same
P {X is largest} can be applicable if first toss results in
tail.
∴ *X is l rgest + Hence the average number of tosses is
19. [Ans. *] Range 49.9 to 50.1

Set of positive odd number less than 100 22. [Ans. *] Range 0.15 to 0.18
is 50. As it is a uniform distribution X X X X X X
f(x) et z X X X
(X X X ) (z )
∴ (x) ∑x f(x) ∑x Pdf of z we need to determine. It is the
convolution of three pdf
, … -
20. [Ans. C]
21. [Ans. *] Range 2.9 to 3.1

Let the first toss be head. z z
(z ) ∫ dz |
Let x denotes the number of tosses(after
getting first head) to get first tail.
We can summarize the even as
Event(After x Probability
getting first H) 23. [Ans. *] Range 0.79 to 0.81
T 1 1/2 |x|
,|x|- ∫ e dx
HT 2 1/2 1/2=1/4 √
HHT 3 1/8
nd so on…
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x ∴pr(P ∪ Q) pr(P) + pr(Q)

∫ |x| exp 4 5 dx
√ (D) is true
x since P Q P
∫ |x| exp 4 5 dx n(P Q) n(P)
√
x pr(P Q) pr(P)
∫ x exp 4 5 dx
√ 2. [Ans. B]
x ( )
∫ x exp 4 5 dx P(A|B) =
( )
√
∴ P(2 heads in 3 tosses | first toss is
x
∫ x exp 4 5 dx head)
√ ( he ds in tosses nd first toss in he d)
(first toss is he d)
√ [ exp ( x ) dx]
Also, P(first toss is head) =
( he d in tosses nd first toss in he d)
√ , - √ = P(HHT) + P(HTH)
24. [Ans. *] Range 0.43 to 0.45

Pre flow diagram is
Parcel is ∴ Required probability = =
sent to R
Parcel is sent to 4/5 R
3. [Ans. C]
4/5
If two fair dices are rolles the probability
S 1/5
Parcel is lost distribution of r where r is the sum of the
1/5
Parcel is lost numbers on each die is given by
Probability that parcel is lost r P(r)
2
Probability that parcel is lost by
3
Probability that parcel is lost by 4

provided that the parcel is lost
5
EE 6
1. [Ans. D]
(A) is false since of P & Q are 7
independent
8
pr(P Q) = pr(P) pr(Q)
which need not be zero.
9
(B) is false since
pr(P ∪ Q) 10
= pr(P) + pr(Q) – pr(P Q)
(C) is false since independence and 11
mutually exclusion are unrelated
properties. 12
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
The above table has been obtained by P(1, 5, 6) = =

taking all different all different ways of
P(3, 4, 5) = =
obtaining a particular sum. For example, a
sum of 5 can be obtained by (1, 4), (2, 3), P(1, 2, 5) = =
(3, 2) and (4, 1). ∴ Choice (C) P(1, 5 and 6) = is correct.
∴ P(x = 5) = 4/36
Now let us consider choice (A)
5. [Ans. C]
Pr(r > 6) = Pr(r ≥ 7)
x is uniformly distributes in [0, 1]
= ∴ Probability density function
= = f(x) = = =1
∴ Choice (A) i.e. pr(r > 6) = 1/6 is wrong. ∴ f(x) = 1 0 < x < 1
Consider choice (B) Now E(x ) = ∫ x f(x)dx
pr(r/3 is an integer)
= pr(r = 3) + pr (r = 6) + pr (r = 9)
∫x dx
+ pr (r = 1)
=
6. [Ans. B]
= =
Let N people in room. So no. of events that
∴ Choice (B) i.e. pr (r/3) is an integer at least two people in room born at same
= 5/6 is wrong.
date
Consider choice (C)
…
Now, ≥
N
pr(r/4 is an integer) = pr(r = 4)
Solving, we get N = 7
+ pr (r = 8) + pr (r = 12)
= + 7. [Ans. C]
= = (II is red|I is white)
(II is red nd I is white)
pr(r = 8) = (I is white)
∴ pr(r = 8 | r/4 is an integer) = = (I is white nd II is red)
(I is white)
=
∴ Choice (C) is correct.
4. [Ans. C]
Dice value Probability
1
8. [Ans. B]
2 and is the entrie
rectangle
3
The region in which maximum of {x, y} is
4 less than ⁄ is shown below as shaded
region inside this rectangle
5
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
y 12. [Ans. *] Range 0.35 to 0.45

( ) ( )
( x ) ∫ f(x)dx
∫ dx ∫ dx ∫ dx
x| x|
( ) ( )
13. [Ans. *] Range 0.4 to 0.5
p .m x,x y- / ∫ f(x) dx by property
∴ ∫ kx dx
x
k | k ∴k
9. [Ans. A] 14. [Ans. D]
(x ) ∫ e dx , e - IN
,e e - e 1. [Ans. D]
Since leap chosen will be random, so, we
assume it being the case of uniform
10. [Ans. B] probability distribution function.
Let number of heads = x, Number of days in a leap year=366 days
∴ Number of tails n x =52 weeks and 2 days are extra. Out of
∴ ifference x (n x)or (n x) x
7, (SUN MON) (or) (SAT SUN) are
x n or n x
favorable.
If x n n x n
So, Probability of this event=
x n
If n x n x or x 2. [Ans. C]
As x and n are integers, this is not Since the reading taken by the instrument
possible is normally distributed, hence
( )
∴ Probability 0 P(x x ) ∫ e .dx
√
Where, μ e n of the distribution
11. [Ans. *] Range 0.13 to 0.15 σ St nd rd devi tion of the
Let proportionality constant = k distribution.
∴ ( dot) k ( dots) k
Now ∫ exp( )dx
( dots) k √
( dots) k ( dots) k where, n=x 10 (∴μ kg)

( dots) k and from the data given in question
∴k k k k k k ∫ e dx
√
k ∴k On equating, we get 0.05=0.84 σ
∴ rob bility of showing dots k σ
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. D] 8. [Ans. B]
Mean= =5.9 V. By definition of Gaussian distribution,
total area under the curve =1. Hence half
( ̅) ( ̅) ( ̅)
S √ of the area =0.5
V
(closest answer is 0.2) 9. [Ans. A]
P(x)= =
4. [Ans. C] Mean = μ ∫ x (x)dx = ∫ x dx = 6
( ) ( )
Var(x)= ∫ (x μ) (x)dx
1 2
 =∫ (x ) dx =
3 3
5. [Ans. A] ] 10. [Ans. C]

 Probability of incorrect report
 P(x)dx  1

c
 Area under triangle = 1
2 11. [Ans. C]
α σ mm
μ mm
6. [Ans. A] Then probability
Probability that the sum of digits of two X μ
(X ) ( )
σ
dices is even is same either both dices
where x mm
shows even numbers or odd numbers on
the top of the surface ( ) ( )
∴ ( ) ( ) ( )
Where e
√
( ) Probability of occurring even
number of both the dices e
√
( ) Probability of occurring odd
number of both the dices So, number of measurement more than
( ) 10.15mm
P Total number of measurement
nd ( )
≃
∴ ( )
12. [Ans. D]
7. [Ans. A] For the product to be even, the numbers
from both the boxes should not turn out
∫ f(x) dx=P
to be odd simultaneously.
or ∫ e .dx =P
∴ ( ) ( )( )
or e |
or P = .
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. [Ans. A]
∫ f(x)dx ∫ e dx
e | e
14. [Ans. 2]
For valid pdf ∫ pdf dx ;
∫ dx ;k
15. [Ans. *] Range 0.890 to 0.899

Probability that job is successfully
processed = ( )( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Numerical Methods
ME – 2005 ME – 2010
1. Starting from x = 1, one step of Newton – 6. Torque exerted on a flywheel over a cycle
Raphson method in solving the equation is listed in the table. Flywheel energy (in
x³ +3x 7=0 gives the next value (x₁) as J per unit cycle) using impson’s rule is
(A) x₁=0.5 (C) x₁ = .5 Angle (degree) Torque (N-m)
(B) x₁= . 0 (D) x₁=2 0 0
60 1066
2. With a 1 unit change in b, what is the
change in x in the solution of the system 120 323
of equation = 2 .0 0. = 180 0
(A) Zero (C) 50 units 240 323
(B) 2 units (D) 100 units 300 55
360 0
ME – 2006 (A) 542 (C) 1444
3. Match the items in columns I and II. (B) 992.7 (D) 1986
Column I Column II
(P) Gauss-Seidel (1) Interpolation ME – 2011
method 7. The integral ∫ dx, when evaluated by
(Q) Forward (2) Non-linear using impson’s / rule on two equal
Newton-Gauss differential subintervals each of length 1, equals
method equations (A) 1.000 (C) 1.111
(R) Runge-Kutta (3) Numerical (B) 1.098 (D) 1.120
method integration
(S) Trapezoidal (4) Linear algebraic ME – 2013
Rule equation 8. Match the correct pairs.
(A) 2 Numerical Order of Fitting
(B) 2 Integration Scheme Polynomial
(C) 2 . impson’s / 1. First
(D) 2 Rule
Q. Trapezoidal Rule 2. Second
4. Equation of the line normal to function . impson’s / 3. Third
f(x) = (x ) at (0 5) is Rule
(A) y = x 5 (C) y = x 5 (A) P – 2 , Q – 1, R – 3
(B) y = x 5 (D) y = x 5 (B) P – 3, Q – 2 , R – 1
(C) P – 1, Q – 2 , R – 3
ME – 2007 (D) P – 3, Q – 1 , R – 2
5. A calculator has accuracy up to 8 digits
2
ME – 2014
after decimal place. The value of  sinxdx
0
9. Using the trapezoidal rule, and dividing
the interval of integration into three equal
when evaluated using this calculator by
sub intervals, the definite integral
trapezoidal method with 8 equal
intervals, to 5 significant digits is ∫ |x|dx is ____________
(A) 0.00000 (C) 0.00500
(B) 1.0000 (D) 0.00025
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. The value of ∫ . ( ) calculated using “value approximate value”) in the

the Trapezoidal rule with five sub estimate?
intervals is _______ (A) – (C) –
(B) 0 (D)
11. The definite integral ∫ is evaluated
using Trapezoidal rule with a step size of CE – 2007
1. The correct answer is _______ 4. The following equation needs to be
numerically solved using the Newton-
12. The real root of the equation Raphson method
5x 2cosx = 0 (up to two decimal x3 + 4x – 9 = 0 the iterative equation for
accuracy) is _______ the purpose is (k indicates the iteration
level)
13. Consider an ordinary differential (A) x =
equation = t .If x =x at t = 0 , the
(B) x =
increment in x calculated using Runge-
Kutta fourth order multi-step method (C) x =x x
with a step size of Δt = 0.2 is (D) x =
(A) 0.22 (C) 0.66
(B) 0.44 (D) 0.88
5. Given that one root of the equation
CE – 2005 x 10x + 31x – 30 = 0 is 5, the other
Linked Answer Question 1 and 2 two roots are
Give a>0, we wish to calculate its (A) 2 and (C) and
reciprocal value 1/a by using Newton (B) 2 and (D) 2 and
Raphson Method for f(x) = 0.
CE – 2008
6. Three values of x and y are to be fitted in
1. The Newton Raphson algorithm for the
a straight line in the form y = a + bx by
function will be
the method of least squares. Given
(A) x = (x ) ∑x = 6, ∑y = 2 ∑x = and ∑xy =
(B) x = (x x ) the values of a and b are respectively
(A) 2 and 3 (C) 2 and 1
(C) x = 2x ax
(B) 1 and 2 (D) 3 and 2
(D) x =x x
CE – 2009
2. For a = 7 and starting with x = 0.2 the 7. In the solution of the following set of
first two iteration will be linear equation by Gauss elimination
(A) 0.11, 0.1299 (C) 0.12, 0.1416 using partial pivoting 5x + y + 2z = 34;
(B) 0.12, 0.1392 (D) 0.13, 0.1428 4y – 3z = 12; and 10x – 2y + z = 4; the
pivots for elimination of x and y are
CE – 2006 (A) 10 and 4 (C) 5 and 4
3. A 2nd degree polynomial f(x) has values of (B) 10 and 2 (D) 5 and 4
1, 4 and 15 at x = 0, 1 and 2 respectively.
The integral ∫ f(x) dx is to be estimated
by applying the trapezoidal rule to this
data. What is the error (define as true
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CE – 2010 CE – 2013
8. The table below given values of a function 12. Find the magnitude of the error (correct
F(x) obtained for values of x at intervals to two decimal places) in the estimation
of 0.25. of following integral using impson’s ⁄
x 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0 Rule. Take the step length as 1.___________
F(x) 1 0.9412 0.8 0.64 0.50
∫ (x 0) dx
The value of the integral of the function
between the limits 0 to using impson’s
rule is CS – 2007
(A) 0.7854 (C) 3.1416 1. Consider the series =
(B) 2.3562 (D) 7.5000
= 0.5 obtained from the Newton-
CE 2011 Raphson method. The series converges to
9. The square root of a number N is to be (A) 1.5 (C) 1.6
obtained by applying the Newton (B) √2 (D) 1.4
Raphson iterations to the equation
CS – 2008
x = 0. If i denotes the iteration
2. The minimum number of equal length
index, the correct iteration scheme will be
subintervals needed to approximate
(A) x = (x ) 2
1
 xe dx
x
to an accuracy of at least 106
(B) x = (x ) 1 3
using the trapezoidal rule is
(C) x = (x )
(A) 1000e (C) 100e
(D) x = (x ) (B) 1000 (D) 100
3. The Newton-Raphson iteration

10. he error in f(x)| for a continuous
1 R
xn1   xn   can be used to compute
function estimated with h=0.03 using the 2 xn 
central difference formula the
( ) ( )
f(x)| = is 2 0 . (A) square of R
(B) reciprocal of R
The values of and ( ) are 19.78 and
(C) square root of R
500.01, respectively. The corresponding
(D) logarithm of R
error in the central difference estimate
for h = 0.02 is approximately
CS – 2010
(A) . 0 (C) .5 0
(B) .0 0 (D) .0 0 4. Newton-Raphson method is used to
compute a root of the equation
CE – 2012 x 13 = 0 with 3.5 as the initial value.
11. The estimate of ∫ .
.
obtained using The approximation after one iteration is
(A) 3.575 (C) 3.667
impson’s rule with three – point function (B) 3.677 (D) 3.607
evaluation exceeds the exact value by
(A) 0.235 (C) 0.024
(B) 0.068 (D) 0.012
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CS – 2012 (B) Only II

5. The bisection method is applied to (C) Both I and II
compute a zero of the function (D) Neither I nor II
f(x) = x x x in the interval
[1,9]. The method converges to a solution 9. With respect to the numerical evaluation
after ___________ iterations. of the definite integral, = ∫ x dx
(A) 1 (C) 5 where a and b are given, which of the
(B) 3 (D) 7
following statements is/are TRUE?
(I) The value of K obtained using the
CS – 2013
trapezoidal rule is always greater
6. Function f is known at the following
then or equal to the exact value of
points:
the defined integral
x f(x)
(II) The value of K obtained using the
0 0
impson’s rule is always equal to the
0.3 0.09
exact value of the definite integral
0.6 0.36
(A) I only
0.9 0.81
(B) II only
1.2 1.44
(C) Both I and II
1.5 2.25
(D) Neither I nor II
1.8 3.24
2.1 4.41 ECE– 2005
2.4 5.76 1. Match the following and choose the
2.7 7.29 correct combination
3.0 9.00 Group I Group II
he value of ∫ f(x)dx computed using (A) Newton- 1. Solving non-
Raphson linear equations
the trapezpidal rule is method
(A) 8.983 (C) 9.017 (B) Runge-Kutta 2. Solving linear
(B) 9.003 (D) 9.045 method simultaneous
equations
CS – 2014
(C) impson’s 3. Solving ordinary
7. The function f(x) = x sin x satisfied the
Rule differential
following equation:
equations
( ) + f(x) + t cos x = 0.
(D) Gauss 4. Numerical
The value of t is _________.
elimination integration
method
8. In the Newton-Raphson method, an initial
5. Interpolation
guess of = 2 made and the sequence
6. Calculation of
x x x .. is obtained for the function
Eigen values
0.75x 2x 2x =0
(A) A-6, B-1, C-5, D-3
Consider the statements
(B) A-1, B-6, C-4, D-3
(I) x = 0.
(II) The method converges to a solution
(C) A-1, B-3, C-4, D-2
in a finite number of iterations. (D) A-5, B-3, C-4, D-1
Which of the following is TRUE?
(A) Only I
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE– 2007 (B) 2 x x . ..

2. The equation x3 x2+4x 4=0 is to be
solved using the Newton-Raphson (C) 2 x x . ..
method. If x=2 is taken as the initial (D) 2 x x . ..
approximation of the solution, then the
next approximation using this method
7. Match the application to appropriate
will be
numerical method.
(A) 2/3 (C) 1
(B) 4/3 (D) 3/2 Application Numerical
Method
ECE– 2008 P1:Numerical M1:Newton-
3. The recursion relation to solve x= integration Raphson Method
using Newton-Raphson method is P2:Solution to a M2:Runge-Kutta
(A) =e transcendental Method
(B) = e equation
eXn P3:Solution to a M : impson’s
(C) Xn1  1  Xn  system of linear 1/3-rule
1  eXn
equations
X2  eXn 1  Xn   1
(D) Xn1  n P4:Solution to a M4:Gauss
Xn -eXn differential equation Elimination
Method
ECE– 2011 (A) P1—M3, P2—M2, P3—M4, P4—M1
4. A numerical solution of the equation (B) P1—M3, P2—M1, P3—M4, P4—M2
f(x) = x √x = 0 can be obtained (C) P1—M4, P2—M1, P3—M3, P4—M2
using Newton – Raphson method. If the (D) P1—M2, P2—M1, P3—M3, P4—M4
starting value is x = 2 for the iteration,
the value of x that is to be used in the next 8. The series ∑ converges to
step is
(A) 2 ln 2 (C) 2
(A) 0.306 (C) 1.694 (D) e
(B) √2
(B) 0.739 (D) 2.306
EE– 2007
ECE– 2013
1. The differential equation = is
5. A polynomial
f(x) = a x a x a x a x a discretised using Euler’s numerical
with all coefficients positive has integration method with a time step
(A) No real root T > 0. What is the maximum permissible
(B) No negative real root value of T to ensure stability of the
(C) Odd number of real roots solution of the corresponding discrete
(D) At least one positive and one time equation?
negative real root (A) 1 (C)
(B) /2 (D) 2
ECE– 2014
EE– 2008
6. The Taylor expansion of sin x 2 cos x
2. Equation e = 0 is required to be
is
solved using ewton’s method with an
(A) 2 x x . .. initial guess x = . Then, after one
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
step of ewton’s method estimate x of EE– 2013

the solution will be given by 7. When the Newton – Raphson method is
(A) 0.71828 (C) 0.20587 applied to solve the equation
(B) 0.36784 (D) 0.00000 f(x) = x 2x = 0 the solution at the
end of the first iteration with the initial
3. A differential equation dx/dt = e u(t) guess value as x = .2 is
has to be solved using trapezoidal rule of (A) 0.82 (C) 0.705
integration with a step size h = 0.01 sec. (B) 0.49 (D) 1.69
Function u(t) indicates a unit step
function. If x(0)= 0, then value of x at EE– 2014
t = 0.01 s will be given by 8. The function ( ) = is to be
(A) 0.00099 (C) 0.0099 solved using Newton-Raphson method. If
(B) 0.00495 (D) 0.0198 the initial value of is taken as 1.0, then
the absolute error observed at 2nd
EE– 2009 iteration is ___________
4. Let x 7 = 0. The iterative steps for
the solution using Newton – aphson’s IN– 2006
method is given by 1. For k = 0 2 . the steps of
(A) x = (x ) Newton-Raphson method for solving a
non-linear equation is given as
(B) x =x
2 5
(C) x =x xk 1  xk  xK2 .
3 3
(D) x =x (x ) Starting from a suitable initial choice as k
tends to , the iterate tends to
(A) 1.7099 (C) 3.1251
EE– 2011
(B) 2.2361 (D) 5.0000
5. Solution of the variables and for the
following equations is to be obtained by IN– 2007
employing the Newton-Raphson iterative 2. Identify the Newton-Raphson iteration
method scheme for finding the square root of 2.
equation(i) 0x inx 0. = 0
(A) x = (x )
equation(ii) 0x 0x cosx 0. = 0
Assuming the initial values = 0.0 and (B) x = (x )
= .0 the jacobian matrix is
0 0. 0 0. (C) x =
(A) * + (C) * +
0 0. 0 0. (D) x = √2 x
0 0 0 0
(B) * + (D) * +
0 0 0 0
3. The polynomial p(x) = x + x + 2 has
(A) all real roots
6. Roots of the algebraic equation (B) 3 real and 2 complex roots
x x x = 0 are (C) 1 real and 4 complex roots
(A) ( ) (C) (0 0 0) (D) all complex roots
(B) ( j j) (D) ( j j)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN– 2008 IN– 2013

4. It is known that two roots of the 8. While numerically solving the differential
nonlinear equation x3 – 6x2 +11x 6 = 0 equation 2xy = 0 y(0) = using
are 1 and 3. The third root will be
Euler’s predictor – corrector (improved
(A) j (C) 2
Euler – Cauchy )method with a step size
(B) j (D) 4
of 0.2, the value of y after the first step is
(A) 1.00 (C) 0.97
IN – 2009
(B) 1.03 (D) 0.96
5. The differential equation = with
x(0) = 0 and the constant 0 is to be IN– 2014
numerically integrated using the forward 9. The iteration step in order to solve for the
Euler method with a constant integration cube roots of a given number N using the
time step T. The maximum value of T such Newton- aphson’s method is
that the numerical solution of x converges (A) x =x ( x )
is
(C) (B) x = (2x )
(A)
(D) 2 (C) x =x ( x )
(B)
(D) x = (2x )
IN– 2010
6. The velocity v (in m/s) of a moving mass,
starting from rest, is given as =v t.
Using Euler’s forward difference method
(also known as Cauchy-Euler method)
with a step size of 0.1s, the velocity at 0.2s
evaluates to
(A) 0.01 m/s (C) 0.2 m/s
(B) 0.1 m/s (D) 1 m/s
IN– 2011
7. The extremum (minimum or maximum)
point of a function f(x) is to be
( )
determined by solving = 0 using the
Newton-Raphson method.
Let f(x) = x x and x = 1 be the initial
guess of x. The value of x after two
iterations (x ) is
(A) 0.0141 (C) 1.4167
(B) 1.4142 (D) 1.5000
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME y = sin ( ) =
1. [Ans. C] 2
( )
By N-R method , =x – x = y = sin ( ) = 0.70 0
( )
f(x) = x x 7 y = sin( ) = 0
 f( ) = 5
y = sin ( ) = 0.70 0
( )
x =x ( )
y = sin ( )=
 f (x) = x
f ( )= , 7
y = sin ( ) = 0.70 0
( )
 =1 = (0.5) = .5
y = sin ( )=0
2. [Ans. C] Trapezoidal rule
Given x y = 2 (i) ∫ f(x)dx = [(y y ) 2(y y
.0 x 0.0 y = b (ii)
y )]
Multiply 0.99 is equation (i) and subtract
∫ sinx dx = [(0 0) 2(0.70 0
from equation (ii); we get
( .0 0. )x = b (2 0. ) 0.70 0 0.70 0 0.70 0 0=0
0.02x = b .
0.02Δx = Δb 6. [Ans. B]
ower = ω = Area under the curve.
Δx = = 50 units h
0.02 = [(y y ) (y y y )
3. [Ans. D] 2(y y )]
= [(0 0) ( 0 0 55)
4. [Ans. B]
/ 2( 2 2 )]
Given f(x) = (x )
= 2.7 /unit cycle.
2
f (x) = (x )
Slope of tangent at point (0, 5) 7. [Ans. C]
2 x 1 2 3
m = (0 ) / = 1
y=
Slope of normal = 3 x 2
h
(∵ roduct of slopes = 1) ∫ dx = (y y y )
x
Slope of normal at point (0, 5)
y 5 = (x 0) = ( )
2
y= x 5
= .
5. [Ans. A]
8. [Ans. D]
b a 2 0
h= = = By the definition only
n
y = sin(0) = 0
y = sin ( ) = 0.70 0
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
9. [Ans. *] Range 1.10 to 1.12 By intermediate value theorem roots lie

be between 0 and 1.
∫ |x|dx is et x = rad = 57. 2
By Newton Raphson method
h f(x )
∫ ydx = [y 2(y y .) y ] x =x
2 f (x )
2x sin x 2 cos x
y y y y x =
5 2 sin x
x 1 0.33 0.33 1 x = 0.5 2
x = 0.5 25
y 1 0.33 0.333 1 x = 0.5 2
2
∫ |x|dx = [ 2(0. 0. )] 13. [Ans. D]
2
The variation in options are much, so it
= . 0 can be solved by integrating directly
dx
10. [Ans. *] Range 1.74 to 1.76 = t
dt
2.5 .
h= = 0. ∫ dx = ∫ ( t )dt
5
y 2y 2y 2y
∫ . ln (x)dx = [ 2y y
] . .
t
. Δx = t| = 2t t|
= [ln(2.5) 2(ln2. ) 2 ln( . ) 2
2ln( . ) 2ln( .7) ln( )] Δx = 0.0 0. = 0.
= .75
CE
11. [Ans. *]Range 1.1 to 1.2 1. [Ans. C]
To calculate using N-R method
∫ dx by trapezoidal rule
x
Set up the equation as x =
rapezoidal rule
i.e. = a
∫ f(x)dx = [y y 2(y y ..y )]
a=0
h= iven in question
0 1 2 i.e. f(x) = a=0
x 1 2 3 Now f (x) =
y 1 0.5 0.33
f(x ) = a
∫ dx = [y y 2(y )] f (x ) =
x 2
For N-R method
= [ 0. 2 0.5] x =x
( )
2 ( )
= . ( )
x =x
12. [Ans. *] Range 0.53 to 0.56
Let f(x) = 5x 2 cos x Simplifying which we get
f (x) = 5 2 sin x x = 2x ax
f(0) = f( ) = 2.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. [Ans. B] f(x )
x =x
For a = 7 iteration equation f (x )
Becomes x = 2x 7x (x x )
=x
with x = 0.2 ( x )
x = 2x 7x = 2× 0.2 – 7(0.2) = 0.12 x x x x
and x = 2x 7x = 2× 0.12 7(0. 2) =
( x )
= 0.1392 2x
x =
x
3. [Ans. A]
f(x) = 1, 4, 15 at x = 0, 1 and 2
5. [Ans. A]
respectively
Given
∫ f(x)dx = (f 2f f ) x – 10 x + 31x 30 = 0
(3 points Trapezoidal Rule) One root = 5
Here h = 1 Let the roots be α β and γ of equation
∫ f(x)dx = (1 + 2(4) + 15) = 12 ax + bx + cx + d = 0
Approximate value by rapezoidal ule αβγ=
= 12 and α β βγ γα =
Since f(x) is second degree polynomial, let ( )
α βγ = 5 βγ = = 30
f(x) = a0 + a x + a x
f(0) = 1  βγ = (i)
a 0 0= Also
a = αβ βγ γα = 5β βγ 5γ = =
f(1) = 4  5 (β γ) βγ =
a a a = ince βγ = from (i)
 1+ a a = 5 (β γ) =
a a = β γ=5
 f(2) = 15 βγ =
a 2a a = 5 olving for β and γ
 2a a = 5 β (5 β) =
 2a a = β 5β =0
Solving (i) and (ii) a = and a =  β = 2 and γ =
f(x) = 1 – x + 4 x Alternative method
Now exact value ∫ f(x)dx 5 1 0 31 0
0 5 25 30
=∫ ( x x )dx
1 5 6 0
= *x + = (x 5)(x 5x )=0
Error = exact – Approximate value (x 5)(x 2)(x )=0
x=2 5
= 2=
4. [Ans. A ] 6. [Ans. D]
Y = a + bx
Given f(x) = x x =0
Given
f (x) = x
n= ∑x = ∑y = 2 ∑x = 14
Newton – Raphson formula is
and ∑xy =
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Normal equations are 9. [Ans. A]

∑y = na b∑x f(x )
x =x
∑xy = a∑x b∑x f(x )
Substitute the values and simply x
=x ( )
a= b=2 2x
x
= = [x ]
7. [Ans. A] 2x 2 x
The equation is
5x + y + 2z = 34 10. [Ans. D]
0x + 4y – 3z = 12 Error in central difference formula is
and 10x – 2y + z = (h)
The augmented matrix for gauss This means, error
elimination is If error for h = 0.03 is 2 0
5 2 then
[0 | 2] Error for h = 0.02 is approximately
0 2 (0.02)
Since in the first column maximum 2 0 0
(0.0 )
element in absolute value is 10 we need
to exchange row 1 with row 3 11. [Ans. D]
5 2 ( )
0 2 .
[0 | 2] → [0 | 2] Exact value of ∫ . dx = .0
0 2 5 2 Using impson’s rule in three – point
So the pivot for eliminating x is a = 10
form,
Now we eliminate x using this pivot
b a .5 0.5
as follows : h= = = 0.5
n 2
0 2
So,
[0 | 2]
5 2 x 0.5 1 1.5
5 y 2 1 0.67
0 2
0 ∫ = [ ]
→ [0 2]
0 2 /2 0.5
= [2 0. 7 ]
Now to eliminate y, we need to compare
the elements in second column at and = .
below the diagonal element Since a = 4 So, the estimate exceeds the exact value by
is already larger in absolute value Approximate value – Exact value
compares to a = 2 = 1.1116 1.0986
The pivot element for eliminating y is =0.012(approximately)
a = 4 itself.
12. [Ans. *](Range 0.52 to 0.55)
The pivots for eliminating x and y are
Using impson’s ule
respectively 10 and 4
X 0 1 2 3 4
Y 10 11 26 91 266
8. [Ans. A]
I = h(f f 2f f f ) ∫ (x 0)dx
= 0.25( 0. 2 2 = [( 0 2 ) 2(2 ) ( )]
0. 0. 0.5) = 2 5.
= 0.7 5 The value of integral
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x = = 1000 e
∫ (x 0) dx = * 0x+ ( )/
5
3. [Ans. C]
= 0 =2 .
5 x = (x )
Magnitude of error
= 2 5. 2 . = 0.5 At convergence
x =x =α
CS α= (α )
1. [Ans. A] 2α=α+
Given x = + , x = 0.5
2α =
when the series converges x =x =α
2α = α + R
α= +
α =R
α= α=√
8α = 4α +9 So this iteration will compute the square
root of R
α =
α = = 1.5 4. [Ans. D]
y=x
2. [Ans. A] dy
= 2x
Here, the function being integrated is dx
f(x)= x
f(x) = xe
.
f (x) = xe + e = e (x + 1) x = .5
.
f’ (x) = xe + e + e = e (x + 2) = . 07
Since, both are increasing
functions of x, maximum value of f ( ) in 5. [Ans. B]
interval 1 2, occurs at = 2 so f( ) = 5
max |f ( )| =e (2 2) = e f( ) = 5 72 = 57 7 0
Truncation Error for trapezoidal rule f( ) 0 f( ) 0
= TE (bound) x =( )=5 f(x ) 0
2
= max |f ( )|
oot lies between and
Where is number of subintervals
x =( )=2 f(x ) 0
= 2
After ' ' interations we get the root
= max |f ( )|
6. [Ans. D]
= (b – a) max |f ( )| 1 2
h
= (2 – 1) [e (2 + 2)] ∫ f(x)dx = [f(0) f( ) 2(∑f )]
2
= e . 0 2(0.0 0.
= [ ]
Now putting = 0 0. . . 7.2 )
( )
.
= [ 5 . ]
=
= 9.045
h=
Now, No. of intervals, =
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. – ] 8 4
x1  2  
Given (x) + f(x) + t cos x = 0 12 3
and f(x) = x sin x
f (x) = x cos x + sin x 3. [Ans. C]
f (x) = x ( sin x) + cos x + cos x Given : f(x)= x e
= 2 cos x – x sin x By Newton Raphson method,
= 2 cos x – f (x) f(x ) x e
x =x =x
2 cos x – f (x) + f(x) +t cos x = 0 f (x ) e
2 cos x = tcos x t = 2 e xn
 1  x n 
1  exn
8. [Ans. A]
f(x) = 0.75x 2x 2x 4. [Ans. C]
f (x) = 2.25x x 2 f(x )
x =2 f = 2 f = x =x
f (x )
f f(2) = (2 ) = √2 and
x =x =0 √2
f √
f = f = 2 f (2) = =
√ √
f x =2
(√ )
= .
x =x =2 √
f √
f = 2 f =
f 5. [Ans. D]
x =x =0 f(x) = a x a x a x a x a
f
Also, root does not lies between 0 and 1 If the above equation have complex roots,
So, the method diverges if x = 2 then they must be in complex conjugate
nly ( )is true. pair, because it’s given all co-efficients are
positive ( they are real )
9. [Ans. C] So if complex roots are even no. (in pair)
For value of K if trapezoidal rule is used then real roots will also be even.
then the value is either greater than ption ( )is wrong
actual value of definite integral and if From the equation
impson’s rule is used then value is exact roduct of roots = ( 0)
Hence both statements are TRUE As no. of roots = 4,
Product of roots < 1
ECE
either one root 0
1. [Ans. C]
(or)
By definition (& the application) of
Product of three roots < 0
various methods
ption ( )is rong.
2. [Ans. B] Now, take option (A),
y(t) =x3 x2 + 4x 4=0 Let us take it is correct .
x0 = 2 Roots are in complex conjugate pairs
f  x0  =
Next approximation x1  x0 
f ' x0 
Product of roots
0
x03  x02  4x0  4 | | | | 0 which is not possible
x1  x0 
3x02  2x0  4 ption (A) is wrong
orrect answer is option ( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. A] Now put i=0

sin x 2 cos x ( )
x =
x x
= (x – ) 2( – ) Put x = as given,
2
x = [e ( 2) ]/e
= 0.71828
7. [Ans. B]
8. [Ans. D] 3. [Ans. C]
=e u(t)
∑ = . .. = e
n 2 x
x x
as e = . . . x in
2
EE t
1. [Ans. D] x = ∫ e u(t) dt = ∫ f(t) dt
Here, = At t = 0.01, x = Area of trapezoidal
.
x = [f(0) f(0.0 )] = [ e .
]
f(x y) =
= 0.0099
Euler’s method equation is
x = x h. f(x y )
4. [Ans. A]
x ( )
x = x h( ) x =x
( )
h h
x =( )x = x
h = *x +
or stability | |
h 5. [Ans. B]
u(x x ) = 0x sin x 0. = 0
since h = Δ here v(x x ) = 0x 0x cosx 0. = 0
Δ
The Jacobian matrix is
u u
Δ 2
x x
o maximum permissible value of Δ is 2 .
v v
[ x x ]
2. [Ans. A]
Here f(x) = e 0x cos x 0sinx
=[ ]
0x sinx 20x 0cosx
f (x) = e
The Newton Raphson iterative equation is The matrix at x = 0 x = is
( )
x =x 0 0
( ) =* +
0 0
f(x ) = e
f’(x ) = e 6. [Ans. D]
x =x x x x =0
–( ) (x )(x )=0
i.e. x =
x =0 x =0
( )
= x= x= j
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. C] Hence, it will have atleast 5 (0+1)= 4

f(x ) complex roots.
x =x
f (x )
( .2) 2( .2) 4. [Ans. C]
= .2 Approach- 1
( .2) 2
= 0.705 Given, x3 – 6x2 + 11x – 6 = 0
Or (x – 1)(x – 3)(x – 2) = 0
8. [Ans. *] Range 0.05 to 0.07 x= 1, 2, 3.
Clearly, x = 0 is root of the equation
f(x) = e =0 Approach- 2
f (x) = e and x = .0 For ax3 +bx2 + cx +d = 0
Using ewton raphson method If the three roots are p,q,r then
f(x ) (e . ) Sum of the roots= p+q+r= b/a
x =x = = Product of the roots= pqr= d/a
f (x ) e. e
pq+qr+rp=c/a
f(x ) (e )
and x = x =
f (x ) e e 5. [Ans. D]
dx x
= =
e
e dt
= 0. 7 0. = 0.0 f(x, y) =
Absolute error at 2nd itteration is x
x =x h (x y ) = x h( )
|0 0.0 | = 0.0
h h
=( )x ( )
IN
1. [Ans. A] h
or stability | |
As k ∞ xk+1 ≈xk
h
xk = x x
x = x Δ
x =5
Δ 2
/
x =5 = 1.70
6. [Ans. A]
2. [Ans. A] dv
Assume x = √ =v t
dt
f(x) = x =0 t v dv
=v t
f(x ) 2 dt
x =x = [x ] 0 0 0 0+0 0. = 0
f (x ) 2 x
0.1 0 0+0.1 0. = 0.0
3. [Ans. C]
Given p(x) = x + x + 2 7. [Ans. C]
There is no sign change, hence at most 0 f(x) = x x
positive root ( rom escarte’s rule of f (x) = x = g(x)
signs) x = initial guess
p( x) = x x+2 g (x) = x
g (x )
There is one sign change, hence at most 1 x =x
negative root ( rom escarte’s rule of g (x )
signs)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( )
= = .5
g(x )
x =x
g (x )
0.75
= .5
= . 7
8. [Ans. D]
dy
= 2xy x = 0 y = h = 0.2
dx
y =y h. f(x y )
= (0.2)f(0 ) =
and y = y [f(x y ) f(x y )]
= (0. )[f(0 ) f(0.2 )]
= 0.
is the value of y after first step, using
Euler’s predictor – corrector method
9. [Ans. B]
For convergence
x = x =x x= (2x )
x
x = x= √
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Calculus
ME – 2005 ME – 2006
1. The line integral ∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗⃗ of the vector 2x2  7x  3
7. If f( x ) = , then limf(x) will
function ⃗ ( ) 2xyz ̂+ x²z + ̂ k²y ̂ from 5x2  12x  9 x 3
the origin to the point P (1,1,1) be

(A) is 1 (A) ⁄ (C) 0
(B) is Zero (B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
(C) is 1
(D) cannot be determined without 8. Assuming i = 1 and t is a real number,
specifying the path
∫ dt is:
2. The right circular cone of largest volume (A)
√
(C)
√
that can be enclosed by a sphere of 1 m

√ √
radius has a height of (B) (D) . /
(A) √
(C)
9. Let x denote a real number. Find out the
(B) (D)
INCORRECT statement
(A) S * + represents the set if all
3. By a change of variables
real numbers greater then 3
x(u,v) = uv, y(u,v) = v/u is double
(B) S * + represents the empty
integral, the integral f(x,y) changes to
set
f(uv, u/v) ( ). Then, ( )
(C) S * + represents the
(A) 2 v/u (C) v²
union of set A and set B
(B) 2 u v (D) 1
(D) S * + represents the set
4. Changing the order of the integration in of all real umbers between a and b,
the double integral I = ∫ ∫ ( ) where and b are real number
leads to
ME – 2007
I =∫ ∫ ( ) What is q?
( )
(A) 4y (C) X 10.
(B) 16y² (D) 8 (A) 0 (C)
(B) ⁄ (D) 1
5. ∫ ( ) is equal to
(A) ∫ 11. The area of a triangle formed by the tips
(B) 2∫ of vectors a , b and c is
(C) 2∫ ( ) (A) ( )( )
(D) Zero (B) |( ) ( )|
6. Stoke’ theorem connects (C) | |

(A) A line integral and a surface integral (D) ( )
(B) Surface integral and a volume
integral
(C) A line integral and a volume integral
(D) Gradient of function and its surface
integral
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
19. In the Taylor series expansion of ex about

12. If √ √ √ , then x = 2, the coefficient of (x 2)4 is
y (2) = (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(A) 4 or 1 (C) 1 only (B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
(B) 4 only (D) Undefined
20. The divergence of the vector field
13. The minimum value of function y = x2 in (x y) ̂ ( )̂ ( ) ̂ is
the interval [1, 5] is (A) 0 (C) 2
(A) 0 (C) 25 (B) 1 (D) 3
(B) 1 (D) Undefined
21. Let What is at x=2, y=1?
ME – 2008
(A) 0 (C) 1
14. The length of the curve
(B) ln2 (D) 1/ln2
between x = 0 and x = 1 is
(A) 0.27 (C) 1 ME – 2009
(B) 0.67 (D) 1.22 22. The area enclosed between the curves
y2  4x and x2  4y is
15. Which of the following integrals is
unbounded? (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) 8 (D) 16
(A) ∫ (C) ∫
(B) ∫ (D) ∫ 23. The distance between the origin and the
point nearest to it on the surface
16. The directional derivative of the scalar z2  1  xy is
function f(x, y, z) = x2  2y2  z at the (A) 1 (C) √
point P = (1, 1, 2) in the direction of the (B) √ ⁄ (D) 2
vector ⃗ ̂ ̂ is
(A) 4 (C) 1 24. A path AB in the form of one quarter of a
(B) 2 (D) 1 circle of unit radius is shown in the figure.
Integration of  x  y  on path AB
2
17. Consider the shaded triangular region P
shown in the figure. What is∬ xydxdy? traversed in a counter-clockwise sense is
y Y
B
x+2y=2
1
P x X
A
0 2
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ (A) (C)
(B) ⁄ (D) 1 (B) (D) 1
18. The value of is 25. The divergence of the vector field

( )
̂ ̂ ̂ at a point (1,1,1) is
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
⁄ ⁄ equal to
(B) (D)
(A) 7 (C) 3
(B) 4 (D) 0
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME – 2010 ME – 2012
26. Velocity vector of a flow field is given as 33. Consider the function ( ) in the
⃗ ̂ .̂ The vorticity vector at interval . At the point x = 0,
(1, 1, 1) is f(x) is
(A) 4 ̂ ̂ (C) ̂ ̂ (A) Continuous and differentiable.
(B) 4 ̂ ̂ (D) ̂ ̂ (B) Non – continuous and differentiable.
(C) Continuous and non – differentiable.
27. The function (D) Neither continuous nor
(A) o o ∀ R differentiable.
∀ R
(B) o o ∀ R 34. . / is
∀ R
(A) 1/4 (C) 1
except at x = 3/2
(B) 1/2 (D) 2
(C) o o ∀ R
∀ R
35. At x = 0, the function f(x) = has
except at x = 2/3
(A) A maximum value
(D) o o ∀ R except at x = 3
(B) A minimum value
∀ R
(C) A singularity
28. The value of the integral ∫ is (D) A point of inflection
(A) –π (C) π
36. For the spherical surface
(B) –π (D) π
the unit outward
29. The parabolic arc √ is normal vector at the point
revolved around the x-axis. The volume of . /
√ √
the solid of revolution is (A) ̂ ̂
(A) π (C) π √ √
(B) π (D) π (B) ̂ ̂

√ √
(C) ̂
ME – 2011
(D) ̂ ̂ ̂
30. If f(x) is an even function and is a positive √ √ √
real number, then ∫ ( )dx equals

37. The area enclosed between the straight
(A) 0 (C)
(B) line y = x and the parabola y = in the
(D) ∫ ( )
x – y plane is
(A) 1/6 (C) 1/3
31. What is equal to? (B) 1/4 (D) 1/2
(A) (C) 0
(B) (D) 1 ME – 2013
38. The following surface integral is to be
32. A series expansion for the function is evaluated over a sphere for the given
(A) steady velocity vector field
defined with respect to a
(B) cartesian coordinate system having i, j and
(C) k as unit base vectors.
∫∫ ( )
(D)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Where S is the sphere, 45. If a function is continuous at a point,

and n is the outward unit normal vector to (A) the limit of the function may not exist
the sphere. The value of the surface at the point
integral is (B) the function must be derivable at the
(A) π (C) π⁄ point
(B) π (D) π (C) the limit of the function at the point
tends to infinity
39. The value of the definite integral (D) the limit must exist at the point and
∫ √ ( ) is the value of limit should be same as
the value of the function at that point
(A) √ (C) √
(B) √ (D) √ 46. Divergence of the vector field
̂ ̂ ̂ ( ) is
ME – 2014 (A) 0 (C) 5
40. is (B) 3 (D) 6
(A) 0 (C) 3
(B) 1 (D)Not defined
( ) ( )
∫ ( ) ( )
41. Which one of the following describes the (A) 3 (C) 1
relationship among the three vectors (B) 0 (D) 2
̂ ̂ ̂ +
̂ ̂ ̂
+ ̂ ̂ ̂
(A) The vectors are mutually 48. The value of the integral ∫ ∫
perpendicular
is
(B) The vectors are linearly dependent
(C) The vectors are linearly independent (A) ( ) (C) ( )
(D) The vectors are unit vectors (B) ( ) (D) . /
42. . ( )
/ is equal to CE – 2005
(A) 0 (C) 1 1. Value of the integral ∮ ( ).
(B) 0.5 (D) 2 Where, c is the square cut from the first
quadrant by the lines x = 1 and y = 1 will
43. Curl of vector ( G ’ h o o h h
⃗ ̂ ̂ ̂ line integral into double integral)
(A) ( )̂ ̂ ̂ (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ( )̂ ̂ ̂ (B) 1 (D) ⁄
(C) ̂ ̂ ̂
(D) ̂ ̂ ̂ 2. A rail engine accelerates from its
stationary position for 8 seconds and
44. The best approximation of the minimum travels a distance of 280 m. According to
value attained by (100x) for ≥ the Mean Value theorem, the
is _______ speedometer at a certain time during
acceleration must read exactly.
(A) 0 kmph (C) 75 kmph
(B) 8 kmph (D) 126 kmph
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CE – 2006 10. The value of ∫ ∫ ( ) is

3. What is the area common to the circles (A) 13.5 (C) 40.5
o (B) 27.0 (D) 54.0
(A) 0.524 a 2 (C) 1.014 a2
(B) 0.614 a2 (D) 1.228 a2 CE – 2009
11. For a scalar function
4. The directional derivative of f(x, y, z) = + 3 + 2 the gradient at
f(x, y, z) = 2 + 3 + at the point the point P (1, 2, 1) is
P (2, 1, 3) in the direction of the vector
(A) 2 + 6 + 4⃗ (C) 2 + 12 + 4⃗
a= k is
(A) (C) (B) 2 + 12 – 4⃗ (D) √
(B) (D)
12. For a scalar function
CE – 2007 f(x, y, z) = the directional
derivative at the point P(1, 2, 1) in the
5. Potential function  is given as
direction of a vector ⃗ is
= . When will be the stream
function () with the condition (A) (C) √
 = 0 at x = y = 0? (B) √ (D) 18
(A) 2xy (C)
(B) + (D) 2 CE – 2010
13. A parabolic cable is held between two
supports at the same level. The horizontal
6. Evaluate ∫
span between the supports is L. The sag at
(A) π (C) π⁄ the mid-span is h. The equation of the
(B) π⁄ (D) π⁄
parabola is y = 4h where x is the
7. A velocity is given as horizontal coordinate and y is the vertical
̅ = 5xy + 2 y2 + 3yz2⃗ . The divergence coordinate with the origin at the centre of
the cable. The expression for the total
of this velocity vector at (1 1 1) is
length of the cable is
(A) 9 (C) 14
(B) 10 (D) 15 (A) ∫ √
CE – 2008 (B) 2∫ √
8. The equation + = 0 can be
(C) ∫ √
transformed to + = 0 by substituting
(D) ∫ √
(A) (C) √
(B)
(D) √ . /
14. The  is
(A) 2/3 (C) 3/2
9. The inner (dot) product of two vectors ⃗ (B) 1 (D)
and ⃗ is zero. The angle (degrees)
between in two vectors is 15. Given a function
(A) 0 (C) 90 ( )
(B) 30 (D) 120 The optimal value of f(x, y)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) Is a minimum equal to 10/3 CE – 2013

(B) Is a maximum equal to 10/3 21. The value of ∫ o
(C) Is a minimum equal to 8/3 (A) 0 (C) 1
(D) Is a maximum equal to 8/3 (B) 1/15 (D) 8/3
CE – 2011 CE – 2014
√
16. ∫ ? 22. . / o
√ √
(A) 0 (C) a (A) (C) 1
(B) a/2 (D) 2a (B) (D)
17. Wh ho h o λ such that 23. With reference to the conventional

the function defined below is continuous Cartesian (x, y) coordinate system, the
π ? vertices of a triangle have the following
π coordinates:
f(x)={ ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
π
( ) ( ). The area of the
(A) 0 (C) 1
triangle is equal to
(B) π (D) π
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
18. If ⃗ and ⃗ are two arbitrary vectors with
magnitudes a and b respectively. |⃗ ⃗ | 24. A particle moves along a curve whose
will be equal to parametric equation are :
(A) – (⃗ ⃗ ) (C) + (⃗ ⃗ ) and z = 2 sin (5t), where x, y
(B) ab ⃗ ⃗ (D) ab + ⃗ ⃗ and z show variations of the distance
covered by the particle (in cm) with time
CE – 2012 t (in s). The magnitude of the acceleration
19. For the parallelogram OPQR shown in the of the particle (in cm ) at t = 0 is
sketch, ̅̅̅̅ ̂ ̂ and ̅̅̅̅
R ̂ .̂ ___________
The area of the parallelogram is
25. If {x} is a continuous, real valued random
Q
variable defined over the interval
( ) and its occurrence is defined
R by the density function given as:
. /
P ( ) wh ‘ ’ ‘ ’
√
the statistical attributes of the random
O variable {x}. The value of the integral
(A) ad –bc (C) ad + bc ∫
. /
dx is
√
(B) ac+bd (D) ab – cd
(A) 1 (C) π
(B) 0.5 (D) π⁄
20. The infinity series
o o o 26. The expression o

(A) sec (C) o (A) log x (C) x log x
(B) (D) (B) 0 (D)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CS – 2005 CS – 2010
1 
1. Let G(x)    g(i)xi where |x|<1. 7. What is the value of . / ?
(1  x) i0
2
(A) 0 (C)
What is g(i)?
(B) (D) 1
(A) i (C) 2i
(B) i+1 (D) 2i
CS – 2011
8. Given i = √ , what will be the
CS – 2007
evaluation of the definite integral
2. Consider the following two statements
about the function f(x) =|x|: ∫
P: f(x) is continuous for all real values of x (A) 0 (C) –i
Q: f(x) is differentiable for all real values (B) 2 (D) i
of x
Which of the following is true? CS – 2012
(A) P is true Q is false 9. Consider the function f(x)= sin(x) in the
(B) P is false Q is true interval x ,π⁄ π⁄ -. The number and
(C) Both P and Q are true location(s) of the local minima of this
(D) Both P and Q are false function are
(A) One , at π⁄
CS – 2008 (B) One , at π⁄
x sinx (C) Two , at π⁄ and π
3. Lim equals
x   x cosx (D) Two , at π⁄ and π
(A) 1 (C)
CS – 2013
(B) 1 (D)
10. Which one the following function is
continuous at x =3?
4. Let
P=∑ ∑
(A) ( ) {
where k is a positive integer. Then
(A) (C)
(B) ( ) 2
(B) (D)
(C) ( ) 2
5. A point on a curve is said to be extreme if
it is a local minimum or a local maximum. (D) ( )
The number of distinct extrema for the
CS – 2014
curve 3x  16x  24x  37 is
4 3 2
11. Let the function

(A) 0 (C) 2
o
(B) 1 (D) 3 ( ) | (π ) o (π ) (π )|
(π ) o (π ) (π )
CS – 2009
Where 0 1 and ( ) denote the
6. ∫ evaluates to derivation of f with respect to . Which of
(A) 0 (C) ln2 the following statements is/are TRUE?
(B) 1 (D) ln 2 (I) There exists
. / h h ( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(II) There exists (A)

. / h h ( )
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) Both I and II (B)
(D) Neither I nor II
12. A function f (x) is continuous in the

interval [0, 2]. It is known that
(C)
f(0) = f(2) = 1 and f(x) = 1. Which one
of the following statements must be true?
(A) There exists a y in the interval (0,1)
such that f(y) = f(y + 1) (D)
(B) For every y in the interval (0, 1),
f(y) = f(2 y)
(C) The maximum value of the function
in the interval (0, 2) is 1
(D) There exists a y in the interval (0, 1) ECE – 2006
such that f(y) ( ) 2. As x is increased from to , the
x
e
function f  x  
13. If and are 4 – dimensional subspace 1  ex
of a 6 – dimensional vector space V, then (A) monotonically increases
the smallest possible dimension of (B) monotonically decreases
is ____________. (C) increases to a maximum value and
then decreases
14. If ∫ dx = π, then the value of k (D) decreases to a minimum value and
is equal to_______. then increases


The integral sin  d is given by
3
3.
15. The value of the integral given below is 0
1 4
∫ o (A) (C)
2 3
(A) π (C) – π 2 8
(B ) (D)
(B) π (D) π 3 3
ECE – 2005 4.   P  ds , where P is a vector, is

1. The derivative of the symmetric function
equal to
drawn in given figure will look like
(A) ∮ P  dl (C) ∮  P  dl
(B) ∮  P dl (D)   Pdv
5.  P , where P is a vector, is equal to
(A) P P  P (C) 2P  P
2
(B)  P P
2
(D)  P 2P
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE – 2007 ECE – 2008

6. For the function , the linear 12. Consider points P and Q in the x –y plane,
approximation around = 2 is with P=(1,0) and Q=(0,1). The line
(A) (3 x) Q
(B) 1 x integral 2  xdx  ydy  along the


 
P
(C) 3  2 2  1  2 x e 2
  semicircle with the line segment PQ as its
(D) diameter
(A) is 1
7. For x <<1, coth(x) can be (B) is 0
approximated as (C) is 1
(A) x (D) depends on the direction (clockwise
(C)
(B) x2 or anticlockwise) of the semicircle
(D)
13. In the Taylor series expansion of
8. Consider the function f(x) = x – 2. exp(x)+sin(x) about the point x=π the
The maximum value of f(x) in the closed coefficient of (x π)2 is
interval [ 4,4] is (A) (π) (C) (π)
(A) 18 (C) 2.25 (B) (π) (D) (π)
(B) 10 (D) Indeterminate
14. Which of the following functions would
9. Which one of the following function is have only odd powers of x in its Taylor
strictly bounded? series expansion about the point x=0?
2 (A) sin(x3) (C) cos(x3)
(A) (C) x
(B) e x (B) sin(x )
2 (D) cos(x2)
(D)
15. The value of the integral of the function
sin   /2 g(x, y)=4x3+10y4 along the straight line
10. lim is
0  segment from the point (0,0) to the point
(A) 0.5 (C) 2 (1,2) in the x y plane is
(B) 1 (D) not defined (A) 33 (C) 40
(B) 35 (D) 56
11. The following Plot shows a function y
which varies linearly with x. The value of 16. For real values of x, the minimum value of
2
the function f(x)=exp(x)+ exp( x) is
the integral I  ydx is
1
(A) 2 (C) 0.5
Y
(B) 1 (D) 00
3 17. Consider points P and Q in the x-y plane,

with P=(1, 0) and Q= (0, 1).
2
1
h ∫ ( ) along
1
X the semicircle with the line segment PQ as
1 2 3
its diameter
(A) 1.0 (C) 4.0
(A) Is
(B) 2.5 (D) 5.0
(B) Is 0
(C) Is 1
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(D) Depends on the direction 21. If , then has a

(clockwise or anti-clockwise) of the (A) maximum at
semicircle (B) minimum at
(C) maximum at
ECE – 2009
(D) minimum at
18. The Taylor series expansion of
sinx
at x   is given by ECE – 2011
x 
22. Consider a closed surface S surrounding a
(A) 1 
 x  2  ..... volume V. If is the position vector of a
3! point inside S, with ̂ the unit normal of S,
1 
 x  
2
 .....
the value of the integral ∯ ̂⃗ is
(B) (A) 3V (C) 10V
3!
(B) 5V (D) 15V
1
 x  
2
 .....
(C)
3! ECE\IN – 2012
 x   2
23. The direction of vector A is radially
(D) 1   ..... outward from the origin, with
3!
where and K is
19. If a vector field ⃗ is related to another constant. The value of n for which
. A = 0 is
vector field ⃗ through ⃗ = ⃗ , which
(A) 2 (C) 1
of the following is true? Note: C and
(B) 2 (D) 0
refer to any closed contour and any
surface whose boundary is C.
ECE\EE – 2012
(A) ∮ ⃗ ⃗ = ∬ ⃗ ⃗
24. The maximum value of
(B) ∮ ⃗ ⃗ = ∬⃗ ⃗ ( ) in the interval
⃗ ⃗ = [1,6] is
(C) ∮ ∬⃗ ⃗
(A) 21 (C) 41
(D) ∮ ⃗ ⃗ = ∬⃗ ⃗ (B) 25 (D) 46
ECE – 2010 ECE – 2013

20. If ⃗ ̂ ̂ , then ∮ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ over the 25. The maximum value of unit which the
path shown in the figure is approximation holds to within
10% error is
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
26. The divergence of the vector field

⃗ ̂ ̂ ̂ is
(A) 0 (C) 1
(B) 1/3 (D) 3
√ √
(A) 0 (C) 1
(B) ⁄√ (D) 2√
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
27. Consider a vector field ⃗ ( ) The closed 34. The magnitude of the gradient for the
loop line integral ∮ ⃗  can be expressed function ( ) at the
as point (1,1,1) is_______.
(A) ∯( ⃗ )  over the closed
35. The directional derivative of
surface boundary by the loop
( ) ( ) ( )in the direction
(B) ∰(  ⃗ )dv over the closed volume √
bounded by the loop of the unit vector at an angle of with

(C) ∭(  ⃗ )dv over the open volume y axis, is given by ________________.
bounded by the loop
(D) ∬( ⃗ ) over the closed surface EE – 2005
bounded by the loop 1. For the scalar field u = , magnitude
of the gradient at the point (1, 3) is
ECE – 2014 (A) √ ⁄ (C) √
28. The volume under the surface (D) ⁄
(B) √ ⁄
z(x, y) = x+y and above the triangle in
the x-y plane defined by
2. For the function f(x) = , the
{0 y x and 0 x 12} is______
maximum occurs when x is equal to
(A) 2 (C) 0
29. For the maximum value of the
(B) 1 (D) 1
function ( ) occurs at
(A) o (C)
(B) o (D) o 3. If S = ∫ , then S has the value
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) 1
30. The value of . / is
(A) (C) EE – 2006
(B) (D) 4. A surface S(x, y) = 2x + 5y – 3 is
integrated once over a path consisting of
31. The maximum value of the function the points that satisfy
( ) ( ) (wh ) (x+1)2+ (y 1)2 =√ . The integral
occurs at x =____. evaluates to
(A) 17√ (C) √ /17
32. The maximum value of
(B) 17/√ (D) 0
( ) in the interval
0 x 3 is ______.
5. The expression V = ∫ πR ( h ) h
33. For a right angled triangle, if the sum of for the volume of a cone is equal to
the lengths of the hypotenuse and a side (A) ∫ πR ( h )
is kept constant, in order to have
(B) ∫ πR ( h ) h
maximum area of the triangle, the angle
between the hypotenuse and the side is (C) ∫ π ( R) h
(A) 12 (C) 60 (D) ∫ π ( ⁄R )
(B) 36 (D) 45
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE – 2007 EE – 2010
6. The integral ∫ ( ) o 11. At t = 0, the function ( ) has
equals (A) a minimum
(A) o (C) (1/2) o (B) a discontinuity
(B) 0 (D) (1/2) (C) a point of inflection
(D) a maximum
EE – 2008
7. Consider function f(x)= ( ) where 12. Divergence of the three-dimensional
x is a real number. Then the function has radial vector field is
(A) only one minimum (A) 3 (C) ̂ ̂ ̂
(B) only two minima (B) 1/r (D) ̂( ̂ ̂)
(C) three minima
(D) three maxima 13. The value of the quantity P, where
∫ , is equal to
EE – 2009
(A) 0 (C) e
8. f(x, y) is a continuous function defined
(B) 1 (D) 1/e
over (x, y) [0, 1] [0, 1]. Given the two
constraints, x > and y > , the
EE – 2011
volume under f(x, y) is
14. The two vectors [1, 1, 1] and [1, a, ],
√
(A) ∫ ∫ ( ) √
where a = . /, are
(B) ∫ ∫ ( ) (A) orthonormal
(C) ∫ ∫ ( ) (B) orthogonal
(C) parallel
√ √
(D) ∫ ∫ ( ) (D) collinear
9. A cubic polynomial with real coefficients 15. The function f(x) = 2x – has
(A) can possibly have no extrema and no (A) a maxima at x = 1 and a minima at
zero crossings x=5
(B) may have up to three extrema and (B) a maxima at x = 1 and a minima at
upto 2 zero crossings x= 5
(C) cannot have more than two extrema (C) only a maxima at x = 1
and more than three zero crossings (D) only a minima at x = 1
(D) will always have an equal number of
extrema and zero crossings EE – 2013
16. Given a vector field
10. F(x, y) = ( )̂ ( )̂ ’ , the line integral
line integral over the straight line from ∫ evaluated along a segment on the x-
( ) = (0, 2) to ( ) = (2, 0) axis from x = 1 to x = 2 is
evaluates to (A) 2.33 (C) 2.33
(A) –8 (C) 8 (B) 0 (D) 7
(B) 4 (D) 0
17. The curl of the gradient of the scalar field
defined by
(A)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) 23. ( ) Where f and

(C) ( ) ( ) v are scalar and vector fields respectively.
( ) If h is
(D) (A)
(B)
EE – 2014 (C)
18. Let ( ) . The maximum value of (D)
the function in the interval ( ) is
(A) (C) 24. The minimum value of the function
(B) (D) ( ) 0 in the
interval , - is
19. The line integral of function , in the (A) 20 (C) 16
counterclockwise direction, along the (B) 28 (D) 32
circle is
(A) π (C) π IN – 2005
(B) π (D) π 1. A scalar field is given by f = x2/3 + y2/3,
where x and y are the Cartesian
20. Minimum of the real valued function coordinates. The derivative of f along the
( ) ( ) occurs at x equal to line y = x directed away from the origin,
(A) (C) 1 at the point (8, 8) is
√ (C)
(B) (D) (A) √
(B)
√ (D)
21. To evaluate the double integral √
( ⁄ )
∫ .∫ . / / dy, we make the
2. Given a real-valued continuous function
substitution u = ( ) and . The f(t) defined over [0,1], ∫ ( ) is
integral will reduce to (A) (C) f(1)
( ) ∫ (∫ ) (B) 0 (D) f(0)
3. The value of the integral ∫ is

( ) ∫ (∫ )
(A) 2 (C) 2
(B) does not exist (D)
( ) ∫ (∫ )
4. ̅(t) has a constant magnitude,
If a vector R
( ) ∫ (∫ ) then
̅ ̅
̅
(A) R ̅ R
(C) R ̅
22. A particle, starting from origin at t = 0 s, ̅
̅
̅ ̅
̅
(B) R (D) R R
is traveling along x-axis with velocity
π π
o . / 5. If f = + ……
At t = 3 s, the difference between the + where ai (i = 0 to n) are constants,
distance covered by the particle and the then is
magnitude of displacement from the (A) ⁄ (C) nf
origin is _________ (B) ⁄ (D) n√
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. The plot of a function f(x) is shown in the (B) once differentiable but not twice
following figure. A possible expression for (C) twice differentiable but not thrice
the function f(x) is (D) thrice differentiable
f(x)
11. For real x, the maximum value of is.
1 (A) 1 (C) √
(B) e 1 (D)
x IN – 2008
0 12. Consider the function y = x2 6x + 9. The
(A) ( ) (C) ( ) maximum value of y obtained when x
(B) . / (D) . / varies over the interval 2 to 5 is
(A) 1 (C) 4
IN – 2006 (B) 3 (D) 9
7. The function ( ) is
approximated as where is in 13. The expression for x > 0 is equal to
radian. The maximum value of for (A) – (C)
which the error due to the approximation (B) x (D)
is within
(A) 0.1 rad (C) 0.3 rad 14. Given y = + 2x + 10, the value of |
(B) 0.2 rad (D) 0.4 rad
is equal to
(A) 0 (C) 12
8. The solution of the integral equation
(B) 4 (D) 13
()
() ( )∫ ( ) ( ) 15.
(A) Indeterminate (C) 1
(A) ( () ( )) (B) 0 (D)
(B) ( () ( )) IN – 2009
( () ( )) 16. A sphere of unit radius is centered at the
(C)
( () ( )) origin. The unit normal at a point (x, y, z)
( () ( )) on the surface of the sphere is
(D) ( ( ) ( ))
(A) (x, y, z) (C) . /
√ √ √
(B) . /
IN – 2007
√ √ √ (D) . /
√ √ √
∫ ∫ dx dy is. IN – 2010
(C) Π 17. The electric charge density in the region
(A) √π⁄
(D) π⁄ R: is given as
(B) √π
σ( ) , where x and y are in
meters. The total charge (in coulomb)
10. Consider the function f(x) = , where x
contained in the region R is
is real. Then the function f(x) at x = 0 is
(A) π (C) π⁄
(A) continuous but not differentiable
(B) π (D) 0
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
18. The integral ∫ . / sin(t) dt 23. A scalar valued function is defined

as ( ) , where A is a
evaluates to
symmetric positive definite matrix with
(A) 6 (C) 1.5
dimension n× n ; b and x are vectors of
(B) 3 (D) 0
dimension n×1. The minimum value of
( ) will occur when x equals
19. The infinite series
(A) ( ) (C) . /
( ) ………… (B) – ( )
converges to (D)
(A) cos (x) (C) sinh(x) 24. Given
(B) sin(x) (D) () ( π)
π
() o . π /
IN – 2011
The o w
20. The series ∑ ( ) converges
(A) A circle
for (B) A multi-loop closed curve
(A) (C) (C) Hyperbola
(B) (D) (D) An ellipse
IN – 2013
21. For a vector E, which one the following
statement is NOT TRUE?
(A) E E o o
(B) If E E is called conservative
(C) If E E is called irrotational
(D) E E -rotational
IN – 2014
22. A vector is defined as
̂ ̂ ̂
Where ̂ ̂ ̂ are unit vectors in
Cartesian ( ) coordinate system.
The surface integral ∯ f.ds over the
closed surface S of a cube with vertices
having the following coordinates:
(0,0,0),(1,0,0),(1,1,0),(0,1,0),(0,0,1),
(1,0,1),(1,1,1),(0,1,1) is________
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME = 0 o 1
1. [Ans. A]
√ √
Since, potential function of ⃗ is x²yz = 0 1
( ) ( ) ( )
9. [Ans. B]
2. [Ans. D]
o h 10. [Ans. B]
π h π o ( ) ( )
For V to be max
This is of the form . /
Hence, h Applying L hospital rule
( )
. /
3. [Ans. A]
=
( ) | | | | =
=
11. [Ans. B]
Let the vectors be
4. [Ans. A]
After changing order ∫ ∫ ( )
5. [Ans. A] ( )(⃗ )(⃗ )

I= ∫ ( )
=2∫ [ ∫ ]
= 2∫
Now Area vector will be perpendicular to
plane of i.e.
6. [Ans. A] will be the required unit vector.
A Line integral and a surface integral is And option (A), (D) cannot give a vector
connected by stokes theorem
product
|(⃗ ⃗ ) (⃗ )|
7. [Ans. B]
12. [Ans. B]
Applying ’ Hospital rule, we get
Given: √ √ √
I=
( ) √
I=
( )
8. [Ans. A]
For
∫ 0 1 [ ]
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
But y is always greater than x. = ∫ ( )

Hence y= 4 only.
= ∫ ( )
13. [Ans. B] = 0 1
Since interval given is bounded, so
minimum value of functions is 1. =
14. [Ans. D] 18. [Ans. B]

L=
( )
h h ∫√ ( )
Let x= a3 ⇒ a=2
( )
L =∫ (√ ).dx
Now by partial fractions,
= ( ) | (a3 8) = (a 2)(a2+2a+4)
=1.22 ⇒L= =
15. [Ans. D] 19. [Ans. C]

To see whether the integrals are bounded Taylor series expansion of f(x) about a is
or unbounded, we need to see that the given by
o ’ h h ( )
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
interval of integration. Let us write down ( )
the range of the integrands in the 4 Coefficient of (x- )⁴
options, Now f(x)= ex
A (0,1); B (0,1); C (0, ); D (0, ) ⇒ (x)= ex
⇒ (a)= ea
Thus, (D) , i.e., ∫ dx is unbounded. ( )
Hence for a=2,
16. [Ans. B]
h o o o Φ 20. [Ans. D]
⃗⃗ div {( )̂ ( )̂ ( )̂}
along a vector ⃗ ( Φ)
( ) ( ) ( )
Hence directional derivative is
( ̂ ̂) =3
(grad (x2+2y2+z)).
√
̂ ̂)
(2x ̂ ̂ ̂ ). ( 21. [Ans. C]
=
Hence at (1,1,2),
⇒
Directional derivative =
⇒ ( )
17. [Ans. A]
I = ∬ .dx dy
⇒ ( )
The limit of y is form 0 to and limit
of x from 0 to 2 ( )( )
I =∫ ∫ ∫ . /
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
22. [Ans. A] 23. [Ans. A]

Given: Short method:
y2  4x Take a point on the curve z = 1, x = 0,
y=0
x2  4y
Length between origin and this point
√( ) ( ) ( ) =1
(4,4) This is minimum length because all
(0,0) options have length greater than 1.
24. [Ans. B]
x4
  4x Y
16
or x4  64x B
or x(x  64)  0
3
or x3  64 A
X
or x  4 x = cos 
 y 4 y=sin 
 Required area = ∫ .√ / Path is x2  y2  1
 2 x3 
4
R  e
 2 x3 2   
 3 120 (x  y)2  1  2sin  cos 
2 2
4 64  cos2 
 (4)3 2    (1  sin2)d  
3 12 0  2 0
32 16 16  1 1 
   =    1
3 3 3 2 2 2 2
Alternately Alternately
For point where both parabolas cut each Given: x2  y2  1
other
Put x=cos  , and y=sin 
y2  4x, x2  4y
 x  4 4x
2
 x  y 2  cos2  sin2  2sincos
= 1  sin2
or x2  8 x
or x4  64x
∫ ( )
or x3  64
 x  4,0 ,(4,0)  cos2    1 1
2
      
 Required area  2 0  2 2 2 
4 4
x2  
  4x   dx    1
0 0 4 2 
4
 2 x3  16
 2 x3 2     25. [Ans. C]
 3 120 3
F  3xzi  2xyj  yz2k
⃗ ⃗
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) ( ) ( ) √
 3z  2x  2yz
π ∫ π* +
At point (1, 1, 1), divergence =3+2 2=3
π
π( )
26. [Ans. D]
⃗
o ⃗ ⃗ 30. [Ans. D]
̂ ̂ ̂ If f(x) even function
∫ ( ) ∫ ( )
|| ||
31. [Ans. D]
̂ ( )̂ Standard limit formulae
o ( ) ̂ ̂
32. [Ans. B]
27. [Ans. C]
⇒ 33. [Ans. C]
The function is continuous in [ 1, 1]
It is also differentiable in [ 1, 1] except at
x = 0.
Since Left derivative = 1 and
Right derivative = 1 at x = 0
1 1 2
34. [Ans. B]
o
y is continuous for all x R, and
differentiable for all x R, except at , Using this standard limit, here a = 1 then
since at o o ’ h = ( ) /2 =1/2
value towards the left and right side of
35. [Ans. D]
( )
( )
28. [Ans. D] ( )
( )
∫ , - π
f(x) has a point of inflection at x =0.
29. [Ans. D] 36. [Ans. A]
∫ π ( )
Volume from x = 1 to x = 2, ̂ ̂ ̂
̂ ̂ ̂
∫π
( )
√ √
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
̂ 38. [Ans. A]
̂ ̂
√ √ By Gauss Divergence theorem,
√ ̂ √ ̂ ̂
√ √ ∬( ̅ ̅) ∭( )
The unit outward normal vector at point
P is (Surface Integral is transformed to
volume Integral)
( )
( ) ( ) ( )
(√ ̂ √ )̂
̂ ̂
√ √
∭( ) ∭
37. [Ans. A]
The area enclosed is shown below as
shaded π
π
( ) ∬( ̅ ̂) ∭( )
( π)
( ) π
The coordinates of point P and Q is
obtained by solving 39. [Ans. C]
y = x and y = simultaneously,
i.e. x = ∫(√ ) ( )
⇒ ( )
⇒ Using Integration by parts
Now, x = 0 ⇒ which is point Q(0,0) ∫ ∫
and x = 1 ⇒ which is point
P(1,1) Here,
So required area is f=ln(x) and dg=√
and g=
∫ ∫ o
∫(√ ) ( )
* + * +
[ ] ∫ ( )
[ ] [ ]
( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
40. [Ans. A] π
0 o 1
So the minimum value is
[Differentiating both . /
=
o o o w ’
Hospital method]
. / 45. [Ans. D]
o o o o ( ) o
o o
( ) ( )
otherwise it is said to be discontinuous.
41. [Ans. B] So the most appropriate option is D.
G o
46. [Ans. C]
̂ ̂ ̂ ( )
| |
Div
Vectors are linearly dependent
42. [Ans. B]
( )
) (
( ) 47. [Ans. B]
, ho - Let
o ( )( )
( )
( ) ( )
o ( )( ) ∫
( ) o ( )
43. [Ans. A] ∫
̂ ̂ ̂ o
( ) () o o
⃗
[ ]
48. [Ans. B]
̂[ ( ) ( )]
∫ ∫ ∫ |
̂[ ( ) ( )]
∫ , -
̂[ ( ) ( )]
,̂ - ,̂ - ̂, - ∫ ( ) |
( )̂ ( )̂ ( )̂
[ ]
44. [Ans. *] Range 1.00 to 0.94
h o , - , -
π
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CE a =2a cos i.e, cos ⇒

1. [Ans C]
R
G ’ theorem is ( )

∮(  ) ∬( ) ( )
Here I = ∮ ( )
, ∫ ∫ -
∮ (( ) ( ) )
 = xy =∫ ∫ ( o )

= y and = 2y o
∫( )
’ h o w
I= ∫ ∫ , ( )-
π
. / | |
=∫ ∫
=∫ ∫ π π π √
. / ( )
2. [Ans. D] π π √
* ( )+
Since the position of rail engine S(t) is
continuous and differentiable function π π √
* +
according to Lagrange’s mean value
theorem more π √
( ) ( ) ( )
(t) = v(t) =
( )
= m/sec
= × kmph 4. [Ans. C]
= 126 kmph f = 2 +3 ( )⃗
Where v(t) is the velocity of the rail
engine.
= 4xi + 6yj + 2zk
3. [Ans. D] At P (2, 1, 3)
h ’ o h
r=2acos Directional derivation ̂
(i) r = a represents a circle with centre ( )
( )
( ) ‘ ’ √ ( )
(ii) r = 2acos represents a circle ( ) ( ) ( )
symmetric about OX with centre at
√
( ) ‘ ’
The circles are shown in figure below. At
√
h o o o ‘ ’
P 5. [Ans. A]
y Q
Potential function,
π 3
x
O A
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. D]
Put √
Integrating ∫ ∫
 =√
wh o
 =√ …… ( )
⇒
Now given equation is
……….. (ii)
6. [Ans. B] h h h
Let I(α) ∫ dx …( ) ( ) ( )
=∫ ( ) . / = ( √ ) [ from eqn(i)]
= ∫
h
Then Integrating by parts we get, √ ( )
= 0 ( α o )1
h h
= . / √ ( ( ) )
=
h
dI = √ ( √ )
Integrating, I = α
( ) o () ( ) h
+C=0
C=
π Now substitute in eqn (ii) we get
(α) α
h h
π
 ( )
I(0) = h h
⇒
But from equation (i), I(0) = ∫ dx
h h
⇒
∫ dx =
Which is the desired form
7. [Ans. D]
√ is the correct transformation.
̅=5 +2 + 3y ⃗
(⃗ ) 9. [Ans. C]
̅ ̅=0
= 5y + 4y + 6yz
̅ ̅ o
At(1, 1, 1)
If ̅ ̅ = 0
div ( ) = 5.1 + 4.1 + 6.1.1
= 15  o
Since P and Q are non-zero vectors
 o
 0
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. A] √
Since the limit is a function of x. We first √
√ √
integrate w.r.t. y and then w.r.t. x √
∫ ∫( )
13. [Ans. D]
Length of curve f(x) between x = a and
x = b is given by
∫ ∫( )
∫√ ( )
∫ * +
Here, 4h … … ( )
= 8h
∫ ( )
Since
and y = h at x =
∫ ( )
(As can be seen from equation (i), by
substituting x = 0 and x = L/2)
* ( ) ( )+
(Length of cable)
* + =∫ √ . /
h
ho ∫ √
11. [Ans. B]
f = + 3 +2 14. [Ans. A]
f = grad f = i +j +k
= i(2x) + j(6y) + k(4z)
The gradient at P(1, 2, 1) is
= i(2×1) + j(6×2) + k(4 ( ))
= 2i + 12j – 4k 15. [Ans. A]
( )
12. [Ans. B]
( )
⃗
⃗ ̂
⃗ Putting,
⃗
√
o ̂ Given,
( ) . / is the only stationary point.

√
* +
. /
√
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Since the limit is in form of , we can use

* +
. / ’ ho o o o ()
and get
* + λ
. /
Since, π
⇒λ
Since, ⇒λ
We have either a maxima or minima at
. / 18. [Ans. A]
Also since, r=0 1 = 8 > 0, the point ( )

. / o
o
( ) o o ( )
The minimum value is , o -
( )
19. [Ans. A]
Area = |̅ ̅ |
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
R ( ) ( )
So the optimal value of f(x, y) is a | |

minimum equal to
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
R ( ) ( ) ̅( )
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
R
16. [Ans. B]
√
Let I = ∫ …( )
√ √ 20. [Ans. B]
Since ∫ ( ) ∫ ( )
√
I=∫ …( )
√ √
√ √
(i) + (ii)  2I = ∫ 21. [Ans. B]
√ √
 2I = ∫ ∫ o
2I = |
∫ o o
 I = a/2
⇒ o
17. [Ans. C]
For a function f(x) to be continuous, ⇒ ∫ ( )
at x=a
( ) ( ) ∫ ( )
If f(x) is continuous at x=
π λ o * +
. /
[ ]
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) ( ) ( )
[ ] | |
Substituting the values we get

( ) ( ) ( )
| |
24. [Ans. 12]
π π
∫ o
∫ o ( o )
( )
∫ o o
o ( )
∫ o
( )
[ ] ⇒
Magnitude of acceleration
22. [Ans. C] =√ ( )
( ) 25. [Ans. B]
We have
⇒ ( )
∫ ( )
⇒
, ow - ∫ ( ) ∫ ( )
=1+0=1
Hence correct option is (C)
∫ ( )
23. [Ans. A]
(4, 3)
a
(2, 2)
c
b x ( )μ
(1, 0) 0.5 0.5

o ∆ wh o –ordinate points are
given is given by
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
26. [Ans. A]
=
α = =1
Use L – hospital Rule
4. [Ans. A]
α
P=∑ … ( –1)
o
= log x ‘ ’ w h a =1, l=2k 1
P= ( ) ( )
CS =
1. [Ans. B] Q=∑ … k
1 
  n 1 r
Cr xr ‘ ’ w h k
1  x  r0
n
( ) ( )
1 
Putting n=2,   21 r
Cr xr
1  x 2 r0
 
  r1 Cr xr   r1 C1xr ⇒
r 0 r 0
 
  r  1 xr   i  1 xi 5. [Ans. D]
r 0 i 0 y = 3 – 16 – 24 + 37
(since r is a dummy variable, r can be = 12 48 – 48 x = 0
replaced by i)
x (12 – 48x 48 ) = 0
x = 0 or 12 – 48x – 48 = 0
∑ ()
4x – 4 = 0
g(i) =i+1 √ √ √
x= = =
=2 √
2. [Ans. A]
f(x)= |x| = 36 96x 48
Continuity: In other words, Now at x = 0
f(x) = x o ≥ = 48 0
x for x< 0
Since, = =0 , At 2 ± √ also 0 (using
f (x) is continuous for all real values of x calculator)
Differentiability: There are 3 extrema in this function
( ) ( )
( ) 6. [Ans. D]
( )
Since ∫ ( ) =∫ ( )
R h 
I =∫
So |x| is continuous but not differentiable
 ( )
at x=0 =∫
( )
Since tan (A B) =
3. [Ans. A]
⁄
= ⁄
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD

[ ]
∫
[ ]
 9. [Ans. B]
0 1
∫ f(x) = sin x
0 1 ⇒ ( ) o
 ( ) ⇒ o
( ) ( ) π π π π
∫ [ ]
( ) ( )
  ( )
∫ ∫ At . / gives maximum
value
=, ( )- At . / gives minimum
= ln ( sec ) – ln (sec 0) value
= ln (√ ) ( )
= ln ( )–0= 10. [Ans. A]
For x = , f(x) =
7. [Ans. B] For x = , f(x) = 3 – 1 = 2
For x = 3, f(x) = 2
( ) *( ) + ( ) ( ) = f(3)
* ( ) + 11. [Ans. C]
By Mean value theorem
. /
( ) [ ]
12. [Ans. A]
Define g(x) = f(x) – f(x + 1) in [0, 1]. g(0)
is negative and g(1) is positive. By
8. [Ans. D] intermediate value theorem there is
€( ) h h g(y) = 0
o That is f(y) = f(y + 1)
∫
o Thus Answer is (A)
∫ 13. [Ans. 2]
* w +
* w +
∫ For min maximum non – common
elements must be there
⇒ * +
* + must be common to any 2 elements
of V1
[ ] ( )minimum value = 2
, -( o π π )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
14. [Ans. 4]
∫ | ∫∫
∫ π
o ( )
oπ π o (π)
π o π π
Hence option (A) is correct
∫ ∫( )
ECE
1. [Ans. C]
∫ ∫ (∫ )
dy
o ∫ o  0 for x< 0
dx
o dy
 0 for x> 0
Substituting the limits dx
π o (π) o ( )
π 2. [Ans. A]
ex
∫ Given, f x 
1  ex
 f ' x  
1  e .e  e
x x 2x

ex
0
1  e  x 2
 
∫ | ∫∫ 2
1  ex
= x cos 3. [Ans. C]
= π o ( π) π o π ∫
= π
LHS = I + II = π π π⇒
∫( o )
15. [Ans. A] Let cos = t ⇒

At o
∫ o
π o π
o
∫ o | ∫ ∫ o
∫( ) ∫( )
∫
| |
∫ ( ) ( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. A]
Given, f  x   x2  x  2
df  x 
0
dx
4. [Ans. A]  2x 1=0
o ’ h o 1
 x
∬( ) ∮ 2
d2f  x 
 = 2 ve
5. [Ans. D] dx2
From vector triple product So it shows only minima for interval
( ) ( ) ( ) [ 4, 4], it contains a maximum value that
Here, will be at x= 4 or x=4
⇒ ( ) ( ) ( )  f( 4)=18 and f(+4)=10
( ) ( )
9. [Ans. D]
6. [Ans. A] y  f  x ; x  0, 
( )
For strictly bounded, 0  limy  
 x  x0  f' x0   x  x0  f'' x0 
2 x0
 f  x0     ...... or 0  lim y  
1 2 x
 x  22 2
So, y  e x is strictly bounded
 e  (x  2)(e
2 2
)
2
e ......
2

 e2  3  x 
 x  22  ......  10. [Ans. A]
 2  sin  /2 1  sin  /2
  lim  lim  
0  0 2
  /2 
(Neglecting higher power of x)
1  sin  /2 1
= lim 
7. [Ans. C] 2  0  /2  2
ex  e x
coth (x)= =
ex  ex
11. [Ans. B]
x x2 x3 Two points on line are ( 1, 0) and (0, 1)
e  1     ..........
x
1 2 3 Hence line equation is,

x x2 x3  y y 
ex  1     .......... y   2 1 x  c
1 2 3  x2  x1 
x2 x4 y  x c
1
  ..........
ex  ex 2 4 y  x 1 … ( )
 x x 
e e x3 x5 2 2
x    .......... 5
3 5 I   ydx    x  1dx   2.5
1 1 2
1
or cot h (x)= (Since at x=1,y=2)
x
(Neglecting x2 and higher order)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
12. [Ans. B] 15. [Ans. A]

Taking f(x, y)= xy, we can show that, Given : g  x,y   4x3  10y 4
xdx+ydy, is exact. So, the value of the
The straight line can be expressed as
integral is independent of path
y=2x
(0, 1) Then g(x,y)=4x3+ 10 (2x)4

1 1

4
 
I   4x3  10 2x   dx   4x3  160x4 dx 
0 0
1
 4x4 160 5 
=   x  33
5 0
(1, 0)
 4
∫( ) 16. [Ans. A]
f(x)= +
(x)= =0 x=0
∫ ∫ (x)= + >0  x R.
Hence minimum at x=0
f(0)=1+1=2
[ | | ] Alternatively:
For any even function the maxima &
minima can be found by
13. [Ans. B] A.M. >= GM
Let f(x)  ex  sinx => exp(x) + exp( x) ≥ 2
o ’ Hence minimum value = 2
f  x   f a    x  a f'a  
 x  a
2
f''a  17. [Ans. B]

2!
where, a= Q
f  x   f     x   f'  
 x  
2
f'' 
2!
f ''  P
Coefficient of (x )2 is
2
f''   ex  sinx |at x   e
 Coefficient of (x )2=0.5 exp () ∫( )
14. [Ans. A]
∫ ∫
o [ | | ]
Thus, ( )w h o ow
( )w h ow
o ( )w h ow
o ( )w h ow
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
18. [Ans. D] 21. [Ans. A]

sinx = x ....
sin (x –π ) y= o
( ) ( )
= (x – π ) – .... o  o
or sin x = (x – π ) –
( ) ( )
... 
( ) ( ) o
or =1 – ....
( )
( )
( ) ( )  = o
or = 1 ....
( )
Since
19. [Ans. D] Therefore, at has a maximum.
o ’ h o
∮ ⃗ ⃗ = ∬⃗ ⃗ 22. [Ans. D]
Apply the divergence theorem
According Stokes Theorem
∮ ⃗ ⃗ =∮ ⃗⃗⃗ ⃗
∯ ⃗ ∭
20. [Ans. C] ( )∭
̂ ̂ ( and is the position vector)
⃗⃗⃗ ̂ ̂
⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ 23. [Ans. A]
Y
̂ ̂
S R
3 ̅ ( )]
⇒ [
1 Q
P ⇒ [ ( )]
X ⇒ ( )
√ √
⇒ ( ) ⇒
∮ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
⇒
∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
√
24. [Ans. C]
√
∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ∫ * + [ ] ( ) , -
√ √ ( ) ( )
= [ along PQ y =1 dy =0] ( ) ⇒
are the stationary points
∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ∫ .√ / , - ( )
( ) ( )
∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
√
∫√ . / and f(2) = 25 and f(4)=21
√ √
M o ( ) , -
[ ] f(6)=41
∫ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗ ∫ .√ / ( )
25. [Ans. B]
∮ ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
⇒
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
o 30. [Ans. C]
E o
( )
π
⇒
31. [Ans. *] Range to 0.01
E o o ( ) ( )
26. [Ans. D] ( )
̅ ̂ ̂ ̂ ⇒
⇒
( )
= ( )
=1+1+1 ( )
=3 o h
27. [Ans. D] 32. [Ans. *] Range 5.9 to 6.1

o ’ h o “ h integral of a Maximum value is 6
⃗
vector around a closed path L is equal ( )
( )
to the integral of curl of ⃗ over the open
o h o h ”
( )
∮⃗ ⃗ ∬( ⃗ )⃗ ( )
( )
28. [Ans. *] Range 862 to 866 ( )
Volume under the surface
33. [Ans. C]
∫ ∫ ∫ Let x (opposite side), y (adjacent side)
and z (hypotenuse side) of a right angled
∫ ∫ ( ) triangle
∫ * +
∫
Given o …
( )( o )
29. [Ans. A]
o o
( )
̇( ) ⇒ ( ) o ⇒
⇒ ( ) o
Since ( ) is negative, maximum value of ⇒
o
f(x) will be where ( )
0( )
1
⇒ ⇒
o oh
⇒ ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ( )( ))
( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
By trial and error method using options Now at x = 2

π (2) = ( )
= ( )
= 2 <0
34. [Ans. *] Range 6.8 to 7.2 At x = 2 we have a maxima.
⃗ ̂ ̂ ̂ = 0 1
̂ ̂ ̂
At (1, 1, 1) ⃗ ̂ ̂ ̂ 3. [Ans. C]
|⃗ | √ =∫ , - , -
= . /
35. [Ans. *] Range 2.99 to 3.01

4. [Ans. D]
( ) ( )
√ √
⃗ ( )̂ ( )̂ 5. [Ans. D]
√ √
We consider options (A) and (D) only
At (1, 1), ⃗ (̂ ̂ )
√ because which contains variable r.
Given unit vector, ̂ (̂ ̂ ) By integrating (D), we get
√
So, directional derivative π , which is volume of cone.
⇒ ⃗ ̂ (̂ ̂ ) (̂ ̂ )
√ √
6. [Ans. D]
=3
By property of definite integral
EE ∫ ( ) ∫ ( π )
1. [Ans. C] On simplification we get option (D)
Grad u = ̂ ⁄
7. [Ans. B]
At (1, 3) Grad u = √ ,( ⁄ ) - f(x) = ( )
(x) = 2( )
=√ =4x( ) =0
x = 0, x = 2 and x = 2 are the stationary
2. [Ans. A] points.
f(x) = (x) = 4[x(2x) +( ) ]
(x) = ( ) = 4[2 -
= ( ) = 4 [3 -
Putting ( (x) = 0 = 12
( )=0 (0) = < 0, maxima at x = 0
( )=0 (2) =(12)
x = 0 or x = 2 are the stationary points. = 32 > 0, minima at x =
Now, ( 2) =12( )
(x) = ( ) ( )( ) = 32 > 0; minima at x =
= ( ( )) There is only one maxima and only two
= ( ) minima for this function.
At x = 0, (0) = ( )=2
Since (x) = 2 is > 0 at x = 0 we have a
minima.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. A] = , -
=, ( )-
= ( ) ( ) =1
1
14. [Ans. B]
0 Dot product of two vectors
=1+a+ =0
So orthogonal
√
15. [Ans. C]
∫ ∫ ( ) f(x) =
( )
( )
9. [Ans. C] So the equation f(x) having only maxima
( ) at x = 1
( )
( ) 16. [Ans. B]
( )
( ) ̇̂
̂
̂ ̂ ̂
10. [Ans. D]
̅=( ̂ ̂ ̂
)̂ ( )̂
( ) = (0, 2) ∫ ∫
( ) = (2, 0)
Along x axis ,y=0,z=0
Equation of starting line = The integral reduces to zero.
⇒ y = 2 – x , dy = – dx
̅ ̅ =( ) ( ) 17. [Ans. D]
Putting y = 2 – x and dy = – dx
∫̅ ̅ ∫ ∫ ( ) C o o ‘ ’
( )
11. [Ans. B] .( )̂ ( )̂
( )̂ /
( )
̂ ̂ ̂
But at is undefined
Discontinuous || ||
( ) ( ) ( )
12. [Ans. A] ̂ ( ) ̂ ( ) ̂ ( )
̂ ̂ ̂
=0
Div ( ) ⃗
̂
=. ̂ ̂ /( ̂ ̂ ̂) 18. [Ans. A]
= 1+1+1= 3 ( ) ( ) ( )
o ( ) ( )
13. [Ans. B] ⇒
M
P=∫
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
19. [Ans. B] π
0 . /1
∫⃗
∫ [ ]
⇒ o o π 23. [Ans. A]
( ⃗) ⃗ ⃗
∫ ( )( )( )
( ) ( )
⃗
o
∫ ( ) [ ]
π 24. [Ans. B]
( )
20. [Ans. C] ( ) ⇒
⇒
( ) ( )
⇒( )( )
( ) ⇒
( )
( ) w , -
For number of values of ( )
⁄ ( )
o ( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
M ( )
21. [Ans. B] IN
G 1. [Ans. A]
o h o
⇒
o o
( )
⇒ o
Unit vector along y = x is
G ∫ (∫ ) π
̂ o
∫ (∫ ) ̂
√ √
o ̂
22. [Ans. 2] . /. /
( ) √ √
π π π √ √
∫ ∫ o . / . /
√
√
2. [Ans. D]
Using L Hospital Rule., numerator
()
becomes = = ( )
From the graph, distance at
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. B] When
Given integral is, I=∫ ( ) ( )
Let f(x) = so curve of 1/ will be And when
f(x)
( ) ( )
The possible expression for f(x) is
1 . /
7. [Ans. B]
-1 0 1 x
Error,
This curve will be discontinuous at x=0
o ’ w o For error to be minimum
( o ) ( )
4. [Ans. A]
Let R ̂ z (t) ̂
̅ (t) =x (t) ̂+y (t) + ⇒ o
̅( ) =K (constant)
|R ⇒
i.e., (t) + (t) + (t) = constant.
⇒
On analyzing the given (A) option, we find √
̅( )
̅(t)
that R will give constant magnitude,
so first differentiation of the integration will √
be zero.
5. [Ans. C] 1
Given : G
f= + …… + o
where, (i=0 to n) are constant.
= +(n 1) ……
+ ⇒
√
and =0+ + ……
(n 1) +n ⇒
√
+
⇒ ( )
= , + + -
= nf ⇒
⇒
6. [Ans. B]
8. [Ans. B]
( ) ( )
When () ∫ ( ) …( )
( ) ( ) Differentiating the above equation

When
( ) ( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
() 14. [Ans. B]
, ()
Given y = x2 + 2x + 10
= 2x + 2
∫ ( ) -
|
From equation (i)

() 15. [Ans. C]
() () By definition
()
⇒ ()
16. [Ans. A]
This is Leibnitz linear equation Unit vector= =xi+yj+zk
Integrating factor I.F = ∫ and
the solution is
17. [Ans. C]
() ∫ R:
Y
( )
1 +1 X
1
, - o
9. [Ans. D]
Area = ( )
Total charge = σ
10. [Ans. A]
This is a standard question of =
differentiability & continuity = coulomb.
11. [Ans. C] 18. [Ans. B]

y= We know that
=( ).(cos x + sin x) = 0
∫ () ( ) ( )wh
⇒ tan x = 1
Or x = π π
∫ . / . /
y will be maximum at x =
y= 19. [Ans. B]
= = √
Expansion of sin x
........
12. [Ans. C]
y(2) = ( )
20. [Ans. B]
y(5) = ( )
In a G.P ( )
13. [Ans. C] For a G.P to converge
( )
y= ⇒ ⇒ ( )
y= ⇒
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
21. [Ans. D]
.E=0 is not irrational (it is solenoidal)
22. [Ans. 1]
From Gauss divergence theorem, we have
∫ ̅ ̅ ∫ ̅ ∫ ̅
∫. /dxdydz
∫ ∫ ∫ ( )
̅ ̂ ̂ ̂
[ ]
⇒
23. [Ans. C]
24. [Ans. D]
/
π
π
o .
( π )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Differential Equations
ME – 2005 (B) degree 1 order 1

1. If x xy n y then (C) degree 2 order 1
(D) degree 2 order 2
what is y
(A) e (C) ⁄
ME – 2007
(B) 1 (D) ⁄
7. The solution of y with initial value
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 2 y (0) = 1 is bounded in the interval
and 3. (A)  x  (C) x  1,x  1
The complete solution of the ordinary (B)   x  1 (D) 2  x  2
differential equation
y y ME – 2008
p qy s
x x 8. It is given that + 2y + y = 0, y (0) = 0,
y y(1) = 0. What is y (0.5)?
2. Then, p and q are (A) 0 (C) 0.62
(A) p =3, q = 3 (C) p =4, q = 3 (B) 0.37 (D) 1.13
(B) p =3, q = 4 (D) p =4, q = 4
9. Given that ẍ + 3x = 0, and x(0) = 1,
3. Which of the following is a solution of the ẋ (0) = 0, what is x(1)?
differential equation (A) 0.99 (C) 0.16
y y (B) 0.16 (D) 0.99
p q y
x x
(A) (C) x ME – 2009
(B) x (D) x
10. The solution of x y x with the
ME – 2006 condition y s
4. For +4 + 3y = , the particular (A) y (C) y
integral is:
(B) y (D) y
(A)
(B) ME – 2010
(C) 11. The Blasius equation, , is a
(D) +
(A) second order non-linear ordinary
5. The solution of the differential equation
(B) third order non-linear ordinary
dy 2
 2xy  ex with y (0) = 1 is: differential equation
dx (C) third order linear ordinary
(A) (1+ x) (C) (1 x) differential equation
(B) (1+ x) (D) (1 x) (D) mixed order non-linear ordinary
6. The partial differential equation
( ) ( )= 0 has
(A) degree 1 order 2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME – 2011 x x
,y- * + ,y-
12. Consider the differential equation t
x x
y x. The general solution with ,y- * + ,y-
t
constant c is
(A) y t n t n 17. If y = f(x) is the solution of with
(B) y t n ( ) the boundary conditions y t
(C) y t n ( ) x at x __________
(D) y t n( )
18. The general solution of the differential
equation os x y with c as a
ME – 2012
constant, is
13. Consider the differential equation
(A) y s n x y x
x x y with the boundary
(B) t n ( ) y
conditions of y(0) =0 and y(1) = 1. The
complete solution of the differential (C) os ( ) x
equation is (D) t n ( ) x
(A) x (C) s n( )
(B) s n ( ) 19. Consider two solution x(t) = x t and
(D) s n( )
x t x t of the differential equation
x t
ME – 2013 x t t su t t
14. The partial differential equation t
x t
u is a x |
t
(A) linear equation of order 2 x t
(B) non – linear equation of order 1 x |
t
(C) linear equation of order 1
x t x t
(D) non – linear equation of order 2 The wronskian W(t) =| | t
15. The solution to the differential equation t s

(A) 1 (C) 0
where k is a constant,
(B) 1 (D)
subjected to the boundary conditions
u(0) = 0 and u(L) = U, is 20. The solution of the initial value problem
(A) u (C) u ( ) xy y is
(B) u ( ) (D) u ( ) (A) (C)
(B) (D)
ME – 2014
16. The matrix form of the linear system CE – 2005
x y and x y is 1. Transformation to linear form by
substituting v = y of the equation
x x
,y- * + ,y- + p(t)y = q(t)y ; n > 0 will be
t
x x (A) + (1 n)pv = (1 n)q
,y- * + ,y-
t
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) + (1 n)pv = (1+n)q CE – 2007

6. The degree of the differential equation
(C) + (1+n)pv = (1 n)q
+ 2x = 0 is
(D) + (1+n)pv = (1+n)q
(A) 0 (C) 2
(B) 1 (D) 3
2. The solution of
y y , ( ) 7. The solution for the differential equation
in the range x is given by = x y with the condition that y = 1 at
x = 0 is
(A) ( os x s n x)
(A) y = (C) In(y) =
(B) ( os x s n x)
(B) In(y) = +4 (D) y =
(C) ( os x s n x)
(D) ( os x s n x) 8. A body originally at 600C cools down to
C in 15 minutes when kept in air at a
CE – 2006 temperature of 250C. What will be the
3. A spherical naphthalene ball expanded to temperature of the body at the end of 30
the atmosphere losses volume at a rate minutes?
proportional to its instantaneous surface (A) 35.20C (C) 28.70C
area due to evaporation. If the initial (B) 31.5 C
0 (D) 150C
diameter of the ball is 2 cm and the
CE – 2008
diameter reduces to 1 cm after 3 months,
the ball completely evaporates in 9. The general solution of + y = 0 is
(A) 6 months (C) 12 months (A) y = P cos x + Q sin x
(B) 9 months (D) Infinite time (B) y = P cos x
(C) y = P sin x
4. The solution of the differential equation (D) y=Psn x
x xy x given that at x = 1,
10. Solution of = at x = 1 and y = √ is
y = 0 is
(A) (C) (A) x y (C) x y
(B) x y (D) x y
(B) (D)
CE – 2009
11. Solution of the differential equation
5. The differential equation = 0.25 y is to be
3y + 2x = 0 represents a family of
solv us ng t b w r mpl t Eul r’s
method with the boundary condition y = 1 at (A) Ellipses (C) circles
x = 0 and with a step size of 1. What would (B) Parabolas (D) hyperbolas
be the value of y at x = 1?
CE – 2010
(A) 1.33 (C) 2.00
12. The order and degree of the differential
(B) 1.67 (D) 2.33
equation + 4 √( ) y = 0 are
respectively
(A) 3 and 2 (C) 3 and 3
(B) 2 and 3 (D) 3 and 1
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. The solution to the ordinary differential 2. The following differential equation has
3
equation + 6y = 0 is d2y  dy 
3  4   y2  2  x
(A) y= + dt2  dt 
(B) y= + (A) degree=2, order=1
(C) y= + (B) degree=1, order=2
(D) y= + (C) degree=4, order=3
(D) degree=2, order=3
14. The partial differential equation that can
be formed from z = ax + by + ab has the ECE – 2006
form (w t p n q ) d2y
3. For the differential equation 2
 k2y  0
(A) z = px + qy dx
(B) z = px + pq the boundary conditions are
(C) z = px + qy + pq (i) y=0 for x=0 and
(D) z = qx + pq (ii) y=0 for x=a
The form of non-zero solutions of y
CE – 2011 (where m varies over all integers) are
15. The solution of the differential equation m x
y ∑ sn
+ = x, with the condition that y = 1 at
m x
x = 1, is y ∑ os
(A) y = + (C) y = +
y ∑ x
(B) y = + (D) y = +
y ∑
CE – 2012
16. The solution of the ordinary differential
equation y=0 for the boundary ECE – 2007
condition, y=5 at x = 1 is 4. The solution of the differential equation
(A) y (C) y d2y
k2  y  y 2 under the boundary
(B) y (D) y dx2
conditions
CE – 2014 (i) y=y1 at x=0 and
17. The integrating for the differential (ii) y=y2 at x=, where k, y1 and y2 are
equation s constants, is
(A) y y y xp( x⁄ ) y
(A) (C)
(B) y y y xp x⁄ y
(B) (D)
(C) y y y s n x⁄ y
(D) y y y xp x⁄ y
ECE – 2005
1. A solution of the following differential
ECE – 2008
equation is given by
5. Which of the following is a solution to the
d2y dy
 5  6y  0 differential equation x t x t
dx2 dx
(A) t
(A) y  e  e (C) y  e  e
2x 3x 2x 3x (C) x t t
(B) x t
(D) x t t
(B) y  e  e (D) y  e  e
2x 3x 2x 3x
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE – 2009 ECE– 2011

6. The order of the differential equation 10. The solution of the differential equation
3
d2y  dy  y y is
  y4  et is
dt 2  dt  (A) x (C) y
(A) 1 (C) 3 (B) x (D) y
(B) 2 (D) 4
ECE\EE\IN – 2012
7. Match each differential equation in Group 11. With initial condition x(1) = 0.5, the
I to its family of solution curves from solution of the differential equation,
Group II. t x t is
Group I Group II
dy y 1. Circles (A) x t (C) xt
P. 
dx x (B) x t (D) x
dy y 2. Straight Lines
Q. 
dx x ECE\IN – 2012
dy x 3. Hyperbolas 12. Consider the differential equation
R. 
dx y y t y t
y t t
dy x t t
S. 
dx y wt y t | n |
(A) P-2, Q-3, R-3, S-1 y
(B) P-1, Q-3, R-2, S-1 num r l v lu o | s
t
(C) P-2, Q-1, R-3, S-3 (A) (C)
(D) P-3, Q-2, R-1, S-2 (B) (D) 1
ECE – 2010 ECE – 2013

8. Consider a differential equation 13. A system described by a linear, constant
y x x with the initial condition coefficient, ordinary, first order
y s ng Eul r’s rst or r m t o differential equation has an exact solution
with a step size of 0.1, the value of y given by y t or t when the forcing
is function is x(t) and the initial condition is
(A) 0.01 (C) 0.0631 y(0). If one wishes to modify the system
(B) 0.031 (D) 0.1 so that the solution becomes – 2y(t) for
t > 0, we need to
9. A function n x satisfies the differential (A) Change the initial condition to – y(0)
and the forcing function to 2x(t)
equation where L is a
(B) Change the initial condition to 2y(0)
constant. The boundary conditions are: and the forcing function to –x(t)
n and n . The solution to (C) Change the initial condition to
this equation is
j√ y(0) and the forcing function to
(A) n x xp x
j√ x(t)
(B) n x xp x √
(D) Change the initial condition to
(C) n x xp x
– 2y (0) and the forcing function to
(D) n x xp x
– 2x(t)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE – 2014 (B) x t

14. If the characteristic equation of the (C) x t
differential equation (D) x t
y has two equal roots,
EE – 2011
t n t v lu s o r
3. With K as a constant, the possible solution
(A) ±1 (C) ±j
for the first order differential equation
(B) 0,0 (D) ±1/2
is
15. Which ONE of the following is a linear (A) (C)
non-homogeneous differential equation, (D)
(B)
where x and y are the independent and
dependent variables respectively?
EE – 2013
(A) xy (C) xy
4. A function y x x is defined over
(B) xy (D) an open interval x = (1,2). At least at one
point in this interval , is exactly
16. If z xy ln xy then (A) 20 (C) 30
(A) x y (C) x y (B) 25 (D) 35
(B) y x (D) y x
EE – 2014
5. The solution for the differential equation
17. If a and b are constants, the most general x
solution of the differential equation x w t n t l on t ons x
t
x x x
x s n | s
t t t
(A) (C) bt (A) t t
(B) bt (D) (B) s n t os t
(C) s n t os t
18. With initial values y(0) = y (0) = 1, the
solution of the differential equation (D) os t t
y tx s
x x y
EE – 2005
1. The solution of the first order differential Which of the following is a solution to this
qu t on x’ t 3x(t), x (0) = x is differential equation for x > 0?
(A) x (t) = x (C) x (t) = x (A) (C) x
(B) x (t) = x (D) x (t) = x (B) x (D) ln x
EE – 2010 IN– 2005

2. For the differential equation 1. The general solution of the differential
equation (D2 4D +4)y = 0, is of the form
x with initial conditions
(given D = d/dx), and C1 and C2 are
x n | , the solution is constants
t (A) C1e2x (C) C1e2x + C2 e2x
(A) x t (B) C1e + C2
2x (D) C1e2x + C2x
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. urv s or w t urv tur ρ t IN– 2007

any point is equal to cos θ w r θ s t
3 5. The boundary-value problem y λy
angle made by the tangent at that point y y w ll v non-zero
with the positive direction of the x-axis, solut on n only t v lu s o λ r
r gv nρ , where y and y (A) ± ± …
⁄
(B) …
are the first and second derivatives of y
(C) …
with respect to x)
(D) …
(A) circles (C) ellipses
(B) parabolas (D) hyperbolas
IN– 2008
IN– 2006
= 1 + y2. Which one of the following
3. For an initial value problem
ÿ ẏ y can be a particular solution of this
y n ẏ differential equation?
various solutions are written in the (A) y = tan (x + 3) (C) x = tan (y + 3)
following groups. Match the type of (B) y = tan x + 3 (D) x = tan y + 3
solution with the correct expression.
Group 1 Group 2 IN– 2010
P. General solution 1. 0.1ex 7. Consider the differential equation
of homogeneous y with y(0)=1. The value of
equations y(1) is
Q. Particular integral 2. (A cos 10 x (A) (C)
+ B sin 10 x) (B) (D)
R. Total solution 3. cos 10 x +
satisfying boundary 0.1e x
IN – 2011
conditions
(A) P-2, Q-1, R-3 (C) P-1, Q-2, R-3
ÿ ẏ y with boundary conditions
(B) P-1, Q-3, R-2 (D) P-3, Q-2, R-1
y(0) = 1, y(1) = 0. The value of y(2) is
(A) 1 (C) –
4. A linear ordinary differential equation is
(B) (D)
given as
d2y dy
2
 3  2y  δ(t) IN– 2013
dt dt
9. The type of the partial differential
Where  (t) is an impulse input. The
solut on s oun by Eul r’s orw r - equation is
difference method that uses an (A) Parabolic (C) Hyperbolic
integration step h. What is a suitable (B) Elliptic (D) Nonlinear
value of h?
(A) 2.0 (C) 1.0 10. The maximum value of the solution y(t) of
(B) 1.5 (D) 0.2 the differential equation y t ÿ t
with initial conditions ẏ and
y , for t is
(A) 1 (C)
(B) 2 (D) √
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN– 2014
11. The figure shows the plot of y as a
function of x
x
y
x
y
The function shown is the solution of the

differential equation (assuming all initial
conditions to be zero) is :
(A) (C) x
(B) x (D) |x|
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME 4. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. D] The given differential equation may be
lnx written as
x y xy
x y y y
lnx ux l ry qu t on s
y y
x x
lnx
omp r ng w g t
x x
∫ ∫
ow x Substituting D=2, we get
y(I.F.) = ∫ x
( )
x y ∫ x x
olv ng bov n t v lu o 5. [Ans. B]

utt ng x t n n t v lu o y t dy
First order equation,  Py  Q,
x w sy dx
Where P = 2x and Q =
2. [Ans. C] Since P and Q are functions of x, then
Given equation is Integrating factor,
2
y I.F. = e  Pdx  e x
p qy
x x Solution is
p q y
y ∫ x
p q
ts solut on s
y ∫ x
y
2
um o roots p yex  x  c
p Since, y ,c=1
ro u t o roots q  x2
y (1 + x) e
q
3. [Ans. C] 6. [Ans. A]
Given equation is Order: The order of a differential equation
y y is the order of the highest derivative
p q appears in the equation
x x
p q y Degree: The degree of a differential
ut p n q equation is the degree of the highest
y order differential coefficient or derivative,
when the differential coefficients are free
from radicals and fraction.
The general solution of differential
y x qu t on o or r ‘n’ must nvolv ‘n’
arbitrary constant.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. C] y
( )y x …
y x x
v n y Standard form
x
y y
x y …
y x
Where P and Q function of x only and
nt gr t ng x
y solution is given by
y ∫ x
x
nx y ∫
Where, integrating factor (I.F)
r n x
x
y
x ∫
x
x
x olut on y x ∫x x x
x and x x
yx
8. [Ans. A] Given condition
y y y
y
A.E is, D2+2D+1 =0
2=0
m ns t x y
m 1
The C.F. is (C1+C2x)e-x
P.I. = 0
ow y ₁
n y ₂ ₂
x
r or yx
y x
y
x
9. [Ans. D]
ẍ x 11. [Ans. B]
Auxiliary equation is
is third order ( ) and it
m2 + 3 = 0
i.e. m = ±√ is linear, since the product is not
x os√ t sn√ t allowed in linear differential equation
ẋ √ os√ t s n√ t
At t = 0 12. [Ans. D]
1=A y
y x
0=B x
y
x = os √ t ∫ ∫ x
y
x os √ t
x
t n y
10. [Ans. A]
x
Given differential equation is y t n. /
y
x y x
x
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. [Ans. A] 17. [Ans. *] Range 34 to 36

y y y
x x y
x x x
y n y y
Choice (A) satisfies the initial condition as x
well as equation as shown below y x
y x tx y
y n y y
tx
y x
lso x y x
x
y tx y
x
y y 18. [Ans. D]
x x y y
x x os x y
x x x x x
x x x Let x y z
o y x is the solution to this equation with y z
given boundary conditions x x
z
os z
x
14. [Ans. D] z z
os z os ( )
x
15. [Ans. B] z
s ( ) z x
m m Integrating
z
u t n( ) x
u z
At x=0, t n( ) x
At x=L, x y
t n( ) x
( )
n 19. [Ans. A]
u x Since the determinant of wronskian
matrix is constant values for, therefore it
is same for both t=0 and t=
Solving we get u = U( ) x t x t
t x t x t
t t
16. [Ans. A]
x
x y
t
y 20. [Ans. B]
x y y
t ∫ ∫ x x ln y x ln
So by observation it is understood that, y
y
x x ln ( ) x y
,y- * + ,y-
t
v ny
n y
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CE y
tx s
1. [Ans. A] x
Given + p(t) y = q(t) y ; n > 0
Given, v = y
v y
n y
t t
y v n
t n y t
Substitution in the differential equation y ( os x sn x)
we get
+ p(t)y = q(t) y 3. [Ans. A]
Multiplying by (1 n) y we get …
v t
p t n y q t n Where, V = r
t
Now since y = v we get r
v r
n pv n q r
t t t
Where p is p (t) and q is q(t) Substituting in (i) we get
4 r = r )
2. [Ans. A]
r
y y
y t
x x  dr = kdt
y
Integration we get
y
( ) r = kt + C
x
This is a linear differential equation At t = 0, r = 1
1= k×0+C
± C=1
y r = kt + 1
Now at t = 3 months r = 0.5 cm
( )
0.5 = k × 3 + 1
os x sn x
os x 
sn x
os x r t
sn x utt ng r n solv ng g v s
t n
y os x sn x t
n y  t = 6 months
os sn
4. [Ans. A]
sn x os x Given
y
os x sn x x xy – x x y
x
sn x
y
os x x xy x
x
Dividing by x
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
y x Hence, here the degree is 1, which is

( )y ( )
x x x power of
Which is a linear first order differential of
the form
y 7. [Ans. D]
y y
x x y
Integrating factor = I.F = ∫ x
This is variable separable form
= ∫ x
= x dx
y × I.F = ∫ .(I.F)dx
x y
yx ∫( )x x ∫ x x ∫ ∫x x
x y
Now at x = 1, y = 0 x
log y
i.e. 0 ×
tx y
x
log y
C
y
x
x y –x
8. [Ans. B]
y = θ θ0) (Newton’s law of cooling)
x x
θ
5. [Ans. C] t
θ θ
y
y y tx ∫ =∫ t
x
h=1  ln θ θ = kt +
Iterative equation for backward (implicit) θ θ C.
Euler methods for above equation would θ θ C.
be Given θ = 250C
Now t t θ
y y 60 = 25 + C.e0
y
C = 35
y y y θ
 0.25hy y +y =0 At t m nut s θ 0C
Putting k = 0 in above equation 40 = 25 + 35
0.25h y y +y =0
=
Since, y = 1 and h = 1
±√ Now at t = 30 minutes
0.25 y y +1=0
Θ
y =2
= 25 + 35 ( )
6. [Ans. B] = 25 + 35 × ( ) (s n )
Degree of a differential equation is the = 31.
power of its highest order derivative after ≈ C
the differential equation is made free of
radicals and fractions if any, in derivative
power.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
9. [Ans. A] 12. [Ans. A]

+y=0 y y
√( ) y
+1=0 x x
E sm m ± Removing radicals we get
General solution is
y y
y= [ cos (1 × x) + sin (1 × x)] . / 0( ) y 1
x x
= cosx + sinx
The order is 3 since highest differential
= P cosx + Q sinx
Where P and Q are some constants is
The degree is 2 since power of highest
10. [Ans. D] differential is 2
y x
x y 13. [Ans. C]
y dy = x dx y y
∫y y ∫ x x x x
Auxiliary equation is
y x +D–6=0
(D 2) = 0
At x = 1, y = √ D = 3 or D = 2
√ Solution is y = +
C=2 14. [Ans. C]

Solution is Z = ax + by + ab …
y x z
p
x
x +y =4 z
q b
y
11. [Ans. A] Substituting a and b in (i) in terms of p
3y x and q we get z = px + qy + pq
y x
x y 15. [Ans. D]
y y
y y x x x n y
x x
∫ y y ∫ x x This is a linear differential equation of the
x form
y y
y wt n x
y x x x
IF = Integrations factor
x y
∫ ∫
x
( ) ( )
Solution is
x y y (IF) = ∫ x
( ) ( )  y. x = ∫ xx x
Which is the equation of a family of ellipses  yx = ∫ x x
 yx = +C
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
y= +  sin ka=0

m x
Now y(1) = 1 
  m x
y ∑ sn
x
ot solut on s y
x
4. [Ans. D]
16. [Ans. D] k2D2y= y y2
y  2 1 y2
x
y  D  k2  y  k2
 
y
1
y m1 = 
y k
C.F. = C1e  C2 e
x/k x/k
17. [Ans. D] y= C1e  C2 e

x/k x/k
 y2
Particular integral (P.I) = ∫
At y=y1, x=0
=  y1 = C1+ C2+y2 …
At y=y2 , x=  Hence C1 must be zero
ECE  y1 = C2+y2
1. [Ans. B]
 C2 =y1 - y2
d2y dy
x
 y=(y1 – y2) exp    + y2
 5  6y  0
dx2 dx
 k
A.E. is D2 5D  6  0
 D=2,3
5. [Ans. B]
Hence, solution is y  e  e
2x 3x
x t
x t
t
2. [Ans. B] (D +3) x(t) = 0
3
d2y  dy 
3  4   y2  2  x So, x  t   ke3t ,
dt2  dt 
Order of highest derivative=2 Hence x  t   2e3t is one solution (for
Hence, most appropriate answer is (B) some boundary / initial condition)
3. [Ans. A] 6. [Ans. B]
Given, Differential equation, The order of a differential equation is the
d2y order of the highest derivative involving
 k2y  0
dx2 in equation, so answer is 2.
Auxilary equation is The degree of a differential equation is
y the degree of the highest derivative
± involving in equation, so answer is 1.
Let y os x sn x
At x=0, y = 0  A=0 7. [Ans. A]
y sn x P. ∫ ∫
At x=a, y=0  B sin ka=0
log y log x log
B0 otherwise y=0 always
y xw s qu t on o str g t l n
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Q. ∫ ∫ 11. [Ans. C]
log y log x log t x t x=1

∫
y … qu t on o yp rbol t
x
t
R. ∫y y ∫x x ol s xt ∫t t xt
y x Using initial condition, at t = 1, x = 0.5
… qu t on o ypr bol
S. ∫y y ∫x x
xt
x y … Equ t on o r l
12. [Ans. D]
8. [Ans. B]
Approach 1:
y x
y x x y t y t
x y t t
t t
 x y Converting to s-domain
x y y old y +0.1 ( ) new s y s sy y sy s y
x y s
x y y
s s y s s
0 0 0+0 0+0.1×0=0 s
=0 y s
s s
0. 0 0.1+0 0+0.1×0.1=0.01 n nv rs pl tr ns orm
1 =0.1 y t t u t
0. 0.0 0.2+0.01 0.01+0.21×0.1 y t
t
2 =0.21
1 =0.031 t
The value of y at x= 0.3 is 0.031. y t
|
t
9. [Ans. D]
n x Approach 2:
y t y t
Auxiliary equation m m ± y t t
t t
olut on n x Applying Laplace Transform on both
Since, n  sides
y
Since, n  (hence s y s sy |
t
must be zero)
(sy s y ) y s
Therefore
s y s s sy s y s
The solution is, n x s s
y s
s s s s
10. [Ans. C]
y t t t
Given y and y x t
t t
ln y x y
y t t
When
y t
y y t
t
y t
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
y t z
| x ln xy xy x x ln xy x
t y xy
z
ox xy ln xy xy
13. [Ans. D] x
z
Let the differential equation be y xy ln xy xy
y
y t
y t x t z z
t ox y
Apply Laplace transform on both sides x y
y t
2 y t 3 {x t } 17. [Ans. B]
t
x x
sy s y y s x s x
t t
s y s x s y
Pre auxiliary equation is
x s y
y s m m
s s
Pre roots of AE are m .
Taking inverse Laplace on both sides
Repeated roots are present.
x s
{y s } 2 3 y { } So, most general solution in
s s
n t bt
y t x t y
So if we want y t as a solution both 18. [Ans. *] Range 0.53 to 0.55
x(t) and y(0) has to be multiplied by . E m m m
Hence change x(t) by x t and y(0) by olut ons s y bx …
y y bx
b …
14. [Ans. A] s ng y
y y y n gv s
y
x x n b
The auxiliary equation is
y x
m m
tx y
± then either
m or m EE
i.e., roots of the equation are equal to 1. [Ans. A]
or v n x’ t x (t)
i.e. x
15. [Ans. A]
t
xy is a first order linear
x
equation non omog n ous ∫ ∫ t
x
xy 0 is a first order linear lnx = t
equation (homogeneous) x
r non l n r qu t ons Putting
x
16. [Ans. C] Now putting initial condition x(0) = x
z xy ln xy x
z x
y ln xy xy y y ln xy y
x xy Solution is x = x
i.e. x(t) = x
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. [Ans. B] 6. [Ans. C]
x x x y xy y
x
t t y y
y
Auxiliary equation m m x x
m m m w subst tut y
(m+4)(m+2)=0 x
m= 2, 4 t nx x x( )
x(t) = x x
n y s ts s
x
x(0) = 1 1= … (1)
IN
| 
1. [Ans. C]
 … y
On solving (1) & (2), we get and m m
x(t)= 2 Since there is double root at 2, so general

solution of the given differential equation
3. [Ans. A] would be
y x +
Integrate on both sides
2. [Ans. B]
y
v n ρ os θ …
y
4. [Ans. B] n ρ …
y
y
x now y’ t nθ …
x
Equating equations (i) and (ii) and using
p n nt rv l x
equation (iii) in equation (ii), we get
y
x y os θ= os θ
x
y
x
x y= .x
Value is in between 20 and 30
Which is equation of a parabola.
So it is 25
3. [Ans. A]
5. [Ans. C]
A.E.
x
x gv n D= 1+ 10i
t C.F = (A cos10 x + B sin 10 x)
x os t sn t
x n x x
x
sn t os t
t 4. [Ans. C]
x
|
t
5. [Ans. C]
x os t sn t
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. A] Hyperbolic if
Given = 1 + y2 El ps
Compare the given differential equation
Integrating ∫ =∫ x
with standard from A = 1, B = 0, C = 0
Or t n y = x + c
Or y = t n x Parabolic
7. [Ans. C] 10. [Ans. D]

y y t ÿ t
y
x
Auxiliary equation, m + 1 = 0 ±
m= 1 y os x s nx
C.F = y
y= ẏ s nx os x
ẏ
y
y
So, y os x s n x
y or m x m
y s nx os x
s nx os x
8. [Ans. C]
x
y os x s n x
y or x m xm
The solution for the differential equation
y m x os sn
is
y x √
√ √ √
Now, y and y , placing these
values
11. [Ans. D]
We get, and
By back tracking, from option (D)
y
y
|x| x or x
x
= x or x
9. [Ans. A] Integrating
Given partial differential equation is y
∫ ∫ x x or x
x
x t
∫ x x or x
x t x
We know that y or
(x y ) x
or x
is said to be
Parabolic if
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Complex Variables
ME – 2007 ME – 2014
1. If x y and (x, y) are functions with 6. The argument of the complex number
continuous second derivatives, then
where i = √ , is
x y + i (x, y) π
π
can be expressed as an analytic function π 2
of x + i (i = √ ), when 2 π
(A)
7. The integral ∮ y x x y is evaluate
(B)
along the circle x + y traversed in
(C) + + counter clock wise direction. The integral
is equal to
(D) + π
(A) 0 –
π 2
– π
ME – 2008 4 4
2. The integral ∮ z z evaluated around
the unit circle on the complex plane for 8. An analytic function of a complex variable
z is z x + i y is expressed as
(A) 2πi (C) 2πi z u x y +iv x y
(B) 4πi (D) 0 where i √ f u(x,y)= 2xy, then
v(x,y) must be
ME – 2009 (A) x + y + onst nt
3. An analytic function of a complex variable (B) x y + onst nt
z = x + iy is expressed as (C) x + y + onst nt
f(z) = u(x, y) +iv(x, y) where i = 1 . (D) x y + onst nt
If u = xy, the expression of v should be
(A)
 x  y 2  k (C)
y 2
 x2  k 9. An analytic function of a complex variable
z = x + i y is expressed as
2 2 f(z) = u(x, y) + i v(x, y),
(B)
x2
y 2
 k (D)
 x  y 2  k where i = √ . If u (x, y) = x – y , then
2 2 expression for v(x, y) in terms of x, y and
a general constant c would be
ME – 2010 (A) xy + (C) 2xy +
4. The modulus of the complex number
(B) + (D) +
( ) is
(A) 5 (C) 1/√
10. If z is a complex variable, the value of
(B) √ (D) 1/5
∫ is
ME – 2011 (A) i
5. The product of two complex numbers (B) 0.511+1.57i
1 + i and 2 – 5i is (C) i
(A) 7 – 3i (C) 3 – 4i (D) 0.511+1.57i
(B) 3 – 4i (D) 7 + 3i
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
CE – 2005 CE – 2011
1. Which one of the following is NOT true for 6. For an analytic function,
complex number and ? f(x + iy) = u(x, y)+iv(x, y), u is given by
̅̅̅̅
(A) =| u = 3x 3y . The expression for v
|
considering K to be a constant is
(B) | + |≤| |+| |
(A) 3y 3x + k (C) 6x 6y+k
(C) | |≤| | | |
(B) 6y – 6x + k (D) 6xy +k
(D) | + | +| |
2| | + 2| |
CE – 2014
2. Consider likely applicable of u hy’s 7. z can be expressed as
integral theorem to evaluate the following (A) i (C) i
integral counter clockwise around the (B) + i (D) + i
unit circle c.
ECE – 2006
∮s z z 1. The value of the contour integral
∮| |
z in positive sense is
z being a complex variable. The value of I
(A) (C)
will be
(A) I = 0: singularities set = ϕ (B) (D)
(B) I = 0: singularities set
2. For the function of a complex variable
=, πn 2 -
W = In Z (where, W = u + jv and
(C) I π/2: singul riti s s t Z = x + jy), the u = constant lines get
{ nπ n 2 } mapped in Z-plane as
(D) None of the above (A) set of radial straight line
(B) set of concentric circles
CE – 2006 (C) set of confocal hyperbolas
3. Using Cauchy’s is integral theorem, the (D) set of confocal ellipses
value of the integral (integration being
taken in counter clockwise direction) ECE – 2007
∮ dz is 3. If the semi-circular contour D of radius 2
(A) 4πi (C) πi is as shown in the figure, then the value of
(B) πi (D) 1 the integral ∮ is

j
CE – 2009
4. The analytic function f(z) = has j2
singularities at
(A) 1 and 1 (C) 1 and i 2
j2
(B) 1 and i (D) i and i
5. The value of the integral ∫ dz

(A) jπ (C) π
(where C is a closed curve given by (B) jπ (D) π
|z| = 1) is
(A) –πi (C)
(B) (D) πi
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE – 2008 (A) 2 (C)

4. The residue of the function (B) (D) 2
1
f z  at z=2 is ECE – 2014
z  2 z  22
2
11. C is a closed path in the z-plane given by

(A) (C) |z|=3. The value of the integral
(B) (D) ∮( ) z is
(A) 4π + j2 (C) 4π + j2
5. The equation sin(z)=10 has (B) 4π j2 (D) 4π j2
(A) no real or complex solution
(B) exactly two distinct complex 12. The real part of an analytic function z
solutions where z x + jy is given by cos(𝑥).
(C) a unique solution The imaginary part of z is
(D) an infinite number of complex (A) os x (C) sin x
solutions (B) sin x (D) sin x
ECE – 2009 EE – 2007

6. If f(z) = + z , then ∮ z 1. The value of ∮ where C is the
is given by contour |z-i/2| = 1 is

(A) 2π (C) 2πj (A) 2πi (C) t n z
(B) 2π + (D) 2πj + (B) π (D) πi t n z
ECE – 2010 EE – 2011

7. The residues of a complex function 2. A point z has been plotted in the complex
plane, as shown in figure below.
z at its poles are
nit ir l
(A) and 1 (C) and
(B) and (D) and z
ECE – 2011
8. The value of the integral ∮ z
where is the circle |z| is given by lm nit ir l lm nit ir l
(A) 0 (C) 4/5

(B) 1/10 (D) 1
ECE\EE\IN – 2012 y
9. If x = √ then the value of x is y
⁄ (C) x
(A)
(B) ⁄ (D) 1 lmlm nit ir l lm nit ir l
10. Given f (z) . If C is a y

counterclockwise path in the z – plane
such that |z+1| =1, the value of
∮ z z is y
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE – 2013 IN – 2005
3. ∮ z evaluated anticlockwise around 1. Consider the circle | | 2 in the
complex plane (x, y) with z = x + iy. The
the circle |z i| 2 where i √ , is
minimum distant form the origin to the
(A) 4π (C) 2 + π
circle is
(B) (D) 2 +2i
(A) √2 2 (C) √ 4
(B) √ 4 (D) √2
4. Square roots of – i, where i = √ , are
(A) i, i
2. Let ̅, where z is a complex number
(B) os ( ) + i sin ( ) not equal to zero. The z is a solution of
os ( ) + i sin ( ) (A) z (C) z
(B) z (D) z
(C) os ( ) + i sin ( )
os ( ) + i sin ( ) IN – 2006
3. The value of the integral of the complex
(D) os ( ) + i sin ( )
function
os ( ) + i sin ( ) 3s  4
f(s)
(s  1)(s  2)
EE – 2014 Along the path s  3is
5. Let S be the set of points in the complex (A) 2j (C) 6j
plane corresponding to the unit circle. (B) 4j (D) 8j
(That is, {z: |z| } . Consider the
function f(z)=zz* where z* denotes the IN – 2007
complex conjugate of z. The f(z) maps S to
4. For the function of a complex variable
which one of the following in the complex
plane z, the point z=0 is
(A) unit circle (A) a pole of order 3
(B) horizontal axis line segment from (B) a pole of order 2
origin to (1, 0) (C) a pole of order 1
(C) the point (1, 0) (D) not a singularity
(D) the entire horizontal axis
5. Let j = √ .Then one value of is
6. All the values of the multi-valued complex (A) √j (C)
function , where i √ are (B) 1
(D)
(A) purely imaginary.
(B) real and non-negative. IN – 2008
(C) on the unit circle. 6. A complex variable x+j has its
(D) equal in real and imaginary parts. real part x varying in the range
to + . Which one of the following is
7. Integration of the complex function the locus (shown in thick lines) of 1/Z in
z , in the counter clockwise the complex plane?
direction, around |z 1| = 1, is
(A) πi (C) πi
(B) (D) 2πi
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN – 2010
m gin ry
m gin ry
10. The contour C in the adjoining figure is
xis
xis
described by x + y . The value of
∮ z is.
l xis l xis
j (Note: √ )
j y
pl n
m gin ry
m gin ry
xis
xis
x
l xis l xis
j (A) 2πj (C) 4πj
j
(B) 2πj (D) 4πj
IN – 2009 IN – 2011
7. The value of ∮ where the contour 11. The contour integral ∮ / with C as
of integration is a simple closed curve the counter-clockwise unit circle in the z-
around the origin, is plane is equal to
(A) 0 (C) (A) 0 (C) 2π√
(D) (B) 2π (D)
(B) 2πj
8. If z = x+jy, where x and y are real. The

value of | | is
(A) 1 (C)
(B) √ (D)
9. One of the roots of the equation 𝑥 =j,

where j is positive square root of 1, is
(A) j (C)
√
j
√ √
(B) +j (D) j
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ME 4. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. B] + 4i + 2i
By definition C-R equation holds 2i + 2i
+ i + 4i
+ 2i
2. [Ans. A] +4
f(z)= has simple pole at z = 0 Modulus = √
Residue of f(z) at z = 0
5. [Ans. A]
lim z z lim os z
+i 2 i
∫ z z 2πi (residue at z = 0)
2 i + 2i i i
2πi 2πi
6. [Ans. C]
3. [Ans. C]
+i +i + 2i + i
Given u=xy
For analytic function i i +i i
2i
u v i + i
 2
x y
+i
u v rg ( ) t n ( )
and  i
y x π⁄
2
By Milne Thomson method
Let w = u + iv 7. [Ans. C]
dw u v
 i ∫y x x y
dz x x
u u y = r sin x r os
 i
x y y r os x r sin
dw ∮ r sin r os
or  y  ix
dz
Replacing x by z and y by 0, we get π
∮ r r 2π
dw 2
 0  iz
dz
Where, z = x + iy 8. [Ans. C]
u v
dw = izdz
x y
z2
Integrating, w  i C v
2 2y
y
Where C is a constant,
2y
z + x v
v m0 i + 1 2
2 y + x v
 (x2  y2  2ixy) u v
  mi 
 2  y x
2x x
y 2  x2
or v  2x
2 + x
2
x x
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
v y x 2. [Ans. B]
y x + onst nt
∫s z z z ∫
os z
9. [Ans. C] The poles are at z = n + /2 π
iv n u x y = π/2 π/2 + π/2
v v None of these poles lie inside the unit
v x+ y
x y circle |z| =1
v u v u Hence, sum of residues at poles = 0
y x x y Singularities set = ϕ and
u u 2πi [sum o r si u s o t z t th
v x+ y
y x poles]
2y x + 2x y 2 πi
rm ont ing y t rms only llow
v 2 xy + 3. [Ans. A]
u hy’s int gr l th or m is
10. [Ans. B] f(a) = ∮ z
z
∫ ln z| ln i ln i.e. ∮ z 2πi
z
ln + ln i ln Now, ∮ z= ∮
( )
ln ln + ln i
z os + i sin pplying u hy’s int gr l th or m, using
z i i sin π/2 z z
z / i
+ i / .2πi ( )/
ln i ln z ln
π
( i i ) i
2 .2πi 0( ) 1/
CE i
.2πi 0( ) 1/
1. [Ans. C]
(A) is true since 2π
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
i 4πi
= =|
̅̅̅̅ | 2π
(B) is true by triangle inequality of 4πi
complex number
(C) is not true since | |≥| | | | 4. [Ans. D]
(D) is true since z z z
z
| + |2 = ( + ) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
+ z + z z i z+i
= ( + ) (z̅ + z̅ ) The singularities are at z = i and –i
= z̅ + z̅ + z̅ + z̅ i
And | |2 = ( + ) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ 5. [Ans. C]
= ( + ) (z̅ z̅ ) os 2πz
r ∫
= z̅ + z̅ z̅ + z̅ ii 2z z
Adding (i) and (ii) we get * +
| + |2 + | |2 = 2 z̅ + 2 z̅ ∫
2 *z +
= 2| | + 2| |
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
in z is point with in |z|=1(the 7. [Ans. B]

2 i
los urv w n us u hy’s z
+i
integral theorem and say that
Multiplying by conjugates
os 2πz
[2πi ( )] wh r z 2 i i
2 2 z
+i i
[Notice that f(z) is analytic on all points
2i + i
inside |z| ]
2 +
os 2 π /2 + i
[2πi ] 2
2 ( )
+ i
2πi
ECE
1. [Ans. D]
6. [Ans. D] 1 1
Given , 
z  4 z  2jz  2j
f = u + iv 2
u = 3x2 – 3y2
For f to be analysis, we have Cauchy- Pole (0, 2) lies inside the circle |z j|=2
Riemann conditions, y u hy’s nt gr l ormul
u v ∮ z
i z +4
x y
|z j| 2
u v
ii 2j 
y x I 
From (i) we have 2j  2j 2
u v
x
x y
2. [Ans. B]
∫ v ∫ x y iv n log
1 y
v
x
+ x 2

 u  iv  loge  x  iy   log x2  y2  i tan1  
x

2
Since, u is constant, therefore
i.e. v = 3x2 + f(x) iii
1
Now applying equation (iii) we get
2

log x2  y2  c 
u v
y x x +y Which is represented set
of concentric circles.
y [ x+
x
3. [Ans. A]
x + y
x ∮ s 2πj sum o r si u
y x Singular points are s =
x
By integrating, Only s= +1 lies inside the given contour
f(x) = 6yx – 3x2 + K lims  1 f s
Residues at s= +1 = S1
Substitute in equation (iii)
1 1
lims  1 
 
v= 3x2 + 6yx – 3x2 + K S1 S 1 2
2
v yx + K
n ∮ s 2πj ( ) πj
s 2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. A] + z+
(z )
Residue of z=2 is z z
d
lim
z2 dz 
 z  2 f z
2

+
+
d 1  2 1 F(z 2πj + )
lim    lim 
  z  2  z  2 32
z2 dz  2
 z 2 3
7. [Ans. C]
5. [Ans. D] X(z) =
sin z Poles are Z= 0, Z =1, Z=2
Residue at Z=0 is lim
2i
Residue at Z =1 is lim
2 i
Residue z =2 is lim
2 i
( ) 2 i 8. [Ans. A]
ut m z+4
m 2 im ∮ z
z + 4z +
2 i √ 2 i 4
m z + 4z + z+2 +
2
z 2 j will be outside the unit circle
2 i √ 2 i + i√
o th t int gr tion v lu is ‘z ro’
2 2
i √ i 9. [Ans. A]
m i √ i i i√ i √ x
iz log i √ i ty x log y x log x
iz log i + log( √ )
π ⟹ log y i log i i log
iz log + i ( 2nπ) π π
2 log y i i
2 2
+log √
π ⟹y
iz i ( 2nπ) + log √
2
π 10. [Ans. C]
z ( 2nπ) ilog( √ )
2 ∫ z z *∫ z ∫ z+
( 2
infinite number of complex solutions
∫ z
sin z has infinite no. of complex 2πj z+
solutions where f (z) =1
6. [Ans. D]
f(z) = + z 11. [Ans. C]
+ z + + z s z 2j
z ∮ z
z z
lim z + 2j 4+ j
+ z+
∮( ) 2πj[ 4 + j 4π + 2j
z
F z 2 π j r si u o
Residue at z = 0 ( 2- order )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
12. [Ans. B]
Suppose that z u x y + iv x y is √ +
analytic then, u and v satisfy the Cauchy o / is outside the unit circle is IV
Riemann equation quadrant
u v u v
n
x y y x 3. [Ans. A]
r u xy os x z 4
u v ∮
z +4
sin x
x y |z i| 2
u v z +4
os x
y x z 4
v sin x z 2i
For z 2i
EE Residue at z +2i
1. [Ans. B] 4 4
+2i
Pole (z=i) lies inside the circle. |z-i/2|=1. z + 2i +4i
Hence t z 2i li insi
tz 2i li outsi
∮ z ∮ z
z + z+i z i z 4
o∮ 2πi sum o r si u
∮ z 2 πi i , wh r z - z +4
2πi 2i
2 πi π 4π
2i
2. [Ans. D] 4. [Ans. B]
Let + i Let + i √ i
Since Z is shown inside the unit circle in I Squaring both sides we get
quadrant, a and B are both +ve and +2 i i
Equating real and imaginary parts
√ +
ow 2
+ i
i wh n 2
i 2
+ + +
Since i
√2
√ + i i
wh n
√2 √2
+ i i i
+i +i ( ) +
o in qu r nt √2 √2 √2 √2
i i
wh n
√2 √2
| | √( ) +( ) i i i
+ + +i + i( ) +
√2 √2 √2 √2
i
√ +( )
+ √ + √2 √2
π π
in √ + os ( ) + i sin ( )
4 4
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
or x y
π π r uis o th ir l
os ( ) + i sin ( )
4 4 x + y 4
x 2
5. [Ans. C]
x √2
z zz |z|
n s {z: |z| }
z √2 x √2 2
All point of s will be mapped on the
2. [Ans. C]
point (1, 0)
z z̅
6. [Ans. B] Multiply both the side by z, we get
z z̅ z
z
z |z|
log z i log
z r l n Non-negative |z| |z| wh r is ngl o z
since |z| is a real quantity so in order to
7. [Ans. C] satisfy above equation has to be real
∫ x x 2πi r s (f(a)) where a is a quantity = 1 and
singularity in contour c , (where n = +2 )
r |z | n o |z |
pol s o z z king π/2
⁄
nly z li s insi |z | z |z|
z z |z|
s( ) lim z
z z+ z
z
lim
z+ 2 3. [Ans. C]
quir int gr tion 2πi πi
2
IN X X
-3
1. [Ans. A] -2 -1 3
| + i | 2 Cx y y
(Cx ( Cx
Radius of the circle is 2 and centre is at
y(n) n n
+ i )y(n))
y(n)
3s  4 1 2
C3 =
F(s)  C3  .
CC3
(sC 1)(s  2) s  1 s  2
2
y(n) 3 3
y(n) dz y(n)
+ i By Formula,
y y  z  a  2j
xy ( (
Since, both the poles are enclosed by
n n
contour,
) )
therefore
Value of integral=2πj + 2 2πj πj
For distance to be min. The point P will be
on the line passes through origin and 4. [Ans. B]
centre of the circle. Expand by Laurent series
Slope of line OP = Slope of line OC
𝑥
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. D] 10. [Ans. D]

⁄
⁄ ∮ z=∮ z
tx j ( )
Pole z j ⟹z j
⁄
⁄ Residue at z j ⟹ 2[ j + 2
log x log ( )
∮ z 2πj [sum o r si o pol
⁄ ⁄
log log ( )
2πj 2 4πj
π ⁄
log j
2
π 11. [Ans. C]
log j j
2 z ∮ ⁄
z
/
x
∮( + + + + ) z
6. [Ans. B] z 2z z
x+j The only pole of z is at z , which lies
x j within |z|
x+j x + ∫ z z 2πi (residue)
x Note: Residue of z at z is coefficient
j
x + x + ⁄
of z i.e. 1, here.
| j j
j
| lim { }
x + x +
j
ption s tis y th ov on itions
7. [Ans. A]
u hy’s int gr l ormul is
∫
Here a = 0, then f(0) = sin 0 = 0
8. [Ans. D]
z x + iy
p | |= | |
= | |= | |=
9. [Ans. B]
Given x3 = j = e+jπ/2
⁄
x
π π √
x os + j sin +j
2 2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Laplace Transform
ME – 2007
1. If F (s) is the Laplace transform of
function f (t), then Laplace transform of
t
 f (t) dt is
0
(A) F (s) (C) sF (s) – f (0)
(B) F (s) f (0) (D)
CE – 2009
ME – 2009
1. Laplace transfrm of the function
1
2. The inverse Laplace transform of f(x) = cosh(ax) is
 s s
2
 (A) (C)
is (B) (D)
(A) (C) 1 –
(B) (D) ECE - 2005
1. In what range should Re(s) remain so
ME – 2010 that the Laplace transform of the function
3. The Laplace transform of a function is exists.
. The function is (A) (C)
(A) (C) (B) (D)
(B) (D)
ECE – 2006
2. A solution for the differential equation
ME – 2012
4. The inverse Laplace transform of the x’(t)+2x(t)= (t) with initial condition
x( )=0 is
function F(s) is given by
(A) (C)
(A) (C) (B) (D)
(B) (D)
ECE – 2008
ME – 2013 3. Consider the matrix P = * + . The
5. The function satisfies the differential
value of eP is
equation and the auxiliary
(A) * +
conditions, . The
Laplace transform of is given by (B) [ ]
(A) (C) (C) [ ]

(B) (D)
(D) [ ]
ME – 2014
6. Laplace transform of is . ECE - 2010
The Laplace transform of 4. The trigonometric Fourier series for the
waveform f(t) shown below contains
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE – 2013
9. A system is described by the differential
equation =x(t). Let x(t)
be a rectangular pulse given by
,
Assuming that y(0) = 0 and

(A) Only cosine terms and zero value for the Laplace transform of y(t) is
the dc component
(B) Only cosine terms and a positive
value for the dc component
(C) Only cosine terms and a negative
value for the dc component
(D) Only sine terms and a negative value
for the dc component.
5. Given
[ ] 10. The maximum value of the solution y(t) of
the differential equation y(t) + ̈
then the value of K is with initial condition ̇ and
(A) 1 (C) 3 ≥
(B) 2 (D) 4 (A) 1 (C)
(B) 2 (D) √
ECE– 2011
6. If [ ] then the initial ECE – 2014
11. The unilateral Laplace transform of
and final values of f(t) are respectively
(A) 0, 2 (C) 0, 2/7 . Which one of the following
(B) 2, 0 (D) 2/7, 0 is the unilateral Laplace transform of
?
ECE/EE/IN – 2012
7. The unilateral Laplace transform of f(t) is
. The unilateral Laplace transform
of t f(t) is
(A) – (C) EE – 2005
12. For the equation
(B) (D)
(t) + 3 (t) + 2x(t) = 5, the solution
x(t) approaches which of the following
8. Consider the differential equation values as t ?
(A) 0 (C) 5
(B) (D) 10
| |
EE – 2014
The numerical value of | is 13. Let be the Laplace
(A) (C) transform of signal x(t). Then, is
(B) (D) (A) 0 (C) 5
(B) 3 (D) 21
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
14. Let g: [ [ be a function

defined by g(x) [ ] where [x]
represents the integer part of x. (That is,
it is the largest integer which is less than
or equal to x). The value of the constant
term in the Fourier series expansion of
g(x) is_______

ME 5. [Ans. C]
1. [Ans. A]
From definition,
We know ∫
Taking Laplace transformation on both
2. [Ans. C] sides
1 1 1 1 [ ] [ ]
  
(s  s) s(s  1) s (s  1)
2 ( ) ( )
[ ( ) ( ) ]
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
[ ]
3. [Ans. A]
[ ] 6. [Ans. D]
[ ]
Matching coefficient of s and constant

in numerator we get,
CE
1. [Ans. B]
It is the standard result that
L (cosh at) =
[ ]
ECE
1. [Ans. A]
4. [Ans. D] [ ]
{ }
2. [Ans. A]
{ } ̇ (t) + 2x (t) = (t)
Taking Laplace transform of both sides ,
we get
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
sX(s) X(0) + 2X(s) = 1 cosine terms and a negative value of the

1 dc component.
X(s) =
s2
From Inverse Laplace transform gives, we 5. [Ans. D]
get
[ ]
[ ]
3. [Ans. D ]
eP= [ ]
0 1  [ ]
and P=  
2  3 [ ]
1
s 1 
Where =  
2 s+3
1 s  3 1 

s  1s  2 2 s
 s 3 1  6. [Ans. B]
  s  1 s  2    
s  1 s  2
= 
 2 s 

  s  1 s  2 s  1s  2  Using initial value theorem:
 eP
 2 1 1 1 
 s  1  s  2 
s  1 s  2  
=  
 2  2 2

1 
 s  1 s  2 s  2 s  1  
=[ ] ⁄
=2
4. [Ans. C]
Since f(t) is an even function, its
trigonometric Fourier series contains
only cosine terms
∫ ∫ 7. [Ans. D]
*∫ ∫ +
t
[ ( )]
8. [Ans. D]
[ ]
Therefore, the trigonometric Fourier
series for the waveform f(t) contains only Taking Laplace transform on both the
sides. We have,
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. [Ans. D]
By Laplace transform property,
[ ]
[ ] ( )
[ ]
| [ ]
12. [Ans. B]
=5
9. [Ans. B] By taking Laplace transform
Writing in terms of Laplace transform (
⁄
X(s) =
( )
13. [Ans. B]
( ) [ ]
( ) ( )
( )
10. [Ans. D]
14. [Ans. 0.5]
∫ ∫ |
For t = Value of constant term = 0.5

+ sin √
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK Network Theory
Network Solution Methodology
ECE - 2006 4. In the interconnection of ideal source

1. A negative resistance R is connected to shown in the figure, it is known that the
a passive network N having driving point 60V source is absorbing power.
impedance (s) as shown below. For 20 V
+
(s) to be positive real,
Rneg
I 60 V
12 A
N
Which of the following can be the value of

Z2(s) Z1(s) the current source I?
(A) 10 A (C) 15A
(A) |R | Re (j ) (B) 13A (D) 18A
(B) |R | | (j )|
ECE - 2010
(C) |R | m (j )
5. In the circuit shown, the power supplied
(D) |R | (j ) by the voltage source is
1Ω
1Ω
ECE - 2007
1Ω 1Ω
2. For the circuit shown in the figure, the
Thevenin voltage and resistance looking 10V
into X –Y are 1
1Ω
2
1Ω 1Ω
i
2i 1Ω 2 2Ω
(A) 0 W (C) 10 W
(B) 5 W (D) 100 W
(A) 4/3 V 2Ω (C) 4/3 V 2/3Ω ECE - 2011

(B) 4V 2/3 Ω (D) 4V 2Ω 6. In the circuit shown below, the value of
R such that the power transferred to R
ECE - 2009 is maximum is
10 Ω 10 Ω
3. In the circuit shown, what value of RL
maximizes the power delivered to RL?
V 4Ω R
10 Ω
4Ω 4Ω
V
V 100V R 5V 2V 1
(A) 2.4 Ω (C) 4 Ω (A) 5Ω (C) 15Ω

(B) 8⁄3 Ω (D) 6 Ω (B) 10Ω (D) 20Ω
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. In the circuit shown below, the current I 11. If VA VB =6 V, then VC VD is

is equal to R V 2Ω V R
j4Ω j4Ω R R R R 10V

R
1Ω
~ 14 0 V
6Ω
R
5V V 2 V
6Ω 6Ω (A) 5 V (C) 3 V
(B) 2 V (D) 6 V
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
(A) 1.4 0 A (C) 2.8 0 A 12. Consider a delta connection of resistors
(B) 2.0 0 A (D) 3.2 0 A and its equivalent star connection as
shown. If all elements of the delta
8. In the circuit shown below, the Norton connection are scaled by a factor k, k>0,
equivalent current in amperes with the elements of the corresponding star
respect to the terminals P and Q is equivalent will be scaled by a factor of
j30Ω P
Ra
16 0 25Ω j50Ω Rb Rc
15Ω Q
RC RB
(A) 6.4 – j4.8 (C) 10 + j0
RA
(B) 6.56 – j7.87 (D) 16 + j0
ECE/IN - 2012 (A) k (C) 1/k

9. The average power delivered to an (B) k (D) √k
impedance (4 j3) by a current
13. Three capacitors C1, C2 and C3 whose
5cos (100t+100) A is values are 10μF 5μF and 2μF
(A) 44.2 W (C) 62.5 W +respectively, have breakdown voltages
(B) 50 W (D) 125 W of 10V, 5V and 2V respectively. For the
interconnection shown below , the
ECE/EE/IN - 2012 maximum safe voltage in Volts that can be
10. The impedance looking into nodes 1 and applied across the combination, and the
2 in the given circuit is corresponding total charge in μC stored in
i
the effective capacitance across the
1kΩ 99i terminals are respectively,
C2 C3
9kΩ 1
100Ω
2
C1
(A) 50  (C) 5 k
(A) 2.8 and 36 (C) 2.8 and 32
(B) 100  (D) 10.1 k
(B) 7 and 119 (D) 7 and 80
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2014 18. In the figure shown, the value of the

14. For maximum power transfer between current I (in Amperes) is______.
two cascaded sections of an electrical 5Ω 5Ω
network, the relationship between the
output impedance of the first section to
the input impedance of the second
5V 1 10Ω
section is
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
15. Consider the configuration shown in the 19. In the circuit shown in the figure, the
figure which is a portion of a larger value of node voltage V is
electrical network 10 0
i
i V V
4Ω
4 0 j3Ω 6Ω j6Ω
R R
i
R
i
i i
(A) 22 + j 2 V (C) 22 – j 2 V
For R 1Ω and currents i =2 i 1 (B) 2 + j 22 V (D) 2 – j 22 V
i 4 which one of the following is
TRUE? 20. The circuit shown in the figure, the
(A) i 5 angular frequency (in rad/s) at which
(B) i 4 the Norton equivalent impedance as seen
(C) Data is sufficient to conclude that the from terminals b-b′ is purely resistive
supposed currents are impossible is_____________.
(D) Data is insufficient to identify the 1Ω 1F
b
currents i i and i
10 cos t
16. A Y-network has resistances of 10Ω each (volts) ~ 0.5
in two of its arms, while the third arm has

a resistance of 11 Ω. In the equivalent b′
-network, the lowest value (in Ω.)
among the three resistances is ________ 21. For the Y-network shown in the figure,
the value of R (in Ω) in the equivalent
17. Norton’s theorem states that a complex ∆-network is ____.
R
network connected to a load can be
replaced with an equivalent impedance
(A) in series with a current source 5Ω 3Ω
(B) in parallel with a voltage source
(C) in series with a voltage source 7.5Ω
(D) in parallel with a current source
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
22. The magnitude of current (in mA) (A) Very low (C) 3L
through the resistor R in the figure (B) L/3 (D) Very high
shown is__________
R EE - 2007
2. A 3V dc supply with an internal resistance
1kΩ
of 2Ω supplies a passive non-linear
R
10 m
R
2m resistance characterized by the relation
2kΩ 4kΩ
VNL = . The power dissipated in the
non-linear resistance is
R 3kΩ
(A) 1.0 W (C) 2.5 W
(B) 1.5 W (D) 3.0 W
23. The equivalent resistance in the infinite
EE - 2008
ladder network shown in the figure, is R .
2R R R R 3. In the circuit shown in the figure, the
value of the current i will be given by
R 1Ω 3Ω
R R R R a b
1Ω + V 1Ω
The value of R /R is________ 5V 4V

1Ω 1Ω
1Ω 1Ω i
24. The circuit shown in the figure represents a
(A) 0.31 A (C) 1.75 A

(B) 1.25 A (D) 2.5 A
R
4. Assuming ideal elements in the circuit

shown below, the voltage Vab will be
a 2Ω
(A) voltage controlled voltage source +
(B) voltage controlled current source
(C) current controlled current source 1A 5V
Vab +
(D) current controlled voltage source i
EE - 2006 b
1. The three limbed non ideal core shown in
(A) – 3 V (C) 3 V
the figure has three winding with nominal
(B) 0 V (D) 5 V
inductances L each when measured
individually with a signal phase AC
EE - 2009
source. The inductance of the winding as
Statements for Linked Answer Questions 5
connected will be
& 6:
R 3VAB
2kΩ
+ A
+
5V 2kΩ 1kΩ
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. For the circuit given above, the EE - 2010

Thevenin’s resistance across the 10. If the 12 Ω resistor draws a current of 1A
terminals A and B is as shown in the figure, the value of
(A) 0.5kΩ (C) 1kΩ resistance R is
(B) 0.2kΩ (D) 0.11kΩ
1Ω R
6. For the circuit given above, the
Thevenin’s voltage across the terminals 2 1 12Ω 6V
and B is
(A) 1.25V (C) 1V
(B) 0.25V (D) 0.5V (A) 4Ω (C) 8Ω
(B) 6Ω (D) 18Ω
7. How many 200W/220V incandescent
lamps connected in series would consume 11. As shown in the figure, a 1Ω resistance is
the same total power as a single connected across a source that has a load
100W/220V incandescent lamp? line v + i = 100. The current through the
(A) not possible (C) 3 resistance is
(B) 4 (D) 2 i
8. For the circuit shown, find out the current Source V 1Ω

flowing through the 2Ω resistance. Also
identify the changes to be made to double
(A) 25A (C) 100A
the current through the 2Ω resistance.
(B) 50A (D) 200A
EE - 2011
V 4V Is = 5A 2Ω
12. In the circuit given below, the value of R
required for the transfer of maximum
power to the load having a resistance of
(A) (5A; Put Vs=20V) 3Ω is
(B) (2A; Put Vs =8V) R
(C) (5A; Put Is = 10A)
(D) (7A; Put Is= 12A)
6Ω
9. The current through the 2 kΩ resistance 10 V 3Ω oad
in the circuit shown is
C
1kΩ 1kΩ (A) Zero (C) 3Ω
2kΩ (B) 6Ω (D) Inifnity
1kΩ 1kΩ EC/EE/IN - 2012

13. Assuming both the voltage sources are in
6V
phase the value of R for which maximum
(A) 0mA (C) 2mA power is transferred from circuit A to
(B) 1mA (D) 6mA circuit B is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2Ω R 16. In the figure, the value of resistor R is

(25 + I/2) ohms, where I is the current in
j1Ω amperes. The current I is______
~ 10V
~ 3V
Circuit Circuit
300V R
(A) 0.8 Ω (C) 2 Ω
(B) 1.4 Ω (D) 2.8 Ω
EC/IN/EE - 2013 17. Two identical coupled inductors are

14. The following arrangement consists of an connected in series. The measured
ideal transformer and an attenuator inductances for the two possible series
which attenuates by a factor of 0.8. An ac connections are 380 μH and 240 μH. Their
voltage V 100V is applied across mutual inductance in μH is_______
WX to get an open circuit voltage V
across YZ. Next , an ac voltage 18. The total power dissipated in the circuit,
V = 100V is applied across YZ to get an shown in the figure, is 1 kW.
open circuit voltage V across WX. 10 2 1Ω R
Then,V /V V /V are
respectively. oad
W
~ ac source V 200V
1:1.25
The voltmeter, across the load, reads 200
Y V. The value of is__________
19. The line A to neutral voltage is 10 15° V

X Z for a balanced three phase star-connected
(A) 125/100 and 80/100 load with phase sequence ABC. The
(B) 100/100 and 80/100 voltage of line B with respect to line C is
(C) 100/100 and 100/100 given by
(D) 80/100 and 80/100 (A) 10√3 105 V (C) 10√3 75 V
(B) 10 105 V (D) 10√3 90 V
EE - 2014
15. The three circuit elements shown in the 20. The Norton’s equivalent source in
figure are part of an electric circuit. The amperes as seen into the terminals X and
total power absorbed by the three circuit Y is _______
elements in watts is ___________ 2.5V
10 8
2.5Ω
100V 80V 5Ω
5Ω 5Ω
15V 2
5V
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
21. The power delivered by the current 3. Which one of the following equations is
source, in the figure, is_____________ valid for the circuit shown below?
1V I1 1Ω 1Ω I3
I2 1Ω 1Ω I6
1Ω 1Ω
1V 2 1Ω +
5V 1Ω
I5 1Ω
1Ω I4
22. An incandescent lamp is marked 40 W, I7
240V. If resistance at room temperature
(A) 0
(26°C) is 120 Ω, and temperature
(B) 0
coefficient of resistance is 4.5 10 /°C,
(C) 0
then its ‘ON’ state filament temperature in
(D) 0
°C is approximately___________
4. The current I supplied by the dc voltage
IN - 2006
source in the circuit shown below is
1. The root – mean – square value of a I
voltage waveform consisting of a
superimposition of 2V dc and a 4V peak –
to – peak square wave is 1V
1Ω 1A
(A) 2 V (C) √8 V
(B) √6 V (D) √12 V
IN - 2008 (A) 0A (C) 1A

2. The power supplied by the dc voltage (B) 0.5A (D) 2A
source in the circuit shown below is
5. In the circuit shown below the maximum
3Ω
3Ω
power that can be transferred to the load
is
3V 6Ω 1Ω
10√2 sin(1000t)
10Ω
(A) 0W (C) 2.5W
(B) 1.0W (D) 3.0W
10 m
i(t)
(A) 250 W (C) 1000 W

(B) 500 W (D) 2000 W
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2009 IN - 2014
6. The source network S is connected to the 9. The circuit shown in the figure contains a
load network L as shown by dashed lines. dependent current source between A and
2Ω RL terminals. The Thevenin’s equivalent
resistance in kΩ between the terminals C
and D is ___________.
+ +
10 V
5kΩ 5kΩ C
3V
10 V
Source Network S Load Network L 10 V
The power transferred from S to L would V
be maximum when RL is
(A) 0Ω (C) 0.8 Ω
(B) 0.6 Ω (D) 2Ω
IN - 2010
7. A 100 Ω , 1W resistor and a 800 Ω , 2W
resistor are connected in series. The
maximum dc voltage that can be applied
continuously to the series circuit without
exceeding the power limit of any of the
resistors is
(A) 90V (C) 45 V
(B) 50 V (D) 40V
IN - 2011
8. The current I shown in the circuit given
below is equal to
10Ω
10 V 10Ω 10 10Ω
(A) 3 A (C) 6 A
(B) 3.67 A (D) 9 A
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 4. [Ans. A]
1. [Ans. A] I 20 V
12 A
(s) = (S) R
(12 – I)A
(s) (R R ( (s)) +
60V
m( (s)) R 0 12 A
For (s)to be +ve & real,

Re ( (s)) R |Re( (s))| |R | I 12 A
In the given circuit, the current through

2. [Ans. D]
V
the branch of 60 V source is (12 –I) as
x shown in Fig. The source of 60 V absorbs
1Ω i power, only if
2i 1Ω 2 2Ω P =(12 – I)60 is +ve. i.e., I<12.
The value of the current source, I can only
y
be 10A given in option (a), as the currents
given in other options are more than 12 A.
For V
5. [Ans. A]
Apply nodal analysis, 3
V V 2i
2 V 0 V i 1Ω
2 1
V V 1Ω 1Ω
2 2V 2i 0 2
2 2 ( 3)
V V 4V 3
10V
Similarly, 2 ( 2) 1
V
V 4V R 2Ω 1Ω 2
( 2) 1Ω
3. [Ans. C]
Fig .1
For maximum power transfer, R R
V 4Ω The current through all the branches are
marked as shown in Fig. 1.
4Ω 4Ω Apply KVL to outer loop
2( 3) 2( 2) 10
V 4 10 10
100V
0
Power supplied by 10 V 10 0 0
V 100V
100 (100 V ) 6. [Ans. C]
8 4
10 10
Also V 50V
10
12.5 12.5 25 R 15
V
R ⁄ 4Ω R 4Ω
Fig. 2
For Maximum power transfer to RL
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
R R 8. [Ans. A]
R Thevenin’s resistance seen across The Norton equivalent current is
the terminals of R into the rest of the 25
16 0
network. The relevant circuit is shown in (40 30)
Fig.2, where the independent current 3
8 tan ( ) 8 36.86
source is open circuited and the voltage 4
sources are short circuited. (6.4 j4.8)
R 10 (10 10)
R R 15Ω 9. [Ans. B]
The load consists of a resistance and a
7. [Ans. B] capacitance of this, only R is passive and
To find the current I in the given circuit in consumes power
Fig. (1), the delta network with 6Ω each is So P = R
converted to a star as shown in Fig. (2) =( ) 4 50
√
j4 Ω j4 Ω *Note rms value of cos t +.

√
14 0 V ~ 6Ω 10. [Ans. A]
6Ω i
Fig. 1 1kΩ 99i

6Ω
9kΩ
2Ω 2Ω
100Ω
6Ω 6Ω
2Ω i ( 99i )
Fig. 2
Then the given circuit reduces to Fig. (3),
V 10kΩ V 100Ω V
(4) and (5) 99i
Where (2 j4)||(2 j4) 5Ω and
14 0
2 0
7
After connecting a voltage source of V
j4Ω j4Ω V V
(10k)( i ) 100( 99i i )
14 0 10000i 100( 100 i )
2Ω 2Ω
2Ω
100 10000i
20000i 100
Fig. 3 100
i ( ) [ ]
20000 200
V 100 99i i
5Ω 100 [ 100 ( )]
14 0 7Ω 200
14 0
50
2Ω V 50
R 50Ω
Fig. 4
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. [Ans. A] 14. [Ans. C]

R V 2Ω V R For maximum power transfer
Load impedance = complex conjugate of
source impedance
R R R R 10V
R
1Ω
15. [Ans. A]
R
i
5V V 2 V
i
From the given circuit,V V 6V
V V
3 R R i 2
2 i
KC at ‘ ’ gives R i 4
i i 1
V V
2 3 0V V 5V i i
1
KC at node
12. [Ans. B] i i i
Consider R k R k R k. KCL at node B
R R k i i i
R KCL at node C
R R R 3k
R k i i i
Put the value of i and i in equation
13. [Ans. C] 2 ( 1) i
C 5μF C 2μF i 1
Put i and i in equation
5V 2V 1 ( 4) i
V i 3
(Safe voltage)
Put the value of i and i in equation
(Safe voltage)
C 10μF 3 i 2
10V (Safe voltage)
i 5
For safe warping voltage across should
not increased from 2V 16. [Ans. *] Range 29.08 to 29.10
C V
V R
C C
V Total safe voltage across C and C 10Ω 10Ω
5μV
2
5μ 2μ R R
11Ω
5μV
2
7μ
14
[V 2.8V]
5
C C (C C ) R
80 29.09
C 10μF (5μ 2μ) μF
7 R 32
80
Total charge C . V 2.8 32C R 32
7
So lowest value is 29.09 Ω
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. D]
Norton’s theorem: Here for a complex
network, after isolating the element, we 10 0 V
V1 V2
short circuit the two ends and find the
current . is the current of the 4Ω
independent current source with the 4 0 3jΩ 6Ω 6jΩ
equivalent resistance in parallel
R
Applying KCL to the super node we have
V V V
4 0 0 .
3j 6 6j
18. [Ans. *] Range 0.49 to 0.51 From super node we get
Apply superposition theorem V V 10 0 .
For voltage Solving and for V we get
5Ω 5Ω V 2 22j V
20. [Ans. *] Range 1.9 to 2.1

5V 10Ω The Norton’s equivalent circuit is
1Ω 1F
Voltage 0.5
5 source
0.25 mp
20 shorted
For current
5Ω 5Ω In doiman
1
(1||0.5j )
j
1 10Ω 0.5j j
1 0.5j
0.5j (1 0.5j ) j
1 5 1 0.25
0.25 mp 0.5j (1 0.5j ) j(1 0.25 )
20
(1 0.25 )
(0.25 0.25) Equating the imaginary part to zero, we
0.50 mp get
0.5 1 0.25 0
19. [Ans. D] 0.25 1
Using super node concept, we can treat 2rad/sec
nodes 1 and 2 to gather as a super node
as shown in the figure by the dotted lines
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
21. [Ans. *] Range 9 to 11 R

2.618
R R
24. [Ans. C ]
5Ω 3Ω
i i R
7.5Ω
In the above circuit in the output side

5 3 5
7.5 3 7.5 there is a dependent current source
R
7.5 which is controlled by the input current
7.5 2 5 3 and hence it is a current control current
10
7.5 source.
EE
22. [Ans. *] Range 2.79 to 2.81
1. [Ans. A]
By source transformation theorem
The inductance of all three coils are ‘ ’
2k 1k 4k
and they are connected to same line
carrying the same current and set up the
flux in the same direction
20V 8V
2 2
3k
by KV 20 10k 8 0
28
2.8 m
10k
23. [Ans. *] Range 2.60 to 2.64 All these fluxes linked with each other
We know that in a infinite ladder network and they will balance each other. So net
if all resistance are comprises of same flux will reduce drastically. Thus net L
value R then the equivalent resistance is will be very low
( √ )
. Then the above given network
2. [Ans. A]
can be redrawn as R series with R
equivalent as follows 2Ω
R 3V
+
V
I
R (1 √5)R
R
2
3 2 1
Power delivered by source = 3×1=3W.
R R 1.618R 2.618R
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Power dissipated by 2Ω resistor 6. [Ans. D]

2 2 . 2kΩ C
Power dissipated in non-linear element
3V
= 3-2=1W
5V 2kΩ V
3. [Ans. B] 1kΩ
5 1
V 2.5V
2
Also, 4 V 4i 4(V V) 4i . (1) To calculate thevenin’s voltage terminals
A-B are kept open.
Also, V 4V V V
Applying source transformation into
V
V 1.25 V correct source
2 C C
4(2.5 1.25) 4i (From (1))
i 1.25
2kΩ 2kΩ 1kΩ
4. [Ans. A]
V 2i 5 2 5 3V
Applying source transformation current
source is transformed into voltage source.
5. [Ans. B]
1kΩ C 3V
Thevenin’s resistance is calculated using
the circuit shown in fig. (1) and (2),
where independent voltage source is 5 V
V 1kΩ
short circuited 2
3V I
2kΩ
A
Applying KVL, {I is assumed to be in mA}
2kΩ 1kΩ V
5
1k 3V 1k 0
2
B
5
Fig. 1 2k 3V 0 (1)
2
Fig. 1 V
(2)
3 V 1k
I
Put the value of in quation (1)
A
10 )
V 10 5
2V 3V 0
1kΩ 1kΩ 2
V
V 0.5V
V
B
Fig. 2 7. [Ans. D]
(
Write the loop equation : For a lamp, P KV

V 3V ( V 10 )10 For 200 ⁄220V lamp, K 200⁄
220
10 V Consider n lamps connected in series,
5V 10 Total power consumed n K 110
V 10
R Ω 0.2kΩ 100 n 110 100 n 2
5
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. B] R R
The relevant circuit is shown in fig. 6R
3
As the voltage across 2Ω 4V 6 R
4 R 6Ω
2
2
In order to double the current through 2Ω 13. [Ans. A]
resistance, V is to be doubled (Put 2Ω R
V 8V) ]
Note that the 5 A source has no effect on j1Ω
the answer. However it gives 3A current ~ 10V
~ 3V
through the voltage source as shown in

fig. Circuit Circuit
For maximum power transfer

Source impedance = Load impedance
V 4V 5 2Ω z R
3 5V
Fig. 2Ω
9. [Ans. A]
10V
~ 2Ω 5V
As the ABCD bridge is balanced, 0

10
2.5
10. [Ans. B] 4
So in our circuit
Current through R =1A
By KVL, 1.R +6=12 2Ω 2.5 R
R=6
10V
~ 5V
~ 3V
11. [Ans. B]
V i 100 and V i .1(by ohm’s law)
2i 100  i 50 pply KV in loop
5 2.5R 3 0
12. [Ans. B] 2
[R 0.8Ω]
To calculated voltage source is short 2.5
circuited
R 14. [Ans. B]
W
1:1.25
6 100 V 125 V Y
R V
X Z
V 100 V
turns ratio V
6R 125
R 6||R
6 R V 0.8 V 100V
According to maximum power transfer when V 100V
theorem
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2 18. [Ans. *] Range 17.3 to 17.4
200 (10)√ R
V
100V Power dissipated (2) (1) R 10
0.8
4 10R 1000
2′ 996
R
Thevenin’s circuit seen by 2 2′ will be 10
400 R
as follow
400 99.6
V 100V
17.33Ω
nd R 0.2||0.8 negligible
V 100V
19. [Ans. C]
V V turns ratio
100V 1 C
1.25
80V 120
120
15. [Ans. 330]
Power absorbed by battery 100V = 100 120
10 1000
Power supplied by battery
80V 80 8 640 V lags voltage A by 90
Current through 15V battery V √3 10 90
10 8 Angle 90 with respect to A
2 Hence
Power supplied by battery V √3 10 ( 90 15)
15V 15 2 30 10√3 75
Total power absorbed
1000 640 30 20. [Ans. 2]
330 att 2.5V
16. [Ans. 10]

2.5Ω
300 (25 )
2 i
600 (50 ) 5Ω 5Ω
10
5V
17. [Ans. 35]
Total flux linkage = i Terminal x – y shorted
total Applying superposition
380μm i due to 5V
240μm (5) 5
4 140μm (5 ) 7.5
35μ 5 53 5
0.5
20 7.5 10
i due to 2.5V
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2.5 1 2. [Ans. D]
0.5
(2.5 2.5) 2 The given circuit in Fig. 1 is simplified as
Total i 0.5 0.5 1 (NOTE: Option shown in Fig. 2 and Fig.3
not matching with IIT website) 3 2
  I
6
21. [Ans. 3] V1=3  1 V1 1 V1 1
1V V   
Fig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3

1Ω 1Ω From Fig.3, I = 1 A, power supplied by 3 V
V
O d.c source = P = V1 I = 3 1 3 W
1V 2 1Ω
3. [Ans. D]
O The circuit is shown in Fig. marking the
Power delivered by current source V nodes: P,Q,R and S
Applying nodal at V Apply KCL at nodes,
( ) Q
2 I1 1Ω 1Ω I3 R
( ) ( )
2v 3 I2 1Ω 1Ω I6
3
v
2
5V I5
Power delivered 3 1Ω 1Ω
1Ω I4
22. [Ans. *] Range 2470 to 2471 P I7 S
40 At node, P
R . (1)
(240)
R At nodeQ ,
40
. . (2)
R R (1 T)
At nodeR ,
R is resistance of room temperature
. (3)
(240)
120(1 4.5 10 T) At nodeS ,
40
11 4.5 10 T . (4)
11 1000 From (3) and (4)
T T 0
4.5
11 1000
T 26 2470.44 4. [Ans. A]
4.5
I P
IN
I1
1. [Ans. C]
+ 1V
For d.c voltage of 2 V, M.S.V = 4 1Ω 1A
For square wave voltage with peak – to –
peak value of 4 V or amplitude = 2V,
M.S.V = 4 + 4 = 8
R. . S. V √8 V The circuit is shown in Fig.
Voltage across 1 =1V
1 = 1A
Apply KCL at node, P
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
I+1= I1, 2Ω RL
or I+1=1 ,
I
0
+ +
10 V 3V +
5. [Ans. B]
The circuit is shown in Fig. 1
Source Network S Load Network L

i(t) 10Ω
7
10Ω 2 R
Power supplied by the 10V source,
10 m
P
i(t) 10√2 Sin (1000 t) Power dissipated in 2 resistance,

98
10 / P 2
(2 R )
Phasor of i(t) 10√2
Power transferred to the network,
R j 10 j10 10 10
P (R ) P P
10 j 10 ( )
The Thevenin equivalent circuit is shown P would be maximum, if 0
in Fig. 2
70 2
98 0
(2 R ) (2 R )
196 196 98
70 2 R
2 R 70 35
98 28
⃗
V R 2 0.8 
35 35
7. [Ans. C]
Fig. 2 Resistor 1 : 100 Ω 1
10 j 10 Resistor 2 : 800 Ω, 2 W
⃗⃗⃗⃗ Maximum current that resistor can
V 10√2
withstand
10√2(10 j 10)
200 e 1 1
√
For maximum power transfer to load, 100 10
10 j 10 R 10Ω Similarly,
⃗⃗⃗⃗
V
⃗⃗⃗ 10 e 2 1
20 √
i (t) 10 sin( 45 ) 800 20
10 If these two resistors are connected in
10 (rms)
√2 series.
Power transferred to load,
100Ω 800Ω
100
P (rms) R 10 500
2 I
6. [Ans. C]
V
The circuit is shown in Fig.
Then maximum value of
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
V (100 800) 9. [Ans. 20]

1 5kΩ 5kΩ C
(900) 45Volts
20
8. [Ans. A]
The given circuit is Fig. 1 10 V V
10 V
Convert the (10 V, 10 Ω) voltage source
across A, B to the left into a current
source, (1 A, 10 Ω). The resultant circuit is
shown in Fig. 2
10Ω For R calculation Independent
voltage source should be short circuited
So
10 V 10Ω 10 10Ω 5k
C
Fig. 1 5K 10 V
1V( ssume)
so V 1
1 10Ω 10Ω 10 10Ω

R
Fig. 2 So *R +
The circuit is further simplified as shown Apply KCL at Node A
in Fig. 3 and 4 10 V
1 V V
10
5k 5K
1 5Ω 10 10Ω 1 V .5 V
2V 1.5 V 0.75V
Fig. 3
1 V 1 0.75
So
5k 5k
0.25
9 5Ω 10Ω 5k
5 10
0.05m
Fig. 4 1
5 [R 20kΩ]
0.05m
9 3
15
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Transient/Steady State Analysis of RLC Circuits to DC Input
ECE - 2006 Q P Q2 P2
+
1. In the figure shown, assume that all the S S2
capacitors are initially uncharged. 0
If Vi(t) =10u(t) Volts, then V0(t) is given (t)
by F
1K
+ +
Vi(t)
4 F
4K 1µF Vo(t) Assume that the capacitor has zero initial
charge. Given that u(t) is a unit step
function, the voltage (t) across the
capacitor is given by
(A) 8e Volts
(A) ∑ ( ) tu(t nT)
(B) 8( e ) Volts
(B) u(t) + 2 ∑ ( ) u(t nT)
(C) 8 u(t) Volts
(C) tu(t) + 2 ∑ ( ) (t nT)
(D) 8 Volts
u(t nT)
ECE - 2007 (D) ∑ 0 e ( )
+0 e ( )
]
2. In the circuit shown, Vc is 0 volts at t = 0 Common Data for Questions 4 and 5:
sec. For t>0, the capacitor current iC (t), The following series RLC circuit with zero
where t is in seconds, is given by initial condition is excited by a unit
20k i impulse function δ(t)
1H Ω
+
20k VC +
± 4 F
10V - δ(t) 1F
VC(t)
(A) 0.50 exp ( 25t)mA 4. For t > 0, the output voltage (t) is
√
(B) 0.25 exp ( 25t)mA (A) (e e )
√
(C) 0.50 exp ( 12.5 t)mA
(D) 0.25 exp ( 6.25 t)mA (B) te
√
√
(C) e cos ( t)
ECE - 2008 √
⁄ √
3. The circuit shown in the figure is used to (D) e sin ( t)
√
charge the capacitor C alternately from
two current sources as indicated. The 5. For t > 0, the voltage across the resistor
switches S1 and S2 are mechanically is
coupled and connected as follows √
(A) (e e )
For 2nT ≤ t< (2n+ )T, √
(n = 0, , 2…) S to P and S2 to P2 √ √
(B) e *cos ( ) sin ( )+
√
For (2n+ )T ≤ t< (2n+2)T, √
(n = 0, , 2…) S to Q and S2 to Q2 (C) e sin ( )
√
√
(D) e cos ( )
√
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. In the following circuit, the switch S is 0Ω
closed at t=0. The rate of change of S t=0

1.5A i(t) 15mH
current (0 ) is given by 0Ω
0Ω
S
R
(A) i(t) = 0 0 2 e
(B) i(t) = 0 2 e
i(t)
Rs L (C) i(t) = 0 0 e
IS
(D) i(t) = 0 e
( ) ECE - 2011
(A) 0 (C) 10. In the circuit shown below, the initial
(B) (D) charge on the capacitor is 2.5 mC, with
the voltage polarity as indicated. The
ECE - 2009
switch is closed at time t = 0. The current
7. The time domain behavior of an RL circuit
i(t) at a time t after the switch is closed is
is represented by
⁄ i(t)
L + Ri = ( + e sint) u(t)
For an initial current of i(0) = , the
0
steady state value of the current is given
00
by
0 F
(A) i(t) → +
(B) i(t) →
(C) i(t) → (1+B) (A) i(t) = exp( 2 0 t)
(B) i(t) = exp( 2 0 t)
(D) i(t) → (1+B)
(C) i(t) = 0 exp( 2 0 t)
8. The switch in the circuit shown was on (D) i(t) = exp( 2 0 t)
position ‘a’ for a long time and is moved
to position ‘b’ at time t = 0. The current ECE/EE/IN - 2012
i(t) for t > 0 is given by 11. In the following figure, C1 and C2 are ideal
capacitors. has been charged to 12 V
0 kΩ a b
before the ideal switch S is closed at t = 0.
i(t)
The current i(t) for all t is.
0.2 F S t=0
100 V + kΩ
0.5 F 0.3 F
(A) 0.2e u(t)m i(t)

(B) 20e u(t)m
(C) 0.2e u(t)m
(D) 20e u(t)m (A) Zero
ECE - 2010 (B) a step function
9. In the circuit shown, the switch S is open (C) an exponentially decaying function
for a long time and is closed at t = 0. The (D) an impulse function
current i(t) for t 0 is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2013 R
Common Data for Questions 12 and 13:
Consider the following figure k R
+
2k F
5 Is
1
10V 2
Vs
⁄
2
( ) (t) = ( e ), = msec
2A
⁄
2
12. The current Is in Amps in the voltage ( ) (t) = ( e ), = msec
2
source, and voltage Vs is Volts across the
( ) (t) = ( ⁄
current source respectively , are e ), = msec
(A) , 20 (C) , 20 ⁄
( ) (t) = ( e ), = msec
(B) , 0 (D) , 20 2
13. The current in the 1 resistor in Amps is 17. A series RC circuit is connected to a DC
(A) 2 (C) 10 voltage source at time t = 0. The relation
(B) 3.33 (D) 12 between the source voltage , the
resistance R, the capacitance C, and the
ECE - 2014 current i(t) is given below:
14. In the figure shown, the ideal switch has
= R i(t) + ∫ i(u)du
been open for a long time. If it is closed at
t = 0, then the magnitude of the current Which one of the following represents the
(in m ) through the 4 k resistor at current i(t)?
t = 0 is _______. ( )
k 4k k
()
0 +
0 F mH
15. A series LCR circuit is operated at a

frequency different from its resonant
frequency. The operating frequency is 0 t
such that the current leads the supply ( )
voltage. The magnitude of current is half
the value at resonance. If the values of L, C i(t)
and R are H, F and , respectively,
the operating angular frequency (in
rad/s) is ________.
16. In the figure shown, the capacitor is

initially uncharged. Which one of the
following expressions describes the 0 t
current I(t) (in mA) for t >0?
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( )
R R
i(t) L1
+
V
I R
(A) 1,4 (C) 5,2

0 t (B) 5,1 (D) 5,4
( )
2. An ideal capacitor is charged to a voltage
i(t) Vo and connected at t = 0 across an ideal
inductor L. (The circuit now consists of a
capacitor and inductor alone). If we let
= , the voltage across the capacitor
√
at time t > 0 is given by
(A) Vo
(B) Vocos ( t)
0 t
(C) Vosin ( t)
(D) Voe cos ( t)
18. In the circuit shown in the figure, the
value of (t) (in volts )for t → is EE - 2007
________ 3. In the circuit shown in figure switch
i is initially CLOSED and Sw is OPEN. The
inductor L carries a current of 10 A and
2H the capacitor is charged to 10 V with
+ +
2i polarities as indicated. Sw is initially
0u(t) (t) caps at t = 0 and Sw is OPENED at t = 0.
The current through C and the voltage
across L at t = 0 + is
SW2
EE - 2006 R2 0Ω
1. In the circuit shown in the figure, the +

R1= 0Ω SW1 L 10A C _10V
current source I = 1A, voltage source
V = 5V, R = R = R = 1Ω,
= = = 1H, = = 1F. (A) 55 A, 4.5 V (C) 45 A, 5.5 V
The currents (in A) through R3 and the (B) 5.5 A, 45 V (D) 4.5 A, 55 V
voltage source V respectively will be
4. The state equation for the current I1
shown in the network shown below in
terms of the voltage Vx and the
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
independent source V, is given by

0 2H 1F
+
1F 1F 3A
+
0 H 02
+
(A) ⁄ s (C) 4 s
(B) ⁄4 s (D) 9s
(A) = 1.4 Vx – 3.75I1 + V
EE - 2009
(B) = +1.4 Vx – 3.75I1 V
8. In the figure shown, all elements used are
(C) = 1.4 Vx + 3.75I1 + V ideal. For time t<0, S remained closed
(D) = 1.4 Vx + 3.75I1 V and S open. At t = 0, S is opened and S
is closed. If the voltage Vc2 across the
capacitor at t = 0 is zero, the
EE - 2008
voltage across the capacitor
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 5
combination at t=0+ will be
and 6
S1 S2
The current i(t) sketched in the figure
flows through an initially uncharged
0.3 nF capacitor. 3V C1 1F C2 2F
6
i(t) mA5
4 (A) 1V (C) 1.5 V
3 (B) 2 V (D) 3 V
2
1
EE - 2010
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
t ( s) Linked Answer Questions 9 and 10
9
The L-C circuit shown in the figure has an
5. The charge stored in the capacitor at
inductance L = 1mH and a capacitance
t = 5 µs, will be
C = 10µF.
(A) 8nC (C) 13nC
L
(B) 10nC (D) 16nC
i
6. The capacitor charged upto 5 ms, as per C 100 V
t=0
the current profile given in the figure, is 100+V
connected across an inductor of 0.6 mH.
Then the value of voltage across the
9. The initial current through the inductor is
capacitor after 1s will approximately be
zero, while the initial capacitor voltage is
(A) 18.8 V (C) 23.5 V
100 V. The switch is closed at t = 0. The
(B) 23.5 V (D) 30.6 V
current i through the circuit is:
(A) 5 cos( 0 t) A
7. The time constant for the given circuit
(B) 5 sin( 0 t) A
will be
(C) 10cos( 0 t) A
(D) 10 sin( 0 t) A
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. The L – C circuit of Q.9 is used to EE/IN - 2012

commutate a thyristor. Which is initially Statement for Linked answer question 14
carrying a current of 5 A as shown in the and 15:
figure below. The values and initial In the circuit shown, the three voltmeter
conditions of L and C are the same as in reading = 220V, = 122 V, =136 V
Q.9. The switch is closed at t=0. If the R
forward drop is negligible, the time taken

for the device to turn off is R
I
L
~ oad
t=0 C 100V
14. The power factor of the load is

100V 20
5A (A) 0.45 (C) 0.55
(B) 0.50 (D) 0.60
(A) 2 s (C) 2 s
(B) 6 s (D) 26 s
15. If RL = 5, the approximate power
consumption in the load is
11. The switch in the circuit has been closed
(A) 700W (C) 800W
for a long time. It is opened at t = 0.
(B) 750W (D) 850W
At t = 0 , the current through the 1µF
capacitor is
Ω EE - 2014
16. The switch SW shown in the circuit is
t =0
5V 1µF 4Ω
kept at position ‘ ’ for a long duration t
t = 0 the switch is moved to position ‘2’
(A) 0A (C) 1.25A Assuming , the voltage (t)
(B) 1A (D) 5A across the capacitor is
R 2
S
EE - 2011
Common Data For Q.No 12 & Q.No 13 R
An RLC circuit with relevant data is given
below
R = 0 (A) (t) = ( e ⁄
)
~ = √2 4
(B) (t) = ( e ⁄
)+
= √2 4
⁄
(C) (t) = ( + )( e )
12. The power dissipated in the resistor R is (D) (t) = ( )( e ⁄
)+
(A) 0.5 W (C) √2
(B) 1 W (D) 2
17. The voltage across the capacitor, as
shown in the figure, is expressed as
13. The current in the figure above is (t) = )
sin( t
(A) 2 (C) +
√ + sin ( t )
(B) (D) +j2A The values of and respectively, are
√
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
H (B) P = 0 and Q = 3/√

(C) P = 5 and Q = 6/√
20 sin 0t ~ (t) F 0 sin t
(D) P = 5 and Q = 3
(A) 2.0 and 1.98 (C) 2.5 and 3.50 IN - 2008

(B) 2.0 and 4.20 (D) 5.0 and 6.40 Statement for Linked Answer Question 3
and 4:
IN - 2006 In the circuit shown below the steady-
1. In the circuit shown in the following state is reached with the switch K open
figure, the input voltage vi(t) is constant subsequently the switch is closed at time
at 2V for time t s and then it changes t=0.
to 1 V. The output voltage, v0(t), 2 s after
the change will be t=0
H
2
Vi(t) +
F + 0
2
1 3. At time t=0 , current I is
t
0 (A) ( ⁄ ) (C) ⁄
1µF (B) 0A (D)
+ + 4. At time t =0 , is is
Vi(t) M Vo(t) (A) 5A / s (C) 0A / s
(B) ( 0⁄ ) S (D) 5A / s
(A) – exp ( 2) V IN - 2010

(B) – 1 + exp ( 2) V 5. In the dc circuit shown in the adjoining
(C) exp ( 2) V figure, the node voltage V2 at steady state
(D) 1 – exp ( 2) V is
2k 0 F
IN - 2007
2. In the circuit shown in the figure, the +
k
20 F
input signal is ( ) = + cos
+ +
(A) 0V (C) 2V
(t) R (t) (B) 1V (D) 3V
IN - 2011
Fig.
6. In the circuit shown below, the switch,
initially at position 1 for a long time, is
The steady – state output is expressed as
changed to position 2 at t = 0.
(t) = P + Q cos( t ). If R = 2,
the values of P and Q are
(A) P = 0 and Q = 6/√
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2 t=0 0Ω 10. In the circuit shown in the figure, initially

i the capacitor is uncharged. The switch ‘S’
1
0Ω 1H is closed at = 0. Two milliseconds after
4A
10V the switch is closed, the current through
the capacitor (in mA) is _____________
The current i through the inductor for
2k S
t 0 is
(A) e (C) + 2e i (t)
t =0
(B) + e (D) 2 e
2k 4 F
IN - 2012
7. In the circuit shown below, the current
through the inductor is
11. In the microprocessor controlled
j measurement scheme shown in the
figure, R is the unknown resistance to be
0
0
measured, while R and known.
0 is charged from voltage to (by
~+ + ~
a constant DC voltage source ), once
0
through R in T seconds and then
j discharged to . It is again charged from
voltage to through R in T seconds.
R
(A) A (C) A
analog
P R
(B) A (D) 0 A interface
Sense harge
Sense
IN - 2014 control
ischarge
8. The circuit shown in figure was at steady
If T = kT then
state for t < 0 with the switch at position
(A) R = kR ( ) (C) R = kR
‘ ’ The switch is thrown to position ‘ ’ at
time = 0, . The voltage V (volts) across (B) R = kR ln ( ) (D) R = R lnk
the 0 resistor at time
t = 0 is _________________
2 12. capacitor ‘ ’ is to be connected across
the terminals ‘ ’ and ‘ ’ as shown in the
figure so that the power factor of the
+
parallel combination becomes unity. The
0 t=0
H
value of the capacitance required in F
is___________.
6
4
9. The average real power in watts delivered
to a load impedance = (4 j2) by an 60
0 Hz
ideal current source ~ 0 Hz
i (t) = 4 sin ( t + 20 ) is ______________ 0 Hz
j
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE Vc(t)
1. [Ans. D]
The transform circuit is shown below 1
(s)
2
t
+ + T T
-1
(s) (s) (s)
In mathematical form,
(t) = tu(t) 2(t T)u(t 2T) +
( ) ( ) 2(t 2T)u(t 2T)……………
For the given circuit = ( )
( ) ( )
Where (S) = , = tu(t) + 2 ∑( ) (t nT)u(t nT)

Where, R = 4 , = F
(S) = , 4. [Ans. D]
Where, R = , ( ) ⁄
= =( )
=4 F ( ) ( ⁄ )
R =R = 0 4 0 sec (t) = δ(t) (S) =

=4 0 sec (S) =
For t 0u(t) = s = 0 (for dc signal) (S + ⁄2) + ( )
√
( )
( )
= = ⁄ √
(t) = e Sin ( t)
√
v (S) = (S) , v (t) = 0 v (t)
for v (t) = 0 for t 0, v (t) = 5. [Ans. B]
(S) = R (S) = ( S (s))
2. [Ans. A] S
At t = 0 Capacitor is short circuit and at t =S (S) (S) =
(S + S + )
= apacitor is open circuit ( ⁄ ⁄ )
=
So (0 ) = =0 m ( ) (√ ⁄ )
( )=0 ⁄ √ ⁄ √
(t) = e os ( t) e Sin ( t)
Time constant of the circuit = R √
= 4 F 20 k 20 = 40 ms
Using direct formula 6. [Ans. B]
(t) = ( ) ( ) (0)]e In the circuit shown,
R
(t) = 0 (0 0 )e =0 = R = (R + R )
(R + R )
(t) = 0 e m
T = ⁄R = ⁄(R + R )
3. [Ans. C] R
di ⁄(R + R ) R
The waveform of voltage Vc(t) is shown | = = =
below. dt T ⁄(R + R )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. A] 0Ω
Take L.T of given differential equation
with i(0)= and use the L.T pairs: S i (0 )
1.5 A 0Ω i(0 )
sin(t) u(t) →
s + 0Ω 4
e sin(t) u(t) → ,
(s + ) + (0 ) =
()
L + Ri = ( + e sin t) u(t) t t = , the status of the circuit is shown
Take Laplace on both side in Fig. 3
0.5 A 0Ω
[s (s) ] + R (s) = +
R s
(s + ) + 0.5 A 0.5 A i ( ) 0
S
r ( s + R) (s) = + + + 1.5 A 0Ω
L
( ) i( )
0Ω
(s) = [ + + ]
( ) ( )
i( ) = 0
According to final value theorem,
The given circuit is a first order circuit
Steady state value of
with time constant, =
i(t) = i(t) = t s (s)] = R= 0+( 0 0) = 0 + =
→ → R
= mH = 0 H
8. [Ans. B] = = = 0 sec, = 0 sec
hen S is in position ‘a’, (0 ) = 00
General formula:
fter S is moved to b, (for t 0)
= 00 =0 R= i(t) = + (F )( e ),t 0
0 02
= =0 6 F i(t) = +( )( e )
2
(t) = 00 e ⁄ = 00e =0 0 2 e ,t 0
(t)
i(t) = = 20e u(t)m
10. [Ans. A]
Q(0 ) = 2 m
9. [Ans. A] (0 ) =
( )
= = 0
S is open for < ≤0
For t 0, = 0 = 00
At t = 0 the status of the circuit is shown
= R = 0 m sec
in Fig. 1
0.75 A (t) = ( 00 0e )u(t)
0.75 A
d
i (t) =
0.75 A S 0Ω
i (0 )
dt
= 0 0 0 2000 e u(t)
1.5 A 0Ω
15mH = e u(t)
0Ω
i(0 )
11. [Ans. D]
i (0 ) = 0 , i(0 ) = 0
When the switch in closed at t = 0
S is closed for 0 ≤ t <
Capacitor C1 will discharge and C2 will get
At t = 0 , i (0 ) = i (0 ) = 0
charge since both C1 and C2 are ideal and
The status of the circuit is shown in Fig. 2
there is no-resistance in the circuit
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
charging and discharging time constant 15. [Ans. *] Range 0.45 to 0.47
will be zero. A series LCR circuit operating frequency
Thus current will exist like an impulse is such that current leads the supply
function. voltage so
The current at resonance = = amp
12. [Ans. D]
R= = H = F
2 v The magnitude of current is the value at
resonance
0 Ω
+ 10V
=
+ 2Ω Ω 2
v 2A 0 0
_ = 0 = =
20 2 = √R + (x x ) √ +( )
Across AB voltage drop is 10V 2=√ +( )

= 13A, = 20V
2= + + =0 ( ) =
= 0+2= 13A = as ]
√
+√ =0
13. [Ans. C]
√ +√ +4
current through = = 0 =
2
= 0 4 rad/sec
14. [Ans. *] Range 1.2 to 1.3 (omitting the negative value)
k 4k k
+ 16. [Ans. A]
0 +
0 F mH
i i
k i(t)
0 +
urrent after long time = = m F
0k 2k
At t = 0 the voltage across the capacitor
is 10
Where, = = 0 = = 2000i(t)
Now at t= 0 dv di
i =c = 0 002
dt dt
+ 4k di
i = [0 002 + i(t)] amp
dt
di
= 2 + 000i(t)
dt
+ =
The current is m = 2 m di
4
2 + 000i(t) + 2000i(t) =
dt s
di
2 + 000i(t) + 2000i(t) =
dt s
000
2 [s (s) + (s)] =
2 s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
000 By Nodal analysis at node A

2 (s) [s + ]=
2 s 0+ +i =0
(s) = 0+ +i =0
2s(s + 00)
= [ ] = 0 i =
2 s s+ 00 00
(t) = i = = = 2
= [ ] amp
600 s s+ 00
= [ ]m EE
s s+ 00 1. [Ans. D]
i(t) = e ] At steady state, inductor acts as short
circuit & capacitor acts open circuit
= * e + where is in m sec 2Ω
2
= [ e ], = msec
Ω _+ 5V
17. [Ans. A]
= Ri(t) + ∫ i(u)du Current through R = 5/1 =5A
Current delivered by 5V source = 5 1
=R + aplace transform ]
S = 4A
= =
2. [Ans. B]
is a D.C voltage source,
The relevant circuit is shown in fig.
so = where depends on
+ +
S k
= = L (t)
s(RS + ) R (s + ) C
k
i(t) = e
R Fig.
() =
It is a standard LC circuit.
With v (t) = cos( t)
or sin( t + 0 )
3. [Ans. D]
Equivalent circuit at t = 0 is,
18. [Ans. *] Range 31.24 to 31.26
i V I
2H 0Ω +
+ + 0Ω L 10A 10V
2i
0u(t) (t)
By nodal analysis,
( )
0+ =0 2 0 = 00
( )
Since we have to evaluate (t) in steady = = = 4
state the inductor will behave as a short
circuit and hence = i
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. A] 8. [Ans. A]
V-3( + ) 0 = 0 …… (1) The status of the circuit at t = 0 is
shown in fig. 1.
0 = 0.2
A
0 +02 = 0……… (2)
Eliminating I2 for eq(1) and (2) we get +
3V 3V
= 4 + 1F 2F
5. [Ans. C] Fig. 1 B
i(t) The status of the circuit at t = 0 is
mA shown in Fig. 2.
4 S A S
2 +
3V + V
A1 A2
3V
2 s s s
B Fig. 2
Charged stored in the capacitor = area
under i – t curve = = =
Q= +
= (2 0 ) (4 0 ) + (4 + 2) 9. [Ans. D]
2 2
Initial current through the inductor is
0 ( 2)
zero and capacitor voltage is charged
0
upto to voltage
6
= [4 + ] 0 = n (0 ) = 00
2
As current through inductor and voltage
6. [Ans. D] across cannot change abrupty.
apacitor charged upto s, so total So, after closing the switch
charge stored in capacitor = Q = 13nC i (0 ) = i (0 ) = 0
Voltage across the capacitor before And (0 ) = (0 ) = 00
connecting to indictor The circuit is s – domain
Q 0
= = =4 sL
0 0 (0 ) 00
=
Voltage across the capacitor at time t I(s s s
(t)at t = s ) 1/s
(t) = cos t] C
t= 0
√ (s) =
= 2.357 rad = (s + )
(t) =4 cos
00
06 = ( )
s +
7. [Ans. C]
⁄√
= F;R = 6Ω T=R = 4sec = 00√ ( )
s + ( ⁄√ )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Taking inverse Laplace transform

= √2 =
i(t) = (s)] √2
13. [Ans. D]
= 00√ sin t Using KCL,
√ + + =0
= =
00 √ sin ( t) = √2 √2
√
=2 0
i(t) = 10sin (104t)A
=+ 2
14. [Ans. A]
10. [Ans. A]
Pharor diagram
i = 220 = 122 V
VC(t) = 136V
iT
⃗⃗⃗ = ⃗⃗⃗ + ⃗⃗⃗
100V 20
5A
When the switch is closed, I flows through 𝛟

thyristor.
I
Load current = =
Net current through thyrostor By parallelogram law of addition of
i = i vectors
i = sin 0 = + +2 cos
Let at t=T, circuit get turned off and by using options, cos = 0.45
current i becomes zero
i = 0 sin 0 T = 0 15. [Ans. B]
0 sin T = :R =
sin 0 T = 0 = cos = 136 x 0.45 [From Q 4]
0 T = 0 or 0 2 rad = 61.2V
T 2 s
P = = 749W = 750W
11. [Ans. B]
(0 ) = 4 (0 ) = 4 16. [Ans. D]
( ) At t = 0
i (0 ) = = A Voltage across capacitor =
tt 0
12. [Ans. B] +i R+i R+ =0
Power supplied by the source = cos d
+ 2c R+ =0
Where = angle between dt
= 4 inductor and capacitor do not Taking Laplace
consume power.
+ (2Rc) s (0)] + =0
Therefore, power dissipated in R = Power s
supplied by the source + 2Rcs 2R + =0
P = cos s
= √2 cos ( + 2Rcs) = 2R
4 s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2R 1µF
(s) =
+ 2Rcs S( + 2Rcs)
+ +
2R 2Rc
(s) = + Vi(t) M
+ 2Rcs + 2Rcs s Vo(t)
(t) (e) = e + e
+ Input is 2V for t 1s.
* (t) = ( + )( e )+ + Time constant ( ) = = 0 0
=
17. [Ans. A] So (0 ) = 2
Applying superposition theorem Laplace Equivalent circuit after the change
Resolving 0 sin t source 1/sc 2/s
+
(t) = sin ( 0t + tan ( ) 0)
√ ( )
Removing 20 sin 0t voltage source 1/s + I(s) R

H
F s 2 s s
(s) = =
R+
(s) =
Rsc +
= = c
+ + j (s) = = ce
+s
( ) Now voltage across Resister at t = 2s
= 0 sin( t) (t) = (t) R
+
( ) = ce R
= 0 sin( t) = Rc e
+ j
( ) = e ]
0
= sin t tan ( )]
√ +2 2. [Ans. A]
20
(t) = sin( 0t The circuit is shown in Fig.
√ 00 +
( 0 tan ( ))
0 + +
0
+ sin( t (t)
√ +2 R (t)
tan )
IN Fig.
1. [Ans. A] (t) = + cos( t)
Vi(t) Due to 5V d.c alone , C is open and no
current flows through R,
= 0 and =0
2
ue to cos ( t) alone, with
1
0 t
THE GATE ACADEMY tPVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
th th th

SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
R j R iL (t) andv (t) cannot change

H( ) = = =
R+ +j R instantaneously.
i (0 ) = (0 ) = (0 ) = 0
For R=2
R 2 v (0 ) = v (0 ) = 0
H( ) = = At t =0 , the state of the circuit is shown
√ + R √
in Fig. 4
H( ) = 0 tan (2)
K 1
I(0 ) I2(0 ) = 0
v (t) = cos t+ 0 tan(2)]
√
I1(0 )
According to Superposition Theorem 5V L i (0 ) = 0
2
v (t) = v (t) + v (t) 5V
v (t) = P + Q cos( t ) C 0 10 V
6 = v (0 )
P = 0, Q = , = 0 + tan (2)
√ Fig. 4
( ) = (0 ) = A
3. [Ans. A]
For t < 0, the circuit is shown in Fig. 1
4. [Ans. B]
1
I=0 I2 From Fig. 3: Write the Outer loop
I1 equation:
1H d (t)
2 (t) ]+ + 0=
dt
At t = 0
1F 10 V d
(0 ) = (0 ) = +
dt
Fig. 1(for t <0)
= /sec
After a long time, at t = 0 L behaves as
short circuit and C behaves as open
5. [Ans. B]
circuit. The relevant circuit is shown in
The given circuit is shown in Fig. 1
Fig.2.
1
t steady state i e , as t → , capacitor
I=0 I2(0 )
behaves as open circuit. The circuit at
I1(0 ) IL(0 ) steady state is shown in Fig.2
2 L 2k 0 F
V1 V2
R1
(0 ) C 10 V
1k R2
9V 20 F
Fig. 2(at t = 0 )
At t = 0 , I1(0 )=0, iL(0 )= I2(0 )=0 and
v (0 ) = 0 Fig. 1
For t > 0, the switch, K is closed and the 2k C1
V1 V2
relevant circuit is shown in Fig. 3
R1
K 1 I2
I
1k
I1 9V C2
1H
2
5V Fig. 2
1 10 V
Apply voltage division across R1 = 2k
F and R2 = 1k
Fig. 3(t >0)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Node voltage, V1= 7. [Ans. C]
= = ( )
j
V1 is divided between C1 = 0 F and 0
C2 = 20 F 0 0
Apply, again voltage division across C1
+ +
and C2 0
0
= = = j
+ 0
6. [Ans. D]
From the given circuit, =0
For t < 0, the status of the circuit is
=
shown in Fig. 1 inductor behaves as short
j = ( )
circuit after a long time.
=
i(0 ) = =
10
8. [Ans. ]
i
tt=0
10 V ± 1H
Fig. 1 + (inductor
0 in steady
for t 0, the status of the circuit is shown state)
in Fig. 2 6
Current through the inductor cannot
change instantaneously. 6
i(0 ) = i(0 ) = initial value (I.V) T = = = (0 )
2
After a long time inductor behaves as At t= 0
short circuit.
i( ) = 2 = final value (F. V) 2
Time constant = = , = 20 + +
0
10
i 6
10
4A 10 1H
= 0 = 0 ]
Fig. 2
9. [Ans. 32]
( )
i(t) = + (F )( e ) Load impedance = = (4 j2)
for t 0 Ideal current source
= + (2 )( e ) i(t) = 4 sin ( t + 20 )
=2 e Average real power = i
=( ) 4
√
6
Power = 4= 2
2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. *]Range 1.5 to 1.6 11. [Ans. C]

at t = 0 , switch is open so Time constant of RC Circuit is = R
(0 ) = In case I
at (t = )so capacitor is in steady state Time constant T = R
2k In case II
Time constant (T ) = R
Given T = k T
2k ( ) So R =k R
R =k R ]
12. [Ans. *] Range 186 to 188

( ) = 2k =2
4k
We know that 4
(t) = (0 ) v ( )]e + ( )
= 0 2 ]e +2
60
= (2k ) 4 0 Hz
2k 0 Hz
H
0 j
= k 4 = 0 4 0
=4 0 s 0 Hz
000
= =2 0
4 This is a tank circuit configuration of a
(t) = 2 e +2 Parallel R-L-C circuit.
(t) = 2 2 e Resonant frequency of tank circuit
we know that
f = √
dv (t)
i (t) =
dt =4 f =
d ( )
i (t) = c 2 2 e ]
dt = ( )
= 2 c( 2 0)e
=4 F +( )
=
i (t) = +2 4 0 2 0e R=4 , =
i (t) = 2 0 e f= 0H
i (t) = m ] + =
=
2 0
= F
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis
ECE - 2007 ECE - 2008

1. The RC circuit shown in the figure is 4. The Thevenin equivalent impedance ZTh
R C between the nodes P and Q in the
+
following circuit is
+ 1 1
R C
1 1
1
(A) a low-pass filter 1
(B) a high-pass filter

(C) a band-pass filter
(D) a band-reject filter (A) 1 (C) 2 + s +
(B) 1 + s+
(D)
2. An independent voltage source in series
with an independence ZS =RS + jXS
delivers a maximum average power to a ECE - 2009
load impedance ZL when 5. An AC source of RMS voltage 20V with
(A) j (C) j internal impedance Zs (1 2j) Ω feeds a
(B) (D) j load of impedance ZL (7 4j) Ω in the
figure below. The reactive power
3. In the AC network shown in the figure, consumed by the load is
the phasor voltage VAB (in Volts) is (1 2j)Ω
A
2 ∠ (7 4j)Ω
5 5
5∠3
j3 j3
(A) 8VAR (C) 28 VAR
(B) 16 VAR (D) 32 VAR
ECE - 2010
B
6. The current I in the circuit shown is
(A) 0 (C) 12.5∠3 2 m
(B) 5∠3 (D) 17∠3
~ 2 ∠
1 rad s
1 5
(A) –j1 A (C) 0 A

(B) j1 A (D) 20 A
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. For the parallel RLC circuit, which one of ECE - 2014

the following statements is NOT correct? 11. A 230 V rms source supplies power to
(A) The bandwidth of the circuit two loads connected in parallel. The first
decreases if R is increased load draws 10 kW at 0.8 leading power
(B) The bandwidth of the circuit remains factor and the second one draws 10 kVA
same if L is increased at 0.8 lagging power factor. The complex
(C) At resonance, input impedance is a power delivered by the source is
real quantity (A) (18 j 1.5) k
(D) At resonance, the magnitude of input (B) (18 j 1.5) k
impedance attains its minimum (C) (2 j 1.5) k
value (D) (2 j 1.5) k
ECE/EE - 2013 12. A periodic variable x is shown in the

8. A source v (t) cos 1 t has an figure as a function of time. The root-
internal impedance of (4 + j3) . If a mean-square (rms) value of x is ______.
purely resistive load connected to this x
source has to extract the maximum power 1
out of the source , its value in  should be

(A) 3 (C) 5
t
(B) 4 (D) 7
T 2 T 2
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
9. In the circuit shown below, if the source 13. The circuit shown in the figure, the value
of capacitor C (in mF) needed to have
voltage Vs= 10053.130 V then the
critically damped response i(t) is ________.
Thevenin’s equivalent voltage in volts as
4 4
seen by the load resistance RL is
3 j4 j6 5
 i(t)
RL= 10
j4 1
(A) 100900 (C) 800900 14. In the magnetically coupled circuit shown
(B) 80000 (D) 100600 in the figure, 56 % of the total flux
emanating from one coil links the other
10. Two magnetically uncoupled inductive coil. The value of the mutual inductance
coils have Q factors q1 and q2 at the (in H) is ______ .
chosen operating frequency. Their 1
respective resistances are R1 and R2.
When connected in series, their effective 6 cos (1⁄16)
Q factor at the same operating frequency (4t 3 ) ~ 4 5
is
(A) q q
(B) (1⁄q ) (1 q ) 15. The steady state output of the circuit
(C) (q q ) ⁄( ) shown in the figure is given by
(D) (q q ) ⁄( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
y(t) = A( )sin( t ( )). If the V1 at a frequency which causes resonance

amplitude | ( )| 0.25, then the with a current of I.
frequency is I
y(t)
sin t
~
1 1 The phasor diagram which is applicable
( ) ( )
√3 to this circuit is
2 2
( ) ( ) (A)
√3 I
EE - 2006
1. In the figure the current source is 1 ∠0 A,
R = 1Ω, the impedances are Zc = j Ω, (B)
I
and ZL = 2jΩ. The Thevenin equivalent
looking into the circuit across X-Y is
x
(C)
(A) √2∠0 V, (1 + 2j) Ω I

(B) 2 ∠450 V, (1 – 2j) Ω
(C) 2 ∠450 V, (1 + j) Ω
(D) √2∠450 V, (1 + j) Ω
(D)
2. An energy meter connected to an
immersion heater (resistive) operating on
an AC 230 V, 50 Hz, AC single phase I
source reads 2.3 units (kWh) in 1 hour.

The heater is removed from the supply
and now connected to a 400 V peak to
peak square wave source of 150 Hz. The
power in kW dissipated by the heater will
be EE - 2007
(A) 3.478 (C) 1.540 4. In the figure transformer T1 has two
(B) 1.739 (D) 0.870 secondaries, all three windings having the
same number of turns and with polarities
3. The circuit shown in the figure is as indicated. One secondary is shorted by
energized by a sinusoidal voltage source a 1 Ω resistor , and the other by a 15m
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
capacitor. The switch SW is opened (t =0)

A R
when the capacitor is charged to 5 V with
left plate as positive At (t =0+) the
voltage VP and Current IR are
IR
~ L
SW T1 R
B C
+
25V C (A)
Vp +
(A) 25 V, 0.0A Im
(B) Very large voltage, very large
current Re
(C) 5.0 V, 0.5 A
(D) 5.0 V, 0.5 A
(B)
5. In the figure given below all phasors are

with reference to the potential at point Im
“O”. The locus of voltage phasor YX as R is
varied from zero to infinity is shown by
Re
∠ ~ R
(C)
XY C
∠ ~ Im
O
2V 2V
(A) 0 (C) 0 VYX
VYX Re
Locus of VYX Locus of VYX (D)

Im
Locus of VYX
(B) (D) Locus of VYX
VYX VYX
0 2V 0 2V
Re
6. The R-L-C series circuit shown is supplied
from a variable frequency voltage source. EE - 2008
The admittance locus of the 7. The Thevenin's equivalent of a circuit
network at terminals AB for increasing operating at = 5rad/s, has
frequency is = 3.71∠ 15.90 V and
ZO =2.38 – j 0.667Ω. At this frequency,
the minimal realization of the Thevenin's
impedance will have a
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) resistor and a capacitor and an EE - 2011

inductor 10. The r.m.s value of the current i(t) in the
(B) resistor and a capacitor circuit shown below is
(C) resistor and an inductor 1 1
(D) capacitor and an inductor
1
8. The resonant frequency for the given i(t) 1

circuit will be ~
0.1H (1. sin t)
(A) (C) 1
(D) √2
(B)
1 1 √
Common Data Q. 11 and Q. 12

The input voltage given to a converter is
(A) 1 rad /s (C) 3 rad /s v 1 √2 sin(1 t)
(B) 2 rad /s (D) 4 rad /s The input drawn by the converter is
i (1 √2 sin (1 t )
EE - 2010 3
9. If the electrical circuit of figure (b) is an 5√2 sin(3 t )
4
equivalent of the coupled tank system of
2√2 sin(5 t 6)
figure (a), then
11. The input power of the converter is
(A) 0.31 (C) 0.5
(B) 0.44 (D) 0.71
12. The active power drawn by the convert is

h (A) 181 W (C) 707 W
h
(B) 500 W (D) 887 W
(a) oupled tank EE - 2012

13. A two–phase load draws the following
B D
phase currents:
i (t) sin( t ),
A C
i (t) cos( t ).
These currents are balanced if 1 is equal
to
(b) Electrical equivalent
(A) (C) ( 2 )
(A) A, B are resistances and C, D (B) (D) ( 2 )
capacitances
(B) A, C are resistances and B, D 14. The average power delivered to an
capacitances impedance (4 j3)  by a current
(C) A, B are capacitances and C, D 5 cos (100t+100) A is
resistances (A) 44.2 W (C) 62.5 W
(D) A, C are capacitances and B, D (B) 50 W (D) 125 W
resistances
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2014 16. A non-ideal voltage source has an

15. A combination of 1 µF capacitor with an internal impedance of . If a purely
initial voltage ( ) 2 in series with resistive load is to be chosen that
a 100 resistor is connected to a 20 mA maximizes the power transferred to the
ideal dc current source by operating both load, its value must be
switches at t = 0s as shown. Which of the (A) 0
following graphs shown in the options (B) real part of
approximates the voltage across the (C) magnitude of
current source over the next few seconds? (D) complex conjugate of
17. A series RLC circuit is observed at two

t
frequencies. At = 1 krad/s, we note
t that source voltage 1 ∠ results
in a current . 3∠31 A. At
= 2krad/s, the source voltage
( )
1 ∠ results in a current
2∠ A. The closest values for R,L,C
out of the following options are
(A) 5 25 m 1
(B) 5 1 m 25
t (C) 5 5 m 5
(D) 5 5m 5
2
( ) IN - 2006
1. Consider the AC bridge shown below. If
ΔC V
RC = 1 and <0.01, then ratio 0 is
C Vs
t approximately equal to
2 R
( )
R C
2
~
( ) (A) √1 (C)
(D)
(B)
IN - 2007
t
2. In the circuit shown in the following
2 figure, the current through the 1Ω
resistor is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) j
L=1H j
C = 0.25F
V = 1V
1Ω
I = (5cos2t)A
j
(C) j ( )
j ( )
(A) (1 + 5 cos 2t) A (C) (1 5 cos 2t) A j
(B) (5 + cos 2t) A (D) 6A
(D) j ( )
j ( )
3. Consider the AC bridge shown in the
j ( )
figure below, with R, L and C having
positive finite values
IN - 2008
Then
5. In the circuit below the average power
consumed by the 1 resistor is
sin t 1 √2 sin (1 t) 1Ω
1 √2 cos (3 t) 1 mH
(A) if
(B) if (A) 50 W (C) 5000 W
(B) 1050 W (D) 10100 W
(C) if
√
(D) cannot be made zero 6. For the circuit shown below the voltage
across the capacitor is
4. Consider the coupled circuit shown
below. 1 Ω
j1 Ω
~ (10+j0)V
j1 Ω
ig a
At angular frequency , this circuit can be
represented by the equivalent (A) (10 + j 0)V (C) (0 + j100)V
T – network shown below. (B) (100+j0)V (D) (0 – j100)V
7. For the circuit shown below the steady-
state current I is
I
cos(1000t)V
1Ω
ig b
Indicate the correct set of expressions for
V(t)= 5√2
1mH 1000 F
the impedances of the T – network
(A) j ( )
j ( )
j
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) 0A
(B) 5√2 cos (1000t)A
(C) 5√2 cos (1 t )
(D) 5√2A
IN - 2010
Statement for Linked Answer Questions: 8
&9
A coil having an inductance (L) of 10mH
and resistance R is connected in series
with an ideal 100 F capacitor (C). When
excited by a voltage source of value
10√2 cos (1000t)V, the series RLC circuit
draws 20W of power.
8. The value of the coil resistance R is

(A) 1 (C) 4
(B) 2 (D) 5
9. The Q factor of the coil at an angular

frequency of 1000rad/s is
(A) 1 (C) 4
(B) 2 (D) 5
IN - 2011
Common Data for Question 10 & 11
Consider the circuit shown below:
2
2 sin(5t)
.1 cos(5t)
i(t)
10. The current i(t) through the capacitor is

(A) sin (5t) A (C) sin (5t – 45) A
(B) cos (5t) A (D) 1 A
11. The average total power delivered by the

sources is
(A) 0 W (C) 2 W
(B) 0.5 W (D) 4 W
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 6. [Ans. A]
1. [Ans. C] j
( ) ( || 1⁄ )
( ) ( 1⁄ ( || 1⁄ )) 2 ∠
( )
1 ~ 1
j
1
( ) ( 3 1)
( )
ut J , ( ) ( ) (L = 20 mH, C = 50 )
(J ) Nodal analysis at node A
s , (J ) 2
s , (J ) j 1 1 j
1⁄ J 1⁄ * 1 j1 5 1 +
t , (J )3
3J 2
Filter is band-pass filter.
j1 2 1
j j
2. [Ans. D] [ 1 ] j1
2 2
For maximum power transfer, j1
J
1
3. [Ans. D] j1
current impedance
53 ((5 3J)||(5 3J)) 7. [Ans. D]
34 This is standard concept of parallel
5 3 173
1 resonant circuit
4. [Ans. A] 8. [Ans. C]
Replace 10V by short circuit and 1A by | | √4 3 5Ω
open circuit
( 1). (1 1⁄ ) 9. [Ans. C]
1
2 1⁄ 1
j4
5. [Ans. B] 3 j4
1
∠53 13
The RMS current in the load is given by j4
5∠53 13
⃗ ∠ tan ( ) j4 2 ∠
2∠ tan ( ) 4∠ 2 ∠
8 9
2 , reactive power
8 9
4 4
16
10. [Ans. C]
Also note that the active power consumed
by the load 4 7 28
fter series connection
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) 1
2
1 1
√
2
11. [Ans. B] 1 4 1
√
Total ower (s) 4 2
1 1 4
∠ cos .8 ∠ cos .8 4
.8 .8 c
18 1.5j 4 1
c 1 m
4 1
12. [Ans. *] Range 0.39 to 0.42
x 14. [Ans. *] Range 2.49 to 2.52
(T⁄2 , 1)
1 oupling coefficient given is .56
e know, √
√
t
iven 4 5
T 2 T 2
.56 √4 5
1 2.5 4
√ ∫ x dt
T
15. [Ans. B]
Equation of line
x
1
(t )
T ⁄2
y(t)
2t
T sin t
1 2t
√ *∫ ( ) dt +
T T
1 4t y(t) ( ) sin[ t ( )]
√ * +
T 3T | ( )| .25
By nodal analysis
4 1 x 1∠ x x
√
3 8 1 cj ⁄
2 cj
1 1 cj 1∠
x[ cj ]
√6 2
.4 8 2 3 cj 1∠ 2
x[ ] x
2 2 3 cj
13. [Ans. *] Range 9.99 to 10.01 x 1
y
4 4 2 2 3 cj
1 1
| ( )|
i(t)
4 √4 9
9 12
2
For critically damped √3 c
1 1 2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE V
1. [Ans. D]
To calculate Thevenin’s impedance, 200
current – source is open – circuited V
x
R=1 2 T/2
ZL=2j Zth 1 1
T
f 15
ZC= j
y Vrms value of the input voltage
z z z
1
1 2j j * ∫ dt+
T
= 1 j
Open – circuit voltage at terminals X – Y
z 1
1 (1 j) ∫2 dt ∫( 2 ) dt
T
√245 volts [ { }]
2
2. [Ans. B] 2
1 k
Assuming resistance of the heater = R 23
(i) When heater connected to 230 V. 1.739 k
50 Hz source, energy consumed by
the heater = 2.3 units or 2.3 kWh in 3. [Ans. A]
1 hour
Power consumed by the heater
2.3k h
1 hour
2.3 k
rms value of the input voltage
23 j( )
At resonance,
23 so
2.3 1 23 Therefore, input impedance is purely
(ii) When heater connected to 400 V resistive, is minimum and the input
(peak to peak ) square wave source voltage and output current are in phase
of 150 Hz [ j( )]
( )
but
Therefore, is in phase with
Voltage across the capacitor
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1 5. [Ans. A]
j
l
∠ 9 ∠
R
So, lags the current by 9 . The phasor

diagram on the basis of above analysis
x y
∠ C
Let capacitive reactance

∠ ∠
4. [Ans. D]
R IR using ,.
T1
s1
Vs
s2 ( )
P1
( )
25V VP C
P2 ( )
T1
( )
VT
T2 Method -1
* +
All the three windings has same number
of turns, so magnitude of induced emf’s in when
all the three windings will be same i.e. * +
| | | | | |
Polarity of the windings is decided on the * +
basis of dot – convention.
when
As capacitor is charged to 5 V with left
plate as positive.
Method-2
So, T1 is positive wrt T2
5 * +
As T2 has negative polarity. So, P1 has √ ∠ ( )
negative polarity ∠18 ( )
√ ∠ ( )
Therefore, VP = 5
Similarly, S1 has negative polarity ∠ (18 2 tan ( ))
So, 5
Magnitude of
5
.5 So, option (c) and (d) can not be correct,
1 as magnitude is 2V in these two options.
Angle of 1 8 2 tan ( )
When
∠ 18 2tan ( )
18 2 9 36
when
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
∠ 18 2 tan ( ) 18
On the basic of above analysis, the locus
of is drawn below:
2V
O Ref
when ∠ when
R=0
√
6. [Ans. B] 7. [Ans. B]
Admittance of the series connected RLC Thevenin’s mpedance
2.38 j .667 
( ) as real part is not zero , so has resistor
( ) m[ ] j .667
( ) Case –I
*By rationlization} Z0 has capacitor (as Im[Z0]is negative )
Separating, real and imaginary part of Case – II
admittance. Z0 has both capacitor and inductor, but
inductive reactance  capacitive
e[ ]
( ) reactances
For any value of , the real part is always at = 5 rad / sec
positive. For minimal realization case – (i) is
When or considered
Therefore, Z0 will have a resistor and a
At (resonance) capacitor.
√
e[ ] (maximum value)
( )
8. [Ans. C]
( ) Input impedance
( )
1
( ) z j ‖
j
( )
z j
At (resonance) 1 j
√
0.1H
Imaginary part of zero
m( )
For
z 1F 1
Therefore Im [Y] > 0

For
z j .1
Therefore, [ ] j .1
On the basis of above analysis, the 1
admittance locus is j ( .1 )
1 1
At resonance, imaginary part must be
zero.
.1
1
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1 11. [Ans. B]
.1
1 rms value of input voltage
1 1 1 √2
9 1
√2
3 rad/sec rms value of current
9. [Ans. D] 1 √2 5√2 2√2

l √( ) ( ) ( )
In such system, volumetric flow rate C is √2 √2 √2
analogous to current and pressure is 11.358
analogous to voltage. Let input power factor cos
The hydraulic capacitance due to storage l cos =active power drawn by
in gravity field is defined as the converter
C= 1 11.358 cos 5
cos .44
Where A = Area of the tank
ρ ensity of the fluid
12. [Ans. B]
g = Acceleration due to gravity
The hydraulic capacitance is represented 1 √2 sin(1 t)
by A & C. i 1 √2 sin (1 t )
3
Liquid trying to flow out of a container,
can meet with resistance in several ways. 5√2 sin (3 ) t
4
If the outlet is a pipe, the friction between 2√2sin(5 t 4)
the liquid and the pipe walls produces Fundamental component of input voltage
resistance to flow. ( ) 1 √2 sin(1 t)
Such resistance is represented by B & D. 1 √2
( ) , 1
√2
10. [Ans. B]
Fundamental component of current
1 sint sin t
(i ) 1 √2 sin(1 t 3)
1 and 1 rad sec
Impedance of the branch containing 1 √2
(i ) , 1
inductor & capacitor √2
j( ) Phase difference between these two
1 components
j( )
1 , cos cos .5
1 3 3
j (1 1 ) Active power due to fundamental
1 1
So, this branch is short – circuit and the components
whole current flow through it ( ), (i ) , cos
1. sin t 1 1 .5 5
i(t) 1. sint Since, 3rd & 5th harmonics are absent in
1
rms values of the current input voltage, there is no active power due
1 to the these components.
√2 Hence, active power drawn by the converter
=Active power due to fundamental
components = 500 W
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. [Ans. D] 17. [Ans. B]

i sin( t )
i cos( t ) j( )
sin ( t ) t 1k rad s
2
As these two currents are balanced. 1 ∠ . 3∠31
i i 1 ∠
. 3∠31
j( )
sin sin 2. sin ( ) . cos ( )
2 2 1 ∠
) j (1 ) .
sin( t sin ( t ) 1 c . 3∠31
t 2k rad s
2 sin ( t ) ∠
2 4 j (2 1 ) 5 ∠
∠
1
cos ( ) 5
2 2 1
1 2 1
( ) 2 1 c
2 2 2 1
(2 1 ) 4 1 .
On solving equation and
14. [Ans. B] 5 , 1 m , 25
Z = 4 j3 = RL jXc; RL=4;
5cos(1 t 1 ) mcos(cot α) IN
P= 5 4 5 1. [Ans. D]
15. [Ans. C] ( )
tt ( )
( ) 1
d
dt 1
1
∫d ∫ dt
t ( )
k ( ) 1 1
At t = 0, 2
[ ]
k 2 1 1
t 1 1
2 1 1 1 1
t 1 1
2 2 2
2 1 1 1 1 1
t 2 1 2 1 2 2
1
2 1 t 1 1
1
2 2
1 1
16. [Ans. C]
2 2 ( )
Magnitude of
| | (using maximum power 1 1
transfer theorem) 2 2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2 2 i i (1 5 cos 2t)
2 (2 ) 3. [Ans. D]
. 1, The A.C bridge is shown in Fig
it can neglected in comparison to
2. [Ans. A]
The circuit is shown in the figure 1 Let , ,
1
j ,
of the vridge is balanced if product
(5 cos 2t)
of the impedances of opposite arms is

1 1
.25 same i.e.,
i
j
Fig. 1
or j
Superposition theorem can be used to
1 1 1
find i , , j√
Due to 1 V d.c source alone, the circuit is
shown in Fig. 2, where the current source With R, L and C having positive finite
is open circuited (I = 0). Also, in steady value, becomes imaginary which is not
state, L behave as short circuit and C possible.
behave as open circuit cannot be made zero
4. [Ans. A]
The coupled circuit is shown in Fig. 1
1 1
i
Fig. 2
From figure 2, i 1
Due to AC source (5 cos 2t) alone, the
circuit is shown in figure 3, where the ig 1
voltage source is short circuited (V = 0) Write the mesh equations:

1 j j (1)
j j (2)
(5 cos 2t)
The equivalent T network is shown in Fig .2

1
i .25
Fig. 3
For 2, 2 .25 .5,
2 1 2
As , the parallel RLC circuit is ig 2
under resonance Write the mesh equations:

i 5 cos 2t ( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
or ( ) . (3) For C = 1000

( ) 1 1 1 1
or ( ) . (4) l
omparig (1)with (3)and (2)with (4, )
j , j , l
j( )
j ( )
j , j ( )
The circuit is open for the excitation
5. [Ans. D] frequency 1 r s
steady state current,
Let v (t) 1 √2 in (1 t) and
It may also be noted that in steady state,
v (t) 1 √2 cos(7 t)
as t
( ) √
RMS value of v (t) 1 v(t) = 0 because of the exponential,
√ √
MSV of v (t) 1 1
Similarly M.S.V of v (t) 1
Let v(t) = v (t) v (t) 8. [Ans. D]
. . of v(t) 1 1 = 1000 1 = 10 circuit it under
1 1 1 resonance
1 ,1 1 1
1
Power is consumed or dissipated only in 1 1
1 . if it is , 2 ( ) 5Ω
. . of v(t)
1 ,1
9. [Ans. B]
6. [Ans. D] Q= √ √ 2
Circuit is under resonance
∠
I= 1∠ A 10. [Ans. A]
= 100JV The given circuit is shown in fig. 1
2
7. [Ans. A]
The circuit is shown in the figure
2 sin(5t)
( )
.1 i( )
cos(5t)
)
i(t)
cos(1
1 Fig. 1
Given: 5 rad sec
1m 1
5√2e
R=2 , .1 , 2
Taking cos (5t) = Re[1e e ]
v(t)
1 cos (5t) e[1 e e ]

For the given input, hasor, ⃗⃗⃗ 1e
v(t) 5 √2e cos(1 t) for (t) 2 sin(5t) 2 cos(5t 9 )
1 r s hasor, ⃗⃗⃗⃗ 2 e
Z=1+ The phasor equivalent circuit is shown in
For L = l mH fig – 2
1 1 1
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
⃗⃗⃗
9
j2
j2
⃗⃗⃗⃗ 2∠
Fig. 2
The circuit is further simplified to the
circuit in Fig. 3 and Fig. 4
j1 2 j2 1
⃗
Fig. 3
(1 j) 2 j2
⃗
Fig. 4
From Fig 4
(1 j)2 (1 j) √2∠45
⃗
2 j2 1 j √2∠ 45
1∠9 1∠ 9 j
i(t) ⃗
e[ e ] e[1e e ]
e[e ( )
] cos(5t 9 )
sin(5t)
11. [Ans. C]
Phasor current through 2 1 j
1 j j
1
i (t) 1 cos(5 t)
Power is dissipated in the resistance, 2 .
Assuming that the source values are given
in RMS value
Power delivered by the 2 sources
= Power dissipated in the equivalent 2
of Fig. 4
(1) 2 2
Note: Assuming Peak value for the
sources,
Power delivered by the 2 sources
=( ) 2 1
√
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Laplace Transform
ECE - 2006 ECE - 2009

1. The first and the last critical frequencies 4. If the transfer function of the following
(singularities) of a driving point network is =
impedance function of a passive network
R
having two kinds of elements, are a pole
+ +
and a zero respectively. The above
Vi RL V0
property will be satisfied by C _
(A) RL network only _
(B) RC network only
(C) LC network only The value of the load resistance RL is
(D) RC as well as RL networks (A) R/4 (C) R
(B) R/2 (D) 2R
2. A 2 mH inductor with some initial current
can be represented as shown below, ECE - 2011
where s is the Laplace Transform 5. The circuit shown below is driven by a
variable. The value of initial current is sinusoidal input . The
I(s) steady state output is
R C
0.002
C
R
1mV
+
(A) 0.5 A (C) 1.0 A (A) ⁄ ⁄

(B) 2.0A (D) 0.0A (B) ⁄ ⁄
(C) ⁄ ⁄
ECE - 2007 (D) ⁄ ⁄
3. Two series resonant filters are as shown
in the figure. Let the 3-dB bandwidth of ECE/EE/IN - 2013
Filter 1 be B1 and that of Filter 2 be B2.
6. The transfer function of the circuit
The Value of is
shown below is
C1 L1 00μF
+ +
Vi R Vo
10k
Filter 1 V1(s) V2(s)
00μF
+ +
Vi R Vo (A) (C)
(B) (D)
Filter 2
(A) 4 (C) ⁄
(B) 1 (D) ⁄
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE – 2014
1. The driving point impedance Z(s) for the
circuit shown below is
F F
(A) (C)
(B) (D)

ECE 5. [Ans. A]
1. [Ans. B] Redrawing the circuit s – domain
2. [Ans. A]
I(S)
+
~ ( ‖ )
LS
V(S)
( )
Li (0 )
+
……………
⁄
0 0 0 So here,
Now,
3. [Ans. D]
⁄ ⁄ ⁄
Put ,
4. [Ans. C]
( ⁄ ) So, * +
( ⁄ )
………………………
( ⁄ )
⁄
( ⁄ ) I(s) =
⁄
( ( ⁄ ))
⁄
( ⁄ ) Now , ( ‖ )
( ⁄ )
Satisfies above equation
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
In time domain,
( )
6. [Ans. D]
100 μF
0
100 μF
⁄
⁄
Substituting the values we get
EE
1. Ans. A]
F F
peda e f du a e ‘ ’d a
peda e f apa f F
( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Two-Port Networks
ECE - 2006 3. The z-parameter matrix for this network

1. In the two port network shown in the is
figure below, Z12 and Z21are, respectively (A) * + (C) * +
(B) * + (D) * +
r 4. The h-parameter matrix for this network

r
is
(A) * + (C) * +
(A) r n r (C) n r (B) * + (D) * +

(B) n r (D) r n r
5. The driving point impedance of the
2. A two-port network is represented by following network is given by
ABCD parameters given by Z(s) . The component values are
[ ] * +[ ]
If port-2 is terminated by RL, then input s R
L
impedance seen at port-1 is given by
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
(A) L H R Ω F
ECE - 2008 (B) L H R Ω F
Statement for linked Answer Questions 3 (C) L = 0.1H, R = 2Ω 0.1F
and 4 (D) L H R 2Ω F
A two port network shown below is
excited by external dc sources. The ECE - 2010
voltages and currents are measured with 6. For the two-port network shown below,
voltmeters and ammeters the short circuit admittance parameter
(All assumed to be ideal) as indicated. matrix is
Ω
Under following switch conditions, the 1 2
readings obtained are: Ω Ω Ω
(i) –open , - closed 2
2
(ii) –closed , – open (A) * +S (C) * +S
2
2
(B) * +S (D) * +S
2
2
wo port ECE - 2011

n twork 7. In the circuit shown below, the network N
is described by the following Y matrix:
2 * +.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
The voltage gain is s s s s s

s
2
s s s s s
s
N s s s s s
s
s s s s s
s
(A) 1/90 (C) 1/99
(B) 1/90 (D) 1/11 11. In the h-parameter model of the 2-port
network given in the figure shown, the
ECE/EE/IN - 2012 value of h (in S) is ______ .
Common Data for questions 8 and 9
With 10 V dc connected at port A in the
linear nonreciprocal two-port network
2
shown below, the following were
observed:
(i) 1 connected at port B draws a 2
2 2 2
current of 3 A
(ii) 2.5 connected at port B draws a
current of 2 A
12. Consider the building block called
‘N twork N’ shown in th figur
L t F n R k
N twork N
8. With 10 V dc connected at port A, the

current drawn by 7Ω connected at port B
R
is
(A) 3/7 A (C) 1 A
(B) 5/7 A (D) 9/7 A
Two such blocks are connected in
9. For the same network, with 6 V dc cascade, as shown in the figure.
connected at port A, 1Ω connected at port
B draws 7/3 A. If 8 V dc is connected to
port A, the open circuit voltage at port B s N twork N N twork N s
is
(A) 6 V (C) 8 V
(B) 7 V (D) 9 V
h tr nsf r fun tion of the cascaded
ECE - 2014
network is
10. A two-port network
has scattering
s s (A) (C) ( )
parameters given by [ ] *s s + If
(B) (D)
the port-2 of the two- port is short
circuited, the s parameter for the
resultant one-port network is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. For the two-port network shown in the I1 k k

figure, the impedance (Z) matrix (in ) is
2 k 49i1
Input loop
F
F
2
(A) 2 F (C) 2 F
2
(A) * + (C) * + (B) F (D) Fs
2 2
2
(B) * + (D) * + EE - 2010
2
4. The two-port network P shown in the
EE - 2006 figure has ports 1 and 2, denoted by
1. The parameters of the circuit shown in terminals (a, b) and (c, d), respectively. It
the figure are R MΩ R = 10 Ω, has an impedance matrix Z with
A = V/V.If = 1 V, then output parameters denoted by . A 1Ω resistor
voltage, input impedance and output is connected in series with the network at
impedance respectively are port 1 as shown in the figure. The
R R impedance matrix of the modified two-
+ port network (shown as a dashed box) is
+
_ e a c
_
P
(A) 1V, , 10 Ω (C) 1 V, 0,
(B) 1 V,0, 10Ω (D) 10 V, ,10Ω f b d
2. The parameter type and the matrix

representation of the relevant two port (A) [ ]
parameters that describe the circuit
(B) [ ]
shown are
(C) [ ]
(D) [ ]
IN - 2007
(A) z parameters,* + 1. The DC voltage gain in the following
(B) h parameters,* + circuit is given by.
R R
(C) h parameters,* +
(D) z parameters,* + R
EE - 2009
3. The equivalent capacitance of the input (A) AV (C) AV +R
loop of the circuit shown is (B) AV (D) AV
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2008 IN - 2013
2. For the circuit shown below the input 3. Considering the transformer to be ideal,
resistance R11 = | is th tr nsmission p r m t r ‘ ’ of th
2 port network shown in the figure
3I2
+ below is
1 2 2 2
Ω 2V3 2Ω 1:2
+ I1 I2
+I I2 + V1 5 5 V2
1
V1 2Ω V3 V2 2
(A) 1.3 (C) 0.5
(B) 1.4 (D) 2.0
(A) Ω (C) Ω
(B) 2 Ω (D) Ω
ECE 3. [Ans. C]
1. [Ans. B] =
=
| current source will be
s (1) =0 |
open)
|
| = r
s (2) =0 |
| = 1.5
2. [Ans .D]
The ABCD parameter equations are given =* +
by,
4. [Ans. A]
wh n th n twork is t rmin l R fig =h h
R =h h
From giv n p r m t rs
2
R R
R R = 1.5 = 3
H=* +
RL
Fig. 1
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. D]
R L
R L ⁄ Note: is Independent of
(R L R ⁄ L⁄ )
R L⁄ 8. [Ans. C]
As per the given conditions, we can draw
R L R L⁄
the following two figures.
RL
R L L R
3A
⁄ N
B
(
⁄R ⁄L ) A ± 10
2 V
2
s 2
Comparing (1) and (2)
⁄ 2 F
⁄R R 2
2A
⁄L 2 L H B
A ± 10V N 2.5
6. [Ans. A]
|
|
Let Vth and Rth be the Thevenin voltage &
| 2 resistance as seen from part B.
[ ] 2
* + R
2
7. [Ans. D]
iv n * +
2
2 R
From the circuit shown in Fig. 1 2
2
N Vth = 3Rth + 3 (1)

&
Vth = 2Rth + 5 (2)
Solving (1) & (2)
Fig
Rth 2
So, Vth = 3 x 2 + 3 = 9V
From eqn (2) Now,
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2 N
i= N
9. [Ans. B] The y parameter of the parallel network is

equal to the sum of the individual
R 2 network y parameter
For network A
So, Vth = 7/3 x 2 +

= = 7V.
The open circuit voltage at port B is 7V.
2
10. [Ans. B]
ort p r m t rs ort 2 Lo
2
For network B
s
s s 2
Port 2 is short circuited
h n ws 2 2
From
s s
[ s ] s
s s
From 2
s s
s 2
[ s ]
s s
s s
[ s
s s s s s
s
s
11. [Ans. *] Range 1.24 to 1.26

In the figure two port networks in parallel
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE
h 1. [Ans. A]
= 1V
2 =
2
= R = 10
12. [Ans. B]
s s 2. [Ans. C]
h h
h h
R R I1 I2
s s
s s
V1 V2
Apply mesh analysis to determine the

current s Since port – 1 is open – circuit , I1=0
Port – 2 is short – circuit, V2 =0
(R ) s R s s
s
h |
(2R ) s R s
s
s (2R ) s [from ] h |
om ining n
h |
[(R ) (2R ) R] s s
s R s
*(2R ) (R ) R + s R s h |
R s h h
s s R o h – p r m t rs [ ] * +
(2R ) (R ) R h h
s R s
3. [Ans. A]
s 2Rs Rs R s
Assume a 1A current source at input
R s
terminals,
sr s R = 1A
R k
s }R i k k
F
s s i
k
s s s
~ F
F
13. [Ans. C] i
[ ] Applying KVL
i i j
* +
i [2 j ]
* + Input impedance 2 j
2
As imaginary part is negative, input
impedance has equivalent capacitive
reactance .
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2 2 2
h r 2 put it in qu tion
2
2 F
o[ | ]
4. [Ans. C]
The impedance matrix of the modified 3. [Ans. A]
network is calculated from fig. given 2 2 2
1 I1 2
below:
[ ] [ ][ ] V1 5 5 V2
2 n 2
[ ] [ ][ ] |
[ ] [ ] * + t
2
1 2
From qu tion
2
2
From qu tion
Fig.
2 2
IN From qu tion n
1. [Ans. A]
V=
2. [Ans. D]
2 3I2
+
Ω 2V3 2Ω I2
d c
+ I1 b + + +
2
V3
V1 2Ω
f e
Apply KVL on abcdef
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Network Topology
ECE - 2008 Which of the following statements is true?

1. In the following graph, the number of (A) The equations v1 v2+v3 = 0,
trees (P) and the number of cut-sets (Q) v3 +v4 –v5 =0 are KVL equations for
are the network for some loops
(1) (B) The equations v1-v3-v6 = 0,
v4 +v5 –v6 =0 are KVL equations for
the network for some loops
(2) (3) (C) E = AV
(D) AV = 0 are KVL equations for the
(4) network
(A) P = 2, Q = 2 (C) P = 4, Q = 6
(B) P = 2, Q = 6 (D) P = 4, Q = 10 EE - 2008
2. The number of chords in the graph of the
EE - 2007 given circuit will be
1. The matrix A given below is the node
incidence matrix of a network. The
columns correspond to branches of the
network while the rows correspond to
nodes. Let V = [v1 v2… v6]T denote the ±
vector of branch voltages.
While I = [i1 i2… i6]T that of branch
currents. The vector E=[e1 e2 e3 e4]T
denotes the vector of node voltages (A) 3 (C) 5
relative to a common ground. (B) 4 (D) 6
[ ]
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE The graph of the network is shown in fig.

1. [Ans. C] Where
Different trees (P) are shown below. From the graph it can be observed that
(i)
are not KVL equations as set of
Different cut sets (Q are shown below branches (1, 2, 3) and (3, 4, 5) do not
form closed paths.
(1)
(ii) and
are KVL equations for the loops
(1, 3, 6) and (4,5, 6)
(2)
From the matrix, A it can be
concluded that
(5) (i) E ≠
(6) (4)
(3) (ii) AV = 0 are not KVL equations
Statement in option (b) is true.
So P = 4, Q = 6
2. [Ans. A]
EE The graph of the given circuit is shown in
1. [Ans. B] Fig.
For the given node – to – branch Number of nodes = N = 4
incidence matrix Number of branches = B = 6
Number of tree branches = (N – 1) = 3
[ ] Number of links = L = B – (N – 1) = 3
2 5
I II III
Fig.
4 6
3
Fig.
IV
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK Signals and Systems
Introduction to Signals & Systems
ECE - 2006 ECE /EE/IN- 2013

1. The Dirac delta function t is defined as 5. Two systems with impulse responses
t (t) and (t) are connected in cascade.
(A) t ,
t rw s Then the overall impulse response of the
t
(B) t , cascaded system is given by
t rw s
t (A) Product of h1(t) and h2(t)
(C) t ,
t rw s (B) Sum of h1(t) and h2(t)
(C) Convolution of h1(t) and h2(t)
∫ t t (D) Subtraction of h2(t) from h1(t)
t
(D) t , ECE - 2014
t rw s
6. A discrete-time signal
∫ t t x[n] s π t r s
(A) Periodic with period π
(B) Periodic with period π
ECE - 2007 (C) Periodic with period π/
2. The 3-dB bandwidth of the low-pass (D) t p r c
signal u t , where u(t) is the unit step
function, is given by 7. A system is described by the following
(A) z (C) differential equation, where u(t) is the
(D) z input to the system and y(t) is the output
(B) √√ z
of the system. ẏ t y t u t
When y (0) = 1 and u(t) is a unit step
ECE - 2009 function, y(t) is
3. A function is given by f(t) = sin2t +cos2t . (A) (C)
Which of the following is true? (B) (D)
(A) f has frequency components at 0 and
/ π z 8. The sequence x[n] = u[n] , where
(B) f has frequency components at 0 and u[n] is the unit step sequence, is
/π z convolved with itself to obtain y[n]. Then
(C) f s fr qu cy c mp ts t / π ∑ y is___________
/π z
(D) f has frequency components at 0, EE - 2006
/ π /π z 1. Which of the following is true:
(A) A finite signal is always bounded
ECE - 2011 (B) A bounded signal always possesses
4. If the unit step response of a network is finite energy
, then its unit impulse response (C) A bounded signal is always zero
is outside the interval [ t , t ] for
(A) (C) some t
(B) (D) (D) A bounded signal is always finite
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2007 EE - 2014
2. If u(t), r(t) denote unit the unit step and 5. The function shown in the figure can be
unit ramp functions respectively and represented as
u(t) * r(t) their convolution, then the
function u (t+1) * r(t 2) is given by
(A) (1/2) (t 1) (t+2)
(B) (1/2) (t 1) (t 2)
(C) (1/2) (t 1)2 u(t 1)
(D) none of the above
t
EE - 2008
3. Given a sequence x[n], to generate the
(A) u t u t u t
sequence y[n] = x[3 4n], which one of
the following procedures would be u t
correct?. (B) u t u t u t
(A) First delay x[n] by 3 samples to
generate z [n], then pick every 4th (C) u t u t u t
sample of z1[n] to generate z2[n], and u t
then finally time reverse z2[n] to
obtain y[n] (D) u t u t u t
(B) First advance x[n] by 3 samples to
generate Z1[n], and then pick every
4th samples of z1[n] to generate z2 [n] 6. An input signal x t s πt is
and then finally time reverse Z2[n] to sampled with a sampling frequency of
obtain y[n] 400 Hz and applied to the system whose
(C) First pick every fourth sample of x[n] transfer function is represented by
to generate v time-reverse z z
( )
v to obtain v & finally z
advance v by 3 sample to obtain Where, N represents the number of
y[n] samples per cycle. The output y(n) of the
(D) First pick every fourth sample of x[n] system under steady state is
to generate V1[n], time-reverse V1[n] (A) 0 (C) 2
to obtain V2[n], and finally delay (B) 1 (D) 5
V2[n] by 3 samples to obtain Y[n]
7. For the signal
EE - 2011 f t s πt s πt s πt
4. A zero mean random signal is uniformly the minimum sampling frequency (in Hz)
distributed between limits satisfying the Nyquist criterion is ________
and its mean square value is equal to its
variance. Then the r. m. s. value of the IN - 2007
signal is 1. Consider the periodic signal
(A) (C) √ x t c s πt c s πt
√
(D) √ where t is in seconds. Its fundamental
(B)
√ frequency, in Hz, is
(A) 20 (C) 100
(B) 40 (D) 200
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2008 7. The integral

2. The fundamental period of the discrete- π
( ) ∫ (t ) s t t v u t t
time signal x[n] = is
(A) ⁄ π (C) 6 (A) 6 (C) 1.5
(B) ⁄ (D) 12 (B) 3 (D) 0
3. The step response of a linear time IN - 2011

invariant system is y t u t , 8. Consider a system with input x(t) and
where u(t) is the unit step function. If the output y(t) related as follows
output of system corresponding to an
y(t) = { x t }
impulse input t is h(t), then h(t) is
(A) u t Which one of the following statements is
(B) t TRUE?
(C) u t u t (A) The system is nonlinear
(D) t u t (B) The system is time-invariant
(C) The system is stable
IN - 2009 (D) The system has memory
4. The fundamental period of
x(t) = 2sin2πt +3sin3πt , with t 9. The continuous-time signal x(t) = s t
expressed in seconds, is is a periodic signal. However, for its
(A) 1s (C) 2s discrete-time counterpart x[n] = s
(B) 0.67s (D) 3s to be periodic, the necessary condition is
(A) ≤ π
5. For input x(t), an ideal impulse sampling (B) to be an integer
system produces the output
(C) to be a ratio of integers
y t ∑ x t (D) none
Where t is the dirac delta function. EC/IN - 2013

The system is 10. If the A-matrix of the state space model of
(A) Non-linear and time invariant a SISO linear time invariant system is
(B) Non-linear and time varying rank deficient, the transfer function of the
(C) Linear and time invariant system must have
(D) Linear and time varying (A) A pole with a positive real part
(B) A pole with a negative real part
IN - 2010 (C) A pole with a positive imaginary part
6. The input x(t) and the corresponding (D) A pole at the origin
output y(t) of a system are related by .
y(t) = ∫ x . The system is 11. The impulse response of a continuous
(A) time invariant and causal time system is given by
(B) time invariant and non-causal h(t) = t t . The value of
(C) time variant and non-causal the step response at t = 2 is
(D) time variant and causal (A) 0 (C) 2
(B) 1 (D) 3
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2014 (A) t s t y
12. Time domain expressions for the (B) t s t y
voltage t t r v s (C) t s t y
t s t (D) t s t y
t = c s t Which one of
the following statement is TRUE?
ECE s π s π
1. [Ans. D] Every trigonometric function repeats
after π t rv
t s π π s π π
π π ) (
π
t S c ‘ ’ s y teger, there is no
p ss v u f‘ ’f rw c ‘ ’c
2. [Ans. A] an integer, thus non-periodic
f u t 7. [Ans. A]
s
ẏ t y t u t , P = 5, Q = u t ,
m tu t fr qu cy
√ I.F. =
s y t ∫
√ √ w
w r
y
f
π y t
3. [Ans. B] 8. [Ans. *] Range 3.9 to 4.1

f t c s t c s t We know, if y x t
Frequency components are ∑ y ∑ x ∑

f
Here x u
f z
π π π
∑ x ∑
4. [Ans. A]
t y t s ∑ y
t
5. [Ans. C ] EE
Cascade means convolution 1. [Ans. D]
If the amplitude of a signal have some
6. [Ans. D] finite boundaries for all values of time
Assume x to be periodic, (with period then it is called as bounded signal.
N)
x x
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
|f t | i.e, z z x
}f r t
r |f t | f tt v v u Now reverse (time reverse) z will
So a bounded signal may possess finite give y[n] = z x
energy or infinite energy.
For example u (t) is bounded signal but it 4. [Ans. A]
possess infinite energy because it is a
Variance
power signal.
It can be zero or nonzero outside a finite
interval ( t t
But it is always true that it will be always
finite for any value of time t.
Mean square value
2. [Ans. C]
RMS value
u t r t √
∫r u t 5. [Ans. A]
Result graph r p r p
r p
z t ∫ r r p
u u t
z t ∫
r p
For (t ≥
t
u t
z t ( )
r p
f r t≥
t t
z t t t t t
u t
For t≥
z t t
For t≥
6. [Ans. C]
z t t u t
x t s πt
t πft πt f
3. [Ans. B]
m p r fx t
Y[n] = x[3 – 4n] = x[ 4n+ 3]
So to obtain y[n] we first advance x[n] by ms
3 unit. s mp p r
i.e, z x
Now we will take every fourth sample of ms
z um r f s mp s c cyc
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Now, fundamental period of x(t) is the

LCM of T1, T2 and T3 , which is s
x z So, fundamental frequency = 20 Hz
s mp p r
r st y st t 2. [Ans. D]
my m z y z m z x z x
z Fundamental period
m z
z
zs πt 3. [Ans. D]
[ ] Step response s(t) u t
z z zc s πt
z Impulse response h(t)
m*
z { }
t
zs πt
z + u t u t / t
z zc s πt
z z u t t t
m* + m
z z 4. [Ans. C]
(Using L Hospital rule) x t S πt S πt
P r f S πt s
7. [Ans. 14] P r f S πt s ⁄
r qu cy f s πt z
P r of final original is LCM of
r qu cy f s πt z
= LMC /
r qu cy f s πt z
= 2 sec.
By Nyquist theorem, sampling frequency
f z 5. [Ans. D]
x mum fr qu cy f z Given signal is
IN y t ∑ x t
1. [Ans. A]
X(t) = (1+0.5 cos πt c s πt This is the representation of a signal x(t)
c s πt c s πt c s πt in weighted and sum form and it obeys
c s πt c s πt the principle of superposition and
c s πt homogeneity. So, this is linear but it is
x t x t x t time varying as for x(t t ),
w r y t ∑x t t
x c s πt And y t t ∑x t t
x c s πt Therefore
x c s πt y t t y t s t m v ry
Now, tm p r fx t 6. [Ans. C]
π
s
π x t y t ∫ x
s
Value of y t ‘t’ depends on values of x for
s times from t t
As output is depending on future values
of input, the system is Non casual
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
For the input x t x t t As y(t) depends only on x(t), the system

has no memory.
y t ∫ x
9. [Ans. C]
If x(n) is periodic with period N, then the
y t ∫ x t t condition to be satisfied is x(n) = x(n+N).
If x(n) = s then the necessary
From (1), condition is
y(t-t ∫ x s s
Or N= m π m 1, 2,
Let t
From (3), Or r t f t rs
y t ∫ x Or should be expressible as π ( )
As (4) & (5) are not same, the system is
Time variant. 10. [Ans. D]
syst m s m v r t
11. [Ans. B]
causal.
7. [Ans. B] Y(s) (step response)

Given signal is
u t u t
π
x t ∫ (t ) s t t u t u t
By shifting property of unit impulse

function
x t t t t
∫x t t t t {
s w r u t u t
π π
∫ (t ) s t t s
At t = 2 value is 1
Hence, correct option is (B) 12. [Ans. A]
8. [Ans. C] t t
Given the system, y(t) = { x t }
y t x t x t
t
[
x t x t ]
t
As y(t) is obtained from linear operation v t s t
on x(t), the system is linear . t c s t
As the input x(t) is multiplied by a time t c s t
varying function , the system is t c s t
Time – varying.
For a bounded input x(t) , x(t) is
bounded, y(t) is also bounded. Therefore t s t y
the system is stable.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Linear Time Invariant (LTI) systems
ECE - 2006 5. Let x(t) be the input and y(t) be the

1. A system with input x and output y is output of a continuous time system.
given as y (s π )x . The Match the system properties P1, P2 and P3
with system relations R1, R2, R3, R4.
system is
Properties Relations
(A) linear, stable and invertible
P1: Linear but NOT : y(t) = t x (t)
(B) non-linear, stable and non-invertible
time-invariant
(C) linear, stable and non-invertible
(D) linear, unstable and invertible P2: Time-invariant : y(t) = t |x (t)|
but NOT linear
ECE - 2008 P3: Linear and : y(t) = |x (t)|
2. A discrete time linear shift-invariant time-invariant
system has an impulse response h[n] with :y t x t
, and zero 5)
otherwise. The system is given an input (A) (P1, R1), (P2, R3), (P3, R4)
sequence x[n] with x[0] = x[2] =1, and (B) (P1, R2), (P2, R3), (P3, R4)
zero otherwise. The number of nonzero (C) (P1, R3), (P2, R1), (P3, R2)
samples in the output sequence y[n] and (D) (P1, R1), (P2, R2), (P3, R3)
the value of y[2] are, respectively
(A) 5, 2 (C) 6, 1 ECE - 2009
(B) 6, 2 (D) 5, 3 6. Consider a system whose input x and
output y are related by the equation :
3. The impulse response h(t) of a linear y t ∫ x t
time-invariant continuous time system is
described by H(t)
h(t) = exp( t)u(t) + exp( t)u( t), where

u(t) denotes the unit step function, and 0 (t)
and are real constants. This system is

stable if Where h(t) is shown in the graph.
(A) is positive and is positive Which of the following four properties are
(B) is negative and is negative possessed by the system?
(C) is positive and is negative BIBO: Bounded input gives a bounded
(D) is negative and is positive output
Causal: The system is casual
4. The input and output of a continuous time LP : The system is low pass
system are respectively denoted by x(t) LTI : The system is linear and time-
and y(t). Which of the following invariant
description corresponds to a causal (A) Casual ,LP
system? (B) BIBO ,LTI
(A) y(t) = x(t 2) + x (t + 4) (C) BIBO, Casual, LTI
(B) y(t) = (t 4) x (t + 1) (D) LP , LTI
(C) y(t) = (t + 4) x (t 1)
(D) y(t) = (t + 5) x (t + 5)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2010 ECE - 2013

7. Two discrete time systems with impulse 12. The DFT of a vector c is the vector
responses and . Consider the product
are connected in c
cascade. The overall impulse response of c
pqrs c [ ].
the cascaded system is c
c
(A)
The DFT of the vector p q r s is a scaled
(B)
version of
(C)
(A)
(D)
(B) [√ √ √ √ ]
(C)
ECE - 2011
(D)
8. A system is defined by its impulse
response u . The system
is ECE - 2014
(A) Stable and causal 13. The value of the integral
(B) Causal but not stable ∫ s c t t is ________.
(C) Stable but not causal
(D) Unstable and noncausal 14. A continuous, linear time-invariant filter
has an impulse response h(t) described
9. An input x t xp t u t t f r ≤t≤
by t ,
is applied to an LTI system with impulse t rw s
When a constant input of value 5 is
response t u t The output is
applied to this filter, the steady state
(A) xp t u t u t
output is_____.
(B) xp t u t u t
(C) xp t u t u t
15. Consider a discrete-time signal
(D) xp t u t u t
f r ≤ ≤
x ,
t rw s
ECE /EE/IN- 2012 If y[n] is the convolution of x[n] with
10. The input x(t) and output y(t) of a system itself, the value of y[4] is _________.
are related as y(t) = ∫ x c s
The system is 16. The input-output relationship of a causal
(A) time-invariant and stable stable LTI system is given as
(B) stable and not time-invariant y y x
(C) time-invariant and not stable If the impulse response of this
(D) not time-invariant and not stable system satisfies the condition
∑ , the relationship between
11. Let y[n] denote the convolution of h[n] and is
and g[n], where h[n]= (1/2)n u[n] and (A) / (C)
g[n] is causal sequence. If y[0]=1 and (B) / (D)
y[1]=1/2, then g[1] equals
(A) 0 (C) 1 17. Let h(t) denote the impulse response of a
(B) 1/2 (D) 3/2 causal system with transfer function .
Consider the following three statements.
S1: The system is stable.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
S2: is independent of t for t > 0. y [ 0 ] = 3, y[ 2 ] = 2 is the output of a

discrete – time LTI system. The system
S3: A non-causal system with the same
impulse response h [ n ] will be
transfer function is stable.
(A) h [ n ] = 0; n < 0, n > 2, h[ 0 ] = 1,
For the above system,
h[1]=h[2]= 1
(A) only S1 and S2 are true
(B) h [ n ] = 0; n < 1, n > 1, h[ 1 ] = 1,
(B) only S2 and S3 are true
h[0]=h[1]=2
(C) only S1 and S3 are true
(C) h [ n ] = 0; n < 0, n > 3, h[ 0 ] = 1,
(D) S1, S2 and S3 are true
h [ 1 ] =2, h [ 2 ] = 1
(D) h [ n ] = 0; n < 2, n > 1,
18. A real-valued signal x(t) limited to the
h[ 2 ] = h [ 1 ] =h [ 1]
frequency band |f| ≤ is passed through = h[0]=3
a linear time invariant system whose
frequency response is EE - 2007
|f| ≤ 3. X(z) = 1 z , Y(z)= 1+ z are
f { Z – transforms of two signals x[n], y[n]
|f| respectively. A linear time invariant
system has the impulse response h[n]
The output of the system is
defined by these two signals as
(A) x t (C) x t
h[n] = x[n 1] y[n] where denotes
(B) x t (D) x t
discrete time convolution. Then the
output of the syst m f r t put -1]
19. A stable linear time invariant (LTI)
(A) Has Z-transform X(z) Y(z)
system has a transfer function
(B) qu s 2] 4]
H(s) . To make this system causal
5]
it needs to be cascaded with another LTI (C) s tr sf rm z
system having a transfer function s . z z
A correct choice for s among the (D) Does not satisfy any of the above
following options is three.
(A) s (C) s
(B) s (D) s EE - 2008
4. A signal sin ( t) is the input to a
EE - 2006 Linear Time Invariant system. Given K
1. A continuous – time system is described and are constants, the output of the
by y(t) = | | , where y(t) is the output system will be of the form sin
and x(t) is the input. y(t) is bounded (vt ) where
(A) only when x(t) is bounded (A) t qu t ; but equal
(B) only when x(t) is non – negative to
(C) only for t ≤ 0 if x(t) is bounded for (B) v need not be equal to ut qu
t≥0 to
(D) even when x(t) is not bounded (C) qu t and equal to
(D) t qual to and need
2. x[n] = 0; n < 1, n > 0, x [ 1] = 1, not be equal to
x[ 0 ] = 2 is the input and
y[ n ] = 0;
n < 1, n > 2, y [ 1 ] = 1 = y [1],
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. The impulse response of a causal linear (C) y[n] = 0;|n|>3

time-invariant system is given as h(t). (D) Re[Y[z] = Re[Y[z]
Now consider the following two Im[Y[z] = Im[Y[z] ;
statements π≤ θ π
Statement (i): Principle of superposition
holds 9. A cascade of 3 Linear Time Invariant
Statement (ii) : h(t) = 0 for t < 0 systems is causal and unstable. From this,
Which one of the following statements is we conclude that
correct? (A) Each system in the cascade is
(A) Statement (i) is correct and individually causal and unstable
Statement (ii) is wrong (B) At least one system is unstable and at
(B) Statement (ii) is correct and least one system is causal
Statement (i) is wrong (C) At least one system is causal and all
(C) Both Statement (i) and Statement (ii) systems are unstable
are wrong (D) The majority are unstable and the
(D) Both Statement (i) and Statement (ii) majority are causal
are correct
EE - 2010
6. A system with input x(t) and output y(t) 10. Given the finite length input x[n] and the
is defined by the input-output relation, corresponding finite length output y[n] of
y (t) = ∫ The system will be an LTI system as shown below, the
(A) causal, time-invariant and unstable impulse response h[n] of the system is
(B) causal, time-invariant and stable
h[n]
(C) non – causal, time-invariant and y[n] = {1, 0, 0, 0, 1}
x[n] = {1, 1}
unstable
(D) non - causal, time-variant and
{ }
unstable (A)
{ }
EE - 2009 (B)
7. A Linear Time Invariant system with { }
(C)
an impulse response h(t) produces
output y(t) when input x(t) is applied. { }
(D)
When the input x (t s pp t
system with impulse response h( ),
11. The system represented by the input-
the output will be
output relationship
(A) y(t) (C) y(t
(B) y(2(t (D) y(t y t ∫ x t is
(A) Linear and causal
8. The z transform of a signal x[n] is given (B) Linear but not causal
by z + z + 2 – 6z2 + 2z3. It is (C) Causal but not linear
applied to a system, with a transfer (D) Neither linear nor causal
function H(z) = z 2. Let the output
be y[n]. Which of the following is true? EE - 2011
(A) y[n] is non causal with finite support 12. The response h(t) of a linear time
(B) y[n] is causal with infinite support v r t syst m t mpu s t
under initially relaxed condition is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
h(t) = . The response of this If the input to the system is cos(3t) and
system for a unit step input u(t) is the steady state output is A sin(3t + ),
(A) u(t) + then the value of A is
(B) u t (A) 1/30 (C) 3/4
(C) u t (B) 1/15 (D) 4/3
(D) t u t
13. Given two continuous time signals 17. Consider an LTI system with impulse
x(t) = and y(t) = which exist for response h(t) = u t . If the output of
t > 0 the convolution z(t) = x(t) * y(t) is the system is y t u t u t
(A) u t then the input, x(t), is given by
(B) u t (A) u t
(C) (B) u t
(D) (C) u t
(D) u t
EE - 2013
14. Which one of the following statement is 18. A 10 kHz even-symmetric square wave is
NOT TRUE for a continuous time causal passed through a bandpass filter with
and stable LTI system? centre frequency at 30 kHz and 3 dB
(A) All the poles of the system must lie on passband of 6 kHz. The filter output is
the left side of the j axis. (A) a highly attenuated square wave at 10
(B) Zeros of the system can lie anywhere kHz.
in the s-plane (B) nearly zero.
(C) All the poles must lie within |s| (C) a nearly perfect cosine wave at 30
(D) All the root of the characteristic kHz.
equation must be located on the left (D) a nearly perfect sine wave at 30 kHz.
side of the j axis.
19. A continuous-time LTI system with
EE - 2014 system function H( ) has the following
15. x(t) is nonzero only for t , and pole-zero plot. For this system, which of
similarly, y(t) is nonzero only for the alternatives is TRUE?
t . Let z(t) be convolution of x(t)
and y(t). Which one of the following
statements is TRUE?
(A) z(t) can be nonzero over an
unbounded interval.
(B) z(t) is nonzero for t
(C) z(t) is zero outside of
t
(D) z(t) is nonzero for t .
(A) | | | | | |
16. Consider an LTI system with transfer (B) | | s mu t p m x m t
function (C) | | | | | |
(D) | | c st t
s
s s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2007 3. Consider a discrete-time LTI system with

1. The signals x(t) and h(t) shown in the input x [n] = [n] + [n 1] and impulse
figures are convolved to yield y(t) . response h[n] = [n] – [n 1]. The
x(t) output of the system will be given by
1
1 (A) [n] – [n 2]
t
1 1 (B) [n] – [n 1]
h(t) (C) [n 1]+ [n 2]
1
(D) [n]+ [n 1]+ [n 2]
0 2 4 t
Which one of the following figures IN - 2009

presents the output y(t)? 4. A linear time-invariant casual system has
(A) frequency response given in polar form
y(t) as:
1 t
√
t For input x(t) = sint, the output is
1 3 5 7
1
1 (A) c st
√
(B) c s (t )
(B) √
y(t)
(C) s t
1 √
4
t (D) s (t )
2 6 √
1
IN - 2011
(C)
y(t) 5. Consider the signal
t≥
x(t) = {
1
t
Let X( ) denote the Fourier transform of
t
1 1 3 5 this signal. The integral
∫ is
(A) 0 (C) 1
(D) y t)
(B) ⁄ (D)
1
IN - 2013
3 5
1 2
t 6. The impulse response of a system is
h(t) = t u(t). for an input u(t 1), the
output is
(A) u t
IN - 2008 (B) u t
2. Which one of the following discrete-time
systems is time invariant? (C) u t
(A) y [n] = nx [n] (C) y[n] = x[ n] (D) u t
(B) y [n] = x [3n] (D) y [n] = x[n 3]
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2014
7. The impulse response of an LTI system is
given as :
π
{s
π
It represents an ideal
(A) non-causal, low-pass filter
(B) causal, low-pass filter
(C) non-causal, high-pass filter
(D) causal, high-pass filter
ECE 1 1
1. [Ans. C] x[k]
x → y [s ( π )] x
The system is linear as y(n) is
proportional to the input x(n) 0 2
Times varying as x(n) is multiplied not by 1 1
a constant but by a function of n. h[k]
Stable as bounded input, x(n) gives
bounded output , y(n) :
|s ( π )| ≤ and |y | ≤ |x | +1
0 2
Not invertible as several inputs: k (n) ,
where k is any arbitrary integer, give the
same output equal to zero. 1
The system is Linear, stable and
non – invertible
(It is also Time – varying).
2. [Ans. D]
y ∑ x
3. [Ans. D]
y
h(t) = u t u t
y
For the system to be stable ,
y
y
∫ t t
y
y For the above condition, h(t) should be as
y shown below.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
t
∑ s v syst m s t st
u t u t
9. [Ans. D]
t
s s
s s
Therefore y(s) = X(s).H(s)
Graph for s
s s s
s s s
taking inverse
w t
y t u t u t
4. [Ans. C] 10. [Ans. D]

A system is casual if the output at any
time depends only on values of the input x t y t ∫ x c s
at the present time and in the past.
check for time invariant
5. [Ans. A]
y t ∫x c s
6. [Ans. B]
y t t
f r y utput
y t ∫x t
h(t) ∫ x c s
For delayed input

t
It is not low pass filter. y t ∫x t c s

But the system is LTI and BIBO.
t P
p
7. [Ans. C]
where t
P t t
 H(z) = z z =
When

P
Also P t
8. [Ans. B]
u
y t ∫ x P c s P t p
For causal system h(n) = 0 for n < 0.
Hence given system is casual. s c y t y t t
For stability: It is not time invariant for a bounded
input, x (t) = cos (3t) u(t)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x
y t ∫c s {x x x } { c um v ct r }
x
{x x x } { c um v ct r }
∫ ∫ c s Designing the matrix using same
sequence
su u st
x x x
syst m s t stable.
x x
11. [Ans. A] x x x
[ x x x ]
( ) u
Now circular convolutions given by
x x x
c
c
g(1) [ ]
c
g(0)
c
Now circular convolution of c with
it self
c
y ∑ c
c c [ ]0 1
c c
1[- k] c
Taking transpose both side
1 c
1/2
c
0 1 0 1 c [ ]
c c c
1/4
c
k Let
0 1 0 1 P S
c c
y ∑
Take DFT both side
y
P S 0 1 0 1
c c
c c
y ∑
P S
y
h[1 – k] will be zero for k > 1 and g[k] will
13. [Ans. *] Range 0.19 to 0.21
be zero for k<0 as it is causal sequence. f
s c t r ct ( )
| |
g [1] = 0 ∫ s c t t
12. [Ans. A] f
∫ |r ct ( )| f P rs v st r m
Matrix method | |
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
f
tr ( ) z
z
r
f
r (∫ tr ( ) f)
∑ ∑s
f
∫ tr ( ) f
| |
17. [Ans. A]
t s t u t
s
14. [Ans. *] Range 44 to 46 S : Syst m s st
f r ≤t≤ c us t s ut y t r
t , t
t rw s
S : s p t ftm
t u t u t t t
s * + s p t ftm
s s s
y s s s S : A non-causal system with same
transfer function is stable
s u t (a non-causal system)
r st y st t utput m sy s
but this is not absolutely integrable thus
m unstable
s Only S and S are TRUE
c s t f rm f % s pp y ‘ ’
Hospital Rule? 18. [Ans. D]
m
x t t y t
y t x t t c v ut
15. [Ans. *] Range 9.9 to 10.1 f x f f
f r ≤ ≤ f f
x ,
t rw s y t x t
x z z z z z
Convolution in time domain is 19. [Ans. B]
multiplication z domain
z x z x z s
s s s s
f rf y ,we have to find For a stable causal LTI systems, all system
coefficient of z fy z poles should lie on LHP of s-plane.
S t s So to make H(s) causal, we need to cancel
out the pole at s = 2
16. [Ans. A] So, s s
y y x
y z y z z x z
y z
x z z
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE = output of the LTI system due to

1. [Ans. D] the input =
y(t) = | | , output due to the input
|x t | is always positive for positive as
well as negative values of x(t).
When x(t) is bounded, y (t) is bounded. Note that the following definitions and
Even when x(t) is not bounded properties are used:
i.e, x(t) = ± f r y t
z ∑ x z
Y(t) =
y t s u v w x t s t
bounded.
2. [Ans. A] If the input to an LTI system is shifted by

For finite duration convolution units, the output is also shifted by
x[n] have M terms units.
h[n] have N terms
then, y[n] should have terms (M+N 1) 4. [Ans. A]
Here, x[n] = { 1, 2} If the input x(t) = s t to a real Linear
Time Invariant system with frequency
y[n] = { 1, 3, 1, 2} response , then the output
y(t) = s t
So, h[n] should have only 3 terms and If the input is a damped sinusoid
h[n] have value starting from origin of need not equal to alpha but frequency
[n=0] only because y[n] have start from v
[n = 1]
s r pt 5. [Ans. D]
1 An LTI system is causal if the impulse
-1 response , h(t) =0 for t< 0
1
1
The principle of superposition holds for a
1 linear system.
1 t st t m ts r c rr ct
1
6. [Ans. D]
y[n] = { 1, 3, 1, 2}
so option (A) is correct . Given y(t) = ∫ x
y at time t is depending on values of x(t)
3. [Ans. B] in the range of t = 0 to ( 2t).
For (x) = 1 – 3z i.e., y for negative values of time is
x(n) depending on x at positive values of time.
delaying by 1 Hence System is non – causal
x For a bounded input like a step function
For Y(z) = z the output is not bounded , as the input is
y integrated.
x y
r put x t utput y t ∫x t t
For x t t
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
greater than zero even so atleast one of

utput ∫ x t t them must be causal. Similarly even if one
(alteast) of the system become unstable
then overall system will become unstable.
t ∫ x t t
10. [Ans. C]
Where t t t x[n] = {1,-1} , M=2
But y t t ∫ x t t
y[N] = { 1,0,0,0, - 1} . N1 =5
As equations (1) and (2) are not equal ,
System is Time – variant
Since output has no. of elements
Syst m s – causal , Time – variant ,
and unstable.
Where N is number of elements in
It may be noted that the system is Linear.
impulse response h[n]
7. [Ans. D] –1
Case 1: Y(s) = H(s). X(s) N=4
Case 2: input = x(t – s Let it be
Impulse response = h(t – s Then X(z)=
Output: Y(s) = X(s). . H(s) z z z z
= X(s). H(s). y z x z z
y(t 2 y z z
z z z
8. [Ans. A] So,
y[n] = x[n] *H[n] y
y[z]=x[z] H[z]
y[z] = z z z z comparing with
z y[n] = [1, 0, 0, 0, - 1]
z z z z z
z z
z z z z z
z
y f r
Therefore it is not causal with finite { }
support
9. [Ans. B] 11. [Ans. B]

Since in cascade overall impulse response Integrator is always a linear support
h(t) = h1(t)* h2(t)* h3(t) Since y(t) = ∫ x
h1(t), h2(t), h3(t) are impulse responses of For t = 1
individual systems.
Since initial point where h(t) is nonzero is y t ∫x
t ≥ 0 and since in convolution initial point
t t t Here value at t = 1 depends on future
Where t t t are initial points of v u s tt f put x t
t t t respectively. So it is a non-causal system.
So for it to be greater than zero atleast
one of them t t t must be +ve
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
12. [Ans. C] 15. [Ans. C]

For given LTI system with input t ,
x t
response h(t) = t
Note that u(t) = ∫ t t. For an LTI
system, if the input is integrated, the
output is also integrated.
r u t st p put u t t
y t
response, s(t) is given
s t ∫ t t
s t t
∫ t t
|
Thus z t is zero outside
t by property of
f r t convolution
s t u t
16. [Ans. B]
13. [Ans. A]
s
X(s) = s s s
s s s | |
√
t | |
√
Z(s) = taking partial fraction
z t u t 17. [Ans. B]
t u t
14. [Ans. C] s
Since it is a stable system all poles should s
lie in the left half of s-plane y s
|S| s ± This implies one pole lie s s
in RHS y s s s
x s
s s s
s
s
s
s
s
t u t
18. [Ans. C]
10 kHz even symmetric square wave have
frequency component present
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10kHz, 30kHz, 50kHz, 70kHz y(t)

[Only odd harmonics due to half wave h(t+1)
symmetry] 1
Since bandpass filter is centered at t
1 21 3 5
30kHz, 30kHz component will pass
1
through h(t 1)
filter output is nearly perfect cosine
Fig. 3
wave at 30 kHz
y(t)
Cosine in due to reason that signal in even
1
signal.
2
t
19. [Ans. D] -1
1 2 3 5
-1
Fig. 4
x(t) = 1 t t
y t t * t t * t
using the properties of convolution:
s t * t t
( )( )( ) t * t t
( )( )( )( ) y t t t
( )( ) The resultant of the triangles in Fig. 3 is
( )( )
shown in Fig. 4
su st tut s
w t| | c st t
2. [Ans. D]
y(n) =x(n 3) represents a time delay
IN
system with delay = 3 secs.
1. [Ans. D]
It is a Time invariant system as can be
y(t) = x(t) * h(t)
confirmed from the following Test.
x(t) and h(t) are shown in Fig. 1 and Fig.2
Test for time – invariance:
x(t)
If y1(n) = y(n-n0), then the system is time
1
invariant
1
1 rt v syst m x y x -3)
1
x y
Fig. 1 x x
From (1) y x
h(t)
1
y
0 4 t
2
3. [Ans. A]
z z z z
Fig. 2
z z z z
y
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. D]
x t T/F y t
Given,
Transfer function t
√
And input x(t) = sint
t
√ √
y t s t
√
5. [Ans. C]
Given x (t) = t≥
t
x t f
r pr p rty:
∫ f f ∫ x t |
π
6. [Ans. C]
t tu t ⁄p u t
s ⁄s s
s
y s s s
y t * + ut
7. [Ans. A]
For a system to be non-causal its impulse
response h(n) should depends upon
future value of n and if h(n) is
independent of the past value it never
means that system is non-causal
And it is the equation of LPF with cutoff
frequency
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Fourier Representation of Signals

ECE - 2006 ECE - 2012
1. t x t ) be Fourier Transform 6. The Fourier transform of a signal h(t) is
pair. The Fourier Transform of the signals H{j𝜔) = (2 cos𝜔) (sin 2 𝜔) /𝜔. The value
x(5t 3) in terms of X(j ) is given as of h(0) is
(C) X( ) (A) 1/4 (C) 1
(A) X( )
(B) 1/2 (D) 2
(B) X( ) (D) X( )
ECE- 2013
ECE - 2007 7. Let g(t) = and h(t) is a filter
2. A 5-point sequence x[n] is given as matched to g(t). If g(t) is applied as input
x[ 3]=1, x[ 2]=1, x[ 1]=0, x[0]=5, to h(t) , then the Fourier transform of the
x[1]=1. Let X( denote the discrete- output is
time Fourier transform of x[n]. The value (A) (C) ||
of ∫ ( ) s (B) ⁄ (D)
(A) 5 (C) 16π
(B) 10π (D) 5+j10π ECE- 2014
8. For a function g(t), it is given that
ECE - 2008
∫ t t for any real
3. The signal x(t) is described by
f r ≤t≤ value if
x(t) =, .
t rw s y(t) = ∫ t ∫ y t t s
Two of the angular frequencies at which (A) 0 (C) ⁄
its Fourier transform becomes zero are (B) – (D) ⁄
(A) π π (C) 0, π
(B) π π (D) π π 9. Consider a discrete time periodic signal
ECE - 2009 x[n] = s ( ) Let be the complex
4. The Fourier series of a real periodic Fourier series coefficients of x[n]. The
function has only coefficients { } are non-zero when
P. cosine terms if it is even k = Bm ± 1, where m is any integer. The
Q. sine terms if it is even value of B is ______.
R. cosine terms if it odd
S. sine terms if it is odd 10. A Fourier transform pair is given by
Which of the above statement are
( ) u ⇔
correct? ( )
(A) P and S (C) Q and S
Where u[n] denotes the unit step
(B) P and R (D) Q and R
sequence. The values of A is _______.
ECE - 2011
5. The trigonometric Fourier series of an EE- 2006
even function does not have the 1. x(t) is a real valued function of a real
(A) dc term variable with period T. Its trigonometric
(B) cosine terms Fourier Series expansion contains no
(C) sine terms terms of frequency = 2π (2k) / T;
(D) odd harmonic terms
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
k = 1, s s t rms r EE- 2008

present. Then x(t) satisfies the equation 4. Let x(t) = rect(t )
(A) x(t) = x (t T) (where rect (x) = 1) for x and
(B) x(t) = x (T t) = x ( t)
(C) x(t) = x (T t) = x (t – T / 2) zero otherwise). Then if sinc(x) = ,
(D) x(t) = x (t T) = x(t – T / 2) the Fourier Transform of x(t) + x( t) will
be given by
EE- 2007 (A) sinc( ) (C) 2sinc( )cos( )
2. A single x(t) is given by
(B) 2sinc ( ) (D) sinc( )sin( )
t≤ /
x t 5. Let x (t) be a periodic signal with time
t≤ /
period T. Let y(t) = x(t t0) + x(t + t0)
{ x t for some t0. The Fourier Series
Which among the following gives the coefficients of y (t) are denoted by .
fundamental Fourier term of x(t)? If = 0 for all odd k, then t0 can be equal
(A) c s( ) (C) s ( ) to
(B) c s( ) (D) s ( ) (A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) ⁄ (D) 2T
3. The frequency spectrum of a signal is

EE- 2009
shown in the figure. If this signal is ideally
6. The Fourier Series coefficient, of a
sampled at intervals of 1 ms, then the
periodic signal x(t), expressed as
frequency spectrum of the sampled signal
⁄
will be x(t) = ∑ are given by
|U 𝜔 | = j1; = 0.5 + j0.2; = j2;
=0.5 – j0.2; = 2 + j1; and = 0; for
| |> 2.Which of the following is true?
(A) x(t) has finite energy because only
1 KHz finitely many coefficients are non-
(A) zero
|U |
(B) x(t) has zero average value because
it is periodic
(C) The imaginary part of x(t) is constant
(B) (D) The real part of x(t) is even
EE- 2010
(C)
7. x t is a positive rectangular pulse from
t t t with unit height as
shown in the figure. The value of
∫ | | { where is the Fourier
(D)
transform of x t } is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x(t) EE- 2014

11. For a periodic square wave, which one of
the following statements is TRUE?
1 (A) The Fourier series coefficients do not
exist.
(B) The Fourier series coefficients exist
but the reconstruction converges at
1 t no point.
(C) The Fourier series coefficients exist
(A) 2 (C) 4 and the reconstruction converges at
(B) π (D) π most points.
(D) The Fourier series coefficients exist
8. The second harmonic component of the and the reconstruction converges at
periodic waveform given in the figure has every point.
an amplitude of
12. Let f(t) be a continuous time signal and
+1 let F( ) be its Fourier Transform defined
by
0
T ∫ f t t
T/2 t
Define g(t) by
-1
t ∫ u u
(A) 0 (C) 2/π
(B) 1 What is the relationship between f(t) and
(D) √
g(t) ?
(A) g(t) would always be proportional to
9. The period of the signal
f(t).
x(t) = 8 s ( πt ) is (B) g(t) would be proportional to f(t) if
(A) 0.4πs (C) 1.25s f(t) is an even function.
(B) 0.8πs (D) 2.5s (C) g(t) would be proportional to f(t)
only if f(t) is a sinusoidal function.
EE- 2011 (D) g(t) would never be proportional to
10. The Fourier series expansion f(t).
f(t) = ∑ c s t s t of
the periodic signal shown below will 13. A discrete system is represented by the
contain the following nonzero terms difference equation
f(t)
[ ] * +[ ]
t It has initial conditions

0
. The pole locations
(A) and , of the system for a = 1, are
(B) and , (A) ± (C) ±
(C) and , (B) ± (D) ±
(D) and ,
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
14. A function f(t) is shown in the figure. 2. If the waveform, shown in the following
f t figure, corresponds to the second
derivative of a given function f(t), then
/
the Fourier transform of f(t) is
/ f t
/ t t
1
/
t
1 +1
The Fourier transform f f t is
2
(A) real and even function of .
(B) real and odd function of . (A) 1 + sin (C)
(C) imaginary and odd function of . (B) 1 + cos
(D)
(D) imaginary and even function of .
3. The Fourier series for a periodic signal is

15. A signal is represented by
v s x t c s πt c s πt
|t|
x t { cos πt fu m t fr qu cy
|t|
The Fourier transform of the convolved of the signal is
signal y t x t x t⁄ is (A) 0.2 Hz (C) 1.0 Hz
(B) 0.6 Hz (D) 1.4 Hz
s ( )s
4. The magnitude of fourier transform
s ( )
of a function x(t) is shown below in figure
s (a). The magnitude of fourier transform
of another function y(t) is shown
s below in figure(b). The phases of
and are zero for all . The
magnitude frequency units are identical
16. A differentiable non constant even
in both the figures. The function y(t) can
function x(t) has a derivative y(t), and
be expressed in terms of x(t) as
their respective Fourier Transforms are
| | | |
X( ) and Y( ). Which of the following
statements is TRUE?
(A) X( ) and Y( ) are both real.
(B) X( ) is real and Y( ) is imaginary.
(C) X( ) and Y( ) are both imaginary.
(D) X( ) is imaginary and Y( ) is real.
(A) x( ) (C) x t
IN- 2006
(B) x t (D) x( )
1. The Fourier transform of a function g(t) is
v s Then the function
IN- 2007
g(t) is given as, 5. Consider the discrete-time signal
(A) t xp( 3|t|) ≥
(B) c s t xp( 3t) x[n] =( ) u , where u =, .
(C) s t c s t Define the signal y[n] as y[n] = x[ n],
(D) s t xp( 3t)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN- 2011
∑ y qu s 9. Consider a periodic signal x(t) as shown
below
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
x(t)
(B) ⁄ (D) 3
1
6. Let the signal x(t) have the Fourier t

0 1 2 3 4 5 6
tr sf rm s rt s
y(t) = x t t where t is an
arbitrary delay. The magnitude of the It has a Fourier series representation
Fourier transform of y(t) is given by the
/
expression x t ∑
(A) | | | |
Which one of the following statements is
(B) | |
TRUE?
(C) .| |
(A) for k odd integer and T = 3
(D) | |.| |.
(B) , for k even integer and T = 3
(C) for k even integer and T = 6
IN- 2008
(D) , for k odd integer and T = 6
7. The fourier transform x(t) = u t
when u(t) is unit step function,
IN- 2014
(A) Exist for any real value of a
10. x(k)is the Discrete Fourier Transform of a
(B) Does not exist for any real value of a
6-point real sequence 𝑥(𝑛).
(C) Exists if any real value of a is strictly
If X(0)= 9 + j0, X(2)= 2 + j2, X(3)=
negative
3 – j0, X(5)= 1 – j1,x(0) is
(D) Exists if the real value of a is strictly
(A) 3 (C) 15
positive
(B) 9 (D) 18
IN- 2010
8. f(x), shown in the adjoining figure is
represented by
f x ∑{ c s x s x }
The value of is
f x
π π π π π x
(A) 0 (C) π
(B) π⁄ (D) π
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 6. [Ans. C]
1. [Ans. A] c s s
x t
s
x [ (t )] ( ) c s
Using scaling and shifting property. c s s c
s c * +
2. [Ans. B]
( ) s c s c
∫ f Now r ct ( ) ⃡ s c( )
t
s c( )⃡ r ct ( )
∫ ( )
t
ys c ⃡ r ct ( )
| | [ ]
π π π y t { t }
t { t t }
3. [Ans. A] t t
{r c ( ) r ct ( )}
∫x t t
1
∫ t | ½
-3 -1 +1 3
s
( )
7. [Ans. D]
The concept of matched filter assumes
that the input signal is of the same form
g(t) as the transmitted signal(except
difference in amplitude ). This requires
that the shape of the transmitted signal
± not change on reflection.
π π h(t) = g( t ⇔ f (f)
G f f f sr
4. [Ans. A ] g(t) = (fourier transform)
P & S are correct
y t
5. [Ans. C] g(t) h(t) g(t)

S xp s f v fu ct s ’t
have sine terms. y(t)= h(t) * g(t) [convolution]
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. B] x(t T) = x( t+T)

Given t but signal is periodic with period T.
therefore x(t T) = x(t)
S y t ∫ therefore x(t) = x(T t
Now since signal contains only odd
harmonics i.e no terms of frequency
π
S ∫ y t t y
i.e. no even harmonics. This means signal
contains half wave symmetry this implies
9. [Ans. *] Range 9.99 to 10.01
π that
x s * + x(t) = x(t /
/ / From (i) and (ii)
x(t) = x(T t)
P r fx = x(t T/2)
π π
S 2. [Ans. A]
So is non-zero for k = 1 and . The given signal x(t) is a periodic
Fourier co-efficient are periodic with N waveform with period T0 =2 T and
N= 10 satisfies half – wave symmetry:
So the value of k for which are x(t) = x (t ± ) x t± as shown
in Fig.1
Comparing ± m is any integer x(t)
We see m x
1
10. [Ans. *] Range 3.36 to 3.39
( ) u ( ) u ( ) 0
( ) u ↔ -1
Fig . 1
( ) u ↔ Fundamental frequency = π/
= π/
( ) u ( ) x t x (t ) shown in Fig. 2
possesses Even symmetry and also half
↔ ( ) wave symmetry.
Fundamental Fourier term of
s ( ) x t c st ( t)
Where M = peak to peak value of
EE x t
1. [Ans. C]
Since trigonometric fourier series has no
sine terms and has only cosine terms
therefore this will be an even signal i.e. it
will satisfy
x(t) =x( t)
or we can write
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x1(t) 4. [Ans. C]
1 x t r ct t ⁄
x t ≤t≤
t = 0 otherwise
0
1 x t ∫x t t
Fig. 2
As x(t)= x (t ⁄ ) ∫ t ( )
Fundamental component of
⁄ ⁄
π * +x ⁄
x t c s [ (t )]
π
π π w r x t ≤t≤
c s* t +
π 0, otherwise
3. [Ans. B] x t ∫x t t
Highest frequency of the input signal,
fh = 1kHz as shown in its spectrum of
( )
Fig. 1
| | r| f | ( )
M ⁄ ⁄ ⁄
[ ]
⁄ ⁄
⁄
0 1 * +
f(in kHz)
Fig. 1 s ⁄ ⁄
x t
⁄
Sampling interval , ms f z
x t x t
f f . Therefore Aliasing or overlap of
s ⁄ ⁄ ⁄
the adjacent spectra in the sampled [ ]
⁄
spectrum because f f .
s ⁄
The sampled spectrum , c s ⁄
⁄
U* f f ∑ f f
as shown in Fig. 2. s c( )c s( )
π
The resultant spectrum, U* is
c st t f r ‘f’ s s w w c 5. [Ans. B]
is the same figure given in option(b) y t x t t x t t
| |
Since y(t) is periodic with period T.
fs Therefore x t t x t t will also
M
be periodic with period T.
f
0
Fig. 3 is fourier series coefficient of signal
| | | f |
x(t) therefore
f
[ ]
f(in kHz) c s t
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 s c f r
Fig. 2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
i.e. t
∫[ ∫ ]x t t
w r ± ± ±
t π/
π
t π ∫[ ∫ { } ]x t t
π π
6. [Ans. C] π ∫x t x t t
I. A periodic signal x(t) has always
infinite energy
π ∫ |x t | t
∫ |x t | t
option (A) is not true. π ∫ t

II. The average value a0 of a periodic
signal need not be zero. π
Infact a0 = j2 as given in this
question ∫| | π
option (B) is not true.
III. The complex value of a0 indicates
8. [Ans. A]
that x(t) should be complex.
Let x(t) = xR(t) +jxI(t) f(t) is odd  no cosine terms and no dc.
Where xR(t) and xI(t) are the real and Also, by inspection, half wave symmetry
imaginary parts of x(t). no sine even harmonics  no second
harmonics amplitude = 0.
∫x t t ∫x t t
9. [Ans. D]
For a0 to be purely imaginary = 2j From the given signal x(t)
The first integral should be zero and π rad/sec
the second integral should not be π
s c
zero.
i.e. xR(t) should be either 0 or an odd
10. [Ans. D]
function.
Observe the given periodic f(t) shown in
option (D) is not true.
Fig. 1
And xI(t) should be a constant or an
f(t)
even function so that the integral is
not zero.
option (C) is true. A
7. [Ans. D]
t
0
∫| | ∫
Fig. 1
∫[ ∫ t t] (1) Its average value ,

∫ f t t
(2) It has even symmetry. i.e; f(t) = f(-t)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
s t rms r s t f t 14. [Ans. C]

(3) The function f1(t) = [f(t)-a0] has half Given function is odd
– wave symmetry or odd harmonic is imaginary and odd in
symmetry:
i.e., f t f ( ) 15. [Ans. A]
Even harmonics are absent
x t
From observations (2) and (3)
above,
bn f r v u s f‘ ’
an f r v v u s f‘ ’
s
an f r x s
s /
f1(t) x t / s ( )
/
t s
x( ) s
Convolution in time domain
t = multiplication of Fourier transforms
0
t
y t x t x( )
Fig. 2 y s ( ) s
s ( )s
11. [Ans. C]
Fourier series exists for periodic waves.
Since it is a square wave, convergence 16. [Ans. B]
occurs at most points x t v fu ct sr
y t (x t ) t f ur r tr sf rm
12. [Ans. B] t
y
Since F( ) is FT of f(t) hence
y m ry
∫ u u f t t
IN
f t ff t s v
1. [Ans. A]
t is proportional to f(t) if f(t) is even.
t
13. [Ans. A] Given ,
Poles of the system are the roots of the
equation |S |
r * + Use the F.T. pairs:
t
* + putt
u t
s
S * + * +
s If t replaced by ( t), is replaced by
s (
* +
s
|S | s s u t
P s ±
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
u t u t
So, y t t/
|| ||
5. [Ans. C]
||
In general, K Given x(n) = ( ) u
||
t t y x
2. [Ans. C] ∑ y ∑ ( ) u
From the given plot,
t t t
∑ ( )
Take F.T on both sides
Use the following pairs and properties: rst t rm
Let f(t) t mm r t
f t
t 6. [Ans. A]
t t {x t t }
{ x t t }
c s t
c s | | | || |
c s 7. [Ans. C]
The fourier transform of
3. [Ans. A] u t s s >0
f z; f z f z
f u t will exist
u m t fr qu cy f x t f0=0.2
If
Hz (HCF of are the frequency)
a<0
f f rm c f f
harmonic
8. [Ans. A]
The given function f(x) is periodic
4. [Ans. D]
function with period, T = π
| | F(x) is shown over one period from 0 to
| | π in Fig.
The d.c value of f(x) = ∫ f x x
r u rf x
We know that expansion in frequency As can be seen from Fig.

domain result in compression in time
domain and vice-versa.
Here compression is done in frequency
domain, So there will be expansion in
time domain by same amount.
So for x ( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
f(x)
1.5
1.0
x
0
-1.0
-1.5
Fig.
9. [Ans. B]
Clearly, period of the signal x(t) is 3.
So, T = 3
And ∫ x t t
∫x t t
so, ak=0 for k even integer.
10. [Ans. A]
Given 6 point DFT of x[n] with
y symm try pr p rt s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Z-Transform
ECE - 2006 ECE - 2009

1. If the region of convergence of 5. The ROC of Z-Transform of the discrete
x [n] +x [n] is 1/3 < |z|<2/3, then the time sequence ,
region of convergence of x [n] – x [n] x[n] = ( ) u ( ) u is
includes
(A) |z| (C) |z|
(A) < |z|< 3 (C) < |z|< 3
(B) |z| (D) |z|
(B) < |z|< 3 (D) < |z|<
ECE - 2010
ECE - 2007
6. Consider the z-transform
2. The z-transform x[z] of a sequence x[n] is
z z z ; |z| . The
given by x[z] = . It is given that the
inverse z-transform x[n] is
region of convergence of x[z] includes the (A) 5
unit circle. The value of x[0] is (B) 5
(A) 0.5 (C) 0.25 (C) 5 u u u
(B) 0 (D) 0.5 (D) 5 u u u
ECE - 2008 7. The transfer function of a discrete time LTI

Statement for linked question 3 and 4:
system is given by z
In the following network, the switch is
closed at t = and the sampling starts Consider the following statements:
from t = 0. The sampling frequency is 10Hz. S1: The system is stable and causal for ROC:
x z |z|
S
x S2: The system is stable but not causal for
S mp r z tr sf rm
f z ROC: |z|
S3: The system is neither stable nor causal
for ROC: |z|
3. The samples x [n] (n = 0, 1, 2, ...) are given Which one of the following statements is
by valid?
(A) 5 (1 – ) (C) 5 (1 – ) (A) Both S1 and S2 are true
(B) 5 (D) 5 (B) Both S2 and S3 are true
(C) Both S1 and S3 are true
4. The expression and the region of (D) S1, S2 and S3 are all true
convergence of the z-transform of the
sampled signal are ECE - 2011
8. Two systems z and z are connected
(A) , |z| < e-5
in cascade as shown below. The overall
(B) , | z | < e-0.05 output y(n) is the same as the input x(n)
(C) , | z | > e-0.05 with a one unit delay. The transfer function
- -
of the second system z is
(D) , |z| > e-5
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
=∑ z
( ) z
z | |
x y (C) y [ n ] y (z)=∑ z
(D) y [ n ] y (z)= z + z +1
(A) (C) EE - 2008

2. Given X (z) = with | |> a, the residue
(B) (D)
of X(z) z at z = a for n ≥ 0 will be
(A) an-1 (C) nan
ECE/EE/IN - 2012
(B) an (D) nan-1
9. If x ⁄ | | ⁄ u then the
region of convergence (ROC) of its Z-
3. H (z) is a transfer function of a real system.
transform in the Z-plane will be
(When a signal x[n] = (1 + j)n is the input to
(A) | | (C) | | such a system, the output is zero. Further,
(B) | | (D) | | the region of convergence (ROC) of
( z )H(z) is the entire Z-plane
ECE - 2014 (Except z = 0). It can then be inferred that H
10. tx ( ) u ( ) u . (z) can have a minimum of
(A) one pole and one zero
The region of convergence (ROC) of the z-
transform of x[n]
(B) one pole and two zero
(C) two poles and one zero
(A) s |z| (C) s |z|
(D) two poles and two zeros
(B) s |z| (D) Does not exist
EE - 2014
11. Let x[𝑛] = 𝑥 𝑛]. Let z be the 4. Let z be the Z-transform of a
-transform of [𝑛]. If 0.5+j0.25 is a zero of causal signal x[n]. Then, the values of x[2]
z which one of the following must also and x[3] are
be a zero of z (A) 0 and 0 (C) 1 and 0
(A) (B) 0 and 1 (D) 1 and 1
(B) /
(C) / IN - 2008
(D) 1. The region of convergence of the z-
transform of the discrete-time signal
12. The z-transform of the sequence x[n] is x[n] = 2nu[n] will be
given by z with the region of (A) | |>2 (C) | |>
convergence|z| . . Then, x [2] is_______. (B) | |< 2
(D) | |<
EE - 2007
IN - 2011
1. The discrete – time signal
2. Consider the difference equation
x[n] X (Z) = ∑ z ,
y[n] y x and suppose that
Where denotes a transform – pair
relationship, is orthogonal to the signal x[n] = ( ) u . Assuming the condition of
(A) y [ n ] y (z)=∑ ( ) z initial rest, th s ut f ry ≥ s
(B) y [ n ] y (z) (A) 3 ( ) ( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) ( ) ( ) (A) | |< (C) | |>
(C) ( ) ( ) (B) | |< (D) | |<
(D) ( ) ( ) 4. The transfer function of a digital system is

given by:
IN - 2014 ; where is real.
3. The system function of an LTI system is
The transfer function is BIBO stable if the
given by
value of is:
z
(A) 1.5 (C) 0.5
z (B) 0.75 (D) 1.5
The above system can have stable inverse if
the region of convergence of H(z)is defined
as
ECE r| z | r |z|
1. [Ans. D] z
z
ROC {x x } {x x }(if there z
are no pole-zero cancellation)
5. [Ans. A]
2. [Ans. B] Recall the z – transform pairs:
ROC is |z| For the Right sided sequence:
x 0.5 u x u |z| | |
For Left sided sequence:
3. [Ans. B] u |z| | |
z
s . / ( ) u |z|
s z
z
( ) |z|
s z
For x(n) containing both the above
s s
terms the ROC is the overlapping region:
t
Therefore samples |z|
⁄
6. [Ans. A]
For the given X(z) , note that the ROC is
4. [Ans. C] the entire z – plane except
z z
z ∑ z
Recall the z – transform pair:
Recall the time shifting property:
∑ z If g(n) G(z)
z z
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
z 8. [Ans. B]
For given X(z) , y x
x(n)=5 Taking z – transform of both sides
z z z
7. [Ans. C] z
z
z
Given : H(z)=
For cascaded system
Express H(z) in +ve powers of z and find z z z
the zeros and poles. z
z z
z( z) z (z ) z
z z z
(z z ) (z ) (z ) z
z
Poles are at z = ¼ and z = ½ lying inside
the unit circle in the z – plane. 9. [Ans. C]
| |
Consi r t t r p ss ’s: x ( ) ( ) u
(i)|z|
x x s y
For a casual system h(n) =0, n< 0 and
h(n) is a Right sided sequence and ROC is x ∑ x z
the region outside the circle passing
| |
through the right most pole z = ½
∑ x ( ) z
syst m s us
For stability of LTI system unit circle
should be inside the ROC ∑ x ( ) z
syst m s st S sv st t m t
(ii)|z|
∑ x ( ) z
H(n) is a Left sided sequence and the
system is not causal.
t s t c us : ∑ x ( z) ∑ ( z )
f r ≥
As unit circle is not inside the ROC , the , z ( z) -
system is unstable.
S s t – valid statement.
,( z ) ( z ) -
(iii) |z|
The ROC is the annular region between s
two circles bounded by the poles: | z| | z |
At z z
|z| |z| | |
H(n) is a two sided signal existing for
sw sf r ≥ Syst m s
x ( ) u
not causal. As unit circle is not inside the
ROC , the system is unstable. x
S s v st t m t
t S S r tru S s t tru
s| z |
r|z|
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
We draw the three ROC on the Z plane EE

So, 1. [Ans. B]
The over lapping region is given by Two discrete time signals x(n) and y (n)
are said to be orthogonal, if
|z|
∑ x y whose * denotes
complex conjugatio
10. [Ans. C]
Or
v x
∑ x y for real x(n) and
( ) u ( ) u y
For the given x(n) , X(z) = ∑ z
r( ) u |z|
z
ts s qu c
( ) x
xt r r f c rc fr us
From the option given , according to the
us v r |z| definition of Z.T:
| |
y ( ) u y
11. [Ans. B]
x x y
x z x z For z ∑ z
is a zero of x(z) z z z
y
s s z r fx z s
x z x z It can be seen that equation (2) is

satisfied only when y(n) = y
12. [Ans. *] Range 11.9 to 12.1
x z 2. [Ans. D]
z For the given X(z) = with |z|>a
( )
Let Y(z) = z z
taking Inverse z-transform using
Residue of Y(z)= z z |
Frequency domain multiplication
=time domain convolution z |
x u u z
u u z |
∑ Note that the Question asked is to find

x(n) given
X(z) = with |z|>a , for which the
∑
answer is known through the following
fundamental ZT pairs and properties.
∑ z
u |z|
z
x z z
u z ( )
S x z z z
|z|
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
z | z | |z|
u | |
( ) 2. [Ans. B]
z
|z| | | y y x
z
z z
u |z| | | z
z z z
3. [Ans. A] r put x ( ) u
(1 z z has ROC as entire Z-plane
z
which implies that it is polynomial. z |z|
(z )
z s p
z
z z z
4. [Ans. B] ( z ) (z )
z
z
z ( ) (z )
z z
z z
z 1
z ( ) (z )
z
z
z z ( ) (z )
z z z
z z z
z z
x z z z y * ( ) ( ) +u
x { }
x x
3. [Ans. C]
For a system to be stable, it should
IN
contain Z=1 circle in its ROC
1. [Ans. A]
Given, r ( )
x[n] = u
x z ∑ x z
4. [Ans. C]
∑ u z ∑ z Only this option gives poles inside unit
circle.
∑( )
z z
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Laplace Transform
ECE - 2006 Assuming zero initial conditions, the

1. Consider the function f(t) having Laplace response y(t) of the above system for the
transform F(s) = ; Re[s]>0. The final input
x t u t s v y
value of f(t) would be
(A) u t
(A) 0 (C) 1<f <1
(B) u t
(B) 1 (D)
(C) u t
(D) u t
ECE - 2007
2. If the Laplace transform of a signal y(t) is
ECE - 2011
Y(s)= ; then its final value is
6. If s f t then the initial
(A) 1 (C) 1
and final values of f t are respectively
(B) 0 (D) Unbounded
(A) 0, 2 (C) 0, 2/7
(B) 2, 0 (D) 2/7, 0
ECE - 2009
3. An LTI system having transfer function
ECE - 2013
and input x(t) = sin(t+1) is in 7. A system is described by the differential
steady state. The output is sampled at a equation y t x t .
rate rad/s to obtain the final output
Let x(t) be a rectangular pulse given by
{y(k)}. Which of the following is true ? t
(A) s z r f r s mp x t ,
t rw s
frequency Assuming that y (0) =0 and at
(B) s z r f r s mp
t =0, the Laplace transform of y(t) is
frequency
(C) s z r f r > 2 , but zero (A) (C)
for < 2 (B) (D)
(D) sz r f r > 2 , but nonzero
for < 2
EE – 2006
4. Given that F(s) is the one-sided Laplace 1. The running integrator, given by
transform of f(t), the Laplace transform of y t ∫x t
∫ f s
(A) has no finite singularities in its
(A) sF(s) – f(0) (C) ∫ double sided Laplace Transform Y(s)
(B) s (D) [F(s) – f(0)] (B) produces a bounded output for every
casual bounded input
ECE - 2010 (C) produces bounded output for every
5. A continuous time LTI system is anticasual bounded input
described by (D) has no finite zeros in its double sided
y t y t x t Laplace Transform Y (s)
y t x t
t t t
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2010 EE - 2012
Common Data for Questions 2 and 3 5. Consider the differential equation
Given f t and t as shown below: y t y t
y t t
f(t) t t
y
wt y t | |
t
1
um r c v u f |
t (A) 2 (C) 0
0 1 (B) 1 (D) 1
g(t)
IN - 2006
1 1. Given, x t x t t xp t u t
the function x(t) is
t (A) xp t u t
0 3 5
(B) xp t u t
2. t can be expressed as (C) t xp t u t
(A) t f t (D) xp t u t
(B) t f( )
IN - 2010
(C) t f( t )
2. u(t) represents the unit step function. The
(D) t f( ) Laplace transform of u(t- is
(A) (C)
3. The Laplace transform of t is
(B) (D)
(A)
(B) IN - 2013
(C) 3. The discrete-time transfer function
(D) is
(A) Non minimum phase and unstable.
EE - 2011 (B) Minimum phase and unstable.
4. Let the Laplace transform of a function (C) Minimum phase and stable.
f(t) which exists for t > 0 be s and the (D) Non-minimum phase and stable.
Laplace transform of its delayed version
f t be s . Let (s) be the complex IN - 2014
conjugate of s with the Laplace 4. The transfer function of a system is given
v r s t s s . If by
/
G(s) = , then the inverse Laplace s
| | s
transform of G(s) is The input to the system is ( )=sin100 t .
(A) mpu s t In periodic steady state the output of the
(B) y mpu s t– system s f u t y t s πt
(C) an ideal step function u(t) ). The phase angle ( ) in degree is
(D) an ideal delayed step function u(t– ___________.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE s s s
r
1. [Ans. C] s s s s s
s s} v t tx t u t
s
sF(s) has poles ± , which lie on the s
s
imaginary axis. s
s
v u t r mc t pp s s s
For the given F(s) , f(t) = s t u t
≤f ≤ s s
Hence the final value can be taken as :
≤f ≤ s s
Taking inverse Laplace transform on both
2. [Ans. D] side
poles of S.Y(s) lie on right half of S- y t u t
plane)
s = 1 is right s – plane pole 6. [Ans. B]
Unbounded. s
s f t
s s
Initial value
3. [Ans. A]
s
For the given LTI system mf t ms s s
s s
H(s) =
s ( )
The frequency response is given by mf t
s ( )
t
For the input x(t) = sin (t +1) with

y t | | s (t ) Final value theorem
t r /s c mf t ms s
Y(.) is zero for all sampling frequencies s s
sy t ms
s s
4. [Ans. B]
7. [Ans. B]
s x t u t u t
0∫ f 1
s
x s
With zero initial condition. s s
Now taking Laplace transform
5. [Ans. B] s y s sy s y s
s
y t y t x t
y t x t
t t t y s
Taking Laplace transform on both side s s s
(assuming zero initial conditions). y s
s s s s s s s s s s
s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
t t
t f( ) f( )
s s s
Time shifting (delay by 2)
1
EE
1. [Ans. B]
t
0 1 2 3 4 5
y t ∫x t t
Fig. 3
if we take x(t) as casual input
ut
3. [Ans. C]
x t u t
Form Fig. 3 in the above question,
g(t) = u(t 3) u(t 5)
y t ∫ u t t
Use L.T pair and property:
u t
∫ t s
u t t
s
* + f t s
s s
s
* + f r t s u
4. [Ans. B]
f t t → s
2. [Ans. D]
f t t → s s
Time scaling (Expansion by 2) and Time
s s s
shifting by 3 get g(t) from f(t) s
| s | | s |
f(t) , f(t/2) and g(t) = f ( ) are shown s s | s | ,
fig. 1,2 and 3 G(s)
f(t) t t )
The inverse LT of G(s) is a unit ideal
1
impulse delayed by .
t
0 1 5. [Ans. D]
Fig.1 + y t t
Time scaling (expansion by 2) Converting to s – domain,
s2y(s) – sy(0) – y (0) + 2[sy(s) – y(0)] +
f(t/2) y(s) = 1
[s2 + 2s + 1] y (s) + 2s + 4 = 1
1
y(s) =
t find inverse lapalce transform
0 1 2
y(t) [– 2 e–t te–t] u(t)
Fig. 2 = 2e–t + te–t – e–t
| =2–1=1
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN
1. [Ans. A]
Given,
x t x t t xp t u t
taking Laplace transform on both sides
we get,
s s
s
s
Taking inverse Laplace transform of X(s)
is
x t xp t u t
2. [Ans. C]
Laplace transform of u(t) =1/s
Use Time shifting property:
If the L.T of f(t) is F(s),
Then L.T of x(t) = f(t s s s
f u t- s
3. [Ans. D]
Transfer function is
Clearly all the zeros are on the RHS of
imaginary axis so the system is non-
minimum phase.
Also, the poles z = 0.5 is inside the unity
circle thus the system is stable.
4. [Ans. *]Range 67 to 69
P s
s
t ( ) t
c s
t π
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Frequency Response of LTI systems and Diversified Topics

ECE - 2006 4. If S(f) is the power spectral density of a
1. A signal m(t) with bandwidth 500 Hz is real, wide-sense stationary random
first multiplied by a signal g(t) where process, then which of the following is
ALWAYS true?
t ∑ t (A) S ≥S f
(B) S f ≥
The resulting signal is then passed
(C) S f s f
through an ideal low pass filter with
(D) ∫ S f f
bandwidth 1 kHz. The output of the low
pass filter would be
(A) t (C) 0 ECE - 2008
(B) m t (D) m t t Statement for Linked Answer Questions 5
&6
2. A uniformly distributed random variable The impulse response h(t) of a linear
X with probability density function time-invariant continuous time system is
y given by h(t) = exp( 2t) u(t), where u(t)
denotes the unit step function.
1
5. fr qu cy r sp s f t s
system in terms of angular frequency is
x
2.5 2.5 v y
f x (u x u x ) (A) (C)
Where u(.) is the unit step function is (B) (D)
passed through a transformation given in
the figure below. The probability density
6. The output of this system to the
function of the transformed random
sinusoidal input x (t) = 2cos (2t) for all
variable Y would be
time t, is
(A) f y (u y u y ) (A) 0
(B) f y y y (B) c s t π
(C) f y y (C) c s t π
y y (D) c s t π
(D) f y y
y 7. {x[n]} is a real-valued periodic sequence
/ (u y u y ) with a period N. x[n] and X[k] form N-
point Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)
ECE - 2007 pairs. The DFT Y[k] of the sequence
3. If is the autocorrelation function of a y[n]= ∑ xrx r is
real, wide-sense stationary random
(A) |X [k]|2
process, then which of the following is
NOT true? (B) ∑ r x r
(A) (C) ∑ x r x r
(B) | |≤ (D) 0
(C)
(D) The mean square value of the
process is R(O)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. The probability density function (PDF) of (A)

a random variable X is as shown below.
(B)
PDF
1 (C)
(D)
ECE - 2009
10. The 4 –point discrete Fourier transform
1 0 1 x (DFT) of a discrete time sequence
{ 1, 0 ,2, 3} is
The corresponding cumulative (A) [ 0 , 2 +2j , 2 , 2 2j]
distribution function (CDF) has the form (B) [2, 2 +2j , 6,2, 2j]
(A) CDF (C) [ 6 , 1 3j , 2 , 1 + 3j]
1
(D) [ 6 , 1 +3j , 0 , 1 3j]
11. A system with transfer function H(z) has

impulse response h(.) defined as h[2]=1 ,
1 0 1 x h[3] = 1 and h[k] = 0 otherwise.
(B) Consider the following statements.
CDF
1 S1: H(z) is a low-pass filter
S2: H(z) is an FIR filter.
Which of the following is correct?
(A) Only S2 is true
1 0 1 x (B) Both S1 and S2 are false
(C) (C) Both S1 and S2 are true, and S2 is a
CDF
reason for S1
1
(D) Both S1 and S2 are true, but S2 is not a
reason for S1
0 12. A white noise process X(t) with two-sided

1 1 x
power spectral density / z is
(D) CDF input to a filter whose magnitude squared
1 response is shown below
| f |
1
X(t) Y(t)
f
1 0 1 x
10kHz 10kHz
The power of the output process Y(t) is

1 given by
(A)
(B)
9. P x xp |x| xp |x| is
(C)
the probability density function for the
(D)
real random variable X, over the entire x
axis. M and N are both positive real
numbers. The Equation relating M and N
is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. If the power spectral density of stationary

t t
random process in a sinc-squared
function of frequency, the shape of its
autocorrelation is
(A) (B)
t t
(C) (D) ECE - 2011

17. The first six points of the 8-point DFT of a
real valued sequence are 5, 1 j3, 0, 3 j4,
0 and 3+j4. The last two points of the DFT
ECE - 2010 are respectively
14. The Nyquist sampling rate for the signal (A) 0, 1 j3 (C) 1+j3, 5
s t is given by (B) 0, 1+j3 (D) 1 j3, 5
(A) 400 Hz (C) 1200 Hz
(B) 600 Hz (D) 1400 Hz ECE - 2013
18. The impulse response of a system is
15. For an N-point FFT algorithm with h(t)=tu(t). For an input u(t 1), the
, which one of the following output is
statements is TRUE? (A) u t
(A) It is not possible to construct a signal
(B) u t
flow graph with both input and
output in normal order (C) u t
(B) The number of butterflies in the m
(D) u t
stage in N/m
(C) In place computation requires
storage of only 2N node data EC/EE/IN - 2013
(D) Computation of a butterfly requires 19. For a periodic signal
only one complex multiplication v(t)=30sin100t+10cos300t+6sin
(500t π/ , the fundamental frequency
16. Consider the pulse shape s t as shown. in rad/s is
The impulse response t of the filter (A) 100 (C) 500
matched to this pulse is (B) 300 (D) 1500
s t
ECE - 2014
20. Consider two real valued signals, x(t)
band-limited to [ 500 Hz, 500 Hz] and
y(t) band-limited to [ 1 kHz, 1 kHz]. For
t
z(t) = x(t).y(t), the Nyquist sampling
frequency (in kHz) is ______.
t t
21. An FIR system is described by the system

function
z z z
t t
The system is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) maximum phase through the linear constant-coefficient

(B) minimum phase differential equation
(C) mixed phase y t y t
y t x t
(D) zero phase t t
Let another signal g(t) be defined as
22. Consider the periodic square wave in the t
t ∫ t
figure shown. t
x If G(s) is the Laplace transform of g(t),
then the number of poles of G(s) is________
27. The N-point DFT X of a sequence x[n],

t ≤ ≤ is given by
∑x ≤ ≤
The ratio of the power in the 7th √
harmonic to the power in the 5th Denote this relation as DFT(x). For
harmonic for this waveform is closest in , which one of the following
value to _______. sequences satisfies DFT (DFT (x)) = x ?
(A) x = [1 2 3 4]
23. Let z pz (B) x = [1 2 3 2]
z qz (C) x = [1 3 2 2]
z z r z . The quantities p, (D) x = [1 2 2 3]
q, r are real numbers.
|r| EE - 2006
Consider P q . If the
1. A discrete real all pass system has a pole
zero of H(z) lies on the unit circle then
at z = 2 300 it, therefore
r = _____
(A) also has a pole at 300
24. For an all-pass system (B) has a constant phase response over
the z-plane: arg| z | = constant
z w r | ( )| for
(C) is stable only, if it is anticausal
all . (D) Has a constant phase response over
If m , then b equals the unit circle: arg| | =
(A) (C) /
constant
(B) (D) /
EE - 2007
25. A modulated signal is
y t m t c s πt where the
& 3:
baseband signal m(t) has frequency
2. A signal is processed by a causal filter
components less than 5 kHz only. The
with transfer function G(s). For a
minimum required rate (in kHz) at which
distortion free output signal waveform,
y(t) should be sampled to recover m(t) is
G(s) must
_____
(A) Provide zero phase shift for all
frequency
26. A causal LTI system has zero initial
(B) Provide constant phase shift for all
conditions and impulse response h(t). Its
frequency
input x(t) and output y(t) are related
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) Provide linear phase shift that is filter with a cut-off frequency of 20 Hz.
proportional to frequency The resultant system of filters will
(D) Provide a phase shift that is function as
inversely proportional to frequency (A) An all-pass filter
(B) An all-stop filter
3. G(z) = z + z is a low-pass digital (C) A band stop (band-reject) filter
filter with a phase characteristics same as (D) A band-pass filter
that of the above question if
(A) (C) (1/3) EE - 2014
(B) / 7. A sinusoid x(t) of unknown frequency is
(D)
sampled by an impulse train of period 20
4. Consider the discrete-time system shown ms. The resulting sample train is next
in the figure where the impulse response applied to an ideal lowpass filter with a
of G(z) is g[0] = 0, g[1] = g[2] = 1, cutoff at 25 Hz. The filter output is seen to
be a sinusoid of frequency 20 Hz. This
+ means that x(t) has a frequency of
Σ G(z)
+ (A) 10 Hz (C) 30 Hz
(B) 60 Hz (D) 90 Hz
K
IN - 2006
The system is stable for range of values of 1. A digital filter has the transfer function
K
(A) [ 1, ½] (C) [ 1/2, 1] H(z) = If this filter has to reject a
(B) [ 1, 1] (D) [ 1/2, 2] 50 Hz interference from the input, then
the sampling frequency for the input
EE - 2008 signal should be
5. A signal x (t) = sinc( t) where is a real (A) 50 Hz (C) 150 Hz
constant (s c x ) is the input (B) 100 Hz (D) 200 Hz
to a Linear time invariant system whose

2. The spectrum of a band limited signal
impulse response h(t) = sinc ( t) where
after sampling is shown below. The value
s real constant. If min ( t s
of the sampling interval is
the minimum of and and similarly
max ( ) denotes the maximum of
and and K is a constant, which one of
the following statements is true about the f(Hz)
output of the system? 100 0 100 150 350 400 600
(A) It will be of the form K sinc( t) (A) 1 ms (C) 2 ms
where = min ( ) (B) 4 ms (D) 8ms
(B) It will be of the form K sinc( t)
where = max ( ) 3. A digital measuring instrument employs a
(C) It will be of the form K sinc( t) sampling rate of 100 samples/second.
(D) It cannot be a sinc type of signal The sampled input x(n) is averaged using
the difference equation
EE - 2011 y x x x
6. A low-pass filter with a cut-off frequency x /
of 30 Hz is cascaded with a high-pass
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
For a step input, the maximum time taken IN - 2010

for the output to reach the final value 8. 4-point DFT of a real discrete-time signal
after the input transition is x[n] of length 4 is given by X[k ], n= 0,1 2,
(A) 20ms (C) 80ms 3, and k =0, 1, 2 ,3.It is given that
(B) 40ms (D) X[0] =5,X[1]=1+ j1, X[2]=0.5. X[3] and
x[0] respectively are
IN - 2007 (A) 1 j, 1.875
4. Let x(t) be a continuous-time, real-valued (B) 1 j, 1.500
signal band-limited to F Hz. The Nyquist (C) 1+j, 1.875
sampling rate, in Hz, (D) 0.1 j0.1, 1.500
for y(t) = x (0.5t) + x(t) x(2t) is.
(A) F (C) 4F 9. A digital filter having a transfer function
(B) 2F (D) 8F
H(z) = is implemented
IN - 2008 using Direct Form – I and Direct Form – II

5. Consider a discrete-time system for which realizations of IIR structure. The number
the input x[n] and the output y[n] are of delay units required in Direct Form – I
and Direct Form – II realizations are,
related as y[n] = x[n] y[n 1].
respectively
If y[n] = 0 for n < 0 and x[n] = [n], then (A) 6 and 6 (C) 3 and 3
y [n] can be expressed in terms of the unit (B) 6 and 3 (D) 3 and 2
step u[n] as
(A) ( ) u (C) u 10. H(z) is a discrete rational transfer
(D) u function. To ensure that both H(z) and its
(B) ( ) u
inverse are stable its
(A) poles must be inside the unit circle
IN - 2009 and zeros must be outside the unit
6. An analog signal is sampled at 9kHz. The circle
sequence so obtained is filtered by an FIR (B) poles and zeros must be inside the
filter with transfer function unit circle
H[z] z . One of the analog (C) poles and zeros must be outside the
frequencies for which the magnitude unit circle
response of the filter is zero is (D) poles must be outside the unit circle
(A) 0.75kHz (C) 1.5kHz and zeros should be inside the unit
(B) 1kHz (D) 2kHz circle
7. The transfer function H(z) of a fourth IN - 2011

order linear phase FIR system is given by 11. The continuous time signal
z z z z . x(t) = c s πt s πt is
Then G(z) is sampled at the rate 100 Hz to get the
(A) z z signal x t ∑ x t ,
(B) z z = sampling period
(C) z z The signal x t is passed through an ideal
low pass filter with cutoff frequency 100
(D) z z
Hz. The output of the filter is proportional
to
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) c s πt Which one of the following statements is

(B) c s πt s πt TRUE?
(C) c s πt s πt (A) This is a low pass filter
(D) s πt (B) This is a high pass filter
(C) This is an IIR filter
12. Shown below is the pole-zero plot of a (D) This is an FIR filter
digital filter
Im IN - 2014
13. A discrete-time signal x[𝑛] is obtained by
Z plane
sampling an analog signal at 10 kHz. The
signal x is filtered by a system with
Re impulse response
ℎ[𝑛] = 0.5{ [𝑛]+ [𝑛 1]}. The 3dB cutoff
frequency of the filter is:
6th order pole
at the origin (A) 1.25 kHz (C) 4 .00 kHz
(B) 2.50 kHz (D) 5.00 kHz
ECE
1. [Ans. B]
m(f)
f
500 500
= m(t) in time domain.
500 500
m(t)*g(t)=m(F) G(f) 2. [Ans. B]

G(f) Sample space of random variable
After transformation smaple space of

random variable Y=(0, 1)
Hence f y y y
f pt ‘ ’ s t sf s
20kHz 20kHz
3. [Ans. C]
m f f
Autocorrelation function is an even
function
4. [Ans. B]
500
PSD is always a positive quantity
20kH 500 20kHz
z pass filtering with f
After low z
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. C] 9. [Ans. A]
h(t) = u t H(s) = P P x xp |x| xp |x|
∫P x x
6. [Ans. D]
| | | |
Input x(t) = 2cos(2t) r ∫{ } x
Frequency response
π
r∫ x
Output r
π r
π π
10. [Ans. D]
x t t x t 4-point DFT of sequence {1,0,2,3} is given
π as
π [ ][ ]
{ }
{
}
π [ ] [ ]
11. [Ans. A]
c s t s t h[2] =1 and h[3]= 1
h [n] = { }
√
[ c s t s t] h[n] is high pass filter & FIR filter.
√ √
c s t π 12. [Ans. B]
√
c s t π PSD of white noise
/ z
7. [Ans. A] PSD of output
f | f | f
8. [Ans. A] | f |
P f x t u t tu t utput s p w r
t u t
∫ f f
x ∫f x x
Integral of increasing ramp signal is r u r| f | curv

increasing parabola and integral of ( )
decreasing ramp signal is decreasing
f
parabola.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. B]
For 8-points DFT;
x x x x x x and
13. [Ans. B] it is conjugate symmetric about x[4]
PS x x
18. [Ans. C]
= FT t tu t ⁄p u t
s ⁄s s
s c fu ct s
y s s s
14. [Ans. C] y t * + ut
s s c s c s
19. [Ans. A]
s t [c⏟ s πt c s
⏟ πt ] t s t c s t
s [ π⁄ ]
Maximum frequency in s t is 600Hz
( s t )
SO, are rational
Nyquist sampling rate 2 + fu m t p r =

z
fu m t fr qu cy
p r
15. [Ans. D]
(A), (B) and (C) are wrong 20. [Ans. *] Range 2.99 to 3.01
f z z z
16. [Ans. C] f f z
Impulse response h(t) of the filter
matched to the input pulse s(t) existing 21. [Ans. C]
from t =0 to t= T is given by z z
h(t) =s[-(t-T)] z
z z z
the operation of time reversal and then z z z
time delay of T should be performed on z
s(t) , to get h(t). This is equivalent to the z z
following statement; z
scan the sketch of s(t) backward from t =T
to t =0 and draw the sketch of h(t)
forward from t=0 to t =T.
s(t) & h(t) are shown below in Fig.
So, zeros are at and .

T T  When all the zeroes are inside the unit
circle minimum phase
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
 When all the zeros are outside the unit 24. [Ans. B]
circle Maximum phase z
z
 When some zeros are inside unit circle z
some outside unit circle mixed r f z sz z
phase
Poles of H(z) is z z
22. [Ans. *] Range 0.50 to 0.52 r p ss syst m w w
Consider one period from t t r
p
t s c
x
t t t 25. [Ans. *] Range 9.5 to 10.5
t
u t s
y t m t c s πt
c s π to recover m(t) minimum required rate
c s π should be twice the minimum frequency of
π m(t)
P w r f m rm c | | f f z
c s π
| |
π 26. [Ans. *] Range 0.99 to 1.01
| | y y
S y t x t
| | t t
y y
* y t + x t
23. [Ans. *] Range t t
z s
z (P ) s
Pz z s s s
z t
z (q ) t ∫ t t
qz t
z
z z r z s
z rz s s s s
s
z z s s
s * +
z rz z z* r z + s
s s
(z ) (z ) (z ) (z )
s s s s
One zero is at origin. The other zero lies at So number of poles G(s) = 1
z
r 27. [Ans. B]
Since, this zero lies on unit circle |z|
x [ ]
z r √
r
z r
r [ ] x
S c v |r| r √
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
z z
z
[ ] x [ ] x z z
z
r z
z z
Now check for each Options
S t syst m w st f t’s ut r
EE most pole will lie inside the unit circle.
1. [Ans. C] Location of poles
For causal system, if all poles are inside ±√
z
the unit circle then system is stable, and
converse is true for anti-causal system. √
2
2
r √
√
If anti-causal, ROC is |z|

Syst m s st .
2. [Ans. C]
sc t s s t sf y pt
For distortion free output phase shift must
(A)
be linear function of frequency i.e.
proportional to frequency this is because 5. [Ans. A]
delay to all frequency component will be x(t) = sinc( t s π t
equal. h(t) =s t s π t
x(t) = s π t
3. [Ans. A]
1/
For distortion free output phase shift must
be linear function of as will as all the
frequency component must be amplified
𝜔
by same amount so z π π
corresponds to frequency . While
z corresponds to frequency 3 . h(t)= s π t
In order to have same amplification of 1/
frequency component at ,
4. [Ans. A] 𝜔 π
π
Given
g(1) =g(2) =1. Otherwise 0 y(t) = h(t) * x(t)
i.e. g[n] =
therefore 1/
G(z) = z z if
Therefore overall transfer function of
y
closed loop system
π π
z
z
z
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1/ 7. [Ans. C]
if Sinusoid x(t) frequency say f .Hz
s mp fr qu cy
Or Y(j𝜔
π π
z utput z
f
So y(t) = s π t f z u t frqu cy tr s t
y(t) = s c t f
IN
or y(t) = s c t f
1. [Ans. A]
So output is of the form k sinc( t In order to reject the 50 Hz interference,
Where m sampling frequency must be as low as the
noise frequency (so that they are
6. [Ans. D] separated in time domain and has less
The frequency response, f of LPF with interference)
cutoff frequency, 30 Hz is shown in Fig. 1. So, f z
The frequency response f of HPF with
cutoff frequency, 20 Hz is shown in Fig. 2 2. [Ans. B]
If these two filters are cascaded, the Let X(f) be the spectrum of the
overall frequency response of the bandlimited signal, x(t). let Xs(f) be the
resultant system H(f) = H1(f) H2(f), shown spectrum of the sampled signal xs(t)
in Fig. 3, represents a BPF with
Bandwidth, B = 10 Hz f f ∑ f f
H1(f)
Where fs is the sampling frequency i.e.,
X(f) is repeated at
±f ± f ± f tc
From the given spectrum of Xs(f) in the
0 10 20 30 40 f
question, fs = 250 s/sec
Fig. 1 S mp t rv
H2(f) Ts= ms=4ms
3. [Ans. B]
Since output y depends on input, such as
f no delay, delay by 1 unit, delay by 2 unit,
30 20 0 20 30
delay by 4 unit, so it will sum all the
sample after 4Ts (maximum delay), to get
Fig. 2 one sample of y[n].
H(f)
t ms c
4. [Ans. C]
x(t) band limited to FHz
f i.e., fm = FHz
30 20 0 20 30
y(t) = x(0.5t) + x(t) –x(2t) is
x(t) – maximum frequency = z
Fig. 3
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x(0.5t) – maximum frequency = z z z

z
x(2t) – maximum frequency = 2FHz.
Y(t) – maximum frequency z
z
= max (F,
S
Nyquist rate = m x frequency

=2 z we know that for linear phase filter
5. [Ans. A] for ≤ ≤
Given y(n) = x(n) – y where M is the number of points filter
y here,
Now,
y y x
Take z – transform:
z [ z ] z
H(z) =
For the given x(n) = z

So, : : : :
z
This is only in option (a).
Use the standard Z.T. pair:
z 8. [Ans. A]
u |z| | |
z As signal is real,
y ( ) u |z| X[3] = 1 – J and
∑
6. [Ans. B]
z z
( )
c s s
| ( )| √ c s s 9. [Ans. B]
√ c s Given H(z) =
√ s This T.F corresponds to a 3rd order digital
| ( )| s ≤ ≤ π filter
so, | ( )| , if π D F – I realization requires 2N delays
w r D F – II realization or canonic realization
π with minimum number of delay elements
π f r
requires N delays.
f z Where N is the order of the order of the
filter
7. [Ans. A] – I requires 6 delays
z z z z D F – II requires 3 delays
Let, z z z
then,
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. B]
z [z z z z z
The discrete time system with rational
transfer function , H(z) is stable if the ]
poles of H(z) lie inside the unit circle in
z ⌊z z z ⌋
the z – plane.
z z
r z ts v rs / z t
z
stable , both the poles and zeros of H(z)
must lie inside the unit circle in the z –
plane.
As the impulse response, h(n) = Inverse
Z.T of H(z) has only finite duration =7
11. [Ans. B]
samples, the given digital filter is an FIR
Highest frequency component in x(t) is
filter.
150 Hz. So, the Nyquist sampling rate is
300 Hz.
13. [Ans. B]
But, x(t) is sampled at 100 Hz. While
Given that
cos(100 πt) with frequency 50 Hz will be
recovered satisfactorily after passing ( ) [ ]
through the low – pass and sin(300πt) will c s s
get aliased resulting in filter output sin
(100 πt). | ( )| √ c s s
Cos (100 πt s ’t c tribute to aliasing.
√ c s c s s
12. [Ans. D]
√ c s c s( )
From the given pole – zero plot of the
digital filter, the system function cut ff | |
( )( ) √ √
z π π
c s r
[ z (z ) z ] z √
z πr ⁄s mp z
[(z z ) z ] π π
r ⁄s mp z
π
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK Control Systems
Basics of Control System
ECE - 2008 ECE - 2010

1. A signal flow graph of a system is given 2. The transfer function Y(s)/R(s) of the
below system shown is
- (s)
(s)
s
1 1 1/s
u
s
1/s
1 1 1/s
u
(A) 0 (C)
(B)
(D)
The set of equations that correspond to
this signal flow graph is ECE - 2014
x x 3. For the following system,
(s)
(A) (x ) = [ ] (x ) +
x x
s (s)
u s
[ ] .u / (s)
x x
(B) (x ) = [ ] (x ) + w n (s)
x x ( )
t tr ns r un t on ( )
s
u
[ ] .u / s s
( ) ( )
s s(s )
x x s
x x ( ) ( )
(C) ( ) = [ ]( ) + s s(s )
x x
u 4. Consider the following block diagram in
[ ] .u /
the figure.
x x (s) (s)
(D) [x ] = [ ] (x ) +
x x
u
[ ] .u /
(s)
tr ns r un t on s
(s)
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2007 EE - 2010
1. The system shown in figure below. 3. As shown in the figure, a negative
feedback system has an amplifier of gain
b0 c0 b1 C1 100 with 10% tolerance in the forward
Σ Σ path, and an attenuator of value 9/100 in
the feedback path. The overall system
Σ Σ 1/s Σ Σ1/s p
gain is approximately:
a a
1
0
Can be reduced to the form

+
⁄
X X Σ Σ Y Y P P
+ (A) 10 1% (C) 10 5%
(B) 10 2% (D) 10 10%
Z
With EE - 2014
(A) X = s , 4. The closed-loop transfer function of a
Y= ⁄(s system is (s) The steady
s ) s ( )
( s ) state error due to unit step input is________

(B) X = 1, Y = ⁄(s s )
5. The signal flow graph of a system is
s shown below. (s) is the input and (s)is
(C) X = s , the output.
( s )
⁄(s s )
(D) X s , s s
(s) (s)
⁄(s s ) s
EE - 2008
2. A function y(t) satisfies the following Assuming n ,
() the input-output transfer function
differential equation, + y(t) = (t),
( )
where (t) is the delta function. (s) of the system is given by
( )
Assuming zero initial condition and s
( ) (s)
denoting the unit step function by u(t), s s
y(t) can be of the form s
( ) (s)
(A) (C) u(t) s s
(B) (D) u(t) s
( ) (s)
s s
s
( ) (s)
s s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. The block diagram of a system is shown in IN - 2009

the figure 3. A filter is represented by the signal flow
graph shown in the figure. Its input x(t)
(s) (s) (s) and output is y(t).
s
The transfer function of the filter is
If the desired transfer function of the 1 1
X(s)
system is k 1/S
( )
( )
then G(s) is k
Y(s)
(A) 1 (C) 1/s 1 1
(B) s (D) ( ) ( )
(A) (C)
( ) ( )
IN - 2006 (B) (D)
1. The signal flow graph representation of a
control system is shown below. The IN - 2011
Y(s) 4. The signal flow graph of a system is given
transfer function is computed as
R(s) below.
s R 1 1 1 C
R(s) 1 1/s 1/s 1/s 1

Y(s)
1 1 The transfer function (C/R) of the system
is
1 s(s2  1) (A)
( )
(A) (C) ( )
s s2  2 ( )
(B)
s 1
2
(D) ( )
(B) ( )
s(s2  2) (C) ( )
( )
(D) ( )
IN - 2007
2. A feedback control system with high K, is
IN - 2012
shown in the figure below:
5. The transfer function of a Zero-order-
R(s) + C(s)
K G(s) Hold system with sampling interval T is
(A) ( ) (C)
H(s) (B) ( ) (D)
Then the closed loop transfer function is.

IN - 2013
(A) sensitive to perturbations in G(s)
6. The complex function tanh(s) is analytic
and H(s)
over a region of the imaginary axis of the
(B) sensitive to perturbations in G(s)
complex s- plane if the following is TRUE
and but not to perturbations H(s)
everywhere in the region for all integers n
(C) sensitive to perturbations in H(s)
(A) Re(s) =0 (C) Im(s) ≠
and but not to perturbations G(s)
(B) Im (s) ≠ n ( )
(D) insensitive to perturbations in G(s) (D) Im(s)≠
and H(s)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. The signal flow graph for a system is IN - 2014

( ) 8. A plant has an open-loop transfer
given below. The transfer function for
( )
function,
this system is given as
(s)
(s) s s
(s )(s )(s )
(s)
The approximate model obtained by
retaining only one of the above poles,
which is closest to the frequency response
(A) (C) of the original transfer function at low
(B) (D) frequency is
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
ECE 2. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. D] (s)
(s) (s)
s
x
u x
(s)
x
u
x
(s) (s) [ ]
s s
o (s) (s) (s)
x x x u (s) (s)
x x x u (s)
s s
x x x (s)
x x r or
u (s) s
x
[ ] [ x
][ ] [ ] 0u 1
x x
3. [Ans. D]
One can denote any state by any name When x (s)
So, that answer is (s)
(s)
x x
u s
[x ] = [ ] (x ) + [ ] .u /
x x s
s
y(s) s
x (s) s(s )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. C] These are four individual loops

(s)
(s)
s s
s s s
s s s
(s) (s) s s
All the loops touch forward paths
( )
(s) (s)
s s s s
s ng M son’s g n ormul
(s)
(s) s
(s) (s)
(s)
(s) s ( )s ( )
(s)
(s) ( s) (s s )
(s) ()
(s) ( s) (s s )
(s)
EE Σ
1. [Ans. D]
(s) xy
Σ s Σ s (s) yz
(s) s
Comparing eg. (I) and (ii), we get
s
xy
s s
s
Signal flow graph of the block – diagram yz
s s
Hence option (D) is correct
s s 2. [Ans. D]
( )
Take LT on both sides,
( )
s.Y(s)+Y(s) =1  Y(s) = ( )
 y(t) = u(t)
There are forward paths
3. [Ans. A]
T.F = =10
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Also, 6. [Ans. B]
 overall change in T.F for G = 10 is (s) (s) (s)

s
= 1%
1%
Convert the given block diagram to signal
4. [Ans. 0] low gr p n us M son’s rul
1
(s)
s s
(s) ( or un t st p) 1 1/s G(s) s 1 C(s)
s R(s)
(s)
s(s s ) 1
s
y(t) l m sy(s) 1
s(s s )
( )
t y st t rror ( )
0 ( ) ( )1
5. [Ans. C] ( ) ( )
Using Mason’s gain formula ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ) ( )
Paths: So put G(s) = s
( )
s s ( )
( ) ( )
s IN
Loops: 1. [Ans. A]
( ) M M
s s s s s s
( )
s s s
(s)
∑
(s) There individual loops with gains:
n num ro p t s ( )( )( ) ( )( )( ) ( )( )( )
s s s s s s
∑ 0 1
(s) M M . /
( )
s s (s) s
. /
s
(s) ( ) 2. [Ans. C]
(s) In this case, open loop gain sensitivity is
( )
. / measured with respect to KG. Because
here open loop gain = KG
s
s s
s ( ) ( )( )
( )
s s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. D]
( )( ) ( s ount)
s n (s)
t n (s)
os (s)
( )( )
( )
( or l rg )
For analytical region there should be no
s poles
( ) ≠
s ( ) os sn os sn ≠
( )
os ≠
( n )
≠
So close loop transfer function is sensitive
to perturbation in H(s) but not to
7. [Ans. A]
perturbation in G(s) for large k values.
u(s) s s y(s)
3. [Ans. A]
forward path =
. /;
( ) |
( ) ( )
= ( ) ( )
( ) Loop =
4. [Ans. C]
(s)
=1 ( )
( )
8. [Ans. A]
( ) Writing the given open loop transfer in
( ) form of
5. [Ans. A] g t
The transfer function of a Zero-order- . /. /. /
Hold system having a sampling interval T So, at low frequencies, the approximate
is ( ) model equivalent to original transfer
function will
( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Time Domain Analysis
ECE - 2006 ECE - 2008

1. In the system shown below, 6. Step responses of a set of three second-
x(t) = (sin t) u(t). In steady-state, the orders underdamped systems all have the
response y(t) will be same percentage overshoot. Which of the
following diagrams represents the poles
of three systems?
x(t) s y(t) (A)
(C) sin t j
(A) sin .t / √
√
(B) sin .t / (D) sin t –cos t

√
2. The unit impulse response of a system is

(t) t For this system, the
steady-state value of the output for unit
(B)
step input is equal to
(A) 1 (C) 1 j
(B) 0 (D)
3. The unit-step response of a system

starting from rest is given by
(t) – or t . The transfer
function of the system is (C)
(A) (C) j
(B) (D)
ECE - 2007
4. The frequency response of a linear, time-
invariant system is given by H(f)= (D)
. The step response of the system is j
(A) 5 (1 )u(t) (C) (1 )u(t)
(B) 5 (1 )u(t) (D) (1 )u(t)
5. The transfer function of a plant is

(s) . The second-order
( )( )
approximation of T(s) using dominant 7. A linear, time-invariant, causal
pole concept is continuous time system has a rational
transfer function with simple poles at
(A) ( )( )
(C) ( ) s and s , and one simple zero
(B) ( )( )
(D) ( ) at s . A unit step u(t) is applied at
the input of the system. At steady state,
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
the output has constant value of 1. The 4.

impulse response of this system is y(t)
(A) , xp ( t) xp ( t)- u(t)
1
(B) , xp ( t) xp ( t) xp
( t)- u(t)
(C) , xp ( t) xp ( t)- u(t)
(D) , xp ( t) xp ( t)- u(t) t
(A) P-3, Q-1, R-4, S-2

8. Group I lists a set of four transfer (B) P-3, Q-2, R-4, S-1
functions. Group II gives a list of possible (C) P-2, Q-1, R-4, S-3
step responses y(t). Match the step (D) P-3, Q-4, R-1, S-2
responses with the corresponding
transfer functions 9. The magnitude of frequency response of
Group I an underdamped second order system is
5 at 0 rad/sec and peaks to at
√
s
√ rad/sec. The transfer function of the
s s system is,
(A) (C)
s s
(B) (D)
s s
Group II ECE - 2009
1. 10. The unit step response of an under-
y(t)
damped second order system has steady
state value of 2. Which one of the
following transfer function has these
properties?
(A) (C)
t
(B) (D)
2.
y(t) ECE - 2010
1
11. A system with the transfer function
( )
has an output
( )
y(t) os . t / for the input signal

t
3. x(t) p os . t /.Then, the system
y(t) p r m t r ‘p’ s
(A) √ (C) 1
√
(B) (D)
1 √
t
ECE - 2011
12. The differential equation
y x(t) describes a
system with an input x(t) and an output
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
y(t). The system, which is initially r y

(s) (s)
relaxed, is excited by a unit step input.
The output y(t) can be represented by the
waveform
Which one of the following compensators
(A)
C(s) achieves this?
(A) . / (C) (s )
y(t)
(D) . /
(B) . /
t
15. The natural frequency of an undamped
(B) second-order system is 40 rad/s. If the
system is damped with a damping ratio
y(t) 0.3, the damped natural frequency in
rad/s is ________.
t 16. The input u(t) where u(t) is the

(C) unit step function, is applied to a system
with transfer function . If the initial
y(t)
v lu o t output s t n t v lu
of the output at steady state is _______.
t
17. The steady state error of the system
(D)
shown in the figure for a unit step input is
y(t) _________
(s) (s) (s)
r(t) (t) s (t)
t
s
ECE - 2012
13. A system with transfer function 18. For the second order closed-loop system
(s )(s ) shown in the figure, the natural frequency
(s)
(s )(s )(s ) (in rad/s) is
is excited y s n( t). The steady-state (s)
(s)
output of the system is zero at s(s )
(A) r s (C) r s
(B) r s (D) r s
ECE - 2014
(A) 16 (C) 2
14. For the following feedback system
(B) 4 (D) 1
(s) . The 2%-settling time of
( )( )
the step response is required to be less EE - 2007
than 2 seconds. 1. Consider the feedback control system
shown below which is subjected to a unit
step input. The system is stable and has
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
the following parameters kp = 4, ki = 10, 5. The transfer function of a system is given

n ξ as . The system is ___________
( )
1 z
s (A) An over damped system
+ (B) An underdamped system
+
0 Σ KP Σ s ξ s (C) A critically damped system
+ (D) An unstable system
The steady state value of z is

EE - 2009
(A) 1 (C) 0.1
6. The unit-step response of a unity
(B) 0.25 (D) 0
feedback system with open loop
Statement for Linked Answer Question Q.2 transfer function G(s) = ( )(
is
)
& Q.3 shown in the figure. The value of K is
R-L-C circuit shown in figure, 1
m
0.75
0.5
0.25
0
0 1 2 3 4
Time
(A) 0.5 (C) 4

2. For a step- input overshoot in the (B) 2 (D) 6
output will be
(A) 0,Since the system is not under EE - 2010
damped
7. For the system , the approximate
(B) 5% ( )
(C) 16% time taken for a step response to reach

(D) 48% 98% of its final value is
(A) 1s (C) 4s
3. If the above step response is to be (B) 2s (D) 8s
observed on the non-storage CRO, then it
would be best have the as a EE - 2011
(A) Step function 8. The steady state error of a unity feedback
(B) Square wave of frequency 50 Hz linear system for a unit step input is 0.1.
(C) Square wave of frequency 300 Hz The steady state error of the same system,
(D) Square wave of frequency 2.0KHz for a pulse input r(t) having a magnitude
of 10 and a duration of one second, as
EE - 2008 shown in the figure is
4. The transfer function of a linear time
r(t)
invariant system is given as
10
G(s) = . The steady state value of
the output of the system for a unit t
impulse input applied at time instant t=1 1s
will be (A) 0 (C) 1
(A) 0 (C) 1 (B) 0.1 (D) 10
(B) 0.5 (D) 2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2007 at which the response to a unit step input

Common Data for Questions 1 & 2 reaches its peak is seconds
The following figure represents a 4. The damping coefficient for the closed
proportional control scheme of a first loop system is
order system with transportation lag. (A) 0.4 (C) 0.8
R(s) + C(s) (B) 0.6 (D) 1
(s )
5. The value of p is
(A) 6 (C) 14
(B) 12 (D) 16
1. The angular frequency
(s in
)( sradians/s
) (s )( at
s )
which the loop phase lag becomes is IN - 2009
(A) 0.408 (C) 1.56
6. A plant with a transfer function is
(B) 0.818 (D) 2.03 ( )
controlled by a PI controller with =1
2. The steady state error for a unit step and n un ty
input when the gain = 1 is configuration. The lowest value of that
(A) (C) 1 ensures zero steady state error for a step
(D) 2 change in the reference input is
(B)
(A) 0 (C) 1/2
(B) 1/3 (D) 1
IN - 2008
3. If a first order system and its time Statement for the Linked data Q.No.7 &
response to a unit step input are as Q.No.8:
shown below, the gain K is A disturbance input (t)is injected into
the unity feedback control loop shown in
r(t) y(t) the figure. Take the reference input r(t) to
be a unit step.
(s) d(t)
+ +
y
+ 1
r(t) 1
S(S+1) + y(t)
0.8
7. If the disturbance is measurable, its effect on
the output can be minimized significantly
using a feedforward controller (s) To
t eliminate the component of the output due to
(A) 0.25 (C) 1 (t) s n t ( ) Should be
(B) 0.8 (D) 4 (A) (C) √
√
(D) √
(B)
√
&5
8. Let (s) ontroll r I (t) s n t
A unity feedback system has open loop
the amplitude of the frequency component of
transfer function G(s) = .The time
( ) y(t) due to d(t) is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2011
(A) √ (C) √
11. The unit-step response of a negative unity
feedback system with the open-loop
(B) √ (D) √
transfer function G(s) = is
IN - 2010 (A) (C)
9. A unity feedback system has an open loop (B)
(D)
transfer function (s) .The value
( )
of k that yields a damping ratio of 0.5 for ECE/EE/IN - 2013
the closed loop system is 12. Assuming zero initial condition, the
(A) 1 (C) 5 response y(t) of the system given below
(B) 3 (D) 9 to a unit step input u(t) is
10. A unit ramp input is applied to the system U(s) Y(s)

shown in the adjoining figure. The steady
state error in its output is
(A) u(t) (C) u(t)
(s)
r(s) ( ) (s) (B) t u(t)
(D) u(t)
(A) 0 (C) 1
(B) 0.5 (D) 2
ECE (s )
1. [Ans. A] s
y(t) x(t) (t) s
(s) (s) (s)
utput
s s
( ) ( )u(t)
s √
When t = at steady state
√ output = 1
x(t) s n(t)u(t)
3. [Ans. B]
y(t) s n .t /
√ ,st p r spons -
* +
s
2. [Ans. C]
(t)
s
(s)
s
4. [Ans. B]
(s)
s ()
output (s) (s)
(s )s
( )
s .s / s
s(s ) s s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
t p r spons
s .s / s s
(t) ( )u(t)
(s ) s Which is also the required impulse
s .s / s s response of the system.
w ns
When s = 8. [Ans. D]
Comparing the given transfer functions
⁄
with
(s) y(t) , -u(t)
s s
s ξ s
5. [Ans. D] ln ξ
s
In dominant pole concept the factor that Therefore P is undamped
has to be eliminated should be in time
constant form s s
ξ
(s )(s s )
s ov r mp
. / (s s )
s s
s s ξ
s rt lly mp
6. [Ans. C]
ov rs oot p n s on ξ s s s
√
M ξ
r ξ os
s un r mp
Where is the angle made by pole from
negative real axis.
9. [Ans. A]
To make M same, should be the same.
10. [Ans. B]
7. [Ans. C] Steady state value = -2
Transfer functions Denominator
(s )
(s) ξ
(s )(s )
Input (s) ξ
s
Output, (s) (s) (s)
underdamped
v n l m s (s)
s (s ) 11. [Ans. B]
or l m
(s )(s ) (s)
t
√
or  1=  P=
√ √
(s )
(s)
(s )(s )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
12. [Ans. A] ( s)
y y (s )(s )
y x(t)
t t (s+1)(s+2)+0.15+5s=0
Taking Laplace Transform of both sides s s s
s (s) s (s) (s) (s) s
(s) pt on (s) (s )
(s) s s ( s ) o (s) (s)
(s )
ol s r ts
(s )(s )
As poles are on the right hand side of s- (s )(s ) (s )
plane so given system is unstable system. s s
Only option (A) represents unstable s
system. Hence Option C is correct
13. [Ans. C] 15. [Ans. *] Range 38.13 to 38.19

(s )(s ) We know
(s)
(s )(s )(s ) ξ √
x(s) Where damped natural frequency
s
(s )(s ) undamped natural frequency
y(s) . / ξ damping ratio
(s )(s )(s ) s
For applying final value theorem system √
must be stable, mean all poles should lie
in left half plane
So (s ) (s ) 16. [Ans. *] Range - 0.01 to 0.01
r s s
(s)
s
14. [Ans. C] x(t) u(t) (s)
s
s ttl ng t m (s) (s) (s)
ξ
ξ (s)
s
So all poles of CLTP should lie on the left s
of s = line y( ) l m s y(s) lm
s
The characteristic equation is
(s) (s) . We have to check 17. [Ans. *] Range 0.49 to 0.51
whether are the roots this equation lies (s) (s) (s)
on me left of s = or not s
pt on ( )
s
s
o (s) (s)
(s )(s )(s ) (s)
(s) (s)
s s s (s) (s)
s (s) (s) (s) (s)
(s) (s)
pt on (s) ( ) (s) * +
s (s) (s)
o (s) (s)
(s)
(s) (s)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(s)
s s
(s)
s s 2. [Ans. C]
r (s) m
s
s s
l m s (s) l ms
s s s
+ i
18. [Ans. C]
r ns r un t on
s s ∫ t
t
or or r un t syst m
Taking Laplace transform
s ξ (s) ( s ) I(s)
s
(s)
I(s)
s
EE
1. [Ans. A] ∫ t
Step input (s) s
s (s) (s)
(s) I(s) * +
s s s
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
s ξ s t (s)
s s
(s)
(s) .s s /
(s) ( )( ) Characteristic eq.
s s ξ s
n (s) s s
(s) (s) (s)
Comparing with
(s) (s) (s) (s)
s s
(s) (s) (s)
(s)
(s) [ ] √
(s)
(s) (s)
(s) * +
(s) (s)
√
(s) √
(s) (s)
s (s)
Steady state value of Z
√
t s (s)
√
s Overshoot
t
⁄
. /. / √
= 0.163 or 16.3%
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. C] 5. [Ans. C]
M(s)
√ s s
Comparing with standard form
√ M(s)
r s s ξ s
Setting time (t ) ξ
ms ξ
The system is critically damped

Square Wave
6. [Ans. D]
t y st t v lu o r spons
T Input is unit step
So steady state error
For the square Wave ⁄ should be (s)

rror (s)
greater than t (s) (s)
For z w r (s)
(s )(s )
ms t
(s) n (s)
For z s
Steady state error using final value
ms t theorem
For z t s (s)
s (s)
ms t t
(s) (s)
Therefore, it would be best to have the
s
as a square wave of 300Hz. t
( )( )
4. [Ans. A]
r(t) un t mplus ppl tt
(t )
R(s) = 1[r(t)] =
(s)
(s)
(s) s s
7. [Ans. C]
(s) (s) (s)
s s
[
] ( s s rst or r syst m)
Steady state value of output, using final s
value theorem .c Gain=2, T=1 sec
t s (s) For 98%
s t s
t
s s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. A] Given
R(s) C(s) ,
+ G(s) +
4. [Ans. B]
(s)
( )
n t
√
s (s)
|  ⁄
(s)
x(t) ,u(t) u(t )- 5. [Ans. B]
x(s) [ ] , -
s s s
( )
s |
s (s) 6. [Ans. A]
( ) ( )
( ) . /. / ( ) ( )
( )
IN
m ( )
1. [Ans. D] s
m ( )
(s) s
s ( ) ( )
( ) t n ( ) 7. [Ans. D]
Phase lag t n ( ) Output due to
It satisfy , r s - d(t)= (t) (t) (s)
( )
(t) [ ]
2. [Ans. B] s(s )
or n (s) ( )
s nt * +
(s) ( )
s ( ) ( )
or r(t) u(t)
os t on l rror onst nt
√ ⁄
t (s)
8. [Ans. B]
y(s) (s) , (s) (s) y(s)-
OR ( )
(s) s (s) wor s s ontroll r

(s) (s) s s s
(s ) So
(s)
s(s ) s s s
y(s) * + (s) * +
s(s ) s(s )
t (s)
y(s) s
(s) s s ( )
3. [Ans. D] t
lm y(s)
s | | √
x(s)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
9. [Ans. D]
T(s) =
( )
= √ and = or
√
or K = 9.
10. [Ans. B]
(s)
s(s )
For unit Ramp input, r(t) t u(t)
lo ty rror onst nt
t (s)
11. [Ans. D]
(s)
(s) s
The unit step response is given by
(s)
s(s ) s s
(t) ( ) u(t)
12. [Ans. B]
H(s)
u(s) Y(s)
⁄
u(s)= ⁄s [unit step i/p]

y(s) = H(s).U(s)= ⁄s ⁄s = ⁄
s
y(t) 0 ⁄s 1 t u(t)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Stability & Routh Hurwitz Criterion
ECE - 2006 4. The number of open right half plane poles

1. The positive values of and so that of G (s) = is
the system shown in the figure below
(A) 0 (C) 2
oscillates at a frequency of r s
(B) 1 (D) 3
respectively are
(s )
ECE - 2012
R(s) C(s)
(s s s ) 5. The Feedback system shown below
oscillates at 2 rad/s when
(s) (s ) (s)
(s s s )
(A) 1, 0.75 (C) 1, 1

(A) K=2 and a=0.75
(B) 2, 0.75 (D) 2, 2
(B) K=3 and a=0.75
(C) K=4 and a=0. 5
ECE - 2007
(D) K=2 and a=0.5
2. If the closed-loop transfer function of a
control system is given as, ECE - 2014
(s) , then it is 6. The forward path transfer function of a
( )( )
(A) an unstable system unity negative feedback system is given
(B) an uncontrollable system by
(C) a minimum phase system (s)
(D) a non-minimum phase system (s )(s )
The value of K which will place both the
ECE - 2008 poles of the closed-loop system at the
3. A certain system has transfer function same location, is _______.
G(s) = , where is a parameter.

7. Consider a transfer function
Consider the standard negative unity
(s) with p a positive
feedback configuration as shown below ( ) ( )
real parameter. The maximum value of p
+ G(s)
until which remains stable is __________
EE - 2007
Which of the following statements is true? 1. The system shown in the figure is
(A) The closed loop system in never U1 + s
st l or ny v lu o Σ s
(B) or som pos t v v lu s o t
closed loop system is stable, but not
U2
for all positive values s
Σ +
(C) For all positive v lu s o t los
(A) stable
loop system is stable
(B) unstable
(D) The closed loop system is stable for
(C) conditionally stable
ll v lu s o ot pos t v n
(D) stable for input u1, but unstable for
negative
input u2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. If the loop gain K of a negative feedback (C) unstable and of the minimum phase
system having a loop transfer function type
( ) (D) unstable and of the non-minimum
to be adjusted to induce a sustained
( )
phase type
oscillation then
(A) The frequency of this oscillation
6. The frequency response of the linear
must be ⁄ rad/s. system ( ) is provided in the tabular
√
(B) The frequency of this oscillation form below.
must be 4rad/s ( ) ( )
(C) The frequency of this oscillation 1.3
must be 4 or ⁄ rad/s 1.2
√ 1.0
(D) Such a K does not exist
0.8
0.5
EE - 2008
0.3
3. Figure shows a feedback system where
The gain margin and phase margin of the
K > 0. The range of K for which the
system are
system is stable will be given by
+ (A) n
Σ s(s )(s ) (B) n
(C) n
(A) 0 < K < 30 (C) 0 < K < 390 (D) n
(B) 0 < K <39 (D) K > 390
EE - 2014
EE - 2009 7. In the formation of Routh-Hurwitz array
4. The first two rows of Routh's tabulation for a polynomial, all the elements of a row
of a third order equation are as follows. have zero values. This premature
s3 2 2 termination of the array indicates the
s2 4 4. presence of
This means there are (A) only one root at the origin
(A) two roots at s= ± j and one root in (B) imaginary roots
right half s-plane (C) only positive real roots
(B) two roots at s = ± j2 and one root in (D) only negative real roots
left half s-plane
(C) two roots at s= ± j2 and one root in 8. For the given system, it is desired that the
right half s-plane system be stable. The minimum value of
(D) two roots at s = ± j and one root in for this condition is __________
(s) (s)
left half s-plane (s )
s ( )s ( )s ( )
EE - 2011
5. An open loop system represented by the
( )
transfer function G(s) = ( )(
is 9. A system wth the open loop transfer
)
(A) stable and of the minimum phase function
type (s)
(B) stable and of the non-minimum s(s )(s s )
phase type
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
is connected in a negative feedback IN - 2008

configuration with a feedback gain of 2. A closed loop control system is shown
unity. For the closed loop system to be below. The range of the controller gain KC
marginally stable, the value of K is_________ which will make the real parts of all the
closed loop poles more negative than -1 is
10. A single-input single-output feedback +
system has forward transfer function G(s) s(s )
(s) _ ( )
and feedback transfer function H(s). It is
given that |G(s)H(s)| < 1. Which of the
following is true about the stability of the (A) KC> 4 (C) KC> 2
system? (B) KC> 0 (D) KC< 2
(A) The system is always stable
(B) The system is stable if all zeros of IN - 2010
G(s)H(s) are in left half of the s-plane 3. The open loop transfer function of a unity
(C) The system is stable if all poles of gain feedback system is given by:
G(s)H(s) are in left half of the s-plane ( )
G(s) = ( )(
. The range of positive
(D) It is not possible to say whether or )
not the system is stable from the values of k for which the closed loop
information given system will remain stable is:
(A) 1 <k <3 (C) 5 < k <
IN - 2006 (B) 0 < k < 10 (D) 0 < k <
1. The range of the controller gains (Kp, Ki)
that makes the closed loop control system IN - 2011
(shown in the following figure) stable is 4. rst two rows o out ’s t l o
given as third-order characteristic equation are
(s) (s) s 3 3
s (s )(s ) s 4 4
It can be inferred that the system has
Ki (A) one real pole in the right-half of s-
(A) Ki < 0 and Kp <  20
12 plane
K (B) a pair of complex conjugate poles in
(B) Ki < 0 and Kp  i  20
12 the right-half of s-plane
(C) Ki  0 and Kp  0 (C) a pair of real poles symmetrically
Ki placed around s = 0
(D) Ki  0 and Kp   20 (D) a pair of complex conjugate poles on
12
the imaginary axis of the s-plane
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD

ECE ( ) ( )
1. , -
(s ) (1+k)
(s)
(s s ( ) ( )) s ( ) s s =
From Routh array, s + (k + 1) = 0; a = k + 1;
 k =2 & a = 0.75 4a = k + 1;
From options, k = 2, a = 0.75
2. [Ans. D]
System is stable, controllable and non- 6. [Ans. *] Range 2.24 to 2.26
minimum phase system. Using root locus
3. [Ans. C]
losed loop gain is
( )
(s) s s s
Characteristic equation X X
(s) s ( )s
Calculation of break point
los loop system is stable only for
r or or ll pos t v o
(s )(s )
the closed loop system is stable.
(s )(s )
4. [Ans. C] s
s
Perform Routh analysis to the polynomial
in denominator of G(S). (s)
s 1 3 5 , -
s 2 6 3
s (∈) 7. [Ans. *] Range 1.9 to 2.1
For (s) to remain stable, the poles of
s ( ) 3 (s) should lie in LHP of s-plane
s 1 2–P
( )
s 3+P
. / s 2–P
( )
o m x mum v lu o s
3
Number of sign changes =2
EE
5. [Ans. A] 1. [Ans. D]
Characteristic equation is 1+G(S)H(S)= 0 u ( ) s y ( )
( ) s
1+
s s + s (k + 2) + (k + 1) = 0
1 k+2
a k+2 s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) 5. [Ans. B]
(s )
( ⁄ ) ( ) For G(s), poles are at 2 and 3 Stable
(s )
( ) ( ) Also, zeroes are to the right of S-plane
Pole is in LHS of s-plane, Hence stable. non-minimum phase type
u ( ) y ( )
6. [Ans. A]
s
At gain across over frequency ( ),
magnitude of ( ) is 1.
| ( )|
s
Phase of ( ) ( )
s
Phase of margin = ( )
( ⁄ ) ( )
( ) ( )
At phase cross frequency ( )p s o
s ( )s ( )
(s )(s ) M m gn tu o ( ) t
Hence unstable as it has pole at right | ( )|
hand side of S-plane Gain margin= log
2. [Ans. B] log
( )
T(s) =
( )
7. [Ans. B]
s 1 64+3k It is a special case under R-H stability
criteria. Imaginary roots are calculated
s using auxiliary polynomial
64+3k 8. [Ans. *] Range 0.61 to 0.63

Characteristic equation
s ( )s ( )s ( ) s
(or) for marginal stability
For K = 16, r ⁄s
s ( )s s
3. [Ans. C] rt r
s 1
(s) s 1
( ( )( ) )
s ( )
Characteristics equation
s s s s 1
s ( ) ( )
s ( )( )
s √
√
& k < 390 (for stability)
4. [Ans. D]
s s s
 (s )(s ) S=
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
s 12
√ √
s ( )
√
M n mum v lu
9. [Ans. 5]
n
s(s )(s s )

(s s)(s s )
s s s s s s
s s s s 2. [Ans. C]
s(s )
s 1 6 k s s
s 4 4 0 √
√
s 5 K
s √ or √
s 1
Put S = Z – 1 and apply RH criterion for

Value of k to be marginally stable the polynomial in z
K=5
3. [Ans. D]
10. [Ans. A] 1 + G(s) H(s) = 0
Characteristic equation of system (s + 1) (s + 2) + k(s+3) = 0
(s) (s) System is stable, for all positive K.(from
G(s) H(s) = Routh Hurwitz criterion)
For system to be stable all the zeroes of (or)
G(s) H(s) should lie in left of ( ) plane
So for (s) (s) 4. [Ans. D]
The system will be always stable. 3 3
4 4
IN S 0(∈ )
1. [Ans. D] 1 4
Characteristic equation is s
s(s+2)(s+10)+( ) ( )( )
s s s S=
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Root Locus Technique
ECE - 2007 ( )
(A) (s) (s)
( )( )
1. A unity feedback control system has an ( )
open-loop transfer function (B) (s) (s)
( )( )
(s) . The gain K for which (C) (s) (s)
( ) ( )( )( )
s= 1+j1 will lie on the root locus of this (D) (s) (s)
( )
( ) )
system is
(A) 4 (C) 6.5
ECE - 2014
(B) 5.5 (D) 10
4. Consider the feedback system shown in
the figure. The Nyquist plot of G(s) is also
ECE - 2009
shown. Which one of the following
2. The feedback configuration and the pole-
conclusions is correct?
zero locations of G(s) = are shown
(s)
below. The root locus for negative values
of k, i.e. for s
Im ( )
breakaway/break-in points and angle of
departure at pole P (with respect to the
positive real axis) equal to
+
+ k G(s)
( )
Im(s)
(A) G (s) is an all-pass filter
(B) G (s) is a strictly proper transfer
function
(C) G (s) is a stable and minimum-phase
Re(s) transfer function
P
(D) The closed-loop system is unstable
for sufficiently large and positive k
(A) ± √ and 00 (C) ± √ and 00
(B) ± √ and 450 (D) ± √ and 450 5. In the root locus plot shown in the figure,
the pole/zero marks and the arrows have
ECE - 2011 been removed. Which one of the following
3. The root locus plot for a system is given transfer functions has this root locus?
below. The open loop transfer function
corresponding to this plot is given by
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) j
(A)
( )( )( )
(B)
( )( )( )
(C)
( )( )( ) +1
2 1 +2
( )( )
(D)
( )( )
6. The characteristic equation of a unity (D) j

negative feedback system is
(s) . The open loop transfer
function G(s) has one pole at 0 and two
poles at 1. The root locus of the system
1 +1
for varying K is shown in the figure. 2 +2
EE - 2010
( ) 2. The characteristic equation of a closed-
loop system is
s(s )(s ) (s ) .
Which of the following statements is true?
(A) Its roots are always real
The constant damping ratio line, for (B) It cannot have a breakaway point in
ξ nt rs ts t root lo us t po nt the range ,s- 0
The distance from the origin to point A is (C) Two of its roots tend to infinity along
given as 0.5. The value of K at point A the asymptotes Re, -
is__________ (D) It may have complex roots in the
right half plane.
EE - 2006
1. A Closed – loop system has the EE - 2011
characteristic function 3. The open loop transfer function G(s) of a
(s )(s ) + K (s ) = 0. Its root unity feedback control system is given as,
locus plot against K is . /
G(s) =
j𝛚 ( )
(A)
From the root locus, it can be inferred
that when k tends to positive infinity.
(A) three roots with nearly equal real
2 1 +1 +2
parts exist on the left half of the s-
plane
(B) j (B) one real root is found on the right
half of the s-plane
(C) the root loci cross the j axis for a
fin t v lu o ≠
2 +1 +2 (D) three real roots are found on the
right half of the s-plane
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2014 controller of gain K in the forward path, in

4. The root locus of a unity feedback system a unity feedback configuration.
is shown in the figure 2. The transfer function is
(A) ( )( )( (C) ( )( )( )
)
(B) (D) ( )( )(
X ( )( )( ) )
X
3. If the root locus plot of the closed loop

The closed loop transfer function of the system passes through the points ± j√ ,
system is the maximum value of K for stability of
(s) the unity feedback closed loop system is
( )
(s) (s )(s ) (A) √ (C) 10
(s) (B) 6 (D) 6√
( )
(s) (s )(s )
(s) IN - 2008
( )
(s) (s )(s ) 4. The open loop transfer function of a unity
(s) ( )
( ) feedback system is G(s)= .
(s) (s )(s ) ( )( )
The root locus plot of the system has
IN - 2006 (A) Two breakaway points located at s
1. The root locus of a plant is given in the = 0.59 and s = 3.41
following figure. The root locus crosses (B) One breakaway point located at s
= 0.59
imaginary at ω=4 2 rad/s with gain
(C) One breakaway point located at s
K=384. It is observed that the point
= 3.41
s= 1.5+j1.5 lies in the root locus. The
(D) One breakaway point located at s
gain K at +j1.5 is computed as
= 1.41
IN - 2009
1.5+j1.5 5. A unity feedback system has the transfer
( )
X X X function ( )
. The value of b for which
8 4 0
the loci of all the three roots of the closed
loop characteristic equation meet at a
single point is
(A) 10/9 (C) 30/9
(A) 11.3 (C) 41.25 (B) 20/9 (D) 40/9
(B) 21.2 (D) 61.2
IN - 2011
IN - 2007 6. Consider the second-order system with
the characteristic equation
and 3 ) (s )
s(s . Based on the
A transfer function with unity DC gain has
properties of the root loci, it can be shown
three poles at and and no
that the complex portion of the root loci
finite zeros. A plant with this transfer
of the given system for is
function is connected with a proportional
described by a circle, and the two
breakaway points on the real axis are
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A)
√ (C) √ IN - 2014
(D) √ 8. A loop transfer function is given by :
(B) √ (s )
(s) (s)
( )
IN - 2012 The point of intersection of the
7. The open loop transfer function of a unity asymptotes of G(s)H(s) on the real axis in
gain negative feedback control system is the s-plane is at ___________.
given by G(s) = ( )(
ngl t
)
which the root locus approaches the zeros
of the system, satisfies
(A) t n . /
(B) = t n . /
(C) = t n . /
(D) = t n . /
ECE
1. [Ans. D]
ro u t o p sor r wn rom op n loop pol s to t t po nt
pro u t o p sor r wn rom op n loop z ro to t t po nt
√ √ √
√
2. [Ans. B] 5. [Ans. B]
( )
  √
( )
Angle of departure is
Where Σ z Σ z
3. [Ans. B]
From plot we can observe that one pole
terminates at one zero at position and
three poles terminates to . It means
there are four poles and 1 zero. Pole at There are 4 poles/zeros at
goes on both sides. It means there are two s = 1,
poles at There has to be one pole – zero pair at
both cannot be poles or zeros
4. [Ans. D] at the same time.
For larger values of K, it will encircle the So option A and D are crossed out
critical point ( ) which makes There are 2 asymptotes. So number of
closed-loop system unstable. poles is two more than number of zeros.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Since there has to be one zero at either (s )

s or s , the remaining break (s )(s )
frequencies are all poles Zero of OLTF s = 1: z = 1
ons r Poles of OLTF s =
opt on
ntro po nt w r t symptot s m t
The picture forms to this

For option C, centroid is at 0 which is s l n
wrong
Hence Option B is correct. The root locus starts from open – loop
poles and terminates either on open loop
6. [Ans. *] Range 0.32 to 0.41 zero or infinity.
Root locus exist on a section of real axis it
is the sum of the open – loop poles and
ξ zeros to the right of the section is odd.
Number of branches terminating on
infinity.
Angles of asymptotes
( )
( )
( ) or
( )
So the co-ordinates of point A is Intersection of asymptotes on real axis

(centroid)
Σpol s Σz ros
√
( ) ( )
On the root locus, we know ( )
√ 1
Option (B) is correct on the basis of above
( )
analysis.
EE
2. [Ans. C]
1. [Ans. B]
Characteristic function )(s ) (s )
s(s
(s )(s ) (s ) (s )
(s )
(s) (s) s(s )(s )
(s )(s )
Comparing with 1 + G(s) H(s) = 0
Open loop transfer function
G(s)H(s) = open-loop transfer function
(s) (s)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(s )
( )
s(s )(s )
Number of zeros = Z = 1, zero at
Number of poles = P = 3
Poles at 0, &
Number of branches terminating at 2 ⁄ 0
infinity =
Angle of asymptotes
( )
So all these roots have nearly equal real
( ) parts on left half plane when
( ) 4. [Ans. C]
n
Σ pol s Σ z ros
ntr o
( )
X
Im g n ry
Given root locus is complementary root

locus for which either k < 0 or loop gain
is +ve means +ve feedback, means G(s) is
X X X always +ve
l
So for k > 0
G(s) H(s) =
( )( )
(s) (s)
(s) (s) (s)
Breakaway point lies in the range (s)
,s- and two branches (s )(s )
(s)
terminates at infinity along the
asymptotes Re(s) IN
1. [Ans. C]
3. [Ans. A]
(s s) (s)
(s) s(s )(s )
s (s ) (s) (s)
ntro (s)
s s s
Angle of asymptotes ts ( )
q …( – Z – 1) s √ s √
√ s
for poles at zero
√
, -
√
so Rool locus is √ √ √
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Note that the data given at the s )(s

intersecting point with imaginary axis is (s )
not necessary We need to find the breakaway point.
o
2. [Ans. B] s
With unity DC gain, poles at or
s n and no finite zeros s
(s )( s s) (s s )
l nt s s s s s s
(s )(s )(s )
s ( )s s
3. [Ans. C] ow s is not the breakaway point
( ) o s ( )s
T(s)= ( )( )( )
( ) For all the three root loci to meet at a
 s s s ( ) single point, we need that this equation
s has equal roots.
s ( ) o( )
s ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
row has zero elements if 6k = 60 or ( )( )
k = 10 then 2 roots lie on the imaginary axis
given by s s √ . If k > 10, so or
the root at √ s t to o s pl n But b = 20 is not the required value of b
because it will cancel out an open-loop
4. [Ans. C] pole
( ) ( )
(s)  o st r qu r v lu
( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
 =0
( )
6. [Ans. C]
s s ( )
S= K=
√ ( )
RL exists at 3.41 .( )( ) ( ) /
( )
( )
√
S= √
7. [Ans. D]
s
( ) (s)
s(s )(s )
(s ( ))(s ( ))
(s)
s(s )(s )
5. [Ans. B]
(s )
(s)
s (s )
For unity feedback, characteristic
equation is 1+ G(s) = 0
s s s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Angle at which RLD approaches to zeros

is the angle of arrival for zeros.
, -
( ) 0 . /1
t nt ( )
[ t n ( )]
* [ t nt ( )]+
t n ( )
8. [Ans. ]
Int r s t on o symptot s
sum o pol s sum o z ros
num r o pol s num r o z ro
( ) ( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Frequency Response Analysis Using Nyquist plot
ECE - 2006
1. The open-loop transfer function of a G(s)
unity-gain feedback control system is
given by, G(s) = ( )(
. The gain
)
margin of the system in dB is given by
(A) 0 (C) 20
(B) 1 (D) 4. Which of the following statement is true?
(A) G(s) is an all-pass filter
2. Consider two transfer functions, (B) G(s) has a zero in the right-half plane
(s) and (s) . The (C) G(s) is the impedance of a passive
3-dB bandwidths of their frequency network
responses are, respectively (D) G(s) is marginally stable
(A) √ √
5. The gain and phase margins of G(s) for
(B) √ √
closed loop stability are
(C) √ √ (A) 6 dB and (C) 6 dB and
(D) √ √ (B) 3 dB and (D) 3 dB and
3. The Nyquist plot of ( ) ( ) for a ECE - 2011

closed loop control system, passes Common Data Question 6 and 7:
through ( ) point in the GH plane. The input – output transfer function of a
The gain margin of the system in dB is plant ( ) . The plant is placed
( )
equal to
(A) Infinite in a unity negative feedback configuration
(B) greater than zero as shown in the figure below.
r u y
(C) less than zero (s)
s(s )
(D) zero
l nt
ECE - 2009
Common Data for Question 4 and 5 6. The signal flow graph that DOES NOT
The Nyquist plot of a stable transfer model the plant transfer function ( ) is
function G(s) is shown in the figure. We (A)
are interested in the stability of the closed 1 1/s 1/s 1/s
u 100 y
loop system in the feedback configuration
shown
Im
(B)
1/s 1/s 1/s 100

u y
Re
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) (D)
u 1/s 1/s 1/s 100 y

⁄
(D)
EE - 2006
1/s 1/s 1/s 100
u y 1. Consider the following Nyquist plots of
loop transfer functions over = 0 to
= . Which of these plots represents a
7. The gain margin of the system under
stable closed loop system?
closed loop unity negative feedback is
(1) Im
(A) 0 dB (C) 26 dB
(B) 20 dB (D) 46 dB R
=
8. For the transfer function Re
( ) the corresponding Nyquist 1
plot for the positive frequency has the form
(A)
(2) Im
5 =
Re
(B)
(3) Im
j5
=
Re
(C) (4) Im
=
⁄ Re
1
(A) (1) only

(B) all, except (1)
(C) all, except (3)
(D) (1) and (2) only
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2007 (A) Im
2. If x = Re G(j ), and y = Im G(j ) then for
, the Nyquist plot for 3/4
G(s) = 1 / s(s+1) (s+2) becomes
asymptotic to the line Re
(A) x = 0 (C) x = y
(B) x = (D) d = y / √
EE - 2009
3. The polar plot of an open loop stable 𝛚=0
system is shown below. The closed loop 𝛚=0 Im
system is (B)
Imaginary
Real
Re
3/4
(A) Always stable

(B) Marginally stable (C) 𝛚=0 Im
(C) Unstable with one pole on the RHS s-
plane
(D) Unstable with two poles on the RHS
s-plane
4. The open loop transfer function of a

unity feedback system is given by Re
( )⁄
G(s) = s The gain margin of this
system is 1/6
(A) 11.95dB (C) 21.33dB
(B) 17.67dB (D) 23.9dB Im
(D)
EE - 2010
Re
5. The frequency response of
(s) ,s(s )(s )- plotted in the
complex ( ) plane (for ) is
𝛚=0
1/6
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2011 IN - 2009
6. A two-loop position control system is 4. A unity feedback control loop with an
shown below. open transfer function of the form
( )
Motor
(s) (s) has a gain crossover frequency of 1 rad/s
s(s ) and a phase margin of . If an element
√
having a transfer function is inserted
s √
Tacho-generator into the loop, the phase margin will
The gain k of the Tacho-generator become
influences mainly the (A) (C)
(A) peak overshoot (B) (D)
(B) natural frequency of oscillation
(C) phase shift of the closed loop IN - 2011
transfer function at very low Common Data for Questions 5 and 6
frequencies ( ) The open-loop transfer function of a unity
(D) phase shift of the closed loop negative feedback control system is given
transfer function at very high by G(s) = ( )
frequencies ( ) 5. The value of K for the phase margin of the
system to be 45° is
IN - 2008 (A) 250√ (C) 125√
1. For the closed loop system shown below
(B) 250√ (D) 125√
to be stable, the value of time delay TD (in
seconds) should be less than
6. v lu o or t mp ng r t o to
be 0.5, corresponding to the dominant
(s) (s)
closed-loop complex conjugate pole pair
is
(A) 250 (C) 75
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
(B) 125 (D) 50
(B) ⁄ (D)
IN - 2012
7. The open loop transfer function of a unity
&3
negative feedback control system is given
Consider a unity feedback system with
by
open loop transfer function
G(s) = . The gain margin of the
G(s) = ( )(
( )( )
)
system is
2. The phase crossover frequency of the
(A) 10.8 dB (C) 34.1dB
system in radians per second is
(B) 22.3dB (D) 45.6dB
(A) 0.125 (C) 0.5
(B) 0.25 (D) 1
IN - 2014
8. The loop transfer function of a feedback
3. The gain margin of the system is
control system is given by
(A) 0.125 (C) 0.5
(B) 0.25 (D) 1 (s) (s)
s(s )( s )
Its phase crossover frequency (in rad/s),
approximated to two decimal places, is __.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 6. [Ans. D]
1. [Ans. D] 𝐹or option (D).
( )
(s) ( )
(s )(s )
or g n m rg n s not tr ns r un t on o (s)
t n ( ) t n . /
7. [Ans. C]
t n ( ⁄ ) (s) (s)
s(s )
=0 t n ( )
For phase cross-over frequency,
o (s) [ ]
Gain margin = log 0 1 t n ( )

Using Root locus of G(s) r s
ut s
( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
M ( ) ( )
root locus will cut the = 0 axis only
M n log
when k
So gain margin = 0 1 8. [Ans. A]
( )
2. [Ans. C] =5
BW depends only on denominator and is So ( ) is a straight line parallel to
equal to √( ) axis.
3. [Ans. D] EE
At ( ) ( ) 1. [Ans. A]
Assuming no.of open loop poles in the
GM = 20 log | |
( ) ( ) RHS of s – plane = P = 0
Complete nyquist plots
4. [Ans. B] Im
5. [Ans. C]
At ( ) ( ) GM = 20
log | |
At ( ) ( )
PM =
No.of encirclements = N = 0
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
N=P–Z=0 Hence the system is unstable

So option (A) is correct
Hence system is stable. 2. [Ans. B]

Imj ( )
( ) ( )
( )( ) ( )( )
symptot to x = s
3. [Ans. D]
2 clockwise encirclement of 1 + j0
= 0; N = 2 =2
Z = number of closed loop ploes in RHS

Two anti – clockwise encirclement Hence system is unstable
N=2
P–Z=N=2 4. [Ans. D]
Open loop transfer function, G(s) =
Put s =
Hence system is unstable.
Im ( )
At phase crossover frequency ( )

phase of OLTF is
( )
Two clockwise encirclement of – 1 | | s lw ys or ny v lu o

Hence N = 2
( )
n t (p s ross r qu n y)
Hence the system is unstable ( )

Im
Gain margin = 20log
| ( )|
log
5. [Ans. A]
( )
( ) (
(( ) ) ) (( ) ( ))
As G( )
s ( ) -0 +
Option (A) satisfies above
Two clockwise encirclement of – 1
Hence N = 2
Z=2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. A] 2. [Ans. C]
( )
( ) t n ( )
T(s) =
( )
( )
( ) t n ( ) t n ( )
( ) 
r s ξ
  r s
M is dependent on K (A) is correct
is independent of K (B) is not
correct 3. [Ans. A]
( )
T(J ) = ( ) ( )
( )
( ) t n . /
t low r qu n s ( )≈
t g r qu n s ( )≈ 4. [Ans. A]
( ) n ( ) r p rt lly orr t M o (s)
( t n . /)  √
IN
( √ )
1. [Ans. C] (s) =
( √ ) ( )
s
(s) y(s) PM of (s) = ( )
5. [Ans. B]
PM = 45°= 180° t n . /
t n . / rad/sec
(s) y(s) ( ) |( |
)
√
G(s) =
6. [Ans. A]
For system to be stable G(s) should lie in
the left of ( 1, 0) r t r st qu t on
(s )
For finding the critical/ marginal value s s s ( )
apply phase condition The dominant poles are given by
w w s s ( )
or (s) s s ( )
s
(s) | |
s
w w
So w or
For stable system 7. [Ans. C]

= 15 r/s
√ √
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
G.M in dB = log 0 1
8. [Ans. *]Range 0.30 to 0.34

(s) (s)
s(s )( s )
or
(s) (s) t n ( ) t n ( )
t n ( )
As t n
So =1
r s
r s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Frequency Response Analysis Using Bode Plot
ECE - 2006 ECE - 2010

Statement for Linked Answer Questions 1 4. For the asymptotic Bode magnitude plot
&2 shown below, the system transfer
Consider a unity-gain feedback control function can be
system whose open-loop transfer M gn tu
function is
( )
1. The value of 'a' so that the system has a
phase-margin equal to is approximately
equal to
(A) 2.40 (C) 0.84
(B) 1.40 (D) 0.74
(A) (C)
2. With the value of 'a' set for a phase-
(B) (D)
margin of the value of unit-impulse
response of the open-loop system at
ECE - 2014
second is equal to
5. The phase margin in degrees of
(A) 3.40 (C) 1.84
(B) 2.40 (D) 1.74 ( ) calculated using
( )( )( )
the asymptotic Bode plot is ________.
ECE - 2007
3. The asymptotic bode plot of a transfer 6. In a Bode magnitude plot, which one of
function is as shown in the figure. The the following slopes would be exhibited at
transfer function G(s) corresponds to this high frequencies by a 4th order all-pole
Bode plot is system
|G( )|(dB) (A) (C)
(B) (D)
60
20 dB/decade 7. The Bode asymptotic magnitude plot of a
minimum phase system is shown in the
40
figure.
40 dB/decade
20
2
0 0 ( )
0.1 1 10 100 ( )
60 dB/decade
(A) (C) (r ⁄s) n log s l

( )( ) ( )( )
If the system is connected in a unity
(B) (D)
( )( ) ( )( ) negative feedback configuration, the
steady state error of the closed loop
system, to a unit ramp input, is_________.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2006 EE - 2008
1. The Bode magnitude plot of 2. The asymptotic Bode magnitude plot of a
H (j ) = (
( )
is minimum phase transfer function is
)( )
shown in the figure.
(A) ( )
( ) 40 dB/ decade
40 (dB)
20
20
20 dB/ decade
0.1 (r s)
0 +1 +3 Log ( ) (log scale)
+2 20
0 0 dB/ decade
This transfer function has

(A) Three poles and one zero
(B)
( ) (B) Two poles and one zero
40 (C) Two poles and two zeros
(D) One pole and two zeros
20
EE - 2009
3. The asymptotic approximation of the
0 +1 +2 +3 Log ( ) log-magnitude vs frequency plot of a
system containing only real poles and
zeros is shown. Its transfer function is
40 dB / dec
60 dB / dec
( ) 80 dB
(C)
40
20
0 +1 +2 +3 Log ( ) r s
0.1 2 5 25
( ) ( )
(A) ( )(
(C) ( )(
) )
( ) ( )
(B) ( )(
(D) ( )(
) )
( )
(D)
40 EE - 2014
4. The Bode magnitude plot of the transfer
20
( )( )
function (s) is shown
. /( ). /
0
+1 +2 +3 Log ( ) below:
Note that -6 dB/octave = -20 dB/decade.
The value of is_______
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
The gain and phase margin of the system

t v are
t v (A) 0 dB, 180° (C) 0 dB, 10°
t v t v
(B) 3.88 dB, 170° (D) 3.88 dB, 10°
t v
IN - 2008
2. The Bode asymptotic plot of a transfer
t v
function is given below. In the frequency
(r ⁄s ) range shown, the transfer function has
dB
5. For the transfer function
(s ) + 20dB / decade
( )
s(s )(s s ) 20dB / decade
The values of the constant gain term and 0dB / decade

the highest corner frequency of the Bode
plot respectively are
(A) 3.2, 5.0 (C) 3.2, 4.0 log
(B) 16.0, 4.0 (D) 16.0, 5.0
(A) 3 poles and 1 zero
6. The magnitude Bode plot of a network is (B) 1 pole and 2 zeroes
shown in the figure (C) 2 poles and 1 zero
( )
lop (D) 2 poles and 2 zeroes
IN - 2010
3. The asymptotic Bode magnitude plot of a
log
lead network with its pole and zero on the
left half of the s-plane is shown in the
The maximum phase angle and the adjoining figure. The frequency at which
corresponding gain respectively, are the phase angle of the network is
(A) 30° and 1.73dB maximum (in rad/s) is
(B) 30° and 4.77dB
(C) + 30° and 4.77dB
(D) + 30° and 1.73dB
IN - 2006
r s
1. A unity feedback system has the following
(log scale)
open loop frequency response:
(r s ) ( ) ( ) (A) (C)
√
2 7.5
(B) (D)
3 4.8 √
4 3.15
5 2.25 IN - 2013
6 1.7 4. The Bode plot of a transfer function G(s)
8 1 is shown in the figure below.
10 0.64
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
The gain (20 log|G(s)|) is 32 dB and -8 dB

at 1 rad/s and 10 rad/s respectively. The
phase is negative for all . Then G(s) is
Gain (dB)
40 (A) (C)
32
(B) (D)
20
5. The discrete – time transfer function
0 is
1 10 (A) Non – minimum phase and unstable.
-8 100
(r s) (B) Minimum phase and unstable.
(C) Minimum phase and stable.
(D) Non – minimum phase and stable.
ECE 4. [Ans. A]
1. [Ans. C] . / ( )
G(s) =
| ( )| . / ( )
M ( )
w r ( ) t n ( ) 5. [Ans. *] Range 42 to 48
( )
M
t n ( ) 
√
√
  = 0.84
2. [Ans. C]
( )
(s)  g(t) u(t) t u(t)
( )
At t = 1, g(t) ( )( )( )
From the plot frequency at which gain is 0
3. [Ans. D] dB is r s
( )
(s)
s(s )( ) M
o plot s ( ) orm
6. [Ans. A]
r t’s typ syst m so
In a transfer function if all are poles if we
log | plot the BODE diagram, then an each and
every corner frequency we have to
| introduce a line of slope
K = 100 and hence on the 4th frequency the slope
of line will become – 80 dB/sec and will
continue upto infinity
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. *] Range 0.49 to 0.51 2. [Ans. C]

From the Bode plot given, we can see that Initial slope is – 40 dB/decade, it means
there are 2 break frequencies at = 2 there are double pole at origin. Slope
and = 10 rad/sec. Also it is a type 1 changes from dB/decade to
system. dB/decade. It means there is a zero.
So, the transfer function is Slope changes from dB/decade to 0
( ) dB/decade at some other frequency. It
( )
( ) means there is one more zero. Therefore
At = 1 rad/sec, ( ) transfer function has two poles and zeros.
(given)
20 log | | 3. [Ans. B]
( s )
log
s ( s )( s )
So,
( )
( )
( ) log ( log )
In s domain,
( s) (s )
(s) . /
( s) s(s )
(s ) s . /. /
l m s (s) lm
s (s )
( ) s (s )(s )
4. [Ans. *] Range 0.7 to 0.8

EE
For initial dotted slope
1. [Ans. A]
( ) ( ) log ( )
( )
( )( ) log log
( ) log log
( )( )
Corner frequencies are 1, 10 & 100
. /. /
rad/sec (s)
( ) ( ) . /. /. /
log
( )
5. [Ans. A]
(s )
(s)
s(s )(s s )
( s )
log
s( )( s) . /
log log
( )
log log
log log n m x mum r qu n y r s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. C] . /
(s)
( ) . /
has 2 poles and 1 zero
s
s 3. [Ans. B]
t n t n This condition is only for phase lead N/W
=√
√
( ) 4. [Ans. B]
( ) ( ) 32 dB
1 10
√
t n √ t n
√ to
Is 1 dec are change & change is (G) is
√ . /
√ √ 40dB
g n √
√ lop s
. /
√ r r pol s s or g n
g n log √ So, G(s)=
= 32 dB
IN
1. [Ans. D] (given) log . /|
 M log
r =
log ( )
s  M
= 3.88 dB
5. [Ans. D]
z
2. [Ans. C] (z)
Compare with Bode magnitude plot of z
For minimum phase system, all poles and
standard transfer function.
zeros must lie inside the unit circle. For
. / stable system, all poles must be inside the
( )
unit circle. For the system, zero is at 2
. /
pole is at 0.5. This system is stable but
non – minimum phase.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Compensators & Controllers
ECE - 2006
Z
1. The transfer function of a phase-lead
compensator is given by (s) -
+
where . The maximum phase-shift
provided by such a compensator is
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄ Group I
(B) ⁄ (D) ⁄
ECE - 2007
2. A control system with PD controller is
shown in the figure. If the velocity error
constant Kv =1000 and the damping ratio
ξ t n t v lu s o p and KD are
+ s y
Group II
r Σ s(s )
1. PID controller
2. Lead compensator
3. Lag compensator
(A) Kp=100, KD=0.09 (A) Q – 1, R – 2 (C) Q – 2, R – 3
(B) Kp=100, KD=0.9 (B) Q – 1, R – 3 (D) Q – 3, R – 2
(C) Kp=10, KD=0.09
(D) Kp=10, KD=0.9 ECE - 2009
5. The magnitude plot of a rational transfer
3. The open-loop transfer function of a plant function G(s) with real coefficients is
shown below. Which of the following
is given as 0 (s) 1. If the plant is
compensators has such a magnitude plot?
operated in a unity feedback ( )
configuration, Then the lead compensator 20dB
that can stabilize this control system is
( ) ( )
(A) (C)
log
( ) ( )
(B) (D)
(A) Lead compensator
ECE - 2008 (B) Lag compensator
4. Group 1 gives two possible choices for the (C) PID compensator
impedance Z in the diagram. The circuit (D) Lead – lag Compensator
elements in Z satisfy the condition
ECE - 2010
R2C2 >R1C1. The transfer function
6. A unity negative feedback closed loop
represents a kind of controller. Match the system has a plant with the transfer
impedances in Group I with the types of function G(s) = and a controller
controllers in Group II.
(s) in the feed forward path. For a unit
step input, the transfer function of the
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
controller that gives minimum steady (D) A lag-lead compensator that provides
state error is an attenuation of 20 dB and phase
(A) (s) lead of 450 at the frequency of 3
rad/s
(B) (s)
( )( )
(C) (s) EE - 2008
( )( )
2. The transfer function of two
(D) (s) s
compensators are given below
(s ) s
ECE - 2012 (s ) (s )
Statement Linked answer Questions 7 and Which one of the following statements is
8 correct?
The transfer function of a compensator is (A) C1 is a lead compensator and C2 is a
given as lag compensator
(s) . (B) C1 is a lag compensator and C2 is a
lead compensator
7. Gc(s)is a lead compensator if (C) Both C1 and C2 are lead
(A) compensators
(B) (D) Both C1 and C2 are lag compensators
(C)
(D) IN - 2006
1. The transfer function of a position servo
8. The phase of the above lead compensator 1
is maximum at system is given as G (s) = . A first
s(s  1)
(A) √ r s (C) √ r s
order compensator is designed in a unity
(B) √ r s (D) √ r s
feedback configuration so that the poles
of the compensated system are placed at
EE - 2007
– 1  j1 and 4. The transfer function of
1. The system 900/s(s+1)(s+9) is to be
the compensated system is
compensated such that its gain-crossover ( )
(A) (C)
frequency becomes same as its ( )
( )
uncompensated phase-crossover frequ- (B) (D)
ency and provides a 450 phase margin. To
achieve this, one may use Common Data Questions 2, 3, 4
(A) A lag compensator that provides an The following figure describes the block
attenuation of 20 dB and a phase lag diagram of a closed loop process control
of 450 at the frequency of √ rad/s system. The unit of time is given in
(B) A lead compensator that provides an minute
amplification of 20dB and a phase ontroll r l nt stur n (s)
lead of 450 at the frequency of 3 m(s)
r(s) (s)
rad/s ( )
s
(s)
(C) A lag-lead compensator that provides
an amplification of 20 dB and a phase
lag of 450 at the frequency of √
rad/s.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. The digital implementation of the ECE/EE/IN - 2013

controller with a sampling time of 0.1 6. The open – loop transfer function of a dc
minute using velocity algorithm is ( )
motor is given as . When
( )
connected in feedback as shown below,
( ) m( ) * ( ) ∑ ( )+
the approximate value of that will
reduce the time constant of closed loop
( ) m( ) system by one hundred times as
* ( ) ∑ ( )+
compared to that of the open – loop
( ) m( ) ) system is
m(
R(s) (s) (s)
, ( ) ( )-
( ) m( ) m( )
, ( ) ( )-
3. Suppose a disturbance signal

d(t)= sin 0.2t unit is applied. Then at (A) 1 (C) 10
steady state, the amplitude of the output (B) 5 (D) 100
e(t) due to the effect of disturbance alone
is IN - 2014
(A) 0.129 unit (C) 0.529 unit 7. Consider the control system shown in
(B) 0.40 unit (D) 2.102 unit figure with feed forward action for
rejection of a measurable disturbance
4. The control action recommended for d(t). The value of K, for which the
reducing the effect of disturbance at the disturbance response at the output 𝑦( ) is
output(provided that the disturbance zero mean, is:
(t)
signal is measurable) is
(A) cascade control
(B) P-D control y(t)
(C) ratio control r(t)
s
(D) feedback-feed forward control
IN - 2007 (A) 1 (C) 2

5. A Cascade control system with (B) 1 (D) 2
proportional controllers is shown below.
(s)
( )( ) ( s )
(s)
Theoretically, the largest values of the

gains and that can be set without
causing instability of the closed loop
system are:
(A) 10 and 100 (C) 10 and 10
(B) 100 and 10 (D) n
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 4. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. D]
M xp s s t (s)
t n t n s
From maximum phase shift s
s
t
( ) (t )
, ( ) - ( )
s
( ) (s) (s )(s )
(s) s
( )
The above equation is a PID controller
or
√ s
t n (√ ) t n
√ s
( ) ( )
2. [Ans. B] ( ) ( )
( ) The above equation is a lag compensator.
(s)
(s s ) ( )
m (s) (s)
( ) 5. [Ans. D]
m
(s ) ( ) plot shows presence of 2 poles &
2 zeroes in Bode equivalent plot
comparing Eq.(1) with standard 2nd
order equation 6. [Ans. D]
m
√
s
ξ m
S.E(s)= s for (D)
s ( ( ) ( ))
3. [Ans. A] 7. [Ans. A]
(s) t n t n
s (s )(s )
for phase lead should be positive
The lead compensator C(s) should first
stabilize the plant i.e. remove term t n t n
( )
(s )
(s) (s) Option (A) & (C) satisfies, it may be
(s )(s ) (s )
Only option (A) is satisfies. observed have be observed that option (C)
will have poles and zero in RHS of s – plane,
thus not possible (not a practical system)
it can be concluded that option (A) is right
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. A] A lag lead compensator that provides an

y ( ) t n t n attention of 20dB and phase lead of 45 at
the frequency of 3rad/sec is used.
For maximum phase shift
t
2. [Ans. A]
t n t n is always positive
⁄ t n t n is always negative
sl n s l g omp ns tor
IN
1. [Ans. C]
√ r s Let the T.F of the compensator be (s)
o t omp ns t syst m
( )
EE (s) (s) ( )
1. [Ans. D] ( )
(s) (s)
( )
|
s(s )(s ) (s)
s(s ) (s)
r s ol s o t omp ns t syst m r g v n s s
√ √ s
(s )
| ( ) ( )| | | t (s)
s(s )(s ) (s )
r t r st qu t on
s(s )(s ) (s )
,(s ) -(s )
s ( )s ( )s
. / (s s )(s )
s s s
. /
( )
M log
| ( ) ( )|
(s )
M log ( ) (s)
(s )
Negative GM implies that the system is
unstable. should become gain 2. [Ans. A]
cross over frequency, r s , v n
the magnitude should be 0dB. m(s) (s) { ( )}
o m t m gn tu ‘ ’ t s
r s a lag compensator which { (s) (s)}
s
gives an attenuation of 20dB(before
compensation the magnitude is 20dB)
m( ) * ( ) ∑ ( )+
and to obtain 45 phase margin at
r s a lead compensator with I(s)
a phase lead of 45 is used. s pl tr ns orm o (t) t
s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. B] s ( ) 0
The given diagram can be reduced as For stable system all elements of first
(s) (s) column should be greater than zero. By
(s)
substituting all the given options in
o nt o ’ w ll g v n g t v v lu
except option D.
s
( ) ( )
6. [Ans. C]
r ns r un t on (s) ( ) ( ) Open loop transfer function of a dc motor
as
( )
( )
( ) R(s) (s) (s)
( ) ( )
(s) (s)
( )
d(t)= sin 0.2t
or g tt ng mult ply ng tor
| | Topic: P controller with unity feed back
Formula: For first order system loop
| | ( )
√ ( ) transfer function is comparing
( )
( )
with . Now for
o mpl tu o output (t) ( )
n t l mpl tu closed loop overall transfer function is
given by
( ) . /
4. [Ans. B] ( ) . /
(PD controller can be used)

( )
5. [Ans. D] Dividing numerator and denominator by

(s)
10
( )( ) ( s ) ( )
(s) ow ( ) . /
o
(s)
(s)
((s )( s ) )( s ) ( y omp r ng rom ormul )
In Question given that time constant of
closed loop system is times of
( )
( ) (( )( ) )( ) so
Characteristics equation is
s s ( )s . /
( )
For stability, according to R-H array
s 6 (6+3k2)
s 11 ( ) approximate value
s ( ) 0
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. D]
y(s) (s) ( (s) y(s)) [ ]
s
y(s)
(s) (s) [ ]
s
(s) [ ]
s
(s) [ ]
Zero means at
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
State Variable Analysis
ECE - 2006 3. The Eigen value and eigenvector pairs

1. A linear system is described by the ( v ) for the system are
following state equation (A) . 0 1/ and . 0 1/
̇ (t) ̇ (t) (t) 0 1
(B) . 0 1/ and . 0 1/
The state-transition matrix of the system
is (C) . 0 1/ and . 0 1/
os t s nt
(A) 0 1 (D) . 0 1/ and . 0 1/
s n t os t
(B) [ – os t s nt ]
s nt os t 4. The system matrix A is
(C) [ – os t s n t]
s nt os t (A) 0 1 (C) 0 1
os t s nt
(D) 0 1 (B) 0 1 (D) 0 1
s nt os t
ECE - 2007 ECE - 2009

2. The state space representation of a
5. Consider the system = Ax + Bu with
separately excited DC servo motor
dynamics is given as, A=0 1 and B = 0 1 , where p and q
are arbitrary real numbers. Which of the
* + 0 10 1 0 1 u; following statements about the
controllability of the system is true?
Where is the speed of the motor, is (A) The system is completely state
the armature current and u is the controllable for any nonzero values
armature voltage. The transfer function of p and q
( )
of the motor is (B) Only P = 0 and q = 0 result in
( )
controllability
(A) (C)
(C) The system is uncontrollable for all
(B) (D) values of p and q
(D) We cannot conclude about
Common Data Questions 3 and 4 controllability from the given data
Consider a linear system whose state
space representation is ̇ (t) = Ax (t). If ECE - 2010
the initial state vector of the system is Common Data for Questions 6 and 7
x(0) = 0 1, then the system response is The signal flow graph of a system is
shown below.
x(t) = 0 1. If the initial state vector
of the system changes to x (0) = 0 1, (s) s (s)

s
then the system response becomes
x (t) = 0 1.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. The state variable representation of the ECE - 2012

system can be 9. The state variable description of an LTI
ẋ 0 1x 0 1u system is given by
(A) ẋ x
y , -x [ẋ ] [ x
][ ] [ ]u
ẋ 0 1x 0 1u ẋ x
(B) x
y , -x y , - [x ]
ẋ 0 1x 0 1u x
(C) Where y is the output and u is the input.
y , -x
The system is controllable for
ẋ 0 1x 0 1u (A) a1≠ 2 =0, a3 ≠
(D)
y , -x (B) a1 =0, a2 ≠ 3≠
(C) a1=0, a2 ≠ 3 =0
7. The transfer function of the system is (D) a1 ≠ 2 ≠ 3 =0
(A) (C)
ECE - 2013
(B) (D) Statement for Linked Answer Questions 10
and 11:
ECE - 2011 The state diagram of a system is shown
8. The block diagram of a system with one below. A system is described by the state
input and two outputs 𝑦 and 𝑦 is given – variable equations
below. ̇ u y u
1 1 1 1 1
u y
u y
s
10. The state – variable equation of the

system shown in the figure above are
y
s ̇ 0 1 0 1u
(A)
A state space model of the above system y , - u
in terms of the state vector and the ̇ 0 1 0 1u
output vector 𝑦 ,𝑦 𝑦 - is (B)
y , - u
(A) ẋ , -x , -u y , -x
̇ 0 1 0 1u
(C)
(B) ẋ , -x , -u y 0 1x y , - u
(C) ẋ 0 1x 0 1u y , -x ̇ 0 1 0 1u
(D)
(D) ẋ y , - u
0 1x 0 1u y 0 1x
11. The state transition matrix of the

system shown in the figure above is
(A) 0 1 (C) 0 1
t
(B) 0 1 (D) 0 t 1
t
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2014 or x 0 1 x(t) [ ]

12. Consider the state space model of a
system, as given below nx 0 1 x(t) s
ẋ x
[ẋ ] [ x
][ ] [ ]u (A) 0 1
ẋ x
x (B) [ ]
y , - [x ]
x (C) [ ]
The system is
(A) controllable and observable (D) [ ]
(B) uncontrollable and observable
(C) uncontrollable and unobservable 16. The state transition matrix (t) of a
(D) controllable and unobservable ẋ x
system [ ] 0 1 0x 1 is
ẋ
13. Consider the state space system t
(A) 0 1 (C) 0 1
expressed by the signal flow diagram t
t
shown in the figure. (B) 0 1 (D) 0 1
t
u s s s EE - 2006
x x x 1. For a system with the transfer function
y
( )
H(s) = , the matrix A in the
state space form ẋ = Ax + Bu is equal to
The corresponding system is
(A) always controllable (A) [ ]
(B) always observable
(C) always stable
(B) [ ]
(D) always unstable
14. An unforced linear time invariant (LTI) (C) [ ]

system is represented by
ẋ x
[ ] 0 1 0x 1 (D) [ ]
ẋ
If the initial conditions are x (0)=1 and
x ( ) t solut on o t st t EE - 2008
equation is Statement for Linked Answer Questions 2
(A) x (t) x (t) and 3
(B) x (t) x (t) The state space equation of a system is
(C) x (t) x (t) described by ẋ = Ax + Bu, y = Cx, where
(D) x (t) t x (t) x is state vector, u is input, y is output
and A = 0 1 , B = 0 1, C = , -
15. The state equation of a second-order
linear system is given by 2. The transfer function G(s) of this system
ẋ (t) x(t) x( ) x will be
or x 0 1 x(t) 0 1 n (A) ( )
(C) ( )
(B) ( )
(D) ( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. A unity feedback is provided to the above EE - 2013

system G(S) to make it a closed loop Common Data Questions 7 and 8
system as shown in figure. The state variable formulation of a system
is given as
r + G(s) y ẋ x
( Σ ( [ ] 0 1 0x 1 0 1 u x ( )
ẋ
t t x
x ( ) n y , - 0x 1
) )
7. The system is
For a unit step input r(t), the steady state (A) Controllable but not observable
error in the output will be (B) Not controllable but observable
(A) 0 (C) 2 (C) Both controllable and observable
(B) 1 (D) (D) Both not controllable and not
observable
EE - 2009
Common Data Questions: 4 & 5 8. The response y(t) to a unit step input is
A system is described by the following (A)
state and output equations (B)
()
x (t) x (t) u(t) (C)
() (D)
x (t) u(t)
y(t) = x1(t)
EE - 2014
Where u(t)is the input and y(t) is the
9. A system matrix is given as follows.
output
[ ]
4. The system transfer function is
(A) (C) The absolute value of the ratio of the
(B) (D) maximum eigenvalue to the minimum
eigenvalue is _____
5. The state transition matrix of the above
system is 10. The second order dynamic system
(A) [ ] u
t
y
(B) 0 1
the matrices P, Q and R as follows:
(C) 0 1 0 1
(D) 0 1 0 1
, -
EE - 2010 The system has the following controllability
6. The system ̇ with and observability properties:
0 1 0 1 is (A) Controllable and observable
(B) Not controllable but observable
(A) stable and controllable
(C) Controllable but not observable
(B) stable but uncontrollable
(D) Not controllable and not observable
(C) unstable but controllable
(D) unstable and uncontrollable
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. The state transition matrix for the system IN - 2008

ẋ x 2. The state space representation of a
[ ] 0 1 0x 1 0 1 u is
ẋ ̇= 0
system is given by 1 X + 0 1u,
(A) 0 1 (C) 0 1 ( )
t y = [1 0]x. The transfer function of
( )
(B) 0 1 (D) 0 t 1
t the system will be
(A) (C)
12. Consider the system described by
(B) (D)
following state space equations ( )
ẋ x
[ ] 0 1 0x 1 0 1 u
ẋ IN - 2009
x 3. A linear time-invariant single-input
y , - 0x 1
single-output system has a state space
If u is unit step input, then the steady
model given by =Fx + Gu; y = Hx
state error of the system is
(A) 0 (C) 2/3 Where F =0 1; G=0 1; H =, -.
(B) 1/2 (D) 1
Here, x is the state vector, u is the input,
and y is the output. The damping ratio of
IN - 2006
the system is
1. The state-variable representation of a
(A) 0.25 (C) 1
plant is given by
(B) 0.5 (D) 2
̇ = Ax + Bu , y = Cx.
Where x is the state, u is the input and y is
IN - 2011
the output. Assuming zero initial
4. The transfer function of the system
conditions, the impulse response of the
described by the state-space equations
plant is given by ẋ x
(A) exp (At) [ ] 0 1 0x 1 0 1 u
ẋ
(B) xp , (t - )] Bu () d x
y , - 0x 1 is
(C) C exp (At) B
(D) xp , (t - )] Bu () d (A) (C)
(B) (D)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 6. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. A]
∅(t) = L *( I ) + ẋ
(s) ẋ s s (s)
( I ) 0 1
 ( I ) 0 1 x x
( )
ẋ
os t s nt
(t) = 0 1 ẋ x u… … ( )
s nt os t
ẋ x x … … ( )
2. [Ans. A] y (x ẋ )
 s (s) (s) I (s) (x x x )
y x … … ( )
u From equation 1, 2, 3 the state variable
t
 (s) (s) I (s) u(s) representation of the system is
(s )(s ) (s) (s) ẋ 0 1x 0 1u
u(s) 𝑦 , -
( )
( ) ( )
7. [Ans. C]
3. [Ans. A] ,sI -
∅ ∅ s
Let A = [ ] , -0 10 1
∅ ∅ s
s s
∅ ∅ ∅ ∅
 & , -[ ]
∅ ∅ ∅ ∅ (s )
∅(t) 0 1 s s
s
(( I ) ) s s
(s )(s ) s & Method II
find eigen vector It can also be solved by applying the
M son’s g n ormul
4. [Ans. D]
From above, , I - 0 1 8. [Ans. B]
(s)
0 1 u(s) s
(s) x (s)
5. [Ans. C] x (s) u(s) s
p p x (s) y (s)
, - 0q q1
u(s) s x (s)
 p q  un ontroll l p, q Similarly
x (s) y (s)
u(s) s u(s)
so sx (s) x (s) u(s)
y (s) x (s)
sx (s) x (s) u(s)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
y (s) x (s)
ẋ (t) x (t) u(t) y (t) x (t) y
u
ẋ (t) x (t) u(t) y (t) x (t)
ẋ x
[ ] 0 1 0x 1 0 1 u(t)
ẋ From the graph we can find that
x x u ,u x - ( ) ẋ
rom qu st on y ,y y - , - 0 1 ẋ x u… ( )
n
ẋ ( ),x ẋ -
9. [Ans. D]
ẋ x ẋ
x x
From eq. (i) put value of ẋ
*x + = [ ] [x ] + [ ]u
ẋ x ( x u)
x x ẋ x x u…… ( )
x s m l rly y ẋ ( )
y=, - [x ] y x x u … ( )
x ẋ x ( x ) ( u)
[ ]
ẋ x ( x ) u
A=[ ]& B = [ ] In matrix form
ẋ x
[ ] 0 1 0x 1 0 1 u
ẋ
So, AB = [ ][ ] = [ ] x
ẋ 0 1 0x 1 0 1 u
And
=* + x
y , - 0x 1 u
So, the controllability matrix, h y , -x u
⌈ ⌉ =[ ] 11. [Ans. A]
Determinant should be non-zero ,s I - s0 1 0 1

So, a1a2 (– a2) ≠ s
0 1
1≠ s
a2 ≠ s
,sI - 0 1
a3 may be 0 sI s
s
10. [Ans. A] sI (s )
For state variable form, we have to find
[(s ) s ]
number of integral (1/s) in the graph
Take inverse Laplace transform both side
Assign output of these integral with state
variable & input of these integral with s
derivative of state variable. ,sI -
1. Then find out the relation between [(s ) s ]
these derivative in terms of state
0 1
variable and input t
2. Similarly we can write the relation
between output and these variable
and input using state flow graph
3. Lets assume & as state variable
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
12. [Ans. B]
…
[ ] [ ] 2 3
, -
[ 2 3]
Controllable matrix
0 1
, - [ ]
x (t) x ( )
Rank is less than 3, so uncontrollable x (t) x ( )
Observability matrix
o , ( ) - 15. [Ans. B]
Applying linearity property
[ ]
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
n so o s rv l o
o x(t) 0 1 [ ]
13. [Ans. A]
From the state diagram, the state [ ]
equations are
̇
[ ̇ ][ ][ ] [ ] 16. [Ans. D]
̇ (t) ,( I ) -
, I - s
0 1
𝑦 , -[ ] s
s
0 1
The state controllable matrix is s s
, ̇ ̇ -
(t) [s s ]
* +
s
t
The rank of S is 3 0 1
So the system is always controllable
EE
14. [Ans. C] 1. [Ans. B]
ẋ x x ( ) (s) (s )
[ ] 0 1 0x 1 (s)
ẋ ⏟ x ( ) (s) s s s
( ) ( )
(t) (s ). /
( ) ( )
t t (s)
(I t … ) t
(s) s s s
2 3 s x (s) s x (s) sx (s) x (s)
t u(s)
0 1 0 1t 0 1
2 Replacing s by
t x x x
0 1 … x u(t) … ( )
3 t t t
x
t ẋ x
t
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x s
ẋ x 0
1
t , s
- 0 1
Replacing eq.(i) (s )(s )
ẋ x x x u(t) (s )
, -0 1
s
ẋ x x x u(t)
(s )(s )
ẋ x s s
ẋ x (s )(s ) s s
ẋ x x x u(t)
ẋ x
5. [Ans. B]
[ẋ ] [ ] [x ] [ ] u(t)
ẋ x 0 1
s
o [ ] ( I ) 0 1
s
s (s )(s )
2. [Ans. D] ( I )
s [ s ]
(s) , - (0 1 )0 1
s ( )
3. [Ans. A] [s s s ]
m m ( ) s
s ( ( )) s ( )
0 1
4. [Ans. C]
Selecting x (t) and x (t) as state variables 6. [Ans. C]
x (t) , AB]  | ≠ controllable
ẋ (t) x (t) x (t) u(t)
t (s) ( I ) & (t) ( (s )) has
x (t)
ẋ (t) x (t) u(t) exponential with positive power
t
ẋ (t) x (t) Unstable
[ ] 0 1[ ] 0 1 u(t)
ẋ (t) x (t)
ẋ 7. [Ans. A]
M , -
o 0 1 0 1
0 1
y(t) x (t)
x (t) t(M ) ≠ ontroll l
y(t) , -[ ]
x (t) M , - 0 1
y
t(M ) ot o s rv l
o , -&
, I - s
0 1 0 1 8. [Ans. A]
s
s Y(t) , - *, I - (s)+
0 1
s s
( I ) 0 1
s s
0 1
, I - s
(s )(s )
, I - [s ]
r ns r un t on
, I - s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
s(s ) s
[, I - (s)]
[s(s )] [(s ) s ]
x (t) * I + 0 1
[ ] ,, I - (s)- t
x (t)
[ ] 12. [Ans. A]
y(s)
r ns r un t on (s)
x (t) (s)
Y(t) , -[ ]
x (t) ( I )
9. [Ans. *] Range 2.9 to 3.1 (s) , - *0 s 1 0 1+

s
Characteristic equation I s
0 1
, - s 0 1
| | s s
,( )( ) - ,( ) - (s)
s s
, ( )-
y(s)
s(s s )
u(s)
s
t y st t rror l m u(t) y(t)
lm (s) l ms ( )
s s(s s )
10. [Ans. C] IN
v n 0 1 0 1 1. [Ans. C]
(s)
or ontroll l (sI )
(s)
, - 0 1
u(t) (t) → (s)
≠ ontroll l (s) (sI )
For observability:
y(t) s → (sI )
, - 0 1
ot o s rv l 2. [Ans. A]
(s) ( I )
11. [Ans. C] ( I ) [ ]
( )
0 1
 ( I ) 0 1
State transition matrix I ( )
s
I 0 1 (s) ., -0 1 0 1/
s ( )
s
0 1 -0 (s)
s ., 1/
I ( )
(s )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. B]
The poles of the s/y are obtained from the
s/y matrix, f
det (SI – F )= 0
0 1
S(S + 2) + 4 = 0
4. [Ans. A]
T(s) = ( I )
, - 0 10 1
( )
( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK Analog Circuits
Diode Circuits - Analysis and Application
ECE - 2006 ECE - 2007

1. For the circuit shown below, assume that 2. The correct full wave rectifier circuit is
the zener diode is ideal with a breakdown (A)
voltage of 6 Volts. The waveform
observed across R is
Input
Output
~ i
(B)
(A) 6V
Input
(B) 6V Output
(C)
12V
(C) 12V
Input
Output
6V
(D)
(D)
6V Input
Output
3. For the Zener diode shown in the figure,

the Zener voltage at knee is 7 V, the knee
current is negligible and the Zener
dynamic resistance is 10 . If the input
voltage ( ) range is from 10 to 16 V, the
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
output voltage ( ) range from . The small signal input

where .
(A) 7.00 to 7.29V (C) 7.14 to 7.43 V ~

(B) 7.14 to 7.29 V (D) 7.29 to 7.43 V
ECE - 2008
4. In the following limiter circuit, an input 6. The bias current through the diodes is
voltage = 10sin100 t is applied. (A) 1 mA (C) 1.5 mA
Assume that the diode drop is 0.7V when (B) 1.28 mA (D) 2 mA
it is forward biased. The Zener
breakdown voltage is 6.8V.The maximum 7. The ac output voltage is
and minimum values of the output (A)
voltage respectively are (B)
(C)
1k
(D)
D1
D2
8. A Zener diode, when used in voltage
6.8 V
Z
stabilization circuits, is biased in
(A) reverse bias region below the
(A) 6.1V, 0.7 V (C) 7.5 V, 0.7 V breakdown voltage
(B) 0.7 V, 7.5 V (D) 7.5 V, 7.5 V (B) reverse breakdown region
(C) forward bias region
ECE - 2009 (D) forward bias constant current mode
5. In the circuit below, the diode is ideal. The
voltage V is given by ECE - 2012
9. The diodes and capacitors in the circuit
shown are ideal. The voltage v(t) across
the diode is
(A) min ( ) (C) min ( ) ~

(B) max ( ) (D) max( )
ECE - 2011
Statements for Linked Answer Questions 6 (A) –1 (C) 1 –
and 7 (B) i (D) 1 – i
In the circuit shown below, assume that
the voltage drop across a forward biased
diode is 0.7V. The thermal voltage
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE/EE/IN - 2012 (A) sin

10. The I-V characteristics of the diode in the (B) (sin i )/2
circuit given below are (C) (sin i )/2
(D) 0 for all t
i {
ECE - 2014
13. In the figure, assume that the forward
voltage drops of the PN diode and
i Schottky diode are 0.7 V and 0.3 V,
respectively. If ON denotes conducting
state of the diode and OFF denotes non-
conducting state of the diode, then in the
circuit,
The current in the circuit is
(A) 10 mA (C) 6.67 mA
(B) 9.3 mA (D) 6.2 mA
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
11. In the circuit shown below, the knee
current of the ideal Zener diode is 10 mA. (A) both and are ON
To maintain 5 V across RL, the minimum (B) is ON and is OFF
value of RL in  and the minimum power (C) both and are OFF
rating of the Zener diode in mW, (D) is OFF and is ON
respectively , are
14. The diode in the circuit shown has
= 0.7 Volts but is ideal otherwise.
100
If = 5sin(𝜔𝑡)Volts, the minimum and
maximum values of (in Volts) are,
ILoad respectively,
10V
RL
VZ=5V
(A) 125 and 125 (C) 250 and 125

(B) 125 and 250 (D) 250 and 250
12. A voltage 1000 sin Volts is applied

across YZ. Assuming ideal diodes, the
voltage measured across WX in Volts, is (A) 5 and 2.7 (C) 5 and 3.85
(B) 2.7 and 5 (D) 1.3 and 5
1k
15. The figure shows a half-wave rectifier.
W Y X The diode D is ideal. The average steady-
Z
state current (in Amperes) through the
1k diode is approximately __________
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
+ +
D1
D2
i
z ~ Vi
10V 5V
V0 RL =
(A)
16. Two silicon diodes, with a forward
voltage drop of 0.7 V, are used in the
circuit shown in the figure. The range of
10
input voltage for which the output
voltage is
10
(B)
(A) 5
(B)
(C)
(D) 5
EE - 2006 (C)
1. What are the states of the three ideal
diodes of the circuit shown in figure? 10
5 10
10V
5A
(D)
(A) ON, OFF, OFF 10

(B) OFF, ON, OFF
(C) ON, OFF, ON
(D) OFF, ON, ON
10
2. Assuming the diodes D1 and D2 of the
circuit shown in figure to be ideal ones,
the transfer characteristics of the circuit
will be
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2007 (B)
3. The three – terminal linear voltage
regula r i e e a l a
resistor as shown in the figure. If Vin is
10 V, what is the power dissipated in the
transistor?
+10V
(C)
RL
Vin
6.6V
Zener diode
(D)
(A) 0.6 W (C) 4.2 W
(B) 2.4 W (D) 5.4 W
EE - 2008
4. The equivalent circuits of a diode, during
forward biased and reverse biased
conditions, are shown in the figure.
0.7
+ + V
5. In the voltage doubler circuit shown in
he igure he wi h ‘S’ i l e a
+
Assuming diodes D1 and D2 to be ideal,
load resistance to be infinite and initial
capacitor voltages to be zero, the steady
state voltage across capacitors C1 and C2
will be
~ 𝜔𝑡
S
~ i
If such diodes is used in clipper circuit of

figure given above, the output voltage (v0) (A) = 10V, = 5V
of the circuit will be (B) = 10V, = 5V
(A) (C) = 5V, = 10V
(D) = 5V, = 10V
EE - 2009
6. The following circuit shown has a source
voltage Vs as shown in the graph. The
current through the circuit is also shown
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10V 15V
15
10
(A) 4V (C) 7.5V
5 (B) 5V (D) 12.12V
Vs (Volts)
0
EE - 2011
-5 8. A clipper circuit is shown below.
-10 1k
-15
0 100 200 300 400
Time (ms) D
1.5 ~
1.0 5V
Current (mA)
0.5
0 Assuming forward voltage drops of the

diodes to be 0.7 V, the input-output
-0.5 transfer characteristics of the circuit is
-1.0 (A)
-1.5 0 100 200 300 400
Time (ms)
The element connected between a and b 4.3
could be
a
4.3
a
a
(B)
10
EE - 2010 4.3
7. Assuming that the diodes in the given
circuit are ideal, the voltage is 4.3 10
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) dynamic resistance of the diode at room

temperature is approximately,
5.7
1.7V
0.7
0.7 5.7
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
(D)
10 IN - 2011
2. Assuming zener diode has current-
voltage characteristics as shown below on
the right and forward voltage drop of
diode is 0.7 V, the voltage in the
10
circuit shown below is
EE - 2014
9. The sinusoidal ac source in the figure has
an rms value of . Considering all
√
possible values of , the minimum value
of in to avoid burnout of the Zener I
diode is __________
2.7V V
0.7V
√ ~
(A) 3.7 V (C) 2.2 V
(B) 2.7 V (D) 0 V
10. Assuming the diodes to be ideal in the IN - 2014

figure, for the output to be clipped, the 3. For the circuit shown in the figure assume
input voltage must be outside the range ideal diodes with zero forward resistance
and zero forward voltage drop. The
current through the diode in mA is
___________.
~
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
IN - 2008
1. In the circuit shown below, the ideality
factor of the diode is unity and the
voltage drop across it is 0.7V. The
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD

ra i r ha β =0.7 V, and the
voltage across the Zener diode is 15 V.The
current (in mA) through the Zener diode
is ___________.
ECE
1. [Ans. B]
When , zener diode is in forward When
bias so
When , zener diode is in reverse
bias, so when , zener diode
will be OFF and .
When , zener diode will be in
breakdown region and .
4. [Ans. C]
When , is forward bias and
2. [Ans. C]
are OFF, and
Option – C, Circuit makes Full –wave
When is +10V, are ON and zener
rectifier.
diode is in reverse bias so
V
3. [Ans. C]
For zener 5. [Ans. A]
and When , diode is ON and V =
When , diode is OFF and V = 1 V
So V = min (
6. [Ans. A]
7. [Ans. B]
r
When , current
~ r
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. D]
8. [Ans. B]
Zener diode operated in reverse in i
breakdown region.
i
r
Since diode will be forward biased voltage
across diode will be 0.7 V
i
Stabilized
9. [Ans. A] 11. [Ans. B]
~ 5v
40 mA
10 V
la per ea e i ier 10 mA
he ex i e y he la pi g
section clamp the positive peak to 0 volts
When zener starts
and negative peak to 2 volts. So whole
will be held @ 5V.
cos ( i l wer y 1 volts
pu i
When zener starts the current drawn

from supply is 50 mA at 10 V
p wer drawn = 500 mW
This should be dissipates in circuit power
i ipa e i Resistance
=
Remaining 250 mW has to be dissipated
by zener assuming worst bad
ze er h ul e ra e r
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
12. [Ans. D] 14. [Ans. C]
1k i
y
i
tz
1k
w X
When Z is relatively positive to y
Both D1& D2 are & l a When positive maximum
Gets shorted.
i
When y is relatively positive to Z all Diode

Biased
urre ll w
always.
13. [Ans. D]
When negative minimum
Assume both the diode ON.

Then circuit will be as per figure (2)
w 15. [Ans. *] Range 0.08 to 0.12

p i le For average steady state case, capacitor is
is off and hence i open circuited
S i a pere
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
16. [Ans. D] 3. [Ans. B]
So current through
Current through 1k , mA
i
So mA
= 0.5893
Power dissipated in transistor
i i r hi
i 4. [Ans. A]
When diode is OFF, the equivalent circuit
is shown as follows:
i
i i r hi
i
EE
~
1. [Ans. A] i
Let is ON, OFF and OFF, then
equivalent circuit
i.e. when is max i.e., so

diode never conducts and it is always
10 V 5A
OFF. So, i
5. [Ans. D]
In this case, 10A When , is ON and is OFF so
A charges upto 5V and .
So voltage across diode When , is ON and is OFF, so
charges by -10 V and
So is in reverse bias i.e. it is OFF. So in steady state,
Voltage across diode V it is and
also in Reverse bias so OFF.
Voltage across diode it is in 6. [Ans. A]
forward bias and ON. It is
2. [Ans. A]
When , and are OFF, so
When
, is ON and OFF so, mA, and diode conducts
, diode will be reverse bias
and I will become zero.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. B] Hence for output to be clipped input

Right side diode is off should not be lie inside this range
So ,
IN
1. [Ans. B]
8. [Ans. C]
When output will Dynamic resistance r
follow input, because zener diode and
normal diodes are off
When V Zener diode forward r
bias and V
When V Diode is forward bias and
2. [Ans. C]
First Assume that the diode does not
reach reverse breakdown. So circuit
9. [Ans. *] Range 299 to 301
becomes
10. [Ans. B]
S
S
i This is less than reverse breakdown
voltage of diode . So our
assumption is correct
i
3. [Ans. 10]
Diode goes to forward biased due to
10 V and 8V across diode and current
i through diode is
i
4. [Ans. *] Range 40 to 43
Given circuit is union of both the above

circuit for range
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Nodal at
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
AC & DC Biasing-BJT and FET
ECE - 2006
9.
1. An n- channel depletion MOSFET has
following two points on its curve:
(i) d
(ii)
Which of the following Q-points will give
the highest trans-conductance gain for
small signals.
(A)
(B) The value of current is approximately
(C) (A) 0.5 mA (C) 9.3 mA
(D) (B) 2 mA (D) 15 mA
ECE - 2011
ECE - 2007
5. For a BJT, the common – base current
2. The DC current gain ( ) of a BJT is 50.
g i α .98 d he c ec r b e
Assuming that the emitter injection
junction reverse bias saturation current
efficiency is 0.995, the base transport
. . This BJT is connected in the
factor is
common emitter mode and operated in
(A) 0.980 (C) 0.990
(B) 0.985 (D) 0.995 the active region with a base drive
current . The collector current
3. For the BJT circuit shown, assume that for this mode of operation is
the of the transistor is very large and (A) 0.98 mA (C) 1.0 mA
= 0.7 V. The mode of operation of the (B) 0.99 mA (D) 1.01 mA
BJT is
10 kΩ 6. In the circuit shown below, for the MOS
transistor, and the
threshold voltage . The voltage
at the source of the upper transistor is
2V 6V
1 kΩ
5V W/L = 4
(A) cut-off (C) normal active

(B) saturation (D) reverse active
W/L = 1
ECE - 2010
4. In the silicon BJT circuit shown below,
assume that the emitter area of transistor
Q1 is half that of transistor Q2. (A) 1 V (C) 3 V
(B) 2 V (D) 3.67 V
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2013 10. For the MOSFETs shown in the figure, the
7. In the circuit shown below, the silicon threshold voltage | | = 2 V and
npn transistor Q has a very high value of ( ) . . The value of
. The required value of R2 in k to
(in mA) is ______.
produce IC = 1mA is
VCC
3V
R1
IC
60 k
R2
RE
500 
(A) 20 (C) 40
(B) 30 (D) 50 11. For the MOSFET shown in the figure,
assume W/L = 2, = 2.0 V,
8. In a MOSFET operating in the saturation
100 / and = 0.5 V. The
region, the channel length modulation
transistor switches from saturation
effect causes
region to linear region when (in Volts)
(A) an increase in the gate – source
is__________
capacitance
(B) a decrease in the transconductance
(C) a decrease in the unity –gain cutoff
frequency
(D) a decrease in the output resistance
ECE - 2014
9. For the n-channel MOS transistor shown
in the figure, the threshold voltage is
0.8 V. Neglect channel length modulation
EE - 2006
effects. When the drain voltage =1.6 V,
1. Consider the circuit shown in figure. If
the drain current was found to be 0.5
the of the transistor is 30 and ICBO is 20
mA. If is adjusted to be 2 V by changing
nA and the input voltage is + 5 V, then
the values of R and , the new value of
transistor would be operating in
(in mA) is
+12V
. Ω
Ω
Q
(A) 0.625 (C) 1.125 12V

(B) 0.75 (D) 1.5 (A) saturation region
(B) active region
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) breakdown region

(D) cut – off region
2. A TTL NOT gate circuit is shown in fig.

Assuming . of both the
transistor, if . then the states of
the two transistors will be,
+5V
(A) 0 mA (C) 4.3 mA
(B) 3.6 mA (D) 5.7 mA
.
EE - 2010
5. The transistor circuit shown uses a silicon
transistor with = 0.7V, and a
dc current gain of 100. The value of is
+10 V
(A) d
(B) e er e d 10 k 50 k
(C) e er e d
(D) d e er e
EE - 2007
3. The common emitter forward current
g i f he r i r h w i F = 100. 100
+10V 
Ω
(A) 4.65V (C) 6.3V
(B) 5V (D) 7.23V
6. Figure shows a composite switch

Ω
Ω consisting of a power transistor (BJT) in
series with a diode. Assuming that the
transistor switch and the diode are ideal ,
The transistor is operating in the I-V characteristic of the composite
(A) Saturation region switch is
(B) Cutoff region
+ V
(C) Reverse active region
(D) Forward active region
I
EE - 2008
4. Two perfectly matched silicon transistors I I
are connected as shown in the figure. (A) (B)
Assuming the of the transistors to be
very high and the forward voltage drop in V V
diodes to be 0.7 V, the value of current I is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
I IN - 2006
I
1. The biasing circuit of a silicon transistor
(C) (D) is shown below. If  = 80, then what is VCE
for the transistor?
V V +12V
EE - 2011
7. The transistor used in the circuit shown
RB Ω RC Ω
be w h f d is negligible.
15k 2.2k
8
1k D
= 0.7V
.
(A) 6.08 V (C) 1.2 V
(B) 0.2 V (D) 6.08 V
IN - 2007
2. In the circuit shown below, . .
If the forward voltage drop of diode is
0.7V, then the current through collector
will be
(A) 168 mA (C) 20.54 mA
(B) 108 mA (D) 5.36 mA
EE - 2014
8. The transistor in the given circuit should .
always be in active region. Take

= 0.2 V, = 0.7 V. The
maximum value of in . Which can be
used, is__________
The f he r i r d are,
respectively,
(A) 19 and 2.8 V
(B) 19 and 4.7 V
(C) 38 and 2.8 V
(D) 38 and 4.7 V
3. The three transistors in the circuit shown

below are identical, with = 0.7 V and
.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10 V IN - 2014
6. In the figure, transistors T and T have
Ω
2V identical characteristics. of
transistor T is 0.1 V. The voltage is
Ω high enough to put T in saturation.
Voltage of transistors T T and T is 0.7
V. The value of ( ) in V is ___________.
9
T
The voltage is
(A) 0.2 V (C) 7.4 V
(B) 2 V (D) 10 V
IN - 2010
4. The matched transistors and shown T T
in the adjoining figure have =100.
Assuming the base-emitter voltages to be
0.7V, the collector-emitter voltage V2 of
the transistor is
(A) 33.9V (C) 16.2V

(B) 27.8V (D) 0.7V
IN - 2013
5. In the transistor circuit as shown below,
the value of resistance RE in k is
approximately,
+10V
IC=2.0 mA
1.5k
15k .
. Vout
6k VCE=5.0 V
RE
(A) 1.0 (C) 2.0

(B) 1.5 (D) 2.5
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 5. [Ans. D]
1. [Ans. D] α
From the below graph it is clear that α
.98
a increase conductance i.e. slope of 9
.98
graph is increased.
. .
6. [Ans. C]
The transistor which has
12mA and
6
So that transistor in saturation region.
V
The transistor which has
Transfer characteristic of n-channel D- Drain is connected to gate
MOSFET. So that transistor in saturation
2. [Ans. B] The current flow in both the transistor is

α same
( ) ( ) ( )
α base transport factor × emitter injection
efficiency ( )
b e r r f c r
.99
.98 8
3. [Ans. B]
Given is large so d 7. [Ans. C]
Assuming BJT is in active
Applying KVL in Base. Emitter loop
.
.
. 9.8
w .9
.
So BJT is in saturation ~
4. [Ans. B]
Assuming . d
.
=1mA i ce is very large
.
So, eg igib e
So,
= 2.04 mA 2 mA ge dr cr e i er f re i r
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. [Ans. *] Range 1.4 to 1.6

Initially the transistor is in saturation
.
[ ( )]
w .
. . .
.
w r gi e circ i
r . .
r . . b i i g i
.
. .
. .8
. .
8. [Ans. D]
EE
9. [Ans. C] 1. [Ans. B]
ere Let the device is in saturation and
i r i regi . V
.
Collector current = 5.3mA
.
. . .8 .
For saturation = 0.178 mA
.
. Base voltage .
. current through 100 re i ce
.8 .
.
. .
. = 0.127 mA
.
c rre hr gh re i ce
.
10. [Ans. *] Range 0.88 to 0.92
= 0.29 mA
Base current . 9 .
= 0.163 mA
So this is less than it means device
is not in saturation. It is in active region.
2. [Ans. C]
When . he will be in
reverse active mode .i.e. Reverse on and
will be ON.
NMOS is in saturation region 3. [Ans. D]

. We assume BJT is in active region
. applying KVL in base emitter circuit
.9 .
i g
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. *] Range 22 to 23
9. To calculate max, take end condition
.
9 i .
.
. i
.9
i .
ci e
.
Ti i c i e regi .
.8
4. [Ans. B] .
.
IN
1. [Ans. B]
.
.
9
9
. and drop across diode = 0.7
. . So device is not active region.
.
Let the device is in saturation and
. V
i ery rge .
.9
As both transistors are perfectly matched .9
and . of both transistors. .
8
. mA .
5. [Ans. A] So device is in saturation, so .

.
9. 2. [Ans. A]
.
. .
6. [Ans. C]
When V will be + ve both transistor and
diode will be on making V across them
Zero and Current I will be flow and when
V is -ve both will be off offering infinite
resistance so current I will be Zero.
.
7. [Ans. D]
Transistor is in Saturation region
.
.
.
.
.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Apply KVL . 8
. For matched transistor
.
. di is same for both the
transistors)
Now apply KVL in the outer port of
transistor
9 . 8
9. .8
Apply KVL to output terminals
5. [Ans. A]
9. . 10 V
.9 . .8 2m A
. Ω V=IR=1.5k × 2mA=3V
15k
3. [Ans. C] =10-3=7V
10V gi e
2V
6k
gi e
Using KVL in the left hand transistor,

Ω
. be
. 6. [Ans. *] Range 5.5 to 5.8
gi e
9
Now again apply KVL to the collector
resistor of the right and transistor
T
.
.
. .
. T T
.
4. [Ans. B] .
rre hr gh re i ce
.
.
i Apply KVL on path 1
9 .
. .
=1.66mA
.
.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
.
Tr i r ide ic
y h
. –
.
. .
.98 .
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Small Signal Modeling of BJT and FET
ECE - 2006 defined to be at constant .

Common Data Questions 1, 2, 3
In the transistor amplifier circuit shown
in the figure below, the transistor has the
following parameters:
h h
The capacitance can be assumed to be
infinite.
The equivalent g of the pair is

(A) the sum of individual g of the
~
transistors
(B) the product of individual g of the
transistors
In the figure above, the ground has been
(C) nearly equal to the g of M1
shown by the symbol
(D) nearly equal to g ⁄g of M2
1. Under the DC conditions, the collector-to-
emitter voltage drop is
(A) 4.8 Volts (C) 6.0Volts
(B) 5.3 Volts (D) 6.6Volts and 6
In the following transistor circuit,
2. If is increased by 10%, then collector- , and and all the
to-emitter voltage drop capacitances are very large.
(A) increases by less than or equal to
10%
(B) decreases by less than or equal to
10%
(C) increases by more than 10%
(D) decreases by more than 10%
3. The small-signal gain of the amplifier

⁄ is
(A) 10 (C) 5.3
(B) 5.3 (D) 10 5. The value of DC current is
(A) 1mA (C) 5mA
ECE - 2008 (B) 2mA (D) 10mA
4. Two identical NMOS transistors M1 and
M2 are connected as shown below. is 6. The mid-band voltage gain of the
chosen so that both transistors are in amplifier is approximately
saturation.The equivalent g of the Pair is (A) 180 (C) 90
(B) 120 (D) 60
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2009 (B) The input resistance decreases

7. A small signal source and the magnitude of voltage gain
() A +B i is applied to increases
a transistor amplifier as shown below. (C) Both input resistance and the
The transistor has =150 and h =3k magnitude of voltage gain
.Which expression best approximates decrease
( )? (D) Both input resistance and the
12V magnitude of voltage gain
increase
100k 3k
ECE - 2012
V0(t)
9. The current ib through the base of a
100 nF
silicon npn transistor is
Vi(t)
1 + 0.1 cos(10000 t) mA . At 300 K, the
100nF
r in the small signal model of the
20k 900k μF transistor is
 i
(A) ( )= ( i )
(B) ( )= ( i )
(C) ( )= i
(D) ( )= i
ECE - 2010
8. The amplifier circuit shown below uses a
silicon transistor. The capacitors and (A) Ω (C) Ω
(B) Ω (D) Ω
can be assumed to be short at signal
frequency and the effect of output ECE - 2013
resistance can be ignored. If is 10. The small-signal resistance(i.e., dVB/dID)
disconnected from the circuit, which one in k offered by the n – channel MOSFET
of the following statements is TRUE? M shown in the figure below, at a bias
point of VB =2V is (device data for M:
device transconductance parameter
kn μnCox(W/L) 4 μ / , 2 threshold
voltage VTN=1V and neglect body effect
and channel length modulation effects)
VB
ID
~
(A) The input resistance increases and

the magnitude of voltage gain (A) 12.5 (C) 50
decreases (B) 25 (D) 100
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2014
11. For the amplifier shown in the figure, the
BJT parameters are
and thermal voltage = 25 mV. The
voltage gain ( / ) of the amplifier is
_____ .
(A) g (C) g
(B) (D)
μF μF 14. A BJT in a common-base configuration is

used to amplify a signal received by a 50
antenna. Assume kT/q = 25 mV. The
value of the collector bias current (in mA)
required to match the input impedance of
the amplifier to the impedance of the
antenna is __________
F
15. For the common collector amplifier
h w i he figu e he JT h high
12. In the circuit shown, the PNP transistor negligible ( ) and = 0.7 V. The
has = 0.7 Vand = 50. Assume that maximum undistorted peak-to-peak
= 100 k . For to be 5 V, the value of output voltage (in Volts) is
(in k .) is __________
μF
μF
13. Consider the common-collector amplifier

in the figure (bias circuitry ensures that
the transistor operates in forward active
region, but has been omitted for
simplicity). Let be the collector current,
be the base-emitter voltage and be
the thermal voltage. Also, g are
the small-signal transconductance and
output resistance of the transistor,
respectively. Which one of the following
conditions ensures a nearly constant
small signal voltage gain for a wide range
of values of ?
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE/EE/IN - 2012 (A) 0.967 (C) 0.983

1. The voltage gain of the circuit shown (B) 0.976 (D) 0.998
below is
IN - 2008
2. For a single stage BJT common base
amplifier
(A) current gain as well as voltage gain
can be greater than unity
~ (B) current gain can be greater than
unity but voltage gain is always less
than unity
(A) (C) (C) voltage gain can be greater than
(B) (D) unity but current gain is always less
than unity
EE - 2014
(D) current gain as well as voltage gain is
2. The magnitude of the mid-band voltage
always less than unity
gain of the circuit shown in figure is
(assuming h of the transistor to be 100)
3. In the amplifier circuit shown below,
assume VBE he f he
transistor and the values of C1 and C2 are
extremely high. If the amplifier is
designed such that at the quiescent point
h its VCE = where VCC is the power supply
~ voltage, its small signal voltage gain |

will be
|
(A) 1 (C) 20
(B) 10 (D) 100
IN - 2006
1. An amplifier circuit is shown below.
Assume that the transistor works in
active region. The low frequency small-
signal parameters for the transistor are
g = 20 mS, 0 = 50, =, =0. What
is the voltage gain, ( ) of the
amplifier?
+Vcc (A) 3.75 (C) 9
(B) 4.5 (D) 19
Ω
IN - 2009
Common Data Questions 4 and 5
Ω
Vi ~ The circuit shown in the figure uses three
identical transistors with = 0.7V and
Gi e : = = Ω
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
kT/ = 25mV. 4. The bias voltage at the base of the

The collector current of transistor is transistor is approximately
2mA. (A) 9.3V (C) 10.3V
+12V (B) 10.0V (D) 11.0V
5. The small signal voltage gain of the circuit
R1
is
R2
(A) 20 (C) 20
Q1
(B) 40 (D) 40
Q2
Q3
R3
12V

ECE So, ( )
1. [Ans. C]
Under DC conditions capacitor will act g
as open. By KVL, ( )
Which is equal to the g of .
but
5. [Ans. A]
μ
Equivalent circuit
= 6V
2. [Ans. B]
in increased by 10%, i.e.
By KVL,
4μ
i e ge
By KVL, in E – B loop,
e e e
3. [Ans. A]
6. [Ans. D]
4. [Ans. C] Voltage gain ( )( )
Both transistor carry same current and
u i e ge
both are in saturation
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. [Ans. *] Range – 240 to – 230

From the model
i i
( ) e i
7. [Ans. B]
The e i e we f u u ge
is
h
h
( i ) For the calculation of gain we need to
calculate . so DC analysis is required
8. [Ans. A]
The moment is disconnected from the
circuit,
h ( h )
but with capacitor, h
which also reduces voltage gain
So, increases and decreases.
9. [Ans. C]
i = 1 + 0.1 cos ( )
Calculate = 3V
Solution:
whe e i he he ge
[ ] 44
e u e
4
10. [Ans. B]
μ
( )
L
μ
( )
L
i
μ ( )
L
( ) i
4
4
4 i ( )i
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
i
i μ
g e i
i i
i i
i e e
4 4
f he e e figu e
i i
( ) i i
( )i ( )
Now assuming that is very large, the
i ( ) ( )
collector current g flows through the
i
emitter terminal.
( ) i
g
g
4 4 4 4 g
g
So if g which is nearly
12. [Ans. *] Range 1.04 to 1.12
constant g
( )
( )
14. [Ans. *] Range 0.49 to 0.51

4 For CB configuration
13. [Ans. B]
This is a common-collector configuration.
15. [Ans. *] Range 9.39 to 9.41
i i e ( )i eg i e can vary
u between 12V in the positive direction and
0V in the negative direction biased
around
So, positive excursion of output voltage =
`
4
Replacing the transistor with T –
Negative excursion of output voltage
equivalent model, we get
So, undistorted peak to peak output

voltage 4 4
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Apply miller’s theorem

u e ge
i i
i
i e ( )i eg i e can vary
i
between 12V in the positive direction and
0V in the negative direction biased i
around ~ ( )
So, positive excursion of output voltage

= 4
Negative excursion of output voltage whe e
So, undistorted peak to peak output i ( )

( ) i
voltage 4 4
i ( )
( ( ) )
EE ( ) i
1. [Ans. D]
4 4 4
In DC Analysis capacitor will behave as an
open circuit Consider input section
i i
i
i
~ 4
i
(i i ) i
i i
( )i i 4 ( )
i
( ( ) )
i
i i
2. [Ans. D]
i ( )i
g whe e
g
Small signal analysis of circuit
i g and Q point to be in
the middle of the load line
( ) i
~ g
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN By Voltage division rule

1. [Ans. D]
Ω Apply KVL to the base emitter circuit
~ Ω
Vi
w L he e e i e i ui
AC equivalent circuit for model

i i
4
g
4
G i | | | |
~ ①
4. [Ans. A]
Emitter voltage of transistor,
g
L ① 10 V
i i (i g ) So
Where i i
i i i (i g i )
i (
) 5. [Ans. B]
i When output is taken between one
( )i collector and ground then
(i g )
g (i e i g e e g i )
i
i and if take the output between two
[ ] collectors then differential gain.
i
g
2. [Ans. C] collector resistance
For CB, current gain is close to unity while
g /
voltage gain is very high.
and here output is taken between one
3. [Ans. A]
collector and ground therefore gain
g
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
BJT and JFET Frequency Response
ECE - 2010
Common Data for Questions 1 and 2 RD
Consider the common emitter amplifier 10 k C
shown below with the following circuit V0
parameters: Vi
M
g A/V, RL
, 10 k
and
(A) 8 (C) 50
(B) 32 (D) 200
ECE - 2014
4. A cascade connection of two voltage

amplifiers and is shown in the
figure. The open-loop gain , input
resistance , and output resistance
for and are as follows:
1. The resistance seen by the source v is

(A) (C) The approximate overall voltage gain
(B) (D) / is __________.
2. The lower cut off frequency due to is

(A) 33.9 Hz (C) 13.6 Hz
(B) 27.1 Hz (D) 16.9 Hz
ECE - 2013
3. The ac schematic of an NMOS common –
source stage is shown in the figure below, IN - 2011
where part of the biasing circuits has 1. The amplifier shown below has a voltage
been omitted for simplicity. For the n- gain of an input esistance of
channel MOSFET M, the transconductance and a lower 3-dB cut-off frequency of 20
gm =1mA/V, and body effect and channel Hz. Which one of the following statements
length modulation effect are to be is TRUE when the emitter resistance is
neglected. The lower cutoff frequency in doubled?
Hz of the circuit is approximately at
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
v ~
(A) Magnitude of voltage gain will

decrease
(B) Input resistance will decrease
(C) Collector bias current will increase
(D) Lower 3-dB cut-off frequency will
increase
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD

ECE
1. [Ans. B]
Equivalent model of the given circuit is
shown below
~ [ ]
IN
1. [Ans. A]
h
g The small signal model is
The resistance seen by the source
h
h
h
2. [Ans. B]
Lower cut-off frequency due to h
f
h h doubled Zi
increases
ou e ec eases
3. [Ans. A]
owe frequency decreases as
w increases
c
s inc eases
w ec eases
ec ease ec eases
f
f ≅8
4. [Ans. *] Range 34 to 34.72
p ifie
p ifie
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Feedback and Oscillator Circuits

ECE - 2006 ECE - 2011
1. The input impedance ( ) and the output 4. In the circuit shown below, capacitors
impedance ( ) of an ideal and are very large and are shorts at the
transconductance (voltage controlled input frequency. is a small signal input.
current source) amplifier are The gain magnitude | ⁄ | at 10 Mrad/s
(A) (C) is
(B) (D) 5V
2k𝛀
ECE - 2007 1nF
μH
2. In a transconductance amplifier, it is
desirable to have
(A) A large input resistance and a large
output resistance
(B) A large input resistance and a
2k𝛀
small output resistance 2.7V
(C) A small input resistance and a 2k𝛀
large output resistance ~
(D) A small input resistance and a
small output resistance
(A) Maximum (C) Unity
ECE - 2009 (B) Minimum (D) Zero
3. In the circuit shown below, the op-amp is
ECE - 2014
ideal the transistor has
5. In the ac equivalent circuit shown in the
figure, if is the input current and is
Decide whether the feedback in the
very large, the type of feedback is
circuit is positive or negative and
determine the voltage V at the output of
the op-amp
10V
V
+
(A) voltage-voltage feedback

(A) Positive Feedback V=10V
(B) voltage-current feedback
(B) Positive Feedback V= 0V
(C) current-voltage feedback
(C) Positive Feedback V=5V
(D) current-current feedback
(D) Positive Feedback V=2V
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. The feedback topology in the amplifier (A)

circuit ( the base bias circuit is not shown
for simplicity) in the figure is 5
10
(B)
10
5
~
(C)
(A) Voltage shunt feedback
(B) Current series feedback
(C) Current shunt feedback 5
(D) Voltage series feedback
10
7. The desirable characteristics of a
transconductance amplifier are (D)
(A) high input resistance and high output
resistance
(B) high input resistance and low output 10
resistance
(C) low input resistance and high output
resistance 5
(D) low input resistance and low output
resistance
EE - 2009
EE - 2006 2. The nature of feedback in the op-amp
1. A relaxation oscillator is made using circuit shown is
OPAMP as shown in figure. The supply +6V
2
voltages of the OPAMP are 12V. The K
voltage waveform at point P will be
R1
Vin ~ 6V
R2
C _ (A) Current - Current feedback
+
2kΩ (B) Voltage - Voltage feedback
(C) Current - Voltage feedback
P (D) Voltage - Current feedback
10kΩ
10kΩ
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2014
3. In the Wien Bridge oscillator circuit
shown in figure, the bridge is balanced
when
μF
If the lower and upper trigger level

voltages are 0.9 V and 1.7 V, the period
(in ms), for which output is LOW,
is_________
IN - 2007
1. A FET source follower is shown in the
( ) figure below:
√
+ 15 V
( )
μF
( )
√
( )
1
4. An oscillator circuit using ideal op-amp
and diodes is shown in the figure.
The nature of feedback in this circuit is

(A) Positive current
(B) Negative current
(C) Positive voltage
(D) Negative voltage
ECE/IN - 2013
2. In the feedback network shown below , if
the feedback factor k is increased , then
the
The time duration for +ve part of the Vin V1 A0 Vout
cycle is and for ve part is . The
value of will be _______________
5. A hysteresis type TTL inverter is used to

realize an oscillator in the circuit shown
in the figure. vf=kvout k
(A) Input impedance increases and output

impedance decreases
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) Input impedance increases and output

impedance also increases
(C) Input impedance decreases and
output impedance also decreases
(D) Input impedance decreases and
output impedance increases
ECE 6. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. D] Current Series
Ideal transconductance amplifier has O/P is taken at collector which is voltage
infinite input and output resistance. emitter node will be current and
resistor is grounded
2. [Ans. A] Series
3. [Ans. D] 7. [Ans. A]
EE
1. [Ans. A]
2 2 Output will be either at .
( Refer Diagram below) When output will be at diode
connected to resistance will be on
making voltage at point P equal to 6V.
When output is at diode connected
5v
to 2 resistance will be on making
voltage at point equal to .
V
+
+
- 2. [Ans. B]
-
+ It is voltage – voltage feedback.
+
3. [Ans. C]
Barkhausen criteria for oscillation (for
positive feedback)
4. [Ans. A] A = open loop gain

In the parallel RLC Ckt B = feedback factor
μHand F
( )
=
√ √
So that for a tuned amplifier, gain is ( ) ||
maximum at resonant frequency
5. [Ans. B]
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( )( )
(
2
Real and imaginary part on LHS and RHS
are same so imaginary part = 0
For (+Ve) cycle capacitor charges from

2 2
Apply KCL at node ( )
4. [Ans. *] Range 1.2 to 1.3
( )
( )
2
( 2 )
~ ( )
( ) ( )
( )
2 2
2
2
2
[ ]
For (- Ve) cycle capacitor discharges from
2 2
Apply KCL at node ( )
( )
( )
2
K ( 2 )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( 2 ) ( ) IN
1. [Ans. D]
2 Feedback in this circuit is drain voltage as
( )
negative.
2
2 2. [Ans. A]
( )
2 Given connection is voltage series F/B.
2
[ ] increases and decreases
2
y q
2
2
( )
[ 2 ]
5. [Ans. *] Range 0.62 to 0.66
During the charging of capacitor

() ( ) ( ( ) ( ))
( )
()
During discharging of capacitor

() ( ) ( ( ) ( ))
() ( )
( )
( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Operational Amplifiers and Its Applications
ECE - 2006 ECE - 2007

1. For the circuit shown in the following 4. For the Op-amp circuit shown in the
figure, the capacitor C is initially figure, is
uncharged. At t , the switch S is closed. 2 kΩ
The voltage across the capacitor at

t millisecond is
1 kΩ
1V
1 kΩ
k 1 kΩ
(A) 2V (C) 0.5 V

In the figure shown above, the OP AMP is (B) 1V (D) 0.5 V
supplied with ±15V.
(A) 0 Volts (C) 9.45 Volts 5. In the Op-amp circuit shown, assume that
(B) 6.3 Volts (D) 10 Volts the diode current follows the equation
I = exp (V/ ). For = 2 V, =
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 2 and for = 4 V, = . The
and 3 relationship between and is
A regulated power supply, shown in
figure below, has an unregulated input
(UR) of 15 Volts and generates a
regulated output . Use the component KΩ
values shown in the figure.
k k
k
(A) =√
(B) =e
(C) = ln 2
k
(D) = ln 2

In the figure above, the ground has been
shown by the symbol and 7
2. The Power dissipation across the Consider the Op-Amp circuit shown in the
transistor Q1, shown in the figure is figure.
(A) 4.8 Watts (C) 5.4 Watts
(B) 5.0 Watts (D) 6.0 Watts
3. If the unregulated voltage increases by

20%, then power dissipation across the
transistor Q1
(A) Increases by 20%
(B) Increases by 50%
(C) Remains unchanged
(D) Decreases by 20%
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. The transfer function (s)/ (s) is 10. Consider the Schmidt trigger circuit
(A) (C) shown below
(D) k
(B)
7. If sin t and
sin t , then the minimum k
and maximum values of (in radians)
k
are respectively
(A) –π/ and π/ (C) –π and
(B) and π/ (D) –π/ and A triangular wave which goes from 12V
to 12V is applied to the inverting input of
ECE - 2008 the OPAMP. Assume that the output of the
8. Consider the following circuit using an OPAMP swings from +15V to 15V.The
ideal OPAMP. The I-V characteristics of voltage at the non-inverting input
the diode is described by the relation switches between
I= (e ) where m (A) 12V and +12 V
and V is the voltage across the (B) 7.5V and 7.5V
diode (taken as positive for forward bias) (C) 5V and +5V
(D) 0V and 5V
D 4k
ECE - 2009
= 1 11. In the following astable multivibrator
circuit, which properties of t depend
100k on ?
For an input voltage the output

voltage is
(A) 0V (C) 0.7V
(B) 0.1V (D) 1.1V
9. The OPAMP circuit shown below

represents a
(A) Only the frequency

(A) High pass filter
(B) Only the amplitude
(B) Low pass filter
(C) Both the amplitude and frequency
(C) Band pass filter
(D) Neither the amplitude nor the
(D) Band reject filter
frequency
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2010
12. Assuming the OP AMP to be ideal, the
voltage gain of the amplifier shown below
is
(A) (C) ( )
(B) (D) ( )
13. The transfer characteristic for the

precision rectifier circuit shown below is
(assume ideal OP AMP and practical ECE - 2011
diodes) 14. The circuit below implements a filter
between the input current i and the
output voltage v . Assume that the opamp
is ideal. The filter implemented is a
(A) low pass filter

(B) band pass filter
(C) band stop filter
(D) high pass filter
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
15. In the circuit shown below what is the
output voltage (Vout) if a silicon transistor
Q and an ideal op – amp are used?
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
+15 V Q
1 k
k k
Vout
5V .7
15 V
(A) 15 V (C) +0.7 V

19. In the circuit shown, the op-amp has finite
(B) 0.7 V (D) +15 V
input impedance, infinite voltage gain and
16. In the circuit shown below the op – amps zero input offset voltage. The output
are ideal. The Vout in Volts is voltage is
1 k 1 k
+15 V
+15 V
1 k Vout
+1V -15 V
-15 V (A) (C)
(B) (D)
1 k 1 k
20. In the differential amplifier shown in the
(A) 4 (C) 8 figure, the magnitudes of the common-
(B) 6 (D) 10 mode and differential-mode gains are
and , respectively. If the resistance
ECE - 2014
is increased, then
17. In the low-pass filter shown in the figure,
for a cut-off frequency of 5 kHz , the value
of (in k ) is ________
k n
18. In the voltage regulator circuit shown in (A) increases

the figure, the op-amp is ideal. The BJT (B) common-mode rejection ratio
has .7 and β and the increases
zener voltage is 4.7 V. For a regulated (C) increases
output of 9V, the value of R (in Ω is (D) common-mode rejection ratio
_________ decreases
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
21. Assuming that the Op-amp in the circuit (A)

shown is ideal, is given by
(B)
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
22. The circuit shown represents
(C)
12V
0.7V
(A) a bandpass filter
(B) a voltage controlled oscillator
(C) an amplitude modulator (D)
(D) a monostable multivibrator
EE -2006
1. For a given sinusoidal input voltage, the 0.7V
voltage waveform at point P of the
clamper circuit shown in figure will be 12V
EE -2007
2. The circuit shown in the figure is
~
oad
r
Vin
(A) A voltage source with voltage
(B) A voltage source with voltage

(C) A current source with current
.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(D) A current source with current

(D)
.
3. IC 555 in the adjacent figure is configured

as an astable multivibrator. It is enabled
to oscillate at t =0 by applying a high
input to pin 4. The pin description is: 1
and 8 – supply; 2- trigger; 4- reset; 4. The switch S in the circuit of the figure is
6 – threshold; 7 – discharge. The initially closed. It is opened at time t=0.
waveform appearing across the capacitor You may neglect the Zener diode forward
starting from t = 0, as observed on a voltage drops. What is the behaviour of
storage CRO is for t ?
+ +10V
k +10 V
8
10K
7
+
k 5.0V
IC 555 3
10K
S 0.01 10V
2, 6 k 5.0V
C 4 1
10V
(A) It makes a transition from

(A)
to at t . s
(B) It makes a transition from
to at t . 7 s
(C) It makes a transition from
to at t . s
(D) It makes a transition from
(B) to at t . 7 s
EE -2008
5. The block diagrams of two types of half
wave rectifiers are shown in the figure.
The transfer characteristics of the
rectifiers are also shown within the block.
P Q
(C)
V0 V0
Vin 0 V0 Vin V0
Vin
0 Vin
It is desired to make full wave rectifier

using above two half – wave rectifiers.
The resultant circuit will be
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A)
5V
2.5V
t(sec)
(B)
t(sec)
0
2.5V
5V
(C)
5V
0
t(sec)
5V
(D)
5V
0
t(sec)
5V
Statement for Linked Answer Questions

7 and 8
A general filter circuit is shown in the
figure:
6. A waveform generator circuit using

OPAMPs is shown in the figure. It
produces a triangle wave at point ‘ ’ with
a peak to peak voltage of 5V for = 0 V.
7. If R1 = R2 = RA and R3 = R4 = RB, the

circuit acts as a
(A) all pass filter (C) high pass filter
(B) band pass filter (D) low pass filter
If the voltage is made + 2.5 V, the
voltage waveform at point ‘ ’ will become
8. The output of the filter in Q.7 is given to
the circuit shown in below figure
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
z
pamp
rms
The gain vs frequency characteristic of
output (Vo) will be k
(A)
Gain
(A) πm leading by 0
(B) πm leading by 0
(C) 1 π m leading by 900
0 (𝛚)
(D) πm lagging by 0
(B)
10. An ideal op-amp circuit and its input
Gain waveform are shown in the figures.
The output waveform of this circuit will
be
0 (𝛚)
(C)
Gain
6V
k
0 (𝛚)
+
(D) k
3V
k
Gain
0 (𝛚)
t t
EE -2009
9. The following circuit has k
C = 10 F . The input voltage is a sinusoid
at 50Hz with an rms value of 10V. Under
ideal conditions, the current is from the
source is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A)
t t
(B)
t
t t t
t
t t t
(C)
EE -2010
11. Given that the op-amp is ideal, the output
voltage is
(D)
(A) 4V (C) 7.5V

(B) 6V (D) 12.12V
EE -2011
12. For the circuit shown below,
13. A-Low pass filter with a cut-off frequency

of 30Hz is cascaded with a high pass filter
with a cut-off frequency of 20Hz. The
resultant system of filter will function as ,
(A) An all-pass filter
(B) An all-Stop filter
the CORRECT transfer characteristic is (C) A band stop (band -reject) filter
(D) An band-pass filter
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE/EE/IN -2012
14. The circuit shown is a
(| |)
utput 𝛚
ntput
(A) Low pass filter with

f rad/s
(B) High pass filter with f rad/s
(C) Low pass filter with f rad/s
(D) High pass filter with f rad/s 𝛚

/
/
EE -2014
15. Given that the op-amps in the figure are
ideal, the output voltage is
(| |)
(A) (C) /
(B) (D)
16. In the figure shown, assume the op-amp

to be ideal. Which of the alternatives gives
the correct Bode plots for the transfer
function ?
/
/
k
𝛚
/
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. An operational-amplifier circuit is shown

in the figure.
(| |)
The output of the circuit for a given input

is
/
/ ( )
𝛚
/ ( )
/
( )
or
18. The transfer characteristic of the Op-amp

(| |)
circuit shown in figure is
/
/
𝛚
/
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. When the switch S2 is closed the gain of

the programmable gain amplifier shown
in the following Figure is
(A) 0.5 (C) 4

(B) 2 (D) 8
3. The potential difference between the

input terminals of an op-amp may be
treated to be nearly zero, if
(A) The two supply voltages are
balanced
(B) The output voltage is not saturated
(C) The op amp is used in a circuit
having negative feedback
(D) There is a dc bias path between each
IN - 2006 of the input terminals and the circuit
1. If the value of the resistance R in the ground
following figure is increased by 50%, then
voltage gain of the amplifier shown in the 4. A dual op-amp instrumentation amplifier
figure will change by is shown below. The expression for the
k output of the amplifier is given by
k
Vin
(A) 50%
(B) 5%
(C) 50%
(D) negligible amount  R2 
(A) v0  1   (v  v 1 )
 R1  2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
 2R2  8. In the circuit shown in the following

(B) v0  1   (v  v 1 )
R1  2
figure , the op-amp has input bias current
 n and input offset voltage
2R2 m . The maximum dc error in the
(C) v0  (v  v 1 )
R1 2 output voltage is
 2R1  k
(D) v0  1   (v  v 1 )
 R 2  2
k
5. An astable multivibrator circuit using a
555 IC is given in the following figure. The +
frequency of oscillation is
8 4
I=5 mA 3
(A) 1.0 mV (C) 2.5mV
Output
6 (B) 2.0 mV (D) 3.0 mV
555
2 7
discharge IN - 2007
(C= 0.1 uF) 9. When light falls on the photodiode shown
1
in the following circuit, the reverse
saturation current of the photodiode
(A) 20 kHz (C) 40 kHz
changes from to .
(B) 30 kHz (D) 45 kHz
k
Statement for linked answer questions 6
and 7
In the Schmitt trigger circuit shown
below, the Zener diodes have VZ (reverse
saturation voltage) = 6V and VD (forward
voltage drop) = 0.7V Assuming the op – amp to be ideal, the
output voltage, of the circuit.
(A) does not change
(B) changes from 1 V to 2V
(C) changes from 2 V to 1 V
(D) changes from 1 V to 2V
.
10. Consider the linear circuit with and ideal
6. If the circuit has the input lower trip point
op-amp shown in the figure below.
(LTP)=0V, then the value of is given as
1 2
(A) 0.223 (C) 4.67
’ ’
(B) 2.67 (D) ∞
kΩ
-
7. The input upper trip point (UTP) of the Vi Vo
+
Schmitt trigger is
(A) 1.5 V (C) 2.42V
(B) 2.1 V (D) 7V The Z-parameters of the two port
feedback network are kΩ
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
and = kΩ. The gain of the (D)

amplifier is o/ i
(A) + 110 (C) 1 4 dB
(B) + 11 (D) – 120 1dB
20 dB/decade
11. Consider the circuit shown below
f
330pF
21.9kHz
22k 22k
Ω Ω
330pF
12. In the circuit shown below the switch (S)
10k
Ω is closed whenever the input voltage
is positive and open otherwise.
7kΩ R R
The correct frequency response of the

circuit is .
(A)
Vin
o/ i
4 dB
1 dB The circuit is a
(A) Low pass filter
20dB/decade
(B) Level shifter
f (C) Modulator
21. 9kHz (D) Precision rectifier
(B)
/ 13. Consider the triangular wave generator
0 dB shown below.
3 dB 40dB/decade
R kΩ
Input
1 kΩ
10 kΩ Output
f
21. 9kHz
(C)
o/ i
Assume that the op amps are ideal and
4 dB have ± 2 V power supply. If the input is a
1 dB
± 5 V, 50 Hz square wave of duty cycle
40 dB/decade 50%, the condition that results in a
triangular wave of peak to peak
amplitude 5 V and frequency 50 Hz at the
21. 9kHz f
output is
(A) RC = 1 (C)
(B)
(D) 5
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
14. A 555 astable multivibrator circuit is

Noise Square Wave
shown in the figure below 7V
8V
3V
KΩ
RA reset 1V 6V
discharge -1V t
KΩ RB output -3V
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
tr gger
-7V
threshold
Which one of the following is an
ground
appropriate choice for the upper and
lower trip points of the Schmitt trigger to
If is shorted, the waveform at is recover a square wave of the same
(A) frequency from the corrupted input
VC signal
2/3 VCC
cc (A) ± 8.0 V (C) ± 0.5 V
cc
(B) ± 2.0 V (D) 0V
1/3VCC
0 t 16. The figure shows a signal op-amp
(B) differential amplifier circuit .
V
ccC cc
2/3 VCC k
cc
cc
1/3 VCC
k
0 +
t +
m + k
(C) cc k
VC cc m
cc
2/3 VCC
1/3 VCC Which of the following statement about

t the output is correct?
0
(D) (A) m
VC (B) m m
cc (C) m v m
2/3 VCC
(D) m
1/3 VCC
0
t
15. The input signal shown in the figure

below is fed to a Schmitt trigger. The
signal has a square wave amplitude of
6 V p-p. It is corrupted by an additive high
frequency noise of amplitude 8 V p-p.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Common Data Question for Q.No. 17, 18 & 21. A differential amplifier shown below has
19 a differential mode gain of 100 and a
Consider the op-amp circuit shown in the CMRR of 40dB. If . and
figure below: . , the output V0 is
k k
--
+ (A) 10V (C) 11V
(B) 10.5V (D) 15V
- 22. The op-amp circuit shown below is that of
- a
17. If . . and 7
and the op-amp is ideal , the value of the
is
(A) k (C) k
k
(B) k (D) k k k
18. Let sin πf t and K .

The Op-amp has a slew rate of . / s (A) Low-pass filter with a maximum gain
with its other parameters being ideal .The of 1
values of and f for which the amplifier (B) Low-pass filter with a maximum,
output will have no distortion are, gain of 2
respectively, (C) High-pass filter with a maximum
(A) 0.1 V and 300kHz gain of 1
(B) 0.5 V and 300kHz (D) High-pass filter with a maximum
(C) 0.1 V and 30kHz gain of 2
(D) 0.5 V and 30kHz
23. In the op-amp circuit shown below the
input voltage vin is gradually increased
19. Let and k . Assume
from 10V to +10V. Assuming that the
that the op-amp is ideal except for a
output voltage vout saturates at 10V and
non-Zero input bias current. What is the
+10V,vout will change from
value of for the output Voltage of the
op-amp to be Zero?
(A) . k (C) k
(B) . k (D) k
k
k
IN - 2008
20. An ideal op-amp has the characteristics of
an ideal (A) 10V to +10V when vin 1V
(A) Voltage controlled voltage source (B) 10V to +10V when vin 1V
(B) Voltage controlled current source (C) +10V to 10V when vin 1V
(C) Current controlled voltage source (D) +10V to 10V when vin 1V
(D) Current controlled current source
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
24. For the op-amp circuit shown below is 27. The input resistance of the circuit shown
approximately equal to in the figure, assuming an ideal op-amp, is
2R
R 3R
(A) R/3 (C) R

(A) 10V (C) +5V (B) 2R/3 (D) 4R/3
(B) 5V (D) +10V
IN - 2009 28. In the circuit shown in the figure, the

25. The circuit shown is the figure is switch S has been in Position 1 for a long
time. It is then moved to Position 2.
Assume the Zener diodes to be ideal. The
time delay between the switch moving to
Position 2 and the transition in the output
voltage is
osition k
k
osition
.7k ener
(A) An all-pass filter diode
(B) A bandpass filter .7k ener
(C) A highpass filter diode
(D) A lowpass filter
(A) 5.00ms (C) 10.00ms
(B) 8.75ms (D) 13.75ms
26. In the circuit shown, the Zener diode has
ideal characteristics and a breakdown IN - 2010
voltage of 3.2V. The output voltage for 29. In the ideal opamp circuit given in the
an input voltage = +1V is closest to below figure, the value of Rf is varied from
k 1k to 100k . The gain G = ( ) will
k k
(A) remain constant at +1

(B) remain constant at -1
(A) 10V (C) 5V
(C) vary as -( /10,000 )
(B) 6.6V (D) 3.2V
(D) vary as ( /10,000)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
30. An active filter is shown in the below IN - 2011

figure. The dc gain and the 3dB cut-off Statement for Linked Answer Questions
frequency of the filter respectively, are, 33and 34
nearly and in the circuit shown below
are matched n-channel enhancement
mode MOSFETs operating in saturation
k
mode, forward voltage drop of each diode
is .7 reverse leakage current of each
diode is negligible and the op-amp is ideal
k
R1 = 15.9 k , R2 = 159 k , C1 = 1.0nF

m
(A) 40dB, 3.14 kHz
(B) 40dB, 1.00 kHz
(C) 20dB, 6.28 kHz
(D) 20dB, 1.00 kHz
Common Data for Questions: 31 & 32

A differential amplifier is constructed
using an ideal op-amp as shown in the
33. The current in the circuit is
adjoining figure. The values of R1 and R2
(A) 1 mA (C) m
are 47k and 470k respectively. (B) .5 mA (D) 2 ma
34. For the computed value of current , the

output voltage is
(A) 1.2V (C) 0.2V
(B) 0.7V (D) 0.7V
35. The ideal op-amp based circuit shown

31. The input impedances seen looking into
below acts as a
the terminals V1 and V2, with respect to 0.5 µF
Ω Ω 0.5 µF
ground, respectively are
(A) 47k and 43k kΩ
(B) 47k and 47k
1 µF
(C) 47k and 517k
(D) 517k and 47k
32. V1 and V2 are connected to voltage

sources having an open circuit output of
(A) low-pass filter
+1V each and internal resistances of
(B) high-pass filter
13k and 3k respectively. The output
(C) band-pass filter
voltage V0 is
(D) band-reject filter
(A) 0V (C) 1.5V
(B) 0.15V (D) 10V
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
36. The value of of the series regulator (C) 6.7 V and 4.7 V
shown below is (D) 5.3 V and 3.3 V
40 V(DC)
kΩ
38. Assuming base-emitter voltage of 0.7V
and β of transistor , the output
voltage in the ideal opamp circuit
kΩ shown below is
5V
6 V(DC)
kΩ Ω
(A) 24 V (C) 30 V
(B) 28 V (D) 32 V 5V
37. The transfer characteristics of the circuit

drawn below is observed on the 1V
oscilloscope used in XY mode. The display
on the oscilloscope is shown on the right
hand side. is connected to the X input (A) – 1V (C) V
with a setting of 0.5 V/div, and is (B) 1/3.3V (D) V
connected to the Y input with a setting of
2 V/div. The beam is positioned at the IN - 2013
origin when is zero. 39. The operational amplifier shown in the
circuit below has a slew rate of 0.8 Volts /
s. The input signal is . sin( t . The
maximum frequency of input in kHz for
which there is no distortion in the output
πt
1kΩ
is
~V
sin
470k
22k
0.25sin t
~ V0
(A) 23.84 (C) 50.0

(B) 25.0 (D) 46.60
40. The circuit below incorporates a

permanent magnet moving coil milli –
Assuming that the op-amp is ideal and the ammeter of range 1 mA having a series
zener diodes have forward biased voltage resistance of 10k. Assuming constant
drop of 0.7V, the values of reverse break- diode forward resistance of 50, a
down voltages of and are, forward diode drop of 0.7 V and infinite
respectively. reverse diode resistance for each diode ,
(A) 3.3 V and 5.3 V the reading of the meter in mA is
(B) 4.7 V and 6.7 V
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
R2
mA
10 k
X R1
10 k Z
Y
5V,
50Hz
~ V0 R3 V0
V1 R4
(A) 0.45 (C) 0.7
(B) 0.5 (D) 0.9
41. A signal Vi(t)=10+10sin 100πt + 10 sin Fig. a

4000πt + 10sin 100000πt is supplied to a +5V
filter circuit (shown below) made up of
ideal op–Amp. The least attenuated
R R
frequency component in the output will
be X
Differential Z
. Y
. Amplifier
2k
Strain
. Gage
1k 750 R
R
.
~ V1(t) V0(t)
Fig. b
(A) 0 Hz (C) 2 kHz 42. Assuming its differential gain to be 10 and
(B) 50 Hz (D) 50kHz the op – amp to be otherwise ideal , the
CMRR is
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 42 (A) (C)
and 43 (B) (D)
A differential amplifier with signal
terminals X, Y, Z is connected as shown in 43. The differential amplifier is connected as
Fig. (a) below for CMRR measurement shown in Fig. (b) above to a single strain
where the differential amplifier has an gage bridge. Let the strain gage resistance
additional constant offset voltage in the vary around its no – load resistance R by
output. The observations obtained are : ± 1%. Assume the input impedance of the
when Vi= 2V, V0=3mV, and when Vi=3V, amplifier to be high compared to the
V0=4mV. equivalent source resistance of the
bridge, and the common mode
characteristic to be as obtained above.
The output voltage in mV varies
approximately from
(A) +128 to – 128 (C) +122 to – 122
(B) + 128 to – 122 (D) +99 to – 101
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2014 47. For the given low-pass circuit shown in

44. For the op-amp shown in the figure, the the figure below, the cutoff frequency in
bias currents are = 450 nA and Hz will be ___________.
=350 nA. The values of the input bias . 7
current ( ) and the input offset current
( ) are: k k
. 7
~
k k
(A) = 800 nA, =50 nA
(B) = 800 nA, =100nA
(C) = 400 nA, =50nA
(D) = 400 nA, 100nA 48. The figures show an oscillator circuit
having an ideal Schmitt trigger and its
45. The amplifier in the figure has gain of -10 input-output characteristics. The time
and input resistance of 50 k . The value period (in ms) of t is___________.
of and are
t
output
k
nput
(A) k k
(B) k k
(C) k k
(D) k k
46. Assuming an ideal op-amp in linear range

of operation, the magnitude of the
transfer impedance in of the
current to voltage converter shown in the
figure is ___________.
k k
. k
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 4. [Ans. C]
1. [Ans. D] 2 kΩ
Initially the switch is closed at t= 0

Then circuit is
The circuit is integrator circuit 1 kΩ
1V
∫ dt
1 kΩ
pply K at node 1 kΩ
dv
k dt
( ) ( )
k
k
.
k k
k k
2. [Ans. D] ( ) ( ) .
k k
.
k k .
k
5. [Ans. D]
Applying KCL
k
exp ( )
k
Volt across 24 k due to virtual exp ( )
ground concept. So voltage across 12k k
is 3V ln i
k
ow ln
k
ln
k
watts ln
3. [Ans. B] 6. [Ans. A]
Unregulated voltage increases by 20%
i. e. New regulated voltage = 18V
watts
increases
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. C]
( ) ( )
. k
( ) ( )
k
j k
j
j From KCL
j s
j
s
s k k k
s s
s s
..
7. [Ans. C] Threshold depends on output
s s So, when
s s
s
s When
s s
tan tan
tan 11. [Ans. A]
inimum value of π at ∞
maximum value of at 12. [Ans. C]
a
8. [Ans. B]
c
⁄
(e )
Where and b
Voltage across diode = 60 mV
Voltage across 4k resistor s k
k Op-amp is ideal, so it will satisfy the
m virtual ground property
Total voltage is m m a c
m . So, we can redraw the circuit as
9. [Ans. B]
At low frequency, capacitor is open and
inductor short so,
At high frequency capacitor is short and
inductor open so,
so it is low pass filter.
Circuit is similar to standard inverting
amplifier
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
[ ( )]
13. [Ans. B]
i
i i
i
Hence given circuit is a high pass filter
i
15. [Ans. B]
k
.7
Redraw the given circuit
Case (1)
5V
i
For non-zero value of , diode must be
off, so i
Then by virtual short
equivalent connection for transistor is
t
0
t
.7 0.7V
When , both diode are
conducting so =0V 16. [Ans. C]
ain of stage
14. [Ans. D] k k
( ) ( )
At k k
Hence circuit can be redrawn as below
1k k
-2V
m i m
i
1k Vout
i
+1V
-15 V
1k 1k
t ∞ ∞
Hence circuit can be redrawn as below Gain of stage II = * +
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. *] Range 3.1 to 3.26 20. [Ans. B]

β e
ut off frequency f
π h β
is inversily proportional to Re
πf if increases decreases
.
. k z if decreases CMRR increases
18. [Ans. *] Range 1092 to 1094 21. [Ans. D]
k k
a
.7
Op-Amp ideal so it will satisfy the

property of virtual ground
.7
( )
ere .7
k
.7k .7
. .7k
.7k
.
7 22. [Ans. D]
The circuit shown in the figure has
. positive feedback. So it can be either a
oscillator or multivibrator.
19. [Ans. C] So option A and C are cancelled out
Now, a voltage controlled oscillator is
usually implemented using a artley’s
oscillator where the feedback is like
shown below.
must have inductors in the feedback

Due to virtual ground circuit. Since the given circuit has no
inductors, it has to be a multivibrator.
o
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE 5. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. D] From the transfer characteristic of the
When is positive, will be –ve and rectifier P is
diode will be OFF, so V for
When is negative, will be ve and for
diode will be ON, so .7
2. [Ans. D]
Voltage at non inverting terminal,
From the transfer characteristics of the
rectifier Q is
Due to virtual ground for
current through Load, for
r
So this circuit acts as a current source
with current
3. [Ans. A]
An astable multi-vibrator is providing
pulses as given below.
For full wave rectifier output is W ‘ ’

must be connected to inverting and ‘ ’
But in this case initial voltage at capacitor must be connected to non-inverting
is zero so it starts from zero also charging terminal of the op-amp
time will be larger (normally) than
discharging time but it is made equal by 6. [Ans. A]
using a diode. When . , O/P will be clamped by a
dc value of 2.5 V
4. [Ans. D]
It is limited circuit 7. [Ans. C]
It makes transition from +5V to 5V
⁄
( e )
(Voltage across 100k )
.
sec
t . 7 s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Let, only inverting terminal
magnitude i v
ere π
s s
Let, is only on non-inverting terminal π mA
and it will be lagging by 90°
( )
10. [Ans. D]
k
( )
( ) k
Putting the value of , we get

( ) k
s
ere
( ) When upto t ve
When after t ve
( )
o it is high pass filter

11. [Ans. B]
8. [Ans. D] ( )
12. [Ans. D]
C First section is differential amplifier
having gain off 1.
. .
= .
So gain frequency characteristics will
be as option (D)
9. [Ans. D]
Voltage at inverting terminal
So Output is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) 15. [Ans. B]
econd stage schmitt trigger x
x
y
y
Applying superposition theorem
When y = 0
x x
when x
y/
13. [Ans. D] y
Low Pass Filter High Pass Filter
y x
from equation and
16. [Ans. A]
k
i
20Hz 30Hz
Pass band
It is a band pass filter.
14. [Ans. B]
f
V= =0
= =
=- =
= s
High pass Fitter with f rad /sec
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. D]
Since positive feedback is there at the IN

output of op-amp 1 depending on 1. [Ans. D]
output will vary between Voltage gain
and
At the output of op-amp So it does not depend on R.
Gain of op-amp is ⁄
Hence net output will vary between 2. [Ans. B]
and When switch is closed,
( )
18. [Ans. C]
3. [Ans. C]
When Op-Amp is used in ve feedback
then voltage difference between the
-
- terminals is treated as zero.
4. [Ans. A]
When The equivalent circuit is as follows:
is on
is off
( ) ( ) . ------------- (1)
when and
is on
is off ⟹ * +
From equation (1)
⟹ * +
=( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. B] 8. [Ans. D]
It is a sawtooth wave generator across DC output Voltage that is output offset
capacitor C. voltage,
( )
So maximum offset (dc voltage) at the
output will be,
t ( ) m
T T T
m m
d m
o
dt T T
d 9. [Ans. B]
dt
d k
dt .
a
T
f k z
T
The given circuit is
6. [Ans. C]
pply K at ‘a’
.7
=0
When
. When
I=
When reverse circuit of the photodiode
I . =0
.
changes from 100 to , the output
1.5 = voltage change from 1V to 2V
= 4.47
10. [Ans. D]
Given that the imp. Parameters are
7. [Ans. C] k k
6.7V k
k
I k
1.5V k
k
I=
. .
=
. Then the given op-amp circuit is
.
=I . = .
.
= .
= 2.45V
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
k k 12. [Ans. D]
R R
k
k .
a
Vin
b
pply K at ‘a’
pply K at ‘x’ t
Case-1
When ve half cycle then switch (s)
ain is closed and circuit will become
R R
11. [Ans. B]
p .
Vin
k k
p
k ( )
( )
7k
.
Case -2
When ve half cycle then switch s is
The given circuit is a second order low
open and circuit will become
pass filter therefore it has a
R R
dB/decade and it has 3 dB cut-off
frequency as
f .
π√
. k z Vin
It has a decade form 0 dB to 3 dB in mid

frequency range.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
No circuit flow through left side Op-Amp through resistor . But is shorted
due to open switch so out. So discharge time constant
= .So capacitor will
instantly discharge so correct output is in
So, the circuit as a rectifier (fullwave)
option (A)
13. [Ans. B]
15. [Ans. B]
O/P of first OPAMP
The UTP value selected in such a way that
t ∫ t dt, where k to recover a square wave of same
and O/P of second OPAMP frequency from the input signal
t t When The output is
∫ t dt When
K and
∫ t dt When
input is , 50Hz square wave. O/P We can recover a square wave of same
should be triangular wave of . frequency from the corrupted input signal
50Hz means 20msec, so in 10msec O/P when UTP and LTP value are
should charge from . to . ,
when . 16. [Ans. B]
k
t ∫ dt
k
-
+ +
m
+ k
k
- m
-
14. [Ans. C] Apply KCL at node
KΩ
RA reset .
discharge
KΩ RB out
. .
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
tr gger .
.
threshold
. . .
ground .
.
.
Capacitor C charges toward through Now, Apply KCL at Node
and until in raises upto 2/3 .
This voltage is the threshold voltage of .
For an ideal op-amp
pin 6 which drives comparator 1 to
. .
trigger the flip-flop so that the output at
.
pin 3 goes low. In addition, the discharge
. .7 7
transistor is driven on. Causing the output
. m
at pin 7 to discharge the capacitor
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. [Ans. B] K K
k k . K . K
20. [Ans. A]
-- 21. [Ans. B]
+
. and
.
-
- d
Apply the KCL at the inverting node
[ ] . .
.
Put, 7 . and .
. . 22. [Ans. D]
7 [ ]
At low frequency, C is open and
. At high frequency C is short and
. 7 .
( )
k
so it is a high pass filter with max. gain of
18. [Ans. C] 2.
sin πf ( ) 23. [Ans. D]

When and is connected to
sin πft
d inverting terminal, output will saturate to
| | πf cos πft +10V.
dt
πf
To avoid distortion,
Slew rate | |
. πf
k
. k
f
π
f 7 7. 7
nd oltage divider rule
So when f k z and .
Then f 7 7.7
So option (C) is correct. When crosses 1 V, So, output
will not change to .
19. [Ans. B] So, output will change from to
In order to avoid the effect of the bias when .
current, resistance at +ve terminal must
be equal to dc resistance seen from –ve
terminal by replacing all the sources by
their internal resistances.
Therefore,
k K K
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
24. [Ans. B] .
Equivalent circuit Now first open the zener diode then
circuit will be
k
k k
k
k
k k
By neglecting current through, 100K

compare to current through 105
resistance,
.
Similarly, by neglecting current through So zener will be on and circuit will be as
K compare to current through k
i
resistance,
i .
k
.7 k
m
.7
.7 .
o will lie between and .
. . Because zener will be on then current 1
5.2 V mA will be divided in two parts and
output will be – 10V < < 3.2V
25. [Ans. A] f output
s s then i . m
i . m
s [ ] oi i
hence this is not possible
So it is all - pass filter.
When .
Then i . m
26. [Ans. B]
. .
Zener diode is in reverse bias. The i . m
equivalent circuit is, here i i i
k
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
27. [Ans. A] at time t , when becomes . ,

2R will switch to 5V.
3R . e ⁄
t .7 ms
R
29. [Ans. A]
k
Input resistance
⃗ a
b
Voltage at inverting terminal, k
By KCL at node A, and
pply K at a
By KCL at inverting terminal
By equ (1) and (2),
Gain =
28. [Ans. B] 30. [Ans. D]

When the switch is at position 1, DC gain = 20 log | | = 20 dB
capacitor will be charged by +30V and
3-dB cut-off frequency = = 1 kHz
. so voltage at non –inverting
terminal will be 2.5V. 31. [Ans. C]
When switch is moved to position 2,
7 k
capacitor will start discharging and when
. . will switch to 5V.
Equivalent circuit 7k
k
nvertinf terminal
7k
s 7 k
Input impedance seen looking into the

terminals and with respect to
s
s ground
c Apply superposition theorem put
⁄
s i t e So voltage at
voltage at inverting terminal By virtual ground concept voltage at
i t
⁄
e
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
So input impedance seen from with Since, and are all matched
respect to ground is 7k transistors
Now put So, say
The input impedance from with Then m
respect to ground or . m
7 7 k lso
7k . m
32. [Ans. B] 34. [Ans. A]

Now the effective circuit is will be reverse biased while will be
7 k forward biased
o (Forward voltage drop of )
k .7 .
.
35. [Ans. A]
7k The ideal op-amp based circuit is shown
7 k
in figure 1. with T-network at the input
and feedback paths,. Note the specific
relations between resistances and
Now voltage at point P is
capacitances used. It can be shown that
7 7
this circuit acts as a double integrator and
hence it is a low pass filter specifically
By virtual ground capacitor, voltage at
transfer function
point Q is
. .
7
k
Now apply KCL at point Q
k 7 k
.
.
igure
33. [Ans. B]
k
s
s
s s
or .
m . . sec
s
. s s
The frequency response is given by
j which shows the gain falls by
40 dB per decade
Clearly m
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
36. [Ans. C] When input voltage (During ve

cycle)
k everse biased
}
orward iased
.7
k .7
.
Using voltage divider rule 38. [Ans. C]

.7
or . m
or
so β m
37. [Ans. D]
When input voltage (During ve k
cycle)
Forward biased
Reverse biased
.7
ow .
39. [Ans. A]
.
1kΩ f
π π .
Where . sin t
f . k z . sin t
.7 40. [Ans. A]
.7 or
.7 41. [Ans. C]
.7 For Op-Amp
. Analysis
.7
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
s . k z
T. 7
s
d . k z
k .
d d
Lower 3 dB dominant frequency is 0.5
ere kHz.
Total response
one pole
s and reject response
OP-Amp is low pass response; east attenuated
frequency k z
Low frequencies
z
k z
f
. k z k z
k . Only option (C)is lying in this range

k z Option (C) is correct
Op-Amp
Analysis 42. [Ans. C]
from given data

m
m
Solving (1) & (2)
s s
T.
s s
* +
43. [Ans. B]
* +
5V
* +* j +
R R
* j +
High pass response
R
High frequencies
[ ]
. k z
For variation is
d
7 . varies from 12.48mV to 12.56mV
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
m , given
k .
from bridge i
For change . m .
=127.8 mV
For change 47. [Ans. *]Range 15 to 16
op amp . m m It is second-order low pass system. t’s
. m m high cut-off-frequency
. m f
O/P varies from 7. m to . m π√
ere f k
44. [Ans. D] c c . 7
In an OPAMP,
f
nput bias current π√ k . 7
n / n . z
π k . 7 .
input offset current
n n 48. [Ans. *] Range 8.0 to 8.5
45. [Ans. B] T ln [ ]
Given k and gain
For an inverting amplifier, Gain = / ln [ ]
-10 / k .
Then k Time period .
. m secs
46. [Ans. 0.6]
k k
i
. k
i c
d
virtual ground
K at ode
i
i i
k . k k k
ki
ki ki
oi
. k k
ki
i
. k
. ki ki
ki . ki
ki
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Power Amplifiers
EE - 2007 EE - 2009
1. The input signal Vin shown in the figure is 2. Transformer and emitter follower can
a 1 KHz square wave voltage that both be used for impedance matching
alternates between +7V and 7V with a at the output of an audio amplifier. The
50% duty cycle. Both transistors have the basic relationship between the input
same current gain, which is large. The power Pin and output power Pout in both
circuit delivers power to the load resistor the cases is
RL. What is the efficiency of this circuit for (A) Pin = Pout for both transformer and
the given input? Choose the closest emitter follower
answer. (B) Pin > Pout for both transformer and
emitter follower
(C) Pin < Pout for transformer and
Pin = Pout for emitter follower
(D) Pin = Pout for transformer and
Pin < Pout for emitter follower
(A) 46% (C) 63%

(B) 55% (D) 92%
EE
1. [Ans. C]
load voltage = ±6.3 V
So efficiency
2. [Ans. D]
For emitter follower
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK Digital Circuits
Number Systems & Code Conversions
ECE-2006 ECE-2014
1. A new Binary Coded Pentary (BCP) 5. The number of bytes required to
number system is proposed in which represent the decimal number 1856357
every digit of a base-5 number is in packed BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)
represented by its corresponding 3-bit form is __________.
binary code. For example, the base-5
number 24 will be represented by its BCP EE-2007
code 010100. In this numbering system, 1. The octal equivalent of the HEX number
the BCP code 100010011001 AB.CD is
corresponds to the following number in (A) 253.314 (C) 526.314
base-5 system (B) 253.632 (D) 526.632
(A) 423 (C) 2201
(B) 1324 (D) 4231 EE-2014
2. A cascade of three identical modulo-5
2. The number of product terms in the counters has an overall modulus of
minimized sum-of-product expression (A) 5 (C) 125
obtained through the following K-map is (B) 25 (D) 625
(where, “d” denotes don’t care states)
1 0 0 1 3. Which of the following is an invalid state
0 d 0 0 in an 8-4-2-1 Binary Coded Decimal
0 0 d 1 counter
1 0 0 1 (A) 1 0 0 0 (C) 0 0 1 1
(A) 2 (C) 4 (B) 1 0 0 1 (D) 1 1 0 0
(B) 3 (D) 5
IN-2006
ECE-2007 1. A number N is stored in a 4-bit 2’s
3. X = 01110 and Y = 11001 are two 5-bit complement representation as
binary numbers represented in two’s a3 a2 a1 a0
complement format. The sum of X and Y It is copied into a 6-bit register and after a
represented in two’s complement format few operations, the final bit pattern is
using 6 bits is, a a a a a 1
(A) 100111 (C) 000111 The value of this bit pattern in 2’s
(B) 001000 (D) 101001 complement representation is given in
terms of the original number is N as
ECE-2008 (A) 32 a3 + 2N + 1 (C) 2N – 1
4. The two numbers represented in signed (B) 32 a3 – 2N – 1 (D) 2N + 1
2’s complement form are P = 11101101
and Q = 11100110. If Q is subtracted IN-2008
from P, the value obtained in signed 2’s 2. The result of (45)10 – (45)16 expressed in
complement form is 6-bit 2’s complement representation is,
(A) 100000111 (C) 11111001 (A) 011000 (C) 101000
(B) 00000111 (D) 111111001 (B) 100111 (D) 101001
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN-2009 IN-2011
3. The binary representation of the decimal 4. The base of the number system for the
number 1.375 is, addition operation 24 + 14 = 41 to be
(A) 1.111 (C) 1.011 true is
(B) 1.010 (D) 1.001 (A) 8 (C) 6
(B) 7 (D) 5
Answer Keys & Explanations
ECE 1 byte = 8 bit so

1. [Ans. D] Here d = 7
100 010 011 001 No. of bits = 28
4 2 3 1 byte = = 3 5= 4
2. [Ans. A]
EE
1 0 0 1 1. [Ans. B]
0 d 0 0 Hex number (AB.CD)
0 0 d 1 ⏞
1010 ⏞ 1011 ⏞ 1100 ⏞ 1101
1 0 0 1 For finding its octal number, we add one
zero in both extreme and group 3 bit
together
3. [Ans. C]
010
⏟ 101⏟ 011⏟ 110⏟ 011⏟ 010⏟
x = 01110
y = 11001 quivalent octal number 253 632
x y( ) = 100111
Carry discard it 2. [Ans. C]
00111 in 6 bits will be 000111 Overall modulus = 5 = 125
4. [Ans. B] 3. [Ans. D]
igned 2 s complement of BCD counter counts up to 1001
P = 11101101
o P = 00010011 IN
igned 2 scomplement of 1. [Ans. D]
= 11100110 Given number is a a a a in 2’s
P = P (2 s complement of )
complement form.
= 00010011
We know that in 2’s complement form if
11100110
we copy MSB at left of MSB any times the
11111001
number remains unchanged.
2 s complement of (P ) = 00000111
So a a a a = a a a a a a =
When we left shift a number by 1 bit then
5. [Ans. *] Range 3.9 to 4.1
it is multiplied by 2, a a a a a 0 = 2
A decimal digit is represented by 4 bit in
Now,
BCD format, so for a decimal number with
a a a a a 0 1=a a a a a 1=2 1
digits requires 4d bit and
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. [Ans. C]
(45) (45) = ( 24) = (101000)
3. [Ans. C]
0.375 × 2 = 0.750
0.750 × 2 = 1.5
1.5 × 2 = 1.0
Hence answer is 1.011
4. [Ans. B]
Let the base is x, Here
(24) (14) = (41)
(4 x 2 x) (4 x 1 x)
= (4 x 1 x )
4 + 2x + 4 + x = 4x + 1
x=7
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Boolean Algebra & Karnaugh Maps
ECE-2007 ECE-2014
1. The Boolean expression 5. The Boolean expression ( )( ̅)
̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅ ̅ can ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
( ̅) ̅ simplifies to
be minimized to (A) X (C) XY
(A) ̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ (B) Y (D) X+Y
(B) ̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅
(C) ̅ 6. Consider the Boolean function, F(w, x, y,
(D) z) = wy + xy + ̅ xyz + ̅ ̅ y + xz + ̅ ̅ ̅.
Which one of the following is the
ECE-2009 complete set of essential prime
2. If X = 1 in the logic equation implicates?
[X+Z{ ( +X ) }] { + ( X + Y)} (A) ̅̅ (C) ̅ ̅̅
=1 then (B) (D) ̅̅
(A) Y = Z (C) Z = 1
(D) Z = 0 7. For an n-variable Boolean function, the
(B) Y =
maximum number of prime implicants is
(A) ( ) (C)
EC/EE/IN -2012
3. In the sum of products function
(B) (D) ( )
( ) ∑( ), the prime implicants
are EE-2010
(A) ̅ ̅ Statement for Linked Answer Questions1
(B) ̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅ and 2
The following Karnaugh map represent a
(C) ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅
function .
(D) ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅
F
ECE-2013 YZ
4. In the circuit shown below, Q1 has X 00 01 11 10
negligible collector – to – emitter F
saturation voltage and the diode drops YZ
0 1 1 1 0
negligible voltage across it under forward
bias. If Vcc is +5 V, X and Y are digital X 00 01 11 10
signals with 0 V as logic 0 and as logic 1 0 0 1 0
1, then the Boolean expression for Z is 0 1 1 1 0
1. A minimized form of the function is
R1 (A) 1 0 (C)0 1 0
Z
(B) (D)
R2
X Q1
Diode 2. Which of the following circuits is a
realization of the above function ?
Y
(A) XY (C) X
(B) (D)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) ( )
X
F
(A) Y
Z
X
(B) F
X Y
Z
F ( )
(B) Y
Z
X
(C) F
Y
X Z
(C) F
Y
Z 4. The SOP (sum of products) form of a
X
(D) Boolean function is (0,1,3,7,11), where
F
Y inputs are A,B,C,D (A is MSB, and D is
X Z LSB). The equivalent minimized
(D) F expression of the function is
Y (A) (̅ )( ̅ )( ̅ ̅)( ̅ )
X Z
(B) ( ̅ )( ̅ )( ̅ ̅ )( ̅ )
F (C) (̅ )( ̅ )( ̅ ̅ )( ̅ ̅ )
EE-2014Y (D) (̅ )( ̅)( ̅ ̅)( ̅ )
Z
3. Which of the following logic circuits is a
realization of the function F whose IN-2006
Karnaugh map is shown in figure 1. Min-term (Sum of Products) expression
for a Boolean function is given as follows.
f(A, B, C) = m (0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6) where A is
the MSB and C is the LSB. The minimized
expression for the function is
(A) A + (B  C) (C) (B  C)
( ) (B) (A  B) + C (D)
IN-2007
2. A logic circuit implements the Boolean
function F = ̅ . Y + X .̅ . ̅ . It is found that
the input combination X = Y = 1 can
never occur. Taking this into account, a
( )
simplified expression for F, is given by
(A) ̅ + ̅. ̅ (C) X + Y
(B) X + Z (D) Y + X. ̅
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. Let X and Y = be unsigned IN-2011

2-bit numbers. The function F = 1 if X > Y 6. For the Boolean expression
and F = 0 otherwise. The minimized sum ̅ ̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅, the
of products expression for F is minimized Product of Sum (PoS)
(A) + ̅ .̅ .̅ expression is
(B) ̅ + ̅ + ̅ (A) ( ̅) ( ̅)
(C) ̅ + ̅ ̅ + ̅ (B) ( ̅ ) (̅ )
(D) ̅ + ̅ .̅ + ̅ (C) ( ̅ )( ̅)
(D) ̅
IN-2008
4. The minimum sum of products form of
the Boolean expression
Y = ̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅̅ ̅̅ ̅
̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅
(A) Y = P ̅ + ̅ ̅
(B) Y = P ̅ ̅ ̅
(C) Y = P ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅
(D) Y = ̅ ̅ ̅
IN-2009
5. The minimal sum-of-products expression
for the logic function f represented by the
given Karnaugh map is
PQ
RS
00 01 11 10
00 0 1 0 0
0 1 1 1
01
11 1 1 1 0
10 0 0 1 0
(A) QS +
(B) +
(C) +
(D)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 4. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. D] X Y Z Comments
K-map corresponding to given Boolean 0 0 0 Transistor off
expression diode ON
CD 0 1 1 Transistor off
AB 00 01 11 10
diode rev biases
00 1
1 0 0 Transistor ON
01 1
diode rev biases
11 1
1 1 0 Transistor ON
10 1 diode rev biased
So, ̅Y=Z
̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅
OR 5. [Ans. A]
̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅̅ ( )( ̅) (̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅) ̅
( ̅ ̅) ̅̅̅̅ ̅
[ ] ̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
̅
6. [Ans. D]
2. [Ans. D] yz
wx ̅̅
* ( ( ̅))+ [ ( )] 1 1
By putting X = 1 1 1 xz
* ( ( ))+ [ ̅( )] 1 1 1 1
y
[ ] 1 1 1 1
So, P.I. are

y, zx, ̅ ̅
3. [Ans. A]
7. [Ans. D]
( ) ∑( )
Maximum P.I will occurs at condition like
̅̅ ̅ YZ ̅
̅ 1 1 1 1
1 1 1
1
( ) ̅ ̅
1 1
So prime implicants are ̅ and ̅ .
1 1
i.e., no grouping at all so

So, ( )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE 2. [Ans. D]
1. [Ans. B] ̅ ̅̅
YZ Truth table:
00 01 11 10
X X Y Z F
0 1 1 1 0
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0
F = ̅ ̅ + YZ 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1
2. [Ans. D] 1 0 0 1
From the figure it is clear that, two NAND 1 0 1 0
gates generate the ̅ ̅ and now two 1 1 0 x
AND gates with inputs ̅ ̅ and inputs 1 1 1 x
Y and Z is used to generate two terms of
SOP form and now OR gate is used to sum K – map
them and generate the F. YZ
X 00 01 11 10
3. [Ans. C] 0 0 0 1 1
̅̅
1 1 0 x x
̅̅ [by consensus theorem]
4. [Ans. A]
̅ ̅ ̅ ̅
X
(̅ )( ̅ ̅)( ̅)( ̅)
F=Y+X
3. [Ans. D]
F = 1 if X > Y, so following will be K – map
of function F.
00 01 11 10
00 0 0 0 0
01 1 0 0 0
11 1 1 0 1
10
IN 1 1 0 1
1. [Ans. C] F= ̅ + ̅ ̅̅̅ + ̅̅̅
From K – map
BC 4. [Ans. A]
A 00 01 11 10
0 1 1 1 0
By K – map
1 0 1 0 1
f = ̅ + B ̅ + ̅C
=̅+B C
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
PQ RS
00 01 11 10
00 1 0 0 1
01 0 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0
10 1 1 1 1
5. [Ans. A]
PQ
RS 00 01 11 10
Q
S 00 0 1 0
0
01 0 1 1 1
11 1 1 1 0
10 0 0 1 0
6. [Ans. A]
̅ ̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅
̅ ̅( ̅ ) ̅̅ ( ̅)
̅̅ ̅ ̅
̅̅ [ ̅ ̅]
̅̅ [( ̅ )( ̅)]
̅̅ ( ̅)
̅̅ ̅
̅( ̅)
̅
(̅ )(̅ )
( ̅)( ̅)
Alternative method:
00 01 11 10
0 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 1
( ̅)( ̅)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Logic Gates
ECE-2007 5. Match the logic gates in Column A with

1. The Boolean function Y =AB + CD is to be their equivalents in Column B.
realized using only 2 – input NAND gates. Column A Column B
The minimum number of gates required
P 1
is
(A) 2 (C) 4 Q 2
(B) 3 (D) 5
R 3
ECE-2008
2. The logic function implemented by the
S 4
following circuit at the terminal OUT is
(A) P-2, Q-4, R-1, S-3
(B) P-4, Q-2, R-1, S-3
OUT (C) P-2, Q-4, R-3, S-1
P Q (D) P-4, Q-2, R-3, S-1
ECE-2011
(A) P NOR Q (C) P OR Q
6. The output Y in the circuit below is
(B) P NAND Q (D) P AND Q
always “1” when
3. Which of the following Boolean P
Expressions correctly represents the Q

relation between P, Q, R and ? Y
R
P X
Q Z (A) Two or more of the inputs P, Q, R are
Y “0”
(B) Two or more of the inputs P, Q, R are
R “1”
(A) = (P OR Q)XOR R (C) Any odd number of the inputs P, Q, R
(B) = (P AND Q) XOR R is “0”
(C) = (P NOR Q) XOR R (D) Any odd number of the inputs P, Q, R
(D) = (P XOR Q) XOR R is “1”
ECE-2010
4. For the output F to be 1 in the logic circuit
shown, the input combination should be
A
B
(A) A=1, B=1, C=0

(B) A=1, B=0, C=0
(C) A=0, B=1, C=0
(D) A=0, B=0, C=1
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE-2012
7. In the circuit shown
5 Volts
A
C
(A) ̅y y̅
B (B) ̅y̅ y̅̅
Y (C) ̅y̅ y
C (D) ̅y̅̅ y
10. In the circuit shown in the figure, if 0,

A B the expression for is
(A) ̅̅ ̅ (C) (̅ ̅) ̅
(B) ( ) (D)
ECE-2013 (A) ̅ ̅ (C) ̅ ̅

8. There are four chips each of 1024 bytes (B) (D)
connected to a 16 bit address bus as
EE-2007
shown in the figure below. RAMs 1, 2, 3
1. A, B, C and D are input bits, and Y is the
and 4 respectively are mapped to
output bit in the XOR gate circuit of the
addresses
figure below. Which of the following
4
1024 statements about the sum S of A, B, C, D
E
3
and Y is correct?
8 bit data bus
1024 A
E XOR
A0 A9 2 B
1024
E
A10
A11
1024
1 XOR Y
A12
A13 11
A14 input 10 E
01
A15
S1 S0 00
C
XOR
D
A. 0C00H 0FFFH, 1C00H 1FFFH,
(A) S is always either zero or odd
2C00H 2FFFH, 3C00H 3FFFH
(B) S is always either zero or even
B. 1800H 1FFFH, 2800H 2FFFH,
(C) S = 1 only if the sum of A, B, C and D
3800H 3FFFH, 4800H 4FFFH
is even
C. 0500H 08FFH, 1500H 18FFH,
(D) S = 1 only if the sum of A, B, C and D
3500H 38FFH, 5500H 58FFH
is odd
D. 0800H 0BFFH, 1800H 1BFFH,
2800H 2BFFH, 3800H 3BFFH EE-2009
2. The complete set of only those Logic
ECE-2014 Gates designated as Universal Gates is
9. The output F in the digital logic circuit (A) NOT, OR and AND Gates
shown in the figure is (B) XNOR, NOR and NAND Gate
(C) NOR and NAND Gates
(D) XOR, NOR and NAND Gates
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE-2011 average value of the output voltage as

3. The output Y of the logic circuit given function of τ for 0 t ( )?
below is
(A) Vav
5V
(A) 1 (C) X
(B) 0 (D) ̅
τ
T/2
IN-2006
1. All the logic gates in the circuit shown (B) Vav
below have finite propagation delay. The
circuit can be used as a clock generator, if 5V
Vav
Y τ
T/2
(C)
Vav Vav
X
(A) X = 0 (C) X = 0 or 1 5V
(B) X = 1 (D) X = Y
IN-2007 τ
T/2
2. Two square waves of equal period T, but (D)
with a time delay τ are applied to a digital Vav
circuit whose truth table is shown in the
following figure.
2.5V
X Y Output
0 0 1 τ
T/2
0 1 0
1 0 0 IN-2009
1 1 1 3. The diodes in the circuit shown are ideal.
X A voltage of 0V represents logic 0 and
+5V represents logic1.The function Z
1 realized by the circuit for inputs X and Y
is
+ 5V
t
T/2 T
Y
1 X Z
Y
τ τ T/2 t
The high and the low levels of the output (A) Z=X + Y (C) Z =̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
of the digital circuit are 5 V and 0 V, (B) Z=XY (D) Z=̅̅̅̅
respectively. Which one of the following
figures shows the correct variation of the
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN-2010 EC/EE/IN-2013
4. The logic gate circuit shown in the figure 5. A bulb in a staircase has two switches,
realizes the function one switch being at the ground floor and
A the other one at the first floor. The bulb
X can be turned ON and also can be turned
OFF by any one of the switch irrespective
Z of the state of the other switch. The logic
of switching of the bulb resembles
Y (A) An AND gate (C) A XOR gate
(B) An OR gate (D) A NAND gate
(A) XOR (C) Half adder
(B) XNOR (D) Full adder
ECE 5. [Ans. D]
1. [Ans. B] P = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ = ̅ ̅ = 4
A Q = ̅̅̅̅ = ̅ + ̅ = 2
B
AB + CD
R = A ⊕ B = A̅ + ̅B = 3
S = A B = AB + ̅ ̅ = 1
C
D
6. [Ans. B]
2. [Ans. D] The output Y expression in the ckt
When P = Q = 1, then OUT = 1 (Majority circuit)
P = Q = 0, then OUT = 0 So that two or more inputs are ‘1’, is
P = 0, Q = 1, then OUT = 0 always ‘1’.
P = 1, Q = 0, then OUT = 0
7. [Ans. A]
So, it is AND gate
In NMOS circuit
Since & are in parallel so those
3. [Ans. D]
represent ( ) & is in sense, so it
X= ;Y=P+Q represents ‘dot’ operation and the whole
Z = XY = . (P + Q) function should be inverted or it is
=( )( ) complementary logic.
⊕ So,
∴ ⊕ ⊕ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
( ) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅
4. [Ans. D] 8. [Ans. D]
For 3 input XNOR for output to be one, For RAM #1
two input must be one, and we know that
⏟0 0 0 0 ⏟1 0 0 0 ⏟ ⏟
0 0 ower add
2- input XOR & XNOR gate are 0 0 0
complementary & hence only 1(1’s) will ⏟
0000 ⏟ 1 0 1 1 ⏟ 1⏟1 ighest add
be generated & C=1 is required 0
i.e, When A = 0, B = 0 and C = 1, So range of add for RAM #1 0 00
then F = 1 0
which is present only in option D
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
9. [Ans. A] IN
( ⊕ )(( ⊕ ) ) 1. [Ans. B]
( ⊕ )(( ⊕ ) ( )̅) When X = 1, equivalent circuit is
( ⊕ )
(̅ ̅) Y
̅ ̅
This circuits act as clock generator.
10. [Ans. A]
2. [Ans. C]
C 0 1
A ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
When τ = 0 X and Y will be same and
B out-put will be equal to dc of 5V.
0
A ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ When τ = , X and Y will be complement
B AB of each other and output will be equal to
y ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ ( ) ̅̅̅̅ dc 0.
( ) (̅ ̅) When τ increases from 0 to , O/P will
̅ ̅
decrease from 5V to 0V linearly.
EE
3. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. B]
When any of X or Y is zero, Z = 0. For
⊕ ⊕ ⊕ from the given
X = Y = 1, Z = 1
diagram. We know that sum of any
number of bits is XOR of all bits.
4. [Ans. A]
So S ⊕ ⊕ ⊕ ⊕
X y
S=Y⊕Y
S = either zero or even because LSB is
x Z
zero (always).
Y y y
2. [Ans. C] Z= y. y = y y =x⊕y
NOR and NAND are designated as
universal logic gates, because using any 5. [Ans. C]
one of them we can implement all the When both switches in on position, bulb
logic gates. is off
When both switches in off position, bulb
3. [Ans. A] is off
Y= .̅ ̅. ̅ ̅ 1 Bulb
X Y 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 1 1
0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 0
It is a XOR gate
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Logic Gate Families
ECE - 2007 Ignoring the body-effect, the output

1. The circuit diagram of a standard TTL voltages at P, Q and R are,
NOT gate is shown in the figure. When
Vi = 2.5V, the modes of operation of the
transistors will be
1 4kΩ 100kΩ
R (A) 4 V, 3 V, 2 V (C) 4 V, 4 V, 4 V
2
4kΩ
Q4
(B) 5 V, 5 V, 5 V (D) 5 V, 4 V, 3 V
D
Q2 4. The output (Y) of the circuit shown in the
Q1
Q3
figure is
1kΩ
-
(A) Q1: reverse active; Q2: normal active; ̅
Q3: saturation; Q4: cut-off

(B) Q1: reverse active; Q2: saturation;
Q3: saturation; Q4: cut-off
(C) Q1: normal active; Q2: cut-off;
Q3: cut-off; Q4: saturation
(D) Q1: saturation; Q2: saturation;
Q3: saturation; Q4: normal active ̅
ECE - 2009
2. The full forms of the abbreviations TTL (A) ̅ ̅ (C) ̅ ̅
and CMOS in reference of logic families (B) ̅ ̅ ̅ (D) ̅
are
(A) Triple Transistor Logic and Chip EE - 2010
Metal Oxide Semiconductor 1. The TTL circuit shown in the figure is fed
(B) Tristate Transistor Logic and Chip with the waveform X (also shown). All
Metal Oxide Semiconductor gates have equal propagation delay of
(C) Transistor Transistor Logic and 10ns. The output Y of the circuit is
Complementary Metal Oxide x
Semiconductor 100 ns
(D) Tristate Transistor Logic and
Complementary Metal Oxide Silicon
1
ECE - 2014
3. In the following circuit employing pass 0 t
transistor logic, all NMOS transistors are
identical with a threshold voltage of 1V.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
X IN - 2007
Y
1. A CMOS implementation of a logic gate is
shown in the following figure:
5v
(A)
Y X
Y PMOS
1
0
t NMOS
(B)
Y
The Boolean logic function realized by the
circuit is.
1 (A) AND (C) NOR
(B) NAND (D) OR
0 t
(C) IN - 2014
Y
2. The figure is a logic circuit with inputs A
and B and output Y. = + 5 V. The
circuit is of type
1
t
0
(D)
Y
0 t
(A) NOR (C) OR

(B) AND (D) NAND
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE EE
1. [Ans. B] 1. [Ans. A]
reverse active, saturation X
Y
saturation, cut off
2. [Ans. C] A B
TTL – Transistor Transistor Logic
CMOS – Complementary Metal Oxide
1
Semiconductor X
0
3. [Ans. C] A
Suppose all NMOS at saturation
B
For
1 & Y=X B
4
For
IN
( 1)
1. [Ans. C]
(4 ) NOR Gate
4 (4 ) 2. [Ans. D]
4 Given circuit is of the standard 2 input
NAND gate.
1
(4 ) 4
4
4. [Ans. A]
The given circuit is CMOS implementation
If the NMOS is connected in series, then
the output expression is product of each
input with complement to the final
product.
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅ ̅
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Combinational and Sequential Digital Circuits
ECE - 2006 S
1 0 1 1 D Q A
1. The point P in the following figure is
MSB LSB
stuck-at-1. The output f will be CK FULL
A ADDER
f
0 0 1 1 D Q B
C0
B Shift Registers 0 Ci
P CK
0 Q D
0
C
CK
(A) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ (C) ̅
(B) ̅ (D) A
CLOCK
(A) S =0, C0= 0 (C) S = 1, C0= 0
2. Two D-flip-flops, as shown below, are to
be connected as a synchronous counter (B) S = 0, C0= 1 (D) S = 1, C0= 1
that goes through the following Q1Q0 ECE - 2007
sequence 4. For the circuit shown, the counter state
………… (Q1 Q0) follows the sequence
The inputs and respectively should
be connected as
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
c c
(A) ̅̅̅̅ and
(A) ………
(B) ̅̅̅̅ and
(B) ………
(C) ̅̅̅̅ and ̅̅̅̅
(C) ………
(D) ̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅and
(D) ………
3. For the circuit shown in figure below, two 5. The following binary values were applied
4-bit parallel-in serial-out shift registers to the X and Y inputs of the NAND latch
loaded with the data shown are used to shown in the figure in the sequence
feed the data to a full adder. Initially, all indicated below:
the flip-flops are in clear state. After X=0, Y=1; X=0, Y=0; X=1, Y=1
applying two clock pulses, the outputs of The corresponding stable P, Q outputs
the full adder should be will be
X P
Q
Y
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) P=1, Q=0; P=1, Q=0; P=1, Q=0 or 1

1
P=0, Q=1 CLK
(B) P=1, Q=0; P=0, Q=1 or P=0, Q=1; 1 1
P=0, Q=1
(C) P=1, Q=0; P=1, Q=1; P=1, Q=0 or 1
P=0, Q=1 CLK
(D) P=1, Q=0; P=1, Q=1; P=1, Q=1 0
T
6. In the following circuit, X is given by t
t
0 I0 0 I0
4-to-1 4-to-1
1 I1 1 I1
1 MUX MUX Which of the following waveforms
I2 1 I2 Y X
0 I3 Y 0 I3 correctly represents the output at ?
S1 S0 S1 S0
1
A B C
(A)
0
2T
t
(A) 1
(B) 0
(B)
4T
(C)
t
(D) (C) 1
ECE - 2008 0
7. For the circuit shown in the following 2T
t
figure, are inputs to the 4:1
(D) 1
multiplexer. R(MSB) and S are control
0
bits.
4T
t
z
9. For the circuit shown in the figure, D has a
transition from 0 to 1 after CLK changes
from 1 to 0. Assume gate delays to be
negligible
̅
The output Z can be represented by

(A) PQ + P ̅ S + ̅ ̅ ̅
(B) P ̅ +PQ̅ +̅ ̅ ̅
Which of the following statements is true?
(C) P ̅ ̅ + ̅QR +PQRS + ̅ ̅ ̅
(A) Q goes to 1 at the CLK transition and
(D) PQ ̅ +PQR̅ +P ̅ ̅S + ̅ ̅ ̅
stays at 1.
(B) Q goes to 0 at the CLK transition and
8. For each of the positive edge – triggered
stays at 0.
J-K flip flop used in the following figure,
(C) Q goes to 1 at the CLK transition and
the propagation delay is T.
goes to 0 when D goes to 1.
(D) Q goes to 0 at the CLK transition and
goes to 1 when D goes to 1.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2009 Statement for Linked Answer Question 13

10. What are the counting states (Q1, Q2) for and 14.
the counter shown in the figure below? Two products are sold from a vending
machine, which has two push buttons
and . When a button is pressed, the
c price of the corresponding product is
ip
ip displayed in a 7-segment display.
If no buttons are pressed ‘ ’ is displayed,
signifying ‘ s. ’
If only is pressed, ‘ ’ is disp ayed
(A) 11, 10, 00, 11, 10 . . . . . signifying ‘ s. ’
(B) 01, 10, 11, 00, 01 . . . . . If only p are pressed, ‘5’ is disp ayed
(C) 00, 11, 01, 10, 00, . . . . . signifying ‘ s.5’
(D) 01, 10, 00, 01, 10 . . . . . . If both a d are pressed, ‘E’ is
displayed, Signifying ‘Err r’.
11. Refer to the NAND and NOR latches The names of the segments in 7-segment
shown in the figure. The inputs for display, and the glow of the display for ‘ ’
both the latches are first made (0, 1) and ‘ ’ ‘5’ a d ‘E’ are sh w be w.
then, after a few seconds, made (1, 1). The a 0 2 5 E
corresponding stable outputs ( ) are f b
g
P1 Q1 P 1 Q1 e c
d
Consider
P2 Q2 P 2 Q2
(i) Push Button pressed/not Pressed in a
(A) NAND : first (0, 1) then (0, 1) equivalent to logic 1/0 respectively.
NOR: first (1, 0) then (0, 0) (ii) A segment glowing / not glowing in the
(B) NAND : first (1, 0) then (1, 0) display is equivalent to logic 1/0
NOR: first (1, 0) then (1, 0) respectively.
(C) NAND : first (1, 0) then (1, 0)
NOR: first (1, 0) then (0, 0) 13. If segment a to g are considered as
(D) NAND : first (1, 0) then (1, 1) functions of and , then which are of
NOR: first (0, 1) then (0, 1) the following is correct?
(A) g ̅ d c e
12. What are the minimum number of (B) g d c e
(C) g ̅ e b c
2 to. 1 multiplexers required to
generate a (D) g e b c
2-input AND gate and a 2-input Ex-OR
gate? 14. What are the minimum numbers of NOT
(A) 1 and 2 (C) 1 and 1 gates and 2-input OR gates required to
(B) 1 and 3 (D) 2 and 2 design the logic of the driver for this
7-segment display?
(A) a d
(B) a d
(C) a d
(D) a d
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2010
Data D Q Y
15. The Boolean function realized by the logic D Q
circuit shown is
Clock
(A) cha ged fr “ ”t “ ”

MUX (B) cha ged fr “ ”t “ ”
(C) changed in either direction
(D) not changed
19. The logic function implemented by the

(A) ∑ 5 circuit below is (ground implies a logic
(B) ∑ 5 “ ”
(C) ∑ 5 5 MUX
(D) ∑ 5
16. Assuming that all flips flops are in reset

condition initially, the count sequence
observed at in the circuit shown is
utput
(A) F = AND(P, Q) (C) F = XNOR(P, Q)

(B) F = OR(P, Q) (D) F = XOR(P, Q)
ECE - 2014
̅ ̅ ̅
20. Five JK flip-flops are cascaded to form the
circuit shown in Figure. Clock pulses at a
frequency of 1 MHz are applied as shown.
c The frequency (in kHz) of the waveform
(A) … (C) … at Q3 is _____.
(B) … (D) …
ECE - 2011
17. Two D flip – flops are connected as a c c c c c
synchronous counter that goes through

the following sequence c
The connections to the inputs and 21. The digital logic shown in the figure
are satisfies the given state diagram when Q1
(A) is connected to input A of the XOR gate.
(B)
(C)
(D)
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
18. When the output Y in the circuit below is

“ ” it i p ies that data has
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Suppose the XOR gate is replaced by an

XNOR gate. Which one of the following
options preserves the state diagram?
(A) Input A is connected to ̅̅̅̅ (A) (C)
(B) Input A is connected to (B) (D)
(C) Input A is connected to ̅̅̅̅ and S is
complemented 24. The outputs of the two flip-flops Q1, Q2 in
(D) Input A is connected to ̅̅̅̅ the figure shown are initialized to 0, 0.
The sequence generated at Q1 upon
22. In a half-subtractor circuit with X and Y as application of clock signal is
inputs, the Borrow (M) and Difference
(N = X Y) are given by
(A)
(B) ̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
(C) ̅
(D) ̅ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
(A) … (C) …
23. In the circuit shown, choose the correct (B) … (D) …
timing diagram of the output (y) from the
given waveforms a d . 25. The circuit shown in the figure is a
atch atch
E ̅ E ̅
̅
utput y
(A) Toggle Flip Flop

(B) JK Flip Flop
(C) SR Latch
(D) Master-Slave D Flip Flop
̅
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
26. Consider the multiplexer based logic

circuit shown in the figure.
Which one of the following Boolean

functions is realized by the circuit?
(A) ̅ ̅̅̅
(B)
(C) ̅
(D)
27. In the circuit shown, W and Y are MSBs of

the control inputs. The output F is given
by 29. An 8-to-1 multiplexer is used to
implement a logical function as shown
in the figure. The output Y is given by
(A) ̅ ̅ ̅̅
(B) ̅ ̅ ̅
(C) ̅̅ ̅ ̅
(D) ̅ ̅ ̅̅
(A) ̅ ̅
(B) ̅ ̅
(C) ̅ ̅
(D) ̅̅ ̅
28. If X and Y are inputs and the Difference
(D = X – Y) and the Borrow (B) are the
30. A 16-bit ripple carry adder is realized
outputs, which one of the following
using 16 identical full adders (FA) as
diagrams implements a half-subractor?
shown in the figure. The carry-
propagation delay of each FA is 12 ns and
the sum-propagation delay of each FA is
15 ns. The worst case delay (in ns) of this
16-bit adder will be __________
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2011
3. A two-bit counter circuit is shown below.
J Q J Q
K ̅ K ̅
EE - 2006
1. A 4 1 MUX is used to implement a 3 –
CLK
input Boolean function as shown in figure.
The Boolean Function F(A,B,C) If the state of the counter at the
implemented is clock time t is “ ” the the state
of the counter at t (after three clock
A
cycles) will be
(A) 00 (C) 10
‘ ’ F (A, B, C) (B) 01 (D) 11
‘ ’
EE - 2013
4. The clock frequency applied to the digital
circuit show in the figure blow is 1 kHz. If
B C
(A) F (A,B,C) = (1,2,4,6) the initial state of the output Q of the flip
(B) F (A,B,C) = (1,2,6) – f p is ‘ ’ the the freque cy f the
(C) F (A,B,C) = (2,4,5,6) output wavefrom Q in kHz is
(D) F (A,B,C) = (1,5,6)
X Q
EE - 2008 T Q
2. A 3 line to 8 line decoder, with active low
outputs, is used to implement a CLK >
3 – variable Boolean function as shown in

the figure.
3L x 8L Decoder
(A) 0.25 (C) 1
0 (B) 0.5 (D) 2
1
z 2
y 3 F EE - 2014
x
4 5. A state diagram of a logic gate which
5
6 exhibits a delay in the output is shown in
7 the figure, where X is the d ’t care
The simplified form of Boolean function condition, and Q is the output
p e e ted i ‘ r duct f representing the state.
⁄
u ’ f r wi be
(A) (X + Z). (̅ ̅ ̅ ). (Y + Z) ⁄
(B) (̅ ̅ ). (X + Y + Z). (̅ ̅ ).
(C) (̅ ̅+ Z). (̅ + Y + Z). (X + ̅ + Z).
(X +Y + ̅ ) The logic gate represented by the state
(D) (̅ ̅ . (̅ ̅ ). (X +̅ + ). diagram is
( ̅ ̅ ) (A) XOR (C) AND
(B) OR (D) NAND
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. A 3-bit gray counter is used to control the

output of the multiplexer as shown in the
figure. The initial state of the counter is
. The output is pulled high. The
output of the circuit follows the sequence
f ip f p
-bit gray 5
c u ter
̅
̅
E
8. Two monoshot multivibrators, one

positive edge triggered ( ) and another
utput
negative edge triggered ( ), are
connected as shown in figure
(A) 5
(B)
(C)
(D) ̅ ̅
7. A JK flip flop can be implemented by T

flip-flops. Identify the correct
implementation. The monoshots a d when triggered
produce pulses of width a d
respectively, where . The steady
state output voltage of the circuit is
f ip f p
t
̅
f ip f p
f ip f p
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2006 IN - 2007
1. Given that the initial state (Q1Q0) is 00, Statement for Linked Answer Questions 3 & 4
the counting sequence of the counter Consider the circuit shown in the following
shown in the following figure is, Q1Q0 = figure.
‘ ’
J0 Q J1 Q1
0
CLK ̅ ̅1
K0 K
0 1
(A) 00 11 01 10 00
(B) 00 01 11 10 00
(C) 00 11 10 01 00
(D) 00 10 01 11 00
3. The correct input-output relationship
2. A combinational circuit using a 8-to-1
between Y and ( , ) is
multiplexer is shown in the following
(A) Y= + (C) Y= ⨁
figure. The minimized expression for the
(B) Y= (D) Y= ⨁
output (Z) is
1 I0 4. The Dflip-flops are initialized to

1 I1
Y
=000. After 1 clock cycle,
1 I2
0 I3 MUX
Z is equal to
0 I4 (A) 011 (C) 100
0 I5 (B) 010 (D) 101
1 I6
0 I7
5. A sequential circuit is shown in the figure
(LSB) below. Let the state of the circuit be
(MSB) A B C
Select Inputs encoded as . he tati
(A) ̅ ̅ (C) ̅ ̅̅ implies that state Y is reachable from
(B) C (A + B) (D) ̅ + AB state X in a finite number of clock
transitions.
̅A QA QB
̅ Q ̅ Q
CLK TA CLK TB
CLK
Identify the INCORRECT statement.
(A) (C)
(B) (D)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. A MUX circuit shown in the figure below 9. The output F of the multiplexer circuit
implements a logic function . The shown below expressed in terms of the
correct expression for is inputs P, Q and R is
Z 1 R I0
MUX out F1
̅ I1
4 1 MUX Y F
̅ 0
̅ I2
S
R I3 S1 S0
X 1
MUX out
0 F0 P Q
̅
(A) F=P⨁Q⨁R
S
Y (B) F = PQ + QR + RP
(C) F = (P ⨁ Q) R
(A) (̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅)⨁ (C) ⨁ ⨁̅
(D) F = (P ⨁ Q) ̅
(B) (̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅) ⨁ (D) ⨁ +Z
IN - 2008 10. The inverters in the ring oscillator circuit

Statement for Linked Answer Questions 7 shown below are identical. If the output
&8 waveform has a frequency of 10 MHz, the
Consider the counter circuit shown propagation delay of each inverter is
below. Output
l
Q0 Q1 Q2
J Q J Q J Q J Q Q3 (A) 5 ns (C) 20 ns
Clock
KCLR KCLR KCLR K CLR
(B) 10 ns (D) 50 ns
IN - 2009
11. The figure below shows a 3-bit ripple
counter, with as the MSB. The flip-
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ flops are rising-edge triggered. The
counting direction is
Q1
J Q 1 J Q 1 Q Q2
Y 1 J
Clock
7. In the above figure, Y can be expressed as CLK CLK CLK
(A) (C) 1 K ̅ 1 K ̅ 1 K ̅
(B) (D) (A) always down
(B) always up
8. The above circuit is a (C) up or down depending on the initial
(A) Mod – 8 Counter state of only
(B) Mod 9 Counter (D) up or down depending on the initial
(C) Mod – 10 Counter states of and
(D) Mod – 11 Counter
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
12. In the figure shown, the initial state of Q is 15. Consider the given circuit
0. The output is observed after the
application of each clock pulse. The
output sequence at Q is
1 J Q
CLOCK CLK
In this circuit, the race around
K ̅ (A) Does not occur
(B) Occurs when CLK = 0
(C) Occurs when CLK = 1 and A =B =1
(D) Occurs when clk = 1 and A = B = 0
(A) 0 0 0 0 . . . (C) 1 1 1 1 . . .
(B) 1 0 1 0 . . . (D) 1 0 0 0 . . . 16. The state transition diagram for the logic
circuit shown is
IN - 2011
13. The circuit below shows as up/down
counter working with a decoder and a x
flip-flop. Preset and clear of the flip-flop ̅ x
are asynchronous active-low inputs e ect
̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅
3 to 8 Decoder
C B A(L.SB)
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
reset Count
D Q Down
Flip-Flop Up/down Counter
Clock
c ear ̅
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ Count Up
Clock
Assuming that the initial value of counter

output ( as zero, the counter
output in decimal for 12 clock cycles are
(A) 0,1,2,3,4,4,3,2,1,1,2,3,4,
(B) 0,1,2,3,4,5,0,1,2,3,4,5,0,
(C) 0,1,2,3,4,5,5,4,3,2,1,0,1
(D) 0,1,2,3,4,5,4,3,2,1,0,1,2
ECE/EE/IN - 2012
14. The output Y of a 2-bit comparator is logic
1 whenever the 2-bit input A is greater
than the 2-bit input B.
The number of combinations for which
the output is logic 1, is
(A) 4 (C) 8
(B) 6 (D) 10
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN - 2013 IN - 2014
17. The digital circuit shown below uses two 18. Frequency of an analog periodic signal in
negative edge- triggered D flip- flops. the range of 5 kHz - 10 kHz is to be
Assuming initial condition of and measured with a resolution of 100Hz by
as zero, the ouput of this circuit is measuring its period with a counter.
Assuming negligible signal and transition
delays the minimum clock frequency and
D1 D0 minimum number of bits in the counter
needed, respectively, are:
D-Flip-flop D-Flip-flop (A) 1 MHz, 10-bits
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅ (B) 10 MHz, 10-bits
(C) 1 MHz, 8-bits
(D) 10MHz, 8-bits
Clock
(A) 00, 01, 10, 11, ……
clock
(B) 00, 01, 11, 10, ……
(C) 00, 11, 10, 01, ……
(D) 00, 01, 11, 11, ……
ECE S = 1, ,C=1
1. [Ans. D]
When P is stuck at 1, f = A 4. [Ans. B]
B
f The i/p to first F/F = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
The i/p to second F/F =
C 0 0 0 0 (initially
( ) [( )] at rest)
1st 0 0 1 1
2. [Ans. A] clk
Present State Next State 2nd 1 1 0 0
3rd 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 1 So sequence generated
0 1 1 1 1 1 00, 01, 10, 00
1 1 1 0 1 0
5. [Ans. C]
1 0 0 0 0 0
When X = 0, Y = 1 then P = 1 and Q = 0
So and X = 0, Y = 0 then P = 1 and Q = 1
X = 1, Y = 1 then P = 0 and Q = 1 or
3. [Ans. D] P = 1 and Q = 0
Before clock pulse S = C = 0
After first clock pulse A = B = 1 So 6. [Ans. A]
S = 0, C=1 Let the output of first MUX is Y
After second clock pulse A = B = 1 So Y = ̅B + A̅ = A ⨁ B
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
X=̅ ̅ ⨁ So sequence is (00, 11, 10, 00, 11) or

So X = A ⨁ B ⨁ C …..
i.e, ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅
11. [Ans. C]
7. [Ans. A]
For NAND latch, when ( ) are (0, 1),
( ) ( ) will be (1, 0) and when ( )
̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ are (1, 1), ( ) will be (1, 0).
̅̅ ̅̅̅ ̅ ̅ For NOR latch, when ( ) are (0, 1),
ts ap ( ) will be (1, 0) and when ( )
PQ
are (1, 1), ( ) will be (0, 0).
RS 00 01 11 10
̅ ̅̅
00 1 1 1 12. [Ans. A]
01 1 1 SP
O
11 1 1
Y = AB
10 1 PQ
B
So ̅̅̅
Now only option (A) has two similar A
terms, we can say that option A is not
B
most simplified version of Z it can be
obtained as Y=A ⨁B
PQ 1
RS 00 01 11 10
̅̅ ̅
00 1 1 1 0
01 1 1 A
P̅S
11 1 1
B
10 1 PQ
So option A is correct choice 13. [Ans. B]

a b c d e f g
8. [Ans. B]
At clock will be divide by 4 and will 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
have 2 T delay w.r.t clock. 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
9. [Ans. C]
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
Initially, when clk is high and D is low,
a
Q = 0 or 1,
b ̅̅̅̅ ….
When clk goes low and D is also low ,
c ̅̅̅̅ ….
Q = 1,
When clk is low and D goes high, Q = 0. d c e
e ̅̅̅̅ …
10. [Ans. A] f ̅̅̅̅ …
g …
g
0 0 0 0 0 0 d c e
1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 0 14. [Ans. D]
1 1 0 1 0 0 gates
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 gates
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
15. [Ans. D] 21. [Ans. D]

̅̅ ̅ ̅̅ ̅̅ If one input of the gate is kept constant,
̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ and A is interchanged with ̅, an XNOR
x x̅ gate acts as XOR gate.
̅̅ ̅ ̅̅ [ ]
x. x 22. [Ans. C]
̅̅ ̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ In half subtractor
̅̅ ̅̅̅ ̅̅ Difference x y xy
5 x y
b rr w x y
16. [Ans. D]
x y Borrow Difference
⨀ =
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1
Initially 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
After first clk 1 0 0
1 1 0 0
After 2 clk
nd 1 1 0
After 3rdclk 0 1 1 23. [Ans. C]
So . . . . . ..
17. [Ans. D] ̅
Q(present) Q (next) y
0 0 1 1 1 1
1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 ̅
⨀
̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅
̅
18. [Ans. A]
Given Y=1, this implies
Both the output of D- flip flop
should be 1 i.e, input at first flip flop is 1 So wave form is correct
and for output of 2nd flip flop to be 1,
24. [Ans. D]
inverted output of first flip should be 1 in
This is a figure of Johnson counter
previous clock, for which input must be 0
So
so data is changing from 0 to 1.
19. [Ans. D] 0 0
From the CKT 1 0
0 is connected to & 1 1
d ‘ ’ is c ected t and 0 1
0 0
1 0
20. [Ans. *] Range 62.4 to 62.6 So =
.5 z
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
25. [Ans. D] 2. [Ans. A]

∑ 5
26. [Ans. D]
[ ( ) ]
3. [Ans. C]
Clock Input Output
̅
Initial 1 0
state
1 1 0 1 1 1
utput f first ̅ ̅ 2 0 1 1 0 0
et 3 1 0 0 1 0
utput f sec d ̅ ̅
4. [Ans. B]
27. [Ans. C] X Q
T Q
̅ ̅̅ ̅̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅̅
̅ ̅ ̅̅ CLK >
28. [Ans. A]
̅ From above Fig.
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅ . ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅ ]
[
29. [Ans. C] ecause ̅ a ways
̅̅ ̅̅ ̅ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅ a ways
̅ ̅ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅ . ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
̅
̅̅̅̅
. ̅
30. [Ans. *] Range 194.9 to 195.1
i put a ways
Worst case propagation delay
r ‘ ’ f ip flop if input is =1 then output
= carry propagation delay of 15FA stages
will be complemented at the time of
+ max(carry Pd & sum Pd of last FA
triggering.
stage) CLK
5 5
5 s
T
EE
1. [Ans. A] 2T
F (A, B, C)= f .5 f
̅̅ ̅̅ ̅ ̅ .5
̅̅ ̅̅ ̅ ̅ ̅ .5 z
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. [Ans. D] IN
1. [Ans. A]
x Clock
( )
1 1 0 0
gate 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 1
6. [Ans. A]
1 1 1 1 1 0
Gray code output
1 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 2. [Ans. C]
o/p 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0
( )
1 1 1 1 1
1 0 1
1 0 1 ( )( )
When ̅
E utput
e ect i puts
utput 3. [Ans. B]
Y=
7. [Ans. A]
T-FF to JKFF is given by eq
4. [Ans. B]
̅
a d
This is implemented on options [A]
So initially it means
8. [Ans. C] so after one clock cycle
Let is initially high. Since is from will be 010.
will be high for time. The
waveform is shown below: 5. [Ans. D]
01 10, both = 1 so and
̅ both will toggle.
t
6. [Ans. B]
trigger
t
7. [Ans. A]
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
Y = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ . ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
t
= +
=
t
8. [Ans. C]
Whenever Y=1, then clear input of all the
s receives ‘ ’ a d utputs f the
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
counter will be reset. When count = 1010, So sequence is 0,1,2,3,4,5,4,3,2,1,0,1,2.

Y=1 and counter will be reset.
Q3 Q2 Q1 Q0 14. [Ans. B]
1 0 1 0 Let A1 A0 be the bits of number A and
1 1 0 0 B1B0 be the bits of number B and let Y be
1 1 1 0 the output
A1 A0 B1 B0 Y
9. [Ans. A] 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0
( ) ( ) 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 1 0
( )
0 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0
10. [Ans. B]
0 1 1 1 0
f 1 0 0 0 1
t
where N – no. of inverters A1 A0 B1 B0 Y
and t - Propagation delay of each, so 1 0 0 1 1
t sec 1 0 1 0 0
1 0 1 1 0
11. [Ans. A] 1 1 0 0 1
Since triggering in positive edge 1 1 0 1 1
triggering & Q of pervious flip flop is 1 1 1 0 1
input to next hence always down 1 1 1 1 0
From the truth table we see that the
12. [Ans. C] u ber f ti es ‘ ’ bec es is
̅ Also the truth table
J K ̅ ̅ 15. [Ans. A]
1 1 0
1 0 1
1 0 1
1
̅
13. [Ans. D]
Initially Q=0 and count up ( ̅ =1) is active next = . .
so it started counting up and when it = A.CLK + Q
reaches to 5 then decoder output at pin 5
next = A.CLK +
becomes 0 and preset will be active and it If CLK = 1 and A and B = 1
will set Q and it will make the counter
mode down and count becomes 4, then 3 then } No race around
then 2 then 1 then 0, as soon as it reaches If CLK = 1 and A = B = 0
0, decoder output at pin 0 is low and clear
is active and Q goes to 0 and ̅ = 1 so up is } No race around
active a d it c u ts ……
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Thus race around does not occur in the

circuit
16. [Ans. D]
State table
A D
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
From State table
A=O
Q=O Q=1
A=O
A=1 A=1
17. [Ans. B]
State table
Present Next
state state
0 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0
00, 01, 11, 10, 00
18. [Ans. C]
i c c freque cy
z z
5
i
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
AD /DA Convertor
ECE-2006 3. The voltage Vo is

1. A 4-bit D/A converter is connected to a (A) – 0.781 V (C) – 3.125 V
free-running 3-bit UP counter, as shown (B) – 1.562 V (D) – 6.250 V
in the following figure. Which of the
following waveforms will be observed at ECE-2008
V 0? Statement for linked Answer Questions 4
1k and 5
Q2 D3 IDEAL In the following circuit, the comparator
D2
Q1 D1 output is logic “1” if and is logic
Vo
Q0 D0 1k “0”otherwise. The D/A conversion is
Clock 3-bit
D/A done as per the relation
Counter Convertor
= ∑ 2 Volts, where
In the figure shown above, the ground has
(MSB), and (LSB) are the
been shown by the symbol
counter outputs.
(A) The counter starts from the clear state.
4 bit D/A
converter
2 Digit
+5V LED
Binary
to Display
̅̅̅̅
(B) BCD
̅̅̅̅̅ 4bit
Upcounter
= 6.2
Clock
(C)
4. The stable reading of the LED displays is

(D) (A) 06 (C) 12
(B) 07 (D) 13
5. The magnitude of the error between

ECE-2007 and at steady state in volts is
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 2 (A) 0.2 (C) 0.5
and 3 (B) 0.3 (D) 1.0
In the Digital-to-Analog converter circuit
shown in the figure below, = 10 V and ECE-2011
R = 10kΩ. 6. The output of a 3 – stage Johnson
R R R I 2R (twisted – ring) counter is fed to a
V
R
digital – to – analog (D/A) converter as
2R 2R 2R 2R R shown in the figure below. Assume all
+ states of the counter to be unset initially.
V0
The waveform which represents the D/A
converter output is
2. The current I is
(A) 31.25 μA (C) 125 μA
(B) 62.5 μA (D) 250 μA
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(B) droop rate decreases and acquisition

D/A
Converter time increases
(C) droop rate increases and acquisition
D D D
time decreases
(D) droop rate increases and acquisition
time increases
Johnson
Clock
Counter
EE-2006
1. A student has made a 3 – bit binary down
(A) counter and connected to the R – 2R
ladder type DAC [Gain = ( 1 KΩ/2R)] as
shown in figure to generate a staircase
waveform. The output achieved is
different as shown in figure. What could
be the possible cause of this error?
R R R 1kΩ
(B) 2R +12V
2R 2R 2R
Vo
Counter 12V
1kHz
clock
10kΩ
7
6
(C) 5
4
3
2
1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ms
(A) The resistance values are incorrect

(D)
(B) The counter is not working properly
(C) The connection from the counter to
DAC is not proper
(D) The R and 2R resistances are
interchanged
IN-2006
Common Data for Questions 1 and 2
ECE-2014 An R-2R ladder type DAC is shown below.
7. For a given sample-and-hold circuit, if the If a switch status is ‘0’ 0 is applied and if
value of the hold capacitor is increased, a switch status is ‘1’ 5 is applied to the
then corresponding terminal of the DAC.
(A) droop rate decreases and acquisition
time decreases
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
R R 1.5V will produce a digital output of

+
(A) 90H (C) 9BH
2R 2R 2R 2 (B) 96H (D) A0H
IN - 2010
+ 5. A 4-bit successive approximation type
5V
ADC has a full scale value of 15V. The
1. What is the output voltage (V0) for the sequence of the states, the SAR will
switch status S0=0,S1=1,S2=1? traverse, for the conversion of an input of
. 8.15V is
(A) V (C) V
(A) ( )
. tart tart
(B) V (D) V conversion conversion
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
2. What is the step size of the DAC?
(A) 0.125 V (C) 0.625 V 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
(B) 0.525 V (D) 0.75 V
1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
IN-2007 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
3. The circuit shown in the figure below
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
works as a 2-bit analog to digital
converter for 0 ≤ ≤3 . End End
3V conversion conversion
0.5kΩ (C) (D)

tart tart
conversion conversion
1.0kΩ
Digital 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
1.0kΩ Circuit 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0
0.5kΩ
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
End End
The MSB of the output , expressed as a conversion conversion
Boolean function of the inputs , , , is
given by
IN-2014
(A) (C)
6. A thermopile is constructed using 10
(B) (D) +
junctions of Chromel-Constantan
(sensitivity 60μ /°C for each junction)
IN-2009
connected in series. The output is fed to
4. An 8- it ADC with 2’s complement
an amplifier having an infinite input
output, has a nominal input range of 2V
impedance and a gain of 10. The output
to +2V. It generates a digital code of 00H
from the amplifier is acquired using a
for an analog input in the range
– 7.8125mV to +7.8125mV. An input of
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10-bit ADC, with reference voltage of 5 V. DAC output and input to be positive, the
The resolution of this system in units of maximum error in conversion of the
°C is _________ analog sample value is:
Input tart of conversion
Comparator
ample ( C)
7. An N-bit ADC has an analog reference l
Control
voltage V. Assuming zero mean and l logic
uniform distribution of the quantization Reset l Clock
error, the quantization noise power will
l l
be: R 2R p
adder counter
(A) (C) DAC
( ) ( )
l
(B) (D) l utpt uffer
( ) √ Ena le
End of
l
l l Conversion
8. The circuit in the figure represents a (E C)
counter-based unipolar ADC. When SOC is (A) directly proportional to
asserted the counter is reset and clock is (B) inversely proportional to
l
enabled so that the counter counts up and (C) independent of
the DAC output grows. When the DAC (D) directly proportional to clock
output exceeds the input sample value, frequency
the comparator switches from logic 0 to
logic 1, disabling the clock and enabling
the output buffer by asserting EOC.
Assuming all components to be ideal,
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD

ECE 7. [Ans. B]
1. [Ans. B] In a capacitor drop rate in given an
The i/p to D/A will be 0000, 0001, 0010, dv
0011, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011. So O/P will we know i = C
dt
be in B waveform dv 1
⇒
dt C
2. [Ans. B] From the above relation it is clear that if
I I I I
I
2 R 4 R 8 R 16 2R capacitor value increases then the drop
V
rate decreases because of inversion
R 2R 2R 2R 2R
I
R relation.
I C
16
4
A V0 Also = C = it ⇒ t = ⇒t c
i
From the above relation, it is clear that if
Due to virtual ground, node A can be capacitor value increases acquisition time
considered as ground so = 10K also increases as of proportionality
So I = = 1mA relation
So I = = 62.5 μA
EE
3. [Ans. C] 1. [Ans. C]
I I Sequence generated is
= R[ ]= 3.125 7→111 0→000
4 16
3→011 1→001
4. [Ans. D] 5→101 2→010
= 2 4 volts 1→001 3→011
Counter will stop when VDAC> 6.2 volt 6→110 Instead of 4→100
So counter will stop when 2→010 5→101
= 1101 4→100 6→110
o ED will display 1101 i.e CD ⇒ 13 0→000 7→111
Simply just by observation we can say
5. [Ans. B] that error is because of lack of proper
In steady state = 0.5 0 2 4= connections
6.5V
So error = 6.5 6.2 = 0.3V IN
1. [Ans. B]
6. [Ans. A] At switch status
For the Johnson counter sequence =0 = =1
D D D R R
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 4 2R
2R 2R 2R
1 1 0 6
1 1 1 7
0 1 1 3
0 0 1 1
Thevenin s equivalent
0 0 0 0
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
i.e 2V → 128
.
2R 2R 2R
1.5V → 128 = 96
It is 96 for 1.5 analog input, while is
5 5
given an 96 = 2 complement of +96
= 2’s complement of 01100000
2R
=10100000
5 = A0H
≡ 2R
2
5
5. [Ans. A]
By characteristics of SAR ADC.
R
15 6. [Ans. * ] Range 0.800 to 0.833
≡
2
R For 10 junctions the thermopile voltage
will be 600 μ = 0.6 m
When it measured through amplifier of
∴ = gain 10, its voltage will be 6 mV. So, the
2. [Ans. C] thermopile sensitivity after amplification
Step size = = = 0.625 is 0.006 V/° C
Which will be input to ADC of resolution
3. [Ans. B] = /2 1
Truth table of ADC is ADC resolution = 5/1023=0.00488
In terms of temperature, the resolution is
0 0 0 0 0 0.00488/0.006=0.814
0 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 7. [Ans. A]
1 1 1 1 1
⇒ = 8. [Ans. A]
Maximum error is equal to step size
4. [Ans. D] which is directly proportional to .
8 – it ADC o/p is in 2’s complement form aximum Error =
i.e it represents 127 128 2 1
i/p voltage Range = 2 to 2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Semiconductor Memory
ECE-2014
1. If WL is the Word Line and BL is the Bit
Line, an SRAM cell is shown in ̅̅̅̅
̅̅̅̅
EE-2009
1. The increasing order of speed of data
access for the following devices is
i. Cache Memory
̅̅̅̅ ii. CDROM
iii. Dynamic RAM
iv. Processor Registers
v. Magnetic Tape
(A) (v), (ii), (iii), (iv), (i )
(B) (v), (ii), (iii), (i), (iv)
(C) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv), (v)
(D) (v), ( ii), (i) , (iii), (iv)
̅̅̅̅
IN-2011
1. An bit RAM is interfaced to an 8085
microprocessor. In a fully decoded Scheme
if the address of the last memory location
of this RAM is 4FFFH, the address of the
first memory location of the RAM will be,
(A) 1000 H (C) 3000 H
(B) 2000 H (D) 4000 H
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE
1. [Ans. B]
For an SRAM construction four MOSFETs
are required (2-PMOS and 2-NMOS) with
interchanged outputs connected to each
CMOS inverter. So option (B) is correct.
EE
1. [Ans. B]
Processor registers has highest speed.
Followed by cache memory then dynamic
ram (slower than static ram because of
refreshing required)
IN
1. [Ans. C]
Capacity of chip
= last memory address – First memory
address+1
= last memory address – Capacity of chip+1

= 4FFFH – 2000H+1
=3000H
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Microprocessors
ECE-2006 3. In the circuit shown, the device connected
1. An I/O peripheral device shown in to Y5 can have address in the range
Figure (b) below is to be interfaced to an
8085 microprocessor. To select the I/O
o de ice
device in the I/O address range D4 H - D7
hip e ec
H, its chip-select (̅̅̅) should be
o
connected to the output of the decoder
decode
shown in Figure (a) below.
0 ̅̅̅̅̅̅
A2 LSB 1
2 ̅̅̅̅̅̅
3 8
A3 3
Decoder 4 ̅
5
A4 MSB 6
7
(A) 2000 20FF (C) 2E00 2EFF

(B) 2D00 2DFF (D) FD00 FDFF
A7 ̅̅̅̅
A6
̅̅̅ ECE-2011
Fig.
4. An 8085 assembly language program is
(a)
Data given below. Assume that the carry flag is
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ initially unset. The content of the
I/O
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ Peripheral accumulator after the execution of the
A1 program is
A0 MVI A, 07H
RLC
MOV B, A
̅̅̅
RLC
Fig. (b)
RLC
(A) output 7 (C) output 2
ADD B
(B) output 5 (D) output 0
RRC
ECE-2010
2. For the 8085 assembly language program (A) 8CH (C) 23H
given below, the content of the (B) 64H (D) 15H
accumulator after the execution of the
program is ECE-2014
3000 MVI A, 45H 5. For the 8085 microprocessor, the
3002 MOV B, A interfacing circuit to input 8-bit digital
3003 STC data ( ) from an external device
3004 CMC is shown in the figure. The instruction for
correct data transfer is
3005 RAR
3006 XRA B
(A) 00H (C) 67H
(B) 45H (D) E7H
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
o ⁄ e ice How many times DCR L instruction will

ecode
be executed?
igi a aa u (A) 255 (C) 65025
inpu
(B) 510 (D) 65279
̅̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅̅
EE-2008
̅̅̅̅̅
3. The contents (in Hexadecimal) of some of
the memory location in an 8085A based
system are given below
Address Contents
.. ..
(A) MVI A, F8H (C) OUT F8H 26FE 00
(B) IN F8H (D) LDA F8F8H 26FF 01
2700 02
6. n mic op oce o execu e “
2701 03
H” wi h a ing add e oca ion
2702 04
1FFEH (STA copies the contents of the
.. ..
accumulator to the 16-bit address
The contents of stack pointer (SP),
location). While the instruction is fetched
Program counter (PC) and (H, L) are
and executed, the sequence of values
2700H, 2100H and 0000H respectively,
written at the address pins is
when the following sequence of
(A) 1FH, 1FH, 20H, 12H
instruction are executed,
(B) 1FH, FEH, 1FH, FFH, 12H
2100 H: DAD SP
(C) 1FH, 1FH, 12H, 12H
2101 H: PCHL
(D) 1FH, 1FH, 12H, 20H, 12H
The contents of (SP) and (PC) at the end
of execution will be
EE-2006
(A) PC = 2102 H, SP = 2700 H
1. In an 8085 microprocessor based system,
(B) PC = 2700 H, SP = 2700 H
it is desired to increment the contents of
(C) PC = 2800 H, SP = 26 FE H
memory location whose address is
(D) PC = 2A02 H, SP= 2702 H
available in (D, E) register pair and store
the result in same location. The sequence
EE-2009
of instructions is
4. In an 8085 microprocessor, the contents
(A) XCH G (C) INXD
of the Accumulator, after the following
INRM XCH G
instructions are executed will become
(B) XCH G (D) INRM
XRA A
INXH XCH G
MVI B, F0H
SUB B
2. A software delay subroutine is written as
(A) 01 H (C) F0 H
given below:
(B) 0F H (D) 10 H
DELAY: MVI H, 255 D
MVI L, 255 D
EE-2010
LOOP: DCR L
5. hen a “ dd ” in uc ion i
JNZ LOOP
executed, the CPU carries out the
DCR H
following sequential operations
JNZ LOOP
internally:
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Note: EE-2014
(R) means content of register R 7. An output device is interfaced with 8-bit
((R)) means content of memory location microprocessor 8085A. The interfacing
pointed to by R circuit is shown in figure
PC means Program Counter
SP means Stack Pointer
(A) (SP) incremented ecode
(PC) Addr u pu o
((SP)) (PC)
(B) (PC) Addr
((SP)) (PC) ̅ u pu e ice
(SP) incremented ̅
̅̅̅̅̅
(C) (PC) Addr ̅
(SP) incremented The interfacing circuit makes use of 3
((SP)) (PC) Line to 8 Line decoder having 3 enable
(D) ((SP)) (PC) lines ̅ ̅ The address of the device
(SP) incremented is
(PC) Addr (A) (C)
(B) (D)
EE-2011
6. A portion of the main program to call a 8. In an 8085 microprocessor, the following
subroutine SUB in an 8085 environment program is executed
is given below. Address location - Instruction
: 2000H XRA A
: 2001H MVI B, 04H
LXI D, DISP 2003H MVI A, 03H
LP: CALL SUB 2005H RAR
: 2006H DCR B
: 2007H JNZ 2005
It is desired that control be returned to 200AH HLT
LP + DISP + 3 when the RET instruction At the end of program, register A contains
is executed in the subroutine. The set of (A) 60H (C) 06H
instructions that precede the RET (B) 30H (D) 03H
instruction in the subroutine are
(A) POP D (C) POP H 9. In 8085 microprocessor, the operation
DAD H DAD D performed by the instruction LHLD
PUSH D PUSH H is
(A) H
(B) POP H (D) XTHL
(B) H
DAD D INXD
(C) H
INX H INX D
(D) H
INX H INX D
INX H XTHL
IN-2006
PUSH H
1. An 8085 assembly language program is
given as follows. The execution time of
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
each instruction is given against the 4. A snapshot of the address, data and
instruction in terms of T-state. control buses of an 8085 microprocessor
Instruction T-states executing program is given below:
MVI B, 0AH 7T Address 2020H
LOOP: MVIC, 05H 7T Data 24H
DCR C 4T IO/ ̅ Logic high
DCR B 4T ̅̅̅̅ Logic high
JNZ LOOP 10T/7T ̅̅̅̅̅ Logic Low
The execution time of the program in The assembly language instruction being
terms of T-states is executed is
(A) 247 T (C) 254 T (A) IN 24H (C) OUT 24H
(B) 250 T (D) 257 T (B) IN 20H (D) OUT 20H
2. A memory mapped I/O device has an IN-2008

address of 00F0H. Which of the following 5. A part of a program written for an 8085
8085 instructions outputs the content of microprocessor is shown below. When
the accumulator to the I/O device? the program execution reaches LOOP2,
(A) LXI H, 00F0H the value of register C will be
MOV M, A SUB A
(B) LXI H, 00F0H MOV C, A
OUT M LOOP1: INR A
(C) LXI H, 00F0H DAA
OUT F0H JC LOOP2
(D) LXI H, 00F0H JNC LOOP1
MOV A, M LOOP2: NOP
(A) 63H (C) 99H
IN-2007 (B) 64H (D) 100H
3. 8-bi igned in ege in ’ comp emen
6. A 2k×8 bit RAM is interfaced to an 8-bit
form are read into the accumulator of an
microprocessor. If the address of the first
8085 microprocessor from an I/O port
memory location in the RAM is 0800H,
using the following assembly language
the address of the last memory location
program segment with symbolic
will be
addresses.
(A) 1000H (C) 4800H
BEGIN: INPORT
(B) 0FFFH (D) 47FFH
RAL
JNC BEGIN IN-2009
RAR 7. The following is an assembly language
END: HLT program for 8085 microprocessors
This program Address Instruction Mnemonic
(A) Halts upon reading a negative Code
number 1000H 3E06 MVI A, 06H
(B) Halts upon reading a positive 1002H C6 70 ADI 70H
number
1004H 32 07 10 STA 1007H
(C) Halts upon reading a zero
1007H AF XRA A
(D) Never halts
1008H 76 HLT
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
When this program halts, the accumulator (A) 3000H (C) AFFFH
contains (B) 4FFFH (D) C000H
(A) 00H (C) 70H
(B) 06H (D) 76H 11. The subroutine SBX given below is
executed by an 8085 processor. The value
8. Consider a system consisting of a in the accumulator immediately after the
microprocessor, memory, and peripheral execution of the subroutine will be:
devices connected by a common bus. SBX: MVI A, 99H
During DMA data transfer, the ADI 11H
microprocessor MOV C, A
(A) only reads from the bus RET
(B) only writes to the bus (A) 00H (C) 99H
(C) both reads from and writes to the (B) 11H (D) AAH
bus
(D) neither reads from nor writes to the IN-2014
bus 12. A microprocessor accepts external
interrupts (Ext INT) through a
IN-2010 Programmable Interrupt Controller as
9. In an 8085 processor, the main program shown in the figure.
calls the subroutine SUB1 given below.
When the program returns to the main dd e u x
program after executing SUB1, the value
x
in the accumulator is og ammab e
aa u n e up
Address Opcode Mnemonic con o e
2000 3E 00 SUB1: MVIA,00h x
2002 CD 05 20 CALL SUB2

2005 3C SUB2: INR A Assuming vectored interrupt, a correct
2006 C9 RET sequence of operations when a single
(A) 00 (C) 02 external interrupt (Ext INT1) is received
(B) 01 (D) 03 will be :
10. A 8-bit DAC is interfaced with a (A) x → → a a ead→
microprocessor having 16 address lines (B) x → → → a a ead
(A0...A15) as shown in the adjoining (C) x → → → dd e
figure. A possible valid address for this Write
DAC is (D) x → → aa
ine o d d ead→ dd e ie
ine ecode
b
a
b
a b na og
ou pu
̅̅̅ b ̅̅̅
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE 0100 0110

1. [Ans. B]
→ H
I/O address range D4 – D7 H
⇒ xx
So, and should be. 5. [Ans. D]
So, decoder output should be 5. In this figure the chip select and
will be selected if the memory address
2. [Ans. C] will be
Content of register
⏟ ⏟
MVI A, 45 A = 45
MOV B, A B = 45
STC CY =1 ⏟ ⏟
CMC CY =0
That is F8 F8 memory address is selected
RAR A = 22
So LDA F8F8 [Load accumulator from the
XRA B ⊕
content of memory location F8F8H]
should be the instruction for data transfer
3. [Ans. B]
Address bits should be as follows:
6. [Ans. A]
STA 1234H is stored as follows
(and for hey can be he o ) 1FFE Opcode of STA
2D00 – 2DFF (Range) 1FFF 34 H
2000 12H
4. [Ans. C] After this 1234H will be loaded in the
MVI A, 0111 he address bus.
07 H content So the correct sequence of values at
of ‘ ’ are 1F, 1F, 20, 12
RLC 1110 he
content EE
of ‘ ’ 1. [Ans. A]
MOV B, 1110 he XCHG (HL) (DE)
A content INR M (HL) = (HL) + 1
of ‘ ’ So this sequence stores the address into
RLC 1100 he HL pair and then increment the content of
content memory location specified by HL pair.
of ‘ ’
RLC 1000 he 2. [Ans. D]
content DCR L executed = 255 × 255 + 255 – 1
of ‘ ’ = 65279 times
ADD B
3. [Ans. B]
A 0000 1110
Given, (SP) = 2700H
+
(PC) = 2100 H
B 0011 1000
(HL) = 0000H
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2100 H : DAD SP Output line 2 is selected

(SP) + (HL) → (HL) So
2700 H + 0000 H = 2700 H stored in HL
pair ⇒ ̅ ⇒
2101 H : PCHL : The content of HL are
transferred to (PC) ⏟ ⏟
So now (PC) = 2700H and (SP) also
unchanged ⏟ ⏟
(PC) = 2700 H
(SP) = 2700 H
4. [Ans. D] 8. [Ans. A]
XRA A ⇒ H XRA A → clear accumulator
MVI B, F0H ⇒ H MVI B, → B= H
SUB B ⇒ – B will go H
to accumulator H MVI A, → A= H
00 – F0 = 10 H
H RAR → Rotate accumulation
5. [Ans. D] to right A = 10000001
First of all content of PC is loaded into H DCR B → Decrement B, B=
stack. i.e. address of next instruction to be H INZ → ump o when
executed is loaded onto stack. i.e. SP is 2005 z
decremented then PC is loaded by 200 AH HLT
address given in call instruction. After 3 rotation
6. [Ans. C] H
Call take 3 address locations. RET always
returns to LP + 3 location, this stored in 9. [Ans. C]
SP. So to return to LP + DISP + 3 we have LHLD instruction loads the value at
to add DISP to SP. memory location specified by the
POP H immediate
DAD D Value in H and L pair register
PUSH H Value at will be stored in L register
Normal call operation shown. value of will be stored in H
register
CALL SUB IN
1. [Ans. C]
RET
2. [Ans. A]
7. [Ans. B] Since I/O device is memory mapped I/O
To enable decoder Memory related instructions will be
used for data transfer
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
H H → load the address of 6. [Ans. B]

memory in HL pair Starting address 0800H, so last
→ load the memory by content address = 0800 + 7FF = 0FFFH.
of A
7. [Ans. A]
3. [Ans. A] Last instruction is XRA A, so accumulator
e.g. 01H positive number contents will be 00
→ After RAL
CY Accumulator 8. [Ans. C]
0 0000 0010 or 00000011 In DMA transfer of data between source
JNC is TRUE and again IN instruction will and destination takes place without any
load accumulator with same port address, involvement of microprocessor. During
and microprocessor will go into infinite both in read/write mode.
loop.
Negative number → after 9. [Ans. B]
RAL SUB 1: MVI A, 00H → H
CY Accumulator CALL SUB 2 → program will shift to SUB 2
1 0000 0001 or 00000000 address location
JNC is false and microprocessor will come SUB 2: INR A →A = 00H + 01H=001H
out from the loop. RET → returned to main program
So, this program halts upon reading a The contents of Accumulation after
negative number. execution of the above SUB 2 is 01H
4. [Ans. D] 10. [Ans. A]

Address 2020H: The contents of lower To select 2-4 line decoder, A15 = 0
and higher address lines are same i.e. To select the DAC, b2 should be active, i.e.
20H. So, this indicates that the technique A14 = 0 and A13 = 1.
is I/O mapped I/O. Reset all address lines can be either 0 or
Data 24H: This indicates that the content 1.
of accumulator is 24 H, which have to sent So, address can be
to I/O port. 001x xxxx xxxx xxxx
̅ (Logic High): ̅ high indicates Out of four choices this is satisfied by
that this is input/output operation. 3000 H only.
̅̅̅̅ (Logic High): ̅̅̅̅ logic high indicates
that read operation is inactive. 11. [Ans. D]
̅̅̅̅̅ (Logic Low): ̅̅̅̅̅ logic low indicates Instructions Content of register
that write operation is active. MVI A, 99H A = 99
So, by observing all the operations the ADI 11H A = 99 + 11 = AAH
appropriate instruction is OUT20H. MOV C,A C = AAH
5. [Ans. A] 12. [Ans. B]

Execution will go to Loop 2 when A The correct sequence is external
contain 64H = , at that time C interrupts occurs at PIC, then it is
contains 63 H. transferred to microprocessor, then
interrupt is acknowledge and finally data
is read.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK EMT
Electromagnetic Field
ECE - 2007 Which current distribution leads to this

1. If C is a closed curve enclosing a surface S, field?
then the magnetic field intensity ⃑⃑ , the [Hint: The algebra is trivial in cylindrical
current destiny ⃑ and the electric flux co-ordinates.]
⃑
destiny ⃑⃑ are related by (A) ( ) r
⃑⃑ ⃑
(A) ∬ ⃑⃑ s ∮( ) ⃑⃑⃑ (B) ( ) r
⃑⃑ (C) r
(B) ∫ ⃑⃑ ⃑⃑⃑ ∯( ) s
⃑
(D) ( ) r
⃑⃑
(C) ∯ ⃑⃑ s ∫( )
⃑⃑ 5. If a vector field ⃑ is related to another
(D) ∮ ⃑⃑ ∬( ) s
vector field ⃑ through ⃑ ∇×⃑ ,which of
the following is true? Note: C and Sc refer
2. A plane wave of wavelength is travelling to any closed contour and any surface
in a direction making an angle with whose boundary is C.
positive x-axis and positive y-axis.
(A) ∮ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ ∫ ⃑⃑⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑⃑
The ⃑ Field of the plane wave can be
represented as ( is a constant) (B) ∮ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ ∫ ⃑⃑⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑⃑
√
(A) ⃑ ŷ
( ) (C) ∮ ∇ × ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ ∫ ∇. ⃑⃑⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑⃑
(
√
) (D) ∮ ∇ × ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ ∫ ⃑⃑⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑⃑
(B) ⃑ ŷ
√
( ) 6. Two infinitely long wires carrying current
(C) ⃑ ŷ
√
are as shown in the figure below. One
( )
(D) ⃑ ŷ wire is in the y-z plane and parallel to the
y-axis. The other wire is in the x-y plane
ECE - 2008 and parallel to the x-axis. Which
3. For static electric and magnetic fields in components of the resulting magnetic
an inhomogeneous source-free, medium field are non-zero at the origin?
z
which of the following represents the
corr ct form of two of Maxw ’s
equations? y
(A) ∇. (C) ∇×
∇×B ∇×B
(B) ∇. (D) ∇×
x
∇.B ∇.B
ECE - 2009 (A) x, y, z components

4. A magnetic field in air is measured to be (B) x, y components
x y (C) y, z components
⃑
B B ( ŷ x̂)
x y x y (D) x, z components
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE - 2010
7. If ⃑ x â ∮ ⃑ .
xyâ over the path
shown in the figure is,
y a
3 The magnetic field inside the hole is

(A) uniform and depends only on d
(B) uniform and depends only on b
(C) uniform and depends on both b and d
1 C (D) non uniform
0 X
⁄ ⁄
ECE - 2013
√ √
11. Consider a vector field ⃑ r . The closed
(A) 0 (C) 1
loop line integral ∮ ⃑ can be expressed
(B) (D) √
√ as
(A) ∯ ∇ × ⃑ ⃑⃑⃑⃑s over the closed surface
ECE - 2011
bounded by the loop
8. Consider a closed surface S surrounding a
(B) ∰ ∇ ⃑ v over the closed volume
volume V. IF r is the position vector of a
bounded by the loop
point inside S, with ̂ the unit normal on
S, the value of the integral ∯ r. ̂ is (C) ∭ ∇ ⃑ v over the open volume
bounded by the loop
(A) 3V (C) 10V
(B) 5V (D) 15V (D) ∬(∇ × ⃑ ) ⃑⃑⃑⃑s over the open surface
bounded by the loop
ECE - 2012
ECE - 2014
12. In spherical co-ordinates, let â â denote
and 10
unit vectors along the , directions.
An infinitely long uniform solid wire of
radius a carries a uniform dc current of si cos t r â m
r
density .
And
.
9. The magnetic field at a distance r from the si cos t r â m
r
center of the wire is proportional to represent the electric and magnetic field
(A) r for r < a and 1/r2 for r > a components of the EM wave at large
(B) 0 for r < a and 1/r for r > a distances r from a dipole antenna, in free
(C) r for r < a and 1/r for r > a space. The average power (W) crossing
(D) 0 for r < a and 1/r2 for r > a the hemispherical shell located at
r m is _______.
10. A hole of radius b (b < a) is now drilled
along the length of the wire at a distance 13. If r xâ yâ zâ a |r| r
d from the center of the wire as shown th iv r ∇ r = ____________
below.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
14. Given the vector EE - 2007

cos x si y â si x cos y â Statement for Linked Answer Questions 2
where â â denote unit vectors along x,y &3
directions, respectively. The magnitude of An inductor designed with 400 turns coil
curl of A is __________ wound on an iron core of 16 cm2 cross
sectional area and with a cut of an air gap
15. The electric field (assumed to be one- length of 1mm. The coil is connected to a
dimensional) between two points A and B 230 V, 50 Hz ac supply. Neglect coil
is shown. Let a be the resistance, core loss, iron reluctance and
electrostatic potentials at A and B, a ag i ucta c . μo 4 x -7 H/m)
respectively. The value of in 2. The current in the inductor is
Volts is_________ (A) 18.08 A (C) 4.56 A
(B) 9.04 A (D) 2.28 A
3. The average force on the core to reduce

the air gap will be
4 ⁄cm (A) 832.29N (C) 3332.47N
⁄cm
(B) 1666.22N (D) 6664.84 N
⁄cm
μm B 4. The total reactance and total susceptance
of a lossless overhead EHV line, operating
16. Given ⃑ zâ xâ yâ . If S represents at 50 Hz, are given by 0.045 pu and 1.2 pu
the portion of the sphere x y z =1 respectively. If the velocity of wave
propagation is × km/s, then the
for z the ∫ ∇ × ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑⃑s is ___________
approximate length of the line is
17. If ⃑ y yz x̂ xyxz ŷ (A) 122 km (C) 222 Km
(B) 172 km (D) 272 km
xyz ẑ
is the electric field in a source free region,
5. A solid sphere made of insulating material
a valid expression for the electrostatic
has a radius R and has a total charge Q
potential is
distributed uniformly in its volume. What
(A) xy yz (C) y xyz
is the magnitude of the electric field
(B) xy xyz (D) xy xyz
intensity, E, at a distance r (0 < r < R)
EE - 2006 inside the sphere?
1. Which of the following statements holds (A) (C)
for the divergence of electric and
magnetic flux densities? (B) (D)
(A) Both are zero
(B) These are zero for static densities
6. Divergence of the vector field
but non zero for time varying
V( x, y, z) = (x cos xy+ y) i + (y cos xy)j +
densities
(sin z2 + x2 + y2) k is
(C) It is zero for the electric flux density
(A) 2z cos z2
(D) It is zero for the magnetic flux
(B) sin xy + 2z cos z2
density
(C) x sin xy – cos z
(D) None of these.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE - 2008 EE - 2013
7. A coil of 300 turns is wound on a non- 12. The curl of the gradient of the scalar field
magnetic core having a mean defined by x y y z 4z x is
circumference of 300 mm and a cross- (A) 4xya yza zxa
sectional area of 300 mm2. The (B) 4a a a
inductance of the coil corresponding to a (C) 4xy 4z a x yz a
magnetizing current of 3A will be y zx a
(Given that μ = 4 x 10-7 H/m) (D)
(A) 37.68 μH (C) 37. 68 μH
(B) 113.04 μH (D) 113. 04 μH
13. The flux density at a point in space given
8. A capacitor consists of two metal plates by B 4xa ya a m . The
each 500 × 500 mm2 and spaced 6 mm value of constant k must be equal to
apart. The space between the metal plates (A) 2 (C) +0.5
is filled with a glass plate of 4mm (B) 0.5 (D) +2
thickness and a layer of paper of 2 mm
thickness. The relative permittivities of 14. A dielectric slab with 500 mm x 500 mm
the glass and paper are 8 and 2 cross-section is 0.4 m long. The slab is
respectively. Neglecting the fringing subjected to a uniform electric field of
effect, the capacitance will be (Given that a a mm. The relative
= 8.85 x F/m) permittivity of the dielectric material is
(A) 983.33 pF (C) 637.5 pF equal to 2. The value of constant is
(B) 1475 pF (D) 9956.25 pF . × m . The energy stored in
the dielectric in Joules is
9. Two point charges = 10 μC and
(A) . × (C) .5
= 20μC are placed at coordinates (B) . × (D)
(1,1,0) and ( 1, 1,0) respectively, the
total electric flux passing through a plane EE - 2014
z = 20 will be 15. is the capacitance of a parallel plate
(A) 7.5 μC (C) 15.0 μC capacitor with air as dielectric (as in
(B) 13.5 μC (D) 22.5 μC figure (a)). If, half of the entire gap as
shown in figure (b) is filled with a
10. An extra high voltage transmission line of
dielectric of permittivity , the
the length 300 km can be approximated
expression for the modified capacitance is
by a lossless line having propagation
constant . radians per km. a
Then the percentage ratio of the length to
(A) ⁄ (C) ⁄
wavelength will given by (B) (D)
(A) 24.24% (C) 19.05%
(B) 12.12% (D) 6.06% 16. The following four vector fields are given
EE - 2012 in Cartesian co-ordinate system. The
11. The direction of vector A is radially vector field which does not satisfy the
outward from the origin, with | | r property of magnetic flux density is
where r x y z and k is a (A) y a z a x a
constant. The value of n for which ∇ A=0 (B) z a x a y a
is (C) x a y a z a
(A) 2 (C) 1 (D) y z a x z a x y a
(B) 2 (D) 0
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
17. A parallel plate capacitor consisting two 19. A hollow metallic sphere of radius r is
dielectric materials is shown in the figure. kept at potential of 1 Volt. The total
The middle dielectric slab is placed electric flux coming out of the concentric
symmetrically with respect to the plates. spherical surface of radius R r is
ot (A) 4 r (C) 4
(B) 4 r (D) 4
20. A perfectly conducting metal plate is

placed in x-y plane in a right handed
coordinate system. A charge of √
If the potential difference between one of columbs is placed at coordinate (0, 0, 2).
the plates and the nearest surface of is the permittivity of free space.
dielectric interface is 2 Volts, then the Assume ̂ ̂ ̂ to be unit vectors along x, y
ratio is and z axes respectively. At the coordinate
(A) 1:4 (C) 3:2 √ √ ) the electric field vector ⃑
(B) 2:3 (D) 4:1 (Newtons/Columb) will be
⁄√ rf ct y co ucti g
18. The magnitude of magnetic flux density o um s m ta at
⃑B at a point having normal distance d y
meters from an infinitely extended wire √ √
carrying current of is i u its . x
An infinitely extended wire is laid along

the x-axis and is carrying current of 4 A in
the +ve x direction. Another infinitely
(A) √ ̂ (C) ̂
extended wire is laid along the y-axis and
(B) ̂ (D) √ ̂
is carrying 2 A current in the +ve y
direction. μ is permeability of free space.
Assume ̂ ̂ ̂ to be unit vectors along x, y
and z axes respectively.
am s μ
B
4
z
Assuming right handed
coordinate
system, magnetic field intensity, ⃑⃑ at
coordinate (2,1,0) will be
̂w r m
4
B ̂ m
̂ m
m
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ECE B B
* +a
1. [Ans. D] μ x y
∇×
From stokes theorem
5. [Ans. B]
∮ . ∬( ). s rom sto ’s th or m
2. [Ans. A] ∮ ∮∇× s
z axis
iv ∇×
∮ ⃑ ⃑⃑⃑ ∬ ⃑ ⃑⃑⃑⃑s
x axis x axis
6. [Ans. D]
z
z axis
cos √ √
( )
y
cos
⃑ . . .
â x
√
⃑ . â â × â â
â × â â
3. [Ans. D] Non-zero field components x and z
rom Maxw ’s quatio
∇.B 7. [Ans. C]
∇× ⃑ xyâ x â
xâ yâ
For static magnetic field,
xâ yâ
∇×
⃑. xy x x y
y
4. [Ans. C]
∇×B μ S
3 R
∇×B
μ
a a a 1
P Q
|| ||
μ 0 X
B B ⁄ ⁄
√ √
B B P-Q: y=1 dy=0
* a a
μ z z ⁄ ⁄
√ x √
B B ∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ x x |
( )a + ⁄
x y √ ⁄
√
Q-R:
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x 11. [Ans. D]
√
By curl stroke theorem
4
∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ ( ) y
√ ∮⃑ . c
R-S: ∬ ∇ × ⃑ . s ov r o surfac
Y=3 ,dy=0
⁄ ⁄√
√ 12. [Ans. *] Range 55.4 to 55.6
∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ x x x |
⁄ ⁄√ In phasor notation
√
⃑ si â m
r
= ( ) .
⃑⃑ si â m
S-P: r
x= x So, average poynting vector is
√
⃑ (⃑ × ⃑⃑ )
∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ ( ) y .
si si â
√ r r
.
si â
So, ∮ ⃑ . ∫ ⃑. ∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ r
Average power crossing
∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑ ∫ ⃑ . ⃑⃑⃑
∫⃑ â r si
=1 ∫ . si
8. [Ans. D]
. ∫ si ∫
Apply the divergence theorem
.
∯ r. ⃑ x ∭ ∇. r
∭ v ( ∇. r and r is 13. [Ans. *] Range 2.9 to 3.1

r̅ xâ yâ zâ
the position vector)
r x y z
9. [Ans. C] r x r y r z
r x r y r z r
r a r x r
.ra x
r
r a x r r
a r r r
r a r ∇ r . â â â
r x r y r z
r a r r r
r r .∇ r r [ . â â â ]
x y z
r a iv r . ∇ r
r
r r
10. [Ans. C] (r. ) (r. )
x x y y
Magnetic held inside hole depends on r
(r. )
radius of hole i.e b and also on the z z
location of hole from center of the r r r
conductor ie d. Hole has uniform cross (r. ) r. ( )
x x x x
section magnetic field is uniform x r x
r. [ ] ( )
r r x r
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
x x
r. ( ) ( ) ∫si cos
r r r
x x ∫si si
( )
r r
r
(r. ) ∫si cos
x x
14. [Ans. *] Range 0.01 to 0.01 ∫ ∫ si .

si x × cos y cos x × si y
cur
x y . [cos ]
cos x × cos y cos x × cos y
Magnitude of curl of A = 0
∫ ∇×̅ . s . 4
15. [Ans. *] Range . .
A= ⁄cm ⁄cm ;
17. [Ans. D]
B= × ⁄cm 4 ⁄cm ̅ y yz x̂ xy xz ŷ
4
x xyz ẑ
×
̅ ∇v
4× x
Hence
∫ . tio
× ∇v [ y â xy z â yz â ]
∫ 4× x x tio B
∇v [ y yz x̂ xy xz ŷ
× ⁄
x xyz ẑ]
(4 × x)|
tio
× × × × ∇v [yz x̂ y xz ŷ xyz âz]
× tio
× × ∇v [ y yz x̂] xy xz ŷ
× xyz ẑ
Hence D option is correct
16. [Ans. *] Range 3.13 to 3.15 EE

̅ zâ xâ yâ 1. [Ans. D]
â â â ∇.B
∇. ot a ways Zero)
∇× ̅ | |
x y z
z x y 2. [Ans. D]
â â â Inductance
× × × ×
x y z represents a hemi- L=
sphere = 0.32115H
a I=
x r si cos x y z = .
× × .
y r si si r
z r cos s si
∫ ∇× ̅ . s ∫(â â â ) . s
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. A] 9. [Ans. C]
Force = Net flux will be half of the total charge,
= = 15µC
Energy = = 0.835J
.
F= . 4 10. [Ans. D]
m . ra ia s m
4. [Ans. B]
wav gth 4 4 .
v .
√ ×
. i gth
f .4 u ( ) .
× wav gth 4 4 .
. u ×
× .
.
11. [Ans. A]
Length = 3× √ × × ⃑
× × . r ̂
=185 km ∇. ⃑ r . r
5. [Ans. A] . r
harg ’i radius r = × r .
r r
or ∇. ⃑
r
r r
r
12. [Ans. D]
6. [Ans. A] cur [∇ sca ar]
iv rg c ∇.
13. [Ans. A]
=
cos xy yx si xy ∇. B 4x y
x y z
cos xy y si xy cos z . z 4
zcos z
14. [Ans. B]
7. [Ans. B]
L= 15. [Ans. A]
× × × Case (i)
=
×
= 113.09µH
8. [Ans. B] h
C=
. × × × × ×
= 4.4nF
×
. × × × ×
×
.
C = 1.467nF
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
.h
gio
h
.
4
Case(ii)
h
( )
In any system the charge Q = CV is

i- ctric constant
.h
18. [Ans. C]
h
[ ]
m t r
am s
16. [Ans. C]
̅ magnetic flux density [w sourc
If B m ] m t r
̅
∇. B
̅ B â
i. . if B B â B â
̅
∇. B
4 am s
B B B
Must qua to z ro sourc
x y z
̅
Option (A) : ∇. B ̅
B ̅
B ̅
B
̅
Option (B) : ∇. B
μ 4 m s 4μ
̅
Option (C) : ∇. B x y z ̅
B ̂ ̂w m
̅
Option (D) : ∇. B
μ am s μ
̅
B ( ̂) ̂w m
17. [Ans. C] μ
̅
B ̂w m
̅
B μ
⃑⃑ ̂ am m
̅ ̅ = cross product of
Note: Direction of B
current direction and radial drections
respectively [Biot – savart’s aw]
4 4
gio
4
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
19. [Ans. A] × √ √
⃑ â â
4 |r | |r |
|r̅ | |r̅ | √ 4 √
(√ √ )
â
√
√ √
√
(√ √ )
â
The net flux leaving any closed surface is √
equal to charge enclosed in it √ √
Total electric flux leaving the √
co c tric s h r of ra ius ‘ ’ charg √ √ √ √ √
⃑ * +
co tai y th m ta s h r of ra ius ‘r’ √ √
ot tia at a oi t o m ta ic s h r
̅ √ [ 4̂]
4 r
̅ ̂ wto ⁄ o um
4 r
iv ot
4 r
(flux ) leaving the sphere of radius
‘ ’ 4 r
20. [Ans. B]
Method of image:
A perfect conducting plate acts like a
mirror for the existing charge by the
introduction of virtual charge opposite to
the existing charge and equivalent distant
from it
z axis
√ X
r̅
ou om s
√ √
r̅
√
ou om s
X
⃑ ⃑ ⃑ imag
√ √
⃑ â â
4 |r | |r |
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK Measurement
Basics of Measurements and Error Analysis

(Static & Dynamic Characteristics of Measuring Instrument)
EE-2006 IN-2007
1. A 200/1 Current transformer (CT) is 2. Two sensors have measurement errors
wound with 200 turns on the secondary that are Gaussian distributed with zero
on a toroidal core. When it carries a means and variances and ,
current of 160 A on the primary, the ratio respectively. The two sensor
and phase errors of the CT are found to be measurements and are combined to
and 30 minutes respectively. If the form the weighted average
number of secondary turns is reduced by x= + (1 ≤ ≤ Assuming
1 the new ratio error (%) and phase error that the measurements errors of the two
(min) will be respectively sensors are uncorrelated, the weighting
(A) 0. 0, 30 (C) factor that yields the smallest error
(B) (D) variance of x is.
2. A variable w is related to three other (A) (C)
variables x, y, z as w = xy/z. The
(B) (D) 0.5
variables are measured with meters of
accuracy 0.5% reading, % of full
scale value and 1.5% reading. The 3. Consider a non-ideal voltage source
actual readings of the three meters are whose output voltage is measured by a
80, 20 and 50 with 100 being the full scale non-ideal voltmeter as shown below
value for all three. The maximum
uncertainty in the measurement of will Non-ideal Non-ideal
ideal
Voltage ideal
be voltmeter voltmeter
source voltage
(A) 0.5 % rdg (C) 6.7 % rdg source
(B) 5.5 % rdg (D) 7.0 % rdg Let be the difference between and
the measured voltage is function of
IN-2006
(A) only (C)
1. A certain quantity x is calculated from
(B) only (D)
measured values of a, b, and c using the
formula, IN-2009
x=k( ) Where k is a constant. 4. A quantity x is calculated by using the
The maximum limiting error in each of formula x = (p q)/r, the measured
the three measured quantities is Δ values are p = 9, q = 6, r = 0.5. Assume
The maximum limiting error in x will be that the measurement errors in p, q and r
are independent. The absolute maximum
(A) 2(| | | |) | |
error in the measurement of each of the
(B) (| | | |) | | three quantities is . The absolute
maximum error in the calculated value of
(C) ( ) | |
x is
(D) ( ) | | (A) (C)
(B) (D) 6
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. The response of a first order IN-2013

measurement system to a unit step input 9. Two ammeters A and A measure the same
is 1 e , where t is in seconds. A ramp current and provide readings and ,
of 0.1units per second is given as the respectively. The ammeter errors can be
input to this system. The error in the characterized as independent zero mean
measured value after transients have died Gaussian random variables of standard
down is deviations and , respectively. The
(A) 0.02units (C) 0.2units value of the current is computed as:
(B) 0.1units (D) 1unit
The value of which gives the lowest
IN-2010 standard deviation of I is
6. The volume of a cylinder is computed (A) (C)
from measurements of its height (h) and
diameter (d). A set of several (B) (D)
measurements of height has an average
value of 0.2m and a standard deviation of
IN-2014
1%. The average value obtained for the
10. The resistance of a wire is given by the
diameter is 0.1m and the standard
expression
deviation is 1%. Assuming the errors in
the measurements of height and diameter Where ρ is the resistivity Ω-meter), L is
are uncorrelated, the standard deviation the length (meter) and D (meter) is the
of the computed volume is diameter of the wire. The error in
(A) 1.00% (C) 2.23% measurement of each of the parameters
(B) 1.73% (D) 2.41% ρ L and D is . Assuming that the
errors are independent random variables,
7. A measurement system with input x(t) the percent error in measurement of R
and output y(t) is described by the is ___________.
differential equation 3 y .The
static sensitivity of the system is
(A) 0.60 (C) 1.67
(B) 1.60 (D) 2.67
8. The diameters of 10000 ball bearings

were measured. The mean diameter and
standard deviation were found to be
10 mm and 0.05 mm respectively.
Assuming Gaussian distribution of
measurements, it can be expected that the
number of measurements more than
10.15 mm will be
(A) 230 (C) 15
(B) 115 (D) 2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE ( )
1. [Ans. A]
Considering only positive values of error
Nominal ratio
( )
Primary current 6 A
Actual ratio = n ( ) i =( )
= 7%
% Ratio error =
IN
1. [Ans. A]
Actual ratio
Given X = K ( )
n trun ratio
Let Y =
( ) ii
X=K.Y
when no. of secondary is reduced by 1 Applying log on both sides
log X = log K + log Y
n log K = 0 ( K is constant)
n ( ) = log Y
= 2 log
( ) iii = 2 *| | | |+
Dividing eq. (ii) and (iii)
2. [Ans. B]
For the case given, the smallest error is
( )
3. [Ans. C]
Measured voltage
atio rror
v v
Phase angle error ( )

v
Reduction of one or two turns of the
secondary winding, no doubt, reduces v ( )
the ratio error, but it has no effect on the
phase angle error.
2. [Ans. D] v
learly f( )
Given, w = . v
Taking log on both sides,
log w = log x + log y – log z
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. C] 10. [Ans. *] Range 2.3 to 2.5

p q r ρL
p q r DD
d L
5. [Ans. B] dρ DD
d ρ
R(s) =
dL DD
s d ρL
e lim
s s dρ DDD
s d D
lim d √( ) ρ L ( ) D
dρ D
s s
s s d ρ L D
s √( ) ( ) ( )
lim ρ L D
s s
√
6. [Ans. A]
Volume = r h
h = 0.2, 2r=0.1
= 1%
= 1%
7. [Ans. B]
dy i o
y t y t
dt p p
Applying Laplace transform
3s Y(s) + 5Y(s) = 8X(s)
Y(s) [3s+5] = 8X(s)
s
s s s
s 6
s ( s) s
8. [Ans. B]
By Gaussian distribution, the expected
Measurement are 115.
9. [Ans. A]
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Measurements of Basic Electrical Quantities 1

(Current Voltage, Resistance)
EE-2006 j1 j
1. A current of – 8 + 6 √ (sin + 300) A is
passed through three meters. They are a I
centre zero PMMC meter, a true rms
meter and a moving iron instrument. The
respective readings (in A) will be (A) (C)
√ √
(A) 8,6,10 (C) 8,10,10 (B) (D)
(B) 8,6,8 (D) 8,2,2
EE-2014
EE-2010 5. The dc current flowing in a circuit is
2. An ammeter has a current range of 0-5A, measured by two ammeters, one PMMC
and its internal resistance is 0.2 . In and another Electrodynamometer type,
order to change the range to 0-25A, we connected in series. The PMMC meter
need to add a resistance of contains 100 turns in the coil, the flux
(A) 0.8 in series with the meter. density in the air gap is 0.2 Wb/m , and
(B) 1.0 in series with the meter. the area of the coil is 80 mm . The
(C) 0.04 in parallel with the meter. electrodynamometer ammeter has a
(D) 0.05 in parallel with the meter. change in mutual inductance with respect
to deflection of 0.5 mH/deg. The spring
EE-2012 constants of both the meters are equal.
3. A periodic voltage waveform observed on The value of current, at which the
an oscilloscope across a load is shown. A deflections of the two meters are same,
permanent magnet moving coil (PMMC) is__________
meter connected across the same load
reads. 6. Suppose that resistors n are
v(t) connected in parallel to give an equivalent
10V resistor R. If resistors n have
5V tolerance of 1% each, the equivalent
resistor R for resistors = 300 and
0 10 12 20 = 200 will have tolerance of
time (ms) (A) 0.5% (B) 1% (C) 1.2% (D) 2%
5V
(A) 4 V (C) 8 V
(B) 5 V (D) 10 V 7. Two ammeters X and Y have resistances
of 1.2 and 1.5 respectively and they
EE-2013 give full-scale deflection with 150 mA and
4. Three moving iron type voltmeter are 250 mA respectively. The ranges have
connected as shown. Voltmeter reading been extended by connecting shunts so as
are n , as indicated. The correct to give full scale deflection with 15 A. The
relation among the voltmeter reading is ammeters along with shunts are
connected in parallel and then placed in a
circuit in which the total current flowing
is 15A. The current in amperes indicated
in ammeter X is ______________
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1.6V
8. An LPF wattmeter of power factor 0.2 is
having three voltage settings 300 V, 150 V
and 75 V, and two current settings 5 A
and 10 A. The full scale reading is 150. If 100Ω
the wattmeter is used with 150 V voltage 1000Ω 500Ω
setting and 10 A current setting, the

multiplying factor of the wattmeter Rs=100Ω
is____________ Ig
Eu
9. A periodic waveform observed across a (A) 0.9910 V (C) 1.0012 V

load is represented by (B) 0.9991 V (D) 1.0048 V
1 in
() {
1 in 1 3. The voltmeter shown in the following
The measured value, using moving iron figure has a sensitivity of 500 /V and a
voltmeter connected across the load, is full scale of 100V. When connected in the
(A) √ (C) circuit as shown, then meter reads 20 V.
The value of Rx is
(B) √ (D)
+
Rs 1 k
IN-2006
100 V
1. A 4 k, 0.02 W potentiometer is used in
the circuit shown below. The minimum Rx V
value of the resistance Rs in order to
protect the potentiometer is
(A) 75 k (C) 25 k
(B) 50 k (D) 10 k
4. An ac voltmeter uses the circuit shown

+ below, where the PMMC meter has an
15V
Rp internal resistance of 100  and requires
Vo
a dc current of 1 mA for full scale
deflection.
(A) 2.23k (C) 3.82k
(B) 2.71k (D) 8.92k +
~ PMMC
2. An unknown voltage source Eu AC input meter
nput +
(with negligible internal resistance) is
~
connected to a potentiometer circuit as
shown in the following figure. If the
galvanometer current is 10𝜇A with the Assuming the diodes to be ideal, the value
direction as indicated, then value of Eu is of Rs to obtain full scale deflection with
100V (ac rms) applied to the input
terminal would be Rs
(A) 80 k (C) 89.9 k
(B) 89 k (D) 90 k
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. A voltmeter has a range of [4 V, 20 V] and 9. The op-amp based circuit of a half wave
a resolution of 1 mV. The dynamic range is rectifier electronic voltmeter shown
(A) 24 dB (C) 72 dB below uses a PMMC ammeter with a full
(B) 60 dB (D) 84 dB scale deflection (FSD) current of 1 mA
n oil re i n e of 1k . The v lue of
IN-2007 R that gives FSD for a sinusoidal input
6. The figure shows a potentiometer of total voltage of 100 mV (RMS) is
resistance with a sliding contact.
Sinusoidal
input 1k
PMMC
Ammeter
P
+
RL
R
Q
The resistance between the points P and (A) (C) 1
Q of the potentiometer at the position of (B) 7. (D) 1 .
the contact shown is and the voltage
ratio at this point is 0.5. If the ratio Statement for Linked Answer Question for
10 and 11
=1, the ratio is
In the wheatstone bridge shown below
(A)
√ (C) 1+√ the galvanometer G has a current
sensitivity of 1 mm a resistance of
(B)
√ (D) 1+√
2.5 k and a scale resolution of 1 mm. let
be the minimum increase in R from its
IN-2008 nominal value of 2 that can be
7. If a current of [ √ in(1 ) detected by this bridge.
√ o ( ⁄ ) √ ]A is
k k
passed through a true RMS ammeter, the
meter reading will be 1
(A) 6√ (C) 12A k
(B) √1 (D) √ 1
10. When R is 2 k is
8. A 2A full-scale PMMC type dc ammeter
(A) 6 V (C) 6.0038 V
has a voltage drop of 100 mV at 2A. The (B) 6.0024 V (D) 6.005 V
meter can be converted into a 10A full-
scale dc ammeter by connecting a 11. The value of is approximately
(A) 1 . m re i or in p r llel wi h he (A) . (C) .
meter (B) . (D) 1
(B) 1 . m re i or in erie wi h he
meter
(C) . m re i or in p r llel wi h he
meter
(D) . m re i or in erie wi h he
meter
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN-2009 15. The above PMMC meter is connected in

12. A galvanometer with internal resistance the circuit shown in the adjoining figure.
1 n full-scale current 1mA is used The op amp is ideal. The voltage
to realize a dc voltmeter with a full scale vi(t) = 1.0sin314t V . Assuming the source
range of 1V. The full scale range of this impedance of vi (t) to be zero, the
voltmeter can be extended to 10V by ammeter will indicate a current of
connecting an external resistance of value
(A) 9 k (C) 1 k
(B) 9.9 k (D) 11 k
10k
13. The dc potentiometer shown in the figure
has a working current of 10mA with
switch S open. Let Rg+R1=100 . The v() ~
galvanometer G can only detect currents
gre er h n 1 . The m ximum
percentage error in the measurement of (A) 100 A (C) 63.7 A
the unknown emf Ex as calculated from (B) 70.7 A (D) 31.8 A
the slider position shown is closest to
3V 16. The deflection angle of the pointer of an
ideal moving iron ammeter is for
1.0 ampere dc current. If a current of
3sin(314t) amperes is passed through the
2m 3m ammeter then the deflection angle is
S
(A) (C)
(B) (D) 9
G
R1
17. The PMMC ammeter A in the adjoining
(A) 0.3 (C) 0.6 figure has a range of 0 to 3mA. When
(B) 0.5 (D) 1.0 switch is opened, the pointer of the
ammeter swings to the 1mA mark,
IN-2010 returns and settles at 0.9mA. The meter is
Common Data for Questions 14 & 15
A PMMC type ammeter has full scale
current of 100 A and a coil resistance of A
100
1. k
14. The resistance required to convert the 1.8 V
100 A ammeter into a 1A full scale dc

ammeter is
(A) critically damped and has a coil
(A) 10m in series with the meter
resistance of 100
(B) 10m in parallel with the meter
(B) critically damped and has a coil
(C) 1m in series with the meter
resistance of 200
(D) 1m in parallel with the meter
(C) under damped and has a coil
resistance of 100
(D) under damped and has a coil
resistance of 200
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN-2011 EE/IN-2012
18. In the Wheatstone bridge shown below, 20. An analog voltmeter uses external
when the resistance in re e by 1 multiplier settings. With a multiplier
the current through the galvanometer is setting of 20 k it reads 440 V and with a
multiplier setting of 80 k, it reads 352 V.
1k 1k For a multiplier setting of 40 k the
voltmeter reads
10V G
(A) 371V (C) 394V
S1 1k (B) 383V (D) 406V
1k 1k
IN-2013
(Consider the Thevenin equivalent
21. The circuit below incorporates a
resistance of the bridge in the
permanent magnet coil milli-ammeter of
calculations)
range 1 mA having a series resistance of
(A) 1.25 µA (C) 12.5 µA
10 k . Assuming constant diode forward
(B) 2.5 µA (D) 25 µA
re i n e of forw r io e rop
of 0.7 V and infinite reverse diode drop of
IN-2012
1.7 V and infinite reverse diode resistance
19. A periodic voltage waveform observed on
for each diode, the reading of the meter in
an oscilloscope across a load is shown. A
mA is
permanent magnet moving coil (PMMC)
meter connected across the same load mA
reads +
v(t) 1 k
10V
5V 1 k
z
0 10 12 20 time (ms)
5
(A)v 4V (C) 8V (A) 0.45 (C) 0.7
(B) 0.5 (D) 0.9
(B) 5V (D) 10V
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD

EE 5. [Ans. *] Range 3.0 to 3.4
1. [Ans. C] Electro dynamometer
PMMC reads average value i,e d.c., so its
T i
reading is – 8 value.
RMS meter will read rms value of current k i i ( . ) 1
√
RMS = √ ( ) = 10 A or
√
M.I. also reads RMS value, so its reading T w number of on u or
is also 10 A i
T (i ) w
2. [Ans. D] i
k i
By KCL, i i ( . ) 1
o
And By KVL, Voltage drop across k k
k n should be same i 1 . 1
∴ k
(5)(0.2)=20( ) i . 1
1 = 20 k
i .
.  in parallel
.  6. [Ans. B]
5A 1 1 1
25A
1 1 1
.
. 1
3. [Ans. A] 1 1 1
( . 1) ( )
Area enclosed
(1 )(1 ) ( )( ) ( )( ) = 80 . 1
Time period = 20
Average reading = 7. [Ans. *] Range 9.9 to 10.3
Ammeter X
4. [Ans. D] 1 1 1. (1 .1 )
. 1
Because voltage drop across inductor 1 1 m
Because voltage drop across capacitor
j – 1
Net voltage j j 1.
j
Voltmeter reads magnitude of the voltage
only Ammeter Y
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(1 . ) 1. . IN
. 1. [Ans. B]
1 0.2 = 1
250 mA
I=
√
1. and I =
√
.71 k
.71 k
1 (x)
2. [Ans. D]
1. h1 1.
h
1.6 V
I
250 150 oop 1
1
mA mA
(1 )
(x) 1
1.
. oop
1. 1
. 1 Ig
1 .
(x) 1 .1 1 1
. 7
Applying KVL in Loop 1, we get
8. [Ans. 2] 1.6 – 100I 500I – 1000 (I + Ig)=0
In LPF wattmeter, T on the moving 1.6 – 1000Ig=1600I
system is small owing to low power factor 1.6 – 1 1 1
even when the current and potential coils 1. . 1
9.9 7 1
are fully excited. Also the errors 1
introduced due to inductance of pressure Now in loop 2,
coil tend to be large at low power factors. 1 1 ( )
So for calculating multiplying factor for a 1 1 1 1 1
low p.f. wattmeter, p.f. mentioned on the 9.9 7 1
wattmeter should be taken into account. 11 1 .99 7
Therefore, Multiplying Factor . 11 .99 7
= (Current range used*Voltage range 1. 7
used*p.f)/Power at FSD 1.
Given, Power at Full scale reading = 150
Current Range used = 10 A 3. [Ans. B]
Voltage Range used = 150 V Total resistance of voltmeter is
Power Factor = 0.2 =( )(1 ) k
1 1 . So equivalent circuit is
Therefore m
1 + I
+
9. [Ans. A] 80 V 100
100 k
M.I instrument reads RMS value +
V 20 V k
1 1
√1 ( ) √1 √
20 V
√
th
.. th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
I= = 0.8 mA ( )( )
1
And = 0.4 mA
bu (Given)
∴ ( ) = (0.8 – 0.4) = 0.4 mA ∴( )( )
∴ k ∴
.
Divide above equation on both sides with
4. [Ans. C]
. .9 .
1 1 ( ) ( ) 1
.
.
∴ . .9 1 .9 1 √1 1 √
∴
( . )( )
( .9 )(1 ) 1 Here resistances cannot has negative
[ , since diodes are ideal] value.
9.9 1 √
Therefore
5. [Ans. D]
r nge
e olu ilon 7. [Ans. C]
(level )
( ) √ ( ) ( )
1 √ √
1m
n 1 .9 1 bits (as number of bit can √( √ ) (
√
) (
√
)
√ √
never be fraction) dynamic range = 6
= 12 A
n = 84 dB
8. [Ans. A]
6. [Ans. A]
Meter
10A
( ) 2A
P
Given drop across meter = 100 mV.

= (10 – 2) = 8A
Given data 1 . ∴ By KVL
From circuit (8)( ) = 100 mV
∴ 1 . m in p r llel wi h mme er
v v
( ) 9. [Ans. A]
1 √
v 1 m
v ( )( )
1
1 1 (By the concept of virtual ground)
( )( ) ∴ m
1 Also, it can be observed that
( )( ) ∴ VC = 45 mV
1
poin ‘ ’
VC = 1 R
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1 1 1 12. [Ans. A]
1 1 
∴ 
1 1 1m
So in order to measure 1 V (maximum)
10. [Ans. B] we have to connect a series resistance R1
such that
k k 1
1 9 
Now to increase voltage range to 10V, we
( ) have to add another external resistance
k
R2 such that
1 1 ( ) 1
1 9 1
Bridge can detect a change in R if
9  9k
galvanometer deflections.
If change in R is minimum, then
13. [Ans. B]
minimum deflection in galvanometer
With switch open redrawing the circuit
should be 1 mm for detection as 1 mm is
i ’ re olu ion. o for this 1𝜇 current 10 mA
must flow through it.
i. e. 1 1 .
Now in outer loop,
1 1 1 ( )
+ +
1 1 1
1 1 1 1 5m
1 . 1
ol ge rop ro i
1 .99 1
250 ×10mA = 2.5V
So, 1 ( )
So the voltage drop across 5m long
1 (1 1. 99 1 )
resistance is (3 – 2.5) = 0.5V
= 0.004 + 5.9984 = 6.0024 V
∴ Resistance of 5 m long wire is
.
=
11. [Ans. B]
Writing KVL in inner loop we get, ∴ m orre pon o n he
1 . 1 voltage drop across it is 20 × 10 m = 0.2V
1 . .997 Redrawing the circuit with switch (s)
.99 m closed
Writing KVL in another inner loop we get 3V
10 mA
( ) ( ) . .
. 9
( )
( .99 . ) 1
2m 3m
.
0.2V 0.3V 2.5V +
.
+
A
( )
G
B 1
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
∴ should be 0.2V for the galvanometer 17. [Ans. D]

to show null deflection. Calculating the resistance of the meter
u given ‘ ’ n e e urren gre er 0.9 mA
than 10µA. so the potential difference
across it should be +
1.8K 1.62V
(1 1 ) = 1mV 1.8V
∴ Error is 1mV & true - value is 0.2V
∴ % error = 1 = 0.5 By KVL
.
1.8 – 1.62 = V
14. [Ans. B] V = 0.18V
.
∴
.
The meter swings between 1mA and

( )
0.9 mA, so it is inherently under damped
1 1 system.
I = 1A
By KVL, 18. [Ans. A]
( )
(1 ) (100) = (1 100µ) 1k 1k
10V
1 ( .9999)
1 m in p r llel wi h me er. A B
1k 1. 1k
15. [Ans. C]
Here, the waveform seen by the ammeter is Thevenin equivalent circuit across AB.
( . )
vg . 9 m
(1 1 ) (1 1. 1 )
V(t) = 1 sin 314 t 1.
. 9 m
= 0.1m
r (1. 1)1
i(t) = (0.1m) sin (314 t)
1.
∴
Here, = 0.1m I
( . ) A
∴ 63.7µA
r
16. [Ans. D]
G
Assuming spring control
∝ for d.c
∝ for a.c
∴ 19. [Ans. A]
.
As PMMC meter reads only DC value or
= 2.1213 A average value and average value is equal
√ √
( . ) to
∴
re un er he urve
⟹ 9
To l ime
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1
( 1 1 ) ( ) ( )
ol
21. [Ans. A]
Current in the inverting arm
20. [Ans. D]
or ul iplier e ing k √
.7 7 m
Meter resistance = x 1
PMMC measures the average value
Total resistance = k x
.7 7
Voltmeter reading ( )
∝ x
. m
k
V x
1
∝
or ul iplier e ing
Meter resistance = x
Total resistance ( ) k x
Voltmeter reading ( )= 352 V
k
V x
∝ x
1
∝
x
x
( x) ( x)( )
x x
x 1
x k
or mul iplier e ing k
Total Resistance
( ) k
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Measurements of Basic Electrical Quantities 2

(Power and Energy, Instrument Transformers)
EE-2006 EE-2010
1. A sampling wattmeter (that computes 4. A wattmeter is connected as shown in the
power from simultaneously sampled figure. The wattmeter reads
values of voltage and current) is used to Current coil
measure the average power of a load. The Potential coil
peak to peak voltage of the square wave is ~ Wattmeter
10 V and the current is a triangular wave
of 5A p-p as shown in the figure. The
period is 20 ms. The reading in W will be
(A) Zero always
0 (B) Total power consumed by and
(C) Power consumed by
(D) Power consumed by
0
EE-2011
5. Consider the following statements:
(A) 0 W (C) 50 W (i) The compensating coil of a low
(B) 25 W (D) 100 W power factor wattmeter
compensates the effect of the
EE-2009
impedance of the current coil.
2. The figure shows a three-phase delta
(ii) The compensating coil of a low
connected load supplied from a
power factor wattmeter
400V, 50 Hz, 3-phase balanced source.
compensates the effect of the
The pressure coil (PC) and current coil
impedance of the voltage coil circuit.
(CC) of a wattmeter are connected to
(A) (i) is true but (ii) is false
the load as shown, with the coil
(B) (i) is false but (ii) is true
polarities suitably selected to ensure a
(C) both (i) and (ii) are true
positive deflection. The wattmeter
(D) both (i) and (ii) are false
reading will be
a
3-phase Z1 = (100 + j0) Ω Z2 = (100 + j0) Ω EE-2013
Z2
Balanced 6. The input impedance of the permanent
supply Z1
CC moving coil (PMMC) voltmeter is infinite.
400 Volts C
50 Hz. b Z1 PC Assuming that the diode shown in the
Z2 figure below is ideal, the reading of the
(A) 0 (C) 800 Watt voltmeter in volts is
(B) 1600 Watt (D) 400 Watt 1k
14.14 sin (314 t)V

3. The pressure coil of a dynamometer type ~ 100 k Voltmeter
wattmeter is
(A) highly inductive
(B) highly resistive
(A) 4.46 (C) 2.23
(C) purely resistive
(B) 3.15 (D) 0
(D) purely inductive
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. A strain gauge forms one arm of the IN-2006

bridge shown in the figure below and has 1. The two-wattmeter method is used to
a nominal resistance without any load as measure power in a 3-phase, 3-wire
= 300 Ω . Other bridge resistances are balanced inductive circuit. The line
= = = 300 Ω . The maximum voltage and line current are
permissible current through the strain 400 V and 10 A respectively. If the load pf
gauge is 20 mA. During certain is 0.866 lagging, then readings of the two
measurement when the bridge is excited wattmeters are
by maximum permissible voltage and the (A) 6000 W and 0 W
strain gauge resistance is increased by (B) 5000 W and 1000 W
1% over the nominal value, the output (C) 4500 W and 1500 W
voltage in mV is (D) 4000 W and 2000 W
+ IN-2007
+
2. A dynamometer type wattmeter with a
single scale marked for the smallest
power range, has two current ranges,
(A) 56.02 (C) 29.85 namely, 0-5 A and 0-10 A as well as two
(B) 40.83 (D) 10.02 voltage ranges, namely, 0-150 V and
0-300 V. To carry out a load test on a
EE-2014 230V/115V, 1kVA, single phase
8. Power consumed by a balanced 3-phase, transformer, the wattmeter is used on the
3-wire load is measured by the two high voltage side. The voltage and current
wattmeter method. The first wattmeter ranges are chosen for maximum
reads twice that of the second. Then the utilization of the scale. The multiplying
load impedance angle in radians is factor to be used in this case is.
(A) 12 (C) 6 (A) 0.5 (C) 2.0
(B) 8 (D) 3 (B) 1.0 (D) 4.0
9. While measuring power of a three-phase IN-2008

balanced load by the two-wattmeter 3. A 230 V, 5A, 50 Hz single phase house
method, the readings are 100 W and service energy meter has a meter
250 W. The power factor of the load constant of 360 rev/KWhr. The meter
is__________ takes 50s for making 51 revolutions of the
disc when connected to a 10 kW, unity
10. In the bridge circuit shown, the capacitors power factor load. The error in the
are loss free. At balance, the value of reading of the meter is
capacitance in microfarad is_________ (A) 0% (C) 2.0%
(B) +0.5% (D) +2.0%
35 Ω
IN-2011
( ) 4. Power in a there phase star connected
balanced inductive load is measured by
105 Ω 01
two wattmeter method. The phase
voltage and phase current are 230 V and
5 A, respectively. The power factor of the
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
load is 0.707. The reading and of the

two wattmeters are
(A) = 298 W and = 1111 W
(B) = 516 W and = 1924 W
(C) = 1220 W and = 1220 W
(D) = 1111 W and = 516 W
EE/IN-2012
voltage and current expressions are
v(t) = ( )+ (3 ) a d ( )
= sin ( )+ (3 - +) +
(5 )
i(t)
+
Load
V(t) wattmeter
(A) cos
(B) [ + + ]
(C) [ + ]
(D) [ + ]
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE field corresponding to this current. This

1. [Ans. A] field acts in opposition to the current coil
If we consider both the waves, we can see field. Thus the resultant field is due to
positive power and negative power in current l only. Hence the error caused by
each case is equal the pressure coil current flowing in the
Net power = 0 W i.e. OW current coil is neutralized
2. [Ans. *] Not Matching with IIT Keys 6. [Ans. A]

Wattmeter reading = current through C.C
voltage across PC cos (phase angle
b/w V and I)
= = 10 ms 20 ms
= 4 120
= = 400 120
= 4 +120 400 120 240 14
= 800 w
14 14 100
= = 14
3. [Ans. B] 101
It is difficult to have purely resistive 14
= = 4 46
pressure coil. The pressure coil has a
small value of inductance, due to which ( PMMC reads average voltage)
error occurs in wattmeter readings.
7. [Ans. C]
4. [Ans. D] During the normal condition
Considering the wattmeter to be an ideal
300
wattmeter and as PC is connected 300
+
across . So option D.
300 300
5. [Ans. B]
I+
Current coil Compensating coil = 600 20
= 12
= = 6 02985
Supply
Load
= 6 = 0 02985
= 29 85
The current coil carries a current of l +
and produces a filed corresponding to this
8. [Ans. C]
current. The compensating coil is
= √3 (30 )
connected in series with the pressure coil
= √3 (30 + )
circuit and is made as nearly as possible
( )
identical and coincident with the current a = √3
( )
coil. It is so connected that it opposes the =2
field of the current coil. The compensating 1
coil carries a current and produces a a = =
√3 6
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
9. [Ans. *] Range 0.78 to 0.82 3. [Ans. D]

( ) 150 10 kW = ⁄
a = √3 = √3
( + ) 350
Total revolution = 360 = 50 rev
√3 3
a = % error = 100
7
= = 0 803 = 2%
10. [Ans. 0.3] 4. [Ans. A]

At balance For a balanced lagging load, connected in
= a star network.
1 1 The two wattmeter readings are:
= =
j j0 1 = (30 )
= 35 = 105 = (30 + )
1 1 Given the load is balanced, hence line
105 = 35
j j0 1 voltage is equal to phase voltage.
105 0 1 Similarly for line and phase currents.
= = 03
35 Given, = 0 707 = 45
= 230 5 (30 45)
IN
= 1111
1. [Ans. D]
= (30 + )
Total power = √3 = 230 5 (75 )
= √3 400 10 0.866 = 298
= 6kW = +
and 5. [Ans. C]
a *√3 ( )+= 0 866 = 30 ()= + 3
()= ( )+ (3 )
=
Average power
= = 2 kW
1
= 4 kW and = 2kW = ∫ d( )
2
2. [Ans. C] The product of different frequency terms

The wattmeter is connected towards H.V. have zero average value.
1 1
side = +
2 2
The rated current I = = 4 34 1
= [ ( )+ ( )]
The suitable range is 0.5A and 300V 2
wattmeter = + +
The load is connected across L.V. side = 0 a 5 harmonic does not
Therefore the rated current contribute power as it is not present in
1 V(t)
= = 8 69
115 1
= [ + ]
The multiplying factor = ( ) =2 2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Electronic Measuring Instruments 1

(Analog, Digital Meters & Bridges, ADC type DVM)
EE-2006 4. Two 8-bit ADCs, one of single slope

1. R1 and R4 are the opposite arms of a integrating type and other of successive
Wheatstone bridge as are R3 and R2. The approximation type, take TA and TB times
source voltage is applied across R1 and R3. to convert 5 V analog input signal to
Under balanced conditions which one of equivalent digital output. If the input
the following is true? analog signal is reduced to 2.5V, the
(A) approximate time taken by the ADCs will
(B) respectively, be
(C) (A) (C) ,
(D) (B) ,
(D) ,
EE-2007
2. A bridge circuit is shown in the figure EE-2009
below. Which one of the sequences given 5. An average-reading digital multimeter
below is most suitable for balancing the reads 10V when fed with a triangular
bridge? wave, symmetric about the time-axis. For
the same input an rms-reading meter will
j
read.
(A) (C) √
√
(D) 10√
(B)
√
j
EE-2010
~ 6. he Maxwell’s bridge shown in the figure
(A) First adjust R4 and then adjust R1 is at balance. The parameters of the
(B) First adjust R2 and then adjust R3 inductive coil are
(C) First adjust R2 and then adjust R4 jω
(D) First adjust R4 and then adjust R2
EE-2008
j ω
3. The ac Bridge shown in the figure is used
to measure the impedance Z. If the bridge
is balanced for oscillator frequency
~
(A)
f = 2 kHz, then the impedance Z will be
(B)
B
. 98μF (C)
Oscillator 5 ~ (D)
A D C
15.91 mH
Z j
D
(A) (260+j0) (C) j
(B) j (D) j
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE-2011 IN-2006
7. A 4 digit DMM has the error 1. Consider the AC bridge shown below. If
| |
specification as: 0.2% of reading +10 ω and ⁄ . then ration | |
counts. If a dc voltage of 100 V is read on is approximately equal to
its 200 V full scale, the maximum error
that can be expected in the reading is
(A) ± 0.1% (C) ± 0.3%
(B) ± 0.2% (D) ± 0.4%
8. The bridge circuit shown in the figure

below is used for the measurement of an ~
unknown element . The bridge circuit is
(A) √ (C)
best suited when is a
(D)
(B)
~ IN-2007
2. Consider the AC bridge shown in the
figure below, with A, L and C having
(A) low resistance (C) low Q inductor positive finite values.
(B) high resistance (D) lossy capacitor
EE-2014 ~
sinωt
9. The reading of the voltmeter (rms) in
volts, for the circuit shown in the figure is
____________ (A) if ω ω
.5 (B) if
(C) if
√
j 1/j (D) cannot be made zero
sin ωt
IN-2008
j j
3. If the ac bridge circuit shown below is
balanced the elements Z can be a
10. The saw-tooth voltage waveform shown

R
in the figure is fed to a moving iron
Detector
voltmeter. Its reading would be close to
______________ ~ D
(A) Pure capacitor

ms ms
t (B) Pure inductor
(C) R-L series combination
(D) R-L parallel combination
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. A digit, 200 mV full scale DVM has an IN-2014

6. The resistance and inductance of an
accuracy specification of .5 of
inductive coil are measured using an AC
reading plus 5 counts. When the meter
bridge as shown in the figure. The bridge
reads 100 mV, the voltage being
is to be balanced by varying the
measured as
impedance z
(A) Any value between 99.5 mV and
coil
100.5 mV
(B) Any value between 99.0 mV and
101.0 mV
(C) exactly 99.5 mV
(D) exactly 100 mV
EE/IN-2012
5. The bridge method commonly used for For obtaining balance z should consist of
finding mutual inductance is element(s):
(A) Heaviside Campbell bridge (A) R and C (C) L and C
(B) Schering bridge (B) R and L (D) Only C
(C) De Sauty bridge
(D) Wien bridge
EE 2. [Ans. C]
1. [Ans. B]
x ω and x
ω
R1 R3 z jx jω
i1 i3
z
D
i2 i4 z
j
R2 R4 z jx
ω
Under balanced condition
z z z z
Battery jω jx
Adjustments are made in various arms of ( ) j [ω ]
the bridge so that the voltage across the ω
detector is zero and hence no current Equating real and imaginary terms, we
flows through it, when no current flows obtain
through detector the bridge is said to be
balanced.
At balance condition ω
ω
Solving above equations, we get
and
ω
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ω 4. [Ans. B]
ω Single slope integrating type ADC utilizes
Q factor of the coil Q = digital counter techniques to measure
time required for a voltage ramp to rise
Therefore . from zero to the input voltage.
( )
If conversion time for input voltage
and 5V = TA
( )
So, conversion time for input voltage
For a value of a greater than 10, the term 2.5 V = TA /2
(1/Q)2 will be smaller than 1/1000 and Conversion time in successive type ADC
can be neglected does not depend on input voltage. So,
Therefore eq. (1) and (2) reduces to conversion time for input voltage 2.5 V is
also TB.
ω .
R4 appears only in eq. (4) and R2 appears 5. [Ans. A]
in both eq. (3) &(4) For triangular wave
So first R2 is adjusted and then R4 is Avg value =
adjusted.
RMS value =
√
3. [Ans. A] ∴
B C= . 98 μF
RMS value =
5 √ √
RBC=300
Oscillator
6. [Ans. A]
~ A D
L=15.1 mH
C
R+jω
RAD Z
300
D
j ω
5
~
jω jω
.
j
jω ‖( )
j 5.9 ‖( )
At balance
j
At balance
jω ( )
jω jω
jω jω
Equating real and imaginary terms,
ω ω
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. C] 9. [Ans. *] Range 140 to 142

digit
i [ √ ]
9 9
.5 ( )
['i' is current through each branch which
are same ]
No. of full digits in case of
i √
digit display
j j j
So, maximum count with √ √ √
digits display 9999 .

√
Full scale reading = 200 V
10. [Ans. *] Range 56 to59
1 count =
E1 = Error corresponding to 10 counts
.
9999
eading
E2 = Error corresponding to 0.2 % of
reading ms ms t
E2 = . . Moving iron meter reads RMS value only

Total error = . . RMS value of Saw tooth waveform is
√
= 0.3 V Meter reads
√
%error in reading of 100V
= 57.73 V
.
.
IN
1. [Ans. D]
8. [Ans. C] a
The bridge is Maxwell inductance
R C C
capacitance bridge.
Element is an inductor Inductance = Lx
effective resistance of the inductor = Rx
ω
ω i R C
The bridge is limited to measurement of b

low Q inductor (1<Q<10).
It is clear from eq. (i) that the
measurement of high Q coils demands a
large value of resistance R1, perhaps 105
or 106 . The resistance boxes of such ω
high values are very expensive. Thus for ω
values of Q > 10, the bridge is unsuitable. ω
This a Maxwell inductance capacitance ω
bridge, so we can ω
ω
Say directly that it is used for low Q - value
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
ω ω 3. [Ans. A]
ω ω At balance,
ω ω ω ( )
[ ] ( )( )
ω ω ω
ω
j
ω () j
ω
ω
et j
ω
ω Comparing the real and imaginary parts
we get
ω
X=0
ω ( ) j
and ( ) j
ω
ω ω
∴ is purely capacitive.
.
∴ It can be neglected in comparison to 2 4. [Ans. B]
Error on reading 100 mV
.
m .5 m
Also, error due to 5 counts
2. [Ans. D] 5m .5 m
For bridge must be balanced 999
Hence, total error = 0.5 + 0.5 = 1.0 mV
( ) jω ∴ Meter will read between (100 – 1) mV
jω
j and (100+1) mV.
( ) jω ie. Between (99.0 mV and 101 mV)
ω
j ω j
ω 5. [Ans. A]
Comparing the imaginary parts as real Heaviside campbell bridge method is
parts are already equal commonly used for finding mutual
inductance.
ω
ω
√ 6. [Ans. B]
ω
√ At balanced condition,
∴ frequency is coming to be imaginary
which is impossible, hence, cannot be jω
made zero.
jω
∴ Should be combination of R and L

his bridge is known as Maxwell’s
inductance bridge so we can directly say the
should be the combination of ‘R’ and ‘L’
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Electronic Measuring Instruments 2

(C.R.O, RF Meters, Special Meters, Q meter)
EE-2006 EE-2008
1. The time/div and voltage/div axes of an 3. Two sinusoidal signals ( t) = A sin t
oscilloscope have been erased. A student and q( t) are applied to X and Y inputs
connects a 1 kHz, 5V p-p square wave of a dual channel CRO. The Lissajous
calibration pulse to channel 1 of the scope figure displayed on the screen is shown
and observes the screen to be as shown in below:
the upper trace of the figure. An The signal q( t)will be represented as
unknown signal is connected to channel 2 Y
(lower trace) of the scope. If the time/div
and V/div on both channels are the same,
the amplitude (p-p) and period of the
unknown signal are respectively
X
(A) q( t) = A sin 2t, =2

2 1
(B) q( 2t)= A sin 2t, 2 =
(C) q( 2t)= A cos 2t, 2= 2 1
(A) 5 V, 1 ms (C) 7.5 V, 2 ms (D) q( 2t)= A cos 2t, 2=
(B) 5 V, 2 ms (D) 10 V, 1 ms
EE-2009
EE-2007 4. The two inputs of a CRO are fed with two
2. The probes of a nonisolated, two channel stationary periodic signals. In the X-Y
oscilloscope are clipped to points A, B and mode, the screen shows a figure which
C in the circuit of the adjacent figure. changes from ellipse to circle and back to
is a square wave of a suitable low ellipse with its major axis changing
frequency. The display on h and h are orientation slowly and repeatedly. The
as shown on the right. Then the “Signal” following inference can be made from
and “Ground” probes S G and S G this.
of h and h respectively are connected (A) The signals are not sinusoidal
to points: (B) The amplitudes of the signals are
very close but not equal
A B h
(C) The signals are sinusoidal with their
R
L G frequencies very close but not equal
(D) There is a constant but small phase
C h
difference between the signals
(A) A, B, C, A (C) C, B, A, B
(B) A, B, C, B (D) B, A, B, C
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE-2011 (C)
5. A dual trace oscilloscope is set to operate
in the alternate mode. The control input
of the multiplexer used in the y-circuit is
fed with a signal having a frequency equal
to
(A) the highest frequency that the
multiplexer can operate properly
(B) twice the frequency of the time base
(sweep) oscillator
(C) the frequency of the time base
(sweep) oscillator
(D) half the frequency of the time base
(sweep) oscillator
EE-2014
6. In an oscilloscope screen, linear sweep is
applied at the IN-2007
(A) vertical axis 1. The linear sweep for the time base in an
(B) horizontal axis oscilloscope has deviation from its
(C) origin nominal waveform. The nominal
(D) both horizontal and vertical axis (dashed line) and actual (solid line)
sweep waveforms are shown in the
7. The two signals S and S , shown in following figure.
Normal Retrace
figure, are applied to Y and X deflection
plates of an oscilloscope. Sweep
S start
time Actual
T T
t 1.1T
1.3T
time 1.15T
T
S
A 5V p-p sine wave with a frequency of
1 kHz will be measured on the
T T oscilloscope as a sine wave with
t
(A) 4.45 V p-p and 1 kHz frequency
(B) 5 V p-p and 1kHz frequency
The waveform displayed on the screen is
(C) 5 V p-p and 1.1 kHz frequency
(D) 5 V p-p and 1.15 kHz frequency
2. Two signals of peak- to-peak voltages

5 V and 2V are being fed to Channel 1 and
Channel 2, respectively, of an oscilloscope
with a single time base. The vertical
sensitivity of both channels is
1 V/division. The two sine waves have
identical frequency and phase. The trigger
is on manual mode the triggers at a level
of +1.25 V on Channel 1, as shown in the
figure below:
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
IN-2008
3. The x and y sensitivities of an analog
oscilloscope are set as 2 ms/cm and
1V/cm respectively. The trigger is set at
0V with negative slope. An input of
cos 00π t 300) V is fed to the y input of
the oscilloscope. The waveform seen on
Which of the following figures correctly
the oscilloscope will be
depicts the trace seen in channel 2?
(A)
(B)
(P)
(C)
(D)
(Q)
IN-2009
4. The figure shows a periodic waveform to
be displayed on a CRO. A trigger setting
which ensures a stationary display is
2.5
2
(R) 1.5
1
0.5
0
-0.5
-1
-1.5
-2
-2.5
(A) level: 0.2V, slope: ve

(B) level: 0.5V, slope: ve
(C) level: 0.2V, slope: +ve
(S) (D) level: 1.8V, slope: ve
(A) P (C) R
(B) Q (D) S
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
5. The input impedance of CRO is equivalent IN-2011

to a 1M resistance in parallel with a 7. A transfer characteristics of the circuit
45pF capacitance. It is used with a drawn below is observed on an
compensated 10-1 attenuation probe. The oscilloscope used in XY mode. The display
effective input capacitance at the probe on the oscilloscope is shown in the right
tip is hand side. is connected to the X input
(A) 4.5pF (C) 45pF with a setting of 0.5 V/div, and is
(B) 5pF (D) 450pF connected to the Y input with a setting of
2 V/div. The beam is positioned at the
IN-2010 origin when is zero.
6. In an analog single channel cathode ray
oscilloscope (CRO), the x and y
sensitivities are set as 1ms/div. and
1V/div. respectively. The y-input is
connected to a voltage signal sin 0πt
4 cos (200πt 45º) V. The trigger source
is internal, level chosen is zero and the
slope is positive. The display seen on the
CRO screen is
(A)
Assuming that the op amp is ideal and

zener diodes have forward biased voltage
drop of 0.7 V, the value of reverse break –
(B)
down voltage of and are respectively
(A) 3.3 V and 5.3 V
(B) 4.7 V and 6.7 V
(C) 6.7 V and 4.7 V
(D) 5.3 V and 3.3 V
(C)
(D)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE
1. [Ans. C]
Peak-peak (p – p) division of upper trace
voltage = 2 value of (p – p) voltage = 5 V
. division 0 t
Now it will be same for unknown voltage
So, S is connected to point A and G is
(p – p) division of unknown voltage = 3
connected to point B.
p – p voltage = 3 2.5 = 7.5 V
Frequency of upper trace = 1 kHz Voltage across inductor =
Time period = = 1 ms d
[ ( e )]
dt
Division of x – axis (upper) = 4
Division of x – axis (lower) = 8 e
Period of unknown signal = 2 ms.
2. [Ans. B]
t
Square wave is of low frequency. So, it can
be assumed that time during which the
t
wave form are displayed on the screen,
the voltage across R and L is .
A B So, S is connected to point C.
and G is connected to point B.
L
i(t)
3. [Ans. D]
C Here p( t) = A sin t
s y line cuts 4 times the Lissagous patter
s
s x line cuts 2 times the Lissagous patter
s y
s (s )
x
( ) x
s s
s ( )
s s
I(t) ( e )
Voltage across resistance
i t e
and q( t) will lead P( t) by 90 as

trace is a circle
q ( t) = A sin ( t + 90 )
q ( t) = A cos t.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. C] S
Because of phase difference only figure
change from ellipse to circle and back to
ellipse
t
0
5. [Ans. D]
Alternate mode is used to display two
wave forms simultaneously by single CRT. xy node
As fluorescent material stores light for y
some time and eye sensing time is 20 ms.
By using multiplexer alternatively two
waves are connected to y plates. In this
mode the frequency of control signal to
x
multiplexer is equal to half off X – time
base generator. In one sweep displays 1st
waveform and in the half record sweep
displays 2nd waveform connected to
Y – plates. For low frequency signals
multiplexer is switches at high frequency Vector sum (in x y)
signals multiplexer is switches at high Points y y √x y Φ tan ( )
frequency that the multiplexer can A 0 1 1 0
operate. This is called chopping mode. B 1 1 2 45°
C 0 0 0 0
~ X0
Y
time D 2 225°
X1 base
S IN
1. [Ans. C]
S It is clear from the figure that there is no
change in amplitude,
6. [Ans. B] So it will show 5 V peak.
⇒ Also amplitude is function of Y – plates
7. [Ans. A] so no change.
S ⇒ But here slope during sweep will
change and that will responsible for
change frequency.
⇒ Slope is degraded by a factor 1.1, so
t frequency will be multiplied by 1.1
T
(as f ∝ 1/T).
So f = 1 . . kHz.
2. [Ans. B]
As the two channel signals have same
frequency, phase and the trigger level is
set to 1.25 V which is below the
peak – peak voltage of input signals
(5V and 2V). So an identical trace appears
on channel 2 also
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. A] 6. [Ans. A]
X- sensitivity = 2 msec/ cm = Sx Vy(t) = 4 cos 00πt
Y-sensitivity = 1 V/cm = Sy is set as is set as .
For input peak voltage, =4V
Internal triggering is chosen trigger
So length on Y-axis from peak to peak. voltage level is 0V & Slope is positive
l c screen dimensions are 10div 8div
S
Number of cycles of signal displayed
⇒T f T
0 sec 00 z 0div s div
T/2 = 0 sec cycle
Now half cycle on X- axis correspond to The test signal is used as triggering
length, signal since internal triggering is chosen.
T 0 sec As the trigger voltage level is 0V, the
l c
S sec c signal will be displayed from 0V onwards
This is shown in figure (A) only. and from rising side since trigger slope, is
[Hint:- Negative slope is given] positive.
Therefore option is ‘A’
4. [Ans. C]
Hint: The signal is given with rising edge 7. [Ans. D]
so the slope will be +ve and only option When is +ve
(C) satisfies this criteria.
[2 Division × 2V/division = 4 V]
5. [Ans. A] 0
C1 hen is ve is forward bias and

C
Probe is reverse bias
R
0.
3.3
So effective capacitance When is negative
.
[3 Division × 2 V/Division = +6V]
0
0.
p .3
But effective input capacitance at probe
tip
. p
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK Power Systems
Transmission and Distribution
EE-2006 2.5m and 3m respectively. The voltage

1. The concept of an electrically short, (volt/km) induced in the telephone
medium and long line is primarily based circuit, due to 50 Hz current of 100 amps
on the in the power circuit is
(A) nominal voltage of the line (A) 4.81 (B) 3.56 (C) 2.29 (D) 1.27
(B) physical length of the line
(C) wavelength of the line 5. A generator is connected through a
(D) power transmitted over the line 20 MVA 13.8/138 kV step down
transformer, to a transmission line. At the
2. An HVDC link consists of rectifier, receiving end of the line a load is supplied
inverter transmission line and other through a step down transformer of 10
equipments. MVA, 138/69 kV rating, A 0.72 p.u. load,
Which one of the following is true for this evaluated on load side transformer
link? ratings as base values, is supplied from
(A) The transmission line the above system. For system base values
produces/supplies reactive power of 10 MVA and 69 kV in load circuit, the
(B) The rectifier consumes reactive values of the load ( in per unit) in
power and the inverter supplies generator circuit will be
reactive power from/to the (A) 36 (B) 1.44 (C) 0.72 (D) 0.18
respective connected AC systems
(C) Rectifier supplies reactive power and EE-2007
the inverter consumes reactive 6. Consider the transformer connections in a
power to/from the respective part of a power system shown in the
connected AC systems figure. The nature of transformer
(D) Both the converters (rectifier and connections and phase shifts are
inverter) consume reactive power indicated for all but one transformer.
from the respective connected AC Which of the following connections, and
systems the corresponding phase shift θ, should
be used for the transformer between A
3. The A, B, C, D constants of a 220 kV line and B?
are: A = D= 0.94 , B = 130 .
C=0.001 If the sending end voltage of ~ Y
the line for a given load delivered at 15kV
A
nominal voltage is 240 kV, the % voltage
B
regulation of the line is θ
Y
(A) 5 (C) 16
(B) 9 (D) 21
400kV 220kV
Y
Autotransformer
4. A single phase transmission line and a
(A) Star – Star (θ = )
telephone line are both symmetrically
(B) Star – Delta (θ = )
strung one below the other, in horizontal
(C) Delta – Star (θ = )
configurations, on a common tower. The
(D) Star – Zigzag (θ = )
shortest and longest distances between
the phase and telephone conductors are
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. Two regional systems, each having 9. The total reactance and total susceptance
several synchronous generators and loads of a lossless overhead EHV line, operating
are interconnected by an ac line and a at 50 Hz, are given by 0.045 pu and 1.2 pu
HVDC link as shown in the figure. Which respectively. If the velocity of wave
of the following statements is true in the propagation is km/s, then the
steady state: approximate length of the line is
(A) 122 km (C) 222 km
(B) 172 km (D) 272 km
EE-2008
HVDC link
Region 1 Region 2 10. An extra high voltage transmission line of
length 300 km can be approximated by a
AC line lossless line having propagation constant
=0.00127 radians per km. Then the
percentage ratio of line length to
(A) Both regions need not have the same wavelength will be given by
frequency (A) 24.24% (C) 19.05%
(B) The total power flow between the (B) 12.12% (D) 6.06%
regions ( + ) can be changed by
controlling the HVDC converters 11. A lossless transmission line having Surge
alone Impedance Loading (SIL) of 2280 MW is
(C) The power sharing between the ac provided with a uniformly distributed
line and the HVDC link can be series capacitive compensation of 30%.
changed by controlling the HVDC Then, SIL of the compensated
converters alone. transmission line will be
(D) The direction of power flow in the (A) 1835 MW (C) 2725 MW
HVDC link ( ) cannot be reversed. (B) 2280 MW (D) 3257 MW
8. Consider a bundled conductor of an EE-2009

overhead line, consisting of three 12. For a fixed value of complex power flow
identical sub-conductors placed at the in a transmission line having a sending
corners of an equilateral triangle as end voltage V, the real power loss will be
shown in the figure. If we neglect the proportional to
charges on the other phase conductors (A) V (C) 1/V2
and ground, and assume that spacing (B) V2 (D) 1/V
between sub-conductors is much larger
than their radius, the maximum electric EE-2010
field intensity is experienced at 13. Power is transferred from system A to
Y system B by an HVDC link as shown in the
figure. If the voltages and are as
X indicated in the figure, and I > 0, then
Z
W
(A) Point X (C) Point Z

(B) Point Y (D) point W
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Power Flow 16. Consider a three-core, three-phase, 50Hz,

A C
11kV cable whose conductors are
AC AC
System denoted as R, Y and B in the figure. The
System
A B inter-phase capacitance ( ) between
B D
Rectifier Inverter each pair of conductors is 0.2µF and the
(A) , , capacitance between each line conductor
(B) , , and the sheath is 0.4.µF. The per-phase
(C) , , charging current is
(D) ,
C1 R
14. Consider two buses connected by an
B Y
impedance of (0+j5) . The bus1 voltage C1
is 100 V, and bus2 voltage is
100 V. The real and reactive power Outer Sheath
supplied by bus 1, respectively, are (A) 2.0 A (C) 2.7 A
(A) 1000 W, 268 VAr (B) 2.4 A (D) 3.5 A
(B) 1000 W, 134 VAr
(C) 276.9 W, 56.7 VAr 17. Consider a three-phase, 50Hz, 11kV
(D) 276.9 W, 56.7 VAr distribution system. Each of the
conductors is suspended by an insulator
15. A 50Hz synchronous generator is initially string having two identical porcelain
connected to a long lossless transmission insulators. The self-capacitance of the
line which is open circuited at the insulator is 5 times the shunt capacitance
receiving end. With the field voltage held between the link and the ground, as
constant, the generator is disconnected shown in the figure. The voltage across
from the transmission line. Which of the the two insulators are
following may be said about the steady
state terminal voltage and field current of 5C e
the generator?
Long C e
5C
Transmission
Receiving
Line
~
end
Conductor
(A) The magnitude of terminal voltage (A) e = 3.74 kV, e = 2.61 kV
decreases, and the field current does (B) e = 3.46 kV, e = 2.89 kV
not change. (C) e = 6.0 kV, e = 4.23 kV
(B) The magnitude of terminal voltage (D) e = 5.5 kV, e = 5.5 kV
increases, and the field current does
not change. EE-2011
(C) The magnitude of terminal voltage 18. A nuclear power station of 500 MW
increases, and the field current capacity is located at 300 km away from a
increases. load center. Select the most suitable
(D) The magnitude of terminal voltage power evacuation transmission
does not change, and the field configuration among the following
current decreases. options.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) ~ Load All the line reactance’s are equal to j1

Center
132 kV, 300 km double circuit Bus 1(slack) j1 Bus 2
(B) ~ Load
center
~ ~
132 kV, 300 km single circuit with 40% P2=0.1 pu
series capacitor compensation
(C) j1 j1
~ Load
center
400 kV, 300 km single circuit Bus 3 P3=0.2 pu
(D) ~ Load
center
400 kV, 300 km double circuit
21. The voltage phase angles in rad at buses
2 and 3 are
EE-2013 (A) θ = ,θ =
19. A single–phase load is supplied by a (B) θ = , θ =
single–phase voltage source. If the (C) θ = , θ =
current flowing from the load to the (D) θ = ,θ =
source is 10 A and if the voltage
at the load terminals is 1006 V, then 22. If the base impedance and the
the line–to line base voltage are 100 ohms
(A) Load absorbs real power and delivers and 100 Kv, respectively, then the real
reactive power power in MW delivered by the generator
(B) Load absorbs real power and absorbs connected at the slack bus is
reactive power (A) 10 (C) 10
(C) Load delivers real power and delivers (B) 0 (D) 20
reactive power
(D) Load delivers real power and absorbs 23. A source (t) = cos t has an
reactive power internal impedance of (4+j3) . If a purely
resistive load connected to this source
20. For a power system network with has to extract the maximum power out of
n nodes, Z33 of its bus impedance matrix is the source, its value in should be
j0.5 per unit. The voltage at node 3 is (A) 3 (C) 5
1.3 per unit. If a capacitor having (B) 4 (D) 7
reactance of j3.5 per unit is now added
to the network between node 3 and the EE – 2014
reference node, the current drawn by the 24. A distribution feeder of 1 km length
capacitor per unit is having resistance, but negligible
(A) 0.325 reactance, is fed from both the ends by
(B) 0.325 400V, 50 Hz balanced sources. Both
(C) 0.371 voltage sources S and S are in phase.
(D) 0.433 The feeder supplies concentrated loads of
unity power factor as shown in the figure.
Statement for Linked Answer Questions S S
m m m m
21 and 22
In the following network, the voltage
~ ~
magnitudes at all buses are equal to 1 pu, z z
the voltage phase angles are very small,
and the line resistances are negligible.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
The contributions of S and S in 100 A 28. A 183-bus power system has 150 PQ
current supplied at location P buses and 32 PV buses. In the general
respectively, are case, to obtain the load flow solution
(A) 75 A and 25 A (C) 25 A and 75 A using Newton-Raphson method in polar
(B) 50 A and 50 A (D) 0 A and 100 A coordinates, the minimum number of
simultaneous equations to be solved
25. Shunt reactors are sometimes used in is______________
high voltage transmission systems to
(A) Limit the short circuit current 29. The complex power consumed by a
through the line. constant-voltage load is given by
(B) Compensate for the series reactance ( j ),
of the line under heavily loaded where, k k and
condition. k k
(C) Limit over-voltages at the load side A compensating shunt capacitor is chosen
under lightly loaded condition. such that | | 0.25 kVAR, where Q is the
(D) Compensate for the voltage drop in net reactive power consumed by the
the line under heavily loaded capacitor-load combination. The reactive
condition. power (in kVAR) supplied by the
capacitor is___________
26. In a long transmission line with r,l,g and c
are the resistance, inductance, shunt 30. For a 400 km long transmission line, the
conductance and capacitance per unit series impedance is (0.0 + J0.5) /km
length, respectively, the condition for and the shunt admittance is
distortionless transmission is (0.0 + J5.0) mho/km. The magnitude of
(A) rc = lg (C) rg = lc the series impedance (in ) of the
(B) r = √l⁄c (D) g = √c l equivalent circuit of the transmission
line is____________
27. For a fully transposed transmission line
(A) positive, negative and zero sequence
impedances are equal
(B) positive and negative sequence
(C) zero and positive sequence
(D) negative and zero sequence
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. C] 5. [Ans. A]
It is generally based wavelength of the a
line
~ line load
2. [Ans. B]
Rectifiers act as an inductor (for α < 900) k k
Inverters act as a capacitor (for α < 900) Base value on load circuit
( ) = and (k ) = k
3. [Ans. C] ase impedance = =
% voltage regulation of the line alues of load in ohm =
( ) ( ) = alue of load in p u ase impedance
=
( ) = =
At the time of N.L, =0 Base values in generator circuit
∴ ( )= ( ) = (k ) = k
( )
ase impedance = =( =
∴ (%) = )
=
= 16%
= = = pu
4. [Ans. C] [Note: The Question in IIT Gate was wrong
+1 1 and later it is modified]
P1 P2
6. [Ans. A]
D1=2.5 m
D2=3 m
~ Y
15kV
A
T1 T2 B
Where, P1and P2 form power line and T1 Y θ
and T2 form telephone line

Current in power circuit = I = 100 A 400kV 220kV
Y
Mutual inductance between power line Autotransforme
and telephone line Taking V1 asrthe reference

D =  k
= ln ( ) ⁄m
D θ =
Phase difference and is
= ln ( ) So, =  k
= m leads y
Voltage induced in the telephone line So, =  k
θ =
=| |=
lags y
= θ =θ
| | = m θ =θ = =
= km Phase difference between and is θ
θ=θ θ
= =
So, option (A) is correct
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. C]
θ=
Both regions are connected by HVDC link
√
as well as AC line. So AC line is possible l l
when both regions have same frequency. l
=
By changing fringe angle (α) of converter,
we can change the power sharing, l = length of line = km
between the AC line and HVDC link.
10. [Ans. D]
8. [Ans. B] Wave length = λ, propagation constant =
Electric field intensity at various points λ= = = 4947.39 km
are shown as follows.
Ratio =
=
X 1 1
= 0.0606
% Ratio = 6.06 %
11. [Ans. C]
Surge impedance loading
2 Point X 3 2 Point Y 3
= SIL = 2280 MW
1 1
= Surge impedance
Surge Impedance loading = SIL =
as voltage is constant
S
2 Point Z 3 2 Point W 3 Suppose Csc is the series capacitance per
It is clear from the above diagrams that unit length for series compensation.
minimum cancellation of vector occurs at Therefore, series reactance will be,
the point Y. Hence maximum electric field
j =j ( )
intensity. j
=j ( )
9. [Ans. C]
Velocity of wave propagation =j ( )
here is known as degree of series
(θ) =
compensation
√( )( )
km km ( )
Therefore, =√
Let l is the length of the line
Total reaction of line =0.045 pu = f S =S =
√
Total inductance of line =
S = =
√
Inductance/km =
Total susceptance of line = 1.2 pu = fc 12. [Ans. C]
Total capacitance of line = S = Complex power
S is defined as , S = VI
apacitance km = S
=
If R is the resistance of transmission line
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Real power loss = =( ) 16. [Ans. A]
S 0.4 F
=
0.6 F Virtually
Since, S and R are fixed connected to
Real power loss 0.6 F sheath
0.6 F
0.4 F 0.4 F
13. [Ans. C]
Because, power flow takes from AB to CD
so , , and Per charging current
Since current flows from high voltage to =j
low voltage. | | =
=
14. [Ans.A] √
=  and = 
as , current will flow from
bus 1 to bus 2 17. [Ans. B]
= j 
=
5C e
 
= I1 I2
= 
C I
omplex power = S = j =
5C e
j =  (  )
= j
= and = r Line to line voltage = = k
= Phase to ground voltage
15. [Ans. A]
=
 As field voltage is held constant, so √
field current does not change. = k
√
 When the generator is connected
with open – circuit transmission line, e e = k = k (i)
√
line draws charging current
=
(j ) e = (j ) e (j ) e (ii)
e = e
Solving equation (i) and (ii), we get
e = k
and e = k
Therefore is higher than Eg
i.e. Vt > Eg 18. [Ans. D]
But when the generator is  For transmission of bulk power of
disconnected from the line, no very long distance high voltage
charging current is delivered by the (400 kV) is used.
generator i.e. IC = 0. In this Vt = Eg  To increase reliability, double circuit
So, terminal voltage decreases. is used.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
19. [Ans. B] 21. [Ans. B]

Current from load to source is Bus-1 slack Bus-2
j
Current from source to load

~ ~
= j
j
=
= = u
Bus-3 = u
x =
[x = ]
x =
Here all the bus voltage are assumed at 1
P.u so, it is a DC load flow problem
θ
Current lags voltage so, it absorbs the real So, [ ] = [ ] [ ]
θ
and reactive power.
and are power injection at bus 2
(or)
and 3
Alternative Method:
= = [load is ve]
Current from source to load
= =
x x x
S= =
=( )( )
[ x x x ]
= j
= j =* +=* +
∴ , θ
So, [ ] = * + * +=* +
Hence load absorbs real power and θ
reactive power
22. [Ans. C]
20. [Ans. D] From previous solution we got.
Equivalent circuits θ
[ ]=* + [ ]=* +
θ
Now. So,
j =
j =
=
( )
Now, Base VA= =
Base MVA=100
= = So, MW delivered by slack generator
j
(bus – )
= =
23. [Ans. C]
(t) = cos t
internal impedance = ( j )
For maximum power transfer, the load
impedance magnitude should be same
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
as source internal thevinen’s impedance 27. [Ans. B]

magnitude Positive sequence impedance =
Given the output should be only resistive negative sequence impedance = x x
in nature maximum power transfer will Zero sequence impedance = x x
be at x = self-reactance of each line
=| i| x = mutual reactance of any line pair
=√ =
28. [Ans. 332]
24. [Ans. D] Number of equation to solved is n m
m =
m m m =
Where n number of PQ buses
z
z m number of PV buses
2
From source 1, current I is supplied 29. [Ans. 0.75]

Let the resistance per km Reactive power supplied
By KVL, =
400 +I (400R) + (I 200)200R =Initial maximum reactance power
+ (I 300)200R+ (I 500)200R drawn by load
+400=0 = Net reactive power consumed by
400+400IR+200IR 40000R+200IR capacitor load combination
60000R+200IR 1000R+100=0 = =
On solving I = 200A
Which means at point P contribution of 30. [Ans. *] Range 186 to 188
source 1 is 200 – 200A = 0A z= j km
And contribution of source 2 to point P is y= j km
rest 100A = km
sin hrl
section series impedance =
25. [Ans. C] rl
Under lightly loaded condition leakage = zl = j
capacitance will supply to the r = √zy = √ j j
load end causing its voltage to rise. rl = ( )j√
Hence shunt reactors are used to ( ) (√ ( ))
series impedance = ( )(√
maintain the voltage at receiving by )
absorbing some reactive power. = j

∴ Magnitude of series impedance =
26. [Ans. A]
For distortion less line
=
rc = lg
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Economics of Power Generation

EE -2007 EE-2008
1. The incremental cost curves in Rs/MW hr 3. A lossless power system has to serve a
for two generators supplying a common load of 250 MW. There are two
load of 700 MW are shown in the figures. generators ( and ) in the System
The maximum and minimum generation with cost curves and respectively
limits are also indicated. The optimum defined as follows:
generation schedule is: ( )= + 0.055 ×
Incremental Cost Rs/MWhr ( )=3 + 0.03 ×
600 Where and are the MW injections
from generator and respectively.
450 Then the minimum cost dispatch will be
(A) = 250 MW; = 0 MW
(B) = 150 MW; = 100 MW
P (C) = 100 MW: = 150 MW
200 MW 450 MW
GENERATOR A (D) = 0 MW; = 250 MW
Incremental Cost Rs/MWhr
EE-2009
800
4. Three generators are feeding a load of
650
100MW. The details of the generators are
Rating Efficiency Regulation (p.u.)
(MW) (%) on 100 MVA base
P Generator-1 100 20 0.02
150 MW 400 MW
Generator-2 100 30 0.04
GENERATOR B
Generator-3 100 40 0.03
(A) Generator A: 400 MW,
Generator B: 300 MW In the event of increased load power
(B) Generator A: 350 MW, demand, which of the following will
Generator B: 350 MW happen?
(C) Generator A: 450 MW, (A) All the generators will share equal
Generator B: 250 MW power
(D) Generator A: 425 MW, (B) Generator-3 will share more power
Generator B: 275 MW compared to Generator-1
(C) Generator-1 will share more power
2. An isolated 50 Hz synchronous generator compared to Generator-2
is rated at 15 MW which is also the (D) Generator-2 will share more power
maximum continuous power limit of its compared to Generator-3
prime mover. It is equipped with a speed
governor with 5% droop. Initially, the EE-2011
generator is feeding three loads 4 MW 5. A load center of 120 MW derives power
each at 50 Hz. One of these loads is
from two stations connected by 220 kV
programmed to trip permanently if the
frequency falls below 48 Hz. If an transmission lines of 25 km and 75 km as
additional load of 3.5MW is connected shown in the figure below. The three
then the frequency will settle down to generators and are of 100 MW
(A) 49.417 Hz (C) 50.083 Hz capacity each and have identical fuel cost
(B) 49.917 Hz (D) 50.583 Hz characteristics. The minimum loss
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
generation schedule for supplying the 120 p , where the loss

MW load is coefficient is specified in pu on a 100 MVA
~ 25 km 75 km ~ base. The most economic power

generation schedule in MW is
120 MW
~ (A)
(A) = 80 MW + losses (B)
= 20 MW (C)
= 20 MW (D)
(B) = 60 MW
= 30 MW + losses EE-2014
= 30 MW 8. Three-phase to ground fault takes place at
(C) = 40 MW locations and in the system shown
= 40 MW in the figure If the fault takes place at
= 40 MW + losses location , then the voltage and the
(D) = 30 MW + losses current at bus A are and
= 45 MW respectively. If the fault takes place at
= 45 MW location , then the voltage and the
current at bus A are and
6. For enhancing the power transmission in respectively. The correct statement about
a long EHV transmission line, the most voltages and currents during faults at
preferred method is to connect a and is
(A) series inductive compensator in the
line B
(B) shunt inductive compensator at the
receiving end ~ ~
(C) series capacitive compensator in the
line
(D) shunt capacitive compensator at the (A) leads and leads
sending end (B) leads and lags
(C) lags and leads
EE-2012 (D) lags and lags
7. The figure shows a two-generator system
supplying a load of PD = 40 MW, 9. In an unbalanced three phase system,
Connected at bus 2. phase current pu, negative
Bus 1 Bus 2 sequence current pu,
~ zero sequence current pu.
~ The magnitude of phase current in pu is
(A) 1.00 (C) 11.53
(B) 7.81 (D) 13.00
The fuel cost of generators and are:

( ) = 10,000 Rs/MWh and
( ) =12,500 Rs/MWh
And the loss in the line is
10. A two bus power system shown in the
figure supplies load of 1.0+j0.5 p.u.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
G1
13. The horizontally placed conductors of a
single phase line operating at 50 Hz are
~ j having outside diameter of 1.6 cm, and
j
j the spacing between centers of the
conductors is 6 m. The permittivity of free
space is /m.
The values of in p.u. and
The capacitance to ground per kilometer
respectively are
of each line is
(A) 0.95 and 6.00 (C) 1.1 and 6.00
(B) 1.05 and 5.44 (D) 1.1 and 27.12 (A) (C)
(B) (D)
11. A three phase star-connected load is
drawing power at a voltage of 0.9 pu and 14. A three phase, 100 MVA, 25 kV generator
0.8 power factor lagging. The three phase has solidly grounded neutral. The
base power and base current are positive, negative, and the zero sequence
100. MVA and 437.38 A respectively. The reactances of the generator are 0.2 pu
line-to-line load voltage in kV is____________ and 0.05 pu, respectively, at the machine
base quantities. If a bolted single phase to
12. A synchronous generator is connected to ground fault occurs at the terminal of the
an infinite bus with excitation voltage unloaded generator, the fault current in
= 1.3 pu. The generator has a amperes immediately after the fault
synchronous reactance of 1.1 pu and is is______________
delivering real power (P) of 0.6 pu to the
bus. Assume the infinite bus voltage to be
1.0pu. Neglect stator resistance. The
reactive power (Q) in pu supplied by the
generator to the bus under this condition
is ___________
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. C] Power shared by a generator

Maximum incremental cost in ∝
Rs/MWhr for Generator A
Power shared by
=600 (at 450 MW)
Generator 1> Generator 2> Generator 3
Minimum incremental cost in
Rs/MWhr for Generator B
5. [Ans. A]
=650(at 150 MW)
As maximum value of incremental cost of
~ R 3R ~
A is less than minimum value of B.
∴ enerator ‘A’ will operate at it
~
maximum (o/p) 450 MW and B at 120 MW
(700 450) =250MW Generator is near to load and ,
are away from the load. To reduce losses,
2. [Ans. A] more power is contributed from
Here, change in (freq.) w.r.t. power Hence = 80 + losses,
( ) 3.5 = 1.16% = 20 MW, = 20 MW
∴ ∆f = 0.583
∴ f = 50 0.583 = 49.417 Hz 6. [Ans. C]
To enhance the power transmission in a
3. [Ans. C] long EHV transmission line, a series
+ = 250MW → (i) capacitor is used
= 1 + 0.11 Power flow in line ∝
= 3 + 0.06 * +
For k% series capacitor compensation
For maximum cost of generation,
=
k
( )
1 + 0.11 = 3 + 0.06 → ii)
Solving equation (i) and (ii),
= 100 MW 7. [Ans. A]
= 150 MW From coordination equation
4. [Ans. C]
Let x1, x2 and x3 are reactances of
Given
generator -1, generator -2 and
generator -3 respectively. an
Neglecting armature resistance of all the
three generators.
VR1=0.02p.u.
VR2 =0.04 p.u and
VR3=0.03 p.u.
VR1 < VR3 <VR2
Since, voltage regulation
R ∝ reactance of generator X1<X3<X2 p
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
As the base value is 100 MVA 10. [Ans. B]

j
A
j
j j
( ) p j ( )
j
A j
j co j in
co
A co
in
8. [Ans. C] in
For fault at
Equivalent circuit tan
A
in
11. [Ans. *] Range 117 to 120

√ co p Base
X power
X → Line impedance √ p
p
X |X | √
lea
or fa lt at f
olt
12. [Ans. *] (Range 0.1 to 0.2)

in
lag X
in
9. [Ans. C]
in
[ ] [ ][ ]
j
j ( )
j
j
co j in
co j in
co
ol ing thi
| |
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. [Ans. B]
ln ( )
R
ln ( )
km
14. [Ans. *] Range 15300 to 15500

Reference
p
j j j
j
p
a e
√ √
p a e
√
A
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Symmetrical Components & Faults Calculations
EE-2006 3. If the initial accelerating power is X pu,

1. Three identical star connected resistors of the initial acceleration in elec. deg/sec2,
1.0pu are connected to an unbalanced and the inertia constant in
3 phase supply. The load neutral is MJ – sec /elec. deg respectively will be
isolated. The symmetrical components of (A) 31.4 X,18 (C) X/1800,0.056
the line voltages in P.u are: =X , (B) 1800 X,0.056 (D) X/31.4,18
=X . If all the P.u calculations are
Common Data Question for 4 and 5
with the respective base values, the
For a power system the admittance and
phase to neutral sequence voltages are
impedance matrices for the fault studies
(A) =X ( + ),
are as follows.
=Y ( ) j j j
(B) =X ( ), =[ j j j ]
=Y ( + ) j j j
j j j
(C) = X ( ),
√ = [j j j ]
= Y ( ) j j j
√
The pre-fault voltages are 1.0 p.u at all the
(D) = X ( ),
√ buses. The system was unloaded prior to
= Y ( ) the fault. A solid 3 phase fault takes place
√
at bus 2.
Common data Question For 2 and 3.
A generator feeds power to an infinite bus 4. The post fault voltages at buses 1 and 3 in
through a double circuit transmission per unit respectively are
line. A 3- phase fault occurs at the middle (A) 1.24, 0.63 (C) 0.33, 0.67
point of one of the lines. The infinite bus (B) 0.31, 0.76 (D) 0.67, 0.33
voltage is 1 pu, the transient internal
voltage of the generator is 1.1 pu and the 5. The per unit fault feeds from generators
equivalent transfer admittance during connected to buses 1 and 2 respectively
fault is 0.8pu. The 100 MVA generator are
has an inertia constant of (A) 1.20, 2.51 (C) 1.66, 2.50
5 MJ/MVA and it was delivering 1.0pu (B) 1.55, 2.61 (D) 5.00, 2.50
power prior of the fault with rotor power
angle of . The system frequency is 6. The Gauss Seidel load flow method has
50 Hz. following disadvantages. Tick the
incorrect statement
2. The initial accelerating power (in pu) will (A) unreliable convergence
be (B) Slow convergence
(A) 1.0 (C) 0.56 (C) Choice of slack bus affects
(B) 0.6 (D) 0.4 convergence
(D) A good initial guess for voltages is
essential for convergence
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE-2007 9. A 230 V (phase), 50 Hz, three – phase,

7. A three phase balanced star connected 4 – wire systems has a phase sequence
voltage source with frequency ω rad/s is ABC. A unity power-factor load of 4kW is
connected to a star connected balanced connected between phase A and neutral
load which is purely inductive. The N. It is desired to achieve zero neutral
instantaneous line currents and phase to current through the use of a pure
neutral voltages are denoted by (i i i ) inductor and pure capacitor in the other
and ( ) respectively and their two phases. The value of inductor and
rms values are denoted by V and I. capacitor is
If [ ] (A) 72.95 mH in phase C and 139.02 µF
in phase B
√ √ i
(B) 72.95 mH in phase B and 139.02 µF
[i ]
√ √ in phase C
i
[ √ √ ] (C) 42.12 mH in phase C and 240.79 µF
Then the magnitude of R is in phase B
(A) 3 VI (C) 0.7 VI (D) 42.12 mH in phase B and 240.79 µF
(B) VI (D) 0 in phase C
EE-2008
8. Suppose we define a sequence
10. A two machine power system is shown
transformation between “a-b-c” and
below. Transmission line XY has positive
“p-n-o” variables as follows:
sequence impedance of Z1 Ω and zero
f f
sequence impedance of Z0 Ω
[f ] k [ ] [f ] where e
f X Y
f
and k is a constant. F
Now, if it is given that :
i An 'a' phase to ground fault with zero
[ ]=[ ] [i ] and fault impedance occurs at the centre of
i
the transmission line. Bus voltage at X and
i
line current from X to F for the phase 'a',
[ ] [i ] then,
i are given by Va Volts and Ia Amperes,
respectively. Then, the impedance
(A) Z = [ ] measured by the ground distance relay
located at the terminal X of line XY will be
given by
(B) Z = [ ]
(A) Ω (C) Ω
(B) Ω (D) Ω
(C) Z = 3k2 [ ]
(D) * +[ ]
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. A 3 - phase transmission line is shown in Common Data Question for 13, 14 and 15
the figure Consider a power system
X Y
I ~ F ~
I I
I Given that: = =1.0 + j0.0 P.u;

The positive sequence impedance are
I = =0.001 + j0.01 P.u and
Voltage drop across the transmission line = 0.006 + j0.06 P.u
is given by the following equation 3 phase Base MVA = 100
I Voltage base = 400 kV (Line to Line)
[ ] [ ] [I ] Nominal system frequency = 50 Hz
I The reference oltage for Phase ‘a’ is
Shunt capacitance of the line can be defined as V(t)=Vm cos(t).
neglected. If the line positive sequence A symmetrical three phase fault occurs at
impedance of Ω and zero sequence centre of the line i e point ‘F’ at time t0.
impedance of Ω then the values of s The positive sequence impedance from
and Zm will be source to point ‘F’ equals
(A) Zs Ω; m Ω (0.004 + j0.04)p.u. The waveform
(B) Zs Ω; m Ω corresponding to phase 'a' fault current
(C) Zs Ω; m Ω from bus X reveals that decaying dc offset
(D) Zs Ω; m Ω current is negative and in magnitude at its
maximum initial value. Assume that the
12. Single line diagram of a 4-bus single negative sequence impedances are equal
source distribution system is shown to positive sequence impedances, and the
below. Branches e1, e2, e3, and e4 have zero sequence impedances are three
equal impedances. The load current times positive sequence impedances.
values indicated in the figure are in per
unit Distribution Company’s policy 13. The instant (t0) of the fault will be
requires radial system operation with (A) 4.682 ms (C) 14.667 ms
minimum loss. This can be achieved by (B) 9.667 ms (D) 19.667 ms
opening of the branch
14. The rms value of the ac component of
~ fault current (Ix) will be
(A) 3.59 kA (C) 7.18 kA
e e (B) 5.07 kA (D) 10.15 kA
15. Instead of the three phase fault, if single

e e
1+j0 line to ground fault occurs on phase 'a' at
5+j0
point ‘F’ with zero fault impedance then
2+j0 the rms value of ac component of fault
(A) e (C) e current(Ix)for phase 'a' will be
(B) e (D) e (A) 4.97pu (C) 14.93pu
(B) 7.0pu (D) 29.85pu
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE-2009 (A)
16. For the Y-bus matrix of a 4-bus system R r
given in per unit, the buses having shunt
elements are. G
(B)
j[ ] R r
(A) 3 and 4 (C) 1 and 2 G

(B) 2 and 3 (D) 1, 2 and 4 (C)
R r
17. Match the items in List-I with the items

in List-II and select the correct answer G
using the codes given below the lists. (D)
List I List II R r
A. Improve 1. shunt reactor
power factor
B. reduce the 2. shunt capacitor
G
current ripples 19. For the power system shown in the figure
C. increase the 3. series capacitor below, the specifications of the
power flow in
components are the following:
line
D. reduce the 4. series reactor
G : 25 kV, 100 MVA, X = 9%
Ferranti effect G : 25 kV, 100 MVA, X = 9%
Codes: T : 25 kV/220 kV, 90 MVA, X = 12%
A B C D T : 220 kV/25 kV, 90 MVA, X = 12%
(A) 2 3 4 1 Line 1: 220 kV, X = 150 ohms
T T
(B) 2 4 3 1
(C) 4 3 1 2 Line 1
(D) 4 1 3 2
G Bus 1 ~ G
~ Bus 2
EE-2010 Choose 25kV as the base voltage at the

18. The zero-sequence circuit of the three generator G1, and 200 MVA as the MVA
phase transformer shown in the figure is base. The impedance diagram is
R r (A) j 0.27 j 0.42
j 0.27
b
j 0.18
j 0.18
Y G ~ ~ G
B y
(B) j 0.27 j 0.62

j 0.27
j 0.18
j 0.18
G ~ ~ G
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) j 0.27 j 0.42 (C)

j 0.27
j2.25 j2.25
1 3 2
j0.10 j0.10
j 0.21 j 0.21
~ ~
G ~ ~ G
(D)
(D) j 0.42 j2.25 j2.25

j 0. 3 j 0.3 1 3 2
j0.25 j0.10
j 0.21 j 0.21 ~ ~
G ~ ~ G
21. In the above system, the three-phase fault
MVA at the bus 3 is
EE-2011
(A) 82.55 MVA (C) 170.91 MVA
Statement for Linked Answer Question
(B) 85.11 MVA (D) 181.82 MVA
20 & 21
Two generator units G1 and G2 are 22. A three-bus network is shown in the
connected by 15 kV line with a bus at the figure below indicating the p.u.
mid-point as shown below, impedance of each element.
1 3 2 1 2 3
~ 10 km 10 km ~ j0.2 j0.08
G115 kV G2 j0.1 j0.1
15 kV
G1 = 250 MVA , 15 kV , positive sequence
reactance
The bus admittance matrix, Y-bus, of the
X = 25% on its own base
network is
G2 = 100 MVA , 15 kV , positive sequence
reactance (A) j[ ]
X = 10% on its own base
and = 10 km , positive sequence
reactance (B) j[ ]
X = 0.225 /km
(C) j[ ]
20. For the above system, the positive
sequence diagram with the p.u values on
(D) j[ ]
the 100 MVA common base is
(A)
j1.0 j1.0
1 3 2 23. A negative sequence relay is commonly
j0.10 j0.10
~ ~ used to protect
(A) an alternator
(B) a transformer
(B) (C) a transmission line
1
j1.0
3
j1.0
2 (D) a bus bar
j0.25 j0.10
~ ~
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE-2012 EE-2014
24. The bus admittance matrix of a three-bus 27. A 2-bus system and corresponding zero
three-line system is sequence network are shown in the
figure.
j[ ] us T T us
If each transmission line between the two ~ ~

buses is represented by an equivalent a
-network, the magnitude of the shunt
susceptance of the line connecting
bus 1 and 2 is
(A) 4 (C) 1
b
(B) 2 (D) 0 The transformers T and T are connected
25. The sequence components of the fault as
current are as follows: I = j 1.5 pu, and
I = j 0.5 pu, I zero = j1 pu. The
type of fault in the system is and
(A) LG (C) LLG
(B) LL (D) LLLG
C and
26. For the system shown below, and D and

are complex power demands at bus 1 and
bus 2 respectively. If |V2| = 1 pu, the VAR
rating of the capacitor ( ) connected at
bus 2 is
Bus 1 Bus 2
v pu
~ j pu
pu pu
(A) 0.2 pu (C) 0.312 pu
(B) 0.268 pu (D) 0.4 pu
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. C] =1.1 p.u.

In positive sequence. Voltage of the bus = | | pu
Phase sequence is abc Equivalent transfer admittance = 0.8.
Assuming Transfer reactance = x
and
P = Electrical power delivered by the
generator
| || |
during fault = sin
√ P = sin pu
√ Mechanical input do not change during

fault So, P pu
o if x
Accelerating power = P P P
P pu
√
x
3. [Ans. B]
√
x Inertial constant (in MJ –s/elec deg)
GH
√
In negative sequence, f
Where,
Phase sequence is acb
G = Machine rating
Assuming
= 10 MVA
and
H = Inertial constant in MJ/MVA
= 5 MJ/MVA
GH
√ f
H
√
f
So, if
Accelerating in elec deg/ sec
P
√ P ccelerating power = x
P x
√ x
4. [Ans. D]
2. [Ans. C]
Before fault
Pre fault [ ] [ ]
Electrical power delivered by the
generator P pu
Mechanical input to the generator = P Fault current =I
At steady state, Solid 3-∅ fault occurs at bus r and
P P pu
During fault j
Initial rotor angle =
Internal voltage of the generator =|E |
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. A]
I
j 1. The time taken to perform one
j pu iteration of the computation is
Post fault voltage at bus I is given by relatively smaller in case of G-S
I method but the number of iterations
Post fault voltage at bus I=1 required by G-S method for a
I particular system and they increase
j j with the increase in the size of the
pu system. Which results in slow
Post fault voltage at bus I = 3 convergence.
I 2. The convergence characteristic of
j j G-S method is sometimes very
pu seriously affected by the selection of
a slack bus and the selection of a
5. [Ans. C] particular bus may result in poor
Yii = sum of the admittance directly convergence.
connected to ith bus
y y y y excluded 7. [Ans. A]
y √ √ I
o y y y R=[ ] [I ]
√ √
y I
y [ √ √ ]
y y R =* I I I I I I +
√ √ √
j j j
Magnitude of R is determined of matrix R
y j pu
R = 3VI
Similarly,
y
8. [Ans. B]
y j j j
I
y j pu Here, [ ] [ ] [I ]
j I
y j I
j Where, [ ] = [Z] [I ]
y j I
E I I
I
[I ] = K [ ] [I ]
[Current fed by generator i during fault] I I
E E I
[The system was unloaded] [I ]
Current fed by generator 1 I
Similarly,
I = K[A]
pu
Current fed by generator 2, = K[A] [ ] [I ]
I
[ ]
= K[A] [ ] I
pu
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Comparing (1) & (2) 10. [Ans. D]

As the ground distance relay is located at
∴ [ ][ ] terminal X
Impedance measured by the relay
= [ ][ ][ ]
=[ ] 11. [Ans. B]
Let & be the self and mutual
inductance of a line
9. [Ans. B] Positive sequence impedance
= Ω i
I Zero sequence impedance
= + Ω ii
Solving eq (i) and eq (ii)
I ∴ Ω Ω
I
12. [Ans. D]
Let impedance of each branch be R on
Taking as the reference removing (e )
Losses =
Similarly on removing e ,
Losses =
P
I on removing e ,
cos
Losses =
on removing e ,
 If an pure inductor is present in phase Losses =
B, then I lags by o on removing bus ‘e ’ losses are
 If a pure capacitor is present in phase minimum, so correct option is (d)
C, then I leads by
If current through neutral is to be zero 13. [Ans. A]
I sin I sin Voltage, V = cos ωt
I I I Current after fault
I I cos I cos √
i t e cos ωt
I cos √ I | |
|I | at t = t ; i = 0
|I | |I | |I|
√ ⁄ √
e cos ωt
| |
√ j
| | | |
|I |
ω The maximum value will be at
ωt
mH t ω
|I | | | ωC f
C m sec
C F
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
14. [Ans. A] j
.003 + j 0.03 .003 + j 0.03 j
j
.001 + j 0.01
.001 + j j
eq
0.01 From eq (i)
~ ~ =
=
j
j
j j j
I = From eq (ii)
eq = j || j = j j j j
eq = 0.002 + j 0.02 p.u = j
E = = 1.0 p.u From eq (iii)
[ pre fault voltage not specified] = j j j j
=
∴I = = 49.75 pu
From eq (iv)
I = = 144.34 = j j j
√
=
I =I I
= 7.18KA
I = = 3.59
15. [Ans. C]
I =
Given that = and =
I = =
I = 29.85 p.u
17. [Ans. B]
I = = 14.93
 Shut capacitor are used to provide part
of the reactive ’s required by the load
16. [Ans. C]
to keep the voltage within desirable limits
If directly we can add all the elements of
and to improve factor.
each row. If the sum is not zero, then that
 Series reactor reduces current ripple.
bus contains shunt elements
 Shunt reactors are used across
For ith bus add all the element of ith row.
capacitive loads or lightly loaded lines to
If sum = 0 ith bus contain shunt elements
absorb some of the leading ’s to
control the voltage across the load to
[ ] within certain desirable limit.
 Series capacitor campensation reduces
here the series impedance of the line. Power
j . . . .(i) flow inline power flow in line
j ii
increases, as decreases.
j . . (iii)
j iv
j
j
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
18. [Ans. C] 23. [Ans. A]

R r Negative sequence load used to protect
the alternator against unbalanced load
G
24. [Ans. B]
19. [Ans. B] y j[ ]
j
j[ ]
but, 
for Bus admittance matrix,
So, = j0.62 pu.
20. [Ans. A] so shunt susceptance of the line

J1.0 connecting bus1 and 2 is+j2
J1.0
1 2
-10
+ j2 +j2
-10
3 +j 2
N N
25. [Ans. C]
I = +j 1.5 P.u
= 0.25 × ( ) = 0.1
I = j 0.5 P.u
= 0.1 × ( ) = 0.1 I = j 1.0 P.u
Since, two sequence current is present,
= 0.225 × 10 ( ) = j1.0
the type, of fault is not L-L fault
= 0.225 × 10 ( ) = j1.0 In L-G fault: all sequence networks will be
connected in series. So, the current is
21. [Ans. D] same for all I I &I
In for the case of LLLG fault, as it is
C balanced fault, only two sequence current
will be present in the system.
So, from the above, the type of fault is LLG
22. [Ans. B]
1 j 2 j 3 26. [Ans. B]
V1 = V2= 1-0
j0.2 j0.08 I12
j j0.1 j0.1 j ~ z=
j0.5p.u.
j j j5 0 = 1p.u. = 1p.u.
y = j5 j j j
0 j j j
Line is lossless =
= 1+1 +
= 2p.u.
Power transfer from bus-1 to bus-2 is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
l p.u.
| || |
∴ sin ( sin
; sin
sin ;
};
∴ 2 = ; V2 = 1
I12 = = 1-j0.288
Current =l ; Current in
=l [1 j0.268]=
0.268
VAR rating of capacitor
= |V2||lQ|sin(|V2||I2|)
= 1 0.268 sin(+90)
= 0.268
27. [Ans. B]
For
New sequence network
For
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Power System Stability
EE-2006 it is constant at 1.0 pu. Due to some

1. A 400 V, 50Hz, three phase balanced previous disturbance, the rotor angle (δ)
source supplies power to a star connected is undergoing an undamped oscillation,
load whose rating is 12√3 k VA, 0.8 pf with the maximum value of δ(t) = 1300.
(lag). The rating (in kVAR) of the delta One of the parallel lines trips due to relay
connected (capacitive) reactive power malopeation at an instant when
bank necessary to bring the pf to unity is δ(t) = 1300 as shown in the figure. The
(A) 28.78 (C) 16.60 maximum value of the power unit line
(B) 21.60 (D) 12.47 reactance, x, such that the system does
not lose synchronism subsequent to this
EE-2007 tripping is
2. Consider the two power systems shown x 1.0 0
0.1 pu
in figure A below, which are initially not
interconnected, and are operating in
~ x
10
steady state at the same frequency.
Separate load flow solutions are One line trips
computed individually for the two 130
systems, corresponding to this scenario.
The bus voltage phasors so obtained are
indicated on figure A. These two isolated
t
systems are now interconnected by a
(A) 0.87 (C) 0.67
short transmission line as shown in figure
(B) 0.74 (D) 0.54
B, and it is found that
P1 = P2 = Q1 = Q2 = 0;
1 0 20 1 02 0 4. The figure below shows a three phase self-
1 02 0 10 5
~ commutated voltage source converter
~ connected to a power system. The
~ Y
~ converter’s dc bus capacitor is marked as
X
Fig (A) 1 02 15 C in the figure. The circuit is initially
1 02 10
P1,Q1 P2,Q2 operating in steady state with
~ ~ δ = 0 and the capacitor dc voltage is equal
~ ~ to Vdc0. You may neglect all losses and
X Y harmonics. What action should be taken
Fig (B)
The bus voltage phase angular difference to increase the capacitor dc voltage
between generator bus X and generator slowly to a new steady state value?
Three
bus Y after the interconnection is Phase
(A) 100 (C) 300 C Voltage
Source 0
(B) 25 0 (D) 300 converter
δ
3. Consider a synchronous generator (A) Make δ positive and maintain it at a

connected to an infinite bus by two positive value
identical parallel transmission lines. The (B) make δ positive and return it to its
transient reactance of the generator is original value
0.1 pu and the mechanical power input to
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) make δ negative and maintain it at a

peed
negative value
(D) make δ negative and return it to its orque
original value M
EE-2009
5. A 500 MW, 21kV, 50 Hz, 3-phase, 2- pole
synchronous generator having a rated
p.f = 0.9, has a moment of inertia of (a)
27.5 10 kg-m2. The inertia constant (H)
will be peed M
(A) 2.44 s (C) 4.88 s

(B) 2.71 s (D) 5.42 s
EE-2012
6. A cylindrical rotor generator delivers
0.5 pu power in the steady state to an
orque
infinite bus through a transmission line of
reactance 0.5 pu. The generator no-load (b)
voltage is 1.5 pu and the infinite bus The stable operating points are
voltage is 1pu. The inertia constant of the (A) P and R (C) Q and R
generator is 5MW-S/MVA generator (B) P and S (D) Q and S
reactance is 1 pu, the critical clearing
angle, in degrees, for a three –phase dead 9. The figure shows the single line diagram
short circuit fault at the generator of a single machine infinite bus system.
terminal is
(A) 53.5 (C) 70.8
(B) 60.2 (D) 79.6 Infinte
bus
EE-2014 The inertia constant of the synchronous
7. The undesirable property of an electrical generator = 5M -s/MVA. Frequency is
insulating material is 50 Hz.
(A) high dielectric strength Mechanical power is 1 pu. The system is
(B) high relative permittivity operating at the stable equilibrium point
(C) high thermal conductivity with rotor angle δ equal to 30 . A three
(D) high insulation resistivity phase short circuit fault occurs at a
certain location on one of the circuits of
8. The torque-speed characteristics of motor the double circuit transmission line.
( ) and load ( ) for two cases are During fault, electrical power in pu
shown in the figures (a) and (b). The load is sin δ If the values of δ and dδ⁄dt at
torque is equal to motor torque at points the instant of fault clearing are 45 and
P, Q, R and S 3.762 radian/s respectively,
then (in pu) is____________
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. D] = 10 0
= 12 √3 0 8 = 16.627 kW
= 12 √3 0 6 =12.47 kW E = 1.0
cos = 0 8 PS = 1.0 P.u
sin = 0 6 Xeq: equivalent reactance when online is
For unity pf, the total reactive power is removed due to normal operation of relay
zero Xeq = 0.1 + x
Assuming kVAR rating of capacitor bank ∴ sin 130 = 1 0
( )
=
= 0 67 u [∵ S = 1.0 P.u]
=0
= = 12 47 k
4. [Ans. D]
So, capacitor banks supplies 12.47 kVAR
To increase the capacitor d.c. voltage
reactive power to the load.
slowly to a new slowly to a new steady
state value, make ‘δ’ negative and return
2. [Ans. A]
it to its original value.
As = = 0 and = =0
There is no energy transfer, so both bus
5. [Ans. A]
bar voltage and its phase angle should be
same, so we can consider both bus bar G= = MW = 555.56 MVA
phase angle as zero. KE Stored
Phase angle of y y = 20
= M ( )
hase angle of x = x = 30
(∴ hase angle difference = 27 5 10 ( )
= x y = 1357.07 MJ
= 30 20 = 10
H= = = 2.44 MJ/MVA
3. [Ans. C]
Here the alternator is undergoing under 6. [Ans. D]
damped oscillations with δ max = 1300, at
this any fault occurs even then also to
maintain stability ‘ ’ value must not go
beyond 1300 for a given mechanical input δ ~ Infinite bus
~ 0
| || |
= sin δ
( )
15 1
05 = sin δ
(1 0 5)
δ = sin (0 5) = 30 =
6
= 130 δ Critical clearing angle
δ = cos [( 2δ ) sin δ cos δ ]
∴ = , sin δ = S
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1 √3 d δ (δ 30)
= cos *( ) + =
3 3 2 f dt 180
= cos (0 18) = 79 56 (cos δ cos 30)
dδ
at δ = 45 , = 3 762
7. [Ans. B] dt
5
3 762
3 14 50
8. [Ans. B]
(δ 30) √3
At P point, speed change by s, will = (cos δ )
180 2
increase - increase
5
Hence speed will increases by s, hence 3 762
3 14 50
move back to previous point.
(45 30) √3
Hence stable point = (cos 45 )
180 2
At s point, speed change by s, -
increases, speed will decrease by s. 1 √3
0 12 = 0 88 ( )
Hence move back to pervious point. √2 2
Hence stable point = 0 23
d d
d d
For stability
9. [Ans. *] Range 0.22 to 0.24

d δ
= (pu)
f dt
= 1(pu)
efore fault condition
sin δ = (at equilibrium)
( ) sin δ = 1
sin 30 = 1
= 2(pu)
sin δ
sin δ
0 30 45
During fault condition

d δ
=
f dt
d δ
=1 sin δ
f dt
d δ
= ∫ (1 sin δ)dt
f dt
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Protection & Circuit Breakers

EE-2006 EE-2008
1. Keeping in view the cost and overall 4. A lossless single machine infinite bus
effectiveness, the following circuit power system is shown below
breaker is best suited for capacitor bank 1.0 δ pu . pu
switching
(A) Vacuum (C) SF6 ~
(B) air blast (D) Oil 1.0 pu
The synchronous generator transfers
2. In a biased differential relay, the bias is 1.0 per unit of power to the infinite bus.
defined as a ratio of The critical clearing time of circuit
(A) number of turns of restraining and breaker is 0.28 s. If another identical
operating coil synchronous generator is connected in
(B) operating coil current and parallel to the existing generator and each
restraining coil current generator is scheduled to supply 0.5 per
(C) fault current and operating coil unit of power. Then the critical clearing
current time of the circuit breaker will
(D) fault current and restraining coil (A) reduce to 0.14 s
current (B) reduce but will be more than 0.14 s
(C) remain constant 0.28 s
EE-2007
(D) increase beyond 0.28 s
3. Consider the protection system shown in
the figure below. The circuit breakers
5. Voltage phasors at the two terminals of a
numbered from 1 to 7 are of identical
transmission line of length 70 km have a
type. A single line to ground fault with
magnitude of l.0 per unit but are 180
zero fault impedance occurs at the
degrees out of phase. Assuming that the
midpoint of the line (at point F), but
circuit breaker 4 fails to operate maximum load current in the line is th of
(“stuck breaker”). If the relays are minimum 3-phase fault current. Which
coordinated correctly, a valid sequence of one of the following transmission line
circuit breaker operation is protection schemes will NOT pick up for
3 this condition?
1 Transmission (A) Distance protection using mho relays
Line Bus C
with zone-1 set to 80% of the line
2 4 Stuck breaker 6 impedance
(B) Directional over current protection
Bus A F set to pick up at 1.25 times the
5 7
Transmission maximum load current
Line (C) Pilot relaying system with directional
Bus B
comparison scheme
(A) 1, 2, 6, 7, 3, 5 (C) 5, 6, 7, 3, 1, 2
(D) Pilot relaying system with
(B) 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 3 (D) 5, 1, 2, 3, 6, 7
segregated phase comparison
scheme
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE-2009 9. Consider a stator winding of an alternator

6. Match the items in List-I with the items with an internal high-resistance ground
in List-II and select the correct answer fault. The currents under the fault
using the codes given below the lists. condition are as shown in the figure. The
List I List II winding is protected using a differential
a. Short Line 1. Ohm Relay current scheme with current
b. Medium Line 2. Reactance Relay transformers of ratio 400/5 A as shown.
c. Long Line 3. Mho Relay The current through the operating coil is
CT ratio 400/5 CT ratio 400/5
(A) a 2, b 1, c 3 (C) a 1, b 2, c 3
(B) a 3, b 2, c 1 (D) a 1, b 3, c 2 (220+j0)A (250+j0)A
EE-2010
7. Consider a step voltage wave of
magnitude 1pu travelling along a lossless
transmission line that terminates in a Operating coil
reactor. The voltage magnitude across the (A) 0.17875 (C) 0.375A
reactor at the instant the travelling wave (B) 0.2A (D) 60kA
reaches the reactor is
A EE-2014
10. The overcurrent relays for the line
Reactor
protection and loads connected at the
buses are shown in the figure.
(A) 1pu (C) 2pu ~

(B) 1pu (D) 3pu
100A
8. A three-phase, 33kV oil circuit breaker is
The relays are IDMT in nature having the
rated 1200A, 2000MVA, 3s. The
characteristic
symmetrical breaking current is
. ime ultiplier etting
(A) 1200 A (C) 35 kA t
( lug setting ultiplier) .
(B) 3600 A (D) 104.8 kA
The maximum and minimum fault
currents at bus B are 2000 A and 500 A
respectively. Assuming the time
multiplier setting and plug setting for
relay to be 0.1 and 5A respectively, the
operating time of (in seconds)
is_________
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. A] 4. [Ans. D]
Vacuum circuit breakers are specially 0.5 P.u
.
used for low cost switch having low fault ~ .
interrupting capacity, but capable of large
number of load switching operations
without maintenance. ~
0.5 P.u
2. [Ans. B] The critical clearing time can be evaluated

I1 I2 for a given critical clearing angle for the
Electrical special case where electrical output is
equipment
zero and mechanical input is constant so
that the accelerating power is constant
i1 i2 during fault.
Note:- [If the accelerating power is not
constant then we cannot evaluate the
i0=|i1|-|i2| critical clearing time ]
Relay coil
d
dt
[∴ electrical power delivered ( e) = 0
Restraining coil
during fault]
Operation of force relay coil
d d
= (|i | |i |) .t
dt dt
Opposing force produced by restrain coil t
| | | |
=n ( )
At balance (or) boundary condition From initial conditions at t = 0,
(|i | |i |) = n (
| | | |
) ∴ ( )
| | | | t
= | | | | = bias
( )
Where n & n are the number of turns on where ritical clearing angle
operating relay coil and restrained coil t ritical clearing time
respectively ( )
t √
3. [Ans. C]
If the relays are co – ordinated correctly,
Initially when one machine is delivering
due to fault in a particular section, relay
1.0 P.u electrical output
in that section must operate first, then
. .u
relays in near by section if first fails, it is
When two identical generators are
back up protection. Thus, the sequence is
delivering a total electrical power output
[5, 6, 7, 3, 1, 2].
of 1.0 p.u.,
. p. u.
( )
t . √
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
The instant the travelling wave reaches

( )
t √ the reactor
(t)| p. u
( )
√ 8. [Ans.C]
( )
∴ critical clearing time of breaker will I (in )
√ ( )
increase beyond 0.28 sec. = k
√
5. [Ans. A]
9. [Ans. C]
Distance protection using mho relays CT ratio CT ratio
with zone-1 set to 80% of the line 400/5 400/5
250 A 250 A
impedance will not provide protection.
6. [Ans. A]
For a short line of transmission, reactance I1 I2
relay is used I0C
For a medium line of transmission
impedance relay is used Operating coil
For a long line of transmission, MHO relay
I ( ) .
is used.
I ( ) .
7. [Ans. B]
Let surge impedance of the line = Zc Current through operating coil = I
E=Step voltage wave of magnitude 1 p.u. I I . .
.
(s)
s
ZC 10. [Ans. *] Range 0.21 to 0.23
~
I(s) Ls V(s)
E(s)
. . . or elay
t .
[ . . . ]
( )
. .
(s) I ( )
I(s) I
s ( )
(s) oltage across the reactor aximum load current at
(s) or a setting current of plug setting is
(s) I(s). s s
s ax fault current
ratio current setting
s
(s) s
( s)
⁄
. . . . .
(t)| .e t
( . . ) . ( ) .
at t=0
. . sec
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Generating Stations
EE-2009 constants. If the two plants optimally

1. Out of the following plant categories share 1000 MW load at incremental fuel
(i) Nuclear (iii) Pump Storage cost of 100 Rs/MWh, the ratio of load
(ii) Run-of-river (iv) Diesel shared by plants and is
The base load power plants are (A) 1:4 (C) 3:2
(A) (i) and (ii) (B) 2:3 (D) 4:1
(B) (ii) and (iii)
(C) (i), (ii) and (iv) 3. There are two generators in a power
(D) (i), (iii) & (iv) system. No-load frequencies of the
generators are 51.5 Hz and 51 Hz,
EE-2014 respectively, and both are having droop
2. The fuel cost functions of two power constant of 1 Hz/MW. Total load in the
plants are system is 2.5 MW. Assuming that the
generators are operating under their
respective droop characteristics, the
frequency of the power system in Hz in
Where, and are the generated
the steady state is ______
powers of two plants, and A and B are the

1. [Ans. C] 3. [Ans. *] Range 49.9 to 50.1
( )
2. [Ans. D]
From ,
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK Power Electronics
Basics of Power Semiconductor Devices
EE-2006 200V dc. The forward drops of all

1. A voltage commutation circuit is shown in transistors/diodes and gate-cathode
figure. If the turn off time of the SCRs is junction during ON state is 1.0 V.
50 sec and a safety margin of 2 is 3. The resistance R should be
considered, then what will be the 1.0Ω
approximate minimum value of capacitor
required for proper commutation? L
SCR
R
+10V PT
50Ω
50Ω
C
+
100V
200V
Th1 Th2
(A) 2.88 F (C) 0.91 (A) 4.7 k Ω (C) 47 Ω

(B) 1.44 (D) 0.72 (B) 470 Ω (D) 4.7Ω
2. An SCR having a turn ON time of 5 sec, 4. The minimum approximate volt-second

latching current of 50 mA and holding rating of the pulse transformer suitable
current of 40 mA is triggered by a short for triggering the SCR should be:
duration pulse and is used in the circuit (volt-second rating is the maximum of
shown in figure. The minimum pulse product of the voltage and the width of
width required to turn the SCR ON will be the pulse that may be applied)
(A) 2000 V-s (C) 20 V-s
(B) 200 V-s (D) 2.0 V-s
20Ω
5kΩ EE – 2008
100V
5. The truth table of a monoshot shown in
0.5H
the figures is given in the table below:
Two monoshots, one positive edge
(A) 251 sec (C) 100 sec triggered and other negative edge
(B) 150 sec (D) 5 sec triggered, are connected shown in the
figure. The pulse widths of the two
EE-2007 monoshot outputs, Q and Q are T
Common Data for Question 3 & 4 and T respectively.
A 1: 1 Pulse transformer (PT) is used to C
R
trigger the SCR in the adjacent figure. The
SCR is rated at 1.5kV, 250A with X Y Q ̅
Q
X Q
IL=250 mA, IH =150 mA, and 0 T 0.7R
̅
Y Q
=150 mA, =100 mA. The SCR is 1
connected to an inductive load, where T 07R
L=150 mH in series with a small
resistance and the supply voltage is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
R C R C (B)
1.5
current
X Q 1
T 0.7R T 0.7R
̅
Q 0.5
+5V ̅
Q
0
The frequency and the duty cycle of the 0 10 20 30
time (ms)
40 50
signal at Q will respectively be
(C)
(A) f 1.5
5
current
(B) f
1
(C) f 0.5
(D) f 0
0 10 20 30 40 50
time(ms)
EE-2009 (D)
6. An SCR is considered to be a 1.5
semi-controlled device because
current 1
(A) it can be turned OFF but not ON with
a gate pulse 0.5
(B) it conducts only during one half-cycle
of an alternating current wave 0
0 10 20 30 40 50
(C) it can be turned ON but not OFF with times(ms)
a gate pulse
(D) it can be turned ON only during one 8. Match the switch arrangements on the
half-cycle of an alternating voltage top row to the steady-state V-I
wave characteristics on the lower row. The
steady state operating points are shown
7. The circuit shows an ideal diode by large black dots.
connected to a pure inductor and is
(a) (b)
connected to a purely sinusoidal 50Hz
voltage source. Under ideal conditions the
current waveform through the inductor
will look like + +
0.1 is is
V 10 sin100 T (I) (II)
(A)
1.5 Vs Vs
current
0.5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
time(ms)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(c) (d)
T L
15V C
+
+ (A) 10 s (C) 100 s
i (B) 50 s (D) 200 s
is
(III) (IV) EE-2014
12. Figure shows four electronic switches
Vs Vs (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv). Which of the
switches can block voltages of either
Codes: polarity applied between terminals ‘a’
a b c d and ‘b’ when the active device is in the
(A) I II III IV OFF state?
(B) II IV I III a a a a
(C) IV III I II
(D) IV III II I
EE-2011
9. Circuit turn-off time of an SCR is defined
as the time
(A) taken by the SCR to turn off
(B) required for the SCR current to b b b b
become zero i ii iii iv
(C) for which the SCR is reverse biased
(A)
~
(i), (ii) and (iii)
~ ~ ~
by the commutation circuit
(B) (ii), (iii) and (iv)
(D) for which the SCR is reverse biased
(C) (ii) and (iii)
to reduced its current below the
(D) (i) and (iv)
holding current
13. A diode circuit feeds an ideal inductor as
EE-2012 shown in the figure.
10. The typical ratio of Latching current to Given V 100 sin t V, where
holding current in a 20 A thyristor is 100 rad/s, and L = 31.83 mH. The
(A) 5.0 (C) 1.0 initial value of inductor current is zero.
(B) 2.0 (D) 0.5 Switch S is closed at t = 2.5ms. The peak
value of inductor current i (in A) in the
EE-2013 first cycle is________
11. Thyristor T in the figure below is initially t 2.5 ms
off and is triggered with a single pulse of i
width 10 s. It is given that L =( ) S
and C =( ) . Assuming latching and
holding current of the thyristor are both V ~
zero and the initial charge on C is zero, T
conducts for
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. A] Anode current

i i
0.02 5 1 e
R1 R2
Let minimum pulse width is T
C
To turn on ia ≥ latching current
VS
⇒ 0.02 5 1 e )
50m 0.05
Th1 Th2
T 150 sec
In this type of commutation, a thyristor 3. [Ans. C]

carrying load current is commutated by 10Ω
transferring its load current to another
incoming thyristor. L
D1 G
Firing of SCR Th1 commutates Th2 and ig
+10V PT K
subsequently, firing of SCR Th2 would
R
turn – off Th1. V
Circuit turn – off time t for Th V1 V2 D2
t R ln 2 +
and circuit turn – off timet for Th 200V
t R ln 2 VCE
as R R 50
t t R cln 2 When the pulses are applied to the base
Safety margin = 2 of the transistor. Transistor operates in
So, R ln2 2t ON state. So, the forward voltage drop in
2 50 10 transistor V 1 V.
c 2.88
50 ln2 V 10 V 10 1 9V
1
2. [Ans. B] V V ( ) V 9V [turn ratio 1 1]
1
iA
is forward biased and voltage drop in
iL iR diode V =1 V
R 20 is reversed biased and acts as open
R2=5K
V=100
circuit.
0.5H Capacitor behaves as open circuit for dc
voltage. Forward voltage drop of gate
Current through 5 k resistor cathode junction
V 100
i V 1V
R 5 10
Voltage drop across resistor R.
20m 0.02
V V V V
Current through inductor
V 9 1 1 7V
⁄
i (1 e ) To ensure turn – ON of SCR,
R
V 7
100 . R 47
(1 e ) 150m
20
5 1 e
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
4. [Ans. A] 7. [Ans. C]
RL = 1 Frequency of the voltage source,
f = 50 Hz
L
+ iL Time period, T = 20 ms.
VT
During positive half cycle of the source
E=200V
voltage, 0 < t< , energy is stored in the
Forward voltage drop of SCR during inductor and current increases.
ON – state VT=1 V During negative half cycle of the source
I voltage, t T, current decreases and
C I
energy stored in the inductor is delivered
+ V V
to source.
di
Ri V 0 8. [Ans. C]
dt
di I I ⇒ V
⇒ 200 0.15 i 1 0
dt V V
⇒i 199(1 e ⁄ . )
Gate pulse width required = time taken I
I ⇒
by i to rise upto T
V
⇒ 250 10 199(1 e . ) V
T 188.56 s
Width of the pulse = T = 188.56 s I
Magnitude of voltage = V = 10 V
In V
Voltage second rating of PT V
Parallel
VT = 10 188.56 s V
1885.6 v-s ∴ Switch is ON if either T or impressed
2000 v-s are ON and Switch is OFF, if both T or
impressed D are OFF.
5. [Ans. A] I
1 T
f
T T T T
V
6. [Ans. C]
SCR can only be turn on by applying gate
pulses but it cannot be turnoff by the
same. Once the thyristor is on, and its 9. [Ans. C]
anode current is above the latching The turn – off time provided to the
current level the gate loses control. It can thyristor by a circuit is called circuit turn
be turned off only by reducing the anode off time. It is defined as the time between
current below holding current. Only the instant anodes current becomes zero
triggering can be done through gate but and the instant reverse voltage due to the
commutation can’t be done through gate circuit reaches zero.
gate loses control after the SCR turns on.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. [Ans. B] V
i (cos ( ) cos t)
For medium power thyristors of rating 4
6 A to 60A the ratio of the latching at t 10ms is maximum
current to holding current is 1.5 to 2. V 1 100 10
i ( cos ( ))
√2 1000
11. [Ans. C] 100
1 0.707
1 1 1 100 31.83 10
f 17.08
√ 100
1
T 100 s
f
12. [Ans. C]
In (i) and (iii), when switch are reverse
biased, diode in parallel will start
conducting so not able to block the
reverse voltage
13. [Ans. *] Range 16.6 to 17.4

100 rad s
2
T 20ms
100
V
2ms 10ms 20ms
2ms 10ms
Start at which current is maximum at
t = 10 ms
di
V sin t
dt
V sin t
di ∫ dt
V
i cos t k
at t 2.5 ms i=0
V 100 2.5
0 cos ( ) k
1000
V
k cos ( )
4
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Phase Controlled Rectifier
EE-2006 i
1. A 3-phase fully controlled bridge
converter with freewheeling diode is fed
from 400 V, 50 Hz AC source and is V V
operating at a firing angle of 600. The load
current is assumed constant at 10 A due
to high load inductance. The input
displacement factor (IDF) and the input
power factor (IPF) of the converter will
0 2
be
(A) IDF = 0.867; IPF = 0.828
(B) IDF= 0.867; IPF = 0.552
(C) IDF = 0.5; IPF = 0.478 0 2
(D) IDF = 0.5; IPF = 0.318
2. A single-phase bridge converter is used to

0 2
charge a battery of 200 V having an
internal resistance of 2 Ω as shown in
figure. The SCRs are triggered by a
0 2
constant dc signal. If SCR 2 gets open
circuited, then what will be the average
charging current? 4. A solar cell of 350 V is feeding power to
200V an ac supply of 440 V, 50 Hz through a
3-phase fully controlled bridge converter.
Battery
A large inductance is connected in the dc
230V SCR2
SCR1 circuit to maintain the dc current at 20 A.
50Hz if the solar cell resistance is 0.5 , then
each thyristor will be reverse biased for a
SCR3 SCR4 period of
(A) 125 (C) 60
(A) 23.8 A (C) 11.9 A (B) 120 (D) 55
(B) 15 A (D) 3.54 A
EE-2007
3. A single-phase half wave uncontrolled 5. A single-phase fully controlled thyristor
converter circuit shown in figure. bridge ac-dc converter is operating at a
A 2-winding transformer is used at the firing angle of 25 and an overlap angle
input for isolation. Assuming the load 10 with constant dc output current of
current to be constant and v V sin t 20 A. The fundamental power factor
the current waveform through diode (displacement factor)at input ac mains is
will be (A) 0.78 (C) 0.866
(B) 0.827 (D) 0.9
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. A Single phase fullwave half-controlled EE-2008

bridge converter feeds an inductive load. 9. A single-phase half controlled converter
The two SCRs in the converter are shown in the figure is feeding power to
connected to a common DC bus. The highly inductive load. The converter is
converter has to have a free-wheeling operating at a firing angle of 60°.
diode.
(A) because the converter inherently
does not provide for free-wheeling
~ v
(B) because the converter does not
provide for free-wheeling for high
values of triggering angles
(C) or else the free-wheeling action of If the firing pulses are suddenly removed,
the converter will cause shorting of the steady state voltage (v0) waveform of
the AC supply the converter will become
(D) or else if a gate pulse to one of the (A)
SCRs is missed, it will subsequently V
cause a high load current in the other
SCR
0
2 t
7. In the circuit of adjacent figure the diode
connects the ac source to a pure
(B)
inductance L.
D V
Pure L
0
AC ~ 3 4 3 2 t
The diode conducts for (C)

(A) 90 (C) 270 V
(B) 180 (D) 360
0
8. A three-phase fully-controlled thyristor 3 4 3 2 t
bridge converter is used as line

commutated inverter to feed 50 kW (D)
power 420 V dc to a three phase,
V
415 V(line), 50Hz ac mains. Consider dc
link current to be constant. The rms
0
current of the thyristor is 2 t
(A) 119.05 A (C) 68.73 A
(B) 79.37 A (D) 39.68 A
10. A three phase fully controlled bridge

converter is feeding a load drawing a
constant and ripple free load current of
10 A at a firing angle of 30 . The
approximate Total harmonic Distortion
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(%THD) and the rms value of The energy is collected in a bank of 400 V
fundamental component of the input battery and is connected to converter
current will respectively be through a large filter choke of resistance
(A) 31% and 6.8 A (C) 66% and 6.8 A 10 Ω.
(B) 31% and 7.8 A (D) 66% and 7.8 A
13. The maximum current through the
11. A single phase fully controlled bridge battery will be
converter supplies a load drawing (A) 14 A (C) 80 A
constant and ripple free load current. If (B) 40 A (D) 94 A
the triggering angle is 30 , the input
power factor will be 14. The kVA rating of the input transformer is
(A) 0.65 (C) 0.85 (A) 53.2 kVA (C) 22.6 kVA
(B) 0.78 (D) 0.866 (B) 46.0 kVA (D) 19.6 kVA
EE-2010 Common Data for Questions 15 and 16

12. The fully controlled thyristor converter in The input voltage given to a converter is
the figure is fed from a single-phase v 100 √2 sin 100 t V
source. When the firing angle is 0 , the dc The current drawn by the converter is
output voltage of the converter is 300V.
i (10√2 sin (100 t )
What will be the output voltage for a 3
firing angle of 60 , assuming continuous 5√2 sin 300 t 4
conduction? 2√2 sin 500 t
6 )
15. The input power factor of the converter is
(A) 0.31 (C) 0.5
V (B) 0.44 (D) 0.71
16. The active power drawn by the converter

is
(A) 150 V (C) 300 V (A) 181 W (C) 707 W
(B) 210 V (D) 100 V (B) 500 W (D) 887 W
EE-2011 EE-2012
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 17. A half-controlled single-phase bridge
13 and 14 rectifier is supplying an R-L load. It is
A solar energy installation utilizes a operated at a firing angle  and the load
three-phase bridge converter to feed current is continuous. The fraction of
energy into power system through a cycle that the freewheeling diode
transformer of 400 V/400 V, as shown conducts is
below. (A) 1 2 (C) ⁄2
Filter Choke (B) 1 ⁄ (D) ⁄
~ Battery
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE-2014 21. A single-phae SCR based ac regulator is

18. The figure shows the circuit of a rectifier feeding power to a load consisting of
fed from a 230-V (rms), 50-Hz sinusoidal 5 resistance and 16mH inductance. The
voltage source. If we want to replace the input supply is 230 V, 50 Hz ac. The
current source with a resistor so that the maximum firing angle at which the
rms value of the current supplied by the voltage across the device becomes zero all
voltage source remains unchanged, the throughout and the rms value of current
value of the resistance (in ohms) through SCR, under this operating
is_________ (Assume diodes to be ideal.) condition, are
(A) 30 and 46 A (C) 45 and 23 A
(B) 30 and 23 A (D) 45 and 32 A
~
230V 50 z
10
22. The SCR in the circuit shown has a
latching current of 40 mA. A gate pulse of
50 µs is applied to the SCR. The maximum
value of R in to ensure successful firing
19. The figure shows the circuit diagram of a of the SCR is___
rectifier. The load consists of a resistance S R
10Ω and an inductance 0.05 connected
in series. Assuming ideal thyristor and
500
ideal diode, the thyristor firing angle
(in degree) needed to obtain an average 100V R
load voltage of 70 V is __________
200m
~
325 sin 314t V oad
20. A fully controlled converter bridge feeds a 23. A three-phase fully controlled bridge
highly inductive load with ripple free load converter is fed through star-delta
current. The input supply (v ) to the transformer as shown in the figure.
bridge is a sinusoidal source. Triggering R
angle of the bridge converter is 30 .
The input power factor of the bridge is
_________
1
V ~ Load
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
24. The converter is operated at a firing angle

of 30 . Assuming the load current ( ) to 2k 3
be virtually constant at 1 p.u. and 0 2
transformer to be an ideal one, the input
phase current waveform is
2 3k
2 3k 2
1 3k 0
0 2
2k 3
k 3
0 2
1. [Ans. C]
Load current is constant 2. [Ans. C]
10 Vi
In 3-ϕ full converter with free-wheeling E
diode, input displacement factor (IDF)
cos cos 60 0.5 v
R S value source current
2 1 2
√ √
3 3 i0
RMS value of nth
harmonic
4 n
sin
√2n 3
RMS value of fundamental current average current
2√2 √6
sin 60 1
∫ V sin wt d
Current distortion factor (CDF) 2 R
√6 1 3 1
( √ ) ∴ avg [2V cos 2 ]
2 2 R
1
3 2 2
0.955
[2 (230 √2) cos 200 2 ]
Input power factor (IPF)
where sin ( )
V
0.955 0.5 200
0.478 sin ( )
230 √2
38 0.66 rad
1
∴ avg [2√2 230 cos 38
2 2
200 2 0.66 ]
11.9
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
3. [Ans. C] 3 440√2 cos

V
⇒ 340
⇒ 125
t Therefore, each thyristor will be reverse
biased for a period of 55
V 5. [Ans. A]
Firing angle= 25
t Overlap angle = 10
DC output current
i
V
[cos cos ]
l
t 230 √2
i ∴ 20
2 50
l [cos 25 cos 25 10 ]
t
∴ 0.0045
i Average output voltage
i 2V cos
v
t
2 230√2 cos 25
or 0 t Diode is forward biased 3.14
and conduct. 2 3.14 50 4.5 10 20
For t 2 Diode becomes 3.14
reverse biased and Diode gets forward 187.73 9
biased and starts conducting. 178.74 V
As load current is constant current through Displacement factor=
Diode i can be drawn as shown in 178.25 20
the figure. 230 20
0.78
4. [Ans. D]
Solar cell emf E = 350 V 6. [Ans. C]
DC current 20
Solar cell resistance T1 T2 I0
R 0.5
V Voltage across inverter
R Vs ~ V0
350 20 0.5
340 V
The bridge acts as inverter, D2 D1
Output voltage of 3 ϕ fully controlled
bridge
1-ϕ full wave half controlled bridge
3V
V cos converter without free-wheeling diode is
3V shown in the figure.
cos 340
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Vs 9. [Ans. A]
t
2 T1 T2
V0 Vs ~ V0
t
T2 D T1D1 T1D T2D2 D2 D1
1 2
At t T is fired and T1 starts Single phase half controlled converter

conducting load current flows through As load is highly inductive, it means load
T1D1 for t . At t V becomes current is continuous and almost constant.
negative and D1 gets reverse biased and D2 Vs
is forward biased. So during t 4
t
free wheeling action takes place through 2 5
2 +
3
T1 and D2 and output voltage become zeros.
At t load T2 is triggered and load V0
current is transferred from T1 to T2.
So, during t 2 T t
T1D1 T2D2 T1D1 T1D2 T1D1
conducts. At t It may be possible T2D1 T1D2 T2D1
that load current is not transferred no firing
T1 is T2 is T1 is
completely from T1 to T2, and T1 and T2
triggered
triggered
triggered
pulses
may be conducting simultaneously which
results in short circuit of the supply for
short direction. During,
 0 t freewheeling
7. [Ans. D] by T V 0
Inductor current is positive for 360 , hence  t T1 D1 conducts
the diode conducts for whole of the period, V V
i.e, 360 .  t
Freewheeling by T1D2, V0=0
8. [Ans. C]
 t 2
Let DC link current =
T2D2 conduct , V0 = Vs
DC voltage applied to the inverse
T1 is again triggered at 2
V 420
So during 2 t 3
Power fed to the inverter
T , conducts.
P V 50 k
Now, if firing pulses are removed after T1 is
⇒ 420 50 10
triggered at 2 .
119.05
At t 3 no firing pulse will be
Current through each thyristor flow for
available to trigger T2. So, load current will
period of 2 3
flow through T1D2 as load current is
So, rms current of thyristor.
continuous. So during 3 t 4
√ ∫ d t TD2 will continue to conduct and V0 =0.
119.05 At t 4 D1 will become forward biased
68.73 and D2 will become reverse biased. So, D1
√3 √3
will conduct and T1 is already conducting.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
So load current will flow through T1 D1 and V

V0 = Vs.
10. [Ans. B] t
Load current = 10 V
RMS value of total source current
2 2
√ 10√ 8.165
3 3 t
2
Supply current i can be expressed by i
fourier series
4 n
i t ∑ sin sin n t n t
n 3
i
RMS value of fundamental current,
4
sin
√2 3
t
4 √3 10
⇒ 7.8
√2 2 Average output voltage
Total Harmonic distortion 1
V ∫ V sin t. d t
√( ) 1 100 2V
⇒V cos
8.165 for 30
√( ) 1 100
7.8 √3
V V
31
Average output current = l (constant)
RMS value of supply current = l l
11. [Ans. B]
+ RMS value of supply voltage V
√
Input power factor
i T T
Power delivered to load
+ L
O nput V
V ~ V A
V (√3 )V
D
V V ⁄√2.
T T
√6
0.78
12. [Ans. A]
cos V
V = = 300
V V . cos60 300. 150 V
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. [Ans. B] 10
p. f cos 60 0.44
Filter Choke 11.35
~ Battery(E)
16. [Ans. B]
Active power will be drawn by converter
Average output voltage of the converter only due to fundamental component.
3V
V cos Therefore, Active power = V cos ϕ
100 10 cos 60
The converter acts as line commutated
Active power = 500 watts
inverter and for such mode
90 and V is negative. Therefore
17. [Ans. D]
battery supplies energy to AC system.
V
So, current through battery
400 V
R
for V 0 or 90
Maximum current flow through battery
400 0
40 2
10
Freewheeling diode conducts for 2 over
14. [Ans. C]
complete cycle
RMS value of supply current in case of
3 – ϕ bridge converter ∴ raction
2 2
√ 40√ 32.66 18. [Ans. *] Range 23 to 23
3 3 RMS value of current supplied by source
KVA rating of the input transformer 10
√3V 10
√3 400 32.66 10 V
22.62 V T 2 T
t
15. [Ans. B]
10
Voltage applied (v) = 100√2 sin 100 t
Current resulted RMS value of current supplied when
resistor is there
10√2 sin (10 t ) 5√2 (300 t )
3 4
V R
2√2 sin (500 t )
The current flown into converter consists t
of fundamental, 3rd harmonic and 5th
harmonic components.
In the case of converter drawing non
sinusoidal component of current then p.f V
10
will be written as √2R
Input power factor = cos ϕ V 230√2
230√2
10 ⇒ 10
√2R
√10 5 2 11.35 R 23
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
19. [Ans. *] Range 69 to 70 2√2

Freewheeling diode is there so after cos 30
freewheeling diode will conduct and 2√2 √3 √6
energy stored in inductor will dissipate 0.78
2
through FD and R.
V 21. [Ans. C]
v
sin t ϕ
z
t
i
2
~
1
V ∫ V sin t d t
2 i [sin t ϕ
V 1 cos
2 sin ϕ e +
1 cos v
325 70 f ϕ⇒i sin t ϕ
2 3.14 z
cos 0.353 v v
69.33 Voltage across device is zero
ϕ
20. [Ans. *] Range 0.74 to 0.82 tan ( )
V
2 50 16 m
tan ( )
2 5
45.15
v v
i
z√2 z
230
√ 5 2 50 16m
2
23
22. [Ans. *] Range 6055 to 6065

Highly inductive load Given data
So is continuous 40 m
output power t 50 s
nput power factor
V find R
output power V 200m
rom figure V 100V
1 R 500
V ∫ V sin t d t 2m
V 5
cos t | V V
i t *1 e +
R R
2V 100
cos 40 10 [1 e ] 100 R
500
2V
V cos ∴R 6060.83
cos
nput power factor
√
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
23. [Ans. B]
V V V V V
i 1
3
i
k
3
k
input waveform 3
i
i i 2k⁄3
⁄
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Choppers
EE-2006 EE-2008
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 1 4. In the circuit shown in the figure, the
and 2 switch is operated at a duty cycle of 0.5.
A voltage commutated chopper operating A large capacitor is connected across the
at 1 kHz is used to control the speed of dc load. The inductor current is assumed to
motor as shown in figure. The load be continuous. The average voltage across
current is assumed to be constant at 10 A. the load and the average current through
the diode will respectively be
+ M IL = 4A L ID D
1 F
V = 250V
A
Load
2mH ‘S’ V0
20V
1. The minimum time in sec for which the (A) 10 V, 2A (C) 40 V, 2 A

SCR M should be on is (B) 10 V, 8 A (D) 40 V, 8 A
(A) 280 s (C) 70 s
EE-2009
(B) 140 s (D) 0 s
5. In the chopper circuit shown, the main
thyristor (TM) is operated at a duty ratio
2. The average output voltage of the
of 0.8 which is much larger the
chopper will be
commutation interval. If the maximum
(A) 70 V (C) 35 V
allowable reapplied dv/dt on T is
(B) 47.5 V (D) 0 V
50 V s what should be the theoretical
minimum value of C1? Assume current
EE-2007
ripple through L0 to be negligible.
3. The circuit in the figure is a current
commutated dc – dc chopper where, T
Th is the main SCR and Th is the
T
auxiliary SCR. The load current is
constant at 10 A. Th is ON. Th is
8Ω
triggered at t=0. Th is turned OFF
between.
Th (A) 0.2 (C) 2
(B) 0.02 (D) 20
Th EE-2010
6. The power electronic converter shown in
Load the figure has a single-pole double-throw
230V 25.28µH
10
switch. The pole P of the switch is
connected alternately to throws A and B.
The converter shown is a _______
(A) 0 µs t 25 µs A L
P
(B) 25 µs t 50 µs
V B
(C) 50µs t 75 µs V
(D) 75 µs t 100 µs
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A) step-down chopper 100

(buck converter)
(B) half-wave rectifier 12V
Q 20
(C) step-up chopper (boost converter)
(D) full-wave rectifier 470
EE-2011
7. A voltage commutated chopper circuit, 9. The average source current in Amps in
operated at 500 Hz, is shown below. steady – state is
M i 10 (A) 3/2 (C) 5/2
i
(B) 5/3 (D) 15/4
A
0.1µF i
10. The PEAK-TO-PEAK source current ripple
200V LOAD in amps is
1mH
(A) 0.96 (C) 0.192
(B) 0.144 (D) 0.288
If the maximum value of load current is
EE-2014
10 A, then the maximum current through
11. Figure (i) show the circuit diagram of a
the main (M) and auxiliary (A) thyristors
chopper. The switch S in the circuit in
will be
figure (i) is switched such that the voltage
(A) i 12 and i 10
V across the diode has the wave shape as
(B) i 12 and i 2
shown in figure (ii). The capacitance C is
(C) i 10 and i 12
large so that the voltage across it is
(D) i 10 and i 8
constant. If switch S and the diode are
EE-2012 ideal, the peak to peak ripple (in A) in the
8. In the circuit shown, an ideal switch S is inductor current is___________
S 1m
operated at 100 kHz with a duty ratio of
50 . Given that ∆ic is 1.6 A peak-to-peak 100V V oad
and I0 is 5 A dc, the peak current in S is
S igure i
V
i
100V
V
24 V
R
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 t ms
(A) 6.6 A (C) 5.8 A
igure ii
(B) 5.0 A (D) 4.2 A
12. A step-up chopper is used to feed a load at
EE-2013
400 V dc from a 250 V dc source. The
Common Data Questions 9 and 10
inductor current is continuous. f the ‘off’
In the figure shown below, the chopper
time of the switch is 20 µs, the switching
feeds a resistive load from a battery
frequency of the chopper in kHz
source. MOSFET Q is switched at 250 kHz,
is_____________
with a duty ratio of 0.4. All elements of
the circuit are assumed to be ideal.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. B] t t t ∆t
Minimum time for which SCRm should be t √
ON is same as time for which C charges
from + 250 V to 250V. √10 25.28 sec
T= √ √20 10 140 sec. 50 sec
Option (C) is correct.
2. [Ans. C] Since commutation of Thm starts from
t1=50 sec
V V 250
= 35V 4. [Ans. C]
When S is ON, V = 0V and = 0A
3. [Ans. C] When S is off, V 20 V and = 4A
Th im I0 v 20
∴ V 40V
D 1 d 1 0.5
Th 0.5 × 4 = 2A
LOAD
+ c L
230 V 5. [Ans. A]
+
vc 0.8
dv
V 100 V and 50V sec
dt
At t =0 v V i 0 and i . V V
At t =0, Th is triggered, a resonant 0.8 100 ⇒ 80 V
current i designs to flows from C V 80
i 10
throughTh , L and back to C.
R 8
During commutation of main SCR T
This resonant current is given by
load current will be flown through
capacitor.
i V √ sin t
dv
∴ i
sin t dt
10 10
After half a cycle of i ,t - i 0 ⇒ ⇒ 0.2 f
50
V V and i . As i tends to
reverse. Th is turned off. 6. [Ans. A]
When V V , right hand plate has B and D are not possible options as the
positive polarity , resonant current i now input is dc.
builds up through C, L, D and Th . As this
P→ V V (1 e )
current of Th , net forward current
i i begins to decrease. Finally P →  V = V .e where T= L/R
when i in the reversed direction attains If L is large enough,
the value I0 , im is reduced to zero and Thm V V when P →
is turned off. 0 when P →
i i sin ∆t 0 ∴ step down chopper
1
∆t sin ( )
So, Th is turned off between

th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. A] 10. [Ans. C]

When main thyristor (M) is turned on, an Given circuit :
oscillatory current in the curcuit C, M, L
and diode is set up and it is given by
V 12 V 470 20
i t V √ sin t
We have to find out peak to peak source
Peak value of current through capacitor ripple current here ource current and
inductor current are same peak to peak
V√ source ripple = peak to peak inductor
current
0.1 10 V
200 √ T → uty ratio
1 10
Given f = 250 k
2 1
Current through main thyristor So T
250 10
i t
sin t i
So, maximum value of
i Vin
10 2
12
When auxiliary thyristor (A) is turned on T T
t
capacitor voltage applies a reverse
i. e. Peak – peak inductor current
voltage across main thyristor and main
. .
thyristor is turned off. The load current is T
now carried by c and auxiliary thyristor. 0.192
Current through auxiliary thyristor
i 11. [Ans. *] Range 2.49 to 2.51
Maximum value of iA = maximum value of For 0 t 0.05 ms
I0 = 10A V 100 V
or 0.05 t 0.1 ms
8. [Ans. C] V V
∆ .
Peak Current = I0 + 5 5.8 Using volt-sec, across inductor
100 V 0.05 V 0.05 0
9. [Ans. B] V 50
v 50
V Slope
1 50
Slope
12
20 V
1 0.4
20
1
20
Given that all are ideal
0.05 0.1
P P
⇒ V 20 1 di
∴ 5 3 V
dt
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
di V v V
⇒i ∫ dt t
dt
Peak to peak current i t
50
0.05 10
50 0.05 10
2.5
10
12. [Ans. *] Range 31.0 to 31.5

V 1
V 1
400 1
250 1
8 8 5
3
8
5
T 20 S
8
T 32 s
10
f 31.25 k
32
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Inverters
EE-2006 Where V1 is the rms value of the

1. A single- phase inverter is operated in fundamental component of the output
PWM mode generating a single-pulse of voltage. The THD of output ac voltage
width 2d in the centre of each half cycle wave form is
as shown in figure. It is found that the (A) 65.65% (C) 31.83%
output voltage is free from 5th harmonic (B) 48.42% (D) 30.49%
for pulse width 1440. What will be
percentage of 3rd harmonic present in the EE-2008
output voltage (Vo3/Vo1max)? 4. A 3-phase Voltage Source Inverter is
operated in 180° conduction mode. Which
V one of the following statements is true?
2d →
(A) Both pole-voltage and line-voltage
3 2
will have 3rd harmonic components.
2 2 (B) pole-voltage will have 3rd harmonic
2d → component but line-voltage will be
V
free from 3rd harmonic
(A) 0.0% (C) 31.7% (C) Line-voltage will have 3rd harmonic
(B) 19.6% (D) 53.9% component but pole-voltage will be
free from 3rd harmonic
EE-2007 (D) Both pole-voltage and line-voltage
2. “Six OS Ts connected in a bridge will be free from 3rd harmonic
configuration (having no other power components.
device) MUST be operated as a Voltage
Source nverter VS ”. This statement is 5. A single phase voltage source inverter is
(A) True, because being majority carrier feeding a purely inductive load as shown
devices, MOSFETs are voltage driven in the figure. The inverter is operated at
(B) True, because MOSFETs have 50 Hz in 180 square wave mode. Assume
inherently anti-parallel diodes that the load current does not have any dc
(C) False, because it can be operated component. The peak value of the
both as Current Source Inverter inductor current i0 will be________
(CSI) or a VSI
(D) False, because MOSFETs can be
0.1 H
operated as excellent constant
200 V
current sources in the saturation I0
region.
3. A Single –phase voltage source inverter is (A) 6.37 A (C) 20 A

controlled in a single pulse-width (B) 10 A (D) 40A
modulated mode with a pulse width of
EE-2009
1500 in each half cycle. Total harmonic
6. The Current Source Inverter shown in
distortion is defined as
figure is operated by alternately turning
√
THD = × 100, on thyristor pairs T T and T T . If
the load is purely resistive, the theoretical
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
maximum output frequency obtainable EE-2013

will be Statement for Linked Answer Questions
T T 8 and 9
0.1
The Voltage Source Inverter (VSI) shown
+ in the figure below is switched to provide
a 50 Hz, square-wave ac output voltage V
10 10 A
across an R-L load. Reference polarity of
+ v and reference direction of the output
current i are indicated in the figure. It
T 0.1 T
given that R = 3 ohms, L = 9.55mH.
(A) 125 kHz (C) 500 kHz
Q Q
(B) 250 kHz (D) 50 kHz
L
V
EE-2011 v i0 R
7. A three-phase current source inverter Q Q
used for the speed control of an induction
motor is to be realized using MOSFET
switches as shown below. Switches S to 8. In the interval when v0 < 0 and i0>0 the
S are identical switches. pair of devices which conducts the load
current is
50H (A) Q Q (C)
z S S S (B) Q Q (D)
. .
9. Appropriate transition i.e., Zero Voltage
S S S Switching (ZVS)/Zero Current Switching
(ZCS) of the IGBTs during
turn-on/ turnoff is
The proper configuration for realizing (A) ZVS during turn – off
switches S to S is (B) ZVS during turn – on
(A) A (B) A (C) ZCS during turn – off
(D) ZCS during turn – on
EE-2014
10. The figure shows one period of the output
voltage of an inverter. should be chosen
such that 60 90 . If rms value of
B B
the fundamental component is 50 V, then
(C) A in degree is _____________
(D) A
100V 100V 100V
0 180 180 360 t

180 360 degree
100V 100V 100V

B B
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
11. A single-phase voltage source inverter

shown in figure is feeding power to a
load. The triggering pulses of the devices
are also shown in the figure.
S S
O i
V oad
S S
S S
S S
2
If the load current is sinusoidal and is
zero at 0 2 . . , the node voltage V
has the waveform
V 2
V
2
V 2
V 2
V
2
V 2
V
2
V 2
V
2
V 2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. B] 4V n
The output of inverter = v v ∑ sin sin nd sin n t
n 2
4V
∴ v ∑ sin nd sin n t sin n 2 RMS value of fundamental component of
n output voltage.
Here pulse width = 2d =144 1 4V
V [ sin 75 ] 0.87 V
⇒ d 72 √2
4V Total Harmonic Distortion
v sin 72 sin t for n 1
4V V V
v sin 3 72 sin 3 t for n 3 T √ 100
3 V
V sin 3 72
20.6 0.913 V 0.87V
V max √ 100
sin 72 0.87V
Option (B) is correct as it is nearer to 31.83
20.6%.
4. [Ans. D]
2. [Ans. B] Line voltage and pole voltage of 3 – ϕ VSI
As MOSFET have internally antiparallel operated in 180 conduction mode can be
diodes, MOSFET cannot withstand expressed by the fourier series as follows.
reverse voltage, due to which MOSFET 4V n n
cannot be as current source inverter V ∑ cos sin t .. i
n 6 6
(CSI).
or n 3 cos cos 0
3. [Ans. C] 2V
V0 V ∑ sin n t ii
n
It is clear from eq. (i) as (ii) both check
d voltage and line voltage will be from 3rd
2
3 harmonic components.
Vs
2d 2
t
2d 2
5. [Ans. B]
V0
( d) 2 vs
2 Vs
Pulse width = 2d = 150 2
t
⇒ d 75 -vs
1 i0
V √ ∫ V d t iP
2
t
iP
2d 5
V√ V√ 0.913 V
6
Output voltage in fourier series.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Load current increases linearly from cannot be used in a CSI. So, a diode is
IP to IP during 0 < t . Where Ip = added in series with the devices for
Peak value of i0 reverse blocking.
1
⇒ t sec
2 50 100 8. [Ans. D]
t t 0i and t t i V
di
V
dt
During 0< t i
V V 200 V
⇒ 200 0.1 . /
t 0
200
⇒ 2 t
0.1
2000 1
10
2 100
Voltage and current waveform of a full
6. [Ans. B]
bridge inverter
The circuit shown in the figure is a single
Shaded portion shows the condition
phase bridge auto sequential commutated
where V 0 i 0
inverter (1-phase ASCI)
Conducts the load current
Thyristor pairs T T and T T are
alternatively switches to obtain a nearly
9. [Ans. D]
square wave load current. Two
Turn on points for thyristors
commutating capacitors, one in the
Q Q Q Q are given
upper half and the other in the lower
∴ A, B, C represents points where current
half are connected as shown
cross over zero. Zero current switch
Diodes to are connected in series
(ZCS) during turn on.
with each SCR to prevent the
commutation capacitors from discharging
10. [Ans. *] Range 76.5 to 78.0
into the load. The inverter output
Fourier series
frequency is controlled by adjusting the
period T through the triggering circuits of a
f t ∑ a cos n t
thyristors. 2
The theoretical maximum output
frequency obtainable ∑ b sin n t
1
f Fundamental component n = 1
4R
1 ⇒ a cos t b sin t
4 10 0.1 10 1
a ∫ f t cos t d t
250k z
7. [Ans. A]
Device used in current source inverter
(CSI) must have reverse voltage blocking
capacity. Therefore, device such as GTOs,
power transistors and power MOSFETs
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
100
0∫ cos t d t ∫ cos t d t
∫ cos t d t
∫ cos t d t
∫ cos t d t
∫ cos t d t 1
⇒a 0
1
b ∫ f t sin t d t
100
[8 cos 4]
400
b [1 2 cos ]
400
R S value [1 2 cos ] 50
√2
⇒ cos 0.225
76.99
11. [Ans. D]
During to s s ON
V
So V
2
During to anti parallel diode of
s and s will conduct to maintain the
flow of load current in positive direction
V
V
2
uring to
Antiparallel diode of s and s conducts to
maintain flow of load current in negative
direction
V
V
2
During to 2
s s conducts
V
so V
2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
AC Voltage Regulators and Cycloconverters
EE-2008 EE-2012
1. In the single-phase voltage controller Common Data for Questions 2 and 3
circuit shown in the figure, for what range In the 3-phase inverter circuit shown, the
of triggering angle ( ), the output voltage load is balanced and the gating scheme is
(Vo) is not controllable? 180o conduction mode. All the switching
T1 devices are ideal.
S S S
50 V R 20
+
Vs ~ T2 V0
j50
V
S S S
R
R
3-phase inverter
3-phase balanced load
(A) 00 < < 450
2. The rms value of load phase voltage is
(B) 450 < < 1350
(A) 106.1 V (C) 212.2 V
(C) 900 < < 1800 (B) 141.4 V (D) 282.8 V
(D) 1350 < <1800
3. If the dc bus voltage Vd = 300V, the power
consumed by 3-phase load is
(A) 1.5 kW (C) 2.5 kW
(B) 2.0 kW (D) 3.0 kW
1. [Ans. A]
For 0 < < ϕ, V is not controllable
where ϕ= tan ( ⁄R)
50
ϕ tan ( )
50
ϕ tan 1
ϕ 45
2. [Ans. B]
RMS Value of line voltage = VL = √ VS

√
RMS value of phase voltage = = VS
√
√
= x 300 = 141.42V
3. [Ans. D]
.
P=3. =3x = 3000W
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Applications of Power Electronics
EE-2006 power factor of the ac mains at half the

1. The speed of a 3 – phase, 440 V, 50 Hz rated speed, is
induction motor is to be controlled over a (A) 0.354 (C) 0.90
wide range from zero speed to 1.5 time (B) 0.372 (D) 0.955
the rated speed using a 3-phase voltage
source inverter. It is desired to keep the 3. A single-phase,230 V, 50 Hz ac mains fed
flux in the machine constant in the step down transformer (4:1) is supplying
constant torque region by controlling the power to a half-wave uncontrolled ac-dc
terminal voltage as the frequency converter used for charging a battery
changes. The inverter output voltage vs (12V dc) with the series current limiting
frequency characteristic should be resistor being 19.04 . The charging
(A) V current is ______
(A) 2.43 A (C) 1.22 A
(B) 1.65 A (D) 1.0 A
f
50 EE-2008
(B) 4. A 220 V, 20 A, 1000 rpm, separately
V
excited dc motor has an armature
resistance of 2.5 Ω. The motor is
controlled by a step down chopper with a
frequency of 1 kHz. The input dc voltage
f
50 to the chopper is 250 V The duty cycle of
(C) the chopper for the motor to operate at a
V
speed of 600 rpm delivering the rated
torque will be _____________
(A) 0.518 (C) 0.852
(B) 0.608 (D) 0.902
f
50
(D) V 5. A 220 V, 1400 rpm, 40A separately
excited dc motor has an armature
resistance of 0.4 Ω. The motor is fed from
a single phase circulating current dual
f converter with an input ac line voltage of
50 220 V (rms). The approximate firing
angles of the dual converter for motoring
EE-2007 operation at 50% of rated torque and
2. A Three-phase, 440V, 50Hz ac mains fed 1000 rpm will be _______________
thyristor bridge is feeding a 440 V dc, (A) 430, 1370 (C) 390, 1410
15kW, 1500rpm separately excited dc (B) 43 , 47
0 (D) 390,510
motor with a ripple free continuous
current in the dc link under all operating 6. A single phase fully controlled converter
conditions. Neglecting the losses, the bridge is used for electrical braking of a
separately excited dc motor. The dc motor
load is represented by an equivalent
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
circuit as shown in the figure. Assume EE-2013

that the load inductance is sufficient to 7. The separately excited dc motor in the
ensure continuous and ripple free load figure below has a rated armature current
current the firing angle of the bridge for a of 20 A and a rated armature voltage of
load current of 150V. An ideal chopper switching at 5
I0 = 10A will be _____________ kHz is used to control the armature
voltage. If La =0.1mH, Ra = 1 , neglecting
2𝛀
armature reaction, the duty ratio of the
chopper to obtain 50% of the rated
230v,
50hz
torque at the rated speed and the rated
150V field current is
(A) 44o (C) 129o La, Ra

(B) 51o (D) 136o 200 V
(A) 0.4 (C) 0.6

(B) 0.5 (D) 0.7
1. [Ans. A] .
= 0.354
√ .
In induction motor ϕ V/f
If ϕ is constant then V f
3. [Ans. D]
(Linear relation)
2. [Ans. A] 19.04
230 V 57.5 V
V 440 V f 50 z → 3 phase Supply 50 Hz
12 V
specification.
V 440 V P 15kw N 1500 r. p. m
→ Rating of motor N
V V ( )
If losses are neglected, then R=0 and N
1
V = E = 440 V 230 ( )
If speed in the separately excited motor 4
57.5 V
become half, then V = E =220 V
Power P = 15 kw sin ( )
V
P= I0 E
12
15 10 sin ( ) 12.04
⇒ 34.09 57.5
440 180 12.04 169.76
Rms Source current = I0√
1
∫ V sin t d t
34.09 √2 2 R
√3 1
27.83 *V cos t +
2 R
Supply power factor at half rated speed
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE Question Bank Power Electronics
1 7. [Ans. D]
[V [cos cos ]
2 R 20
] V Ra
1 150 20 1
2 19.04 130 V
*57.5√2 cos 169.76 cos 12.04
10
12 (169.76 12.04 2
N N
)+ V Ra
180
130 10 1
1
=140
V 140
4. [Ans. B] 0.7
V 200
At rated conditions, rad/sec
V 220 2.5 20

At required conditions,
V 2.5 20
 × 250 = 50
 = = 0.608
5. [Ans. C]
At rated conditions, Vt = Eb + Iara = Km m
+ Iara  Km 204 x 60 2800 Nm
At required conditions, armature
current 20 and N = 1000
rpm
V cos r
√
 cos
20 0.4
∴ 39 and 141
6. [Ans. C]
10 ; V 230√2 V
E = 150 V; r 2Ω
cos r
√
 cos 150 20
 cos =
√ √
 = 129°
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
GATE QUESTION BANK Electrical Machines
Transformer
EE-2006 (C) possible at leading power factor load

1. In transformers, which of the following (D) possible at lagging power factor load
statements is valid?
(A) In an open circuit test, copper losses 6. A Single-phase 50 kVA, 250V/500V two
are obtained while in short circuit winding transformer has an efficiency of
test, core losses are obtained 95% at full load, unity power factor. If it is
(B) In an open circuit test, current is reconfigured as a 500V / 750V
drawn at high power factor autotransformer, its efficiency at its new
(C) In a short circuit test, current is rated load at unity power factor will be
drawn at zero power factor (A) 95.752% (C) 98.276%
(D) In an open circuit test, current is (B) 97.851% (D) 99.241%
drawn at low power factor
Common Data for Questions 7, 8 and 9
2. Two transformers are to be operated in A three phase squirrel cage induction
parallel such that they share load in motor has a starting current of seven
proportion to their kVA ratings. The times the full load current and full load
rating of the first transformer is 500 kVA slip of 5%
and its pu leakage impedance is 0.05 pu. If 7. If an autotransformer is used for reduced
the rating of second transformer is voltage starting to provide 1.5 per unit
250 kVA, then its pu leakage impedance is starting torque, the autotransformer ratio
(A) 0.20 (C) 0.05 (%) should be
(B) 0.10 (D) 0.025 (A) 57.77% (C) 78.25%
(B) 72.56% (D) 81.33%
Common Data Question for 3 and 4
A 300 kVA transformer has 95% 8. If a star-delta starter is used to start this
efficiency at full load 0.8 pf lagging and induction motor, the per unit starting
96% efficiency at half load, unity pf. torque will be
3. The iron loss (Pi) and copper loss (Pc) in (A) 0.607 (C) 1.225
kW, under full load operation are (B) 0.816 (D) 1.616
(A) Pc = 4.12, Pi = 8.51
9. If a starting torque of 0.5 per unit is
(B) Pc = 6.59, Pi = 9.21
required then the per unit starting
(C) Pc = 8.51, Pi = 4.12
current should be
(D) Pc = 12.72, Pi = 3.07
(A) 4.65 (C) 3.16
(B) 3.75 (D) 2.13
4. What is the maximum efficiency (in %) at
unity pf load? EE-2008
(A) 95.1 (C) 96.4 10. Three single-phase transformers are
(B) 96.2 (D) 98.1 connected to form a 3-phase transformer
bank. The transformers are connected in
EE-2007 the following manner
5. In a transformer, zero voltage regulation
at full load is
(A) not possible
(B) possible at unity power factor load
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(A)
a2 a1 ers
a1 a1
a1 a1
24V 2 2.5
t(s)
a1 b2 b1
a1 a1 48V
(B)
c2 c1
a1 a1 e
Primary a1Secondary a1
The transformer connection will be 48 V
represented by 1
t(s)
(A) Y d0 (C) Y d6 24 V 2 2.5
(B) Y d1 (D) Y d11 (C)

ers
11. It is desired to measure parameters of
⁄ , 2KVA, single-phase 48V
transformer. The Following wattmeters 24V

t(s)
are available in a laboratory 0 1 2 2.5
W1: 250 V, 10 A, Low Power Factor (D)
W2: 250 V, 5 A, Low Power Factor ers
W3: 150 V, 10 A, High Power Factor
0 1 2 2.5
W4: 150 V, 5 A, High Power Factor t(s)
24V
The wattmeters used in open circuit test
48V
and short circuit test of the transformer
will respectively be
(A) W1 and W2 (C) nd EE-2009
(B) nd (D) nd 13. The single phase, 50Hz, iron core
transformer in the circuit has both the
12. The core of a two-winding transformer is vertical arms of cross sectional area
subjected to a magnetic flux variation as 20cm2 and both the horizontal arms of
indicated in the figure. cross sectional area 10cm2. If the two
windings shown were wound instead on
p
+ r opposite horizontal arms, the mutual
+ inductance will
e 100 200 e
q s
ф( b)
0.12
(A) double
(B) remain same
(C) be halved
t(s) (D) become one quarter
0 1 2 2.5
1
The induced
2 emf (ers) in the secondary
winding
2. as a function of time will be of
5
the form
t(
s)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Common Data for Question 14 and 15

i(t)
A a
30 ms
10A
B b
t
0
C c 5ms 10ms 15ms 20ms 25 ms 30ms
N 10A
25 ms
The star-delta transformer shown

above is excited on the star side with
16. The peak voltage across A and B, with S
a balanced, 4-wire, 3-phase, sinusoidal
open is
voltage supply of rated magnitude. The
transformer is under no load condition. (A) (C)
(B) 800V (D)
14. With both S1 and S2 open, the core flux
waveform will be 17. If the waveform of i(t) is changed to
(A) A sinusoid at fundamental frequency i(t)=10 sin (100 πt) , the peak voltage
(B) Flat-topped with third harmonic across A and B with S closed is
(C) Peaky with third-harmonic (A) 400V (C) 320V
(D) None of these (B) 240V (D) 160V
15. With S2 closed and S1 open, the current Statement for Linked Answer Questions:
waveform in the delta winding will be 18 & 19
(A) a sinusoid at fundamental frequency A C
(B) flat-topped with third harmonic
(C) only third-harmonic Coil 1 Coil 2
(D) none of these B D
Common Data Questions: 16 and 17 The figure above shows coils 1 and 2,
The circuit diagram shows a two with dot markings as shown, having 4000
winding, lossless transformer with no and 6000 turns respectively. Both coils
leakage flux, excited from a current have a rated current of 25A. Coil 1 is
source, i(t), whose waveform is also excited with single phase, 400V, 50Hz
shown. The transformer has a supply
m gnetizing induct nce of 4 /π mH.
1:1 A
18. The coils are to be connected to obtain
a single phase, 400/1000V, auto
S
transformer to drive a load of 10kVA.
i(t) Which of the options given should be
Ω
exercised to realize the required auto
B transformer?
(A) Connect A and D; Common B
(B) Connect B and D; Common C
(C) Connect A and C; Common B
(D) Connect A and C; Common D
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
19. In the autotransformer obtained in (A) ( +j )Ω

Question 18, the current in each coil is (B) (0.866 – j . ) Ω
(A) Coil 1 is 25 A and Coil 2 is 10 A (C) ( .866 + j . ) Ω
(B) Coil 1 is 10 A and Coil 2 is 25 A (D) ( +j )Ω
(C) Coil 1 is 10 A and Coil 2 is 15 A
(D) Coil 1 is 15 A and Coil 2 is 10 A EE-2011
22. A single-phase air core transformer, fed
EE-2010 from a rated sinusoidal supply, is
20. A single-phase transformer has a turns operating at no load. The steady state
ratio of 1:2, and is connected to a purely magnetizing current drawn by the
resistive load as shown in the figure. The transformer from the supply will have the
magnetizing current drawn is 1A, and the waveform
secondary current is 1A. If core losses and (A) i
le k ge re ct nce’s re neglected, the
primary current is
1A t
1:2
~ i
(B)
(A) 1.41A (C) 2.24A

(B) 2A (D) 3A t
21. A balanced star-connected and purely

resistive load is connected at the
secondary of a star-delta transformer as (C) i
shown in figure. The line-to-line voltage
rating of the transformer is 110V/220V.
Neglecting the non-idealities of the
t
transformer, the impedance ‘Z’ of the
equivalent star-connected load, referred
to the primary side o the transformer, is:
110/220V (D) i
r
R
4Ω
4Ω 4Ω
b
Y t
v
B
R
EE-2012
Z
23. A single phase 10 kVA, 50 Hz transformer
Z Z with 1 kV primary winding draws 0.5 A
Y
and 55 W, at rated voltage and frequency,
on no load. A second transformer has a
B
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
core with all its linear dimensions 26. A single phase, 50 kVA, 1000V/100 V two
√ times the corresponding dimensions winding transformer is connected as an
of the first transformer. The core material autotransformer as shown in the figure.
and lamination thickness are the same in
both transformers. The primary windings
of both the transformers have the same
number of turns. If a rated voltage of 2 kV
at 50 Hz is applied to the primary of the
second transformer, then the no load
current and power, respectively, are
(A) 0.7 A, 77.8 W (C) 1A, 110 W
(B) 0.7 A, 155.6 W (D) 1A, 220 W The kVA rating of the autotransformer is
_____________
EE-2014
24. The core loss of a single phase, 230/115V, 27. For a single phase, two winding
50 Hz power transformer is measured transformer, the supply frequency and
from 230 V side by feeding the primary voltage are both increased by 10%. The
(230 V side) from a variable voltage, percentage changes in the hysteresis loss
variable frequency source while keeping and eddy current loss, respectively, are
the secondary open circuited. The core (A) 10 and 21 (C) 21 and 10
loss is measured to be 1050 W for 230 V, (B) 10 and 21 (D) 21 and 10
50 Hz input. The core loss is again
28. An open circuit test is performed on
measured to be 500 W for 138 V, 30 Hz
50 Hz transformer, using variable
input. The hysteresis and eddy current
frequency source and keeping V/f ratio
losses of the transformer for 230 V, 50 Hz
constant, to separate its eddy current and
input are respectively,
hysteresis losses. The variation of core
(A) 508 W and 542 W.
loss/frequency as function of frequency is
(B) 468 W and 582 W.
shown in the figure
(C) 498 W and 552 W.
(D) 488 W and 562 W.
( /Hz)
25. Assuming an ideal transformer, the f
thevenin’s equiv lent volt ge nd

impedance as seen from the terminals
x and y for the circuit in figure are
Ω f(Hz)
The hysteresis and eddy current losses of
x the transformer at 25 Hz respectively are
sin ( t) (A) 250 W and 2.5 W
(B) 250 W and 62.5W
y (C) 312.5 W and 62.5 W
(D) 312.5 W and 250 W
(A) sin( t) , 4Ω (C) sin( t) , Ω
(B) sin( t), Ω (D) sin( t) , . Ω
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
29. The load shown in the figure absorbs (A) 5mH, 20mH and 40mH
4 kW at a power factor of 0.89 lagging. (B) 5mH, 80mH and 40mH
Ω (C) 25mH, 10mH and 20mH
(D) 45mH, 30mH and 20mH
c source
Hz
~ Z
31. For a specified input voltage and
frequency, if the equivalent radius of the
Assuming the transformer to be ideal, the
core of a transformer is reduced by half,
value of the reactance X to improve the
the factor by which the number of turns
input power factor to unity is _____
in the primary should change to maintain
the same no load current is
30. The parameters measured for a
(A) 1/4 (C) 2
220V/110V, 50 Hz, single-phase (B) 1/2 (D) 4
transformer are:
Self-inductance of primary winding
= 45mH
Self-inductance of secondary winding
= 30 mH
Mutual inductance between primary and
secondary windings = 20 mH
Using the above parameters, the leakage
( , ) and magnetizing ( )
inductances as referred to primary side in
the equivalent circuit respectively, are

1. [Ans. D] Circuit model in Open-Circuit test
In open-circuit test, the transformer
draws only exciting current. The exciting
Current is only magnetizing in nature and
is proportional to the sinusoidal flux and
in phase with it, this is represented by
Lagging the induce emf by .
However the presence of eddy-currents,
and hysteresis, both demand the flow of
active power into the system and as a
consequence the exciting current has
another component in phase with .
Thus the exciting current lags the induced
emf by an angle slightly less than
making power factor very low
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
2. [Ans. B] 100 A 200 A
For generator
500 V 250 V
p.u le k ge imped nce ∝
500 kVA × 0.05 = 250 kVA × x
200 A
∴x . .
3. [Ans. C]
300 A
Efficiency 750 V
( ) .
η % ( ) .
… (i) 500 V
. ( )
96% = … (ii)
. ( ) .
From, equation (i) ,
p + p = 12.63 KVA rating of transformer
From equation (ii)
0.25 p + p = 6.25 For auto transformer,
From above two equations η = 98.276%
.
p 8. , p 4.
7. [Ans. C]
4. [Ans. B]
. %
x=√ .6 6
.
. . / x
η = 96.2%
. .
. ( ) x .
x = 78.25%
5. [Ans. C]
Voltage regulation = I( cos + sin )
8. [Ans. B]
(For lagging power factor)
Voltage regulation = I ( cos sin ) . /
(For leading power factor)
( ) . = 0.816
Voltage regulation = I( cos sin )
=0
9. [Ans. C]
t n
. / f
So zero voltage regulation is possible for
. ( ) .
leading power factor
When ∴ p.u st rting current . 6
t n 10. [Ans. B]
A2
6. [Ans. C] A
η .
= 0.95 =
∴w + w = 2.631
C B
C2 B2
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
d
a2 e
dt
d* . 4( . t)+
c a
dt
c 48
c2 a N
b e
b 48
b2
t(s)
∴ The possible connections is Yd 2 2.5
4
11. [Ans. D]
For open circuit test [on LV side ]
The current is of 4 to 8% of full load 13. [Ans. A]
current ≅ .4
nd is of ow power f ctor ≅ .
∴ W2 is required
oil oil
For short circuit test [on HV side]
The current is full lo d current ≅ 8.
The power f ctor is high ≅ . to .6
Reluctance of the magnetic circuit
∴ 3 is required
remains same in both the cases other
windings are wound on horizontal arms
12. [Ans. B]
or vertical arms. Self-inductance of a coil
Induced emf (e ) in the secondary
winding is given by
d elut nce
e where ∝
dt
During O t When the coils are wound on vertical
The flux ( ) increases linearly with time arms.
. t ( ) ∝( ) nd ( ) ∝ ( )
d ross-section l re
e cm
dt
d( . t) Assuming square cross-sectional area.
dt Side of square
4 √
During t Let length of the coil = L
is const nt No. of turns
.
d ∝
e 4 √
dt
d( . ) ( ) ∝( ) ∝
dt
uring t . Similarly,
decre ses line rly with time ( ) ∝
. 4( . t)
utu l induc t nce
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
m ∝ √( ) ( ) When S is closed, the same induced

voltage appears across the Resistive load
∝ √( )( ) ∴ pe k volt ge cross & 4
m ∝ / 18. [Ans. A]
Similarly, when the coils are placed on Hint: Polarity should be such that the
horizontal arms voltages of two coils are additive.
10 C
m
m
m 25 D
A 1000V
m m 15
There, mutual inductance gets double 400V
when windings are placed on horizontal B
arms.
19. [Ans. D]
14. [Ans. B]
For sinusoidal excitation, the flux is a flat To supply 10kVA Load I2 =
topped wave with 3rd harmonic. As S1 & S2
both are opened there is no closed path 4
for the circulation of 3rd harmonic By applying KCL I1=25-10= 15A
currents. So no compensating flux is
produced for 3rd harmonic flux. Hence 20. [Ans. C]
flux remains as flat topped wave. Secondary current
15. [Ans. C] Secondary current referred to primary

With S2 closed, there is a closed path side
available for the 3rd harmonic currents
within the phases. As the transformer is ( )
under no load condition only 3rd As the core losses are neglected,
harmonic current will be flowing in the magnetizing current (Im) will be in phase
delta connected secondary. with flux ( ). Therefore Im lags the
induced emf by
16. [Ans. D]
V=M (slope of . t ch r) Primary current
= 0 1 Volts +
+
17. [Ans. A] . 4 6. 6
i(t) = 10 sin (100π t) A
21. [Ans. D]
induced emf on secondary E2 = M
Transformer wise,
4 √
π nd
π cos( πt ) So, turn ratio = √ = 2√
4 cos( πt)
π So, Z = +
( √ )
4 sin . πt + /
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
22. [Ans. C] 26. [Ans. *] Range 545 to 555

It is an air core transformer. So, there is urrent r ting of winding
no saturation effect.
23. [Ans. B] uto tr nsformer r ting ( )

We know k
√ π f
as N and f are constant 27. [Ans. A]
Given data:
, two winding transformer
.
} const nt
nd lso f . f f
i ∴ ∝ f, ∝f
d f f .
% ch nge
√ f
⟹
%
⟹i √ i f f
% ch nge
⟹i √ . f
( . )
ore loss ∝ volume of core %
∴
√ .6 28. [Ans. B]
.
Hysteresis k ( ) f
24. [Ans. A] f
. .
Hysteresis loss ∝ f k f k f( const nt)
. f
k ( ) f
f eddy k ( ) f
f
∝
f k f ( const nt)
eddy loss ∝ f k f k f
.
core loss t f ( + )
so k ( ) +k ( )
. . .
8
k ( ) +k ( 8) core loss t f
tf
k
86. 4 . k +k ( )
k
. (k + k )
Hysteresis k .
. 8 . k +k ………
eddy k ( )
ddy loss 4 .8 tf
Hysteresis = 508 k +k ( )
(k + k )
25. [Ans. A] k +k ………
k
Thevenin volt ge ( ) sin t sin t
k
Thevenin imped nce ( ) ( ) 4Ω t Hz Hysteresis
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
30. [Ans. B]
eddy current 6 .
Given data:
(or) Alternative method - transformer 220/110V, 50Hz
v Self-inductance of primary 4 mH
f. /
f Self-inductance of Secondary mH
v
f . / Mutual inductance between primary and
f
v secondary M = 20 mH
is const nt be the leakage & be the mutual
f
f& f inductance referred to primary side
f+ f Equivalent diagram of inductance
referred to primary
+ f
f
From graph, at 0 Hz
c
f
t Hz
+ f +
f
. where
t Hz 4 m ( m)
f w mH
f . ( ) 6 . w tt
( m) ( m) 8 mH
29. [Ans. *] Range 23 to 24 m 4 mH
n econd ry side
x 31. [Ans. C]
x ( ) x For same no load current
4
4k f l Hl
cos 4 Number of turns of coil
.8 4 H Magnetic flux density
4 l average length
sin .4 6
.8 H∝
4 . 6 ∝
Energy supplied by reactance to make ∝
unity power factor ∝
4 . 6 d
dt
4 . 6 So same voltage supply
. /
d d
( )
dt dt
4 . 6 4
4 πr
.66 (πr ) ( )
4 . 6 4
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Induction Motors
EE-2006 Blocked Rotor

No Load test :
1. For a single phase capacitor start test :
induction motor which of the following 400V 90 V
statements is valid? 6A 15 A
(A) The capacitor is used for power 1002 W 762 W
factor improvement Neglecting copper loss in no Load test and
(B) The direction of rotation can be core loss in Blocked Rotor test, estimate
changed by reversing the main motor’s full lo d efficiency.
winding terminals (A) 76 % (C) 82.4 %
(C) The direction of rotation cannot be (B) 81 % (D) 85 %
changed
(D) The direction of rotation can be EE-2007
changed by interchanging the supply 5. A three- phase squirrel cage induction
terminals motor has a starting torque of 150% and
maximum torque of 300% with respect to
2. The speed of a 4-pole induction motor is rated torque at rated voltage and rated
controlled by varying the supply frequency. Neglect the stator resistance
frequency while maintaining the ratio of and rotational losses. The value of slip for
supply voltage to supply frequency (V/f) maximum torque is
constant. At rated frequency of 50 Hz and (A) 13.48% (C) 18.92%
rated voltage of 400 V its speed is (B) 16.42% (D) 26.79%
1440 rpm. Find the speed at 30 Hz, if the
load torque is constant. EE-2008
(A) 882rpm (C) 840 rpm 6. A 230 V, 50 Hz 4-pole, single-Phase
(B) 864 rpm (D) 828 rpm
induction motor is rotating in the
clockwise (forward) direction at a speed
3. A 3 phase, 4 pole, 400 V, 50 Hz star
of 1425-rpm. If the rotor resistance at
connected induction motor has following
stand still is 7.8Ω. Then the effective rotor
circuit parameters
resistance in the backward branch of the
r . Ω, r 0.5Ω,
equivalent circuit will be
x = x ’ . Ω, x =35 Ω. The starting
(A) Ω (C) 8 Ω
torque when the motor is started direct –
(B) 4 Ω (D) 6Ω
on – line is (use approximate equivalent
circuit model) 7. A 400 V, 50 Hz, 30 hp, three-phase
(A) 63.6 Nm (C) 190.8 Nm induction motor is drawing 50 A current
(B) 74.3 Nm (D) 222.9 Nm
at 0.8 power factor lagging. The stator
and rotor copper losses are 1.5 kW and
4. A 3 phase, 10 kW, 400 V, 4 pole, 50 Hz,
900 W respectively. The friction and
star connected induction motor draws
windage losses are 1050 W and the core
on full lo d. t’s no lo d nd blocked
losses are 1200 W. The air-gap power of
rotor test data are given below:
the motor will be
(A) 23.06 kW (C) 25.01 kW
(B) 24.11 kW (D) 26.21 kW
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. A 400 V, 50 Hz, 4 pole, 1400 rpm, star 9. The speed of rotation of stator magnetic
connected squirrel cage induction motor field with respect to rotor structure will be
has the Following parameters referred to (A) 90 rpm in the direction of rotation,
the stator (B) 90 rpm in the opposite direction of
. Ω, = . Ω rotation.
Neglect stator resistance and core and (C) 1500 rpm in the direction of rotation
rotational losses of the motor (D) 1500 rpm in the opposite direction
The motor is controlled from a 3-phase of rotation
voltage source inverter with constant V/f
control. The stator line to line voltage 10. Neglecting all losses of both the machines,
(rms) and frequency to obtain the the dc generator power output and the
maximum torque at starting will be current through resistance (Rex) will
(A) 20.6 V, 2.7 Hz respectively be
(B) 133.3 V, 16.7 Hz (A) 96 W, 3.10 A
(C) 266.6 V, 33.3 Hz (B) 120 W, 3.46 A
(D) 323.3V, 40.3 Hz (C) 1504 W, 12.26 A
(D) 1880 W, 13.71 A
Common Data for Questions 9 and 10
A 3-phase, 440 V 50Hz. 4-pole, slip ring EE-2009
induction motor is fed from the rotor side 11. A 3-phase squirrel cage induction motor
through an auto transformer and the supplied from a balanced 3-phase source
stator is connected to variable resistance drives a mechanical load.
as shown in the figure. The torque-speed characteristics of the
motor
(solid curve) and of the load
(dotted curve) are shown. Of the two
equilibrium points A and B, which of the
following options correctly describes the
Induction stability of A and B?
Motor es
B
3 – phase,
50 Hz, + 220V Torque
Supply A
Auto Transformer
The motor is coupled to a 220 V,
separately excited, dc generator feeding 0 1.0 sync
power to fixed power to fixed resistance (A) A is stable B is unstable
of 10 Ω. Two-wattmeter method is used to (B) A is unstable B is stable
measure the input power to induction (C) Both are stable
motor. The variable resistance is adjusted (D) Both are unstable
such that the motor runs at 1410 rpm and
the following readings were recorded 12. A 220V, 50Hz, single-phase induction
W1 = 1800 W, W2 = motor has the following connection
diagram and winding orientations shown.
is the axis of the main stator winding
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(M1M2) and AA' is that of the auxiliary EE-2011

winding (A1A2). Directions of the 14. A three-phase 440V, 6pole, 50 Hz, squirrel
winding axes indicate direction of flux cage induction motor is running at a slip
when currents in the windings are in of 5%. The speed of stator magnetic field
the directions shown. Parameters of with respect to rotor magnetic field and
each winding are indicated. When switch speed of rotor with respect to stator
S is closed, the motor magnetic field are
M1 (A) zero, 5 rpm
r . Ω m
Ra Ω (B) zero, 955 rpm
. /πH
La = H M2 (C) 1000 rpm, 5 rpm
(D) 1000 rpm, 955 rpm
S A1 A2
220V A2 A2
50HZ EE-2012
M 15. The slip of an induction motor normally
does not depend on
(A) Rotor Speed
A (B) Synchronous speed
Rotor (C) Shaft torque
(D) Core-loss component
’
16. The locked rotor current in a 3-phase,
(A) rotates clockwise
star connected 15 kW, 4-pole, 230 V,
(B) rotates anticlockwise
50 Hz induction motor at rated conditions
(C) does not rotate
is 50 A. Neglecting losses and magnetizing
(D) rotates momentarily and comes to a
current, the approximate locked rotor line
halt
current drawn when the motor is
connected to a 236 V, 57 Hz supply is
EE-2010
(A) 58.5 A (C) 42.7 A
13. A balanced three-phase voltage is applied
(B) 45.0 A (D) 55.6 A
to a star-connected induction motor, the
phase to neutral voltage being V. The EE-2013
stator resistance, rotor resistance 17. Leakage flux in an induction motor is
referred to the stator, stator leakage (A) Flux that leaks through the machine
reactance, rotor leakage reactance (B) Flux that links both stator and rotor
referred to the stator, and the windings
magnetizing reactance are denoted by (C) Flux that links none of the windings
r , r , x , x and , respectively. The (D) Flux that links the stator winding or
magnitude of starting current of the the rotor winding but not both
motor is given by
(A) 18. A 4-pole induction motor, supplied by a
√( ) ( )
slightly unbalanced three-phase 50HZ
(B)
√ ( ) source, is rotating at 1440 rpm. The
(C) electrical frequency in Hz of the induced
√( ) ( )
negative sequence current in the rotor is
(D) (A) 100 (C) 52
√ ( )
(B) 98 (D) 48
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE-2014 frequency operation of the motor is

19. An 8-pole, 3-phase, 50 Hz induction TRUE?
motor is operating at a speed of 700 rpm. (A) At low frequency, the stator flux
The frequency of the rotor current of the increases from its rated value.
motor in Hz is __________ (B) At low frequency, the stator flux
decreases from its rated value.
20. A 3 phase, 50 Hz, six pole induction motor (C) At low frequency, the motor
has a rotor resistance of 0.1Ω and saturates.
reactance of 0.92 Ω. Neglect the voltage (D) At low frequency, the stator flux
drop in stator and assume that the rotor remains unchanged at its rated value
resistance is constant. Given that the full
load slip is 3%, the ratio of maximum 24. A three-phase slip-ring induction motor,
torque to full load torque is provided with a commutator winding, is
(A) 1.567 (C) 1.948 shown in the figure. The motor rotates in
(B) 1.712 (D) 2.134 clockwise direction when the rotor
windings are closed.
21. A three-phase, 4-pole, self-excited -ph se c, f Hz
induction generator is feeding power to a
load at a frequency f . If the load is
partially removed, the frequency f
rime lip ing nduction
becomes f . If the speed of the generator over otor
f
is maintained at 1500 rpm in both the
cases, then f
(A) f , f Hz nd f f If the rotor winding is open circuited and
(B) f Hz nd f Hz the system is made to run at rotational
(C) f , f Hz nd f f speed f with the help of prime-mover in
(D) f Hz nd f Hz anti-clockwise direction, then the
frequency of voltage across slip rings is
22. A single phase induction motor draws f and frequency of voltage across
12 MW power at 0.6 lagging power. A commutator brushes is f . The values
capacitor is connected in parallel to the of f and f respectively are
motor to improve the power factor of the (A) f + f nd f
combination of motor and capacitor to 0.8 (B) f f nd f
lagging. Assuming that the real and (C) f f nd f + f
reactive power drawn by the motor (D) f + f nd f f
remains same as before, the reactive
power delivered by the capacitor in 25. A single phase induction motor is
MVAR is ______________ provided with capacitor and centrifugal
switch in series with auxiliary winding.
23. In a constant V/f control of induction The switch is expected to operate at a
motor, the ratio V/f is maintained speed of 0.7 Ns, but due to malfunctioning
constant from 0 to base frequency, where the switch fails to operate.
V is the voltage applied to the motor at The torque-speed characteristic of the
fundamental frequency f which of the motor is represented by
following statements relating to low
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( )
Torque
. x
peed
( )
Torque
.
peed
( )
Torque
.
peed
( )
Torque
.
peed
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. B] 4. [Ans. B]
Switch The value of power loss (Cu loss) at full
Rotor
Auxiliary load
winding
=. / 6 4.6 4
Start capacitor ∴ Total losses = 1354.67 + 1002
Ia Im = 2356.67
main
I ∴ Efficiency = = 81%
winding .
V
Start capacitor is used to provide 5. [Ans. D]
phase difference between nd . T . T
If supply terminals are interchanged, Ia T T
and Im will flow in the opposite direction, ( )
so torque will act in the same direction. ∴4 ( ) +
Therefore, the direction of rotation will ( ) 4 +
remain same. ∴ Correct answer is, = 26.79%.
2. [Ans. C] 6. [Ans. A]
= constant (given) Rotor resistance at stand still R = 7.8
⟹ ∝f Synchronous speed
f
4 4 V
rpm
4
Now, T ∝ . / s The slip (s) of rotor with respect to
⟹ . / × forward field
Now, T T (given) s
. 4 . / 4
.
. 66
The slip of rotor with respect to backward
( )
field
( . 66) = 840.6 rpm s . .
Effective rotor resistance
3. [Ans. A]
= 1500 rpm ( s)
.8
T .
( )
( /√ ) .
( . ) ( . ) 7. [Ans. C]
= 63.58 Nm Input power in stator
=√ 4 .8 . kW
Air gap power = 27.71 – 1.5 – 1.2
= 25.01 kW
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8. [Ans. B] 12. [Ans. B]

For max. torque slip = f= 50 Hz
Impedance of main winding
For starting torque Z r + j πf
+ .
πf + . πf . +j π
π
(frequency at maximum torque) Z . +j
f Impedance of auxiliary winding
( )
. Z r + j πf
. +j π
π
Z +j
∴ f
. / . / Current through main winding
=
= 16.7 Hz . +j Z
8 .4
In const V/f control method 8
Current through auxiliary winding
∴ /f 8
∴ f 8 +j Z
= 16.7 × 8 . 8 . 4
= 133.3 volts Taking Vs as the reference
V
9. [Ans. A]
= 1500 rpm
In the direction of rotation of rotor,
therefore, speed of the stator field with
respect to rotor 1500 1410 = 90 rpm Ia
Im
10. [Ans. C]
Im leads Ia the fields created by the two
Slip = = 0.06 current also have same difference thereby
Total power input to induction motor constituting an unbalanced field system.
within = 1800 – 200 = 1600 W The result is the production of the
Power output of induction motor starting torque.
( s) Space – orientation of the fied
6 ( . 6) = 1504 W Field due to Ia
Field due to Im
4
∴ ex 4 √ . 6
11. [Ans. A]
t point if speed ↑ lo d torque lso ↑
The motor rotates in the direction of
nd if speed ↓ lo d torque ↓ hence is
leading phase to lagging phase.
st ble but t if speed ↑ lo d torque ↓ s
In this case, the motor rotates
vice versa an were b is unstable.
anti – clockwise.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. [Ans. A] 17. [Ans. D]

or So it can be neglected from
the circuit. 18. [Ans. B]
v f ( )f
√(r + r ) + (x + x ) f . 4
r (
f . 4) 8Hz
r
V 19. [Ans. *] Range 3.2 to 3.5
Frequency of rotor current of motor sf
f supply frequency
s slip of motor
f
14. [Ans. *]Not matching with IIT keys rpm
8
Stator and rotor magnetic fields rotates at
s
same speed. So difference in speed is zero.
Speed of stator magnetic field is Ns
sf .
(synchronous speed)
f
rpm 20. [Ans. C]
p 6
Rotor speed = ( s) rpm T
So, speed of rotor with respect to stator T +
magnetic field s slip t which m x torque ppe rs
rpm. x
s
s . 8
15. [Ans. D] full lo d slip .
( . ) .
Slip , S = T +. /
. .
o . 8
Where, = synchronous speed T
– rotor speed
As the shaft torque depends upon rotor 21. [Ans. C]
speed therefore the slip also depends on Given data:
shaft torque. , 4 pole self excited induction
And core-losses are independent of slip generator, feeding power at frequency f
Condition 1:-
16. [Ans. B] In induction generator speed of
At standstill , the rotor current is generator 1500rpm
∴ rpm i. e. , rpm
√ +
f if rpm , f Hz
As losses are zero
ut rpm f Hz
∴ Condition 2:-
If load is partially removed and frequency
4 f speed of generator is constant
therefore rpm, but load
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
removed means speed of the RMF is 25. [Ans. C]

increased compared to previous capacitor start induction motor
condition
∴f Hz but f f
in entrifug l
∴ f ,f Hz, f f
winding switch
A.C supply
22. [Ans. *] Range 6.97 to 7.03
At 0.6 lagging power factor
cos  The currents induced in both main,
.6 auxiliary winding with 90 phase
displacement. So that as per induction
.6 principle R.M.F will produce and then
M/c will rotates with some starting
sin .8
.6 torque (T )
At 0.8 lagging power factor  Centrifugal switch is designed here
cos when 70% of reached it will open i.e.,
(re l power rem in s me) auxiliary winding is removed
.8 electrically and M/c will rotates as per
doubled field revolving theory.
.8  Torque slip characteristics as shown in
.6 figure below
.8 ue to m in +
uxili ry + switch
.8 .6
in winding only
.6 .8
Torque
6
23. [Ans. B]
. uxili ry
peed
24. [Ans. A]
 Due to malfunctioning centrifugal
, slip ring induction motor, provided
switch not opened, so that auxiliary
with commutator winding motor rotates
winding also present even motor
in clockwise direction when the rotor
reaches greater than 70% so that
windings are closed. i.e., in motor
torque slip characteristics will change
operation
as shown in figure below
Now rotor winding is open circuited and
the system is made to run at rotational
speed f in anticlockwise direction. In this Torque
condition operates as induction generator
so rotor rotates a head of stator R.M.F and
therefore frequency across slip rings is
f+f f frequency of voltages across
. s
commutator brushes is f f peed
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
D.C. Machine
EE-2006 80rad/s. The rm ture esist nce is . Ω

1. In a DC machine, which of the following nd the field winding resist nce is 8 Ω.
statements is true?
(A) Compensating winding is used for 4. The net voltage across the armature
neutralizing armature reaction while resistance at the time of plugging will be
inter pole winding is used for (A) 6V (C) 240 V
producing residual flux (B) 234V (D) 474 V
(B) Compensating winding is used for
neutralizing armature reaction while 5. The external resistance to be added in the
inter pole winding is used for armature circuit to limit the armature
improving commutation current to 125% of its rated value is
(C) Compensating winding is used for (A) . Ω (C) . Ω
(B) . Ω (D) . Ω
improving commutation while
inter pole winding is used for
EE-2009
neutralizing armature reaction
6. Figure shows the extended view of a
(D) Compensating winding is used for
2 pole dc machine with 10 armature
improving commutation while
conductors. Normal brush positions are
inter pole winding is used for
shown by A and B, placed at the
producing residual flux
inter polar axis. If the brushes are now
shifted, in the direction of rotation, to A'
2. A 220 V DC machine supplies 20 A at
and B' as shown, the voltage waveform
200 V as a generator. The armature
will resemble
resistance is 0.2 ohm. If the machine is
N S
now operated as a motor at same
terminal voltage and current but with the
flux increased by 10% then ratio of motor ’ ’
B A
speed to generator speed is +
+
(A) 0.87 (C) 0.96
(B) 0.95 (D) 1.06
1 2 3 45 ’ ’ ’ 4’ ’
5
EE-2007 ot tion t speed r d/sec
3. The dc motor, which can provide zero
(A) V ’ ’
speed regulation at full load without any
controller is
(A) series t
(B) shunt
. π .4π .6π .8π π
(C) cumulative compound
(D) differential compound (B)
V ’ ’
EE-2008
Statement for Linked Answer Questions
t
4 and 5 . π .4π .6π .8π π
A 240 V, dc shunt motor draws 15 A while
supplying the rated load at a speed of
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
(C) The rotational losses and armature

V ’ ’
reaction are neglected.
Speed (rpm)
1500
t 1400
. π .4π .6π .8π π
(D)
V ’ ’
t torque
0 5
. π .4π .6π .8π π (Nm)
8. The armature resistance of the motor is.

EE-2010 (A) Ω (C) 4.4Ω
7. A separately excited dc machine is (B) .4Ω (D) . Ω
coupled to a 50Hz, three-phase, 4-pole
induction machine as shown in the figure. 9. For the motor to deliver a torque of
The dc machine is energized first and the 2.5Nm at 1400 rpm, the armature voltage
machines rotate at 1600 rpm. to be applied is
Subsequently the induction machine is (A) 125.5V (C) 200V
also connected to a 50Hz, three-phase (B) 193.3V (D) 241.7V
source, the phase sequence being
consistent with the direction of rotation. EE-2011
In steady state, 10. A 220 V, DC shunt motor is operating at a
Induction machine speed of 1440 rpm. The armature
DC machine 50 Hz,
4 pole, 50 Hz resistance is 1.0 Ω and armature current
balanced
three-phase is 10 A. If the excitation of the machine is
supply reduced by 10%, the extra resistance to
be put in the armature circuit to maintain
(A) both machines act as generators the same speed and torque will be
(B) the dc machine acts as a generator, (A) . Ω (C) . Ω
and induction machine acts as a (B) . Ω (D) 8. Ω
motor
(C) the dc machine acts as a motor, and 11. A 4-point starter is used to start and
the induction machine acts a control the speed of a
generator (A) dc shunt motor with armature
(D) both machines act as motors resistance control
(B) dc shunt motor with field weakening
Common Data for Questions 8 and 9 control
A separately excited DC motor runs at (C) dc series motor
1500 rpm under no-load with 200V (D) dc compound motor
applied to the armature. The field voltage
is maintained at its rated value. The speed EE-2012
of the motor, when it delivers at torque of 12. A 220 V, 15 kW, 1000 rpm shunt motor
5 Nm, is 1400 rpm as shown in the figure. with armature resistance of 0.25 Ω, has a
rated line current of 68 A and a rated field
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
current of 2.2 A. The change in field flux 15. A separately excited 300 V DC shunt
required to obtain a speed of 1600 rpm motor under no load runs at 900 rpm
while drawing a line current of 52.8 A and drawing an armature current of 2 A. The
a field current of 1.8 A is armature resistance is 0.5Ω. and leakage
(A) 18.18 % increase inductance is 0.01 H. When loaded, the
(B) 18.18 % decrease armature current is 15 A. Then the speed
(C) 36.36 % increase in rpm is_________
(D) 36.36 % decrease
16. A 15 kW, 230 V dc shunt motor has
EE-2014 armature circuit resistance of 0.4 Ω and
13. A 250 V dc shunt machine has armature field circuit resistance of 230 Ω. At no
circuit resistance of 0.6 Ω and field circuit load and rated voltage, the motor runs at
resistance of 125 Ω. The machine is 1400 rpm and the line current drawn by
connected to 250 V supply mains. The the motor is 5 A. At full load, the motor
motor is operated as a generator and then draws a line current of 70 A. Neglect
as a motor separately. The line current of armature reaction. The full load speed of
the machine in both the cases is 50 A. The the motor in rpm is____________
ratio of the speed as a generator to the
speed as a motor is ___
14. The no-load speed of a 230 V separately

excited dc motor is 1400 rpm. The
armature resistance drop and the brush
drop are neglected. The field current is
kept constant at rated value. The torque
of the motor in Nm for an armature
current of 8 A is __________
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
EE 4. [Ans. D]
1. [Ans. B] 240 V, shunt motor 15A, N = 80 rad/sec
Compensating winding is placed in slots = 0.5 8 Ω
cut out in pole faces such that the axis of 4 . = 234
this winding coincides with the brush plugging + 4 + 4 4 4
axis. The compensating winding
neutralizes the armature mmf directly 5. [Ans. A]
under the pole while in the interpolar Here, .
region, there is incomplete neutralization.
+ .6
To speed up the commutation process,
∴ = 31.1
the reactance voltage must be neutralized
by injecting a suitable polarity dynamical
6. [Ans. A]
(speed) voltage into the commutating
When brushes are shifted in the direction
coil. In order that this injection is
of motor rotation then rise time less than
restricted to commutating coils, narrow
fall time.
interpolar are provided in the interpolar
region.
e ding tip Tr iling tip
2. [Ans. A]
For generator
E=V+ + . = 204
For motor V=E+
E = 200 – 20 × 0.2 = 196 Tr iling tip e ding tip
∴ = 0.87
.
3. [Ans. D]
Speed – current characteristics of DC
motors
Speed orce
Differential compound DC machines is acting as DC motor
n0 When the brush is shifted in the direction
of rotation in the DC motor, field gets
magnetized.
Shunt Due to armature reaction, leading tip of
Cumulative comp. N-pole and S-pole demagnetized.
Series But increase in flux density.
Ia
(Ia)full load Due to magnetized effect of armature
It can seen from the characteristics, speed reaction waveform of will be as
regulation can be zero at full load in the given option (a)
case of differential component dc motor.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
7. [Ans. C] N∝ ⟹ ( )
Synchronous speed .
=1500 rpm
.
So, slip S < 0 [ ]⟹ +
. ( + )
Hence, dc machine acts as a motor and
. ⟹ . Ω
Induction machine acts as a generator.
11. [Ans. B]
8. [Ans. B]
4-point starter is used to control the
At no load , rpm,
speed of shunt motor in field weakening
= 200 V
region.
Assuming ∝ ,
i.e.; above rated speeds.
at N = 14010 rpm
4 In field weakening region field current
will reduce in 3 – point starter holding
86.6 V coil unable to hold the plugges in ON
position.
T 4
86.6
12. [Ans. D]
.
86.6 . 6 . 6 .8
. .8 .8
. . .
. Ω 0 .
1
.
.6 64
9. [Ans. B]
For N = 1400 rpm, 86.6 %decrease= x
equired ‘ ’ +
86.6 + ( . ) * +
Where is function of torque,
6. 6%decre se
To Develop 5 N-m it requires 3.925 A
.
. ( ) 13. [Ans. *] Range 1.22 to 1.32
. Given data:
Dc shunt machine operated as generator
. 6 and motor separately
86.6 + ( . 6 )( . ) .6Ω
= 193.3 V Ω
10. [Ans. A]
Find: ratio of speed as a generator to
Now flux is decreased by 10%, so speed as motor
. n gener tor
Torque is constant so
+ +
⟹ . +
.
+ .6
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
8 . . +
In motor operation: .
k .
48 k
.
88 .4 rpm
48 .6 .
speed s gener tor
∴ 16. [Ans. *] Range 1239 to 1242
peed s motor
[ n shunt ⁄c] +
8 .
. f
.
iled
+
14. [Ans. *] Range 12.45 to 12.65 winding
b
o lo d
k 4
k At no load
4 .4 +
Field current is kept constant at rated
value so k will be same at I = 8A ( t r ted volt ge)
T ki (8) 4
4 4 .4 +
(8 6 / π) in m 8.4
4
At rated load
. m
r +
( ) .4 +
15. [Ans. *] Range 879 to 881
No load .4
k .4
r + , k -
. + k 4 8.4
4 .6 rpm
k
under loaded condition
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Synchronous Machine
EE-2006 EE-2007
1. A synchronous generator is feeding a zero 6. A three-phase synchronous motor
power factor (lagging) load at rated connected to ac main is running at full
current. The armature reaction is load and unity power factor. If its shaft
(A) magnetizing load is reduced by half, with field current
(B) demagnetizing held constant, its new power factor will be
(C) cross – magnetizing (A) unity
(D) ineffective (B) leading
(C) lagging
2. A 3 phase, 400 V, 5 kW, star connected (D) dependent on machine parameters
synchronous motor having an internal
reactance of 10Ω is operating at 7. A 100kVA. 415 V (line), Star-connected
50% load, unity pf. Now, the excitation is synchronous machine generates rated
increased by 1%. What will be the new open circuit voltage of 415 V at field
load in percent, if the power factor is to current of 15A. The short circuit armature
be kept same? Neglect all losses and current at a field current of 10 A is equal
consider linear magnetic circuit. to the rated armature current. The per
(A) 67.9% (C) 51% unit saturated synchronous reactance is
(B) 56.9% (D) 50% (A) 1.731 (C) 0.666
(B) 1.5 (D) 0.577
Common Data Question for 3, 4 and 5
EE-2008
A 4 pole, 50 Hz, synchronous generator
8. Distributed winding and short chording
has 48 slots in which a double layer
employed in AC machines will result in
winding is used. Each coil has 10 turns
(A) Increase in emf and reduction in
and is short pitched by an angle to 6
harmonics.
electrical. The fundamental flux per pole
(B) Increase in emf and increase in
is 0.025 Wb.
harmonics.
(C) Increase in both emf and harmonics.
3. The line-to-line induced emf (in volts), for
(D) Reduction in both emf and
a three phase star connection is
harmonics.
approximately
(A) 808 (C) 1400 Statement for Linked Answer Questions 9
(B) 888 (D) 1538
and 10
A synchronous motor is connected to an
4. The line-to-line induced emf (in volts), for
infinite bus at 1.0pu voltage and draws
a three phase connection is
0.6 pu current at unity power factor. Its
approximately
synchronous reactance is 1.0pu and
(A) 1143 (C) 1617
(B) 1332 (D) 1791 resistance is negligible.
9. The excitation voltage (E) and load angle
5. The fifth harmonic component of phase ( ) will respectively be
emf (in volts), for a three phase star (A) 0.8 pu and 36.86 lag
connection is (B) 0.8pu and 36.86o lead
(A) 0 (C) 281 (C) 1.17 pu and 30.96° lead
(B) 269 (D) 808 (D) 1.17 pu and 30.96° lag
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
10. Keeping the excitation voltage same, the performed on it with 90% of the rated
load on the motor is increased such that current flowing in its both LV and HV
the motor current increase by 20%. The windings, the measured loss is 81 W. The
operating power will become transformer has maximum efficiency
(A) 0.995 lagging (C) 0.791 lagging when operated at
(B) 0.995 leading (D) 0.848 leading (A) 50.0% of the rated current.
(B) 64.0% of the rated current.
EE-2009 (C) 80.0% of the rated current.
11. A field excitation of 20 A in a certain (D) 88.8% of the rated current.
alternator results in an armature current
of 400A in short circuit and a terminal 15. The angle in the swing equation of a
voltage of 2000V on open circuit. The synchronous generator is the
magnitude of the internal voltage drop (A) Angle between stator voltage and
within the machine at a load current current
of 200A is (B) Angular displacement of the rotor
(A) 1V (C) 100V with respect to the stator
(B) 10V (D) 1000V
(C) Angular displacement of the stator
mmf with respect to a synchronously
EE-2011
rotating axis.
12. The direct axis and quadrature axis
(D) Angular displacement of an axis fixed
reactances of a salient pole alternator are
to the rotor with respect to a
1.2 p.u and 1.0 p.u respectively. The
synchronously rotating axis.
armature resistance is negligible. If this
alternator is delivering rated kVA at upf
EE-2014
and at rated voltage then its power angle
16. A star connected 400 V, 50 Hz, 4 pole
is
synchronous machine gave the following
(A) 30° (C) 60°
(B) 45° (D) 90° open circuit and short circuit test results:
Open circuit test: = 400 V
13. A three-phase, salient pole synchronous (rms, line-to-line) at field current, = 2.3 A
motor is connected to an infinite bus. It is Short circuit test: = 10 A (rms, phase)
operated at no load at normal excitation. at field current, = 1.5 A
The field excitation of the motor is first The value of per phase synchronous
reduced to zero and then increased in the impedance in Ω at rated voltage
reverse direction gradually. Then the is____________
armature current
(A) Increase continuously 17. A three phase synchronous generator is
(B) First increases and then decreases to be connected to the infinite bus. The
steeply lamps are connected as shown in the
(C) First decreases and then increases figure for the synchronization. The phase
steeply sequence of bus voltage is R-Y-B and that
(D) Remains constant of incoming generator voltage is R'-Y'-B'.
EE-2013
14. A single-phase transformer has no-load
loss of 64 W, as obtained from an open-
circuit test. When a short-circuit test is
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Y 19. In a synchronous machine, hunting is

predominantly damped by
(A) mechanical losses in the rotor
Y ~
(B) iron losses in the rotor
~ ~ (C) copper losses in the stator
(D) copper losses in the rotor
nfinite ncoming
us ener tor 20. A non-salient pole synchronous generator
It was found that the lamps are becoming having synchronous reactance of 0.8 pu is
dark in the sequence - - . It means supplying 1 pu power to a unity power
that the phase sequence of incoming factor load at a terminal voltage of 1.1 pu.
generator is Neglecting the armature resistance, the
(A) opposite to infinite bus and its angle of the voltage behind the
frequency is more than infinite bus synchronous reactance with respect to
(B) opposite to infinite bus but its the angle of the terminal voltage in
frequency is less than infinite bus degrees is ____
(C) same as infinite bus and its frequency
is more than infinite bus
(D) same as infinite bus and its frequency
is less than infinite bus
18. A 20-pole alternator is having 180

identical stator slots with 6 conductors in
each slot. All the coils of a phase are in
series. If the coils are connected to realize
single-phase winding, the generated
voltage is . If the coils are reconnected
to realize three-phase star-connected
winding, the generated phase voltage is
. Assuming full pitch, single-layer
winding, the ratio / is
(A) /√ (C) √
(B) / (D)
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
1. [Ans. B] cos α / cos 8 = 0.951

Xs Ia n double layer wdg.
no. of coils = no. of slots
Ef ~ Vt no. of turns/ph = 6
4.44 f T
jIa Is 4.44 . 6
Vt . .
= 808 V
Ia ∴ ( ) √ 8 8
Ef > Vt, the generator is overexcited. = 1400V
Therefore armature – reaction is
demagnetizing in nature i.e. ar opposes 4. [Ans. C ]
f. For two phase scott connection
Slots/pole/ph 6
2. [Ans. A]
Truns/ph 4
7.21
√
Slot angle =
or Synchronous Motor,
( cos ) + ( sin ) sin( )
.
∴ E = √. / +( .6) 6 sin . /
√
6
= 2333.729 cos ( ) .
If these is (0.01) increase in , then
4.44f T
becomes,
. . = 236 4.44 . .
.
∴ =√
= 1143 v
=√ 6 (4 /√ ) = 48.93 j 4 v
∴ 4.8
.
∴ % load = = 67.86%
.
4 v
3. [Ans. C]
√ √ 4
4 pole, 50 Hz, no. of slot = S = 48
double layer winding, 1 coil contains 10 = 1616.45 V
turns, α(short pitched) 6 , /pole =
0.025 mwb. 5. [Ans. A]
4.44 f T Pitch factor due to 5th harmonic
component
slot /pole/ph = =4 6
( ) cos ( ) cos
slot/pole = = 12
[as pitch factor is zero, induced emf due
slot angle = =
to 5th harmonic component is zero]
( / )
= 0.957
( / )
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
6. [Ans. B] 8. [Ans. D]
Ia Xs Induced emf 4.44k k fT
As KP & kd v lues re less th n ‘ ’ for
distributed & short pitched winding, the
Vt ~ Ef
induced emf reduces.
To eliminate higher order harmonics we
use distributed winding and to eliminate
Neglecting armature resistance Ra
the dominant harmonics i.e., 5th & 7th we
Vt=Ef +jIa Xs
use pitched winding.
Ia2
Ia1 Vt 9. [Ans. D]
jIa2Xs V = 1 ∠0 pu
.6∠
Reduced load
jIa1Xs Ef at shaft
z +j +j ∠ pu
Ef load at shaft ∠ ∠ .6∠ ∠
It can be seen from the phasor diagram E∠ . 66 ∠ . 6 pu (It is lagging)
that, when load is reduced at shaft ∴ excitation voltage = 1.17 pu
keeping field current constant the new ∴ lo d ngle ( ) . 6
power factor becomes leading.
10. [Ans. A]
7. [Ans. C] Let power factor = cos l gging
Saturation of field poles occur for a field .6 . pu
current equal to for which rated open ∠ j ∠
circuited voltage is obtained. (cos + j sin )
∴ for is ( ∠ j (cos j sin )
)
j . (cos j sin )
for ( ) ( . sin ) j . cos
( . sin ) + ( . cos )
∴ ( ) . + . sin .44 sin +
√ 4
for 8.68 . cos
4 . + . .44 sin
∴Z ( ) . 88 ohm sin . 8
8.68
( ) Z . . 88 . 6
6.66 cos . l gging
.
p.u Z ( ) .666
11. [Ans. D]
2nd Method
Internal resistance = Ω
(4 ⁄√ )
Z ( ) ⁄ph . 4 Internal voltage drop = 5×200 = 1000V
8.68
( ) (Z ⁄ph) .6 8 .
.6 8 12. [Ans. B]
Z ( . ) .666 ( )
(4 ⁄√ ) T n
( )
p. u p. u Power factor
angle = 0°
x . p. u x p. u r
T n ⟹ 4
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
13. [Ans. B] 17. [Ans. A]

As field current reduces the flux will start In Synchronization [In figure lights are
reducing, to keep this flux constant the connected in correct position
armature draws high current from bus. At i.e., y y, ]
zero field current the motor acts as 1. Observe the lights which are
synchronous reluctance motor in this connected across switches, they
case the magnetizing current fully taken should beat, first get brighter and
from bus, if we increase field current in then dim as the phasor for generator
reverse direction to keep flux constant nd bus respectively shift. f ‘ ’ lights
motor draws more current. During this beats concurrently, the phase
process the load angle increases at one sequence is correct. Else if lights beat
point the reversed field force dominates out of phase, one pair of phases
reluctance torque and rotor slips one pole should be reversed
pitch and align to opposite pole. The 2. Adjust now the prime mover to
instant aligns to opposite pole the flux slowly increase/decrease the speed of
will be very high to reduce this flux incoming generator. One should
current drops steeply to synchronous observe a slow beat of the light
motor value. Here torque is reluctance brightness
+ synchronous motor torque. 3. When the lamps beats slowly, the
switches should be closed when the
14. [Ans. C] lights are extinguished
Cu.Loss at 90% load = 81W In given data lamps are becoming dark in
Cu load at any X fractional load the sequence it means that
full lo d cu. loss phase sequence of incoming generator is
full lo d cu. loss opposite to infinite bus and its frequency
( . )
is more than infinite bus.
For maximum efficiency
x ( ) 64
18. [Ans. D]
x √ .8 Given data:
20 pole alternator
8 % of r ted lo d
Total number of turns (T) = 8 6
or T ph se spre d
15. [Ans. D]
8 (mv)
T
16. [Ans. *] Range 14.5 to 15.5 or ph se spre d
( t . ) 4 ( ) 6
4
h se n winding gener ted volt ge
√
. 4
( t . ) winding gener ted ph se volt ge
. √
4 .
in Ω(per ph se) We know that
√ .
T
. 6Ω
where Generated voltage in phase
manner
k Distribution factor
T Number of turns per phase
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
( ) sin 8 / 6 T 20. [Ans. *] Range 32.4 to 34.0

.
( ) sin 6 / 8 T/ (pu)
(pu)
sin (pu) cos
sin /
. ∠
. ( )
power f ctory unity
∠ . ∠
. ∠
19. [Ans. D] .8∠
In a synchronous machine, hunting is ∠ . ∠ . ∠
predominantly damped by damper ∠ . + . j
winding in other words when hunting .
t n
occurs in a system as per induction .
.468
principle a currents is induced in damper
winding those will give either induction
generator torque or motor torque. Which
is in phase/opposite phase to rotation as
per options by copper losses in rotor
hunting is damped because induced
currents will give losses also. In case of
salient pole synchronous machine.
In case of cylindrical generator no
damper winding present rotor core itself
act as good damper bar and induced
current called eddy currents.
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Principles of Electro Mechanical Energy Conversion
EE-2007
1. The electromagnetic torque Te of a drive,
and its connected load torque TL are as
shown below. Out of the operating points
A, B, C and D, the stable ones are
(A)
Te
T TL
Speed
(B) Te
T
TL
B
Speed
(C)
Te
T C
TL
Speed
(D)
Te
T
D
TL
Speed
(A) A, C, D (C) A, D
(B) B, C (D) B, C, D
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD

1. [Ans. A] So, rotor accelerates and speed increases.
Accelerating torque = T T T It speed increases due to some
T Te disturbances
TL T T
T T T
o, rotor decelerates and speed decreases
A
o, point A, C, D are stable.
T
T
Speed
T
T C B
Te
T Speed
At point B,
Speed T T
T Te T T T
If speed decreases, due to some
disturbance
D
T T
T T T T
So rotor decelerates, and rotor speed
Speed keeps on decreasing.
AT points A, C, D If speed increases.
T T T T
T T T T T T
It due to some disturbance speed Rotor accelerates, and rotor speed keeps
decreases on increasing.
T T So, point is unstable
T T T
th th th
SURYAS TECHNO WORLD
Special Machines
EE-2007
1. A three-phase, three-stack, variable
reluctance step motor has 20 poles on
each rotor and stator stack , The step
angle of this step motor is
(A) (C)
(B) 6 (D) 8
EE-2008
2. In a stepper motor, the detent torque
means
(A) minimum of the static torque with
the phase winding excited.
(B) maximum of the static torque with
the phase winding excited.
(C) minimum of the static torque with
the phase winding unexcited.
(D) maximum of the static torque with
the phase winding unexcited
1. [Ans. B]
Step angle = 6
2. [Ans. D]
Detent Torque (or) Restraining Torque is
the maximum Load Torque that can be
kept on motor shaft in an unexcited
motor without causing continuous
rotation.
th th th

Gate Question Bank PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Gate Question Bank PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SURYAS TECHNO WORLD

SURYAS TECHNO WORLD

GATE QUESTION BANK

GATE QUESTION BANK Contents

#2. Network Theory 149 – 216

#3. Signals & systems 217 – 275

#4. Control Systems 276 – 340

#5. Analog Circuits 341 – 421

GATE QUESTION BANK Contents

#6. Digital Circuits 422 – 472

#7. EMT 473 – 483

#8. Measurement 484 – 516

#9. Power Systems 517 – 553

#10. Power Electronics 554 – 585

#11. Electrical Machines 586 - 621

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

os sin written in the form 0 1 and 0 1. What is

4. Eigen values of a matrix 9. The matrix [ ] has one Eigenvalue

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

10. For what value of a, if any, will the ME – 2012

(A) (B) (C) (D)

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

20. One of the Eigenvectors of the matrix 2. Consider a non-homogeneous system of

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

(A) 915 (C) 1640

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

4. Let A be a 4x4 matrix with Eigenvalues

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

CS – 2011 13. The value of the dot product of the

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

3. Given the matrix 0 1 the ECE – 2008

(A) 0 1 (C) 0 1 (A) 3, 3 + 5j, 6 j

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

ECE – 2010 ECE – 2014

(A) 0 (C) 2 20. The system of linear equations

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

(C) If A is real, the Eigenvalues of A and

22. The maximum value of the determinant (C) [ ] [ ] [ ]

2. For the matrix p = [ ] , one of (B) [ ] (D) [ ]

the Eigenvalues is equal to 2 . Which of

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

Statement for Linked Questions 9 and 10. (A) A A+ A = A (C) A+ A = 

A=0 1 ⃗x (x x ) . Then, which one of the

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

(B) 0 1 and 0 1 23. Two matrices A and B are given below:

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

 2 1  1 0   1 1  10. Let P 0 be a 3 3 real matrix. There exist

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

(A) ( 𝑗,𝑗) (C) ( )

Answer Keys and Explanations

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

(Taking 2 common from each row)

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

( )  3×3 Using Gauss elimination we reduce this to

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

17. [Ans. 16]

13. [Ans. D] 20. [Ans. 88]

16. [Ans. 0.5]

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

GATE QUESTION BANK Mathematics

{ [1, 1, 0]T , [1,0, 1 ]T } is a linearly Only one matrix has an Eigenvalue of 1

Now as long as – 5 0, 9. [Ans. A]